
Copyright^ . 



COPHHGHT DEPOSIT 



THE WONDERS OF THE UNIVERSE, 

WHAT SCIENCE SAYS OF GOD. 



Signs, Signals, Symbols Seldom Seen, Science Says 
Sing Silent Songs op the Glory op 



THE MAKER OF FIVE HUNDRED MILLION SUNS 



THE SCIENTIFIC DISCOVERIES OF OUR DAYS IN THE LANGUAGE 
OF THE PEOPLE. 



I. The Wonders of The Heavens. 
II. The Wonders of The Solar System. 

III. The Wonders of The Earth. 

IV. The Wonders of Life. 

V. The Wonders of Human Life. 



BY 



JAS. L. MEAGHEK, D.D., 

Member of the Association for the Advancement of Science. President of the 
Christian Press Association. 



NEW YORK . 

THE CHRISTIAN PRESS ASSOCIATION 

26 BARCLAY STREET 



a*V 



Copyright, 1909, 

BY 

CHRISTIAN PRESS ASSOCIATION PUBLISHING COMPANY. 






©CI.A256218 



CORRECTIONS. 



After correcting and returning printer's proofs, I was 
called away for months, the typesetter neglected to make 
the corrections, and in the mean time the book was 
printed with a few mistakes in English and composition 
which do not affect the meanings. 

Page. Line. For. Read. 



3 


5 


15 


23 


4 


27 


54 


66 


6 


18 


81 


181 


14 


28 


486 


485 


24 


19 


the 


The 


32 


12 


reveal 


Reveals 


43 


30 


their 


the 


58 


21 


286,000 


186,000 


62 


26 


reigns 


reign 


66 


1 


CLQUSTERED 


CLUSTERED 


106 


4 


compare 


compares 


113 


1 


idea 


ideas 


121 


16 


were 


was 


121 


29 


is till 


until 


121 


37 


called 


calls 


124 


27 


Neptune 


Jupiter 


125 


3 


waters 


water 


125 


29 


there 


that 


129 


26 


475,692 miles 


475,692,000 


131 


12 


the then earth 


then the earth 


142 


24 


which 


who 


164 


1 


JUIPTER 


JUPITER 


168 


33 


crack 


cracks 


172 


27 


measures 


measure 


178 


30 


falls 


fall 


180 


32 


specra 


spectra 


180 


32 


he 


the 


189 


1 


then 


there 


192 


35 


are 


where 


195 


1 


Leave out paeli 


:c 


196 


24 


traverses 


traverse 


223 


18 


Leave out B — 




230 


28 


set 


sat 



Page. 


Line. 


Foe. 


Read. 


233 


7 


with 


then 


246 


11 


methematities 


mathematics 


254 


1 


THREEGASES 


THREE GASES 


263 


18 


is 


are 


266 


13 


have 


has 


268 


20 


reflect 


reflects 


300 


32 


plains 


plain 


308 


29 


was 


were 


311 


22 


feet- 


miles 


314 


19 


cools 


cool 


333 


20 


being sin 


beings in 


335 


29 


its 


their 


336 


1 


its 


the 


344 


12 


such an variety 


varieties 


352 


21 


have 


has 


367 


30 


supplies 


applies 


367 


31 


and 


his 


368 


24 


they change 


it changes 


386 


35 


while 


with 


407 


14 


remains 


remain 


419 


28 


Christ 


Mary 


422 


35 


beginnings 


beginning 


423 


30 


the child 


children 


431 


16 


forms 


form 


431 


24 


other set 


other sets 


434 


1 


BRASON 


REASON" 


441 


21 


they 


some 


469 


2 


sets 


set 


487 


30 


philosophy 


psychology 


488 


11 


form mind 


are reason 


488 


13 


mind 


it 


498 


9 


reason 


mind 


498 


9 


mind 


reason 


506 


9 


which 


whom 


507 


7 


is a repitition 




507 


26 


have 


had 


513 


27 


knows 


reasons 


513 


36 


His 


their 


521 


11 


His 


them 


521 


11 


are 


is 


523 


23 


cut out anvil of 


ear 467 


527 


29 


of 


by 


529 


42 


415 


488 



CONTENTS. 



A "CRANK IN THE NATIONAL OBSERVATORY." 

An infidel's state of mind — he believes only what he sees. Instru- 
ments used in an observatory. How unreasonable infidels are. 
The opinions of a lady, of a professor of chemistry, of a lawyer, 
the writer's words to the scientists. The plans of this 
work Pages 15 

SECTION I.— THE WONDERS OF THE HEAVENS. 

CHAPTER I.— THE FOUNDATIONS OF THE UNIVERSE. 

The Milky Way, a wheel of light round the heavens, its distance 
from us. Time light takes coming from its suns. The millions 
of suns composing it. Sir John Herschel on the Milky Way. 
What the learned say. The shape of the great ring, which 
incloses all creation. The extent of the universe. The con- 
stellations and nebulae within the Milky Way. The universe 
bounded, not infinite in extent, shaped like two wheels of stars 
inclosing three concentric star-globes, with earth and solar 
system in the middle. Matter, made as fine dust, by weight 
condensed into globes of fire. Suns now in process of forma- 
tion. A glance at the heavens through a great telescope. All 
suns in motion following laws of higher mathematics. A won- 
derful double drift of suns — two Milky Ways uniting. Proofs 
of creation. The universe will go on forever Pages 24-48 

CHAPTER II.— THE MILLIONS OF SUNS, AND THE DIS- 
TANCES SEPARATING THEM. 

The five hundred millions of suns — Why were so many made ? In- 
fluence of star-light and heat on living organisms. What is a 
million ? The enormous distances of the suns. How these dis- 
tances were measured. Light traveling 186,000 miles a second 

3 



4: CONTENTS. 

takes from 400 years 3 months to 1,800 years to reach us. 
61 of the Swan constellation the nearest star. Light takes 45 
years to come from the north star. A Centauri, Sirius, 
Rigel, B. Aurigae, etc. A journey beyond the limits of the 
universe into everlasting darkness, etc. Pages 49-65 

CHAPTER III.— SINGLE, DOUBLE, CLUSTERED, CHANG- 
ING AND COLORED SUNS. 

Nearly all stars are double, triple or clusters revolving round each 
other. How suns break up into other suns. Suns of different 
shapes. Why made that way ? Size of the suns, their bright- 
ness. How suns are catalogued. The numbers in each cata- 
logue. Some estimate 1,000 million suns. Suns moving in 
streams. How the suns were made of scattered dusts and 
gases. Suns of varied colors caused by different heat. How 
suns grow. Suns with changing light. Some blaze out sud- 
denly, then disappear. Causes of these changes. Suns with 
dark companions like planets. The materials composing the 
suns. Extraordinary changing suns. A new sun. Algol, 
Castor, V. Pupis, Mira, etc. Their size, materials and com- 
panions. Suns in different stages of development. White, 
yellow, orange, red, dark-red and dark suns. Sirian, Solar, 
Fluted and dim suns. Suns now being built up of materials 
falling into them. Helium, hydrogen, iron, calcium, magne- 
sium, sodium, nickel, barium, etc., in the suns. Suns formed of 
condensing nebulae. Suns with different degrees of heat. 
Birth and death of suns. Colored suns like jewels of the Al- 
mighty Pages 54^90 

CHAPTER IV.— FALLING STARS, COMETS, AND NEBULA 
BUILDING SUNS AND WORLDS. 

No up or down in the sky. Falling stars or meteorites. What if a 
great one struck earth. How meteorites keep up heat and light 
of suns. Metals composing falling stars. How orbs are torn 
asunder. Comets, their laws and movements. What they are 
composed of. If a comet struck the earth. Nebulae, their 
number and where found. Their forms. How they make suns 
before our eyes. The most famous nebulae. Astounding 
cataclysms. The metals composing nebulae. Why they shine, 
etc., etc., Pages 91-110. 



CONTENTS. 5 

SECTION II.— THE WONDERS OF THE SOLAR 
SYSTEM. 

CHAPTER V.— THE WAY OUR EARTH, SUN AND THE 
PLANETS WERE MADE. 

Preparations for making the sun and planets. How creation took 
place. Origin of natural forces in weight. Poets on creation. 
Babylonian Tablets. Proofs of God. Where God made matter. 
Heat a mode of motion. Mathematical proofs of God's design 
in making the planets. Lost in figures. The gases, mists, and 
metallic clouds at creation. The origin of movement. The 
Solar System in the beginning. How weight and movement 
form planets and suns. How Neptune, Uranus, Jupiter, the 
Asteroids, Mars, Earth, Yenus and Mercury with their moons 
were made. Titius' law of distances of planets from the sun. 
Matter alone without a Guide would not form the planets, etc. , 
etc Pages 111-132. 

CHAPTER YI. —ARCTURUS, ROUND WHICH OUR SUN 
AND EARTH REYOLYE. 

All suns in motion. The Solar System going round Arcturus. Its 
velocity. Size of Arcturus. Its position amid the constella- 
tions. Spectrum and metals composing Arcturus. Path of 
Solar System round Arcturus. Great winters and summers. 
In 25,000 years we will swing round Arcturus. A year of 104,- 
000 years. The cause of the Glacial periods and ice-caps. A 
spring of 18,000 years. Will tremendous heat burn up our 
world ? Pages 133-143. 

CHAPTER YIL— THE SUN, AND HIS TREMENDOUS 
FORCES. 

Influences of the sun. Why he was worshiped, How we measure 
heavenly bodies. The exact distance of the sun. Size and 
mass of sun. The heat and light he gives. Why so much 
carbon on surface of the sun. Tremendous forces on the sun. 
Rays of electricity. Yast eruptions on sun. How his light and 
heat are kept up. The 80 different metals in the sun. The 
photosphere, chromosphere, corona and zodiacal light. Per- 
turbations. A vast ocean of fire. Photographs of sun surface. 
Influence of sun on atmosphere. Causes of spots on sun. 



b CONTENTS. 

Their variations in regular periods. Causes of hot, dry and wet 
seasons Pages 144-163. 

CHAPTER VIII.— kARS, VENUS, JUPITER, SATURN, 
URANUS AND NEPTUNE. 

Has Mars inhabitants ? The polar ice -caps. The great difficulties 
of observing Mars. The desert surface of Mars. Red, brown, 
orange, green and colored rocks. Discovery of canals and spots. 
Why no organisms could live on Mars. Names of regions. 
Mars' surface dead deserts. The mystery of the canals. They 
appear and disappear with waters of melting ice-caps. The 
difficulties of living in high rare atmosphere. "What a man 
could do on Mars. Venus, morning and evening star. Her at- 
mosphere, light and rotation. Difficulties of observing Venus. 
Mercury has no air or water. Turns one face to the sun. Ju- 
piter has no inhabitants. Metals composing it. Saturn's dis- 
tance from sun. His seasons. Is red hot. Its atmosphere of 
metallic vapors. Its wonderful rings and what they are made 
of. His ten moons. Discovery of Uranus Pages 164-81. 

CHAPTER IX.— THE MOON, AND WHAT WE SEE ON HER 
SURFACE. 

The moon in poetry. Origin of her worship. Excitement when 
first seen through telescope. Diameter, surface, weight, mass 
and distance of moon. How moon was jerked out of the Pacific 
Ocean. Light white rocks of moon. Her density, center of 
gravity. Birth of our satellite — marks of this great cataclysm. 
How American continent slid over. Origin of heat of earth and 
moon. How her surface was formed. Liquid geysers of fire. 
A dead, cold, waterless, airless planet. Her surface seen through 
a great telescope. Two theories of cause of formations. Why 
she does not fall down. Centripetal and centrifugal forces bal- 
ance. Names of regions on moon. The mountains, plains and 
their names. Doerfel, Curtius, Casatus, Newton, Apennines, 
Caucasus, Alps, Aristillus. A lady's face on the moon. What 
caused the bright streaks ? The craters. Copernicus, how 
formed. Tycho you see with naked eye. Nothing lives on 

moon. Eclipses. Work moon does on earth, etc 

Pages 182-207. 



CONTENTS. 7 

SECTION III.— THE WONDERS OF THE EARTH. 
CHAPTER X.— ARE THE STARS INHABITED ? 

"Wild theories about life on the stars. Only a yellow sun can sustain 
life. No life can be in the Milky Way. Only after it begins to 
cool can a sun sustain life. Few yellow suns but all are double. 
Our sun alone can sustain life. What a man would weigh on 
different orbs. Earth's inclination of poles causes the seasons. 
Man alone stands heat and cold. Rest and sleep. Five condi- 
tions required for life only found here. Bad effects of ' ' drink. " 
Extremes of heat and cold which kill. Mass of earth just right 

for life. Earth unique among the orbs for life, etc 

Pages 208-222. 

CHAPTER XI.— THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SCIENCE OF 
THE STARS. 

How astronomy began in Babylonia. Nimrod. Why they built the 
Tower of Babel. Origin of name of Babylon. Pillars of Her- 
cules. The first observatories. The Pyramids opposite Cairo. 
Pyramid of Cheops. Temples as telescopes. Ancient Egyp- 
tians and Peruvians as astronomers. Astronomy among the 
Greeks. Druids *as astronomers. Remarkable astronomical 
ruins in the British Isles. The theory of crystal spheres upset 
by Father Copernicus' system. His birth and education. Canon 
of the cathedral. His trials. Persecuted by his bishop. His 
book — dedicated to the Pope. Birth of Galileo. His studies 
and inventions. He mixed science and religion. Condemned 
only for contempt of court — not for science. Science and re- 
ligion, two sources of truth. Invention of the telescope. His 
death. Birth and life of Kepler. His famous laws. Tycho 
Brahe born. His life, Sir Isaac Newton. His discovery of 
gravitation. His discoveries of nature's secrets. His deep re- 
ligious sentiments, etc Pages 223-247. 

CHAPTER XII.— WHAT IS MATTER MADE OF ? TWO OLD 
THEORIES. 

Matter and form, or extension and energy. Luminous ether dis- 
cribed by Greeks and Schoolmen. The foundations of matter. 
Physical and living forces. How metals act. The atomic 



O CONTENTS. 

theory, abandoned by Greeks, revived by Lavoisier. Theory 
of atoms described. Origin of natural forces. Universal gravi- 
tation and its laws. Nature founded on mathematics. Dis- 
covery of radio-active metals. How radium acts. How Edison 
showed bones in writer's hand. Conduct of radium's three 
gases. Discovery of polonium, etc Pages 248-255. 

CHAPTER XIII.— THE PHYSICAL FORCES— WEIGHT, HEAT, 
LIGHT, ELECTRICITY, ETC. 

Nature founded on mathematics. Weight keeps things together. 
The beginnings of chemistry. How materials unite and dis- 
solve according to weight. What air, ozone and water are com- 
posed of. Chemical proportions. Weight and volumes of 
gases. Dalton's laws. How materials range themselves unit- 
ing. Did little materials pass through universities ? Wonders 
of crystals. How precious gems are made. Laws of crystalliza- 
tion. What is light? Length of waves of light. Laws of 
light. Why light passes through some bodies and not through 
others. Light, heat, and electricity are waves of ether from 100 
to 789 trillions of beats a second. What causes colors. Eternal 
choirs singing silent songs of glory. The seven primary colors 
and what causes them. The retina of the eye. Why lenses 
magnify. Why man's attention was called to the rainbow after 
the flood. The wonders of the spectroscope. How we find out 
the materials in sun and stars. The origin of electricity. Its 
development. Velocity and wonders. How time is sent out 
at noon all over the country. Eastern, Central, Mountain and 
Western time, etc Pages 256-276. 

CHAPTER XIV.— HOW THE PHYSICAL FORCES PREPARED 
OUR WORLD FOR LIVING ORGANISMS. 

How the orbs got their three movements. The universe like a 
mighty clock. Why the world was prepared for life. Size and 
shape of our world. Its density. Awful upheavals on her sur- 
face. Size of the great oceans. Cause of earthquakes. Why 
earth is flattened at the poles. Why oceans cover three- 
quarters of earth surface. Amount of water on earth surface. 
Influence of water on climate, Why more water than land. 
Suffering from want of water. The vast floods which formed 
the soils. The atmosphere. Its influence on climate. Prop- 
erties of air. If there were no continents or mountains. 



Contents. & 

Where the gases forming air and water were made. If con- 
tinents were in other places. Gulf Stream. Elevations change 
climate. The Adirondack mountains. The three great ice- 
caps. "Why winters are getting warmer, summer cooler. Re- 
mains of life on mountains. Remains of extinct plants and 
beasts. '* Day " in the Bible. The seven days of Genesis great 
epochs of time. Meaning of "evening and morning." Light 
before the sun was made. The beginnings of geology. The 
geological epochs and their remains. Man made after the world 
was prepared for him. The three great plains of earth's sur- 
face. What is a desert ? Desert lakes dried up. Beauties of 
the Mississippi, St. Lawrence, Colorado and Columbia. Dr. 
Hayes in the Arctic regions. Plants and animals of geological 
times, etc., etc Pages 277-308. 

SECTION IV.— THE WONDERS OF LIFE. 
CHAPTER XV.— NATURE'S BEAUTIFUL BALANCES. 

Why earth's axis inclines 23£ degrees. What would happen if it 
were otherwise — life would be impossible. If days were a year 
long, or 50 or 100 hours long. If more or less air or water. If 
earth had more or less matter life would cease. What keeps 
light, heat and electricity from pushing earth into space ? The 
utility of deserts. What makes California so even tempered 
and fertile. Meaning of some of its names. Causes of whirl- 
winds, cyclones, etc. A greater or less heat would end life. 
How the climate is balanced. Interior heat of earth. How 
water rises into the air. Gases in air, food of plants and animals. 
Atmosphere just right for life. How tunnels are dug under 
water. How clothes keep us warm. Life confined to band 
round earth. Winds, their causes. Dust particles gather rain- 
drops. Why floods washed the earth. Why more rain falls on 
mountains. Influence of forests on rainfall and climate. Why 
rivers grow larger. Why winds blow from West. How a 
thunder-storm is formed, etc Pages 309-332 

CHAPTER XVI.— WHAT IS LIFE? THE WONDERS OF 
LIVING ORGANISMS. 

Life is movement from within. Origin of life. A study of life. 
Life a created principle with power of acting. How organisms 
differ from minerals. Chemical composition of plants and 



1 CONTENTS. 

animals. Cell life, Powers of plants. How gunpowder is 
made. The wonders of protoplasm. How living structures 
are built. Products of plants. The minerals in organisms. 
The proteids. Souls whole and complete in every part of 
organisms. Mistakes of scientists. Now plants get nitrogen. 
Ammonia formed in air. Nature's balances. How plants grow, 
etc Pages 333-351 



CHAPTER XVII.— THE INSTINCTS OF PLANTS. 

How creatures rise one above another. Life directed by instincts. 
Plants built in pipes. Plants live longest. The giant trees of 
California. How plants generate. The generating germs of 
plants and beasts. Each plant a book. Wisdom of plants. 
The most valuable plant. How sap circulates and plants grow. 
How plants scatter their seeds. Why burs stick to your 
clothes. How beasts plant seeds. How seeds fly. The fungus 
family. Cause of eczema. How seeds of golden-rod, milk- 
weed, cat-tail, sycamore, anemone, maple, elder, ash spread their 
seeds. The evergreen seeds. Bear-grass, compass, ragweed 
seeds. Tumble weed, cherries, etc. Seeds sailing as boats. 
How plants get to islands. Water-lilies. How prolific are 
plants. Plants which throw their seeds. Crane's-bill. Flowers 
keep their seeds till time to sow them. How some animals 
scatter seeds, etc., etc Pages 352-366. 



CHAPTER XVIIL— THE INSTINCTS OF ANIMALS. 

Each animal a living machine. Mechanics of face, of block and 
pulley, steam engine, safety valves, ball and socket joints, force 
pump in beast and man. The heart and blood circulation. 
How Adam's apple controls the blood. The wonderful valve 
in throat. The six levels in the head. The spine. How we 
learned to build tunnels under water. The first paper makers. 
Animals know better than men some things. The wisdom of 
the goose. Why birds go South in fall. Some tame beasts. 
Why males and females. Why people marry. Why man 
and woman differ. Two remarkable organs in each cause the 
change. Why God made Eve from Adam's rib. An image of 
marriage among animals. Why the young are loved. Wisdom 
of beasts, etc., etc Pages 267-377. 



CONTENTTS. 11 

CHAPTER XIX.— LOOKING THROUGH A WINDOW DOWN 
IN OCEAN DEEPS. 

What is the ocean ? The Sanctuary of the sea. What an aquarium 
shows. Studies of fish-life. The glass-bottomed boat on the 
Pacific. The wonders of the kelpian forest. A wonderful 
blending of colors. Fish life of the Pacific. The wonders of 
fish life in colors and forms. Most precious gems surpassed in 
beauty. The bottom of the ocean. The works of a Great 
Artist. Looking down 40 ft. Schools of wonderful creatures. 
What we saw 60 ft. deep. Fish with electric lights. Down 
162 ft. Dangers of marine divers. Down below sunlight. A 
wrecked ship 326 deep with horrid drowned men. Creatures 
have lamps to light the darkness. Brought to surface they 
burst, etc., etc Pages 378-390. 

SECTION V.— THE WONDERS OF HUMAN LIFE. 

CHAPTER XX.— THE THEORY OF EVOLUTION. WHAT 
ARE ITS FOUNDATIONS ? 

What evolution teaches. Its origin. Its half educated founders. 
How it leads to infidelity and the denial of God. The con- 
tinual changes of scientific theories. Why evolution spread. 
Ancient peculiar ideas of origin of life. The founders of evolu- 
tion. Absolutely no proof of evolution in past or present. 
Remains of past epochs offer no evidence, Cell structure shows 
its falseness. Man's body and powers against it. Four chasms 
nature cannot bridge. The great divisions of animals. The 
species of insects. Instincts of plants and animals against it. 
The struggle for existence would lead to lower beasts. How 
organs would develop according to the theory. Remains of 
primitive man show he was the same as now. " Stone," 
"copper," " iron" and civilized ages. Sons of Japhet and 
Ham. If true we are eating our relatives. A poem on evolu- 
tion, etc Pages 391-414 

CHAPTER XXI.— HOW A HUMAN BODY IS MADE, A 
WONDROUS WORK. 

The twelve powers of the human soul. Man made to take the 
place of fallen angels. Traditions of man's creation. Marks 



12 CONTENTS. 

of a wonderful scientist in the human body. Man knows not 
how he grows. How cells range themselves. Wonders of cells. 
Why boys and girls are born. Science proves the spotless 
conception of the Virgin. The human egg. The male 
element and how it gives life to the egg. How life begins and 
develops. The whole man made of egg-membranes. 
Epiblast, hypoblast, mesoblast and holoblast. How materials 
are placed where wanted. How the child is surrounded so as 
not to be injured. Amnion, Placenta. How child gets 
nourishment. Studies of beings before birth. Allantois, 
Chorion, Backbone, Brain, Limbs, Muscles, Bones. Mother's 
blood does not flow through child. Beginnings of blood circu- 
lation. How bones begin. Development of spine. Brain 
growth. How nerves begin. Beginnings of eyes and ears. 
How head grows. Two sets of nerves. Growth rapid at first. 
Formation of great nerves of spine. How the skin forms. In 
a medical college, etc Pages 415-437 



CHAPTER XXII.— THE MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION OF 
THE HUMAN BODY. 

A power of soul for each cell. Man made of 13 elementary miner- 
als. How they are arranged in the body. Size of man if these 
materials were let loose. Ropes, pullies, pipes, levers, etc. 
Wonderful ingenuity in body. The levers of the bodies of 
men and beasts. Muscles, how built Mechanical construction 
of bones. How the blood circulates. The heart. How great 
arteries bring blood to all parts. Corpuscles of blood. How 
blood comes back to heart through veins. Capillaries. The 
science of flowing fluids in organisms, would have taught the 
ancients. Heart a force-pump. Valves in pipes of body. 
How arteries are made. The veins. The lymphatic system. 
The sewer system in a man. The teeth and how made of 
tissues, dentine, bony covering and enamel. Windpipe. 
Stomach of four coats. How it digests. The gastric juices 
and organs making them. How food is digested. The small 
intestine in man and animals. Pylorus, Duodenum, Jejunum 
and Ilium. How small intestine is formed. The villi which 
suck up nourishment. The lacteals. Gases, fluids and solids a 
man wants each day. How the body is kept warm, and how 
often renewed, etc Pages 438-457 



CONTENTS. 13 

CHAPTER XXIII.— THE FIVE SENSES— TOUCH, TASTE, 
SMELL, HEARING, SEEING. 

Man and beast have five senses. Soul's windows through which we 
see forms or appearances of things. What are material sub- 
stances ? Senses cannot see spirits or substances. Soul powers 
animate senses. Touch. Where most and least developed. 
Taste on the tongue. Its organs of taste. Smell in nose. Its 
development. Nasal cavities. How we smell. Acute smell of 
some beasts. The ear of animals. Human ears. Outer ear of 
man. Two drums in each ear . Outer drum. Its chain of little 
bones — hammer, anvil and stirrup bring vibrations to inner 
drum. How ear begins in child. Inner drum, three canals, 
labyrinth and cochlea. Wonders of the cochlea. A piano of 
1,000 strings in each ear. How we hear musical tones. Works 
of wonderful Musician in ear. How eye begins to form in 
child. Eye a surpassing optical instrument. Eyeball, its mus- 
cles and structure — filled with two crystal fluids. How beasts' 
eyes are made. How eyes are colored. Iris. Crystalline lens — 
its formation. Why people become far and near-sighted. How 
hard to make a lens. Eye lined with black. Both telescope 
and microscope. Eye is most perfect instrument. How we see. 
The wonderful retina, and its ten layers. Retinas of different 
animals. Eye a photographic instrument. Chemical changes 
in eye. How we see through image in eye. All optical sciences 
used in eye, etc Pages 458-484. 

CHAPTER XXIV.— WHAT IS THE HUMAN SOUL? WHAT 
IS REASON? 

How few well educated. Students with little learning. Infidelity 
spreading over the world. We think and have free will. 
How a child begins to learn in school. Why no beast can learn 
to read. The mind and how it works. How you read. Mind 
and free will form reason. What is truth ? Object of mind all 
truths. Senses live in the single, mind in the universal. Mind 
uses no material organ. What are universal truths, and what 
single or particular truths. First object of the mind universal 
truth, second object particular, or single truth. How we reason. 
Aristotle's syllogisms. How conscience works, directing us. 
Association of ideas. Our motives. Why mind and will can 
never die. Man is free to do good or bad. What is the free will. 



14: CONTENTS. 

The good, or joy and happiness the object of will. We are not 
free seeking to reach truth and happiness. Man made to be a 
temple in whom God dwells. Signs of a fall in all man's 
faculties. Man not totally depraved, but wounded in his nature. 
How man gets to heaven, which is union with God. How a 
sinner sends himself to hell. What is hell ? The mystery of 
Three in One. Why God's Son made the first man. Why Eve 
was made from Adam's side. The first family imaged the 
Trinity. How God is Three Persons in one Divine Species or 
Race. What is a person and what a race, or species. Why 
God must be a Person. Only One God. A simple explanation 
of how God is Three in One. Beauty, Truth and Goodness in 
God. How the Father generates the Son. Fatherhood in crea- 
tures and in God. The internal Life of God. How God thinks 
and brings forth his eternal Idea. How Father and Son bring 
forth the Holy Spirit. Difference between man's and God's 
ways of thinking. Man's many thoughts, and God's one 
Thought. The mental Word of God. The Word in God's mind 
must be a Person equal to the Father. The eternal life of the 
Godhead. Fertility and fecundity must be in God as well as in 
creatures. Mutual Love of Father and of Son must be a Person 
— the Holy Spirit. What is love? The eternal Family of 
Heaven. How the Holy Spirit must be a Person equal to the 
other two Persons. Why God does not think with mind, or wish 
with will as powers, but with his own eternal Godhead in the 
ever present. The cycle of measureless internal life and ac* 
tivity of God. Why God could be only Three Persons, etc. 
etc Pages 486-521, 



A "CRANK" IN THE NATIONAL OBSERVATORY. 



The trolley stopped at a gate on the right leading into 
the grounds of the National Observatory on George- 
town Heights, near Washington, D. C. Going down the 
walk a fine-looking, well-dressed, intelligent appearing 
man caught up. After a pleasant greeting the writer 
said: 

" Yes, I am going to visit the Observatory. The 
Government made a nice walk leading down through this 
shady valley and up the hill opposite to the buildings." 

" You are mistaken, sir, no one built this walk. It 
came by evolution, or by chance. There is no such 
thing as cause and effect. I never believe what I don't 
see. Did I ever see my liver? Well, no. But I sup- 
pose I have one, as all men have." 

At first I supposed he was joking, but soon found 
he was very much in earnest, and, supposing he was a 
harmless lunatic, I humored him and we talked as we 
went up the hill. On the hill were quite a number 
of buildings devoted to the sciences relative to astronomy. 

u They have a large number of buildings and the 
Government spent a lot of money here. This institution 
is famed throughout the world. I wonder who was the 
architect and what they cost. 

" There was no architect. These buildings just got 
their materials together by chance." 

At our left on the hill towered a large domed building 
inclosing the great 26-inch equatorial telescope. Find- 
ing the attendant we went in, and just under the dome 
was the great tube, upheld by a pier coming up from 
the rock far beneath, so as to be free from any vibrations. 
The room was about 75 feet in diameter, the dome rest- 

15 



ing on iron wheels running on tracks, so the whole 
dome could be turned to point the telescope to any part 
of the heavens, through a shutter running down from 
the top to the spring of the arc. The shutters could 
be closed or opened at will. As the great telescope is 
pointed to a star high in the heavens or low down near 
the horizon, the floor can be raised or lowered by hy- 
draulic pressure, a system of water-pipes serving for 
that purpose. Every science, art and mechanical con- 
trivance known to man had been used in making this 
instrument. An iron staircase led up to the great in- 
strument, and the writer went up and examined the de- 
tails. A description of the instrument, the greatest in 
the world when built, would take up too much space. 

" It is very fine," said the writer. " The Govern- 
ment spared no cost in its construction. Who built it? 
I suppose the greatest cost was in the making, grinding 
and polishing the 26-inch objective glass? " 

" You are mistaken," said the man, " it was never 
made. This whole instrument came by accident. All 
parts of this delicate machinery just happened to arrange 
themselves together, and then got up on to that stone 
pier." 

The attendant looked at him in astonishment, while 
the writer winked at him. 

" Who is he ? a friend of yours ? T$o ? You only met 
him on the sidewalk coming in the grounds ! I suppose 
he is only a harmless lunatic. It is better to humor 
him, for if we oppose him he might become dangerous." 

We went into another building where a smaller in- 
strument was placed exactly north and south in the 
longitude of Washington. Looking through this great 
telescope you see 12 silvery lines straight up and down 
with another in the center crossing at right angles. Ob- 
serving a star, you let it run along the central bright 
line from east to west. As it strikes a line up and 
down, you press an electric button, and the electricity 
marks the exact time the star passes that line. Doing 
this when the star passes <9 lines, you add up the figures 

1(5 



and this divided by 9 gives the exact time when the star 
passes the meridian of Washington. The bright lines 
are fine spider webs, and to put them in the field of the 
telescope is quite an art. You first get a little stick of 
wood which is just heavy enough to break the webs, then 
split it in halves and use one half to stretch the webs. 

The machinery to move the telescope is elaborate and 
delicate, over which the observer, lying on a movable 
couch, has full control, who with a touch sets the appa- 
ratus and great tube in motion. 

A visitor remarked, " What science and mechanical 
art were required to construct such an instrument ! Who 
made it ? " 

" T$o one made it," said the man, " it came by chance. 
It was always here. Nothing was ever made by any one. 
Things were always as they are now. There are no 
such things as cause and effect. Instruments as well as 
stars, sun, and planets were always." 

Smiles went round. We went into a neighboring 
building where the time of the passage of the stars is 
recorded by the electric current. A sheet of paper, 
ruled into 60 spaces, is rolled round a cylinder, which 
turns in 1 minute, having a governor like a little fly- 
wheel. A steel wire, bent like a fishhook, rises when the 
cylinder turns too fast, and its point strikes the spokes 
of the rapidly turning governing wheel, so as to retard 
its velocity, thus making the cylinder with the ruled 
paper make a revolution in exactly 60 seconds. 

As the astronomer presses the electric button the mo- 
ment a star crosses a spider web in the telescope, an 
armature raises a pen filled with ink pressing on the 
paper, and that makes a V between the lines on the 
paper. The spaces on the paper being nearly 1 inch 
apart with divisions of seconds, the time of the passage 
is given to minute divisions of seconds. We talked about 
the ingenuity of the man who invented this method of 
recording the time of the passage of the stars, when the 
stranger remarked : 

" I tell you this machine was never invented. All 



you people are mistaken. It just happened to come 
that way." 

We went into smaller buildings where the stars are 
photographed, and this man held to his theory that the 
photographic instruments were not made. We examined 
the clocks, and were especially interested in the main 
Time Clock, of which they have two. One is down 
about 15 feet below the surface of the earth, and is 
seldom visited lest the heat of the body might change 
the rate, even while standing beside it, for a few min- 
utes. The other is in the office of the superintendent. 

Two glasses, each as large as a half barrel and dome- 
shaped, are hermetically united at their edges, so that 
no air can penetrate. The clock-works are in the upper 
glass, and the pendulum, beating seconds, swings down 
in the lower glass. Through the lower glass are two 
holes, electric wires passing through them. The elec- 
tricity winds up the clock every five seconds, and a 
gravity escapement bears on the spring of the pendulum 
at each beat. A barometer shows the pressure of the 
air within the united sealed glass globes, and when the 
pressure changes, the barometer within showing this, 
the air is pumped out through a hole with an air-pump 
similar to those used for bicycles. 

u This," said the superintendent, " was made in 
Germany, and is a recently invented clock. They are 
very costly and are found only at observatories." The 
man again protested they were never invented by any 
one, but we paid no heed to him, the writer having given 
a hint to the superintendent. 

Near by were the series of instruments which each 
day at noon send out the exact time over the wires to 
every town and city of the United States. The man 
protested these were never made. In another part of 
the room were cases holding hundreds of chronometers, 
sent there from different naval vessels to be tested, and 
their rates determined in various degrees of heat, as 
the place of the vessel at sea is found by the time given 
by the ship's chronometers. The man noisily declaimed 

IS 



no one made these timepieces. He held that all these 
wheels, balance springs, main-springs, pivots, pinions, 
etc., of these timepieces just came together by accident. 

We looked over the great library, mostly relating to 
astronomy and the sciences. The books were in dif- 
ferent languages — English works prevailing. The man 
argued that no one wrote these books. The letters just 
happened to get mixed up and fell together that way, 
the pages came out all right, and accidentally the covers 
got put on. We had gotten used to him and looked on 
him as a fool or one who had lost his mind. 

The writer remarked, " What must be the power of 
God to make so many stars, and swing them in their 
orbits ! " The man got furious. With vehemence he 
shouted : 

" There is no God. The universe was always here. 
The stars and matter and the world are eternal. The 
belief in God is only a superstition which came down 
from days of ignorance. What fools people are to believe 
in a Supreme Being. I believe only in what I see. "No 
priest or minister can fool me. I did not see these great 
telescopes and instruments the United States Govern- 
ment sent and put here, made; and I do not believe 
they were ever made. I did not see the millions of suns 
and stars created, and I will never believe they were 
made. I never saw God, and until I do I will not be- 
lieve in Him. This is an age of enlightenment. It is 
time to throw overboard the religious superstitions of 
the ages of ignorance. All things came by evolution, 
by chance, or in some other way. But no God made 
the world, it always was and always will be. Science 
proves there is no God. I have read all the scientific 
books, and these learned writers prove there is a con- 
tinual conflict between science and religion, which will 
never stop till one or the other will be driven from the 
field. When science proves there is a God, I will believe 
in Him and not before. You can't fool me with your 
nonsense about religion." 

He walked away in triumph, feeling he had gained a 

19 



victory over us all. Quite a crowd had gathered by this 
time, for many people had joined our party 

" What an awful crank he is," said a lady. " I be- 
lieve in God, because my heart tells me He exists. I 
don't reject the promptings of that sentiment of nature. 
I think it must be sin and all kinds of wickedness which 
wipe out the image of the Creator from any human 
heart." 

" I believe in God," said one of the astronomers, 
" because we see His works in the stars, in the mechanics 
of the heavens, in the mathematics ruling every orb in 
the sky. There must have been some infinitely wise 
Cause who marked the revolutions of the heavens. Some 
Power weighed every body floating in the sky, and put 
each star where we find it, revolving round its primary, 
otherwise chaos and anarchy would reign. This man 
must be insane if he is really in earnest. But we have 
to put up with some peculiar people, who come here, 
each with a c bug ' in his head." 

<e I am a professor of chemistry in a university," said 
another. " I find every metal and element in their dif- 
ferent unions and combinations take forms according 
to mathematical formulas, which can never be changed. 
The elements unite or dissolve according to figures. 
Mathematics rule all materials. Who laid down these 
figures for nature? We did not. They were there be- 
fore we discovered them. The one who denies there is 
a thinking Power behind nature, or says that the uni- 
verse came by chance or by evolution without a direct- 
ing Mind, is as big a fool as that man who just now 
held that these buildings and the great instruments of 
this observatory came together and formed themselves 
as we see them now. To one who stops to think of the 
harmony and beauty of nature the thought forces itself 
into his mind that a Being infinite in wisdom made 
this universe." 

" I am a lawyer," said another man. " In our courts 
we swear witnesses on the Bible. Without the thought 
of God and the life beyond the grave, it would be im- 

20 



possible to have order in society. The civil law is im- 
perfect without the laws of religion. The American 
people are religious at heart. I don't care whether a 
person belongs to the Christian, Jewish or any other 
faith ; our government fosters and protects the members 
of all religions. But I know from my own experience 
that without the belief in God, life, liberty, and the 
pursuit of happiness on which our free system rests, 
would soon vanish. In the last century the French 
people drifted into infidelity, denied God, and the revo- 
lution came as a consequence. Blood, carnage, murders, 
robberies, swept over the land and all Europe felt it. 
Will these horrors deluge our land in blood ? They will 
if religion dies out." 

Turning to the writer, he said : " I think you are a 
clergyman from your dress, would you be so kind as to 
give us the proofs of the existence of God from your 
point of view ? " 

" Ladies and gentlemen, I cannot give you the reasons 
why we believe in a Supreme Being in a few words. 
Learned men wrote books on that subject which would 
fill a large library. The belief in God comes down to 
us in all the nations. Years ago I wrote a work, " The 
Religions of the World," showing that every nation, 
tribe and tongue believe in God — in a Supreme Being 
under different names. ~No nation can exist any length 
of time without that idea, for men would rob, kill and 
fight each other till the whole people would die out." 

" Many able thinkers say the idea of a Supreme Being 
is born with each one, and develops with reason. We 
cannot see Him with our senses as we see the sun and 
the world round us, for He is a Spirit. But the won- 
ders of the universe prove a Maker as the works of 
man show workmen made them. 

" ' The heavens show forth the glory of God and the 
firmament declareth the work of his hands.' (Ps. xviii. 
1). You astronomers who search out the wonders of 
the stears know this. ' For by the greatness and the 
beauty and of the creature the Creator of them may be 

21 



seen.* (Wisdom xiii. 5). ' For the invisible things of 
him from the creation of the world are clearly seen, 
being understood by the things that are made, his eternal 
power also and divinity ; so that they are inexcusable ' 
(Rom. i. 20). 

" Two causes, sin and ignorance, make a few men 
talk as that man did. The wicked do not want to 
believe in God because they fear His judgment after 
death. Children and women nearly always believe be- 
cause they are innocent. Few people know all the 
sciences, hence they do not know the wonders of the 
universe. 

" Everywhere in heaven and on earth we find laws, 
mathematics, mechanics, and matchless arts and sciences 
ruling all nature, from the tiniest grain of sand to the 
mightiest sun. How did this universe with all these 
perfections get together and get going? A machine 
must be invented, sky-scrapers must be constructed, a 
battle-ship must be built — all human works and in- 
dustries must be directed by human reason. Who but 
the fool will hold that this universe with all its match- 
less forms of beauty and machinery we see in the orbs, 
on earth, in bones, muscles, nerves, and in plants, came 
together by evolution, by haphazard, or that blind un- 
thinking nature made them % The very idea is unthink- 
able to any learned person. 

" Things can be made only by a thinking person. 
Only a personal thinking God, having a mind and free 
will could plan the universe. 

" This universe is one complete whole and its parts 
depend one on the others. Scientific men devote their 
time to the study of separate parts of the universe, 
hence their knowledge is one-sided, few go over the 
whole domain of the sciences. We should have a full 
knowledge of the natural sciences so we can see the 
whole in all its parts, one branching into and dovetail- 
ing into the others. Then we can see what God hath 
wrought in nature. Having all perfections in Himself, 
for He is the infinite Perfect Being, He could not make 

22 



a tiling with, a perfection he had not, for then He would 
not be perfect. Therefore we must keep before our 
mind that what we find in nature, this also is found in- 
finite in Him." 

Come with me, gentle reader, while I give a Sum- 
mary of the Sciences. Let me tell you what modern 
science and discovery of our days says of the vast plans 
of the universe. We will leave out all hard words and 
scientific terms so the simple-minded will understand 
without an effort. 

We will see how God brought matter from nothing 
as fine dust, metallic fogs, floating particles, spread 
throughout space. We will see these formless, dark, 
motionless metals received movement and weight to fall 
by attraction to form mighty suns and planets as now 
we find them in the sky. We will see how our sun and 
his planets were made. We will see how our earth was 
prepared for living beings before man appeared. We 
will give a rapid glance at the different kinds of plants 
and animals. We will look at the theory of evolution. 
Then we will see how God made you and me in that 
little living cradle of flesh, blood and nerves, where our 
parents placed us before we were bom into this world. 

In our day the knowledge of God is getting weaker 
in human hearts. Ignorant infidels deny the very ex- 
istence of God, saying science proves no future life — no 
Supreme Being. Hence, crimes, murders, suicides, 
divorce, and all kinds of wickedness are inccasing all 
over the world. The world quoting the discoveries of 
science against religion is drifting to infidelity. Let us 
see what science, rightly understood, says of God. 



23 



SECTION I.— THE WONDERS OF THE HEAVENS. 



CHAPTER I— THE FOUNDATIONS OP THE UNIVERSE. 

Go out at night, when the stars shine bright, and 
look up at the heavens. A ring of light at a vast height 
sweeps round amid the stars. A great half-circle it 
seems in our northern latitude, its two ends lost below 
the horizon. Go south, below the equator, and you find 
it forms a mighty white cloudy ribbon, running round 
the whole heavens. It inclines at an angle of 63 degrees 
to the equinoctial, that imaginary plane where the sun 
is when days and nights are equal. 

From far-off days, when our race was young, men 
asked : What is it ? Because of its whiteness, the Greeks 
called it the Galaxy, from gala, " milk," and we the 
Milky Way. Sweeping round the whole firmament, 
as a mighty ring, looking like a bright, long, white ex- 
panse with irregular borders, nowhere broken, it ever 
excited curiosity, and claimed the study of the world's 
greatest minds. 

All was guesswork till the telescope was invented, 
the two Herschels, Sir William and Sir John, father 
and son, using the most powerful instruments known in 
their days, spent almost their whole lives in its study. 
The greatest astronomers of all ages, in every civilized 
country, tried to penetrate its mysteries and in few 
words we will lay before the reader the sum total of 
their labors. How can we make the reader grasp the 
wonders our instruments reveal, when so many learned 
men have spent their whole lives studying the heavens ? 
how will we condense their discoveries into a few pages ? 

24 



THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVERSE STUPIFIES US. 25 

O, the power of the Almighty ! The Milky Way with 
its millions of orbs, the amount of matter they contain, 
the fiery forces sporting in these mighty suns, the awful 
distances separating them, their weight ever keeping 
them together, the circular movements holding them in 
their orbits, the wonders we see up there in the sky — 
. all these press in on us and stupefy the mind over- 
* powered with the unthinkable power of the Eternal. 
We can only in a general and vague way make others 
see what we find, for no words can convey the full mean- 
ings of the lessons of the skies. 

The 'wildered mind is tossed and lost, 

O heavens, in thy eternal tide. 
The reeling brain essays in vain, 

O stars, to grasp your vastness wide. 
A terrible, tremendous scheme 

Glitters in each glancing beam. 
O stars, too rudely jars the night 

To tell all glories of the Infinite. 

Who is man and what his place ? 

Anxious asks the heart perplexed ; 
In this awful recklessness of space, 

Worlds with worlds thus intermixed, 
Have other orbs like ours a race 

Like us to this earth fixed ? 



J 



Let us give a rapid glance at that great Galaxy. To 
the naked eye it seems a vast wheel of light, a magnifi- 
cent arch of white diffused cloud, spanning the heavens 
like half a circle in our hemisphere, but it continues 
south till we find it a white wheel round the sky. In 
detail it is very irregular, sometimes seen as a single 
ring, oft it doubles; in places, again, parts are dark 
rifts, bright spots, dim patches — these never change, as 
we follow along its mighty circle with the naked eye, 
to which it appears as though made of white, cloudy 
mists. 

Turn a small telescope to it, and great numbers of 
stars appear, unseen to naked eye. Use a glass of higher 
powers, and thousands and thousands of stars appear. 



26 THE VASTNESS OF STATURAL CREATION. 

Look through one of the great telescopes of our observa- 
tories, and you find the whole Galaxy densely filled — 
fairly packed with stars. They are in some places 
ranged in circles in wavy streams, in lace-like forms, in 
dark rifts, in bright bands with groves and spots, in 
spirals — in every conceivable groupings, oft with bright 
clouds beyond, which higher powers show to be stars. 
Beyond the Milky Way there is nothing but the inky 
blackness of utter nothingness. Within this circle of 
stars we call the Milky Way are the stars and constella- 
tions twinkling every bright night. 

It would be useless to give in miles the distance to 
the Milky Way, for the bewildered mind could grasp 
but dimly the tremendous spaces separating us. The 
figures would be simply overpowering. We will there- 
fore give its distance in the time light takes to come 
from these suns to us. 

Let us recall: Light sweeps with the swiftness of 
186,000 miles a second, a million miles in about 5 1-2 
seconds, taking 8 minutes from sun to earth, through 
the 92,900,000 miles separating us, and 400 years from 
the star Alpha Argus, near the Milky Way. But from 
stars on the near borders of this ring light is 500 years 
on its flight before flowing in on our shores of vision, 
while the rays of light from the outer borders of the 
Galaxy have been on their journey 1,800 years before 
reaching earth. 

Reader, stop to think of the vastness of the material 
creation! When you look at the farthest stars of this 
great Galaxy, the Milky Way, the light with which you 
see them swept out from these suns in the days when 
the Roman empire was putting Christians to death. 
While it was on its way rushing with that almost incon- 
ceivable rapidity the mighty movements of mankind 
took place; the Middle Ages passed, the developments 
of modern times began, the sciences were born, rose and 
developed, the landmarks of the ancient world were swept 
away, and modern civilization began. The human mind 



THE MILKY WAY SEEN THROUGH A TELESCOPE. 27 

is lost and tossed in trying to grasp these distances. 
Light takes 3,600 years to pass from one border of the 
Galaxy to the other, across through the center of the 
universe. 

Now let us see through the telescope, more in detail, 
this mighty ring in its relation to the rest of the stars. 
On a clear cloudless night the scene is inexpressibly 
grand. Sirius, Capella, Vega, and other stars of the 
first magnitude, groups of stars as Orion, the Great 
Bear, the Little Bear, Cassiopia, the Pleiades and other 
constellations, are near the Galaxy. Over your head, 
to the north, or in the spaces between, are the best known 
constellations, while the fields of the sky on all sides, 
from the zenith to the horizon, are filled with less bril- 
liant points of twinkling lights. Scintillating traceries, 
formed of stars of all magnitudes, are scattered in be- 
wildering numbers along the borders of the Milky Way. 
They are so numerous you cannot count them or resolve 
them into any systematic order. The sight of the shin- 
ing suns seen through a large telescope is so grand, so 
striking, we wonder not the ancients, in their child-like 
simplicity, worshipped them. 

A view of any part of the Milky Way through a great 
telescope is magnificent — surpassing. The whole field 
of vision is filled with stars, some larger, some smaller. 
Cover the window of a room with thick paper so as to 
exclude all light, then with a pin pick little holes in this 
paper so as to let in the light, put the holes as closely 
together as the paper will stand without tearing. Then 
let the sun shine through these holes into the dark room, 
and you will get an idea of the Galaxy seen through an 
observatory telescope. In some places the stars are so 
close as to be almost touching, while in other regions they 
are farther apart. They are not near, but one is billions 
of miles beyond the other. Near the Southern Cross is 
a space, nearly oval, where there are few stars, it is 
called the " Coal Black Hole." Beyond it is the inky 



28 THE SHAPE OF THE MILKY WAY. 

black of nothingness and everlasting night. Above it, a 
little to your right, is a bright nebula. 

The relations of this great belt of telescopic stars to 
the rest of the stars, especially to our earth and sun with 
his planets, long occupied learned men. From whatever 
side it was approached, the number of stars rapidly 
increased as the power of the telescope developed. The 
form was found to be like that of a flat disk of suns, a 
vast round wheel, grindstone-shaped, of different thick- 
ness but split into two streams on one side, where it 
appears double, edges touching. 

The brilliant spots and patches, the dark rifts and 
openings, the narrow streams of light and rifts, often 
bounded by equally narrow streams of darkness, showed 
it to be a tremendous ring filled with and formed of 
stars. All studies on the subject prove the Milky Way a 
vast irregular ring of stars with narrow rifts or openings 
encircling the whole of God's creation. It is as it were 
the nuptial ring of the Eternal with his material crea- 
tion. Beyond it there is nothing. 

Sir John Herschel, following the example of his 
father, Sir William, spent almost his whole life in its 
study, both in the northern and southern parts of the 
earth, using the most powerful instruments then known 
to mankind. After describing how the great ring passes 
through the different constellations, Sir John continues : 

" When examined with powerful telescopes, the con- 
stitution of this wonderful zone is found to be no less 
varied than its aspect to the naked eye is irregular. In 
some regions, the stars of which it is composed are scat- 
tered with remarkable uniformity over immense tracts, 
while in others the irregularity of their distribution is 
quite as striking, exhibiting a rapid succession of 
closely clustering rich patches separated by compara- 
tively poor intervals, and, indeed, in some instances, 
absolutely dark, and completely void of any star, even of 
the smallest telescopic magnitude. In some places not 
more than 40 or 50 stars on an average occur in a gauge 



THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVEKSE. 29 

field of 15 degrees, while in others a similar average 
gives a result of 400 or 500. 

" Nor is less variety observable in the character of 
its different regions, in respect to the magnitude of the 
stars they exhibit, and the proportionate number of the 
larger and smaller magnitudes associated together, than 
in respect of their aggregate numbers. In some, for 
instance, extremely minute stars occur in numbers so 
moderate as to lead us irresistibly to the conclusion, that 
in these regions we see fairly through the starry stratum, 
since it is impossible otherwise that the numbers of the 
smaller magnitude should go on continually increasing 
ad infinitum. In such cases, moreover, the ground of 
the heavens is for the most part perfectly dark, which 
again would not be the case if innumerable multitudes 
of stars, too minute to be individually discernible, 
existed beyond. 

" In other regions we are presented with the phenom- 
enon of an almost uniform degree of brightness of 
the individual stars, accompanied with a very even 
brightness of the individual stars, with a very even 
distribution of them over the ground of the heavens, 
both the larger and smaller magnitudes being strikingly 
deficient. In such cases it is equally impossible not to 
perceive that we are looking through a sheet of stars 
nearly of a size and of no great thickness compared to 
the distance which separates them from us. Were it 
otherwise, we should be driven to suppose the more 
distant stars uniformly the larger, so as to compensate 
by their greater intrinsic brightness for their greater 
distance, a supposition contrary to all probability . . . . 

" Throughout by far the larger portion of the extent 
of the Milky Way in both hemispheres, the general 
blackness of the ground of the heavens on which its stars 
are projected, and the absence of that innumerable mul- 
titude of excessive crowding of stars of smallest visible 
magnitudes, and of the glare produced by the aggregate 
of light of multitudes too small to affect the eye singly, 



30 THE FOUNDATIONS OF THE UNIVERSE. 

must, we think, be considered unequivocal indications 
that its dimensions in directions where these condition 
obtain are not only not infinite, but that the space- 
penetrating power of our telescopes suffices to pierce 
through and beyond it." 

In the above quotations the italics are those of Sir 
John Herschel himself. The investigations of learned 
men who came after him show the number and extent of 
the stars are not infinite, and that the material universe 
is bounded. In a footnote he concludes his studies of 
the Milky Way with these words : " This circle is to 
the sidereal, what the invariable ecliptic is to planetary 
astronomy — a plane of ultimate reference, the ground- 
plane of the sidereal system. (Footnote, p. 575, 5th ed.) 

The Milky Way is therefore the groundwork of the 
universe, upholding the whole heavens. This vast ring 
of stars surrounds the whole material universe. It em- 
braces within itself all the visible world. 

The whole vault of heaven appears to be thickly 
strewn with stars of different brightness. But when 
astronomers made a careful survey, they found the stars 
scattered very irregularly, but always more numerous 
near the Milky Way, which covers not more than one- 
seventh of the whole heavens. Gore found that of 32 
bright stars, 12 lie in the Milky Way, and that out of 
a total of 5,356 stars of first brightness, 1,186 are in 
the Milky Way. Proctor counted 324,189 stars down to 
the 9th degree of brightness, two-thirds of which were 
in the Milky Way. Prof. Seeliger, of Munich, divided 
the heavens into nine regions ; he gives the number of 
stars down to the ninth magnitude, and shows that from 
each pole, where they are less dense, they increase till 
you reach the Milky Way, where they are in proportion 
of 2 to 8 in numbers, and Prof. Eewcomb remarks: 
" The conclusion to be drawn is a fundamental one. 
The universe, at least the denser part of it, is really 
flattened between the galactic poles, as supposed by Her- 
schel and Struve," 



HOW THE UNIVERSE IS SHAPED. 31 

The material universe of stars has therefore the shape 
of a mighty double lens-like globe of orbs, so vast it 
takes light 3,600 years to cross it. Some writers say 
they are so far away, it takes 10,000, 20,000, 60,000 
and 120,000 years for the light of these suns to reach 
us, but these are exaggerations. Recent studies with 
finer instruments prove the first figures correct, and 
that the universe is bounded by the Milky Way like a 
vast equator running round this tremendous globe of 
stars. 

This Galaxy, like the outer rim of a magnifying glass, 
stretches out beyond the star-globe. We, on our little 
earth, are nearly in the middle of this wheel of stars, in 
what would be the hub of the wheel, and as we look up 
at the Milky Way its stars seem near each other, almost 
touching in some cases, to naked eye appearing as white 
clouds, because we look through from the center ont to 
the rim of the lens of stars. These orbs of the Milky 
Way seem so thick as to almost touch, because they are 
in line with us, and the stars being farther beyond. 
These stars are as far away from each other as the stars 
we see towards the north and south poles, that is trillions 
multiplied by trillions of miles. They appear to us as 
a ring somewhat like the rings of Saturn would seem if 
seen from the surface of that planet. 

Let us now see what science says about the spaces 
within the Milky Way. On every side, to the north and 
to the south of the great ring, we see stars twinkling, 
scintillating as though living, they wink looking at us. 
This twinkling is caused by the air surrounding our 
earth through which their light passes before reaching 
the eye. Men who scale high mountains and go up in 
balloons to great heights, see the stars shining with 
steady light. 

Some stars are quite bright, some dim, others — most 
of them — you can see only with a telescope, still other 
millions are caught with the photograph. The brightest 
are of the first magnitude, and they range down, ac- 



6Z HOW THE SUNS ARE CLUSTERED. 

cording to their brightness, from the first to the 17th 
magnitude. The stars are classed in these 17 magni- 
tudes, according to their brightness. Many of the bright- 
est have names given them by astronomers, but the others 
are known by Greek letters, numbers, or by their places 
in the constellations in which they are found. 

There are clusters of stars, some seen with the naked 
eye seem like white clouds, which the instruments 
resolve into hundreds and even thousands of stars. 
The Pleiades, celebrated from most ancient times, have 
six stars seen by the unaided eye, but the telescope 
shows hundreds more, and the photograph exposed 
three hours reveal more than 2,000 separate stars. 
Prsesepe, " The Beehive," in the constellation Cancer, 
is a cluster of stars, and there is another in the sword- 
handle of Perseus. In the southern hemisphere is found 
a hazy star of the fourth magnitude, about two thirds of 
the diameter of the moon. The telescope resolves it into 
almost countless stars of the 13th and 15th magnitudes, 
having rings of larger stars. 

The suns thus scattered over the whole heavens are 
for the most part near or just within the Milky Way. 
They look as though no order reigned when they were 
thrown from the Almighty's hand. But when we make 
a careful study, we find order and regularity reign in 
heaven. 

The law of matter forms orbs into round globes. 
This law prevails throughout the universe. Look at a 
globe representing the earth, and imagine it an abyss 
of deeps so great it takes light, flying 186,000 miles a 
second, 3,600 years to cross. Suppose that globe formed 
of ether we cannot see by any sense, which has only ex- 
tension, does not prevent the orbs passing through it, 
which brings waves of light, heat, electricity, and numer- 
ous hidden rays from sun to sun and planet and earth. 

This celestial globe, in size beyond the imagination, 
overpowering in extent, has a ring round its equator 
formed of millions of suns; this ring, or equator of 



IS THE UNIVERSE BOUNDLESS? 33 

suns, we call the Milky Way. All through' this clear 
crystal globe are suns, near the Milky Way they are 
thickly strewn, towards its poles they are found in 
groups we call the constellations. They are on its bor- 
ders, on all parts of its surface, within and in all its 
parts. Among these you see white clouds in countless 
hordes ; these are the nebulae, systems of suns in process 
of formation. Nearly in the middle of this vast globe, 
in the hub of this wheel, the Milky Way, is our sun 
with its planets and our earth. Outside this tremendous 
globe of 500 million suns there is nothing. This hollow 
globe of stars, encircled by the Galaxy, holds all God's 
material creation. Our telescopes reveal, beyond its out- 
side limits, the black nothingness of eternal night, as 
was before the Eternal said : " Let there be light." 

First many supposed these millions of suns grouped 
into this vast globe formed a gigantic nebula, and that 
the nebulas we see were other tremendous systems, in 
numbers and extent infinite, and that creation was 
boundless. The French use the word infinite in a 
reckless way, apply it to everything indefinite, or great, 
and from that much confusion rose regarding the stars. 
Recent observations by the best astronomers, with better 
constructed instruments, prove that all stars and nebulae 
and every orb are within this mighty, hollow heavenly 
globe of matter encircled by the Galaxy. 

The reader, therefore, can grasp in a vague way, God's 
plans, according to which he made matter. But the 
deeps, the abysses, the tremendous distances between 
the suns, the size of these orbs, are on such a gigantic 
scale that their full grandeur cannot be fully grasped. 
We have nothing on our little earth to serve as a measure. 

But you ask: How can one man count these mil- 
lions of orbs during his life, or measure these heights 
and deeps % About 30 years ago the different observ- 
atories divided the heavens into spaces, giving each 
institution a section of the heavenly vault and they set 
to work to count the stars of each allotted section as 



34 THE UNIVEKSE A FLATTENED GLOBE OF SUNS. 

printed on the photos. Professor Bernard's photos of the 
Milky Way show it is composed of over 500 millions 
of suns, so far away they make it look like white clouds, 
even the 40-inch refractor of the Lick Observatory does 
not resolve them all into points, but the photos bring 
them out, as shining suns. 

The globe of stars, the universe the Milky Way en- 
circles, is not exactly round, but like a thick lens. It 
is thicker from one side of the Milky Way to the other 
edge, the diameter through the poles, or at right 
angles to the Milky Way, being shorter. If the reader 
will imagine a globe of suns with very flattened poles, 
or a mighty lens of suns, he will get the general out- 
lines of the universe. Every star is in motion, otherwise 
it would fall into some other star. Does this Galaxy roll 
round the heavens like a tremendous wheel ? We do not 
know, for its movements to us so far away would seem 
so slow that millions of years would be required to 
measure it. 

The rest of this star-globe is filled with suns but not 
so grouped and packed together as in the Milky Way, 
although they are millions in number. These stars are 
scattered all over the sky, from the Galaxy to the north 
and south poles, in groups the ancients called the con- 
stellations. Here and there among them are white 
clouds, millions in number, called the nebulse. They 
are few in number near the Milky Way, but increase 
as you go towards the poles. They are like cloudy ma- 
terials, star-mists, metals fine as flour condensing into 
and building suns. 

In the very middle of this mighty wheel, the Galaxy, 
is a hub of stars, a globe of suns so great in size it takes 
light 600 years to cross. There are the stars we see with 
naked eye. They number nearly a million orbs grouped 
like a hollow shell inclosing another shell of stars having 
within another empty hollow space across which light 
passes in 300 years. Then comes in the center another 
empty globe, inclosing a vast space void of stars^ Jhaving 



THREE CONCENTRIC GLOBES OF SUNS. 35 

in its center a still' smaller globe of suns, a third globe 
in the very middle of the other two globes. This third 
globe is made up of the bright stars we see with the 
naked eye. They are the stars of which we have meas- 
ured their distance, weight, times of revolution, and 
the materials of which they are composed. Down in 
almost the very center of these three concentric globes 
of stars is one star, the greatest, the hottest, the most 
mighty of the orbs. We call him Arcturus. Round this 
tremendous body rolls our small yellow sun, making his 
revolution in 100.50 years, dragging with him a host 
of planets — one of them we call the Earth, on which we 
live. 

One of these planets, so small, so insignificant com- 
pared to other heavenly orbs, has an atmosphere nearly 
100 miles high, great oceans, Hve continents, many is- 
lands and wonderfully balanced conditions of light, 
heat, gases, metals, etc. This little globe so small and 
insignificant, called the Earth, has what no other celestial 
globe possesses — beings which live. These organisms, or 
man, made of the same materials we find in the stars, 
have living principles with power of movement, propagate 
their species, grow, nourish themselves, then die. At the 
head of all earthly living beings is mankind, endowed 
with reason, image of the mighty Creator. Man is made 
in the likeness and image of the Eternal. 

This cluster of stars, in the center of the universe, 
occupies about the tenth part of the inner shell or globe 
of suns. Within this little globe of stars the suns are 
very dense, or grouped together closely, compared with 
the rest of the universe. Not far from the outside of 
this round inner cluster of stars, revolves our sun round 
Arcturus near the center. This inner star globe, to 
which we belong, looks like the ring nebulse of Lyra. 
Professor Newcomb gives a list of the 69 stars of which 
the movements are known, and 35 of them belong to this 
central globe forming the center of the universe to which 
v our sun belongs. 



■ ,v ■»- -M 



36 WE ARE IN THE CENTER OF THE UNIVERSE. 

Between this condensed cluster, the center of the 
universe and the Milky Way, above and below its plane 
to either pole of the Galaxy, the suns are thinly scat- 
tered, and there the nebulae are numerous. There the 
force of gravity is a hundred times less than within this 
star cluster to which we belong, because the stars are so 
far apart compared to our central cluster, where they 
are so thickly grouped. Our sun is about 30 light years 
from the exact middle of the universe, the center of this 
inner cluster, to which it belongs, that is 190 billions of 
miles, 70,000 times the distance of Neptune from the 
sun. This gives us plenty of room to revolve round 
mighty Arcturus, placing us practically in the center 
of the whole material universe. Here we receive most 
of the light, and heat, and energy, and attraction, and 
invisible rays of the millions of suns round us required 
for life on our world. 

The suns of our cluster drew in this floating matter ; 
that is why these spaces round our central cluster are 
now more or less empty. Luigi d'Auria figured out 
these questions, and concluded that we are not in the 
exact center of the universe, but about 159 light years 
away. These are the latest discoveries, and they prove 
in the most astounding manner that the universe was 
made as given in Moses' words. Every advance we 
make shows these first chapters of the Bible founded on 
the most exact science. 

Mr. Whittaker says that under gravitation and electric 
forces, most of the matter, which was made as fine dust 
scattered and diffused through space, flowed into the suns 
of the Milky Way, and into the great central clusters 
near us. The amount of materials now remaining be- 
tween the stars being rather small, this explains the few 
and scattered suns we find within this central space. 
But all around and within, amid these millions of suns 
we call stars, as now we find them spread throughout 
this universe, reigned and ruled from the beginning, 
law, order and movement, directed by an indescribable 



WHY WE WERE PLACED IN THE MIDDLE. 37 

Power behind them, who made them and set them going 
as a piece of the most matchless machinery. All these 
millions of suns were made for the life which lives alone 
on this our little world. For this world, so small com- 
pared to these mighty suns, so tiny and so insignificant, 
alone of all the orbs, was covered with living beings for 
man, last of God's creations and most wonderful of all 
the mighty Creator made. 

In the Milky Way, amid the constellations in the 
nebula?, on all sides, our instruments reveal to us matter 
in process of formation into suns. The forces of gravi- 
tation, or weight, drag down materials. Light, heat and 
electricity, caused by gravitation, or weight, are in 
these places on a scale inexpressibly grand. Why was 
our sun with our little world placed here almost in the 
center of these three concentric globes of stars? 

Here we see the design of the Eternal in his creative 
acts. These suns, forming these three globes outside us 
on every side, or grouped into the constellations eons of 
ages ago, gathered up the floating star-dust by their at- 
traction, drew to them the rocks, the wandering bodies 
like mountains in size, little planets moving in spaces 
round them. Thus gravitation built the suns as now 
we see orbs being formed in the nebulae. Therefore 
down in the center of the universe where we float with 
our sun and his planets, the orbs and suns have been 
built. Matter here, in star spaces near the universe's 
center, is stable, no great cataclysms, collisions of suns 
take place to destroy life. 

Was there no design in this ? Suppose these stars 
surrounding us had not in past epochs gathered up these 
wandering materials, the world would be bombarded 
with flying rocks sweeping down from the heavens, and 
their strokes would kill all that live on earth, heat our 
earth so hot it would shine like the sun. This is the 
reason these mighty suns were made to surround the 
space in which our earth and sun move. A wise Provi- 
dence is shown here. 



38 HINTS OP THE EUTTJBE LIFE. 

So far away are these mighty suns, we see them only 
as twinkling points of light. Some are mnch larger, 
others smaller than onr sun. From deeps to greater 
deeps we pass, appalling in extent; even our greatest 
telescopes do not reveal a disk even of the greatest suns. 
Far out we look, beyond the farthest stars and nebulae, 
out on the limits of the foundation ring, the Galaxy, 
out till at last we reach the limits of all created materials, 
suns, orbs, and then gaze into the dark empty realms 
of eternal night, without star-light. There reign noth- 
ingness and eternal gloom. Reader, raise your mind now 
to that Power who filled the heavens with suns as beacon- 
lights, and gave you a soul with powers to see them. 
Let us quote the words of Persia's great and ancient 
seer, Zoroaster, " The Living Star," found in the Sacred 
Books of India. 

OP THE HEREAFTER. 

Yet know, vain sceptics, know the Almighty's mind, 

"Who kindled in men a portion of his fire, 
Bade his free soul nor earth nor time confined, 

But to heaven, to immortality, to aspire. 

Zoroaster, Vendidad Forgard, xviii. 

Turn the great telescope of the Lick Observatory and 
look through the 40-inch lens. The clock-work keeps 
the instrument on any part of the heavens you wish. A 
thousand brilliant stars you could not see with naked 
eye flash into your field of vision. You are confused at 
their richness; in silence you admire the wonder. It 
seems a boundless ocean of scintillating lights, as farther 
and farther you penetrate what seems a boundless 
heaven of countless shining suns. Deserts follow des- 
erts, where are no lights; new stars flash out — immen- 
sities follow immensities of stars. Clusters follow clus- 
ters, nebulse give way to nebulae, seemingly limitless 
spaces are beyond you still, filled with stars. You try 
to see each in turn, your mind stops thinking; your 
eye feels fatigue; your imagination stops; your spirit 
tells you _these are suns, as faint you feel — powerless to 



IS THE UNIVEBSE INFINITE IN EXTENT ? 39 

express the thought forced upon you. Who is God who 
made all these? Here are the footprints of Power in- 
finite. 

Ye stars, bright legions that before all time 
Camped on yon plain of sapphire, who shall tell 
Your burning myriads but the eye of Him 
Who bade through heaven your golden chariots wheel. 
Yet who earth-born can see your hosts and not feel 
Immortal ? Force gave you impulses from eternity. 
What wonder if the o'er wrought soul should feel 
With its own weight of thought, and the wild eye 
Sees within your tracks His glory doth now lie. 

At your first glance infinite seems the numbers and 
systems of the stars. Are they infinite in numbers ? 
That which is infinite is boundless in every way, has 
no imperfections of any kind. The infinite strictly be- 
longs to God. If the universe was limitless in extent, 
space and perfection, it would be God. But in every 
part of nature we find imperfections. Mature was made 
with these imperfections, these defects, lest man might 
take it to be God and adore it. This idea, that nature 
is God, prevailed among the ancients, and was the foun- 
dation of paganism. It was revived in modern days 
under the name of pantheism. "All is God." — Spi- 
nosa's doctrine. 

Is the universe limitless? The telescope shows that 
beyond the limits of the Milky Way, outside the stars 
forming the constellations, we find utter darkness. 
Recent discoveries prove the nebulae to be within the 
great star-globe of which the Milky Way is the boundary. 
The old theory of a boundless universe has been proved 
false. The universe has its limits. 

Studies of the last century, the observations of learned 
astronomers, the conclusions of all the scientists, show 
the stars, suns, nebulae, comets, meteorites and heavenly 
bodies form one mighty system of matter the same in 
material of which our earth is made. The physical 
forces at work round us rule all heavenly bodies. The 
universe of material things is within that ring, the 



40 THE TJNIVEKSE COMPOSED OF IDENTICAL METALS. 

Milky Way, at a distance which to us seems almost 
infinite. They show the power, the might of their 
Creator, who brought them forth from nothing, hung 
them on the law of weight or gravitation, and with a 
sweep of His infinite force sent them swinging round 
the heavens. 

Even he who wrote to blot the idea of God from 
human hearts, Herbert Spencer, gives testimony to the 
unity of the universe as set forth so eloquently and so 
learnedly by the two Herschels. " If there were," he 
says, " but one nebula, it would be a curious coincidence, 
were this one nebula so placed in the distant regions of 
space, as to agree in direction with a starless spot in our 
own sidereal system. If there were but two nebulae, and 
both were so placed, the coincidence would be excessively 
strange. What then shall we say on finding that there 
are thousands of nebulae so placed? Shall we believe 
that in thousands of cases, these far-removed galaxies 
happen to agree in their visible positions with the thin 
places in our own Galaxy? Such a belief is impos- 
sible. In that zone of celestial space, where stars are 
excessively abundant, nebulae are rare, while in the two 
opposite celestial spaces that are farthest removed from 
this zone, nebulae are abundant. Scarcely any nebulae 
lie near the plane of the Milky Way, and the great mass 
of them lie round the poles of the Milky Way. Can 
this also be mere coincidence ? The proofs of a physi- 
cal connection become overwhelming." 

Ten or fifteen years later Proctor read his remarkable 
papers before the Royal Astronomical Societies from 
1869 to 1875, in which he called the attention of the 
learned world to the fact of the unity of the material 
universe. From his time this principle has been ac- 
cepted by almost every astronomer of the world. Thus 
when God made the universe, He made it as one mighty 
whole, composed and formed of less than a hundred 
different metals, which combining and uniting under 
their varied chemical and mechanical laws, make the 



I LEARNED MEN ARE NOT INFIDELS. 41 

whole universe of matter. The grandeur, the marvel, 
the mystery of the Creator's works seen in science over- 
whelm us. We are like a child gathering pretty shells 
along the seashore, while the mighty unexplored ocean 
rolls its billows at our feet. 

In all ages astronomers tried to find the limits of the 
material universe. They have now attained their goal. 
They have sounded the depths of the universe, and 
now they rest on their laurels. These men are worthy 
of all honors for the work they have done for humanity. 
Astronomers never fall into infidelity. I have never 
met one who did not believe in God, for they study His 
works on their grandest scale, they see the figures, the 
higher mathematics on which God founded the heavenly 
orbs, and they know a Mathematician infinite in wisdom 
was before them. 

After defining the limits of creation astronomers set 
to work to fathom the nature of these suns, their ma- 
terials, sizes, revolutions, weight, the amount of light 
and heat they produce, if they have any satellites, their 
growth and decay, their history in the past, their move- 
ments in the future — a thousand questions remain to be 
solved. 

Let us see what cold science and everyday experience 
says. Put a marble, a stone, or any object in a place 
and it remains there ; throw it in the air, it falls to earth 
by weight and remains there till some power outside 
itself moves it. When the orbs were made, if given 
only weight they would fall together. If they were 
thrown helter-skelter through the heavens they would 
wander like billiard balls on a table or fly up and down 
in all directions till they ran all over the heavens smash- 
ing, clashing, and chaos and anarchy would reign. 

But every globe is moving. Where did they get this 
movement but from their primeval Mover, God ? Will 
the fool say in his heart there is no God? But they 
move not in straight lines but in circles, in mathematical 



42 HOW THE MILLIONS OF SUNS MOVE. 

curves. The paths of the suns are like railroad tracks 
stretching out, each of the tracks winding one into the 
other at their ends, a sun being in the center of one 
curve. The movements of every one of these million 
suns, planets, satellites, comets, asteroids, nebula?, and 
heavenly bodies follow the departments of higher mathe- 
matics we call conic sections. Who shot forth from His 
Eternal canons these suns and orbs, to float forever in 
the heavens? 

Millions of suns, far apart, sweep along these paths 
described in higher mathematics, shoot down like comets 
towards the other giant sun which holds each by its at- 
traction. As they approach this other mightier sun the 
velocity increases, and they gyrate round with awful 
speed, as we see the comets sweep round the sun. Then 
the star or sun swings back like a pendulum, its motion 
decreasing as it gets farther away. The suns in their 
parabolic paths may come near other giant suns, and 
feeling the attraction of this new great body, they sweep 
round him and go off again on a new journey, perhaps to 
find in their course another sun round which to swing. 
Thus as time goes on, the millions and millions of suns 
swing round each other, one after the other, ticking out 
the time they measured from creation. 

If these suns, or, as we call them, stars, had not these 
motions, or were not so exactly weighed, poised and 
sent in the right direction, anarchy would destroy the 
heavens. If they did not have just that exact move- 
ment they would strike together. Perhaps one would 
come into our solar system, strike the earth or our sun 
and overwhelm in a terrific cataclysm, the order of earth, 
sun, and our solar system. Who says there was not an 
overruling Power who gave these suns their weight, their 
direction, their velocity and the paths they follow lest the 
universe be destroyed ? 

The nineteenth Psalm, opening with the words: 
" The heavens show forth the glory of God, and the 



TWO MILKY WAYS tTtflTItfG. 43 

firmament declareth the work of his hands," has been 
paraphrased as follows: 

" The spacious firmament on high, 
With all the blue ethereal sky, 
The spangled heavens, a shining frame, 
Their great Original proclaim. 
The unwearied sun from day to day, 
Doth his Creator's power display, 
And publishes to every land 
The work of an Almighty hand." 

Wonders rise on wonders when we farther penetrate 
the skies. An astounding double drift of stars sweeps 
through the universe in opposite directions — millions 
of suns going one way, millions in the opposite direc- 
tion, like a vast unnumbered crowd sweeping round two 
vortices. Recently this was discovered, and excites the 
attention of astronomers. Mind of man cannot think 
how long these double migrations of heavenly hosts have 
been going on: they were from dawn of creation, and 
will last as long as the universe, for it is the expression 
of a fundamental law. 

On one side the Milky Way splits into two round 
leaves spread apart, on one side united together, on the 
other where these two tremendous turning star rings 
came together and mingled their millions of suns, each 
orb of one ring speeding in a direction opposite from 
those of the other celestial sphere. Yet these suns do 
not smash together, because the Creator foresaw and 
gave direction to the impulse when He sent matter into 
suns revolving on their axes and speeding round the 
heavens. 

Two separate systems of suns have come together in 
the Milky Way, each retains its original movement of 
suns in opposite directions. The universe, made of mil- 
lions of suns, first formed two Milky Ways, far sepa- 
rated, which came together by attraction of their orbs, 
each system keeping their opposite movements. Our 
sun and his planets were in one of the rings, near the 
center, down away from mighty movements of millions 



44 WILL THE UNIVERSE END AT LAST % 

of suns forming the tremendous rings. We are there- 
fore down in the masses of stars, some moving to the 
right, the others to the left, yet never striking, for God 
marked out their paths. 

Where the rings of stars united, the Milky Way is 
rich in stars ; where the rings have not yet united, where 
their edges spread out, there the stars are not so numer- 
ous. When eons of ages, unthinkable years, come 
to pass, both rings will completely unite, fuse and all 
the suns will move in the same direction. The near-by 
stars only show movement, the suns on the outside bor- 
ders of this mighty marriage of material creation will 
perhaps never be measured. For all we know, when the 
mingling is completed, the vitality of the starry uni- 
verse will die, the gigantic system of nature will end, 
its fires will dim, its light will fade, its orbs will cool, 
its light and heat will end, its materials will remain, un- 
less God will reduce all matter to nothingness and eternal 
night, from which He brought forth the universe by His 
might at creation. But as God works wthout repent- 
ance, all He made is good, perhaps He will let matter 
remain after ends our race, to show what He could do. 

When we glance over the universe — over these mil- 
lions and millions of suns — their numbers, hardly con- 
ceivable, press on the mind, and faint we feel as we 
think of their size, the awful grandeur and inexpressible 
power of the Creator of worlds and planets and mighty 
orbs. We ask the question: Is the system on which 
they are founded stable ? Has heaven within itself the 
seeds of ruin and decay ? Will a time come when these 
mighty orbs will fall together with a tremendous clash 
in which awful cataclysm all matter will condense into 
one globe of fiery material ? Is this the end the seers of 
old foretold % 

Astronomers with mathematical minds worked out this 
sum, and tell us the stars, subject to weight or gravita- 
tion alone, will go on forever. The universe has not 
within itself any force which will destroy it. From 






MATHEMATICS PROVE THE UNIVERSE STABLE. 45 

the beginning the Eternal founded matter on mathe- 
matics, gave it motions and laws, and as long as these 
last the orbs will circle round and round. Only a direct 
act of the Almighty can take away weight and attraction 
which hold together the universe. Prof. George Darwin 
thua replies to these questions : " A symmetrical annular 
system of bodies might revolve in a circle with or with- 
out a central body. Such a system would be unstable. If 
the bodies are of unequal masses, and not symmetrically 
disposed, the break-up of the system would probably be 
more rapid than in the ideal case of symmetry. This 
would imply that the great ring of the Milky Way is 
unstable, but if this is so, it is a greater mystery than 
ever, for it has lasted from creation. We know of the 
existence of no great body, or vast central mass, which 
would attract smaller suns to fall into it." 

Men who spent their lives examining this great Galaxy 
ring, say it is wonderfully symmetrical, and they assert 
the same of every star cluster. Whittaker says these 
suns are subject not only to weight, but also to electric- 
ity and electro-dynamical forces. Electricity is one of 
the great natural forces, and our sun is a vast source of 
electric energy. Men are coming to the conclusion that 
weight or gravity is not the only force to which the 
heavenly bodies are subject. 

Newcomb figured out that in a universe of 100 mil- 
lion suns spread out over a space across which it would 
take light 30,000 years to pass, a star falling from its 
outer limits to the center would acquire a swiftness of 
25 miles a second. Any body having a greater velocity, 
going in a straight line, would fly out into boundless 
space, far beyond the limits of the universe. Many stars 
have a greater velocity. But these are only speculations. 
Eor the stars do not fly in straight lines, as this theory 
supposes, but in a circle. The Creator gave them these 
circular orbits, that they might go on forever round and 
round in their orbits, or paths, He laid out for them. 
If He did not give them circular movement to do this, 



-r- 



46 PROOFS OF THE CREATION OF THE UNIVERSE. 

they would clash together, or fly away to be lost in vast 
distant spaces. 

But, yon ask, did the universe always exist? Is it 
not infinite in duration ? Has it infinite time % If you 
write the figure 1, and put after it the cipher 0, and 
so many ? s that the figures will cover the entire surface 
of the earth, you will not measure infinite time. If you 
continue till you cover with figures the surfaces of all 
the planets, the sun, and the whole surfaces of the stars, 
you will not have begun to measure infinite time, in 
which the universe would have to be in order to be 
infinite in time or duration. 

Stars are always sending out light and heat. Their 
light and heat cannot last forever. For a time must come 
when all their light and heat will end, unless, kept up 
by a Power not in themselves. Every source of light and 
heat must be fed, or it will go out. The stars we see still 
shine or we could not see them. If they had been from 
eternity, they would ages ago have lost their light and 
heat, for in giving these out they are cooling. 

The general impression is they are fed by meteorites 
and great bodies falling into them. But if these bodies 
were infinite in number, which would be required to keep 
up the starlight and heat forever, they would fill all space 
solid, so there would be no vacant places between the stars. 
All would be one tremendous body of solid matter ex- 
tending beyond the confines of the Milky Way. The 
universe cannot therefore be infinite in duration in the 
past. A time was when matter was not. We find it 
here, and therefore at some remote time it was made. 

Lord Kelvin, the greatest scientist of our day, who 
devoted almost his whole life to these questions, figured 
a star moving in a circle within a diameter of 3,215 
light years in which would be distributed 1,000 million 
suns each with the same amount of matter as our sun, 
all suddenly created and subject to gravity or weight 
alone. He says they would all at once begin to move 
slowly, especially those near the center. But after 25 



OTHER PROOFS OF THE CREATION. 47 

millions of years, many of them would have a velocity 
of from 20 to 70 miles a second. These diverse veloc- 
ities agree with that of our stars, and from these figures 
Lord Kelvin thinks there may be as many as 1,000 mil- 
lion suns in the universe. Then he went over the figures 
again, supposing there were 10,000 million suns in the 
universe, each having about the same amount of matter 
as our sun, and found the velocities within that time 
would be much greater, and concludes that there are not 
that many suns, nor that amount of matter, in the uni- 
verse. We see, therefore, from the learned studies of 
this great man, that the universe is not infinite in ex- 
tent, nor space boundless, nor that matter was not from 
eternity. These figures, with the calculations of other 
learned men, prove that a time was when matter was 
not, and that it was created. 

Professor ISTewcomb supposed 100 million suns, each 
£ye times as large as our sun, the whole amount of matter 
being equal to 500 million suns, equally distributed 
through an extent of space 30,000 light years across, 
acting under the laws of gravity alone, and he reaches 
the same conclusions. Other men went over these fig- 
ures, followed up the movements of every star, sun and 
planet known, imagined the materials of the stars into 
different kinds, and sized orbs at different distances from 
each other. They weighed these bodies and measured 
their supposed motions. Many mathematicians went 
over this work. Lord Kelvin at another time divided 
all the materials of the universe into 1,000 millions 
of suns, each 300 millions of millions of miles apart, and 
figured out their movements. 

These men were forced by their mathematical calcu- 
lations of the motions of the stars to conclude that they 
are not eternal, and that a time was when there was no 
matter. The universal movements of the stars prove 
the universe is not eternal. For these mathematical 
reasonings, the purest truths of human reason, abso- 
lutely prove by these investigations that the stars were 



48 LIGHT AND HEAT PEOVE THERE IS A GOD. 

not always, that they were made, that they have a 
Creator. 

These men did not start out to prove the existence 
of God, hut to investigate the secrets of nature, search- 
ing out the laws, movements, masses, weights and 
natures of the stars. They were forced to the conclusion 
that the heavenly orbs as they now exist could not have 
been from eternity, that in the far-distant past these 
movements began, this weight, light, heat and electricity 
had a beginning, and a time will come when they will 
end. Thus the truth of creation, a beginning of things, 
were forced on their minds by their investigations. 

Every star you see throws out light. This light is 
caused by the matter of the great fiery globe condensing, 
or it is sustained by meteorites and other bodies falling 
into the fiery mass. If these suns had existed from 
eternity they would have cooled long ago, or new matter 
would have to be created to sustain their light and heat. 
Whatever way you look at it, you find the marks of the 
Creator. There is no other way of explaining the won- 
ders of the universe, except to say God made matter. A! 
hundred reasons might be given to show that the mate- 
rial universe is not eternal. It must have been therefore 
made at some time in the remote past. In this science 
agrees with these words, majestic in grandeur, " In the 
beginning God created heaven and earth." Gen. i. 1. 

If stars could be' seen only from one place on earth, 
a learned man said, great pilgrimages would be made 
to this place to see the wonders of the heavens. But they 
surround us on all sides, we can see them any clear 
night, so the sight has become too common for us. We 
do not value what we meet every day and therefore we 
forget the wonders of the heavens. Even if we turn 
our eyes to the stars few of us know their wonders, and 
soon we return to earth and forget our Creator amid the 
busy scenes of life. 



CHAPTER II.— THE NUMBER OF SUNS AND THE DIS- 
TANCES SEPARATING THEM. 

Five hundred millions of suns. Thousands and 
thousands of nebulae condensing into suns. Spaces so 
far, so wide, so deep, that light traveling at the rate 
of 186,000 miles a second takes 1,800 years to reach 
us, and 3,600 years to cross the universe. Gentle 
reader, can you grasp these figures? Do you realize 
the amount of matter God made, and the extent of the 
heavenly spaces ? When we say God is infinite in might, 
do we understand His power ? We have no language, no 
words, no ideas to express what it is to be infinite, 
boundless, eternal, almighty. God found no more diffi- 
culty in making these orbs of heaven from nothing than 
if He had made a tiny grain of sand to float in space like 
little grains we see falling as shooting stars in clear 
nights. 

Why did He make so many orbs ? Are not so many 
utterly useless? Man as a reasonable being, using his 
reason, never works without a purpose an object or an 
end. In making these millions of suns God had a pur- 
pose, an object, and an end. For as the highest reason- 
ing Being, He could not work without a motive, an ob- 
ject and a purpose. If He made them to serve no useful 
end, He would have worked as an unreasonable Being. 
That God could not do without abusing His reason, 
being the infinitely perfect Reason, He had a motive in 
making them. Why did He create so many suns in such 
a variety of size, light, heat, colors, and at such enor- 
mous distances from each other? 

The space between the stars is cold, a cold near 
absolute zero ; that is — 449 F. If the cold of the spaces 

49 



50 WHY GOD MADE 500 MILLION SUNS. 

between the stars were that of absolute zero, this cold 
would penetrate the atmosphere, except during direct 
sunshine, so that at night man, plants and animals 
would freeze to death. Ice would cover every body of 
water, and life would soon cease. These millions of 
suns throw out their heat on all sides, and this gentle 
warmth is greater within the center of the great wheel 
of the Milky Way, where we are. This heat pervades 
all matter, enters our atmosphere, strikes down through 
the ground, preventing it freezing deep into the crust of 
the earth. This heat is radiated through the whole bulk 
of the earth's mass. You will find no part of the earth 
deep below the surface frozen, as it would be without the 
heat of these millions of suns. As you go deeper into the 
earth you find the rocks get warmer, till, if you continue, 
you will come to very hot rocks about 10,000 feet deep, 
and if you could dig deeper you would at last arrive 
where all is melted with the interior fires of our planet. 

The heat from the melted interior of our earth, and 
the heat of the millions of suns meet and pervade the 
ground, keeping it from freezing, aiding life functions 
of plant, animal and man. If suddenly these vast suns 
were blotted from the firmament, life would cease from 
earth. This is the reason God made so many millions 
of heavenly orbs — lest we might perish from the earth 
with all that live. 

Beginning with 1900, Mr. Nichols, during two years 
at the Yerks Observatory, carried out a series of experi- 
ments, with instruments of special construction, to 
measure the amount of heat we receive from the stars. 
We will not fill our pages with the details. Yega gives 
a heat of about one two-hundred millionth of a candle 
at 39 inches. Arcturus gives 2.2 times as much. In 
1895-96, Mr. Minchin and Professor Fitzgerald, of 
Trinity College, Dublin, measured the heat of many 
stars, the light of most being strong enough to print a 
photograph on sensitive films. But these suns, millions 
in number, are pouring their heat down on us not for 



MILLIONS OF SUNS REQUIRED TOR LIFE. 51 

hours or days, but since the beginning of creation. They 
have been sending out to earth not only heat, but light 
in all the colors of the rainbow, Roentgen rays, Hertzian 
rays, and Ultra rays, etc. We can hardly imagine what 
an influence they exert on the world, and on the living 
beings which sport on its surface. These rays penetrate 
the hardest rocks, and enter the tissues of all living 
beings. What an interesting study it will one day be to 
examine the influences of these light and heat rays from 
the stars falling on earth ! 

A man's body, trunk, leaves and limbs of trees present 
large surfaces to these star radiations. Many life func- 
tions we do not now understand are caused by these 
forms of energy coming from the fixed stars. This sub- 
ject has not been studied out. The light of even the small- 
est stars causes chemical changes. Plants, animals and 
the human body grow mostly at night, and this takes place 
entirely or is helped by the light and heat of the stars. 
What a Providence presided over the creation of matter 
in the formation of these millions of suns ! What won- 
ders we see in the light, heat and electricity streaming 
out from these twinkling stars down on us and on our 
earth, within the mighty Galaxy wheel. We get only 
a glimpse of the wonders of these forces, and the farther 
our knowledge penetrates the mysteries of nature, the 
more will we be raised up to the knowledge of the great 
Creator, who made all these for man's use and benefit. 

Now let us see how far these millions of suns are from 
us. Then we will get a more or less confused idea of 
the tremendous extent of the spaces between the stars. 
The reader is asked to think well on these numbers given 
as so many million miles. 

How oft we talk of millions, but do we understand 
what a million is? As here we have to deal not only 
with one, but with hundreds and thousands and millions 
of millions, we will try to explain the meaning of a mil- 
lion. Take 100 sheets of paper each 4 1-2 feet square, 
rule each into quarter-inch squares and put in each 



52 THE MEANING OF A MILLION. 

square a little round black dot or paper. Each sheet 
holds ten thousand spots, and one hundred such sheets 
would hold a million spots. They would stretch out 
450 feet in one strip, or 90 feet in five rows, and would 
cover the walls of a room 30 feet square and 25 feet high. 
Build 93 such rooms, cover the four walls 30 feet wide 
and 25 feet high with paper so prepared, each square 
representing a mile, and you will have an idea of the 
distance to the sun. But multiply 1,000,000 by 1,000,- 
000 and the result by 12,600, and you will have the dis- 
tance to the nearest part of the Milky Way. The human 
mind even can hardly grasp the tremendous distances 
of the spaces between the stars. 

Before mankind learned the true framework on which 
the universe was built, people thought the stars were 
points of light attached to crystal spheres which carried 
them round our earth each day. But when Copernicus 
gave forth the real arrangement of the heavenly bodies, 
that the earth and planets revolve round the sun at a dis- 
tance of many millions of miles, the old astronomy of 
crystal spheres was abandoned and the new science of 
the stars began its conquest of the heavenly bodies. 

The telescopic discoveries of Galileo, Kepler's laws, 
Tycho Brahe's researches and Newton's universal gravi- 
tation and the investigations of the men who came after 
them opened up a wonderful field in the heavens. 
Wealthy men and governments established observatories' 
served by men devoted to the study of the stars. 

If, they said, the earth swings round the sun once a 
year, carrying with it the moon, its satellite, why do the 
stars not shift their apparent positions when seen from 
the other side of the earth's enormous orbit ? Coper- 
nicus, Galileo and Kepler said it was because they were 
at such enormous distances from us that the path of the 
earth going round the sun was but a point compared to 
star distances. But human minds could not then grasp 
the real idea of such enormous distances, the world 
refused to believe, new ideas are always opposed, and 



BEGINNING TO MEASURE STAR DISTANCES,, 53 

long and warm were the disputes among the learned. It 
had come down from time immemorial that all was made 
for man, that the earth was the center of the whole uni- 
verse. But these new theories removed the earth from 
its central position in the heavens, and many supposed 
the teachings contradicted revelation. Books were writ- 
ten for and against the new astronomy, and disputes 
disturbed the world in the days of Galileo. 

Slowly but surely Father Copernicus' discoveries 
made their way among the learned, who began to in- 
vestigate the heavenly mysteries. Towards the end of 
the eighteenth century Venus passed between us and 
the sun, her transit was then carefully measured and 
later with transits and more refined instruments. When 
the observations were figured out, they gave the sun's 
distance as 92,780,000 miles. Here was a base or a 
giant yardstick with which to measure the distance of 
the stars. 

Six months later the earth is on the other side of the 
sun, 185,800,000 miles from where it was, and this is 
the enormous base-line we use in our measurements. 
We can measure the width of a river or any distant ob- 
ject by marking off a base-line the length of which is 
well known, and then taking the angles as we look at the 
object we wish to measure, we can find the distance 
within the fraction of an inch without crossing the 
river. A little figuring and measuring of base-line and 
angles only are required. 

Learned men applied these principles to the stars to 
find how far away they were, about 40 stars have been 
measured and about 30 more with not such exact results. 

Riding on an engine, or on the front seat of a trolley 
car, distant objects open out as you come nearer, fly 
past and group together behind. Do the stars show our 
sun with his planets traveling through space? Sir 
William Herschel a century ago suspected that they do, 
and set to work to find where we are going. From the 
^motions of the stars he judged we are traveling towards 



54 THE MOVEMENTS OF THE FIXED STARS. 

the constellation Hercules. Later learned men took up 
the question, found he was right, and fixed the star Arc- 
turus round which, with our sun, we are sweeping in a 
mighty orbit we will later describe. 

How was this found? Long, numerous, and careful 
observations showed that towards Hercules the stars 
are opening out, separating from each other and that on 
the opposite side they are closing up, as you see objects 
when you ride in a car. Carefully measuring these mo- 
tions, the place towards which the sun is going was 
found. After a study of many thousands of star-mo- 
tions, was the point determined towards which we are 
traveling, with our sun and his planets at the rate of 
about 12 to 15 miles a second, 189,216,000 miles a 
year. 

The changes of place of the stars led to remarkable 
conclusions regarding the vast expanse of the universe. 
The mind cannot grasp the distances between the stars. 
The changes of about 50 stars, called their parallaxes, 
have been so often measured they are looked on as cor- 
rect. They vary from three-quarters to one hundredth 
of a second. Using our base-line of 185,800,000 miles, 
the diameter of the path or circle the earth follows round 
the sun each year, and using the finest instruments, after 
thousands of observations we can find no change in the 
positions of the stars Rigel, Canopus, and Alpha Cygni. 
How far, then, are they from us ? We cannot express it 
in figures, for numbers would be meaningless. We must 
depend on their brilliancy, and on the spectroscope to 
tell their distance. 

Six other stars, all but one of the first magnitude, have 
a parallax of 1-5 0th of a second. Erne more have a par- 
allax very small or none at all, six of them are in, or 
very near, the Milky Way, which is so far away that all 
studies up to our day show no parallax for any of its 
stars. As nearly all the stars are distributed within or 
along the borders of the Milky Way, we can conclude at 
what an enormous distance most of these stars ere. We 



HOW STAB MOVEMENTS ARE POUND. 55 

can only express their* distances by the time it takes 
their light to come to us — that is, from 400, to 1,800 
years traveling at the rate of 186,000 miles in a second 
Reader, looking into the depths of these spaces in which 
God made matter, can you grasp the extent of the spaces 
between the stars ? Multiply a million by a million, this 
by twenty-six, and the result by a hundred and you have 
the distance to these stars expressed in miles — that is, 
2,600,000,000,000,000. All sources of error were stud- 
ied and taken into account, and the distances, enormous 
as they are, were found about as given. 

Then they used another method to see if these figures 
were correct. Oft two stars near together appear in the 
field of the telescope, one having no motion, the other 
found to be moving. In 130 before Christ, Hipparchus 
gave the position of many stars, and in 1717 Halley 
found many of them did not occupy the places this Greek 
gave them. Later observations showed that numerous 
stars are changing place, and after 40 or 50 years their 
motion can be measured. Some move at the rate of 
from 7 to 8 seconds of a degree in a year, while others 
require 20, 40 and 100 years to move that much. Not 
the brightest but often stars of lowest magnitude show 
the largest motion — in fact, some of the brightest stars 
have no movement at all. This proves the stars are not 
all of the same size. One star of the sixth magnitude 
has the greatest movement. 

A hundred stars have been found having each year a 
movement of more than one second of an arc; a large 
number have less than this, but the large majority are 
immovable as far as can be seen. The easiest way is to 
compare a moving star with one that has no motion; 
observe them every fine night as they come into the tele- 
scopic field, and mark their places. In this way more 
than a hundred measurements can be taken in a year. 
How is it done ? With the Heliometer, a telescope witH 
the great glass in its upper end cut in two through its 
center, the two halves slide one on the other by a very 



56 A TELESCOPE TO MEASUEE STAB MOTION. 

fine screw motion marked with great care. Turning this 
screw brings the two stars one upon the other to see if 
they moved since the first time they were seen. Each 
half of the glass of the great telescope brings one of the 
stars to the eye and no corrections are wanted. Many 
men in different parts of the world look at the same 
stars at the same time with this instrument, their figures 
are compared and found to agree in a striking manner. 

Professor Pritchard of the Oxford University first 
used this instrument with a reflector of 13 inches. Later, 
other astronomers photographed the stars with it, thus 
fixing their positions on the silver print so they can be 
studied at leisure. Before they published the distance of 
61 Cygni, they took 330 different photographs and took 
30,000 measurements of other stars shown on the pic- 
tures, and compared them with the measurements given 
by the method used before. We give these details to 
show with what care astronomers carry out their work 
before giving the results to the world. ~No guessing is 
ever allowed in science where we are looking into the 
work of the Almighty's figuring, who made the universe 
and based it on mathematics. 

Weak is the will, darkened is the mind steeped in 
worldly things, we do not see the Might of God and 
seldom think of Him. We are gazing out through our 
instruments on the footprints of His infinite power. 

You who under starry skies can never pray, 

Scoff not at me a thinking clod ; 
For me my strength from day to day 

Is in Communion with my God. 

Ever round me life throbs, and I stand 
Outgazing on His tremendous Power 

"Who lives within me and on either hand. 
Him I adore each fleeting hour. 

Prom farthest historic times, men believed earth the 
center of the universe, till in 1542, Very Rev. Father 
Copernicus, canon of the cathedral, published his book 
with his theory that the earth was only one of the small 



MEN WHO FIRST MEASURED STAR DISTANCES. 57 

heavenly bodies revolving round the sun. But old ideas 
die hard, and a storm rose round his head. Tycho Brahe 
rejected his theory, and spent 20 years measuring with 
his most accurate instruments the changes of the stars 
from their positions as the earth swung round the sun, 
on her path 185,800,000 miles in diameter, and he failed 
to find the slightest movement in them. But Tycho, with 
his finest instruments, could measure only four minutes 
of an arc. Still Copernicus' system made rapid strides 
among the learned. 

In 1610 Galileo pointed his little telescope to the fixed 
stars, other astronomers took up the work, but for 108 
years no star was found to change its position. The mi- 
crometer was invented, the two Herschels and Struves 
worked on the problem of finding the distance of a star, 
two centuries of vast labor passed, and in 1840 Bessel, 
after working three years on the problem, found the 
distance of 61 Cygni by triangulation. This star is 
590,000 times farther from us than the sun. Multiply 
this by 93 millions of miles, and you have the distance 
of this star, from which it takes light with the velocity 
of 186,000 miles a second, 9 years to come to us. The 
distance is so great it is unthinkable. 

At the same time Henderson, at the Cape of Good 
Hope, with more perfect instruments, was taking obser- 
vations of the star Alpha Centauri, and found it 275,020 
times farther away than the sun. Other noted men took 
up the work, and measured the distances of many 
stars. Light takes about 4 years and three months to 
come to us from the nearest fixed star. The distance of 
about 50 stars has been measured, but the most delicate 
instruments man will ever make will not measure how 
far away are hundreds of millions of suns. 

The nearest star is over twenty-five thousand billion 
miles away. This distance is beyond the grasp of the 
imagination, though not beyond the reach of mind 
guided by mathematical calculations. A spider web is 
so fine that a pound of it would encircle the earth. It 



58 THE PROBABLE DISTANCE OF SOME STARS. 

would take ten pounds of it to reach the moon and over 
three thousand pounds to stretch to the sun. But enough 
to reach the nearest star would weigh half a million tons. 
If a railroad could be built to this star and the fare 
fixed at 2 cents a mile, the ticket would cost $125,- 
000,000,000— thirty times more than all the gold in 
the world. 

The north star is about two hundred and fifty billion 
miles distant, its light takes 45 years to reach us. We 
see the fixed stars with the light which left them on its 
flight years ago. If every star were blotted out, four and 
a half years would pass before we would be aware of the 
fact regarding the nearest, and hundreds of years before 
the light of the most distant would be extinguished for 
us. 

Alpha Centauri and 61 Cygni are the nearest stars. 
The first is in the constellation Centaur, and the latter 
in the Swan. The first, brightest star in the southern 
heavens, is 275 times farther than our sun, that is 
25,547,500,000 miles away, its light taking four years 
and three months in its flight of 286,000 miles a second 
to come to us. The light with which you see it was that 
time on its journey. The star 6 Cygni is nearly twice 
as far away, and its light is seven years and three months 
on its flight before entering your eye. We must remem- 
ber that the brightness of a star gives no proof of its 
distance, as they are not of the same size. 

Sirius, i( The Dog Star," brightest in the northern sky, 
is fifty-eight thousand billions of miles away (58,000,- 
000,000,000). The Polar star is two hundred and ten 
thousand billions of miles from us (210,000,000,000,- 
000). This is the most important star in the heavens, 
because being almost exactly north towards which the 
north pole points, when seamen see it they know how to 
stear their ship. It is 2,152,841 times the distance from 
here to the sun. If we could run an express train at 60 
miles an hour to the Pole-star without stopping it would 
take 350,000,000 years to reach it.. 



WHY THE STARS ARE SO EAR AEART. 59 

Sirius is 7,000,000 miles in diameter and has a 
mass 7,000 times greater than the sun. The size and 
weight of Sirius seems great compared to our sun, yet 
it is quite small when compared to the mighty Arcturus, 
round which we are going with the sun at the rate of 
about 150,000,000 miles a year, as some astronomers 
estimate. 

These distances are overpowering to the mind. We 
cannot grasp them. The distances between things on 
our little earth give us no idea of how far from each 
other the stars are separated. We can only take the dis- 
tance from here to our sun as a yard-measure, and that 
gives us but a vague conception of the grandeur of the 
plan on which the Infinite built His universe. The ques- 
tion rises in the reader's mind: Why are they so far 
away from each other ? There is harmony and design in 
nature. All matter attracts all other matter by weight. 

Suppose the suns, now so far separated, were grouped 
close together near our solar system, three effects would 
be produced. The light and heat of so many suns would 
be so overpowering that nothing could live on earth. 
The whole world would be melted with their terrific heat. 
The sky would be like a furnace blast of melted iron. 
Sun and moon produce the tides, and these mighty suns 
would cause tides in the air, producing vast destructive 
cyclones. The tides in the sea would sweep over the 
continents, destroying all life. The attractions of these 
tremendous suns so near us would pull the earth out of 
its course, near the sun sometimes and away from him 
at other times, so the changes in his light and heat 
would be so great that nothing could live on our planet. 
But the stars have been placed by a far-seeing Providence 
so far away that these changes do not take place. 

For centuries learned men, versed in all the sciences, 
devoted their lives to the investigations of the vast prob- 
lem of the universe. The laws of attraction, the weight 
of all the suns, their motion, centripetal and centrifugal 
forces are well known, and the amount of matter God 



60 THE SIZES OF THE OTHEft SOTS. 

made diffused in the shape of globes have been figured 
out. All the suns are in motion. If one was at rest it 
would fall into another. If one is coming towards the 
earth or going away, the spectroscope reveals it, and tells 
us its velocity. Careful calculations of star No. 1830 
of Groombridge's catalogue have been made, and its dis- 
tance found to be 2,062,650 times greater than that of 
the sun from the earth — that is, 192 trillions of miles. 
Its revolution takes place in 195,000 years, its motion 
through space being 200 miles a second. These figures 
are overwhelming — even to trained minds of astronomers 
used to computing vast figures. By a long series of 
figures we find this star has 300 million times more mat- 
ter than our sun, which has 333,000 times more matter 
than our earth. 

You can therefore imagine how much material this 
star contains compared to our earth. But this is only 
one star out of millions, and you can therefore have a 
faint idea of the whole matter brought forth from 
nothing at creation. They estimate the amount of mat- 
ter required in the universe, the weight of which gives 
this velocity to this star, must be at least 32 billion times 
that contained in the sun. But as the visible stars con- 
tain much less matter than this, it is estimated that there 
are millions of dark suns or globes floating in space. 

When, the distances of the many stars having been 
measured, we compare their light with that of our sun, 
examine them through the spectroscope and learn many 
things relating to these brilliant bodies. The star Rigel 
gives about 10,000 times as much light as the sun, so 
that if its surface has the same brightness, it must be 
100 times larger than the sun. But as our sun belongs 
to the yellow species of suns, for its light is not white 
but yellow, Rigel, Sirius and such white suns must be 
from 1,000 to 2,000 times larger than the sun, 853,000 
miles in diameter; Rigel must be at least about 85,300,- 
000 miles in diameter and would almost fill the space 
between us and the sun. 



A JOURNEY ON A BEAM OF LIGHT. 61 

B Aurigae, a white star of the second magnitude, is 
a double star, and Mr. Gore figures that its materials are 
five times the mass of the sun. G. Leonis, 300 times 
more brilliant than our sun, is composed of glowing 
gases seven times rarer than air; a surface needed to 
give the same amount of light is thousands of times 
larger than the surface of the sun. Examining one 
after the other of the stars whose distance is known, we 
find many of them much larger than the sun. 

Many stars found nearer than the ones given above, 
are only one-fiftieth as bright as the sun, therefore, they 
must be either smaller, cooler, or give out less light. If 
the nearest star, A Centauri, had a diameter as large as 
the distance from us to the sun, it would be seen with a 
disk as large as that of Jupiter's first satellite. 

How little we think of the distances between the stars. 
Suppose we start on a journey to see some of them. We 
will take a beam of light as our railroad, and go with 
the rapidity of light. The first second we passed along 
186,000 miles. The next second we are 372,000 miles 
away, and in three seconds we are 558,000 miles on our 
journey. In ten minutes we are 112,600,000 miles from 
our earth. An hour goes by, a day, a month, and years 
pass, as we continue without stopping our flight of tre- 
mendous swiftness, and then we are only approaching the 
nearest star. Centuries roll by and after 1,800 years 
we at last arrive at the outer boundaries of the Milky 
Way, where we look beyond into dark nothingness — 
eternal night. There we are at the limit of that space, in 
which the Almighty made the stars and suns and nebulas 
to float and circle round. 

But let us give a more detailed description of what we 
saw on our flight through space. When we have passed 
twenty-six hundred of millions of miles we are approach- 
ing the nearest of the stars. We take our stand on one 
of its planets, and wait to mark the altered aspect of the 
heavens. We see the old heavens have passed away over 
our heads, as well as old earth from beneath our feet* 



62 A GLANCE AT THE UNIVERSE FROM OUTSIDE. 

But not entirely, only the nearest stars have changed 
their positions. There is the Little Bear with its Polar 
star and the Great Bear with its Pointers. There the 
hands of Orion, and the Pleiades still hang in the same 
place. Vast as is the space we passed, it is not a thou- 
sandth of that which separates our earth from the most 
distant stars. The mighty Arcturus is still as it ap- 
peared to Job so long ago, and Mazzaroth as seen from 
earth. They all appear as would the trees and objects 
in the landscape if we had changed our position on earth 
about 60 feet. 

Let us go on. Sun after sun beams upon us, each 
with his brilliant band of planets and comets ; sun after 
sun sweeps by, the light from them paling in the dis- 
tance, as we leave them behind in our flight, and a change 
creeps over the face of the heavens. The general out- 
lines and figures of the constellations remain the same, 
but those behind gradually group together and shrink, 
while those in front open out and grow larger. As we 
near the Milky Way, the stars become more numerous. 
They seem in some places bunched together while long 
wide and deep rifts are seen between their constellations. 

We pass through this mighty King of stars with which 
God encircled his material creation, and look into the 
mysteries of vasty abyss on abyss beyond. [Nothingness 
and dark eternal Night reigns beyond the outer stars. 
Before, behind, to right and left — whichever way we turn 
our gaze, it meets with naught but the utter blackness of 
darkness — the deep gloom of the starless midnight sky is 
unbroken by the gleam of a single star. Onward still we 
wing our daring flight, the last resting-place of matter is 
passed, the last star oasis is left behind, as we shoot 
into the trackless wastes of boundless unmeasured space. 
Long ago the earth dimmed and went out. Long since 
our sun disappeared. The constellations grouped together 
and became bright clouds of light. And now we see far 
behind a great ring of stars, far away it is getting smaller 
and smaller all the time, till at last this too has quenched 



IN REALMS OF NOTHINGNESS AND ETERNAL NIGHT. 63 

its light in the deep gloom. All created matter has been 
left behind, and we stand alone face to face with that 
eternal nothingness, that darkness on the face of the abyss 
in which God made matter when he created heaven and 
earth. 

But suppose we brought our greatest telescope with 
us, now we turn it on the universe back of us and take a 
look at the worlds we left behind. From the darkness 
steals out a white patch in the centre of our field of 
vision. We turn on the higher powers of the glass, and 
the sky is mottled with little flecks of white. We move 
the great glass a little and new spots of white are seen. 
As we swing round the telescope on all sides, the stars 
are seen as motes that dance in the sunbeams on a sum- 
mer day, but they are close as are the stars in the firma- 
ment they are as numberless as the grains of sand on sea- 
shores. They are the constellations within the tremen- 
dous ring of God's worlds, they are the rifts and clusters 
of the Milky Way, now looking like clouds piled up as 
on a summer day. 

Back towards created worlds we go seeking out these 
bright clouds in our flight for home. The white patches 
and clouds get larger and larger. The great ring opens 
out. A thousand, and more thousands of suns dissolve 
from the clouds and brighten into orbs, some white, some 
red, others yellow. They are of all colors of the rainbow. 
They are God's precious stones, but glowing with their 
own light. The diamond brilliant blue, the amethyst 
glow, the topaz, the green of the emerald, the ruby's 
gleam, the tourmaline's sparkle, all precious stones we 
prize on earth — all are but weak imperfect images of 
these glowing suns. 'Not one of these suns is less in won- 
der, in glory, in beam and splendor than our sun. How 
little we think of God who shows his wondrous power 
and glory in the worlds of matter he brought forth from 
nothing. 

Let us force in on our mind the awful extent, the in- 
conceivable grandeur, the mighty plan, the tremendous 



64 THE UNSPEAKABLE GRANDEUR OF THE UNIVERSE. 

foundations on which Omnipotent built the universe. 
Our earth goes round the sun once a year, and in six 
months we are 186 millions of miles away from where 
we were. We take an observation of a star at both 
places, but the very finest instruments give only a 
change of one-tenth of an inch, seen at a distance of 
1,730 ft. Alpha Centauri, the nearest of the stars to us, 
shows a change of only f of a second, that is double the 
distance of the earth from the sun, a space 185,800,000 
miles, seen from that star, would appear no larger than 
a tenth of an inch, seen a third of a mile away. The 
reader will, therefore, realize with what care astronomi- 
cal instruments must be made and what problems learned 
men must work out before they lay their discoveries be- 
fore the world. 

Faint feels the human mind before these distances, 
and we ask ourselves where are these magnificent 
creations rising above each other in the scale of grand- 
eur and magnificence to end. First we have our little 
earth, with its varied living beings of plants, animals, 
and men, the other planets with their attendant moons 
and satellites swinging round the sun, then millions 
of other suns each with his suns or planets circling 
round him, then thousands of great clusters of suns, 
sometimes millions in each, and at last comes the 
mighty Milky Way, running round the heavens, inclos- 
ing as with a nuptial ring all matter made by God. 
How far must we go, how many years will pass, how 
many learned men will have to devote their lives before 
we will know all the mysteries of these worlds, and suns 
and planets? Our finite powers perhaps will never 
sound the depths of material creation. A veil never to be 
pierced will always cover the details of the heavens. 
The Almighty has placed his stern fiat before the ad- 
vancing flood of human knowledge, which fain would 
penetrate the mysteries that are beyond. We are in 
worlds of dead, crude matter, with only force and move- 
ment developed into light, heat, electricity, attraction 



THE HEAVENS SHOW THE GLORY OF GOD. 65 

and repulsion. But while glory rises above glory in the 
starry heavens, there is another wonder — life, lowest in 
the plants, higher in the animal, transcendent in man's 
reason, higher still in angel, but eternal life in the God- 
heads There, not in place, but in nearness to the un- 
created Godhead, who shines not with reflected light but 
with the light of glory, there is the source, the eternal 
Reason, the Mathematician, who built the universe ac- 
cording to the plans and specifications infinite and 
eternal in Himself. 

O night how sublime is thy language for me 
When calmly and thoughtful I look up to thee 
Five millions of suns roll there in thy breast, 
There from creation thy vasty form dressed. 
Telling us of the powers of Him we adore, 
Till we long to go live with him evermore. 



CHAPTER HI.— SINGLE, DOUBLE, CLOUSTERED, CHANG- 
ING AND COLORED SUNS. 

X stab to naked eye seems a point of light, through the 
telescope it is the same point and the highest powers of 
our instruments never show a disk. Long the fixed stars 
were supposed to be single bodies, but the spectroscope 
and other instruments prove them double, triple — that is 
two, three, four, or more suns revolving round their 
common center. 

During the first half of the nineteenth century, many 
thousands of such multiple stars were discovered, and as 
the powers of our instruments increased, different obser- 
vatories found them in thousands. Professor Burnham 
of the Yerks Observatory reported having discovered 
1,290 such stars between 1871 and 1899, these having 
been found by the great telescope alone. But when the 
improved spectroscope was turned on the sky, it opened 
up a world of new wonders. Double, triple and multi- 
ple stars of enormous extent and numbers excited the 
highest curiosity and interest. 

The orbits or paths they follow going round each 
other were figured out, it was found their revolutions 
range from periods of 11 years, the shortest observed by 
the telescope, up even to the millions of years it takes 
the widely separated stars of the constellations to make 
;their revolutions. But the spectroscope showed them 
moving in revolutions from thousands of years down in 
unbroken series to a few years, to months, to days, even 
to hours. The time of their revolutions enable us to 
figure out their distances from each other, the weight of 
matter in each sun, the amount of light and the heat 
they give. We can tell the size of these bodies. For as 
all matter is ruled by mathematics even to the farthest 



WE SEE SUNS NOW BEING MADE. 67 

ends of the universe, we follow the footsteps of the 
Creator who made them, weighed them, put them at 
that distance apart, and gave them the impulse by which 
they circle round forever. 

We find some suns separated from each other millions 
of miles, others are nearer and nearer to each other, 
some go moving slower, others faster according to the 
mass of materials and distance they are apart. Eut 
some are found actually in contact, that is, one sun is 
breaking away from another. Thus we can look at suns 
and worlds being born as our earth was formed from our 
sun in these far-off days, when our planetary system 
was constructed. In 1892 Professor Lee of Chicago 
foretold this mode of the division of suns, and in ten 
years his words were fulfilled, for suns were observed in 
process of formation. 

As these orbs of gases or suns, turn faster and faster 
on their axes, great tides are produced in their equatorial 
regions, and as the rotation becomes quicker, a ring of 
glowing matter breaks off, as a wheel bursts, and this 
matter forms a new sun whirling round its primary. 
According to the natural law this new sun should rotate 
farther and farther away, and at last go wandering 
through space as an erratic body. But it does not. 
When it gets so far away that its tendency to fly away 
just balances the attraction of the two bodies, an 
Almighty Power steps in, stops it from going farther and 
there it goes on forever. 

In 1902 Professor Campbell published his researches 
at the Lick Observatory, Cal., and states that out of 350 
stars he examined, one in eight was found to be double, 
and he concludes with these words, " The star that is not 
a spectroscopic binary will prove to be a rare exception," 
Professor Darwin shows that the " dumb-bell " is a figure 
of equilibrium. We find it exists in the stars, and that 
it was the starting point in the formation of the ever-in- 
creasing number of double stars we are finding almost 
every day. Learned men have figured out that when our 



68 CURIOUS SHAPES OF SOME SUNS. 

earth was being formed, it broke up into the " dumb- 
bell " form. That is, following the laws we see ruling 
the double stars in their formation, a great mass of mat- 
ter was jerked out of what is now the great depression 
of the Pacific Ocean. This great mass of materials be- 
came the moon. As the earth rotated round on its axis 
faster and faster as it condensed, it thus threw off the 
moon. But our satellite did not go wandering through 
space, for God placed it where it is now. " A lesser light 
to rule the night, and the stars." Gen. i. 16. 

Most people believe the stars are round as a ball. The 
greater number are round, but many are shaped like an 
egg, a long cigar, or a lens. The attraction of other 
stars and their rapid revolutions pull them into these 
shapes. As they become more elongated the excrescence 
is thrown off, and becomes a new star. In this way the 
double, triple, and multiple stars were made. This was 
the way the planets were thrown from the great nebula, 
or gaseous misty globe of matters, now composing our 
solar system. But when these orbs are thus thrown out 
from the central body, they do not go wandering through 
space to collide, perhaps, with other suns, bringing de- 
struction and disorder in the heavens. The Almighty 
steps in and fixes them in their orbits. 

Beta Lyra? is the brightest of the pear-shaped stars, 
and in time it will divide into two suns. This is the 
way the double stars were made. Algol, most mysteri- 
ous of the changing stars, is pear-shaped, and when it 
turns its larger surface towards us it appears much 
brighter than when it turns its smaller surface. Ten 
pear-shaped stars have been found, Hive in the northern 
and Hive in the southern hemisphere. Two of these are 
of special interest. For the bodies composing these two 
stars are in actual contact like a figure 8. When they 
get a little farther apart they will be like dumb-bells. 
Later the connecting link will snap and they will revolve 
farther and farther from each other, their surfaces oscil- 
lating in great swelling pulsations, gradually dying down 



GIGANTIC TIDES FORM NEW SUNS. 69 

like waves. Thus suns and worlds are born in the 
heavens. 

The nearer these bodies are to each other the more 
oval-shaped the orbs are, because of the mutual attrac- 
tion, and they are slowly receding from each other. 
We have an example of the oval form in a small way, 
in the tides, caused by the attraction of the sun and 
moon, which raise the waters of the oceans. As all stars 
are metallic gas and vapors in an intense condition of 
heat, they are pulled out of the round shape when near 
another great body. The raising of these mighty melted 
metallic tides on stars, uses up the energy of gravity or 
weight, and shoves the stars farther apart in an ever- 
widening spiral. Then one after another these suns be- 
come pear-shaped and take on other shapes at different 
times. They shed great portions, which become planets. 
But the breaking up of matter into worlds does not con- 
tinue forever, or the universe would be separated up into 
little grains of matter as at creation. For a third law 
steps in to stop the process of breaking up. The gaseous 
globe condenses by loss of heat so that farther divisions 
are impossible. 

The movements of these millions of suns prove a 
Providence presided over their creation. Their motions 
subject to law, guided by mathematics, show an Intelli- 
gence, infinite in wisdom, directed them, and still pre- 
sides over their gyrations. The mechanics of the heav- 
ens prove God. Reason draws no other conclusion. 

O see how the stars in their courses are swinging, 

Each steadfastly held in the grip of the law, 
Like silent light choirs they ever are singing 

Silent hymns to the Eternal we never saw. 
Look and see how the orbs shine in the offing, 

Since creation floating on highways they trod, 
O how my heart sinks when I hear people skoffing, 

Who never have studied the wonders of God. 

The brightness and density of stars depend on: 
1, their distance from us ; 2, their diameter, and 3, their 



70 THE TREMENDOUS SIZES OF SOME SUNS. 

brilliancy. We measured the distance of many stars, 
we found their diameters by the times of their revolu- 
tion, whether they are double, or when three or more 
revolve round their common center of gravity, and the 
spectroscope shows the materials of which they are com- 
posed, as well as their brilliancy. 

Orion is the brightest star in the sky, and Sirius comes 
next. Kegel is 7,800 times brighter than our sun would 
be if removed to its place. It has a small companion of 
the 8th magnitude, which itself is double. Kegel's mass 
has not been exactly figured out, but it must be enormous 
to shine with that white light which takes 300 years to 
reach us. Professor Gore estimates Kegel as 20,000 
times larger than our sun. He says Sirius is 31.6 times 
brighter than our sun would be in the same place. 
Dr. See says Sirius' mass is 2.36 times that of the sun, 
and it is 18 times brighter. The spectroscope shows it 
much hotter than the sun, while its materials are so scat- 
tered with the awful heat that they resemble the nebulge. 
We know from these observations that his mighty mass 
extends for millions of miles like metallic vapors, its 
density being only 0.019 that of water. 

According to their brightness, the stars are catalogued. 
From the first to the seventeenth magnitude, with naked 
eye we can see only those from the first down to the 
sixth magnitude. The telescope shows us stars down to 
the seventeenth magnitude, while the photograph reveals 
millions beyond the grasp of our greatest glasses. 

There are about three times as many stars of one 
magnitude than in the next magnitude of greater bright- 
ness. There are 18 stars of the first magnitude, 55 of 
the second, 170 of the third, 500 of the fourth, 1,500 of 
the fifth, and 4,500 of the sixth, beyond which, unaided 
sight cannot see a star. Bring the telescope to your aid, 
and millions flash into your field of vision. There are 
9,656,000 of the twelfth magnitude, 14,000,000 of the 
thirteenth magnitude, and they rapidly increase to the 
seventeenth magnitude, beyond which a 40-inch telescope 



71 

cannot resolve them. !Now turn the photographic ap- 
paratus to the sky, and millions of stars unseen in the 
greatest glass will print white dots. Men have tried to 
count them, all agree they number more than 500 mil- 
lions, while some scientists estimate that more than 
1,000 millions of suns shine in the sky. 

Who can conceive that number? "Who can estimate 
the amount of matter in the universe? Our finest in- 
struments have penetrated beyond the borders of ma- 
terial creation; pure science, discoveries to our day, 
higher mathematics, the genius of our astronomers, have 
sounded the depths of space, forced from nature these 
lessons of the creative might in the beginning, and prove 
the indescribable power and providence of Him who 
made these globes without an effort. Faint feel faculties 
of man thinking of things cold science tells of God. 

Every improvement in photographing the stars shows 
the tendency of the orbs to arrange themselves in large 
winding, often curiously looped and involved rows. 
These star-streams are seen especially in the richer parts 
of the Milky Way, and the better the photos, the more 
defined is this extraordinary phenomenon. Besides, there 
are dark lanes in which no stars are seen, and these are 
associated with the bright streams of brilliant suns. 
The appearance recalls crooked paths meandering across 
a sandy waste, where the pebbles are heaped up each 
side of the path. Who was the Infinite who walked 
through these vast regions heaping up mighty suns, as 
your foot lifts the pebbles and sands when you travel 
along the dry, dusty plain ? 

These appearances occur too often to suppose they 
are accidental. It is plain some Cause with infinite 
might, placed the tremendous suns in these streams, 
separated by dark spaces devoid of stars. There is a 
law we do not understand regulating these things. Why 
are we down almost in the very middle of the whole uni- 
verse of suns and heavenly bodies, where all is quiet 
and stable ? Here we are free from the vast forces which 



72 THE SOLAR SYSTEM BELONGS TO A STAR STREAM. 

would destroy life. Did no infinite Wisdom place our 
solar system here where life might flourish ? 

The suns, both of the Milky Way, and those compos- 
ing the crystal globes of suns concentric and one within 
the others, with our sun near the center, must have been 
arranged with a view of this world with its living or- 
ganisms. Each star occupies the place ordained for it 
in the constitution of the stellar universe. The stars 
have not fallen into the places where we find them by 
any accident. For the universe is like an immense crys- 
tal globe, formed of stars, suns, millions in number, all 
held by and obeying the laws of gravitation. 

Although our sun with his planets seem to us to be 
separated from the other suns, yet it falls into its place 
in this tremendous system, and it also obeys the laws 
which rule the other orbs. Even we are subject to gravi- 
tation, for our bodies are heavy, and are attracted by 
every other sun even if they are millions in number. 
For all matter in the universe attracts all other matter. 

Recent investigations show our sun also belongs to a 
star-stream, is a member of a star-cluster, and if we 
could look at it from a sufiicient distance, we would 
find at a glance the suns of the stream to which it 
belongs. But we think of a crystal ball as formed of 
hard, rigid, bright material, whereas we know the stars 
are all in swift motion, all acting on each other by gravi- 
tation. This great star-crystal we call the universe 
" flows from form to form " " changing yet unchanged " 
never losing its identity. The imagination can hardly 
picture the gigantic ever-shifting beauty this kaleido- 
scopic, cosmic crystal sphere of the universe in all its 
grandeur, harmony and beauty as it is seen by the Om- 
nipotent, who made it of suns and orbs and sent them 
going on in their motions to mark out a time next in 
length to eternity. 

Now let us give a rapid glance over these star-clusters 
spread over the sky. Closely examined they seem to be 
less regular than they first appeared. They have vacant 



THE WONDERS OF CLUSTERED STARS. 73 

spaces in them, rifts of different forms, and far beyond 
is seen the dark heavens where there are no stars. These 
features are so like what we find in the larger nebulae, that 
we conclude these clusters were formed by the condensa- 
tion of gigantic nebulae-metallic vapors, gases, dust, and 
small solid forms of irregular matter. The conclusion 
is forced on us, that all the stars are the result of 
matter condensed into globes, from the materials God 
made at creation, to which he gave attraction and move- 
ment. 

While the small clusters of stars are found, for the 
most part, far from the Milky Way, the larger ones are 
near its borders. The Magellanic Clouds alone ex- 
cepted, all the great clusters are near this giant ring, 
where the forces of attraction were strongest, because 
of the more abundant matter in the mighty circle of 
suns. The attraction of these millions of stars long ago 
gathered up the materials of the nebula?, while far from 
it the matter was distributed thinner, and it did not 
condense. Therefore away from the Milky Way we 
find the nebulae most abundant. 

Round or globular clusters of stars have the greater 
number of variable stars — that is, suns with changing 
heat and light. The Harvard Observatory devoted 
much time to this subject, and of the 23 clusters sur- 
veyed with the spectroscope, in which 19,050 stars were 
examined, 509 were found to be variable, but they were 
not found distributed in regular proportions. 

We have, therefore, a complete system of the growth 
of suns and worlds from the enormous scattered masses 
of gases and separated dust, composed of metals we 
know as nebulae, or white nebulous clouds, various stars, 
double stars, triple and quadruple stars, condensing 
into red suns, these becoming yellow stars as the heat in- 
creases, till they become intensely blue stars. Thus the 
suns are evolved, as they gather the diffused materials, 
under the laws of weight or gravitation ; they grow larger 



V4 WHEN SUNS CONTRACT THEIR HEAT INCREASES. 

and hotter, under the laws given by the Great Architect 
of the universe. 

We must remember the most brilliant of these suns, 
showing in the spectroscope that they are gases, are not 
always the hottest, or as hot as the suns less bright. For 
the law is that a sun may become hotter by contraction 
through loss of heat. For this contraction through loss 
of heat, when a brilliant body is completely formed of 
gases, acts thus according to Eewcomb's law. 

" When a spherical mass of incandescent gas contracts, 
through loss of heat by radiation into space, its temper- 
ature continually becomes higher as long as the gaseous 
condition is retained." 

During the eons of ages while suns are growing in 
size and heat by the meteorites and masses of matter fall- 
ing into them, they blaze out brighter and brighter till 
all the gases, dust, and materials of the spaces round 
them are gathered in. After that the loss of light and 
heat is no longer kept up by fresh matter falling, a 
slow contraction takes place with an increased heat and 
light till envelopes of melted metals cover their sur- 
faces. These metals floating on the surface, check the 
loss of their heat and light while the contraction still 
going on heats them more and more, whence our sun may 
be much hotter than the most brilliant of the other stars, 
although it does not give out as much light or heat. For 
the metals in a state of gases surrounding its surface, re- 
tain much of the light and heat. This we see in the 
solar spectrum lines, which show how the light was 
absorbed by the metals on the surface of the sun. This 
explains how our sun sent out about the same amount of 
light and heat during the enormous epochs of geological 
times. These laws were given nature that our earth 
might not be subjected to great changes of climate, which 
would destroy all its life. 

Professor Geo. Darwin says : " The conception of the 
growth of planetary bodies by the aggregation of meteor- 
ites is a good one, and perhaps more probable than the 



StJlSTS WITH CHANGING LIGHT. 75 

hypothesis that the whole solar system was gaseous." 
Professor Wallace says, " The primitive matter, what- 
ever it was, may have been used up again and again, and 
if collisions of larger solid globes ever occur — and, it is 
assumed by most astronomers that they must sometimes 
occur — then meteoric particles of all sizes would be pro- 
duced, which might exhibit any complexity of mineral 
constitution. The material universe has probably been 
in existence long enough for all the primitive elements 
to have been again and again combined into the minerals 
found upon the earth, and many others. It cannot be 
too often repeated, that no explanation — no theory — can 
ever take us to the beginning of things, but only one or 
two steps at a time in the dim past, which may enable us 
to comprehend, however imperfectly, the process by 
which the world, or the universe, has been developed out 
of some earlier and simpler condition." 

Suns like our own shine on, giving out the same 
amount of light and heat for ages, but others change 
from time to time. These are called the variable stars. 
The periods of change are of all lengths. The period of 
the change in 30 Hydra of Havelius is 494 days, during 
which time it blazes out from the dark sky, till it be- 
comes a star of the fourth magnitude, then it gets dim- 
mer and dimmer, till it utterly fades away into the dark 
heavens. The star X of the Swan varies from the fifth 
to the eleventh magnitude in 404 days, O of the Whale, 
called the Marvelous — Mira Ceti, varies from the second 
magnitude to total extinction in 334 days. D. of 
Cepheus in 5 days, 8 hours and 37 minutes, changes 
from the third to the fifth magnitude. Many other stars 
change in varied light, and in different times. These 
changes have excited the curiosity of the learned in all 
ages. 

What are the gigantic forces playing in these suns? 
Maupertius says they are in the form of a lens. That 
is, they turn so rapidly on their axes that their equa- 
tors are thrown out so they form gigantic lenses. When 



?6 DYING SUNS AND CHANGING STARS. 

the face of the star is turned to us we see a great amount 
of light. But when the edges of the lenses are turned to 
us the light is not so great. But some suns which shone 
in former times disappeared long ago from human ken. 
In 1437 appeared a star in Auriga II of the Wolf, 
marked in Ptolemy's catalogue but is now no longer 
visible. In the seventeenth century, Cassini, and in 
the eighteenth century, W. Herschel pointed out a great 
number of stars which have completely disappeared. 
What has become of these suns ? What gigantic causes 
brought about their death? Science has not yet an- 
swered. Will our sun and world end this way? 

October 10th, 1604, in the constellation Serpentarius, 
appeared a star Arago described as white, it became the 
brightest body in the heavens, surpassing Mars, Jupiter 
and Saturn near it. It rapidly lost its light. Kepler 
saw it for the last time on November 16th, when he was 
at Turin, after which it disappeared, but it appeared 
again at the end of December, when it became brighter 
and in January surpassed Arcturus. During 1605 it 
seemed almost as bright as Saturn and then it dimin- 
ished till in March, 1606, it disappeared forever. This 
is but one example of some of the wonders seen in the 
heavens which up to our day have not been explained. 

Stars are divided into five classes. Some suddenly 
appear out of the dark firmament and are called Novae, 
" New." Others change their light for several months, 
and are named " long period " stars. Others have short 
and irregular changes. More have very short periods of 
changes. In these changing orbs, Mrs. Fleming says, 
these hydrogen lines are very bright, and Professor Bailey 
found all the stars and some clusters to be variable. Half 
the stars have hydrogen gas at a tremendous heat, 
these hydrogen stars are thickest along and through the 
Milky Way. Without this gas, they would be invisible, 
they are so far away. But the stars we see scattered 
through the sky and which are nearer to us, show about 
the same materials as metals we find on earth, and in 



WITHOUT GOD SYSTEMS CANNOT BE FORMED. 77 

the sun. Professor Pickering says the stars are distri- 
buted in the heaven, not by chance, but according to a 
regular law, and that if they were infinite in number and 
spread through endless space, the whole heavens would be 
as bright as the face of the sun all the time; the heat 
would melt everything, and nothing could live. If they 
were infinite they would touch each other and could not 
revolve. We see there is a design all through the uni- 
verse, and who was the Designer but the Eternal ? 

Many variable stars were discovered by the spectro- 
scope in 1904. Only one star out of 10,000 is visible 
to the eye. We see with the eye only about 2,000 stars. 
Red and yellow orbs are brighter than the green or blue 
stars. Blue stars print better on photo film than the red 
or yellow suns, and appear larger in the photos. Right 
ascension corresponds to longitude, declination to lati- 
tude on earth. A.D. 150, Ptolemy catalogued 1,030 
stars. About fifty years ago, Argelander catalogued in 
the northern hemisphere 324,000 down to 9th magni- 
tude. Work of cataloguing the northern hemisphere is 
going on, estimated down to 10th magnitude, 1,150,000. 

The Nebular hypothesis, first broached by a German, 
Kant, was taken up by Laplace, a French mathematician. 
When a star ring breaks up the materials must fall into 
some central mass. " To form planets, an external force 
must come in," says Professor Darwin. " Who was this 
but God ? This theory without an act of the Deity will 
not stand mathematical examination. The ring must be 
lop-sided, heavier on one side, to form a planet." 

Sir W. Herschel discovered stars revolving in periods 
of from about twelve years to several hundred years. 
These are mostly stars shining with their own light, 
having each a dark companion, which coming between 
us and it, make what we call a variable star. In the 
constellation Perseus, in earliest times was seen one of 
these variable stars, which changes from the second to 
the fourth magnitude in 4% hours, and again in the 
same time regains its brilliancy, which it retains for 69. 



78 WHAT CAUSES CHANGE OF LIGHT IN SUNS. 

hours, when it changes again. The Arabs called it Al 
Ghoul, " The Demon/' because of its strange and weird 
behavior — whence its name, Algol. Twenty-two variable 
stars of the Algol type exist. Each has a dark com- 
panion very close to it. Examining them with higher 
mathematics some were found to have only two-thirds the 
density of water, others one-eighth that of the sun's den- 
sity. 

As most of the stars are larger than the sun, they must 
be formed of gases in a state of intense heat. Mr. 
Robert's investigations show that five of these double 
bodies are in absolute contact, forming systems the shape 
of dumb-bells revolving round each other in periods of 
from 12 days to 9 hours. Starting from these we find 
thousands of double stars revolving in a continued series 
up to the twin stars of Castor, which take more than a 
thousand years to complete their revolutions. While 
Mr. Roberts was examining X Carinas, the two stars 
parted company, a world was made under his very eyes, 
and now they revolve at a distance of one-tenth of their 
diameters. 

In 1901, Roberts published the results of his observa- 
tions in South Africa. Many stars, he says, revolve so 
that their equators or the planes of their movements are 
towards us, in which systems one comes between us and 
the other sun, obscuring its light. In these cases the 
star is what we call variable. It gets dimmer for a time, 
then shines out again. Measuring the changes we can 
tell how long it takes to complete its orbit, then it is but 
a case of figuring to find their weight and how far apart 
they are. But we find thousands of stars which vary 
their light in an irregular way, and when we figure it 
out, we find there are many stars near together, re- 
volving round a common center. Carrying the obser- 
vations still further, we find that some of the bodies are 
dark. That is, some of these stars have mighty planets, 
cooled suns, revolving round them. 

Beta of Lyra, south of Vega, is a variable star, ful- 



SUNS SHOWING EXTRAORDINARY CHANGES. 79 

filling its changes in 12 days 21 hours 47 minutes and 
13 seconds. The photographs prepared at the observa- 
tory of Stonyhurst College, England, taken each day 
during its changes, showed this sun goes through remark- 
able performances. Four sources of light were found in 
this star — glowing gases giving out their own light, two 
sources, or bright bodies giving out light with dark 
lines — and at one stage of its changes other lines were 
found. Full explanations of these phenomena have not 
been given. 

The spectroscope tells us other stories. When a train 
is moving towards you the tone of the whistle is higher 
than when standing still, while when the train is moving 
from you the tone is lower. The same happens with the 
stars. When they move toward us, or from us, the lines 
of their spectra change positions, then we can tell the 
direction and velocity of the star movements, as well 
as the materials of which they are composed. This way 
the two edges of the F. line in the spectrum of the star 
B. of Lyra shows it is moving toward us at the rate of 
6S kilometers a second; its orbit is 74 million kilo- 
meters; its center of gravity is 24 millions of kilo- 
meters, and it consists of four suns sweeping round 
their center of gravity, their eclipses giving the changes 
noted above. 

Now we come to a most extraordinary class of stars — 
temporary or occasional suns, which blaze out suddenly 
in the heavens within 24 hours, and remain or disappear 
in a short time. The region called Perseus was photo- 
graphed, every star there recorded, but within ten days, 
in December, 1891, a new star, never before seen, blazed 
up from nothing to the first magnitude, within 24 hours, 
rivaling the nearby Capella in brilliancy and equalling 
stars of the first magnitude. The spectroscope was 
turned on it, photos were taken of its spectra, but the 
lines changed and shifted so, one print was not like an- 
other. What indescribable forces brought this star to 
this state of intense heat within so short a time ? Did 



80 THE MOST MYSTERIOUS OF THE SUNS. 

two vast suns come together with a mighty crash? An 
enormous region of nebulous gases was found to sur- 
round this sun ; while it shone hydrogen and helium lines 
flashed out in wonderful brilliancy. 

The changes in the hydrogen lines showed it to be 
moving at the rate of from 500 to 700 miles a second. 
The vortices, the storms of heated gases, the cyclones of 
glowing materials, the hurricanes of fiery metals, the 
tremendous forces shown by the perturbations in the 
lines proved that the powers of the physical forces which 
played on this sun were so great, no adjective, no 
language could express, no human mind could conceive. 
A whole solar system, our sun with his planets, might be 
precipitated and lost in this mighty sun with heat so 
great that every material of which they are made would 
be dissipated into thinnest gases. The learned say that 
only the collision of two mighty dark bodies could have 
caused a phenomena such as they saw. After a time this 
star dwindled down to the third and fourth magnitude, 
in three days it shifted to the fifth, and then back again 
to the third where it remains, its spectrum showing it 
surrounded with a vast atmosphere of glowing metal 
gases. 

Algol, whose changes caused it to be called the 
" Demon " by the Arabs, Professor Vogel found has a 
diameter of 1,074,000 miles, its mass is 4.9 that of our 
sun, having 0.34 the density of water. The dark com- 
panion which circulates round it has a diameter of 
840,600 miles, nearly that of the sun, its mass is 2.9 of 
our sun, and its density one-third that of water. These 
two bodies are separated from each other two million 
miles. When the c^ark body comes between us and the 
brighter star, it shuts off the light of the latter, and 
that is the cause oi the variations which puzzled the 
ancients. If Sirius Tiad the same density as the larger 
body of Algol it wouifl be 1,860,000 miles in diameter. 

Castor, called a Geminorum, having the same kind 
of white light as Sirius, turns round its companion in 



A NUMBER OF SURPRISING SUNS. 81 

346.82 years, its mass being 0.2042 that of our sun. 
In 1894 Belopolsky found its companion revolves in a 
period of 2.98 days, going round its larger companion 
at the rate of 20.7 miles a second, its surface being 
darker than that of its companion. At the Lick Observ- 
atory they found still another sun revolving round its 
larger and brighter primary, so there are three stars 
here revolving round each other. The stars b Lyra, 
u Pegasus, and v Puppis vary their light like Algol, and 
have dark doubles revolving round them. The first is 
21 times larger than our sun and the smaller 9% times, 
and they have about the same density as air. The diam- 
eter of the larger body of b Lyra is 25,000,000, the 
smaller 19,000,000 miles, and they are 400 times 
brighter than the sun would be in the same place. 

V Puppis of Orion constellation has a mass 70 times 
greater than the sun, its density is 0.02 of the sun; it 
changes its light in 1,454 days, and flies through space 
380 miles a second. Roberts says his observations show 
each body of which it is composed has a diameter of 
10,500,000 miles, and that these two gigantic suns re- 
volve round each other in actual contact. They are 
5,000 times brighter than the sun would be if placed 
there on the borders of the Milky Way, and it takes 
their light 1,800 years to reach us. 

Professor J. E. Gore investigated the star Mira, " the 
•Wonderful," which fluctuates from bright to dark dur- 
ing a year, at brightest giving out 1,000 times the light 
of its darkest period. Another changing star in the 
southern sky varies 10,000 times in its light. 

There are hundreds of these variable stars, and men 
have asked the cause of these changes. It cannot always 
be because dark companions revolve round them, for 
they would soon pass across the bright disk. Some say 
it may be caused by tremendous electric forces, but this 
is hardy probable. Is it because their disks are like 
lozenges, and when the edges are turned to us we see 
them darker? Is it because of tidal action? But as 



82 A GREAT MYSTEEY OF THE SKIES. 

these are red stars, it seems probable that they are suns 
in formation into which dark bodies the size of planets 
or suns are falling and the shock produces the light 
which blazes up. Stars are red, then yellow, green and 
blue, according to their heat. 

At Harvard University, Feb. 22, 1901, they photo- 
graphed the spectrum of the variable star, Eova Perci, 
and two days later took another picture while it was 
getting brighter. The first photo shows dull bright 
bands with 5 wide dim stripes and dim bands between 
the brighter parts. The second prints the whole spec- 
trum brighter in its entire length, lines more scintilla- 
ting, stripes wider shading into each other. The two 
spectra are the same in general outlines. But in the 
latter picture the lines of the metals come out much 
clearer. What tremendous change takes place in this 
sun ? Within two days it becomes so hot the metals of 
which it is composed shine out so we can find out the ma- 
terials of which it is composed. Then within a few 
days it loses its heat so we cannot tell all its materials. 
It acts as though you would heat a mass of iron and 
other material so they will melt, and then let them cool, 
but remain red-hot for a time, after which you will melt 
them again. This is an example of the strange actions of 
many of the changing stars. We may say these stars 
may be suddenly heated by striking another star in its 
flight, but what cools them so suddenly to be again 
heated at regular periods? This is a mystery of the 
skies. 

In two clusters 1,279 suns were counted, but not one 
changing star was found among them. In three other 
clusters one variable was found among 1,050, one in 
500, one in 100, and in 900 others 132 changing stars 
were found. As all the variable or changing stars must 
be double or triple, that is having two or three stars 
revolving round a common center, as we examine them 
more closely, we find more and more variable suns, and 
we are forced to the conclusion of Professor Newcomb: 



DARK RED, YELLOW, ORANGE, BLUE AND VIOLET SUNS. 83 

i( It is probable that among the stars in general single 
stars are the exception rather than the rule." 

Now let us see these suns a little nearer. What are 
they ? Of what materials composed ? The greatest 
telescopes man made only show their size, movements, 
distances, their colors, and hint at their heat. But the 
discovery of the spectroscope opened up a vast field of 
spectrum-analysis a thousand times more perfect than 
any chemical analysis for the examination of matters 
on our earth. But we can turn this instrument to the 
stars and it tells the materials of which they are com- 
posed, and the mighty changes which are taking place on 
their surfaces. This department of human knowledge, 
having its birth almost in our time, is called Astrophys- 
ics. The ray of light coming from the star passes 
through the instrument and tells us the heat of metals, 
the kind and the nature of the surface of the star which 
sends its light forth on its journey to us. 

Orbs are in different stages of development. The 
hottest suns are white, the next hotter yellow, then 
orange, red, dark red and dark stars — that is, suns, but 
dimly shining like our own Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus 
and [Neptune, planets so large they have not yet lost 
all their heat. The smaller planets, as our earth, lost 
their heat from the surface but have fiery interiors ; then 
comes the moon, which long ago lost all its heat because 
it is so small, then the small moons of the planets, and 
the little asteroids like round rocky globes floating cold 
between the stars. 

Of the 1,743 stars down to the fifth magnitude, 73% 
are white, 2% of these have the broad lines in their 
spectra, 26% are yellow like our sun, have the same 
materials as our orb of day, and 1 % are so cold as to 
hardly give out a strong enough light to see the lines in 
the instrument. The researches of the learned, startling 
in the amount of information they give of the heavens, 
show that a time was when matter was not, that it is not 



84 WHAT THE SPECTROSCOPE SAYS OF SUNS. 

eternal, that it was made by the Creator and is directed 
by His laws. 

The light of the third class of stars shows the hydro- 
gen lines not bright, as in the two other classes of stars, 
but dark, as would be found by passing light through 
glowing hydrogen in a laboratory. Many of these stars 
change from time to time, and are called variable stars. 
Their spectra shine out brightly for a time, and then 
gradually get dimmer and dimmer for a certain period, 
after which it will be renewed. This takes place with 
all variable stars, and they all have regular periods of 
change. 

The reason the lines of hydrogen are dark in place 
of bright in this class of stars is this. These suns have 
but comparatively small metallic centers of intensely 
heated materials, but are surrounded with enormous at- 
mospheres of hydrogen, helium, etc., the light from these 
glowing gases overpowers the lines from the hot metals, 
deep within, so that the bright lines of these gases only 
are seen. Another explanation is that they are entirely 
composed of these glowing gases. The spectra of these 
stars were found to be the same as that of the sun spots, 
and of the vast cyclones which burst from the sun and 
shoot to the height of 100,000 miles in a few seconds, 
seen especially during an eclipse. Some of these masses 
of hydrogen, larger than our whole earth, bursting forth 
from the sun to this height, were found to be mingled 
with vapors of magnesium and sodium mingled with 
hydrogen. 

Some spectra are crowded with lines, others have 
very few, proving that while some suns are made of 
many different metals, others are composed of few ma- 
terials. These suns are divided into four classes. The 
first, called the Sirian, because Sirius is of that class, 
have only one or two broad lines. The second, the 
Solar, because our sun belongs in that class, have a 
large number of lines. The third consists of stars with 
a number of lines crowded together, with peculiar 



SUNS IN DIFFERENT STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT. 85 

" flutings " sharply cut of! at the blue end of the spec- 
trum, and shaded at the red end. The fourth gave a 
very faint spectra consisting of dark lines with " flut- 
ing " sharply cut off at the red end of the spectra. The 
" flutings " mentioned are bands up and down, like 
pipes of an organ, in the colored band of light. 

These tell us the story of suns in different stages of 
development of light and heat, composed of diverse 
metals and materials falling into them from the diffused 
matters of the nebulae of which they were formed. Look 
at the Pleiades with your naked eye, and you will see 
seven stars, but a photograph reveals 1,421 suns. A 
long exposure showed bright clouds surrounding these 
stars, that is matter now condensing into these suns, 
which are now being built up with metals falling in: 
they are getting hotter; they are in a process of forma- 
tion as our sun was made. Following out the study 
we find some stars are just, as it were, being born, some 
are in middle life, others are old and cool. 

Some first-class suns show lines so faint they can 
hardly be seen, but the lines of hydrogen are so over- 
powering in amount as to dim the lines of the other 
metals. These stars are composed mostly of hydrogen 
gas. These are mostly ie white " stars. But hydrogen 
is not as prominent in all of them. Sirius, which be- 
longs to this white class practically has only the G and H 
lines of hydrogen and helium in the violet part of the 
spectrum, proving this star is very much hotter than 
our sun, and is composed mostly of these gases. All 
stars of the first class are intensely hot, for their lines 
are all near the violet end. Sirius and suns of his class 
are therefore new in the order of formation. The mat- 
ter of the nebula? near them having recently fallen in, 
the intense heat and light have not yet been lost. They 
are mostly composed of a few metals, for the most part 
being gigantic globes of glowing hydrogen, with tre- 
mendous atmospheres of helium surrounding them. 

The second class of stars, called also the yellow, and 



86 SUNS IK DIFFERENT STAGES OF HEAT. 

to which our sun belongs, are older, and have lost the 
heat they had when they were bluish-white like Sirius. 
The cooling has taken place to such a degree that we 
can see the dark lines of the metals of which they are 
formed, Capella, a Porcyon, etc., are also examples of 
this class. In them we find iron, calcium, magnesium, 
sodium, nickel, cobalt, barium, iron, etc., the same as 
we find them on earth and in the sun — these suns being 
also surrounded with dense atmosphere of hydrogen. 

The lines in the spectroscope caused by the different 
metals in the stars, their color, position, breadth, num- 
ber and intensity of these lines and colored bands, tell 
the story of the materials in the star which shines into 
the instrument. The density of the medium through 
which the light passed, the gases surrounding the sur- 
face of the orb, the heat, the fiery winds of metallic vapor 
sweeping over the surface, the chemical changes going 
on show how the star compares with our sun, and with 
other stars, its movement from or toward us, or at right 
angles to us — a thousand things, and a myriad series 
of movement on the surface of these burning suns are 
told us by this wonderful instrument. 

First the stars were supposed to all have the same 
heat. But they range from the hottest suns, which give 
out blue light, to the yellow not so hot, of which our 
sun is one, down to the red cooler stars, and even to dark 
stars which can hardly be seen, and even to the darker 
bodies which we cannot see, but which we know exist 
because of the movements of the stars round which they 
revolve, shutting off their light. 

The blue stars, or those suns with bluish white light, 
show a spectrum far towards the violet end of the 
little rainbow in the instrument, exhibit the colored 
bands of gases only, as hydrogen, helium and materials 
in a state of the most intense heat. The yellow stars 
are not so hot, the lines do not extend so far towards 
the blue end of the spectrum, and they are found at 
about the same place as the lines in the sunlight com- 



THE DIFFEBEXT SPECIES OF SUNS. 87 

ing from our sun. They show hydrogen, iron, and other 
metals found in our sun, but in a state of thin vapor 
of these metals; because of the awful heat no fluid or 
solid could exist for a moment on these stars. The third 
group of stars shows short spectra of a red color, while 
their lines prove that they are surrounded by great 
atmospheres of carbon with other metals in a state of 
gas. These three kinds of suns are called " gaseous," 
" metallic," and " carbon " stars by some scientists, while 
others name them " Sirian stars," because Sirius belongs 
to that group, and " Solar stars," because our sun be- 
longs to that class, the others " Red stars," and the un- 
seen the " Dark stars." 

Learned men agree that all stars do not always remain 
in these diverse classes. The impact of one falling into 
another or tremendous forces of the matters raining 
down into them, raise their heat, so they may pass from 
dark to yellow, or to blue stars, and if they are not fed 
by materials falling into them, they may pass from blue 
to yellow and to the dark stars by loss of light and heat. 
The amount of matter falling into them is not infinite, 
which is absurd to suppose, for then all spaces between 
the stars would be filled with it. A time will come when 
every sun and star will have lost its light and heat, all 
will be dark, heat will cease and life will end on earth. 
A mighty Mind has marked the time when every living 
thing, plant, animal and man will cease to live. But 
when no light or heat will be to sustain life is millions 
of years in the future. 

Lockyer worked out a complete scheme of star growth 
and decay as follows : Beginning with the nebulae con- 
densing together forming suns by the materials falling 
into the center making the suns hot and shining, we. 
pass to stars having fluted spectra showing low temper- 
atures, with their lines of iron, manganese, calcium and 
other metals. Antares in the Scorpion is one of the most 
brilliant of these red stars, Alpha Oygni is another, but 
has more hydrogen and is hotter. Then_come Rigel 



88 WHY THINGS ARE COLORED. 

and Beta Crucis still hotter, and which have hydrogen, 
helium, nitrogen, carbon and traces of other metals. 
Hotter still we find E Orionis and two stars in Argo 
with greater atmospheres of hydrogen, carbon and traces 
of other metals surrounding them. Then we have Sirius 
£ and mighty Arcturus, round which our sun is going, 
$ dragging with him our earth and his planets. There is 
19 Piscium with its flutings of carbon, and we come to 
the dim red stars we can hardly see, and at last to the 
dark stars invisible to us, which like mighty planets 
circle round the shining suns. 

Here we see the romance of the skies, the birth and 
ideath of suns, the play of forces on a grandeur we can- 
not grasp. With lavish might the Almighty presides 
over the forces of worlds He brought forth from noth- 
ing the morning of creation, and hung on the simple 
laws of movement and weight. He did not abandon 
them, He still presides over their birth as shining orbs, 
brightening into suns, and in decay He keeps them by 
His laws for these millions of years, till they lose their 
light and heat and become dark again. 

Let us lift a little the veil and draw near the wonders 
of the skies. We are as it were among other worlds, 
strange, unnatural, on fire. On our little globe nothing 
gives us hardly a faint idea of the indiscribable forces 
sporting on these suns, God in millions spread through- 
out the heavens. The white light of our sun pours its 
dazzling rays from azure heights of its reservoir, down 
through our air, and colors every object with its own 
tints. That is, white light itself shades every object. 
The real colors are not in the objects but in the light 
itself. Some things reflect all the light and they are 
white. Some absorb all but the red and they are red. 
Thus color is in the sunlight, take away the light and 
all would be black. 

The beauty of the plants, the diversity of the fields, 
the whiteness of the lily, the scarlet orange azure jewels, 



THE MIGHTY JEWELS OF HEAVEN". 89 

the charming shades of flowers, the plumage of the 
birds and all the colors of earth, sea and sky are caused 
by the seven primary colors of white sunlight we see in 
the rainbow. But all these tints, even more, we find 
in the suns. Look at that star n in Perseus — the fabled 
hero walking in the Milky Way holding Medusa's head ! 
With the telescope you will find it is a double star, one 
mighty globe is red like a vast ruby, the other is blue. 
Red and blue they shine as precious stones millions of 
miles in diameter, as down they send to us their light 
which takes more than a hundred years to shine on our 
shores of vision. But there are stars rising in varied 
stages of brilliant glory, showing the shades and com- 
binations of the seven colors of the rainbow with all their 
scintillating tints indescribable. No two suns are alike. 
r A star in the Dragon is a double sun, one orb shining 
with deep red light while its companion flashes forth 
in bluish white light. The great central star called g 
of Andromeda is resolved by the spectroscope into an 
orange colored sun with a companion shining as a beau- 
tiful green emerald gem. Vega in Lyra is a blue sun 
hundreds of times larger than our king of day. A 
double star of the Lion constellation is formed of two 
suns — one red the other white. Some systems have red, 
white and blue suns, others orange, green, purple. In the 
Whale of Eridanus shine two double stars, one body a 
straw color, the other blue. In the Giraffe is a blue sun. 
Orion, Twins and Bootes have mighty yellow orbs, and 
the Swan has an intensely blue sun. But it would take 
too long to tell all the colors of the suns. 

The writer with the Sultan's son wandered through 
the double storied Treasury of the Turkish empire, 
examined the accumulated riches gathered since the 
house of Osmali left Bagdad; he saw the crown jewels 
of France in the Louvre; he stood beside the crown 
jewels of England's king and queen in the Tower of 
London, flashing forth reflected light from emblazoned 



90 LIKE CROWtf JEWELS OF THE ALMIGHTY. 

gold work. But what are these cold dead gems compared 
to the millions of brilliant orbs of sky hung on weight, 
sending out since creation light and heat and electric 
wavelets, as blazing crown-jewels, telling the power and 
majesty of God ! 



CHAPTER IV.— FALLING STARS, COMETS AND NEBULAE 
BUILDING WORLDS. 

In heaven there is no up or down. !At noon we look 
at the zenith over our heads, at midnight that part of 
the heavens which before was over our heads is directly 
opposite to what it was at noon twelve hours before. 
The attraction of the earth keeps us on this world. Up 
is from the earth, and down is towards its center. The 
heavenly spheres float in space, each attracting matter 
to itself because of universal attraction ; each metal or 
material has its own proper attraction we call weight. 
Suns, planets and orbs float in space, each obeying the 
motions given it at creation. For each there is no up 
or down except regarding its own sphere pulling ma- 
terials to itself. 

Millions of unseen particles of matter, grains of sand, 
rocks weighing tons, bodies like little planets float in 
the vast abysses between the stars. Some go alone, 
others in clusters, round or long, more form bands 
stretching millions of miles, containing billions of these 
little units. They pass round sun and stars obedient 
to laws of weight and movement. 

Getting entangled in earth's attraction, they sweep 
down through the air, which checks their tremendous 
planetary flight. The sudden stopping of their flight, 
and the friction of the atmosphere change their motion 
into heat; they become red-hot, then fuse at a white 
beat, burst into fragments, dissolve to dust and metallic 
gases, leaving a train of light and are called falling 
stars, aerolites, or meteorites. 

August and November, each year, they are more 
numerous, when the sky is lighted with their brilliancy. 

91 



92 A DREAD MONSTER OF THE SKIES. 

These streams follow comet paths, and the latters' tails 
are supposed to be formed of these little particles which 
reflect the sunlight. Each year a hundred thousand mil- 
lions are estimated to fall to earth. But few reach the 
earth in solid forms, because they are torn to metallic 
dust in the high air. We can imagine the number of 
these bodies scattered through interstellar spaces. 

A London professor published a book in which he 
develops the daring speculation that somewhere in the 
dark abysses between the stars there may be, unseen 
to human eye, a dead sun, or dark planet, our earth will 
one day meet in our vast journey with the sun round 
the heavens. He figures out what will happen when 
this supposed body strikes sun or earth. The sun and 
solar system fly through space round Arcturus at the 
rate of about twelve to fifteen miles a second, while the 
swiftest rifle or cannon balls go only about half a mile 
a second. If this unknown body comes towards the sun 
at the same velocity, their impact will be at the rate of 
nearly thirty miles a second, and the stroke will de- 
velop a heat which will melt our world, or fuse with 
fire, turn to metallic gases all materials of earth. 

He tells with terrible details how this tramp of the 
skies will appear before it strikes the earth. It will 
approach first as another moon, and how helpless men 
will look on their coming doom. It will revolve round 
the world obedient to weight. The monster will come 
nearer and nearer, till at last it will strike the earth, 
overwhelming cities, continents and seas. Deep down 
into the very center of the earth it will dive and all 
materials of which it is composed, and the very mass 
of the earth will fuse with the terrific heat caused by the 
stroke. Then this new star, formed of the masses of this 
wanderer and our earth, will shine as a new sun. 

It has been handed down that one day this world will 
be destroyed by fire. Is there a dark planet, or sun 
unseen, somewhere in heaven with motion marked out 
from the creation, which will thus destroy our earth? 



HOW THE SUN'S HEAT IS KEPT UP. 93 

Our Father, God, made this little world down in the 
middle of his material creation where all is stable. He 
watched over mankind all the ages, and we lay down 
4& sleep trusting His holy Providence. 

Will these flaming thunderbolts of Jove 

Crush and kill at last the human race, 

Like frenzied Titans trying to efface 
The work of Him who made us ? Were they that strove 
'Gainst Omnipotence ? What mighty engines drove 

Through miles unmeasured of silent space 

Those ragged rocks that pass without a trace, 
'Cept cloven crag, or cosmic dust, or blasted grove ? 

Man of daring mind may dream of what you are, 
Ye wandering chunks of heavenly iron showers, 
Falling, blasting life and blooming bowers 

On plain and mount, and into seas and waters far, 

Ever sweeping down, rude wrecks of a smashed star, 
Stern proofs of other worlds we do not see, 
Grim signs that other orbs have ceased to be, 

Fear not. To number and danger God has put a bar. 

The Creator foresaw size and direction of these wan- 
dering bodies, so far he has provided that we were not 
thus destroyed. In the womb of coming time perhaps 
in this way the world will be destroyed by fire caused 
by the awful stroke of a great meteor. 

In the neighborhood of the sun, where his attraction 
is powerful, these wandering bodies are found in great 
abundance. Learned men hold that the corona of the 
sun is caused by his light falling on and illuminating 
the vast millions floating around him. We see the 
corona especially during an eclipse of the sun. There 
they are as thick as hailstones. Falling into him per- 
haps they keep up sun's light and heat, as John Tyndall 
and Dr. Mayer first suggested, and as Sir W. Thomp- 
son (Lord Kelvin) worked out. Falling in one con- 
tinual rain of metallic solid and gaseous particles, they 
strike the sun's surface with terrific force which changes 
their mighty materials into puffs of metallic vapors. 
The mighty strokes of bodies moving with a swiftness 
we can hardly conceive keep the sun's envelopes ever 



94 WHAT ARE METEORITES ? 

blazing with undiminished intensity. But if they were 
more numerous, they would heat the sun so life would 
cease on our earth. If they were too few his light and 
heat would diminish so we could not live because of the 
cold. Who measured their numbers, and weighed their 
masses, made them at certain distances so the sun's energy 
has remained unchanged through ages past, for life 
of plant, animal and man, but He who presides over 
the wonders of the universe ? 

" That the mighty center of our system should re- 
cruit his marvelous expenditure of energy from the tin- 
iest of his satellites; that these fragments, each so in- 
significant in itself, should collectively supply light, and 
heat, and life to the great Sun himself, and through 
him to all his attendant orbs; that it should be through 
their agency, that the Creator of the universe has or- 
dained that all his creatures should live, and move, and 
have their being — is one of the most striking concep- 
tions that can be imagined/' says R. K. Miller in his 
Romance of Astronomy. 

The falling stars shoot as lines of light across the 
sky, or down towards earth they fall, till heated to 
metallic vapors by the friction of the air and the 
stopping of their rapid flight through space. Some- 
times they fall to earth, often burst with crash of a 
hundred cannons, and the pieces may bury themselves 
deep in the earth. They are so hot they are near the 
melting point. We find them, or their fragments, put 
them in museums as curiosities, and call them meteor- 
ites, " in the air " or " lofty." 

The greatest cannon cannot throw a ball beyond 
3,000 feet a second, but these come into our atmos- 
phere with the velocity of from 10 to 12 miles a sec- 
ond. August 18, 1783, one, seen from Ireland to 
Rome, being a mile in diameter, burst with a violent 
explosion and its pieces were ten minutes reaching earth. 
These meteorites are the remains of the matters and 
vast materials which fell in and composed the world. 



METALS COMING FROM HEAVEN. 95 

The British Museum has one of the largest collection 
in the world of these visitors from the sky. The Museum 
of Natural History. New York, has quite a collection, 
among them being the largest specimen in the world, 
weighing many tons, brought by Lieutenant Peary from 
the far north. You will find a number of " Fallen 
Stars " nearby. 

These bodies coming from the spaces between the 
stars are always falling over all the earth. Ocean bot- 
toms, and arctic snows are covered with their dust, for 
most of them are torn into minute particles in their 
flight through the air because of intense heat developed. 
They are part of the streams circulating round and 
sweeping into the sun. Some think they are the re- 
mains of comets, or planets, of suns torn asunder by 
collisions with other heavenly bodies, or remains of 
matter made at creation of which the larger part has 
condensed into suns, stars and planets. 

The sun's mighty mass attracts the great masses of 
meteorites in size like small planets, and they fall into 
his surface. Tyndall estimated that if the earth fell 
into the sun, the shock would sustain his light and heat 
for 10,000,000 years. These bodies falling into our 
sun keep up his heat. The Eternal at creation made 
just enough of these bodies and placed them in mass 
and distance so they would fall into the sun in regular 
streams, rising and falling in periods of 11 years, so 
they would sustain his loss of light and heat. If too 
many, or too large masses fall on the sun, our world 
would be burned up — all life destroyed. 

Examining meteorites, we get a good idea of the 
minerals of the stars and other heavenly bodies. The 
suns have metals differing from those of earth, although 
24 elements have been found in these meteoric bodies 
caught by earth in her flight through space. Up to the 
present we have found in meteorites oxygen, hydrogen, 
chlorine, sulphur, phosphorus, carbon, silicon, iron, 
nickel, cobalt, magnesium, chronium, potassium, sodium, 



96 ORIGIN OF METEORITES. 

copper, tin, antimony, aluminium, calcium, manganese, 
lithium, titanium, arsenic, vanadium. All, except those 
in italics have been found in the sun. When polished 
meteorites show peculiar crystalline formations, the iron 
being mostly in streaks, showing that the laws of crystal- 
lization rule in heaven as on earth, and that the mighty 
Mahematician, God, presides over all matter in heaven 
as on earth. 

Mr. Sorby made a careful study of these heavenly 
bodies, and his researches show their materials were 
once in a melted or gaseous state because of the intense 
heat they were subject to before entering the air. This 
heat was the result of minute particles of matter striking 
together by the laws of gravitation, which formed them 
into large masses. This took place on a large scale in the 
cases of sun, planets, and stars, when these great bodies 
were formed by enormous amounts of matter sweeping 
together, the strokes causing the intense heat, which the 
sun and stars now have, and which our world had once, 
before it cooled. Sun and stars are so large they yet 
show this force in the awful heat and light they throw 
out. At creation God made just the amount of matter 
wanted to make the stars, sun, earth and planets the 
right size. He made this matter just in the places re- 
quired, that condensing under attraction these orbs might 
be formed as now we find them. 

Mr. Chamberlain figured out the laws relating to 
tides, caused by the attraction of the sun and moon. He 
applied his figures to the heavenly bodies and found 
that a solid world coming near another, without touch- 
ing, will be torn asunder at a certain distance called " the 
Roche limit." The nearer these two worlds approach 
the more rapidly they will whirl round each other, till 
at last the smaller body will be torn into fragments as a 
wheel will burst when turned too fast. As some of the 
meteorites show a planet's structure, they must have 
come close to a star or planet and been torn asunder. 
Some think the meteorites and the little asteroids be- 



THE COMETS. 97 

tween Mars and Jupiter once composed a large planet 
which was thus torn to fragments. If our earth went 
wandering from its path round the sun, or if a large 
planet like Jupiter, or a star came near us, our earth 
would be broken up into small fragments. But this 
awful calamity will never take place as far as we know. 
For the solar system shows no signs of disturbance or 
destruction while ruled by the laws of mathematical 
mechanics on which God poised the orbs. 

Between our solar system and in the spaces between 
the stars are floating peculiar erratic bodies like 
" tramps " of the universe. They are called comets from 
coma, " hair," because of the tails most of them have. 
Some belong to our system and circulate round the sun, 
some pay us visits at stated times from far-off systems, 
some come into our solar system, sweep round the sun, 
pass into the spaces between the stars never again to ap- 
pear, while it is supposed countless millions are wander- 
ing through the universe never to be revealed to man. 

The remarkable appearance of these bodies, the irregu- 
lar visits of these meteorites, their diverse movements, 
their sudden appearance, their brilliancy in the firma- 
ment, the gigantic trains of light they throw out as they 
near the sun, the wonderful lengths of their tails as they 
sweep round and close to the orb of day, the sudden 
diminishing of their light as they wander off into space, 
extinguished in primeval darkness from which they sud- 
denly emerged — all these have shrouded them in mystery. 
In ages past they were looked on with dread as signs 
of the world's end, or of calamities. Well the writer 
remembers the great comet of the summer of 1858, 
which blazed out every night after sunset in the west, 
its tail stretching almost across the whole sky. 

Most comets have a head and tail, the latter generally 
behind, but some carry their tails before them. The 
head, called the nucleus, generally grows smaller as it 
approaches the sun, while the tail grows in length and 
size, sometimes shooting out a million miles an hour. 



98 WHAT ARE COMETS COMPOSED OF? 

The comets' tails generally stretch away from the sun. 
When the comet sweeps down and around the sun the 
tail keeps turned away from our luminary, so that the 
tail must sweep through millions and millions of miles 
an hour. How solid matter, liquid or gas, can do this 
we do not know. But as the theory of floating ma- 
terials of dust round the sun has been accepted, some 
think that the head of the comet concentrates the light, 
so that after passing through the head, as through a 
great lens, the particles floating in millions in space are 
illuminated as the comet sweeps around the sun. 

The wandering bodies are subject to the laws of 
weight similar to planets and suns in their paths. The 
planets go round the sun, not in perfect circles, but in 
elongated curves. Now if we suppose these ellipses or 
curves be stretched out very far, like a giant circle with 
its two sides compressed so it will be a long and narrow 
hoop, and place the sun near one end, in the middle of 
one of the half circles, we would have a comet's path. In 
higher mathematics this is called a parabolic circle. The 
comets follow the parabolic path while the planets fol- 
low the ellipse. We can therefore find the path of every 
comet as soon as we know but a small part of its move- 
ment, for all the millions of heavenly bodies are ruled 
by strictest laws of figures the Creator gave them with 
the force He implanted in them. 

What are these heavenly wanderers made of? The 
spectroscope shows they contain gases, especially carbon, 
glowing with heat. But within the globe of comet gas 
great numbers of solid particles, dust, lumps of metals, 
stones, rocks fly together, heating the gases so they glow. 
They are continually falling apart, tearing asunder and 
coming together again, thus keeping up light and heat. 
These solid particles are far apart, so the light of sun 
and stars can be seen through them. The tail spreads 
out as a thin flat wedge, from the head far out into dark 
space. We cannot see it when the flat side is towards 
us, but we can, when its edge turns to us. The head is 



WHAT IF A COMET STRUCK THE EARTH. 99 

mostly formed of gases glowing with the heat of con- 
tinual great collisions which changes the solids into 
metallic gases, as we see when meteorites strike our at- 
mosphere. The polariscope shows they shine with re- 
flected sunlight. Many theories have been broached 
to explain comets. 

What would happen if a comet struck our earth? 
Arago figured out the chance is as one to three hun- 
dred millions. If the comet of 1832 had been a month 
sooner it would have struck the earth, and the blazing 
vapor of carbon and metals would have scorched every 
trace of life off the surface of our planet. Even if a 
comet formed of gases met the earth we would all die, 
for our atmosphere would be heated so the surface of 
the earth would melt. Even if some people escaped in 
caves, they could not breathe the gases and would die in a 
few moments. Laplace thus describes the result: 

" It is easy to represent the effects of the shock pro- 
duced by the earth's encountering a comet. The axis 
and the rotation changed; the waters abandoning their 
former position to precipitate themselves toward the 
new equator ; a great part of men and animals whelmed 
in a universal deluge, or destroyed by the violent shock 
imparted to the terrestrial globe; entire species annihi- 
lated; all monuments of human industry overthrown — 
such are the disasters which the shock of a comet would 
necessarily produce." 

Miller says, " Whatever the cometary material may 
be, it is not likely that it will be the same as that which 
composes our own atmospheric air, and as our lungs are 
not adapted for breathing any other kind of gas, the prob- 
able intermingling of our atmosphere with the substance 
of a comet, would be at once to render the former utterly 
unfitted for the support of animal life." In the long 
course of the ages our race lived on this planet, a comet 
has not struck it. We are forced by the probabilities 
that such a thing will never take place, for we are looked 



100 DIFFERENT CLASSES OF NEBULAE MAKING SUNS. 

after by a Supreme Being who guards His children from 
such an awful fate. 

The elder Herschel gives thirty-three classes of 
nebulae, of which we cite the chief. Extensive nebu- 
losity, some of which spread out over five or six square 
degrees and one of which occupies nine degrees. Milky 
nebulae with condensation in the center, showing where 
the future sun of this system is to be. Nebulae of irregu- 
lar figure, which show where planets are to be formed 
when the matter falls into these different places. Round 
nebulae like vast globes, but showing no nucleus or con- 
densation. These are seemingly young systems. Nebulae 
with bright centers where the matters have begun to 
condense and form a sun for each. Nebulae with bright 
nucleus in the center proving that they are more ad- 
vanced in world and sun formation than the former. 
Nebulae which have drawn nearly all the matter into 
their centers which are very bright. Nebulae which 
show that the sun and planets in them are almost formed. 
Nebulae which very nearly approach the appearance of 
stars. 

In these classes the reader can see that the nebulae 
range from the beginning of their creation up to the 
formation of a central sun and planets, as our system 
of sun and his planets were formed. We see before our 
eyes the condensing and formation of worlds, suns and 
stars under the very laws which ruled in the creation 
of our earth, sun and planets. 

At the present writing more than 10,000 nebulae have 
been discovered and new ones are constantly being found. 
They are nearly all in the regions outside of or between 
the great ring of the Milky Way. Dr. Isaac Roberts, 
who has perhaps the best telescope for photographing 
stars, and who devoted most of his labors to the study 
of these heavenly bodies, says that most of them show 
spiral forms with dense crowded matter in the center, 
that they are studded with stars, and that these stars 
follow the curves of the spirals. Here are thousands of 



HOW THE NEBULAE CONDENSE INTO SYSTEMS. 101 

world and sun systems forming into globes. The spirals 
are so marked a feature they show in the present ar- 
rangement of most of the stars. They are found in all 
parts of the heavens, proving that all the heavenly 
bodies took their rise from spiral nebula?, whose ma- 
terials were absorbed by them. 

Dr. Roberts offers several problems relating to these 
bodies. He finds they are composed of faint clouds, 
often of vast extent scattered in many parts of the sky. 
Sir W. Herschel alone recorded the positions of fifty-two 
such regions, but recent astronomers opened up thousands 
of such places, especially by photography, which re- 
cords bodies eye cannot see with telescopes. Roberts 
concludes that they are gases interspersed with solid 
particles — all undergoing condensation into globes like 
suns and planets. 

Lord Rosse, with his great reflecting telescope, first 
discovered vast systems of suns clustered, not only in 
constellations in round condensing spheres in groups more 
or less regular, but also according to a distribution 
which reveals gigantic forces playing amongst them. He 
discovered that stars distributed in long curves or spir- 
als, are result of matters condensing from the gaseous 
nebula? of which they are made, by the action of uni- 
versal gravitation. From the chief centers of these 
tremendous systems of suns, a multitude of spirals, 
formed of numberless suns or nebulous materials, issue 
from the bright nucleus, or brilliant centers spread out 
on all sides, gradually losing their brightness and dying 
away as trains of phosphorescent vapors. Humboldt 
thus writes of the Magellanic Clouds near the south 
pole of the heavens : 

" The magnificent zones of the Southern heavens com- 
prised between the parallels of from 50 to 80 degrees, 
are the richest in nebulous stars, and irreducible clus- 
ters. Of the two Magellanic Clouds which lie so near 
the Southern pole, this pole so poor in stars that it 
, might be called a waste country, is the largest nebula?. 



102 WHY NEBULA FORM INTO SPIRALS. 

It appears according to recent researches to be a wonder- 
ful agglomeration of spiral clusters of large and small 
stars and irreducible cloudy nebula?, whose general 
brightness lights up the telescope field of sight and 
forms the background of the picture. The aspect of 
these clouds, the brilliant constellation of the Ship, Argo, 
the Milky Way, which extends between Scorpion, Cen- 
taur, the Southern Cross and the picturesque aspect of 
the whole Southern sky have produced on my mind an 
effaceable picture." 

Lockyer's studies in physics show that when solid 
bodies like meteorites fall together by attraction, they 
fly so swiftly and strike together with such forces, the 
heat develops the white and electric lights which they 
glow. He also points out that under this attraction mat- 
ters in the sky form into spirals. For any collisions 
between unequal masses of matter coming together with- 
out a central body to draw them, would be forced to 
revolve in spiral motions. In this way, directed by these 
laws, the matter of the whole universe united by attrac- 
tion into the great constellations we see every bright 
night as groups of twinkling stars. 

Every particle of matter in the universe attracts every 
other particle. Thus because the earth attracts matter 
everything is heavy. But left to this law of weight, or 
of attraction alone all matter would fall together, and 
form one tremendous mass — one mighty globe of awful 
size and heat. But with the force of attraction there 
was given each particle of matter a movement towards 
another place, and with these two motions smaller parti- 
cles of matter went round other larger masses till all 
condensed into globes of fire and light we call stars. 
'Now, where did they get this movement? Wallace 



" How these motions originated and are now regu- 
lated we do not know ; but they are there, and they fur- 
nish the motive power of the collisions which, when affect- 
ing the large bodies or masses of diffused matter, lead 






HOW ORBS ARE SMASHED TO PIECES. 103 

to the various kinds of permanent stars; while when 
smaller masses are concerned these temporary stars are 
formed, which have interested astronomers in all ages. 
It must be noted that although the motions of the single 
stars appear to be in straight lines, yet the spaces through 
which they have been observed to move are so small, 
that they may be really moving in curved orbits around 
some central body, or center of gravity of some aggrega- 
tion of stars bright and dark, which itself may be com- 
paratively at rest. There may be thousands of such 
centers around us, and this may sufficiently explain the 
apparent motions of the stars in all directions." 

Chamberlain suggests an origin for spiral nebulaa 
and the swarms of meteorites and comets. When two 
bodies come near each other, the larger will tear the 
smaller into fragments because of the tremendous strain 
exerted by the larger, and this will take place at what 
is called the Roche limit. The attraction of the sun 
and moon causes the tides in earth's ocean and atmos- 
phere, and no doubt in the interior melted mass of our 
earth. But it is not powerful enough to drag the waters 
and air from our earth, therefore the tides flow back 
and forth day by day. But when stars come very near 
each other the mighty strains produce an explosion, 
tearing bodies apart with a tremendous crash, and the 
matters fly off in spiral forms on each side of the dis- 
rupted bodies. Now we find all the well-developed star 
spirals have two such arms opposite to each other, as 
shown in M. Comae 100 and M. Comas 51, as well as 
in other nebulas. 

Stars range like lace work. Photographs show in 
some cases groups of 6,000 and in others 10,000 stars. 
In Hercules is a star called 13 Messier, just visible to 
the naked eye as a hazy star of sixth magnitude, but 
the great Lick telescope on Mt. Hamilton, Cal., shows 
it to be composed of thousands of stars forming a mighty 
globe-like system. There are thousands of such star 



104 MATERIALS COMPOSING NEBULA. 

clusters scattered over the heavens, being more numei u%, 
in and near the Milky Way. 

Proctor and Sidney Waters marked on maps of Aie 
northern and southern heavens the star-clusters and nebu- 
lae, and they are seen thickly strewn over the entire 
course of the heavens. In the Milky Way — especially 
along its margin — in all other parts of the heavens such 
condensed clusters are but thinly scattered and at distant 
intervals, with the exception of the Magellanic Clouds 
of the southern heavens where they are densely grouped. 
One-twentieth of them only are found outside of, or far 
from, and nineteen-twentieths of them are on the borders 
or within the Milky Way. They are thus in or near 
the great fundamental ring of the heavens. 

Higher telescope powers resolved many nebulae into 
star-clusters, and it was first supposed they were all made 
of stars. But when the spectroscope was turned on 
them, they were found to be wholly or partly shining 
metallic gases of vast extent, having stars interspersed. 
The nebulae seem to be like comets' tails, or glowing 
gases condensing into stars. Thus science shows that 
worlds are now being made, and this is going on under 
our very eyes, as the world and sun and moon and 
planets were made in those far-off days when the world 
was made of these metallic gases called " waters." 
" And God said, Let there be a firmament made amidst 
the waters, and let it divide the waters from the waters. 
Let the waters that are under the heavens be gathered 
together into one place, and let the dry land appear." 
—Gen. i. 6-9. 

The spiral nebulae in Canes Venatici is a most beau- 
tiful object. All the spirals start from a bright center 
and sweep from left to right, forming a gigantic wheel 
of bright light like a bright burning wheel we set spin- 
ning at a July Fourth exhibition of fireworks. The 
nebula in Lyra is a great dense ring or wheel, a thick 
rim without spokes, the hub being a dense bright cloud 
within. The great nebula in Orion show spirals with 






WONDERFUL SIGHTS IN THE HEAVENS. 105 

numerous stars within the clouds. But the large Magel- 
lanic Cloud shows slighter spiral forms. 

ISTow what are these heavenly hodies formed of? 
Father Secchi, Huggins, Vogel and others set out to 
answer this question. When they turned the spectro- 
scope on them, they found some nebulae to be clusters 
of stars not differing in their materials from other suns. 
But most of them were found to be composed of gases 
especially hydrogen, helium, and nitrogen. Of the 70 
examined by Huggins about a third showed they were 
composed of gases. 

The star O in the constellation Centaur — seen with 
the naked eye — a small glass shows it as a bright star. 
But when photographed with an exposure of forty min- 
utes it is found to be composed of about 6,000 stars 
grouped in a globular form. The center is fairly packed 
with them, where they are so close they almost seem to 
touch. They get thinner and thinner towards the out- 
side of the globe. Although they seem almost touching, 
they are not so near, but one star is seen far beyond 
almost in a line with the other. The distance across this 
globe of stars is trillions of trillions of miles, and they 
circle round each other. 

Let us turn our telescope to Orion, with Sirius and 
Aldebaran on either side, refulgent in their splendor. 
Below the second star of the belt, Huygens in 1656 first 
found a remarkable white cloud, which seemed to him 
an opening in the sky. " I accidentally," he says, " ob- 
served that in place of one of these stars, which occupy 
the center of the group, there was a dozen of them, a 
result which is not rare to obtain with telescopes. Of 
these stars there were three, which like the first nearly 
touched each other, and four others seemed to shine 
through a cloud, in such a manner that the space which 
surrounded them appeared much more lumiuous than 
the rest." 

Since that time, this part of the heavens excited in- 
tense curiosity among astronomers. Some thought it was 



106 TREMENDOUS SEA OF STORM-TOSSED NEBULA. 

formed of immense phosphorescent clouds, others of 
such a vast number of stars not separated by the highest 
powers of the glasses up to that time, which Herschel 
compare to the head of a monstrous animal, with gap- 
ing mouth and nose, stretched out like an elephant. It 
occupies a space apparently as large as the full moon. 
When we think of its billions of miles distance we can 
imagine its extent. 

But the changes taking place in it astonish us. Within 
a half century it became brighter in some places and 
darker in others, showing it to be the seat of formidable 
disturbances amid its mighty conglomerations of suns, 
planets and cosmic dust of which it is composed. The 
director of the Russian Observatory wrote : " The gen- 
eral impression that I have received from these observa- 
tions is, that the central part of the nebula is in a 
state of continual agitation like the surface of the sea." 
When we know that this nebulae is so far away, from us, 
that it takes light years to come, flying at the rate of 
181,000 of miles a second, that we can see the whole 
of this vast object change from year to year, that its 
central part waves back and forth like a vast, tremendous 
sea lashed by winds and cyclones, we- can have but a 
faint idea of the inconceivable forces, which set the ma- 
terials in motion on such a stupendous scale. For 
Sirius, a little down to the left, is 1,375,000 times the 
distance from us to the sun. What therefore must be 
the movements in this nebula we can see at such a dis- 
tance ? 

We mentioned Sirius, whose light takes nearly 22 
years to reach us. Thus he is named from Osiris, the 
Egyptian god, for he announced to them the rising of 
Nile waters; like a faithful dog he warned them to 
prepare for the overflowing floods, hence has been known 
as the Dog Star. But since these days of old, when 
men untold, worshipped stars, the precession of the 
equinoxes changed the position of the earth with regard 
to Sirius, whose rising then took place on June 20, for 



HOW GOD CREATED ALL MATTER. 107 

now he appears above the Egyptian horizon on Au- 
gust 10. 

Dr. Roberts devoted years to photographing nebulae, 
more than 10,000 of them are known, new ones are be- 
ing discovered, and they can be studied in the photo 
prints at pleasure. Many of them are spiral in form 
with a dense center, where their matter is condensing, 
most of them being studded with stars into which their 
matter is falling. But these stars are always more or 
less symmetrical in arrangement, while outside the neb- 
ula these stars extend in lines showing where once, way 
back billions of years ago, the gases and materials ex- 
tended before they condensed. All stars will be found 
more or less in straight or curved lines through the sky, 
proving that once the universe was filled with one 
mighty nebula, the matter of which condensed and 
formed the stars. Thus God made the universe in that 
far-off time, and gave it his laws of motion and attrac- 
tion. Following these laws, every orb, and sun and 
planet, and nebulae were made. There was therefore no 
form nor light when matter sprung from nothingness, 
chaos and eternal night. " And the earth was void and 
empty, and darkness was upon the face of the deep." 
Gen. i. 2. 

Dr. Roberts finds these faint clouds of nebulous matter 
oft of vast extent studding parts of the sky. Sir Wm. 
Herschel alone records the position of 52 such regions, 
and recent photographs show how numerous they are. 
All are condensing into worlds, and suns and systems in 
various degrees of formation. Lockyer says collisions 
of meteorites with each dust cloud would produce the 
spiral, and other forms, where one body was much larger 
than the other, when they came together with a mighty 
clash of worlds. We have no idea of the awful size of 
these bodies, of the mighty forces sporting in the heavens, 
of the amount of matter the Almighty made. 

According to the distances the nebulae were made from 
each other, and according to the amount of matter they 



108 NEBULAE OF VARIED FORMS AND AGES. 

contain, they condense into varied forms. Some are very 
irregular, like patches of cirrus clouds; large numbers 
are in spiral form, some are ring-shaped, otherwise in- 
volved in a white cloud, with a bright star in the center, 
or separated by a dark space of varied shape, from ring 
to central star. Stars, again, are strung along the spirals 
of the nebulae, like bright beads on a string. Some show 
beautiful regular outlines with quite bright stars in 
the center, as M. 100 Comae, and I. 84 Coma?, or as in 
the straight streaks of the Pleiades. There are so many 
nebulae in ring-form, and the Milky "Way is a mighty 
ring that we conclude that it too was formed of matter 
denser on its outer edge, and this matter condensed under 
the laws of attraction into the mighty suns of which the 
Milky Way is composed. 

We have led the reader along so he can see how this 
universe was made. The heavenly orbs are distributed 
into three great classes — the Milky Way, the stars, and 
the nebulae. 

Nebulae show many and remarkable forms. Some 
are quite irregular, as that of Orion, and the Keyhole 
in the southern sky; more are of spiral form, as those 
in Andromeda and Canes; others are ring-shaped, as 
those in Lyra and Cygnus, while many show disks like 
mighty planets. But all exhibit matter condensing into 
mighty suns and systems of worlds. Herschel cata- 
logued 5,000 in 1864; up to 1890, 8,000 were described, 
but photography shows many hundreds of thousands of 
nebulae. Stop to think that so many worlds are now 
being made. The Eternal, we call God, is giving us 
lessons we seldom learn. His boundless power shows 
us in thousands of cases how He made this little world 
for us. 

The spectroscope proves the nebulae to be gaseous, that 
is metals so hot they are in a state of gas very like the 
brilliant white stars. But it also shows a green line not 
produced by any element found on earth. What that 
metal is, thus far we have not found. Many nebulae, 



METALS OF NEBULiE WAVE IN FIERY OCEANS. 109 

especially far from the Milky Way, resemble vast comets 
in their form and structure. 

ISTow let us see what are the materials of these nebulae. 
And first we lay down the principle, that all discoveries 
show that the heavenly bodies are made of the same ma- 
terials as our earth — matter is the same through the 
universe. If some materials have been found in the 
heavenly bodies not yet discovered on earth, time will 
show. 

Turn now the spectroscope on them and analyze their 
materials. They are cloud mists fine as flour, metallic 
gases, metals ground to powder pulverized rocks, carbon, 
hydrogen and other gases. Moving with the swiftness 
of planets they come together, strike each other with 
awful force — flying at from 10 to 100 miles a second as 
though shot from the Eternal's cannons. Thus ever and 
for eons of ages they mix and mingle, strike and sway, 
sweep and swing, wave back and forth, grind and melt, 
cool and heat, the forces being beyond our conception. 
They glow with white heat from the stroke, or shine 
with electric light like the northern lights in winter 
round the frozen poles of earth. 

Gases and metals covering spaces thousands of times 
larger than from here to the sun, heated hotter than the 
sun for their light is white, while his is yellow, cosmic 
dusts, groups of meteorites, floating mountains, rocky 
masses like the moon, masses large as earth, planets, 
great as Jupiter, millions in numbers, sweep and whirl ' 
round and round, waves of materials measured in mil- 
lions of miles, like a boundless ocean sway back and 
forth as down to a central larger mass they fall. Ever 
and on go the mighty movements, chemical action, unit- 
ing, separating particles, tearing asunder and building 
again — all held by weight. Countless million years will 
pass, but only a tick in the Almighty's clock, and lo, a 
systems of suns will then come forth from the womb of 
time. Thus beyond the dream of romance, 'we see suns 



110 GOD NOW MAKING SUNS AND PLANETS. 

and systems being created before our eyes in the neb- 
ula?. 

Sir ~N. Lockyer, and famous European and American 
men of science passed years of study, followed higher 
mathematics, worked out the problems of the nebula? — 
their nature and movements — and we have condensed 
their results in the above. These men but followed out 
the footprints of the mighty Mathematician, our Crea- 
tor, God, in His material creation, and to them be all 
honor and glory, they could not say there is no God. 

For the wonder of it is, these tremendous streams, and 
globes, and masses of matter, and gases known as nebulas, 
now making systems of sun and planetary systems like 
ours, do not come together as one great mass of matter, 
which they would if left to weight alone. They form 
into suns and globes, which go round each other all 
the time, according to the processes of arithmetic, and 
higher mathematics. Who is the wise Power who pre- 
sides over their movements ? There must be a Wisdom 
different from these fiery globes and vast expansions of 
matter, who lays down their limits, their directions and 
the velocity of their movements, because all those move- 
ments are founded on figures. 



SECTION II.— THE WONDERS OF THE SOLAR 
SYSTEM. 



CHAPTER V.— THE WAY OUR EARTH, SUN AND PLANETS 
WERE MADE. 

We saw that even in our days metals, gases and ma- 
terials of nebulae are falling together, condensing into 
systems of suns. Science says all materials composing 
the solar system, now condensed into earth, sun and 
planets, once formed a nebula, or vast cloud of dust, 
metallic vapors and gases, extending far beyond the orbit 
of our outside planet, Uranus. These materials were 
not created spread equally, the same in all places. They 
extended like clouds with empty voids between them 
where there was no matter, or it was not as thickly 
made. Where Providence saw planets would condense, 
He made matter in greater amounts. These denser ma- 
terials drew in the surrounding dusts and gases, and 
thus built the planets. In the center of the vast shape- 
less mass the materials were dense and these now compose 
our sun. In certain spaces matter was thickly spread, and 
the earth and planets resulted from their condensation. 

Science loves to try to trace the natural laws back to 
the beginnings of this vast globe of misty deeps, when 
the Eternal in His might brought them forth from noth- 
ingness and eternal night. All discoveries agree with 
these words : " In the beginning God created heaven and 
earth. Gen. i. 1. And the Hebrew word is erets, 
" earth," ground, " soil." How expressive this is of 
the dusts, and mists of which science says the orbs were 
made! 

Ill 



112 HOW MATTER OF UNIVERSE WAS MADE. 

The universe was filled with matter without move- 
ment; chaos and dark night brooded over nature. The 
cloudy dusts were motionless and all was dark. No 
sun or planet or orb then was there. " And the earth 
was without form, and void, and darkness was upon the 
face of the deep." Gen. i. 2. How scientific that de- 
scription is of the universe before it was given motion 
which produced heat, light, electricity and the natural 
forces ! 

What is the meaning of these words we translate with- 
out form, according to the latest discoveries of our day. 
The Hebrew is tohu " vacancy," a " ruin," that for void 
is ~bohu, " emptiness," for darkness we have chosheJc, 
" without light." The Bible story shows a void, vacant, 
empty, dark, like a ruin, without order, without light. 
Thus the Creator made matter. Our latest discoveries 
bear out this statement. Every science says this was 
the way matter was in the beginning. 

The sun with its light, heat, electricity, magnetism, and 
other forces, its relation to earth and planets circling 
round, the movement of each body on its axis, the sun 
going round on its axis in 25 1-3 days, the earth in 24 
hours, the planets revolving in their own time — these 
bodies, of the solar system, help us gain a knowledge of 
the millions in number of other heavenly systems. Let 
us first see our sun and his planets. 

We see that vast body, a ball of fire hung in heaven, 
each moment giving out tremendous force. We find the 
larger planets, as Jupiter, Saturn, etc., are red-hot orbs, 
with every metal melted. Our moon's surface is dotted 
with extinct volcanoes, which once belched forth fire. 
The solid granite crust of our earth shows that once it 
was melted and in cooling crystallized, and the interior 
of our planet is a fiery mass. Every heavenly body 
shows intense heat now or at former time. Where 
did this heat come from \ We are now at the origin of 
worlds. 

Oft in olden days poets sang of the universe, made from 



/ 



HOW THE POETS DESCRIBE CREATION". 113 

chaos and dark night. Their idea in the main agree 
with Moses' words, telling of the time when "the earth 
was without form, and void, and darkness was upon the 
the face of the deep." In Hesiod's pages Ovid sings of 
the birth of nature and Dante also tells the story. Mil- 
ton elaborates in these words: 

"A hoary deep, a dark 
illimitable ocean without bound, 

Without dimension where length, breadth, and height, 
And time, and place are lost, where eldest Night, 
And chaos, ancestors of Nature, hold 
Eternal anarchy, amidst the noise 
Of endless wars and by confusion stand. 

A wild abyss, 
The womb of Nature and perhaps her grave. 
Of neither sea, nor shore, nor air, nor fire, 
But all these in their pregnant causes mixed 
Confusedly . . . Chaos, umpire, sits, 
And by decision more embroils the fray, 
By which he reigns ; next him, high arbiter 
Chance governs all," 

But now the ' ' Spirit of God moves ' ' over the face 
of "the waters" — metallic gases; dead, dark and 
moveless matter takes on force. Chaos ceases, order 
is born, light comes forth. Then, under the impulse 
given the universe by God, the suns and worlds 
move, begin to form. We can trace matter, star, sun, 
planet, comet, nebula and meteorite back by laws to 
that time when God gave them force and sent them 
in the mighty orbits they still follow. Did you say 
these heavenly bodies were always, that they are in- 
finite in number that an Intelligence eternal in wisdom 
and might did not bring them forth and fix their laws 
and sent them on their journeys ? 

Tennyson, Poet Laureate, in the " Princess," thus 
sums up the formations of sun and planets : 

" This world was once a fluid haze of light. 
Till toward the center set the starry tides, 
And eddied into suns, that whirling cast 
The planets." 



114 THE BABYLONIAN ACCOUNT OF CREATION. 

In the British Museum the writer stood beside cases 
containing Tablets discovered once ornamenting temple 
and palace walls in plains of Babylonia. They are of 
red baked clay like bricks from 6 to 8 in. long, and about 
4 to 6 in. wide. Before being burned they were covered 
with arrow-headed letters called cuneiform characters. 
Beside each tablet is a translation by Dr. Smith. They 
relate the Creation, the Fall of Man, the Tower of Babel 
and matters of the history given in Genesis. The fifth 
tablet, relating to Creation, has the following Legend : 

It was delightful all that was fixed by the great gods, 

Stars their appearance (in figures) of animal he arranged, 

To fix the years through the observations of their constellations. 

Twelve months of stars in three rows he arranged, 

From when the year commences unto the close. 

He fixed the positions of the wandering stars to shine in their 

courses, 
That they may not do injury, and may not trouble any one. 
The positions of the gods Bel and Hea he fixed with him, 
And he opened the gates in the darkness shrouded, 
The fastenings were strong on the left and right. 
In its mass he a boiling (in lower chaos) 
The god Uri (the moon called Ur) he caused to rise out the night he 

overshadowed, 
To fix it also for the light of the night until the shining of the day. 
That the month might not be broken and in its amount be regular, 
At the beginning of the month, at the rising of the night, 
His horns are breaking through to shine on the heavens 
On the seventh day to a circle he begins to swell, 
And stretches toward the dawn further 
When the god Shamas (the sun) in the horizon of heaven in the east. 

The rest of the tablet is broken and mutilated so but 
few words can be made out. Stripped of fancy and 
fable how like these words are to the Biblical account, 
" And God said : Let there be lights made in the firm- 
ament of heaven to divide the day and night, and let 
them be for seasons and for days and for years. To 
shine in the firmament of heaven and to give light upon 
the earth." Gen. i. 14, 15. 

Proctor, in his " Other Worlds than Ours," sums up 
the ideas of the learned, and reduces to a system the dis- 
coveries and figures of astronomers. He says all re- 



HOW SUNS AND PLANETS WERE MADE. 115 

searches show the space now occupied by our sun and 
planets, as well as the spaces, between the stars were 
once occupied by vast quantities of gases and metals 
in a state of vapors, clouds or mists. But these matters 
were not dispersed through the universe in an even way. 
They were denser in some places than in others. When 
given movement and attraction, planets and suns con- 
densed in these places where matter was more dense, or 
thickly spread. 

But these places between the stars where matter was 
more thickly strewn were not thus filled by chance. An 
overruling Providence marked out and fixed exactly these 
special places. As the matter began to attract, the ma- 
terials swept down towards the centers in each special 
place and thus they formed the planets and suns. As 
the particles of matter, by the universal law of weight, 
fell down into the heavier masses, the impacts developed 
great heat. This was the origin of the heat of suns 
and stars. The earth and moon surfaces show that once 
they were intensely hot, but by lapse of time they cooled. 
As heat is a mode of motion, the result of movement, 
this heat came from the tremendous strokes of these par- 
ticles falling into and on the surfaces of earth, planets, 
sun and stars. 

When we apply the rules of probability to these laws 
presiding over the formation of worlds, we find it is 
utterly beyond all calculations to suppose that these mil- 
lions of shining orbs were made in their places by chance, 
and measured and weighed and placed where we find 
them now going round. For if there were no Power who 
made matter in the places where it would condense into 
worlds and who gave it laws to rule the stars, chaos and 
eternal confusion would reign. Planets would fall into 
suns, suns would sweep down into larger suns, and under 
attraction alone, all would combine into one mighty, 
tremendous mass condensing all matter in the universe. 
There was therefore a Mind, eternal in Wisdom, who 
made matter in these places, and gave it these simple 



116 HOW THE PLANETS WERE MADE. 

laws by which it condensed into planets and suns. !S! 
study of the heavenly bodies forces each one not insane 
to say there is a God who presided over creation, who 
still rules matter. 

Led by higher mathematics — following figures we will 
not now spread on our pages — 'Proctor shows that the 
largest union of matter would take place at the outside 
of this revolving nebula or globe of metallic mists form- 
ing the planets and sun. The more it condensed, the 
larger would be the masses separated from it. This is 
just what we find. For Neptune, Uranus, Saturn and 
Jupiter, the largest planets, are the farthest from the 
sun, while Mars, our Earth, Venus and Mercury are the 
smallest and nearest to the sun. This took place be- 
cause the sun in the center, with his great mass of mat- 
ter, attracted the greater part of the materials nearest 
to him, after the large masses far removed separated 
from this revolving globe of mists, dust and gases which 
broke up into the larger planets. 

This is the result of the latest instigations of the 
learned. For all through the universe movements of 
matter follow their laws and act according to mathe- 
matics. 

The circular motion of each sun and planet produces 
two forces, one tending to force the orb away when it 
turns too fast, the other to fall into the larger body round 
which it revolves when it goes too slow; one is the 
centrifugal the other the centripetal force. These forces 
just balance each other in all the heavenly bodies. 

We know how a wheel turned too fast will burst with 
force according to its swiftness, how whirling balls make 
a governor for an engine regulating its speed. If the 
world went round the sun once in two years it would 
in time fall into his surface; if it went round him in 
six months it would fly away into the spaces between the 
stars. But we swing round once a year and the impulses 
to fly away and to fall into the sun just balance each 
other, 



DO ORBS PROVE THERE IS NO GOD ? lTi 

Suppose our earth had only half its weight, or the 
sun had twice its mass, or we were twice as far away, 
or swung round him nearer, or farther, our world would 
have been destroyed within historic days. For it would 
be hurled far out into the deeps between the stars, or 
fall into the sun. How we admire a beautifully work- 
ing machine! But who realizes the wonders of our 
world resting on nothing, rolling round once each day, 
gyrating round the sun each year with forces so nicely 
poised and balanced it goes on counting days, seasons, 
years, ages? 

The Almighty made just enough matter, in the exact 
place in space where a sun or planet was to be formed 
by materials falling in to form its mass, gave each metal 
its weight so all would compose our world weighing just 
this amount of tons, placed our earth just that distance 
from the sun, gave it just this force or rapidity of revolu- 
tion that it might go on forever. 

But this He did not only with our earth, but also 
in every planet, and with the millions of suns. To 
do this he weighed every particle of matter in earth, and 
planets and suns and comets and nebulae, measured out 
their distances one from another, gave them just the 
motion required. With His infinite mathematical mind 
he laid down their laws, hung them on figures of arith- 
metic, algebra, conic sections and all the studies we 
follow in universities. 

Will you say all this came by accident? The proba- 
bilities are that in one case out of millions chance might 
place a planet the right distance from a sun. But every 
body in heaven is hung according to these mathematics 
and thus they do not clash together. Deeper still we see 
the wonders. For not less than 500 millions and perhaps 
a 1,000 millions of suns sweep round each other ac- 
cording to these laws, not counting the nebulae and comets 
and bodies we do not see because they are dark, and 
which we know exist because they cause perturbations 
in the planets by turning them from their course. 



118 HEAT AS A MODE OF MOTION. 

Still wonders rise and pile on marvels. For of these 
500 millions of suns few of them are single bodies, 
nearly all are double, triple, quadruple clusters, etc., 
two, three, four, or many suns revolving round a com- 
mon center of gravity. It was necessary to weigh each 
of these bodies, to know the exact distance to place them 
from each other, and give them the right rapidity of 
motion. We weigh them when we know their move- 
ments shown by the spectroscope which tells their light, 
heat and the metals composing them, but we are only 
going over the works of the Creator, who hung them on 
these simple laws, and placed them there to tell us a 
little lesson of his Almighty Power. 

The learned author of " The Moon Considered as a 
Planet, as a World and a Satellite," says, p. 29 : " The 
Divine Will that made the earth made the moon also, 
and the means of working were the same for both. The 
geological phenomena of the earth afford unmistakable 
evidence of its original fluid or molten state, and the 
appearance of the moon is unmistakably that of a body 
once in a molten or igneous state. The enigma of the 
earth's primary formation is solved by the application 
of the dynamical theory of heat. By this theory the 
generation of cosmical heat is removed from the quick- 
sands of conjecture, and established on the firm ground 
of direct calculation, for the absolute amount of matter 
is deducible from a mathematical formula." Mayer 
computed the amount of heat the matter of the earth 
would have generated if it had been formed originally 
of only two parts drawn into collision by mutual at- 
traction, and has found that it would be from 32,000 
to 47,000 deg. C. The temperature of melting iron 
is only 1,500 deg. C. 

The celebrated Holmholtz figured out the amount of 
heat generated by the condensation of all the matter in 
the solar system, sun and planets, and finds it enough 
to raise a mass of water of the same size to 28,000,000 
degrees C. Father Secc/hi and Tyndall estimate the 



DID THE UNIVERSE COME BY CHANCE? 119 

heat of the sun as 10,000,000 degrees. We find, there- 
fore, that the present heat of the sun and the original 
heat of the planets which has been for the most part lost, 
came from the weight of the matters falling into these 
suns and planets, which began to fall down after God 
gave attraction to matter at creation. The planets, being 
smaller, cooled, the suns we call stars, being larger, pre- 
served their heat and still give out light. Therefore we 
trace back through the laws of nature light, heat, elec- 
tricity and the natural forces into weight, called attrac- 
tion. Every movement or change in sun or planet or 
heavenly body, every move of living plant, animal or 
man came originally from the Creator, the Primeval 
Force and Fountain of movements in nature. There- 
fore motion, or force, cannot be destroyed. 

Men who dug deep in the science of the stars, say that 
the probability that by accident they happened to occupy 
the positions they now have, that they got the movements 
and the orbits they follow and pursue is unthinkable. 
Leaving aside the millions of suns we come now to 
study the bodies of our solar system. Did it happen that 
the planets gyrating round our sun from west to east 
happened to get those movements by chance ? Let us see. 

Eight planets having 136 moons or satellites, with 
500 little planets called asteroids making 636 bodies, 
not counting comets and meteorites, compose our solar 
system. They all go round the sun from west to east. 
Did this happen through an accident? 

" For it would be manifestly unreasonable," says 
Professor Proctor, " to regard our system as one in which 
the original arrangements were so fortuitously happy, 
that it has continued to exist as a system. For we find 
that the probability of these arrangements so existing 
by mere chance is exceedingly minute. Now how small 
this probability is may be inferred by considering only 
the motion of the planets in one direction. Therefore, 
by the laws of probability, the chance that even 144 
planets would revolve in that direction is represented by 



120 FIGURES PROVE A DIVINE INTELLIGENCE. 

a fraction, whose numerator is unity, and its denomina- 
tor is 2 raised to the 144th power. Now 144 times the 
logarithm of 2 (or 3010300) equals 43.3483200 show- 
ing that the above denominator is a number of 44 digits 
beginning 2230077 with 37 digits to follow. (That is 
2230077 with 37 ciphers or noughts following. This in- 
conceivably enormous number represents the odds to 1, 
against the observed arrangement being the result of 
chance, even considering the only result of several men- 
tioned above, all of which present the same order of 
improbability." 

Thus the probability of one planet having obtained its 
motion from west to east by chance or accident is as 
one to 2,230,077,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,- 
000,000,000,000. Therefore this planet must have 
received its movement from a Mind which directed it. 
But there are 144 regular planets and satellites and 500 
little asteroids in our system, and this law of chance must 
be applied to each, making 144 added to 500=644 
multiplied against the chance that each happened by acci- 
dent, or haphazard, to get its direction from west to east. 
But there are 500 millions of suns we see as stars, nearly 
all the stars are double, some are triple, and thousands 
have dark bodies circulating around them. But when 
we apply this rule of chance to them we are simply lost in 
figures. Miles square of paper covered with figuring 
would not hold them. The mind lost in mathematical 
truths, our truest reasoning force us to stay an eternal 
Intelligence directed the movements of the heavenly 
orbs. 

Light, heat, electricity, magnetism, attraction, weight, 
etc., are modes of motion. The universe is at last re- 
duced down to two things, force and matter. We ride 
in a trolley car moved by electricity, heated and 
lighted by the one same force which comes from the 
burning coal or falling water, and that force came from 
the sun's light and heat stored up. Every movement on 
our earth comes from the sun. But where did the sun 



STATE OE OUR SOLAR SYSTEM AT CREATION. 121 

get the tremendous forces he has been sending out for 
untold ages, and still pours down, and whence came the 
heat of earth and planets and stars and Milky Way ? 

A French scientist, Laplace, noted for his knowledge 
of figures, in the beginning of the nineteenth century 
published his Nebular Theory on the Origin of the 
Solar System. Soon his ideas were adopted, for they 
explained the birth not only of our sun and planets, but 
also of all star systems of the heavens. The nebulae 
are solar systems, growing like our sun and planets once 
were before they shaped into forms they have now. 
Worlds, and suns, and stars, and planets are forming 
now before our eyes, we call them nebula?. Let us see 
this theory of creation, which little modified has been 
accepted by all the learned. 

Once all the matter of our sun and planets were in a 
state of gas, mist, metallic clouds, extremely thin or 
diffused through a space extending far beyond the farth- 
est planet Neptune. Every system of the universe was 
first in this state of dust mixed with gases a thou- 
sand times thinner than air. In that thin diffused state 
the Almighty brought the minerals forth from nothing at 
His mighty word. Matter then had no form, no motion, 
no light, no heat, no force. This state of matter exactly 
agrees with the words, " And the earth was without 
form, and void, and darkness was upon the face of the 
deep." Gen. i. 2. 

Matter stays where it is put. & stone, a brick, any 
object will stay where it is placed is till some one moves 
it. Thus the mountains, the soil, the materials of our 
buildings rest where we put them till removed by a force 
outside themselves. So the matters of the universe would 
have rested ever and forever if not moved by a superior 
force. Dark and motionless would these metallic vapors 
and gases have remained if they had not been given move- 
ment. The Hebrews had no word for gases we are de- 
scribing, and the Bible called them " waters." But how 
did they get movement ? The account continues, " And 



122 THE ORIGIN" OF FORCE WHICH BUILT ORBS. 

the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters." 
Gen. i. 2. 

The matter of the universe after it was made was still. 
It was an ocean vast and deep of metals and gases ex- 
tremely thin. It had no force, no movement, no attrac- 
tion or repulsion. The mighty globes of matters, now 
forming the heavenly bodies, stars, nebulse, suns and 
planets as metallic vapors rested moveless after they came 
forth from nothingness — eternal night moved by the 
might of the Almighty. Light, heat, electricity, attrac- 
tion, repulsion and gravitation, etc., are but different 
modes of one force we call movement. Where did this 
movement come from ? From God, Primeval and Eter- 
nal Force. He moved matter when the " Spirit of God 
moved on the face of the waters." Gen. i. 2. 

What was the beginning of these forces, how do they 
act? The original force is attraction. It makes every- 
thing in the universe heavy. But all things have not 
the same force, some are heavier than others. Water is 
heavier than air, aluminum lighter than gold, gas lighter 
than air, solids are denser than fluids, and the latter less 
dense than gases — each material has its own forces 
given at creation. Different materials unite under their 
own laws, and make the varied things we find on earth 
and in the stars. Among the stars weight is called uni- 
versal gravitation. Every particle of matter in the uni- 
verse has weight, that is, each particle attracts every 
other particle of matter according to the inverse ratio 
of the square of the distances they are apart. This alone 
would make the heavenly bodies all come together with 
one tremendous crash. But when the " Spirit of God 
moved over the waters," that is primeval matter, He gave 
each material its own force or energy to condense and 
sent them whirling around each other according to the 
laws He imposed on them, and according to this attrac- 
tion they were to form orbs by lapse of ages. 

Force can never be destroyed, it can only be changed 
into heat, light, electricity, etc. Only God Himself who 



ORIGIN AND TWITY OF THE NATURAL FORCES. 123 

made it can destroy it, for it is an image of Him 
who is the eternal Force, Living Power, Origin of all in 
nature. 

When force or movement in matter is stopped sud- 
denly it appears as heat or light, etc. Strike a piece of 
iron on the anvil and yon heat it, for the force of your 
blow is changed into heat. Coal is only light and heat 
of the sun ages ago stored up in planets of former 
geological epochs, which now burned gives out this heat 
and light. All force and movement on our earth came 
from the sun, the latter got from its Creator. 

A metal having little heat is solid, heat it more and 
it melts, continue to heat it and you will have a metallic 
gas. You see this in ice, solid water, which heat melts, 
when it becomes water, but heated still more and it be- 
comes steam. All materials in the universe can be 
changed this way by heat. Force, movement, activity, 
gravity, repulsion, light, heat, electricity, work, etc., 
are but so many different kinds of movement, and every 
movement in nature can be traced back to the time " the 
Spirit of God moved " over the dark void of formless 
matter filling the great expanse of heaven where are now 
the stars. 

It took a long time for men to understand the nature 
of motion, force, heat, etc., and still longer before they 
saw that all these are different modes of the same 
force. But the great minds understand that all natural 
forces are one and the same in different forms. 

Bacon in his Organum, says : " Heat itself, its essence 
and quiddity, is motion and nothing else." Locke wrote : 
" What in our sensation is heat in the object, is nothing 
but motion." Descartes held the same opinion. Boyle, 
two centuries ago, wrote a treatise called, " The Me- 
chanical Theory of Heat and Cold." Rumford made 
interesting experiments, and he published them under 
the title, " An Inquiry Concerning the Source of Heat 
Excited by Friction." Father Secchi wrote a work: 
" The Unity of the Physical Forces " more than forty 



124 THE ORIGIN OF LIGHT, HEAT, FORCE, ETC. 

years ago, in which he shows that light, heat, motion, 
electricity and all the natural forces are one and identical 
appearing in different forms. It was the beginning of 
the great development of practical electricity in all kinds 
of electric motors, trolleys, etc. 

Mayer studied the subject in Germany, and Jule in 
England. The latter found the heat which would raise 
a pound of water 1 deg. ~F. would be generated by a 
pound weight falling 772 ft., or 772 lbs. falling 1 ft. 
Soon the mechanical theory of the natural forces was 
worked out, and became a fixed science. What is an 
engine but a machine to change heat into the movement 
which turns the wheels of our machinery ? 

Now let us turn these simple principles regarding 
energy, or motion to our subject the stars. When the 
meteorite shoots down into our air, its terrific motion 
is stopped that heats it red-hot, and even often dissi- 
pates it into vapors of the metals composing it. That 
law rules among the stars. When the immense masses 
of matter fell into the highly condensed centers by at- 
traction, the arrested flights of the particles falling, so 
suddenly stopped caused intense heat. In the stars this 
force, suddenly stopped, shows as light and heat they 
still give out. In the case of the smaller masses, as earth 
and planets, the light and heat they once had for the 
most part was lost long ago. In the larger planets, as 
Neptune, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune, some of this 
heat remains, they are still in a state of metallic vapors, 
fiery hot. The sun and stars, which are much larger 
than these planets, still throw out their light and heat. 

Under the influence of attraction alone all materials 
form round globes, as the heavenly bodies and as drops 
of water or any kind of matter in a fluid state. Thus 
the orbs of heaven are all round. But because they turn 
their axis similar to the earth each day, they are mostly 
flattened at their poles — that is, they bulge out an ex- 
panded ring round their equators. As they cool from 
the surface, the matter first forms ajthick shell inclosing 



HOW THE PLANETS WERE MADE. 125 

the melted interior. The surface of our earth shows 
that all the deeper rocks were once melted and then 
cooled. But the waters of the earth, when it was hot, 
was a great surrounding atmosphere of steam which con- 
densed into water and this formed great floods which 
ground the rocks into the soil. 

From west to east the vast expanded masses of matter 
of our solar system moved. All the orhs move in this di- 
rection, thus they whirl round on their axis, thus the sun 
rotates and thus planets circle round him. But with 
that movement all matter was given attraction, one par- 
ticle for another, according to the laws of universal 
weight or gravitation. The matter of which our sun 
and planets were later made, as a mighty glohe of gas 
containing all the minerals and fluids and gases slowly 
turned on its axis with the motion the Creator, the 
"Spirit of God " gave it. 

This great glohe extended on all sides far heyond our 
farthest planet Neptune, 30,000 times farther from the 
sun than our earth. But the matter forming this globe 
was not all of the same density. In eight places Eternal 
Intelligence made it denser, and there, in these dense 
regions, under the laws of attraction these parts con- 
densed into the planets Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, 
the Asteroids, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune. 
Thus Wisdom, looking far ahead, made matter in 
places so it would condense into the sun and planets 
where we see them now. Who is so foolish as to say 
there no Mind presided over the formation of the 
worlds ? 

As this gaseous globe condensed under laws of motion 
and attraction, or weight, it threw off these vast por- 
tions in dense parts, which kept their motions from 
west to east. These, still ruled by their weight or at- 
traction, gathered to themselves all the thrown-off ma- 
terials — under these laws grouped themselves into the 
planets. Anything moving will move till stopped by 
something outside itself, and the planets go on forever 



126 WHY SOEAR SYSTEM IS NOT A GLOBE OF DUST. 

in their orbits round the sun. They retain that move- 
ment God first gave them, for they strike nothing which 
would stop them. 

In numerous other places matter was made in denser 
spots and these condensed into the meteorites, which 
sometimes fall into our air, and others into the sun to 
keep up his heat. But the number and mass of these 
were regulated that just enough of them might fall into 
the sun to keep his heat just right to light and heat our 
world, that living beings might not be frozen or burned 
up. Who could foresee this but the Divine Mind? 

We said the great globe of gas contained all the mat- 
ter now in our sun and planets, and that these gases and 
mists and clouds of dust were not the same in density 
in all places. For if all were of the same density be- 
yond Neptune, it would have had hardly any cohesion, 
it would be so thin that in turning it would have given 
off only small fragments, these would have condensed 
into small particles, or meteoric dust, and there would 
be no sun or planets. For then this globe of these me- 
tallic vapors or nebulae would have had only about the 
two-hundred-millionth of the density of our air at sea 
level, and it would be much less dense than that on its 
outer surface, where it would be exposed to the cold of 
the spaces between the stars, more than 449 degrees be- 
low zero, which would solidify hydrogen. In this cold 
everything would at last become solid, forming fine dust, 
and make one vast solid globe. But God provided for 
all these things so matter would form worlds and suns. 

Simple were the laws the Creator imposed on matter 
which broke up into the worlds. These laws still rule the 
universe. Everything has weight; if not held up it 
falls towards the center of the earth, planet, or sun. So 
the matter of this tremendous metallic gaseous globe with 
weight condensed towards the center where is now our 
sun. This weight, called universal gravitation, is a 
force or movement which came from the Spirit of God 
when He moved over the waters, when He gave mat- 



PLANETS THROWN EROM DUST GLOBE. 127 

ter motion going round. Everything attracts every other 
thing, according to the law of gravitation, and this 
weight is found through the universe. Obeying this 
law all the materials of which our sun and planets are 
made tend to and condense towards the center. Thus 
the mighty globe of diffused matter became smaller and 
smaller. 

The smaller it became the faster it turned — that is a 
law of whirling bodies. When you set a wheel in mo- 
tion and turn it faster and faster a time comes when 
the movement becomes so fast the wheel bursts, smashes 
to pieces, and these pieces fly away with great force. 
The fragments flying away turn on their axis more or 
less rapidly before they strike any object which stops 
their flight. Often people are injured or killed by 
bursting wheels. 

So the whirling, cosmic globe condensing, turning 
faster, a time came when it threw off from its surface 
great masses of whirling matter. This law has been 
studied by learned men in cases where one heavenly body 
comes near another, and the point when one of the bodies 
will be torn asunder is called the " Roche limit." Not 
only a globe of gases, metals ground to powder, will be 
torn asunder, but even a solid globe. In a certain way 
we see this in the tides raised by the attraction of the 
sun and moon, which if nearer to us would tear the 
waters of the ocean from the earth. 

According to this law every planet, or rather the mat- 
ters in them, were thrown off from this circling globe 
of diffused matter as they condensed towards the center. 
Projected from its surface each went whirling on its 
way, and thus the materials of the planets were thrown 
off and they still turn on their axis with a slow motion. 
But they were held in their orbits by the greater attrac- 
tion of the vast central mass. The matter of the planets 
obeyed the laws of condensation, got smaller and smaller, 
turned faster and faster, till condensed into the heavenly 
bodies we call the planets. As they condensed, follow- 



128 FORCES WHICH MADE SUN AND PLANETS. 

ing the law, they also sent forth other masses from their 
surfaces, and these became the moon or satellites re- 
volving round the planets. 

Thus by simple laws, when God created, as mists and 
clouds, the Spirit of God made matter, revolve with 
the movement impressed on it, and under this movement 
the worlds, the sun and planets and moons of our sys- 
tem were shaped and formed and placed in the heavens 
where we now find them. We are astonished at the sim- 
plicity of the laws God gave matter, which brought 
into being the heavenly bodies of our solar system. Still 
more astonished we are to see thousands and thousands 
of gaseous globes — nebula?, in all parts of the heavens 
obeying these same laws are now forming worlds and 
suns and planets. 

Learned men study laws ruling matter in the form of 
a great globe of gases, clouds, mists, oil in water, etc., 
matter turning around as we described, and we give the 
results. As the tremendous globe of our solar system 
slowly turned, it still more condensed under attraction, 
that took place round the places where the matter was 
the densest, round the center where is the sun, and round 
the materials now composing the planets. Tie anything 
to a string and swing it round so the string will wind 
round your finger, and the shorter the string becomes 
the faster it will whirl, till at last all the string winds 
round, and the object strikes your finger. The object 
tries to fly away, but the string holds it. 

Let your finger represent the great central sun mass 
in this turning globe of matter in a state of gas and mist, 
the string universal gravitation, and the effort to fly 
away the repulsive force. The first is the sun, the sec- 
ond is universal gravitation, and the last the repulsion 
of the turning globe. 

Now let us apply these attractions and repulsions to 
our nebula of matter turning round. The more it con- 
densed the faster it turned, and more it tended to throw 
off the outer parts. A time came when the repulsion 



HOW THE OUTER PLANETS WERE BORN. 129 

became greater than the attraction and it threw off at 
the outer edge a great mass of condensed matter at a 
place about 30,000 times farther from the center than 
our earth is from the sun. This matter thus projected 
still had its movement round its own central mass. 
When it was torn off it took a motion round itself, 
which we now see in the planet into which it condensed, 
Neptune, 2,745,998,000 miles from the sun. Neptune 
goes round the sun in about 164 years, and we conclude 
that our great globe turned round on its axis a little 
slower than this when it drove out Neptune's materials. 

Faster turned the globe of matter as it condensed un- 
der gravitation, for that is a law of mechanics. A time 
came when the tendency to fly off overcame attraction. 
When the surface of the misty globe was about 1,753,- 
868,000 miles from the center, a great mass of ma- 
terials was thrown off and condensed into the planet 
Uranus, which goes round the sun in a little more than 
eighty-four years. 

Smaller still became the whirling globe of matter, 
mist and gases, when the outer surface was about 872,- 
137,000 miles from the center, a great quantity of ma- 
terials was hurled forth, which condensed into the planet 
Saturn, revolving round the sun in 29 1-2 years. Smaller 
it became, still smaller, till when the outside was some- 
where about 475,692 miles from the middle, the whirl- 
ing motion getting always faster, a mighty quantity of 
matter was thrown out which condensed into the planet 
Jupiter, which revolves round the sun in nearly twelve 
years. 

Smaller still became the matter of our nebulae under 
these laws of movements till it condensed so the outer 
surface was somewhere about 139,311,000 miles from 
the center. As the smaller it became the faster it turned, 
it then projected a lot of matter which condensed into 
the planet Mars, which revolves round the sun a little 
more than 686 days. 

Still condensing — becoming smaller and revolving more 



130 WHO PUT THE PLANETS THEKE \ 

rapidly, at about the time when its surface was 93,000,- 
000 miles from the center, the globe threw of! the matter 
which condensed and became our earth with its satellite 
the moon, which revolves round the sun in 365 days. 

Leaving our earth to follow its motion, the matter 
became smaller, and when its diameter condensed to 
about 66,134,000 miles from the center, the whirling 
force projected the materials which became the planet 
Venus, which revolves round the sun in 224 days. 

Gravitation still more condensed the gaseous, misty 
matter, and faster it revolved under the law we have 
given, till at the distance of about 35,392,000 the rapid 
whirling globe threw off the materials of Mercury, which 
travels round the sun in about three months. 

Still the central matter contiued to condense and re- 
volve faster till the great central mass became our sun, 
which rotates round its axis in about 25 days. 

Can we give the distances from our sun the central 
mass where the planets were projected? Take the dis- 
tance from our earth to the sun and call it 1,000, and 
we find Mercury is 387, Venus 723, Earth 1,000, Mars 
1,524, Jupiter," 5,203, Saturn 9,539, Uranus 19,183, 
and Neptune 30,037. There is a certain uniformity in 
these distances called the Bode or Titius' law of the 
distances of the planets. In regular order one planet is 
double the distance of the planet within. Mercury 0, 
Venus 3, Earth 6, Mars 12, Asteroids 20, Jupiter 24, 
Saturn 48, Saturn 96, Uranus 192, Neptune 384. These 
figures give the relation of their distances, showing a 
Mathematician presided over the movements which pro- 
jected the planets into space, for their distances from 
the sun form a geometrical progression. 

But the amount of matter created which was to form 
the planets does not follow this law. For there was to be 
one planet, Earth, the habitation of man, and this was 
in the Almighty Mind when the worlds were made. If 
we take the mass composing the sun as 315,000,000, 
that of Mercury will be 65, Venus 885, Earth 1,012, 






DEFECTS OF THE NEBULAR THEORY. 131 

Mars 118, Jupiter 300,860, Saturn 69,692, Uranus 
12,650, Neptune 16,773. By this it is seen that the 
earth, including the moon, in mass is much larger than 
the two planets within and without us — 'Venus and 
Mars. If the planet masses had been in proportion, as 
are the distances, we could not live on earth. The at- 
traction would be so small all things would weigh so 
little they would not hold together. 

Take a fluid gobe, as oil in water, such as we suppose 
the melted earth was in when in process of formation, 
the mass of the moon being a part of it. Make this oil 
turn round as the then earth did, as it floated round 
the sun. As you increase the rotation the oil takes the 
form of an egg. Make it turn faster as the earth's rota- 
tion increased when it cooled and became smaller. The 
oil becomes a long round mass like a soft egg squeezed 
to make it longer. Keep increasing its rotation per- 
pendicular to its longer axis, and a time will come when 
it will throw out or separate from the two ends, which 
will form two round bodies of oil. Then the parent mass 
of oil becomes round again. 

Here you have not one, but three, round masses of 
oil. This explains how the moon was thrown from the 
earth. But why were not two moons in place of one 
projected from the fluid earth? We do not know. A 
Force above matter directed only one moon formed. 
Some say two masses were thrown out and these united 
to form the moon. Professors Darwin and Jeans took 
up this question, followed the motions of worlds thus 
forming, followed out the - movements, through the higher 
mathematics and came to the conclusion that the nebula 
theory has many defects. They admit matter alone fol- 
lowing its laws will not produce planets, that another 
Force must step in to form the worlds, and this Force 
must have Mind and Intelligence to direct matter. 

The moon's mass is 1.80th that of the earth, whereas 
Titian's mass, Saturn's largest satellite, has only 1.4600 
of Saturn's mass. Why was not the same proportion 



132 INFINITE POWER ALONE COULD MAKE MOON. 

of matter one-eightieth as between earth and moon 
thrown out from Saturn to form his satellites, and the 
same proportions between the other planets when their 
satellites were formed ? We do not know. We can only 
say a Supreme Power, not bound by nature's laws, pre- 
sided over the formation of the worlds. 

The friction of the tides caused a loss of motion; 
the tides cause the earth to loose only about a second 
of time in a century. We can imagine how long it took 
to form the moon, place it where it now shines, 240,000 
miles away, and make it circulate round the earth in 
about 29 days. For when the moon was born of earth, 
it had a revolution like the latter, which now rotates 
in 24 hours. 

Professor Darwin says : " Our ideas are absolutely 
blank as to the time required for the moon's evolution 
either according to Laplace's nebular hypothesis, or the 
meteoric theory. All we can say is, that they demand 
enormous intervals of time as estimated in years." If it 
took so long for the moon to separate from the earth and 
get so far away, 240,000 miles, where we find it now at 
the rate of a second in a century, which the earth loses 
through the tide action, we will have to estimate the 
numbers of seconds in 29 days of the moon's revolution, 
multiply this by 100 years, then multiply this by 
240,000 miles, the distance of our satellite. The re- 
sult is so enormous the reader can hardly realize the 
number of years. But the sun, losing light and heat, 
long ago would have become a dark sun before the moon 
would have got so far away. Mathematics therefore 
prove that another Power presided over the formation 
of the moon in addition to the natural forces. 



CHAPTER VI.-ARTURUS, ROUND WHICH OUR SUN AND 
EARTH REVOLVE. 

~No heavenly body is at rest. If it did not move 
through space the attraction of a star would drag it 
down and they would come together with tremendous 
force. Once we thought our world was still, we sup- 
posed our sun was still, remained ever in the same place ; 
but he, too, is moving through heavenly spaces. Other- 
wise he would fall into another sun, dragging with him 
his train of planets. The collision would disrupt and 
grind the sun, planets, and the world to finest dust, 
and turn to metallic vapor every material of earth be- 
cause of the awful heat the stroke would cause. 

The millions of suns are ever in motion with the move- 
ment the Creator gave them at their creation. If they 
stood still in space they would all finally fall together 
into one mighty globe of matter of awful heat and light. 
They follow mathematical motions through space. They 
were hung on figures when the Almighty " Spirit of 
God moved over the waters." Gen. i. 2. The Spirit 
therefore is the Source and original Mover of the uni- 
verse. 

Sir Wm. Herschel first noticed stars in one part of 
the heavens spreading out, separating from each other, 
and the stars in the opposite regions drawing nearer to 
each other. He spent years of labor studying these 
changes, and concluded our sun and solar system is 
moving towards a point in the constellation Hercules. 
The astronomers who followed him took up the question 
and agreed we are flying towards the outstretched arm 
of Hercules. Professor Newcomb, of Washington, thinks 
we are going towards a point south of the brilliant star 

133 



134 WHERE IS THE SOLAR SYSTEM GOING? 

Yega. Measurements of star-movements down to 1900 
give our flight as 15 miles a second, while Professor 
Campbell, with the spectroscope, figured it out as 12 1-2 
miles a second. It is astonishing how nearly alike 
these measurements are, differing only 2 1-2 miles. 
According to the last figure, which is perhaps about cor- 
rect, we are traveling at the rate of 1,036,800 miles a 
day, flying through space with our sun and planets, 
378,432,000 miles each year. This is a short distance 
in the vast expanses between the stars, for at this rate 
it would take us 68,000 years to arrive at the nearest 
fixed star. 

Astronomers do not agree as to the point we are ap- 
proaching — some think we are going towards Vega, not 
Arcturus, that it will take us 558,000 years to pass 
Vega, and that we will not revolve round Arcturus. 
For, as all the stars are moving, this mighty orb will not 
be in the same place when we arrive there. The parallax 
of Arcturus gives its distance so great, its light is 160 
years on its journey before arriving at our earth. That 
would require about 2,500,000 years for us to reach 
him at the rate of 12 miles a second. Professors Struve, 
Newcomb and other astronomers, following Herschel's 
figures, locate the point towards which we are going in 
the constellation Hercules. The learned do not agree, 
and we must wait for further discoveries. In the mean- 
time we will give the theory of Arcturus held by the 
learned. But this is not positive, although it may in- 
terest the reader. 

We are in the middle of the great wheel of the Milky 
Way, near the center of the three concentric globes of 
stars we see as constellations spread over the heavens. 
Down from time immemorial came a tradition that 
man is in in the middle of the universe, made for him, 
sole reasoning being of earth. The discoveries of Gali- 
leo and his disciples seemed to disturb our central posi- 
tion, and placed the world as one of the planets with the 
orb of day as the center of the solar system. That 



STARS AKD CLUSTERS FOUND IN FABLES. 135 

seemed to upset the ancient tradition, to contradict 
religion, and much disturbance followed. But later dis- 
coveries prove we are in the middle of a far greater uni- 
verse, than of the solar system of sun and planets. For 
millions and millions of suns are round us, pouring down 
on earth their light, heat and forces. Thus modern 
science has restored man to his central position as the 
primeval object of all creation. Religion and science 
always are in harmony when we know both well. 

What star is the very center of the universe? In 
far-off days poets sung of a sun, greatest of the orbs 
of God. Job says : " Who maketh Arcturus and Orion 
and the Pleiades and the inner parts of the south." 
Job lx. 9. From remotest times a legend came down 
that Arcturus, then called Atlas, upheld the world, and 
that the Pleiades were his daughters. 

The Great Bear is known to every one. The ancients 
called it Septem triones, " The Seven Oxen," whence the 
word Septentrionalis, the ancient Latin name for North. 
The Arabs named it Aldebb al akbar; the Chinese, 
Tcheou-pey, " The North god." Forever circle the stars 
of the Great and Little Bears round the north polar- 
star. Down below them, but above the Virgin, is the 
constellation of the Bootes, composed of 54 stars. Bootes 
was the fabled son of Jupiter and Callisto, called also 
Atlas, who carried the world, because his head was near 
the pole. As when he sets the Pleiades also set, it was 
supposed the latter were his daughters. Not far away 
shines, like golden rain, Berenice's Hair. They had 
queer ways of naming constellations. In the year 246 
B.C., Queen Berenice made a vow to cut off her hair 
and consecrate it to the gods in Venus' temple, if her 
husband returned victorious from battle. The hair was 
stolen the following night; her husband was much dis- 
pleased, till the astronomer Conon assured him the hair 
had been transported to heaven by Venus' orders, and 
shone as a constellation. 

Below the constellation of the Northern Crown, below 



136 famous stars in the north. 

and at the left of the Great Bear, you find a constellation 
the Greeks called the Bootes, " an ox," which they imag- 
ined was shaped like an ox-driver. Hercules stands with 
a club in his right hand, in his left a leash with which he 
holds two hunting-dogs. The Great Bear's tail extends 
down till it covers his belt, in which you see with naked 
eye a star of the first magnitude, they named Arctos, 
" a bear," and oura, " a tail," whence the name Arcturus, 
" the bear's tail." 

A little lower and to the left of the polar star, you 
will see Sirius, called the " Dog Star," brightest of all 
the fixed stars. It is in the constellation called the Great 
Dog. Its light is red, and the ancients called it "the 
red star." Seneca said it was as red as Mars. Envel- 
oped with deep, fiery metallic gases and layers of hy- 
drogen, it is going away from us at the rate of about 20 
miles a second, and athwart the line of sight at the rate 
of 15 miles a second. Huggins estimated its movement 
at 33 miles a second. It has a dark companion nearly 
as large, and they gyrate round each other. 

Two nearby stars seen as one body circle round a com- 
mon centre are bright. The bright body is 13 times as 
large as our sun, but not large enough to attract our 
sun to circle round it, because of its great distance from 
us. For it is 50 trillion miles away, and it takes its 
light 8 years to reach us. Canopus, a star of the first 
magnitude in Argo Navis, 37° from the south pole, 
round which it seems to circle, is the next brightest star. 
Vega, in the Lyra, and Rigel in Orion are all suns many 
times larger and brighter than ours, but they are too 
far away to rule our system. Yega with its immense 
weight and mass only swings our sun and planets round 
in parabolic perturbations. 

God made a sun large enough, Arcturus, round which 
swings our whole solar system, as our earth rolls round 
the sun each year. It is in the constellation of Hercules 
— not far from, but below the Great Bear, in that con- 
stellation later called the Bootes., in the border of Her- 



METALS IN MYSTERIOUS STATE IN ARCTURUS. 137 

cules' robe, in Lat. 20°, near Long. 20°. In size it is 
almost 1,000 times larger than our sun, the diameter of 
which is 853,000 miles. Vega is only 100 times larger 
than the sun. The diameter of Arcturus is said to be 
nearly 853,000,000 miles. When we think it is 93 
millions of miles from here to the sun, how will we get 
any idea of the size of this gigantic body 927 times 
larger? The human mind has hardly power to grasp 
these figures. Yet this sun God made this size to hold 
our sun, earth and planets that they may circle round 
this mighty star lest they fall into another heavenly 
body under the laws of attraction, and we perish. 

At the Yerks Observatory they took photos of Arc- 
turus' spectrum. There are few really dark lines, but 
14 partly shaded and different colored bands. Hundreds 
of bright lines look like little bright columns insensibly 
merging into each other. They are crowded together so 
they touch. Arcturus' spectrum differs from that of any 
other star in its surpassing brightness, in the width and 
number of its lines, and in the way they crowd together. 
Compared with the spectrum of titanium, the 46 lines of 
that rare metal are seen in Arcturus' spectrum, but in 
this mighty sun they are bright in place of being dark, 
as they are seen in the spectra of some other stars. Eta, 
in the constellation of the Lion, shows those titanium 
lines, but they are dark, as in E of the Great Dog, and 
are separated by bright lines. B of Orion gives the lines 
of iron and vanadium as taken at the Flag Staff Ob- 
servatory in Arizona. 

The observations of Arcturus through the spectroscope 
show it to be the hottest sun in heaven. The metals 
on its surface are in a state so hot as to be seemingly be- 
yond a gas, in some mysterious state or condition of mat- 
ter we do not yet understand. The lines are more like 
those given by vapors and gases in an extreme diffusion 
at a heat beyond our imagination. This heat was caused 
by the great amount of matter which fell into the mighty 



138 SUNS FOLLOW PATHS OF CONIC SECTIONS. 

sun and raised its temperature much higher than that of 
any other orb. 

When we discovered the path of our sun round Arc- 
turus, we found a truth of highest importance. Our 
solar system follows a parabolic curve like the tracks of 
a railroad — curving at one end round a sun, the path 
being a parabola similar to the paths of the comets round 
the sun. This, the first discovered track of one sun 
sweeping round another sun, shows us that the millions 
of suns follow these elongated curves of conic sections 
in circling round each other. The shining orbs come 
from depths of space like comets entering our solar sys- 
tem, and these suns sweep along these vast paths, rush 
towards each other, the smaller circling round the larger 
suns and then swing back the other side of their course 
billions of miles, distances almost countless, taking mil- 
lion of billions of years to complete their journeys. Thus 
the hundred millions of suns forever and ever sweep 
round the heavens. 

Comets come from far-off spaces, swing down into our 
solar system, approach so near as almost to touch the 
sun's surface, swing round his fiery mass, tail, nucleus 
and all materials heated to an incredible degree, and 
then pass out among the star depths, some to come back 
on other visits, others to be lost in star deeps. 

Thus our sun, leading his court of planets, follows a 
parabolic path down from near the Polar star as it 
sweeps south towards Arcturus. When ages will have 
passed our earth and sun will approach this Arcturus, 
tremendous in size. We will plunge down near his sur- 
face; his heat will melt our world, destroying with his 
fire all that lives. How utterly helpless we are to pre- 
vent this catastrophe ! We can absolutely do nothing 
but meet our fate. As was revealed to Job, so it has 
been handed down the world would be destroyed by fire. 

Eichard H. Byrd says : " Our sun through the cen- 
turies trails a long ellipse, dragging the world of course 
with it, and just within one end of this ellipse blaze the 



SEASONS OE AWPTTL HEAT AjSTD COLD. 139 

rays of another sun, known to astronomers as the star 
Arcturus. At the other end of our sun's ellipse are cold 
voids, vast spaces of absolute zero. 

" Astronomical records are complete enough to show 
that somewhere more than twenty centuries ago, Arcturus 
was visible only as a luminous speck. Now it blazes in 
the evening sky, bright as the planet Jupiter, a beacon 
among the glittering points of fire that stud the firma- 
ment this side the Milky Way. Manifestly our own 
solar system is approaching the sun Arcturus. 

" The rate of travel of our sun through space, carry- 
ing with it its little group of satellites, including our 
world, has been determined with fair accuracy. We are 
racing southward through the heavens at the rate some 
say of about 5,000,000 miles a year, along an arch whose 
segment shows undeviating progress in the direction of 
Arcturus. Eventually we will be carried clear round 
this star, and be subject to its fierce rays, then we will 
come back on the other side of the ellipse, and will be 
carried along a wide and awful sweep towards the Polar 
star, now in our rear, and to the extreme curve, which 
must be passed before the journey back again begins. 
How many times our solar system has swung that almost 
illimitable course none can ever know or guess. But in 
this great course there are just two extremes of seasons, 
except that instead of their being six months they are 
about 75,000 years apart. The summer season of this 
vast cycle is unutterable heat — 'the melting point; the 
winter season, frigidity. That we are now a little more 
than half-way down the journey to the summer turning 
point, and entering on a spring-like opening to a young 
summer of celestial weather, is made clear by those whose 
study is the sky, and to whom the stars present but 
partial mystery. 

" The astronomer Leroy Tobey has shown that the 
course we are traveling is regulated by the influence of 
Arcturus, and that it will carry us around that torrid 
star in something more than 25,000 years. The turn 



140 A YEAB OF 104,000 YEARS? 

will bring us so near to it, and into the zone of heat so 
high, that physical life in its present form will be im- 
possible, for Arcturus is an incandescent sun, known to 
be vastly larger than our own. The belief that the world 
shall die enwrapped in fire is true, as all beliefs are 
when they are understood. 

" On the other hand, at the Polaris end of the great 
ellipse are " thrilling regions of thick-ribbed ice." Flung 
to the extreme limit of its course, before it turns again 
in answer to the magnet of its orbit, our sun and 
the worlds that encircle it, being farthest from their 
source of heat, will dim and fall into a sleep of cold, 
so deep that life will be suspended." 

Professor Leroy Tobey figured out the flight of our 
sun with his planets swinging round Arcturus, and we 
give his theory for what it is worth. He says we are 
going along 84,000 miles an hour, and that it will take 
104,000 years to make the revolution. We are now ap- 
proaching the nearest point in our orbit to this mighty 
sun. Our path is not an exact circle, but a long parab- 
olic ellipse, or oval, similar to the paths of the comets 
round the sun. As we are getting nearer to Arcturus, 
we begin to feel his heat — so mild it is hardly yet felt, 
but it will become greater as we get nearer. 

There was a time when the earth had a different 
climate, when it was covered even to the poles with great 
forests and plants which got covered up and became coal. 
Then came a change to colder weather. The waters 
round the poles froze, and the different ice-caps at dif- 
ferent epochs came down from the poles towards the 
equator. Plants and animals of these geological epochs 
died with the cold. We find their remains in rocks, 
earths and coal formations. They are strewn round the 
poles and in nearby regions, where they now could not 
live. Then came another change. The weather got 
warmer, the ice-caps melted, and the lands round north 
and south poles rejoiced in milder climate. The climate 
after the last glacial period gradually became more 



WILL THE WORLD BE DESTROYED BY FIRE ? 141 

balmy, and at last man appeared. Since the beginning 
M historic days, the climate has been changing. Even 
now the winters are getting milder, the summers cooler, 
the glaciers are receding. This ice-cap and why it dis- 
appeared excited the curiosity of scientists. Our ap- 
proach to Arcturus with his great heat explains the 
change. It is warmer when we are near him and colder 
when we are farther away from him. 

Our earth in its relation to this mighty sun, Arcturus, 
March 21, 1905, entered on another glorious spring that 
will continue for 18,000 years, during which we will 
approach this tremendous globe of fire. His light and 
heat will become brighter as ages pass. ~No change will 
be seen by any man with unaided eye during his life- 
time. But future astronomers will see Arcturus change 
from a star of the first magnitude to the brightness of 
Venus. It will at last become so bright as to be seen 
during daylight, and at length so bright it will become 
that it will cast a shadow. As our sun with his planets 
swings round this sun awful in size, the climate will be- 
come still warmer. The earth will enter its summer of 
18,000 years on June 21, 19,905 years after Christ. 
Then Arcturus will appear almost as large as the sun, 
its light will be much brighter than that of the moon. 
Then we will need no lights in our streets or houses, for 
Arcturus' splendors will take their places. 

During the days of this hottest summer, the midsum- 
mer day being August 8, 28,000 years after Christ, will 
Arcturus' heat burn up the world and destroy all life on 
our earth? Will the dazzling light, the terrific heat, 
the invisible rays render our earth unfit for inhabitants ? 
Plants and animals survived former Arcturus summers 
and will again. On December 22, 55,905, A.D., our sun 
and earth will be on the opposite side of Arcturus, just 
entering on its winter when the long, cold, arctic winter 
will begin to bind every drop of water round the poles 
into another great ice-cap, such as we have described and 
which geologists show once covered the northern and 



142 WHY WINTERS ARE GETTING WARMER. 

southern parts of the world. For over fifty thousand 
years this winter will rage, and at its end our world will 
again enter on another spring such as we are now be- 
ginning. 

A thousand things show we are entering on a 
warmer season, the great spring-time of our earth. The 
winters are getting warmer, the summers cooler — we 
can see the changes during a lifetime. The glaciers on 
mountain-tops, and along the valleys of arctic regions, 
remains of the ice-caps round the poles are getting smal- 
ler every year. We find rocks, boulders, sands and 
gravels along the ground left by the ice-fields which once 
came down from the north and south poles, over the sur- 
face of the earth. We see marks and scratches made on 
mountain, hill, and dale by the rocks frozen into the 
covering ice as it was pushed along. We see the sand 
and gravel ground fine by freezing and thawing. We 
find the soil torn from mountains, hills and plains of the 
far north pushed down and formed into the soil in which 
plants grow to sustain life. The ground and soil could 
not have been better prepared for living beings than by 
the tremendous force of the ice in these far distant epochs, 
perhaps millions of years before Adam was made. And 
that Providence which thus shaped the world for man, 
foresaw and provided for all the wants of our race as 
long as human beings live on the surface of our planet. 

Many kinds of animals once lived on our globe long 
before man appeared. We find their remains all over 
the earth, both north and south, scattered almost to the 
poles. Their structure, mode of living, instincts, food, 
etc., show that they lived in warm, balmy climates dif- 
ferent from what we to-day find in these cold regions. 
They lived in days when Arcturus' heat and light made 
countries now covered with frost and snow suitable for 
them. What killed them ? When the world entered on 
its great long winter as it receded from Arcturus, the 
cold killed them and the ice-cap buried them. 

There is hope for our race, says Professor Tobey. For, 



WE MUST WAIT FOR FUTURE OBSERVATION'S. 143 

in making this great winter journey away from Arcturus, 
the sun will draw near some of the other great suns, 
and from them receive enough light and heat to sustain 
life on our planet. Still the figures regarding our path 
round this mighty star, if better worked out, may show 
we will not come as near Arcturus as we thought, and 
life will not be destroyed with his heat. Before giving 
a final opinion, we must wait for more and better ob- 
servations, and calculations of our orbit round the mighty 
sun. However may end our race we know the Creator 
made these millions of suns and stars for us, placed 
them in the heavens, gave them His laws and their move- 
ments, that they might serve us. We may possess our 
souls in peace, all which will come to pass will be for 
our good. We will rest assured His Providence fore- 
sees and provides for mankind. 



CHAPTER VII.— THE SUN AND HIS TREMENDOUS 
FORCES. 

The sun, center of the solar system, that group of 
planets to which our earth belongs, holds these worlds in 
grasp of attraction, because his mighty mass is so great 
compared to all of them combined. Eound him they go 
whirling on and ever, each planet like a part of a mighty 
wheel, weight taking the place of a spoke, gyrating with 
movement and impulses the Creator gave them. Two 
forces so balance they do not fall into the sun or fly away. 

Down to earth the sun is ever sending heat, light, 
electric impulses, rays invisible for chemical and physical 
actions of plant, animal and human life. There is not 
a movement of raindrop, flowing stream, machinery, or 
of life we do not trace back to the sun as to their origin. 
These forces in the sun are the remains of energy, he 
received from matters falling into him since creation. 
Thus all activity in the universe came originally from 
the Almghty Force infinite we call God. 

From days of old men untold traced nature's move- 
ments to the sun. In Babylonia they called him San, 
" the holy," whence our word sun. He was to them an 
image of II, in Hebrew El, " the Mighty One," and 
gate was tab, whence they built Babylon, " Gate of the 
Mighty One." In Egypt the sun was Ba, whence Phar- 
aoh was supposed to be " Born of the Sun God," a tra- 
dition of Adam God made of earth. Still the Brahmins 
of India worship the sun. " What race do I belong to ? " 
said a high caste Brahmin to the writer. " I also, like 
you, belong to the Arian, ' the noble race/ but I am 
black because of the climate. Certainly we adore the 
sun. He is the Worker of God. Without him nothing 

144 



HOW HEAVENLY MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE. 145 

would live. There are three Eternals — <God, Life, Mat- 
ter. These Three are One." 

The reader may ask : How do scientific men get their 
measurements of orbs ? By direct and indirect measure- 
ments, and the first is proved by the latter. We measure 
minute changes of heat by an electric current passing 
through platinum, small movements by interference of 
colored light rings, and gravity by pendulum beats. 
Colors of soap bubbles, electric actions between zinc and 
copper, camphor on water, give measurements down to 
millionths of an inch. 

Astronomers measure angular distances by graduated 
circles, by micrometers in the eye-piece, or by photo- 
graphs. The time of the passage of a star thousands 
of times will show if it changed its position to right or 
left, the spectroscope lines tell if it is coming towards or 
going from us, the thermopile or bolometer show its heat, 
triangulation its distance, and these will give its size. 

We first find the exact diameter of the earth, which 
serves as our base-line for triangulation, then we meas- 
ure the angles the heavenly body makes six months after 
the first observation, when the earth is 185,800,000 miles 
away on the other side of its orbit. Kepler's third law 
gives the proportions of distances of the planets from 
the sun when their times of revolution round him are 
known. The passage of a planet across the sun gives 
measurements we call its parallax. Expeditions were 
sent out by governments to distant countries to observe 
the transits of Venus in 1761, 1769, 1874 and 1882, 
from which the distance of the sun was measured. The 
parallax of Mars, or of one of the outer planets, is com- 
puted by measuring its angular distance from one of the 
neighboring stars. 

By mathematical deductions from the law of gravita- 
tion a formula is obtained which gives the elements of 
the planet's orbit, and determined relations to the paral- 
lax of the sun, moon, and other planets. The move- 
ment of the earth in its orbit round the sun, combined 



146 WHY THE OUBS DO NOT tfALE TOGETHER. 

with the motion of light coming from a star, causes 
aberration of the light, by which the star appears thrown 
forward from its true position in the direction in which 
the earth is moving. This change in the light's direc- 
tion differs according to the earth's movement regarding 
this star, and is measured at different seasons. We 
know from experiments on earth the velocity of light and 
thus we can measure earth and star movements. 

We measure the mass of the earth by the deflection 
of a plumb-line by a mountain, by change of weight in 
deep wells and on high mountains from that of the sur- 
face. Knowing the weight of the earth and its velocity 
round the sun once a year, and the distance of the sun, 
we can tell the amount of matter in the sun even to a 
ton. For just that weight must be in the sun to keep 
the earth from flying away or falling into his fiery sur- 
face. Following the same principle the mass or weight 
of a planet and of its satellites is measured by the per- 
turbations it causes on other planets when they come 
near. But when we know the weight of the sun we can 
also figure out the weight of every planet by the time it 
takes to complete its orbit round the sun. 

You find a small arc of their paths, and you can tell 
the velocity of their flight, their weight, and even dens- 
ity and distance of suns are unfolded before you. You 
can tell to the exact second an eclipse of the sun, of the> 
moon, of Saturn's or Jupiter's satellites. You know the 
motions of every planet, our sun and many of the other 
suns, because you figure out their mathematical move- 
ments. But who was the Mathematician who gave them 
these motions and these laws founded on figures ? All 
is in motion according to higher mathematics. Who is 
this awful unthinkable Wisdom who gave these move- 
ments according to the higher mathematics ? In what 
school or university did he learn the sciences ? 

When learned men therefore figure out the weight of 
sun or planet, they find that learned Mind was there 
before them, who from creation laid down these figures, 



THE MATHEMATICS OF THE HEAVENS. 



147 



weighed the suns and stars, and placed them in their 
orbits, and gave them exact movements or forces so they 
will go round forever. We study arithmetic at school, 
we learn square root, and cubic root. We go into the 
higher studies — algebra, and calculus, and logarithms, 
and conic sections, and such studies as are taught in 
universities. These we apply to the stars and to the 
sciences. As far as man has penetrated into the secrets 
of nature, he finds that he is only going over the foot- 
prints of a Supreme Mathematician, who built the uni- 
verse on these higher figures. Matter itself did not give 
itself these wonderful laws, for a stone cannot think. 
We did not do it. The laws are there. The universe was 
not always, for it has changed, it is always changing, 
and that which changes cannot be eternal. For if the 
universe were always, long ago it would have lost all its 
light and heat. 

In laying before you, in the preceding chapters, the 
discoveries regarding the stars, we said little relating to 
the tremendous fires and forces of the 500 millions of 
orbs — stars blinking and winking at us, seeming to call 
us to a better study and understanding of their wonders. 
How oft people ask what are the stars ? Science replies 
they are suns. When we study our own sun, its mate- 
rials, size, constitution, the whole domain of solar 
physics, we better understand the constitution of the stars. 

Let us first see how far away the sun is. On earth we 
use inches, feet, and miles to measure distances. But as 
the distance from earth to sun is the yard-stick of the 
heavens, we must first get a correct gigantic tape-line 
measure before we apply it to the stars. That is, we 
must first know the exact distance from here to the sun. 

Two thousand years ago Hipparchus tried to measure 
his distance with his crude instruments, and concluded 
he was 650 times the earth's diameter. But in those 
days, they thought the world much smaller than it is ; 
even ages after, Columbus supposed he touched the shores 



148 THE EXACT DISTANCE OF THE SUN". 

of India and called the natives Indians, a name they still 
bear. 

Kepler's laws upset the errors of eighteen centuries 
regarding the sun's distance. A little later Lacaille 
figured from the observations of Mars the distance to the 
sun as 90,000,000 miles. Leverrier, who with Adams 
discovered Neptune by mathematics, before it was seen 
by human eye, published the same figures. Saturn's * 
satellite, Juno, was studied by Gill and others in 1874 ; 
ten years they figured on Venus transits; in 1898 Eros 
was first seen, its motions observed, the velocity of light 
determined ; they covered many miles of paper with fig- 
ures, till at last God's mysteries were sifted from fathom- 
less nature reluctant to unfold this secret of the Almighty. 
Here we lay before our readers the results of these cen- 
turies of studies of mankind's ablest mathematicians. 



Observations of planet Victoria by Sir David Gill 

" " * 4 Eros, Oxford University. 

" " " Eros, Lick Observatory.. . 

Physical Method of Profs. Newcomb & Chandler 

Gravitational Method, Prof. Newcomb 



92.874.000 
92.935.000 
93.000.000 
92.791.000 
92.900.000 

5)464.500.000 

Distance of the sun from the earth in miles 92.900.000 

Remember, the earth does not follow a round ring in » 
its revolution, but an ellipse, and it is nearer the sun in 
winter than in summer. Early in January we are only 
91,300,000 miles away, but in the beginning of July we 
are 94,500,000 miles away. It is summer here although 
we are farther away, because the north side of the earth 
then turns towards the sun. 

When we know the sun's distance, it is easy to survey 
or measure its surface. The sun is 853,000 miles in 
diameter. It is not solid like earth, but composed of 
metals in a state of gas, because of the intense heat. 
Its density is a fourth that of earth, and one and a half 
times that of water. A million and a half times greater 
than earth, seven hundred times larger than all the planets 



THE SURFACE OF THE SUN". 149 

together, the sun holds all the planets in his mighty 
grasp of weight, because of his mighty mass. As a 
monarch surrounded by his satellites, the sun floats in 
space round the mightier Arcturus. They follow him, 
their king, as he journeys — 'all subject to the laws laid 
down, and pursue the end marked out by the great Archi- 
tect of the Universe from far-off days of creation. 

The ratio of the sun's diameter to that of the earth 
is 109.3 ; that is, the sun in diameter is that times greater 
than the diameter of the earth. The sun's surface is 
11,940 times greater than the earth's surface and con- 
tains 1,305,000 times more matter than our world. Be- 
cause of his mass of materials, on the sun a pound would 
weigh twenty-six and a half pounds. While all discov- 
eries show the sun formed of metals in a state of gas, 
yet they are so compressed by gravitation they act more 
like liquids. " He hath set his tabernacle in the sun," 
said the royal seer of Israel. It is the nearest of the orbs 
shining with their own light, and in the sun we can see 
God's mighty forces in action. 

Father Secchi devoted his whole life to the study of 
the sun in the Papal Observatory, Rome. Years ago 
the writer sent for his three volumes " On the Sun," 
and after reading them presented them to the Dudley 
Observatory. There in his books will be found the won- 
ders of solar physics and descriptions of the tremendous 
forces of which we can hardly form a thought. 

Light and heat are the most important forces the sun 
sends to us. Proctor figured that each square inch of the 
sun's surface gives out as much light as 25 electric arc- 
lights. Professor Langley, by careful experiments, shows 
that the sun is 5,300 times brighter, and 87 times hotter 
than the white-hot metal of a Bessemer converter in 
which we make steel. Father Secchi estimates its sur- 
face heat equals 10,000,000 degrees. But only the very 
smallest, we might say the billionth, part of that light 
and heat fall on our earth, which occupies such a small 
part of the vast space of the imaginary sphere in which 



150 THE VAST SIZE OF THE SUtf. 

our earth revolves. The heat of the sun falling on a 
surface three feet square of our earth would run a three- 
horse-power engine. Find how many square yards on 
the surface of our planet, and you will see how many 
such engines the sun would keep going. Find how many 
such square yards in the vast glohe all round the sun at 
his distance from us, 92,900,000 miles on all sides from 
the sun, and you have an idea of the heat-power the sun 
gives out all the time. How awful is the waste of power ! 
you say, and how little of it is caught hy our earth! 
The rest is all sent out into the depths of space between 
the stars. All the rest of the light and heat, except what 
falls on earth, to us is lost. Almighty is our God, and 
He does all this, sustains the light and heat of the sun 
for the little part which lights and heats our earth. 

Do we understand the size of this fiery globe ? It is 
853,000 miles in diameter. If the earth, with its moon, 
240,000 miles away, were in the sun's center, there would 
be room for another moon 185,000 miles beyond our 
satellite. Another moon could swing round in its orbit 
just inside the surface of the sun. Eight planets — ■ 
Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, 
and Neptune, with 500 little planets between Mars and 
Jupiter, circle round our sun, kept in their paths by 
his attraction. 

Why is the sun so bright? You say because it is so 
hot. But all metals with the same heat do not give out 
the same light. Burning alcohol, although intensely hot, 
gives little light, and it is the same with many other 
materials. But there is one material spread throughout 
the universe, which, when heated gives out a brilliant 
light. That is carbon we find in burning coal, wood, etc., 
which gives out the light we see when they burn. Car- 
bon uniting with oxygen becomes very hot, and lights 
and warms our homes. In the electric light, called the 
incandescent, all the air has been pumped out of the 
glass bulb, and no oxygen is in the bulb to unite with 



THE AWFUL OCEANS OF FERE ON THE SUN. 151 

the carbon film, and so it burns for about 1,000 hours 
before it breaks. 

The sun is made of gases and metals in a state of gas. 
The heaviest metals range down from the surface to the 
center according to their weight. Carbon gas is very 
light. A vast sea of carbon gas surrounds the sun, ex- 
tending on all sides thousands of miles thick. This fiery 
carbon, glowing with millions of degrees of heat, sends 
out sunlight to the spaces between the stars which falls on 
the planets. If carbon were not on the sun, or if it were 
not so light in weight, it would sink down deep ; the sun 
would give out little light, and we would live in ever- 
lasting darkness. For the purpose of giving out this 
light our God gave it little weight, but great brightness, 
that it might light the worlds. 

This carbon in a state of intense heat forming the 
surface of the sun, is called the photosphere. Vast 
waves, thousands of miles wide and high, sweep over his 
surface, showing different degrees of light. Often bril- 
liant portions and patches, called faculse, bridge the 
mighty waves of gases — ever moving, changing, sweep- 
ing on in tremendous cyclones day by day, from hour to 
hour, like a vast fiery ocean. Powers sport on the sur- 
face of the sun of which we can have hardly a conception. 
During an eclipse, we see tremendous streams of fire, 
oft greater than our whole earth, shoot up 100,000 miles, 
spread out like a pine tree, similar to what Pliny said he 
saw on a small scale shoot out of Vesuvius when Pompeii 
was destroyed. But the forces playing on the sun are on 
such a colossal scale that the ordinary reader can have 
but a faint idea of them. The light from the highest 
matter thrown out by the awful eruptions passing 
through the spectroscope shows them to be hydrogen, 
one of the lightest gases known. 

With a smoked glass sometimes you see dark spots on 
the surface mostly near the equator. Many years Father 
Secchi devoted to their study, and He found them deep 
depressions where the glowing carbon has been swept 



152 HOW ELECTRICITY PASSES BETWEEN THE SUNS. 

aside exposing the darker but hotter materials beneath. 
The spots send up great whirlwinds of fire, some hun- 
dreds of thousands of miles high. Sir Wm. Herschel 
saw one spot in 1779, with a diameter of more than 
50,000 miles. Their depth has not been exactly meas- 
ured, but it is about the same as their diameter. While 
sun-spots last, great electric disturbances and violent 
storms disturb our atmosphere, showing the sun to be 
sending out vast impulses of electricity as well as light 
and heat. 

The sun sends out not only light and heat but elec- 
tricity to the planets forming his court, and to the other 
heavenly orbs. The millions of suns we call the fixed 
stars are also sources of tremendous streams of electric- 
ity sent into spaces between the stars. This energy, un- 
seen and unnoticed, falls all the time on earth. It is a 
force or rather a modification of energy, like light, heat, 
and attraction — the result of the original condensation of 
matter created as mist falling together under attraction, 
building suns. 

Attraction acts " inversely as the square of the dis- 
tance " ; that is, the nearer the bodies, the more they 
attract, and the farther away they are from each other 
the less they pull each other. But this is not the law 
of electricity passing, sweeping between the orbs through 
the spaces between the stars. For when we pass a cur- 
rent of electricity through a gas between two plates, " the 
greater the distance between the plates, the larger the 
current will be which passes through the gas, while the 
smaller will be the flow if we use metals to conduct it." 

Not since Newton published his Principia, proving 
universal attraction, has such an important discovery 
been made as this by Professor Thomson (Lord Kelvin). 
While light, heat, gravity and magnetism passing through 
space diminish according to the square of the distance, 
electricity increases as the distance increases whether it 
be millions or billions of miles across the spaces filled 
with ether between the stars. Electricity therefore pre- 



THE FUTURE HARNESING OP ELECTRICITY. 153 

sided over the formation of worlds, and now comes from 
sun to earth in tremendous streams of energy. From 
sun to sun this mysterious form of force flows, increas- 
ing as it passes through the awful spaces dividing the 
stars. Therefore, with light, weight, heat, and electric- 
ity the suns are all united in one universe as they are 
one in the nature of their materials. 

From sun and star therefore this electricity is poured 
out all over our earth, and this explains the lightning 
and the storms which suddenly rise to wash its surface 
with their rains and cool the air. The time will come, 
we are sure, when this vast source of power will be har- 
nessed, to light our homes, to warm our dwellings, to 
move our machinery. Then we have no reason to worry 
about the time coming when all our wood will be burned 
and all our coal exhausted. We are harnessing our 
waterfalls, turning their forces into electricity, thus us- 
ing the heat force which lifted the water from lands and 
seas to drop as rain. But when there will not be enough 
coal for the use of the increasing population, men will 
use the flow of the tides caused by moon and sun at- 
traction, they will tap the mighty streams of electricity 
flowing from sun and stars down on earth. Thus has a 
wise Providence foreseen and provided for all the wants 
of his highest creatures on earth, to whom he said : " Fill 
the earth and subdue it." Gen i. 28. 

The electricity flowing from the sun is produced by the 
tremendous upheavals on a scale inconceivable, of fiery 
matters so hot as to be in a state of gases. A volcano 
is but a weak image of these seas, vast and deep, lashed 
in storms of fiery forces never at rest. 

~Ho eruptions of volcanic forces on earth in any way 
compare to those on the sun. The writer examined 
Vesuvius, and it seems that the internal fires blew the 
whole mountain-top off, sending the rocks ground into 
fine sand high into the air, and the vast masses fell down 
and overwhelmed Pompeii and the surrounding cities, 
covering them many feet deep with ground rock, incor- 



154 WHAT KEEPS UP THE SUn's FORCES \ 

rectly called " ashes." Then melted streams of rock, 
called lava, flowed down over the country, completing the 
destruction. The present Observatory, on the side of 
the mountain, is built on the granite foundations of the 
earth's crust, and is more or less free from the disturb- 
ances. 

But the greatest display of volcanic forces of history 
was witnessed in 1883, when Mount Kraklao, near Java, 
blew its top off, grinding the rocks into the finest pow- 
der, which for more than three years, floated all over 
the world, causing most brilliant sunsets. The erup- 
tion was heard 3,000 miles away, broke windows 100 
miles in all directions; a tidal wave, 100 feet high, 
swept 5 miles inland, and the disturbances encircled the 
whole earth as mighty waves in the atmosphere. Waves 
of ocean are never higher than 50 feet, 2,509 from crest 
to crest; their duration is 28 seconds, and they beat on 
the shores of ocean with a pressure of 3 tons to the square 
foot. But what are these compared to the awful erup- 
tions and waves of fire which lash the surface of the sun ! 
We can hardly draw a comparison between the forces 
exerted on earth with those on the sun. 

What keeps up the vast light and heat he sends out 
every moment ? Theories have been given by the learned. 
One school of scientists say great numbers of solids and 
gases floating in space are falling into him. These me- 
teorites, much larger and more numerous than ever fall 
to earth, attracted by his mighty mass, fall with tre- 
mendous swiftness into the sun's fiery surface. The lar- 
ger bodies, being miles in diameter, strike with awful 
velocity down through the glowing masses of metallic 
vapors, driving them aside, expose the darker flames of 
vaporized metals, and cause the sun-spots. The number 
and masses of these bodies, having been made at creation, 
and their flights having been fixed, just enough fall in 
regular periods, so they just sustain the loss of light and 
heat. Thus the Creator presides over them, so the light 
and heat are regulated from age to age. 



SOW SUNS FORCES ARE KEPT UP A MYSTERY. 155 

But most careful observations, lasting years, do not 
show that the sun gets any larger, as it would if his 
mass was increased by these additions of matter. Nor 
do we find that his diameter at the equator is any larger 
than at the poles, as we see in all the planets. Mayer's 
great generalizations, worked out by Helmholtz, show 
that the light and heat of the sun remain constant, 
while its size is supposed to be getting smaller. But mil- 
lions of years must pass before any great contraction 
can be measured. 

Father's Secchi's measurements prove that all parts 
of the surface does not throw out light and heat in the 
same degree, for the regions round his equator are hot- 
ter than those of his poles. Helmholtz supposes that 
by slowly contracting the sun would keep up his energy 
for millions of years. Professor Tyndall estimates that 
if the earth fell into the sun, the impact would sustain 
his light and heat for 10,000,000 years. Professor 
Langley found that half the light and heat of the sun 
is absorbed by the vast deep oceans of glowing gases sur- 
rounding his surface. Learned men estimate that if large 
numbers of these supposed meteorites and little planetary 
bodies were falling into the sun, greater changes of light 
and heat would take place far beyond any experienced in 
geological epochs. Neither falling bodies, nor conden- 
sation, nor chemical changes fully explain how the sun's 
energy is sustained. 

You cannot look at that globe of fire with naked eye 
except for a little while, for it is so hot its flames would 
destroy your eyesight. Then realize, that although it is 
92,900,000 miles away, you see it as a round globe, for 
it is 850,000 miles in diameter. That fire differs not 
in nature from fire on earth, and the materials are the 
very same as those of our world. 

More than 80 different primary metals and their 
unions and combinations compose this world, and most 
of these have been found in the sun. But it is supposed 
that many of these metals in the sun are torn asunder 



156 PHOTOSPHERE, REVERSING LAYER. 

by the intense heat, where they exist in forms unknown 
to us. That wonderful instrument, the spectroscope, 
reveals to us the metals of which the orb of day is com- 
posed. We have only to study the bright and dark lines 
in the sunlight, as the rays are spread out by the spectro- 
scope, to find the metal which send out the light rays. 

The ray helium sends from the sun showed us that 
metal in the sun long before it was found on earth. But 
in our day helium was discovered in the rare mineral 
clevite, and radium produces this helium, which is a gas 
lighter than hydrogen. The spectroscope also tells us 
the materials of which the stars are composed, and the 
condition of development of these far-away suns, many 
being of metallic vapors and gases in an intense state 
of heat. Let us see the surface of our sun more in de- 
tail. 

What is the sun's surface glowing so bright? It is 
called the photosphere, " the light globe." In it more 
than 40 elements or materials of our earth have been 
discovered. Below it are the dark vapors of metals in 
an intense state of heat, but which give out less light 
than the bright carbon of the higher regions floating as 
a vast fiery atmosphere. Just above this, is another 
luminous layer, a few hundred miles thick, called the 
" reversing layer," consisting of metals in a state of gas, 
bright, but cooler than the matters below, because it is 
losing heat. We know the materials of this fiery at- 
mosphere, because it absorbs the light that comes from be- 
low the sun's surface. 

Higher still, over the sun's surface, is a vast mass of 
red, rosy, or scarlet emanations surrounding the sun to 
the depth of 4,000 miles. It is called the chromosphere, 
" the colored globe." It has serrated waving outlines, 
is subject to great changes, and forms the tremendous 
cyclones of fire seen during an eclipse. In some parts 
it is quiet, composed of clouds of fire of enormous ex- 
tent, which keep their forms for a time. In other parts 
it is in a state of eruption, which shoot out in tree-like 



THE CORONA, ZODIACAL LIGHT, ETC. 157 

flames and tremendous geyser-like eruptions, oft with a 
swiftness of 300 miles in a second, and which fall to- 
wards the surface with equal rapidity. These are com- 
posed of hydrogen, helium, coronium, calcium, and 
other light metals in a state of vapor, because of their 
intense heat. These gigantic forces, the extent of which 
we can have but a small idea, are seen especially during 
and near the sun-spots. 

Higher still we find a bright white glory, called the 
corona, " the crown," like a gigantic halo or circle of light 
round the sun. It, too, is subject to changes. When the 
sun-spots diminish it grows greater, and diminishes as 
they increase. It is sometimes seen before sunrise and 
after sunset, but best during a total eclipse. At the total 
eclipse of July, 1878, the sun was clear of spots, and 
two brilliant streamers, one each side, extended from the 
sun's equator, stretching 10,000,000 miles, and the 
corona diminished towards the solar poles. At the 
eclipses of 1882 and 1883, when the sun was rich in 
spots, the corona was much smaller, but of high bril- 
liancy. The corona's light is believed to come from 
glowing gases thrown out, from sunlight reflected from 
solid minute particles shot up into space, or from me- 
teorites circling round before falling to keep up the light 
and heat. The spectrum shows a green line indicating 
a metal called coronium, but the rest of the spectrum 
shows reflected light. The enormous extent of the corona 
proves that electric repulsion has driven the gases to 
this great extent from the sun's surface. 

Farther out is that mysterious zodiacal light, like a 
delicate nebula, oft seen in spring and fall, but best be- 
fore sunrise along the plane of the sun's equator. It is 
often found extending beyond the earth's orbit. Some 
say it is caused by minute particles of matter driven 
out from the sun by his tremendous upheavals, others 
say it is electric, like the northern lights, and still 
others that it is of material similar to the tails of comets. 

A careful examination of the sun shows it has nothing 



158 sun's fiery oceans keep a constant heat. 

like our atmosphere, water, or solid earth. The enor- 
mous heat turns every metal into gas, and the enormous 
force of gravitation keeps them in something like liquid 
forms. It is hard for us to have even a faint idea of 
the awful heat and mighty movements there taking place. 
The internal circulations, the facula?, the sun-spots, the 
naming coruscations, the eruptive protuberances, the bod- 
ies falling from the sky into the fiery mass, the uprushes 
and explosions, the internal agitation, the envelopes of 
fire, forming, breaking electric discharges, liquids chang- 
ing to gases, and back again to liquids as they shoot 
more than 100,000 miles in a second on high, where 
they cool and become gases as they fall back into the 
fearful heat. Words fail to describe the mighty forces 
playing on the surface of our sun, which God made to 
give heat, light, electricity to earth that plant, animal 
and man might live. 

The day the above was written many people in New 
York were prostrated by the heat, and 28 persons were 
killed in Philadelphia during a parade. If it were be- 
low freezing all the time, nothing could live on our 
planet. If the heat goes above 90 degrees in the shade, 
while the air is loaded with moisture so we cannot per- 
spire, we suffer, and many die. We see therefore that 
the heat required for life ranges from 32 to 90 degrees, 
and that the sun's heat must be continued and regular. 

Suppose our sun and earth were among the regions 
of the Milky Way, where vast changes and forces rage, 
we could not live. Suppose our earth were a planet 
revolving round Sirius, Kegel or any of the great suns, 
our world would be melted with the fires of these mighty 
orbs. If we belonged to one of the colored suns their 
tremendous light and heat would overwhelm us and de- 
stroy all life. But Providence placed our world as one 
of the satellites of our yellow sun, in the middle of the 
universe, down far away from these upheavals and 
changes taking place in other parts of the universe. 

What is the sun ? When we see his surface and study 



GRAPHIC DESCRIPTION OF A SUN SPOT. 159 

the physical changes on his surface, we will understand 
the other suns. The surface of our sun is a vast ocean 
of fire lashed hy tremendous indescribable storms — ■ 
cyclones causing changes in the climate of our earth. 

At the Carnegie Solar Observatory at Mt. Wilson, 
near Pasadena, Cal., Professor Hale last year, with im- 
proved methods, photographed sun-spots with the spectro- 
scope. In broad daylight red flames can be seen shoot- 
ing from the sun's edge to great heights at a speed 
greater than a hundred miles a second and these are 
photographed by the new instrument when directed to 
the differet lines shown in the spectroscope. Calcium, 
vapor, carbon, hydrogen, and other metals in a state of 
gas are photographed at different heights in the glowing 
sun atmosphere. Marked differences are found at dif- 
ferent elevations, and in the diverse metals. The spots 
show in the photos as whirlpools of fire of vast extent, 
which draw down the hydrogen gases. The materials 
round the spots take on a whirling motion like vast 
cyclones of whirling fire. The spots suck down into the 
interior the cool hydrogen and other gases like a gigantic 
maelstrom — all moving at the rate of about 60 miles a 
second. In about a day this hydrogen, heated to an 
enormous degree, begins to appear flowing out again, 
and after shooting up about 300,000 miles, falls down, 
spreads over his surface sending out heat and light ; the 
flow keeping on for a couple of days. Thus day by day, 
lashed by vast storms of fire, swaying back and forth, 
up and down, waves that ocean 850,000 miles round our 
sun. Electric storms, displays of northern lights, mag- 
netic disturbances, interfere with our telegraphs and 
telephones caused by these upheavals and sun-spots. 
Movements of our atmosphere, the seasons, winter and 
summer, are caused by the sun's heat. Periods of sun- 
activity, cold winters and dry spells, warm summers and 
wet springs, the varied changes of the seasons are re- 
marked by all. Cyclones and blizzards, hurricanes and 
storms sweep over earth, often bringing destruction and 



160 THE SUN CAUSES CHANGES OF CLIMATE. 

death. If we could foresee them we could provide. But, 
unfortunately, only in our day we hegan to study the 
weather, and meteorology is in its infancy. Our obser- 
vations go back only about 70 years. During the civil 
war they began to record the observations of the weather, 
and now it is a part of the daily United States Govern- 
ment reports sent out to all parts of the country. 

About 1830 they began in a systematic manner to 
study the sun-spots as indications of the sun's activity. 
But only in 1872 were they recorded in a scientific way 
as causing the weather changes of our atmosphere. Pour- 
ing out his light and heat down on to and through our 
air ocean, 100 miles deep surrounding our earth, the 
sun heats the air over lands and seas. The heated air be- 
comes lighter, rises, and colder air sweeps in to take its 
place, causing winds. Round the equator the rays of light 
and heat are greatest, round the poles the cold is severe. 
Therefore, from the equator towards the poles, high up 
in the atmosphere, currents of air and great winds al- 
ways circulate. 

If the sun were constant in light and heat, the weather 
would be the same each season. But we know that the 
weather varies from year to year. Some winters are 
cold, others mild. Some summers there is much rain, 
while others are dry. Each continent has its own weather, 
with floods, droughts, famines. India sees millions of 
people die for want of food. Floods kill many in China, 
and in Australia 90 per cent of the sheep and cattle 
some years die. American farmers talk of dry and wet 
summers, cold and mild winters, late springs, cold falls. 
All these are caused by the changes in the sun. As our 
knowledge increases, we will be able to provide for these 
changes of climate. 

Some years we find no spots on the sun's surface, 
other years we see many large spots and at other times 
they are very numerous. Sun-spots and their greater 
numbers denote a greater activity on his surface, which 
then throws out more light and heat The prominences, 



HOW SUN SPOTS CAUSE CLIMATIC CHANGES. 161 

that is, the vast upheavals seen during eclipses, and 
which do not produce spots, show also changes, but our 
records of them began only in 1870. They are found 
all over his surface, while the spots are mostly along 
and near his equator. These prominences of fiery red 
color, shoot 100,000 miles high and are also as wide or 
wider. They also occur in cycles and often they are 
forerunners of spots. They are more numerous near 
the poles, and they show changes in his heat better than 
the spots. These prominences and spots, show variations 
of 4, 11, and 35 years in solar activity, and these are 
recorded by the barometer in our atmosphere. A fall 
of the barometer foretells rain, while a rise of the mer- 
cury shows clear weather, caused by a greater heat in 
the sun, which dries the air which holds the water in 
the atmosphere so the rain does not fall. 

Bacon noticed the 35-year period of rainfall, and 
Bruckner worked on the problem. Father Secchi dis- 
covered the 11-year cycle of the sun-spots, and remarked 
that they correspond with the wet and dry periods. 
Learned men multiplied the short 3.8-year period of sun 
prominences by 3, and got 11.4; the changes of sun- 
spots, again by 3 and got 34.2 ; the other period of 
changes again by 3 and got 102.6 years, when the changes 
begin over again in the sun. 

Lockyer compared these sun-spots and changes with 
the variations in the climate, and found they agreed. 
The short periods of 4 years were found more import- 
ant than the 11 and 35 years of changes in the sun's 
activity, which cause the high and low pressures in our 
atmosphere. He found that while a high atmospheric 
pressure was on one side of the world, a low pressure 
prevailed on the other. When one side of the world 
has an excess of rains, the other has a dry season, and 
these are reversed the next year. When people suffer 
from drought in Asia, Australia, India, etc., the Amer- 
ican continents are blessed with abundant rains; when 
rains and snows do not abound in America, the Orient 



162 WHAT PROVIDENCE REGULATES SUN HEAT? 

has them to repletion; but these changes vary because 
lands, seas, mountain ranges, deserts, etc., do not stretch 
out in regular form. 

Here is the beginning of a science which will become 
most useful to mankind in future ages. But we have not 
observations of the sun-spots, protuberences and the rain- 
falls extending over a sufficient number of years to work 
out the problem, to foretell the weather, and the fam- 
ines and misfortunes which afflict our race from time to 
time. The science has only begun. But people who live 
in and near deserts realize better the misfortune of a light 
rainfall. 

The writer lived, during the year 1899, in California, 
most of the time in San Francisco. It seemed that nearly 
a fourth of the business places were deserted, because for 
two or three years the rainfall had been light all over 
the State. Farms were abandoned, crops dried up, fruit 
trees died, and you could see desolation along the rail- 
ways in places where they could not bring water to 
irrigate the land. We see, therefore, how important a 
knowledge of the sun is to mankind, in order to pro- 
vide for the droughts which afflict some regions. 

But suppose a greater amount of matter now floated 
in the spaces between the stars, and it began to fall into 
our sun. The heat would be so great no rain would fall 
on any part of the earth. Springs, rivers and lakes 
would dry up. We cannot drink sea water, and we would 
all die. But the Creator made just enough matter to 
sustain the sun during the long ages while our race will 
live. 

Let us imagine that in place of the vast quantity of 
carbon we see glowing on the sun's surface, there were 
aluminium, radium or some other metal which gives 
out not light but heat. We would not see the sun then, 
but we would be burned up with his invisible rays, no 
life could exist on our earth. We see, then, how beauti- 
fully things are balanced in the sun so as to keep his 
light and heat just right, so living beings might flourish 



WHAT ARE THE FIXED STARS SUNS. 163 

in his rays. A 1 little more or a little less energy in the 
sun, and everything living on earth would be burned to 
ashes or frozen in everlasting frost. But it does not 
belong to the sun by nature to have just that amount of 
light and heat. For we find thousands of suns, some 
hotter and others cooler than our king of day. If our 
world were a planet belonging to one of these suns, life 
could not exist on its surface. Our sun belongs to the 
yellow stars, it is not too hot, like the violet suns, nor 
too cold, like the red stars ; but just right for all the dif- 
ferent kinds of living things sporting on the surface of 
our globe. Will any one say all these, and a thousand 
things we pass by, came by chance ? Was there no One 
who marked out the forces, measured the materials and 
the laws of our sun from the beginning? 

We can now tell the reader what a star is, for it is a 
sun so far away that you see it only as a little point of 
light. Keep before your mind the great size of our 
sun, the awful heat, the tremendous forces, the oceans 
of fire, the vast outbursts, the energy it is sending out 
into the spaces between the stars, the outbursts of flames, 
and you will realize what is taking place on the stars. 
Then get before your mind that there are over 500 mil- 
lions of stars, some hold there are 1,000 millions of suns 
if all were counted on the photo plate. Just stop to think 
that each one of these stars is a sun like ours, some 
larger, a few smaller — then make a meditation on the 
power of Him who made them without an effort. 



\ 



CHAPTER VIII.— MARS, VENTS, JUIPTER, SATURN, 
URANUS AND NEPTUNE. 

Every little while accounts of imaginary beings living 
on the orbs and planets are published by people who do 
not take into account all the conditions required for life. 
For ages the " man on the moon " was talked of, but 
when the telescope was turned on our satellite it showed 
a dead, rocky surface without air or water, totally unfit 
to support life. Then they took up Mars and to-day we 
find these imaginary living beings are exploited. 

Mars must be abandoned as a place of life. It has 
only a quarter as much atmosphere as our world on 
each square mile of surface, things there weigh only 
three-eighths what they do on earth, whence water would 
boil at 113 deg. F. while on earth at sea level it boils at 
212 deg. F. If his atmosphere were one-tenth that of 
earth water would boil at 84 deg. F., therefore water 
evaporates or dries up rapidly on Mars, and would not 
flow 1,000 miles through the canals as irrigating ditches 
before it would all disappear. Besides, the planet has 
no free oxygen required for life ; its plains are all colored 
rocks and plants cannot grow without soil washed with 
water and rain falling from clouds. 

Eons of ages older than earth, for it is farther from the 
sun, formed of the very same materials as our world, its 
atmosphere is thinner than ours at an altitude of ten 
miles. As we climb high mountains we come to the 
limit of vegetation, above which nothing grows, for 
there the air is too rare to support life. 

At Butte, Mont., the writer saw to what trouble the 
people went to make grass and shrubs grow round the 
homes. They brought plants from lower altitudes, 

164 



WHAT WE FIND ON MARS* SURFACE. 165 

planted them with great care; they flourished for a few 
months then died, leaving dooryards bleak and bare with 
only a few mosses and algse. Suppose you go up 10 to 
15 miles above the Kocky Mountains, you would find 
conditions about the same as on Mars' surface. Two 
French balloonists ascended nearly 30,000 feet, one 
fainted, and both nearly lost their lives, but this was 
less than 6 miles, where the air is about twice as dense as 
on Mars' surface. Therefore no organism built as those 
of earth could live on this planet. 

Aged and withered, its surface stretches out level show- 
ing a vast desert of rocky surface. Under direct rays 
of sunlight, its waters rapidly rise by evaporation from its 
surface, in the high altitudes turn to hoar-frost, and float 
towards the cold poles, where it falls as snow and ice. 
For this reason the poles are covered with white caps 
which gradually grow larger from fall to winter of 
the Martian climate. During spring and summer they 
melt away — one season the whole ice-cap disappeared 
from one pole. Like the earth, Mars is inclined to the 
ecliptic and these seasons alternate in the north and 
south regions or hemispheres like our winters and sum- 
mers. 

More than 200 years ago the polar snows were first 
seen, and most astronomers agree these polar caps are 
really formed of ice and snow. In modern days these 
ice-caps were found to be about 2,000 miles in diameter. 
But unlike our polar caps, they melt away to glistening 
patches of a few hundred miles during summers. 

Some astronomers, following Mr. Wallace, suppose 
these white caps do not imply snow, but are white solidi- 
fied gases or minerals. But as summer on the planet ad- 
vances they disappear from spaces hundreds of miles 
across within a few days. It seems to most learned men 
they must be snow melting in the heat. A dark belt 
below girdles each shrinking white disk, keeping pace 
with it as it contracts. This belt is blue — the color of 
deep water. Professor Pickering turned the polariscope 



166 THE DISCOVEEY OF CANALS ON MARS. 

on this blue belt and found by its reflected light that it is 
water. In these fleeting belts of blue under the ice-caps 
we see real polar seas, bodies of water caused by melting 
snow and ice, forming the white caps covering both poles. 
Because of the extreme thinness or tenuity of the at- 
mosphere rain is impossible, a howling blizzard never 
sweeps over the surface of that planet, no snowdrifts 
pile up, no blinding gale or hurricane sweeps over the 
land ; at most, mild zephyrs scatter gentle impalpable de- 
posits of snow, mostly in the shape of hoar-frost, from the 
warmer equatorial regions to the far north and south 
poles. Now, how is this water brought from the poles 
back to the warm regions under and near the equator ? 

Night after night the writer looked at Mars through a 
telescope. He could see the planet as a round reddish 
globe floating majestically in the sky. He saw no white 
poles, nor could he distinguish any other feature. He did 
not have the trained eye of those who devote themselves to 
star-gazing. An Italian astronomer, Schiaparelli, first 
saw long bands he called " canals " and the discovery 
is one of the most noted of modern times. Within the 
last few years Lowell, Pickering and others devoted time 
and attention to these remarkable bands. For a long 
time they were doubted, their discoverer was accused of 
having drawn on his imagination, while others held they 
were optical illusions caused by tired eyes or by the 
movements of our atmosphere. As the canals appear only 
as flashes, some of the most painstaking observers did 
not believe their own eyes. But all doubts were removed 
about two years ago when Mr. Lampland succeeded in 
photographing them. 

July 13, 1907, when Mars was nearest to earth — less 
than 38,000,000 miles away — astronomers with improved 
instruments saw his surface best and mapped out details 
down to from 5 to 20 miles. Photos brought out details 
eye cannot see, and now we know his surface better than 
parts of earth where man has never tred. 

Mars has a mean temperature of 48° F., that of the 



THE DIFFICULTY OF OBSERVING MAES. 167 

earth being 60° F. The poles of Mars are not as cold 
as those of the earth, nor its equator as warm as 
ours. But the sun looks down on Mars from a per- 
fectly clear sky. Not a cloud appears, and the light and 
heat rays beam down as from a brazen sky on the flat, 
dried-up lifeless deserts which are appalling in desolation. 
Around the white snow-covered poles, and along their 
lower edges, are bands of shallow water, which freezes 
and thaws. The ice crusts must be very thin, for when 
the sun crosses the southern hemisphere the ice melts at 
the rate of six miles a day. Often during the Martian 
summer the white caps or ice-fields entirely disappear. 

Ordinary readers hardly realize the difficulties as- 
tronomers meet, the long years of patient observations 
they must spend before publishing their discoveries to 
the world. Even when nearest earth, Mars seems 
no larger than a ball four inches, half a mile away, seen 
through a telescope. The lines representing the canals 
on this ball would be only a 30th of an inch wide, and 
the dots in which they end 10th inch in diameter. A 
telescope magnifying 75 diameters shows the planet as 
large as the full moon, but so much light is lost the face 
is dull and dim. When powers of 300 diameters are 
turned on, the planet is so dark you hardly see but its out- 
lines. 

But this is not all. If you were asked to read this 
page through a telescope 750 feet away while the book 
was made to dance in all directions, you would have 
an idea of the difficulties of studying the planet. The 
atmosphere surrounding our world miles high, because of 
winds and sunlight — this air is never quiet, but always 
in a state astronomers call " boiling," making the planet 
" dance " in all directions. 

The reddish surface of the planet is a checkered ex- 
panse of blue-green and orange spaces. They called 
the greenish expanses seas, giving them poetic and myth- 
ological names. But they are all waterless deserts, into 
their lowest parts the canals pour the waters from the 



168 DETAILS OF MARs' SURFACE. 

melting snows of the poles. The orange expanses were 
supposed to be continents, and received picturesque 
names. But there are no large bodies of water like our 
oceans on Mars. The bluish regions do not always re- 
tain this color, but change to orange. With the polari- 
scope Pickering proved they are small bodies of water 
just under the edges of the melting snows. Mars is all 
land, except these portions around the poles and the 
canals. 

The orange-colored parts are dry, rocky desert regions 
and the color seems to be caused by the rocks. But the 
surface of the planet is cut up into many triangular vast 
spaces by straight canals, or wide bands stretching mostly 
in straight lines meeting in round spots. In no case are 
these spots isolated, but three or more canals meet in 
each spot. These spots are in diameter from 35 to 150 
miles, like the canals they appear and disappear with the 
latter, like opening and closing eyes, not all at the same 
time but with the disappearance of the canals debouch- 
ing into them. They were first held to be lakes, and re- 
ceived names as of earthly bodies of water. They deepen 
in color as the season advances. The polariscope in the 
hands of Professor Pickering shows they are not all 
caused by water. Professor Lowell counted 185 of these 
remarkable spots. They are like vast pinheads in the 
desert landscape, the smallest being 35 miles across. 

The early observers of Mars supposed the white polar 
caps were deposits of carbonic acid gas, or some other 
primary element, and the canals vast scratches like deep 
canyons in the planet's surface. But why these great 
ribbons would be formed with such geometrical exactness 
they do not explain. Others think these are furrows or 
great crack in the planet's surface, but they cannot explain 
why they are of this shape or extend for such distances in 
straight lines. When earth and moon were forming, 
vast volcanic forces lifted and formed the mountain 
chains and volcanoes, but why Mars does not show these 
same formations as earth we cannot explain. 



WHY NOTHING COULD LIVE ON MARS. 169 

Astronomers who like to fancy living, thinking beings 
on Mars say these canals and spots are irrigation canals, 
fields of vegetation, and that these valies bring the water 
through them from the poles. But how could men dig 
canals 35 miles wide and 1,700 miles long, and fill and 
empty them within a few days ? They get over this diffii- 
culty by saying that they are the strips of vegetation 
growing on both edges of water-courses we cannot see, 
that the spots are great fields covered with verdure, and 
that these plants change the colors of these spots. But 
no living being on earth could live on Mars. 

When the planet cooled, as in the case of the moon, it 
cracked by expansion, these great canyons called canals, 
miles across, were formed miles deep, down which pour 
the waters from the melting snows of the poles during 
changes of season, it is this water we see and not vegeta- 
tion. This is the solution the writer offers. 

There are no seas, oceans or large bodies of water 
except along the edges of the snow-cap. This water, like 
that of the ocean, is bluish green, and that gave rise to 
imaginary vegetation seen during his summers. 

Mars is so far away from the sun he receives less than 
half the light and heat which fall on the same surface 
of our earth. The high dense atmosphere of our earth 
holds the heat, while the air on Mars is so thin, so rare, 
the heat escapes every night during which the waters turn 
to ice and snow. A planet must have a dense atmos- 
phere just right for breathing, holding water which 
condenses round dust particles to become clouds which 
rain down water wbich plants drink. Many other con- 
ditions required for life are absent from Mars. He is a 
dead world, almost in the condition of the moon regard- 
ing life. 

In the high, rare and clear atmosphere of the Flag- 
staff Observatory, Arizona, Professor Lowell, with his as- 
sistant, Mr. Lampland, at last succeeded in taking photo- 
graphs of the canals of Mars with bioscope films. One 
showing the region called Syrtis Major, taken with a 



170 THE DETAILS OF THIS PLASTERS SURFACE. 

very small diaphragm, agrees with a sketch made a short 
time before as of the planet seen through the telescope. 
This proves the canals are real objects and not optical 
delusions. The photo also clearly defines a large region 
to the south called Mare Erythracum separating this from 
the Mare Icarium — from Aeria on the north and from 
Deucalionis Pegio. A bent line from the bottom turns 
sharply at its ends in the Nilosyrtis, and continuing 
westwards becomes the Protonilus. These remarkable 
photos show also Peboas Lacus. Astaboras, Vexillum, 
Casius, Toth, Pierius, and other objects are seen through 
the telescope, many of which were thought by some to be 
delusions of the observers. These were brought out by 
enlarging the small pictures. The disputes regarding 
these canals and objects on Mars, which raged for gen- 
erations, are now ended. 

The canal system extends through both dark and bright 
regions, ending at last in the polar ice-caps. During 
spring and summer in both hemispheres the canals are 
dark and salient, but in the Martian fall and winter they 
can hardly be made out. They do not develop till the 
melting of the snow is well under way, when they darken 
in a regular way proceeding from the snow-caps down 
towards the equator. This procession is so evident we 
can follow it 40 million miles away, and shows waters 
of the melting ice at the poles make the canals appear 
and disappear. 

Earth, going faster in its flight round the sun, every 
second year overtakes Mars, but because of the tilted 
paths, once in 17 years they come close together. Tele- 
scopes magnifying from 350 to 500, making Mars about 
25 times the size of the full moon to naked eye, bring 
out the planet as a beautiful colored map as clear cut as 
a steel engraving or photo. 

The planet is a beautiful sight, colored in patches, 
having a perfectly level plain surface without mountain, 
hill, or vale, diversified with green patches, blue-green 
regions interspersed with reddish ground, crimsoned with 



THE DETAILS OF THE CANALS OF MARS. 171 

brilliant white — the smooth expanse extending all over 
the shining orb. 

A system of lines like a gigantic spider web covers 
the surface, their order being surprising. These canals 
are traced with geometric precision, all lines leading to 
round centers, where from two to half a dozen lines end. 
At first the dark blue expanses were supposed to be 
oceans, but recent observations show them to be dry, 
dead deserts, the whole surface being a vast Sahara 
without a living thing — a waste of colored rocks without 
sand or soil. 

A plain 30 miles in diameter on Mars, will appear 
in the telescope about as large as the dot over an " i " 
on this page. A city as large as Greater New York, or 
London, could not be seen on Mars, which is never less 
than 35 million miles away. These canals are therefore 
not less than from 15, 20 to 35 miles across. They are 
all very long, the longest would stretch across the Ameri- 
can continent — many are shorter but they average about 
1,700 miles. 

The canals are not laid out in a haphazard whimsi- 
cal way, every one is nearly straight and of the same 
width throughout, and stretching according to a well con- 
ceived plan. Many suppose them the work of thinking 
beings. Starting from some well-defined dark spot as 
a base, each stripe runs directly to some other dark spot, 
where it meets other stripes, so that several stripes con- 
verge in these spots. They run in all directions through 
the desolate surfaces of the planet. All are either per- 
fectly straight or uniformly curved. They appear so 
narrow because so far away that we see them chiefly 
because of their great length. Each has about the same 
width through its whole length, and in each case con- 
verge in one common center. 

These canals are puzzling. We find nothing like them 
on earth or moon. But the changes they present are still 
more startling. During a few days a canal will double — - 
where a few days before only one was seen two will 



172 WHY DO THE CANALS DOUBLE? 

appear. This their discoverer called " gemination " — 
a doubling. The photos taken at the Lowell Observatory 
show traces of this doubling, which was doubted long 
after Schiaparelli announced the fact even after he had 
spent years devoted to their study amid the ridicule of 
those who had not his acute eyesight. This doubling 
does not take place in all the bands. For out of the 400 
canals plotted by Prof. Lowell, only 51 ever appeared 
double. If this peculiar doubling were an optical de- 
lusion, it would appear in all, and the photograph would 
not show them double. Why these phenomena take 
place we cannot say. It seems they are wide, deep de- 
pressions on the surface of the planet. They are long 
and of uniform width and appear like great straight 
canyons, often having another miles away parallel to 
them. 

The canals look like spider webs, or telegraph lines 
stretched across the face of the planet. Prof. Lowell says 
the smallest is about 3, and the largest from 15 to 20 
miles wide. Some are 2,000 miles long — 2, 3, 4, 6 or 
more converge in a dark dot. The typical double canal 
called Phison is 2,250 miles long, 20 miles wide, the 
distance between the centers of the canals being 130 
miles. 

The dark round spots in which the canals end are 
large, medium, or small, the larger being more numerous, 
measures from 75 to 100 miles in diameter, and look like 
pinheads surrounded by other colored surfaces. The 
smaller seem like pin-points, and from 15 to 20 miles in 
diameter. The large canals end in larger spots and the 
small in the little ones. 

Canals appear and disappear according to the Mar- 
tian seasons; sometimes they are blotted out of whole 
regions to appear again. They appear after the melting 
of the polar snows. Spots change in the same way, both 
following the Martian year. Considerable time passes 
after the snow melts before canals and spots appear, 
those on the northern hemisphere appearing during the 



WHY NO MAN COULD LIVE ON MAES. 173 

summer, and those of the south show when the sun shines 
on the southern half of the planet. 

Father Moreux, director of the Bourges Observatory, 
says the surface is composed of bright, light, and dark 
spaces, the " seas " being uniformly blue-green, a few 
snowing a violet tint. The edges are not always sharp, 
the regions passing insensibly into greenish brown, then 
into chocolate brown in irregular marquetry. These 
changes do not follow the seasons of melting snows. The 
borders of the seas are always well denned, while those 
of the canals are dim, and vary from day to day. 

Professor Poynting, by Stephen's law of fourth powers, 
holds the temperature of Mars' surface is at 40 deg. P. 
below zero, and that of the earth by the same law as 63 
deg. P., which if correct regarding the mean temperature 
of our world, Mars' temperature is — 103 below that of 
the earth. If his figures are correct, how the snows melt 
in this cold, or how anything could live on Mars, we fail 
to see. 

Articles are written about living beings on Mars, on 
the moon and planets by men who do not realize how 
impossible it would be for any organism to exist on these 
worlds. Let us give the experiences of scientific men of 
the observatory on Mt. Blanc, the highest peak in Eu- 
rope. Janssen in 1893 founded an observatory on the 
top, where, since it was first ascended in 1786, the tem- 
perature was never above the freezing point except in 
1906, when for a few minutes it stood at 36 P. Men 
can live there only from the beginning of June to the 
end of September. ~No human being could survive the 
whole winter. 

Pouvielle, one of the astronomers, in his account of the 
work on the lone mountain-top dwells on the courage it 
takes to spend weeks in the monotony of these snow- 
fields and glaciers. The physical conditions cause a men- 
tal depression which is very hard to become accustomed 
to. The rapid evaporation of the moisture of the body 
causes an ever increasing thirst, while the appetite almost 



174 KIND OF MEN WHO COULD LIVE ON MAES. 

entirely disappears. At first the system can stand only a 
few glasses of warm tea with plenty of sugar. Alcoholic 
drinks are deadly. The system rapidly runs down, but 
when the men get a little acclimated, they find meat 
the most nourishing food. But the meat must be frozen 
at Chamounix, then brought up and stored in the cellar 
where the temperature is always at from 12 to 15 deg. 
F. It is eaten with boiled vegetables to prevent scurvy 
and such disorders. Because of the rarity of the air it 
takes many hours to boil the food. 

The men are clothed in Arctic garments day and night 
and the rooms heated to 32 deg. F. The moisture from 
the breaths condenses on walls and instruments in a cover- 
ing of thin ice, icicles depending from ceilings, beams 
and lintels. When it gets a little warm, the ice melts 
and drops down as a rainfall in every room. They 
sleep in bags, and endure all kinds of miseries looking 
forward to the time in the fall, when they will be re- 
lieved from the living death. If men suffer such miseries 
on Mt. Blanc and on high mountains, how could they 
live on Mars, where the conditions are the same as 10 
miles higher than our most lofty mountains? 

A man made to live on Mars must have lungs of far 
different capacity than ours, with trunk, legs and limbs 
in proportion. He would hardly resemble a human 
being. Animals would differ from all beasts of earth, 
and plants would have to be formed of different structure 
from ours. 

An inhabitant of Mars would be much more powerful 
than our strongest man, for Mars' mass is only one-ninth 
that of earth. He could run 10 feet in a second, jump 
over a tree, and kick a football a quarter of a mile. He 
would have to be 18 or 20 ft. high, his muscles would be 
27 times stronger than ours. Bodies would weigh only a 
third as much as they do on earth. A laborer there could 
do as much work as 50 or 60 men on earth, and he could 
keep up to a powerful Panama dredger which lifts 2 
cubic yards of earth and fills a car with one sweep. He 






HOW HARD IT IS TO STUDY VENUS. 175 

could pick up 2J tons, and run off with the load on his 
back. 

The stories of the inhabitants of Mars are all fables — 
fictions of the fancy. The air there is too thin, the sur- 
face is all desert rock, there is no soil for vegetation, 
there is not enough vapor of water to condense as rain 
in its atmosphere to sustain life, and the pressure of 
the atmosphere is too light. A thousand conditions pre- 
vail there which would kill every living thing. 

Venus comes nearer earth than any other planet ex- 
cept the moon. It revolves round the sun in 224|- 
days, and is seen as evening and morning star. As her 
distance from the sun is about two-thirds that of the 
earth, her distance from us once during every revolution, 
is only a third that of the earth from the king of day. 
She increases and diminishes in apparent diameter, and 
presents phases similar to those of the moon. 

When nearest earth as seen through the telescope she 
turns her dark side to us, but a few days later she shows 
a slender crescent of light which widens more and more 
as she swings round in her path, while shining as the 
morning star bfeore sunrise. Gradually she assumes the 
form of a half-moon, more and more of her face lights up, 
till at last we see her whole disk. But then she is on the 
other side of the sun from us — lost in his rays. Then 
her face undergoes the same changes in the opposite di- 
rection. She appears to the east of the sun, till she 
swings round in her orbit, and comes back again to her 
nearest position to the earth. She is therefore very hard 
to study, because when nearest to us she is dark, and 
when she shows her full face we are blinded by the 
splendors of sunlight. We therefore never see the whole 
face of the planet, and we have not such a complete 
knowledge of her as we have of Mars or of the moon. 

During a transit of Venus, we see the planet pass 
across the sun's disk as a thin half crescent band like 
the moon in its first quarter. The points seem to hang 
over the limb of the sun because the sunlight passing 



176 THE LEARNED DON'T AGREE ABOUT VENUS. 

through the planet's atmosphere is refracted. Measuring 
the air or gas enveloping Venus, we find it is twice as 
high as our air, and if it is like our atmosphere it must 
be twice as dense. Now if our air were twice as high 
as it is it would press with a weight of about 30 pounds 
to the square inch on us in place of only about 14 
pounds, as now. No man, animal, or plant could live 
under that pressure all the time. Men building tunnels 
and caissons under this pressure can work only about 
three hours at a time, and many die. Some astronomers 
estimate that Venus' atmosphere is five times as high. 
as our air. The spectroscope shows water vapor in the 
shape of clouds float in her atmosphere, and these clouds 
are so deep and dense that it is very hard to see the 
planet's surface. 

Venus receives on each square of surface double the 
light and heat falling on the same space of earth. Recent 
observations show she rotates on her axis only once while 
revolving round the sun; therefore she presents one face 
to the lord of day as the moon shows only one side to the 
earth. One side of Venus has therefore everlasting 
day, and the other perpetual night. The side which is 
forever dark has the interstellar cold of the spaces be- 
tween the stars. 

For this reason her rotation was hard to determine, 
for we could not find a fixed spot on the surface, all seen 
being changing clouds. Drawings made at the same time 
by different parties do not agree. Cassini made the 
first drawings in 1666, and other astronomers worked 
on the problem of her rotation on her axis. Herschel 
with his great experience and ability abandoned his ob- 
servations on this planet. But in 1878 Schiaparelli, 
after very careful observations at Milan, announced that 
he could not agree with others who stated that the planet 
revolved either in 24 hours, or in 23 days as given out 
by former scientists. Having eyes which first saw the 
canals of Mars, his words have weight. He holds that 



WHY NOTHING COULD LIVE ON VENUS. 177 

she revolves only once during her path round the sun, and 
therefore presents the same face to the orb of day. 

In 1896 studies of the planet in broad daylight con- 
firmed Schiaparelli's conclusions. At the Lick Observa- 
tory Mr. Bernard, even in the high pure air of Cali- 
fornia, could find no spot save once, Flammarion tried 
to combine all the details of former observers and draw- 
ings, and he came to the conclusion that many belts and 
spots were illusions. Venus' black lines and belts are 
much like those seen on Jupiter's satellites, and some be- 
lieved them to be shadows of clouds thrown on the sur- 
face of the planet. But the conclusions of the best in- 
formed observers is, that we never see the surface of the 
planet itself, only diffused light and clouds floating in 
the atmosphere. As it receives almost double the amount 
of heat as the earth, one side of the planet with its ever- 
lasting day is burned up, and the other side of the per- 
petual night has the cold of the interstellar spaces 449 
deg. below zero. Nothing could live on Venus, for the 
changes of heat and cold are too great for any kind of 
life. 

Its mass being a little more than three-fourths that of 
the earth, it could retain air, water, and the same gases 
we find on earth. The clouds floating in its air would 
modify the heat in a measure, but not enough for living 
organisms. Besides we do not know if these gases are 
the same as those forming air and water of our earth, 
which are absolutely required for life, if the heat and 
cold were not so extreme. 

As Venus turns one side towards the sun all the time, 
similar to the moon which turns towards the earth, there- 
fore vast cyclones and whirlwinds of heated air like 
blasts from fiery furnaces rush from the light to the dark 
half of the planet, while at the same time the cold winds 
hundreds of degrees below the freezing point sweep in 
from the dark cold half to take their places. If living 
organisms could survive the heat they would be frozen 
with the cold, 



178 MERCURY AND JUPITER HAVE NO INHABITANTS. 

Mercury keeps one face always turned towards the 
sun, so life there would have the same difficulties to 
overcome as on Venus. But as it is much nearer the 
sun, its contrasts of heat, cold and light are much greater. 
Its mass being only one-thirtieth that of the earth, water- 
vapor or steam would certainly escape into space, and if 
it once had water, this long ago was dissipated into the 
interstellar spaces. Weight being so light on this planet 
the three gases, oxygen, hydrogen and nitrogen would 
also escape. Mercury has neither air nor water, abso- 
lutely necessary for any living organism. It reflects no 
less than 83 per cent, of the sunlight, more than any 
other planet, whereas clouds reflect 72 per cent., showing 
it has neither air or water. The side turned from the 
sun in everlasting darkness is frozen below 300 deg. F., 
and the face which turns to the sun forever is intensely 
heated even to the melting point of rock, therefore this 
planet has no life. As to the planet Vulcan some suppose 
they saw, the conditions would be still more unfriendly 
for living beings. The conclusion then is irresistible 
that the smaller planets have no living beings. 

Now let us go beyond Mars and see the great outer 
planets. We will pass by the 500 smaller asteroids — • 
little planets, some of them being only a few hundred 
miles in diameter. It is certain nothing can live on 
them, for they have no air or water. 

Jupiter comes next — being the largest of all the plan- 
ets. But as he is iive times farther from the sun than 
our earth, he receives only a twenty-fifth part of the light 
and heat which falls on the same surface of our world. 
Supposing that the light and heat of the earth decreased 
to the twenty-fifth part of what we now receive, how long 
before every particle of water, and every living organ- 
ism would be frozen? Nothing now living on earth 
could continue in this cold ; ocean, lake and river would 
turn to ice, the gases would become liquids, the whole 
climate would become colder than the most arctic night. 

Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune have such low 



THE WONDERS OF THE PLANET SATURN. 179 

densities, combined with large size, that nothing solid 
can be on them. They are formed of metallic vapors, 
clouds of metals so hot that nothing solid exists on their 
surfaces. Could a living organism exist in a cloud as 
hot as a furnace blast ? Jupiter has less than a fourth 
of the density of the earth. Saturn less than an eighth, 
and Neptune and Uranus between these two figures. 
The bodies of the solar system are therefore divided into 
groups — the inner ones, including earth, are, like it, 
solid ; because of their smaller sizes they cooled rapidly 
while the outer planets, beginning with Jupiter, being 
very large, are formed of vapors and gases, which can be 
liquefied only, at very low temperatures. Their enor- 
mous bulks with low density accounts for these conditions. 
Mercury, Venus, Earth and Mars are more or less alike, 
they are all small, the earth being the largest and all 
have nearly the same density. 

Saturn, 872,137,000 miles from the sun, moves so 
slowly Hindoos call it Sanaistshara, " Slowly moving," 
goes round the sun in 29^ years, is the next largest planet 
after Jupiter, is inclined to the plane of its path 27 deg., 
and has four seasons each equal to seven of our years. 
Its mass is 93 times that of the earth and has twice as 
much matter as Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Uranus 
and Neptune combined. Its diameter at the equator is 
73,000, and at the poles 66,000 miles and is 895 million 
miles from the sun, receiving only one-ninetieth of the 
light in brightness we do. It is encircled by six rings, 
the most mysterious objects in nature. 

This planet is so hot, it shines with a dim light, which 
in the spectroscope shows dark absorption bands in the 
red and orange like those of Neptune, with signs of 
hydrogen. Its atmosphere is filled with great clouds, 
metallic vapor, steam, etc., seen as dark broad bands to 
the equator, from which Sir Wm. Herschel estimated 
its rotation at 10 hours, 16 minutes. If it revolved 2 \ 
times faster things would have no weight on its surface, 
and if three times faster the planet would be broken into 



180 

one or more planets, for it would burst like a wheel 
turned too fast. 

The rings revolve in 10 hours 20 minutes. They are 
not solid but are composed of gases mixed with little 
grains of dust, rocks, mountains separated one from an- 
other each independent and moving like little planets 
all held by weight. The inner ring called gause or 
crepe is 6,400 miles from the planet, 8,400 miles wide, 
and astronomers have seen it divided into many concen- 
tric rings. In 1905 its satellite or moon Iapetus passed 
through this ring, through which the body of Saturn 
can be seen in undiminished brightness. 

This dim ring gradually merges into a brighter ring 
outside it 18,000 miles wide, 1,450 miles separating 
them. Outside of this is another very bright ring 10,- 
000 miles wide, its outer edges being 45 miles from the 
planet's surface. These rings are separated into 6 rings, 
like the rim of a hat, round the planet, and have no at- 
mosphere. During the planet's revolution round the 
sun, twice they vanish into a narrow line, and twice open 
into broad ovals above and below, and when Saturn 
crosses between us and the sun they disappear. 

The spectra of the planets tell peculiar stories. That 
of the rings of Saturn shows the inner rings move faster 
than the outer rings; the rings, therefore, are not solid 
but composed of millions of small detached bodies and 
gases all moving independent of their neighbors. The 
rings may be compared to numberless little planets re- 
volving round the great planet. 

The lines of the spectrum of Saturn and of Venus all 
lean over to the left — that is, they are not straight up and 
down as the lines in the specra of he sun and stars, but 
oblique. This leaning over shows that the planets re- 
volving throw the lines of the reflected sunlight over this 
way as the recent spectroscope observations at Flagstaff 
show. 

Saturn has 10 moons. Phebe, the 9th, discovered by 
the photograph in 1889, seen again in 1904, has a diame- 



MOONS AND ASTEROIDS A GREAT DISCOVERY. 181 

ter of 198 miles, revolves in 547 days, and shines as a 
star of the 15th magnitude 8,430,000 miles from Saturn. 
Eros, first seen by Witt in 1898, is so far from Saturn 
that in one part of its revolution it comes nearest to 
the earth of all the heavenly bodies except the moon. 
Jupiter has 6 satellites, the last discovered revolves in 
248 days. Fifty-nine little asteroids were discovered in 
1904. Thus far were found more than 500 revolving 
between Mars and Saturn and new ones are being found 
every year. They are of all sizes from a few hundred 
miles diameter to a few miles, some having about the 
mass of one of our large mountains. 

Men ask, are the laws of gravity, of stellar motions, of 
solar physics, of astronomy right ? Is the theory of the 
heavens correct as science proposes ? A startling dis- 
covery was to prove the science of the stars correct. Cer- 
tain perturbations were noticed in the planets. They 
were pulled out of their place in a certain part of their 
orbits. This could be explained only by the existence of 
a certain mass of matter never seen by mortal eye. 
Mathematics proved it was there. Two men worked on 
the problem unknown to each other, one Adams, an Eng- 
lishman, the other Leverrier, a Erench astronomer. On 
September 23, 1846, astronomers turned their telescopes 
to the point the figures indicated, and discovered the 
planet Uranus. This brilliant piece of work proved 
our system of the heavens correct 



CHAPTER IX.— THE MOON AND WHAT WE SEE ON HER 
SURFACE. 

The moon, ever orb of mystery, poetry, song, was 
dream of astrologers in olden days, when her changes 
were supposed to control human lives and modify the 
weather. Reigning over empire of silence and peace, 
its white and frosty light with silver gleam seemed 
greatest of heavenly mysteries. Pagans called her 
" queen of night," " Diana with silver crescent," 
" Phoebus with fair hair," " Cynthia with her beams." 
In far-off days in Babylonia she was worshipped as a 
goddess, her cult crystallized into temple and ceremony 
at Ur : " light," where Abraham lived before God called 
him into Palestine. The adoration of the moon spread 
over the world in days of deepest paganism. 

Born of earth when worlds were made under God's 
guiding hand, the moon is attached to our world by ties 
of attraction, her weight keeps her in her course, and 
ever on she sweeps round earth in about 29 days, cir- 
cling from west to east like all the other planets. 

When, 300 years ago, the telescope was first turned on 
the moon, nearest of the heavenly bodies, our satellite 
excited the greatest curiosity. Galileo's observations 
made more noise than the discovery of America had 
some time before. For a new world had been found, 
not on earth but in the heavens. Excited minds 
thought they saw " a man in the moon," as well as 
cities, lands and continents peopled by reasonable 
beings. Voyages, romances, novels, excursions and 
wonderful discoveries were published and read with 
avidity, as to-day wild stories are read regarding life and 
reasonable beings on other planets. 

Naked eye sees bright and dark regions on moon's 
surface, and these were supposed to be reflections of 

182 



UNVEILED MYSTERIES OF THE MOON". 183 

our world, continents and seas. When the telescope 
was invented, learned men set to work to unravel the 
mysteries of our satelite. They saw her face composed 
of mountain, hill, plain and depression, and found the 
changing phases of new, old, half, quarter, and full 
moon were caused by the sunlight reflected to us dur- 
ing the different positions of our neighbor regarding 
earth and sun. These are simply lights and shadows 
on her surface. The moon does not shine with her own 
light as the ancients supposed, but reflects the sunlight 
from her white rocks. 

Learned men surveyed her face and published maps 
called selenographic drawings, from Selene, the Greek 
for moon. Soon the moon's surface was surveyed and 
mapped out better than the surface of the earth, for parts 
of our world had not then been visited. 

Psalm viii, 4 : " For I will behold thy heavens, the 
works of thy fingers, the moon and the stars which thou 
hast found," has been paraphrased as follows: 

" Soon as the evening shades prevail, 
The moon takes up the wonderous tale, 
And nightly to the list'ning earth 
Repeats the story of her birth ; 
While all the stars that round her burn, 
And all the planets, in their turn 
Confirm the tidings as they roll, 
And spread the truth from pole to pole. 
What though in solemn silence all 
Move round this dark terrestrial ball ? 
What though no real voice, nor sound, 
Amid their radiant orbs be found ? 
In reason's ear they all rejoice 
And utter forth a glorious voice. 
Forever singing, as they shine, 
'The Hand that made us is Divine.'" 

Earth is 7,912 miles in diameter, its surface has 
148,570,000 square miles, 55,000,000 of land as some 
estimate — the land has not yet been exactly measured — 
and weighs 259,375,000,000 long tons. But the moon, 
much smaller, has a diameter of 2,160 miles, a surface 
of 14,657,000 square miles and 5,276,000 cubic miles, 



184 HOW MOOtf WAS BORtf OF EARTH. 

which Cavendish says weighs 73 trillion tons. A globe 
of water the size of the moon would weigh 21^ trillion 
tons, it is .062 the density of our earth, showing moon 
rocks are much lighter than rocks of earth. Moon's mass 
is 1-80 that of earth, a pound on the moon is only J^ 
as heavy as on earth — 2^ ounces, and a man who could 
jump 6 feet here could jump 36 feet on the moon. 

Although the moon's mean distance is 240,000, when 
nearest it is only 225,719 from us. A thing dropped 
that distance would fall to earth in 3 days, 1 hour and 
45 minutes. If we could take an ordinary railroad 
train to the moon it would take us about a year to get 
there. 

Some years ago Professor Darwin of Harvard sug- 
gested the moon was once a part of the earth, thrown from 
it by centrifugal force, when like a wheel revolving too 
fast our planet burst. The theory was subjected to 
mathematical examination and is now a classic held by 
all astronomers. The earth then melted by heat caused 
by condensing, revolved faster and faster till it turned 
on its axis in about 5 hours, bulged out at the equator 
forming a great pear-shaped mass, as tides act on a 
smaller scale to-day. Revolving too fast for the mate- 
rials to be held by weight, when the speed came to a 
certain rapidity, the melted matter now composing the 
moon was thrown off and formed our satellite. 

When did the moon separate from the earth ? Long 
ages ago, the exact date perhaps we will never find, 
but it was after our earth had cooled, when a rock 
crust 45 miles deep covered its surface, its interior 
still being fluid with heat, when all the matter forming 
the earth melted, the heavier metals settled down deep 
into the interior. They were thrown up in small 
quantities in the great convulsions from the fiery deeps, 
when the mountain chains were formed. Therefore heavy 
minerals such as gold, iron, etc., are generally found 
among the rocks formed by fire. There are millions of 
tons of gold, silver, iron, platinum and rare metals in the 



DENSITY OF EARTH AND MOON MATERIALS. 185 

earth, but they are down deep near the center. We find 
only small amounts where fiery eruptions raged, amid the 
mighty mountains and solid crusts of our planet — 
hardly ever in rocks formed by water. 

Kocks on the surface of the earth are much lighter 
than those down deep in the interior. Water, air and 
gases being light, did not sink down into the melted 
earth — now they float over its surface. What wisdom 
it was to give these gases and fluids this light weight, for 
without them we could not live! Wisdow foresaw life 
was to be created here, and endowed the different ma- 
terials with weight and activities with that purpose in 
view. 

The weight of the whole earth, or its density, is about 
5.6 the density of water — that is, it weighs 5.6 times 
more than would a globe of water the same size, while the 
weight of the moon is 3.4 times more than a globe of 
water of the same size. If we could strip off 45 miles 
of its surface all around and weigh it, the materials 
of the crust of the earth would be found 2.7 times 
heavier than an equal quantity of water. The ma- 
terials of the moon being 3.4 and of the earth surface 
2.7, the weight of water, their density hardly differ. As 
the moon was scraped from the surface of the earth 
some materials were taken from down deep, where the 
materials are heavier than on the surface. That is the 
reason the difference between 3.4 and 2.7 is so very 
small — .7, between the weight of materials on the sur- 
face of earth and of the whole mass of the moon. In 
this mighty upheaval of matter from the earth, while the 
moon's mass was liquid with fire, the moon's heavier 
metals fell towards the earth, being drawn by earth's 
attractions. Thus the center of gravity of the moon is 
33 miles nearer to us than the center of the moon. 
Earth and moon attract each other, the moon therefore 
cannot turn over, for it would be like going uphill. 
Therefore our saaellite turns one face to us all the time. 

The Bible account only states the fact. " And God 



186 SUPPOSED SEPARATION OF MOOH AKD EARTH. 

said: Let there be lights in the firmament of heaven, 
to divide the day and night; and let them be for signs, 
and for seasons, and for days, and for years. To shine 
in the firmament of heaven, and to give light upon the 
earth. And God made two great lights, a greater light 
to rule the day, and a lesser light to rule the night, and 
the stars. And he set them in the firmament of heaven 
to shine upon the earth." — Gen. i. 14-16. 

The continents are of materials about as dense or 
heavy as the great mass of the moon. The laws of 
whirling wheels and turning globes show how the 
moon's mass was torn from our world after the surface 
cooled. The steam condensed to water which covered 
most of the earth's surface, in these far-off times when 
the mass composing the moon began to rise by centri- 
fugal force, which bursts a wheel revolved too rapidly. 

As the earth revolved too fast, scientists say a part of 
the solid crust near the present islands of New Zealand 
began to rise in the air. A great crack in the crust on 
the opposite side of earth appeared, got larger and 
wider, and the American continents slid over towards 
the Pacific. The chasm became 2,000 miles wide, the 
waters flowed into it and formed the Atlantic Ocean. 
On the opposite side of the globe the great continents 
covering nearly three quarters of the surface of the 
earth rose on high, separated farther and higher, its 
materials fell together forming a globe, for that is the 
law of the whirling orbs. Turning, whirling round the 
earth in 5 or 6 hours, as it ascended, its rotation round 
the earth became slower, till when it got 240,000 miles 
up in the sky, just where its force tending to fly away 
just balanced its force of gravity, weight, tending to 
make it fall to the earth, then it stopped. Who stopped 
it ? The Creator who knew just its weight and the 
weight of the earth. There is now the moon revolving 
round the world " the lesser light " to rule the night. 
Gen. i. 16. 

As the moon's mass rose it dragged materials from 



MOON TORN OUT OF THE PACIFIC. 187 

down deep below the surface of our planet. Then it 
left as its mark the great Australia with islands to north- 
west, and our Philippine Islands. The deep wide chasm 
from whence it was torn is now filled with waters of 
the Pacific. Eight in the center of the Pacific from 
which came our moon, northeast of Xew Zealand are the 
deepest waters of earth, its opposite point being in 
about the center of the Sahara desert of Africa. What 
a wonderful upheaval that was ! 

The center of gravity of the earth does not agree 
with the center of the figure, for the materials of the 
continents are lighter than the materials forming the 
ocean-beds. Ocean floors are vast extending plains or 
plateaus having an average depth of about 3 miles. 
The land surfaces then floated like ice-cakes en the 
melted matter of earth when the moon was torn out. 
The average density of the continents is 3.4 that of 
water while that of the moon is 3.4, exactly the same. 
If the moon were not taken from the earth this way, 
taking only a part of its surface, the earth would be 
almost all covered with water. For then the cooling globe 
would be almost round, the condensed water would 
have completely covered its surface, little or no land 
would appear, mankind could not live. If all the hard 
crusts of the earth had been stripped from its surface, 
and formed into a great globe twice as large as the 
moon, the waters would cover a smaller earth, things 
could not grow, for the whole surface of the world would 
be covered with water, the materials of the earth would 
weigh much less, the whole order of nature on earth 
would have to be reorganized. Who says no Architect 
planned out these things ? 

If now we look along the edges of this deep depres- 
sion of the Pacific, we find it bordered with lines of 
active or extinct volcanoes stretching in curves where 
the continents were broken in the upheaval and is- 
lands. These continents inclosing the Pacific are lined 
with lofty mountain ranges, remains of melted ridges 



188 MATURE S LAWS COtJLD HOT MAKE MOOtf. 

thrown up. These are peculiar to the Pacific coasts, 
while the Atlantic coasts are mostly low or level plains, 
showing the continents were split apart when the 
American continents were dragged over to where 'they 
are now. 

Geologists also say a large continent sank in the 
Atlantic of which a tradition comes down among many 
races. That is why the Atlantic is so wide between 
Central America and Africa. Tremendous seems these 
upheavals — the tearing out of a planet, the sliding over 
of two continents. But what are these exhibitions of 
power compared to that of building suns as we have 
explained ! They are the marks of the fingers of God. 

There is no other way of explaining how the moon 
separated from our earth except that God ruled nature 
at the lunar birth. For when we go down deep into 
the questions, ask how the earth revolved on its axis in 
5 hours to burst like a mighty wheel, how it changed to 
turn in 24 hours, why the moon revolves round the 
earth in about 29 days when it once went round in 
5 hours, why it stopped when just 240,000 miles away, 
why it did not go on away to be lost amid the star deeps 
— a thousand questions like these come into the mind 
to which we find science gives no replies. The only 
answer is that a Power infinite, a Wisdom learned in 
figures, a Mind eternal presides over the formation of 
the orbs, and ruled nature in these eons of ages when 
orbs were made. Men like to leave out God. They go 
into the questions of the tides, tell how many millions 
of years it would take the tides to retard earth's rota- 
tion at a fraction of second in a ceutury, and use figures 
to explain these things, but all admit we are on the 
borders of human knowledge. The simple old woman 
who says when she sees things she does not understand, 
" Glory be to God " shows more wisdom than the most 
learned scientist, who looks to nature alone to unravel 
the mysteries of matter. 

When the writer traveled along the shores of the 



HOW MOON SURFACE WAS FORMED. 189 

Pacific, he found the mountains then composed mostly 
of white rocks. The crust of the earth sent up from 
below by volcanic forces is almost as white as chalk. 
The moon seen through a great telescope is formed of 
white rocks, which look exactly like the rocks along the 
Pacific. The writer has never seen this comparison 
stated, but it seems to strengthen the theory. 

As time went on earth and moon by their attraction 
gathered in materials from the sky, which falling with 
the swiftness of heavenly bodies continued to keep up 
their light and heat. Then earth and moon shone like 
suns with their own light. But as ages passed they 
gathered in all the matter God made floating in the star 
spaces nearby. Gradually both bodies cooled when there 
was nothing left to keep up their heat when all the mate- 
rial had fallen on their surfaces. A cooled crust of rock 
covered their surfaces, but the interiors of the planets 
were still fiery masses of melted rock. The earth being 
much larger than the moon still preserves the fires of 
the interior we see driven forth from volcanoes. 

As the cool crust covered the moon's surface, the 
fires beneath continued their activities and burst forth 
in countless volcanoes. As the planet lost its heat, it 
contracted, the crust broke and sent up through the 
great cracks the melted materials which built up the 
mountain ranges on the moon. But in every place 
belched up gases, flames and melted rock as you see 
bubbles rise when thick pudding is cooking or bubbles 
rise from stagnant pools. 

During eons of ages ago, higher and higher mounted 
the fiery forms of red-hot rocks. Incandescent clouds 
of rocks ground into sand, called ashes, shot out from 
vast volcanoes, then parting and spreading into pine- 
tree forms, these fine broken rocks, ground by the tre- 
mendous forces of the interior, were dragged down un- 
der the force of gravitation. Hundreds of thousands 
of craters sent up these materials high towards the sky, 
as the younger Pliny saw the top of Vesuvius blown 



190 how a planet's surface is formed. 

off, when the fiery mountain destroyed Pompeii with a 
rain of fine sand, as when the melted rock in lava form 
of rivers of fire overwhelmed Herculaneum. Each cone 
sent forth the semblance of a monstrous palm-tree redly 
magnificent, showering fiery materials down on the 
plains till they built up the round rings of melted mat- 
ter, and rings of vast mountains surrounding the great 
volcanoes now extinct. 

~Ko man was there then to see these gigantic geysers 
of liquid fire, as fountains from the deeps spouted forth 
melted materials from the interior, remains of the trans- 
cendent forces of gravitation which drew together the 
matter of which our moon was made. !No one saw the 
erect fiery fountains that spread widely at their tops, 
arching like a stream of water from a hose with a nozzle 
miles in diameter, or when they burst like Roman 
candles into scarlet showers. Each forming an island 
of fire on the melted plain covered the planet with fire 
and mineral vapors. Earthquakes, upheavals, seas of 
fire sported on every side a million times greater than 
we see in the crucible while they make steel. 

As ages pass her tremendous heat was lost in the 
interstellar spaces. The mountains cooled quickly and 
became like glass, the plains longer retained the heat, 
and there the rocks are crystallized into granite. You 
will see along the sides of Vesuvius that the quickly 
cooled rocks are like black and gray glass. But where 
large masses of lava of the volcano flow down and re- 
tain the heat, they crystallize and show the form of the 
granite of which the crust of our earth is made. 

But the cones within the great volcanic moon rings 
longer retained their heat, and glowed like molten 
metals. Often it flowed like iron from a furnace, fill- 
ing the round crater floors. Then rivers of fire spurted 
out from the bases of the cones amid metallic gases, look- 
ing like imps of hell breaking from infernal regions. 
Red-hot boulders were shot forth, as from gigantic 
cannons. Falling they floated on these seas of melted 



THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 191 

matter, or helped to build up the central cones. Often 
they stuck to the plastic sides, when they fell near the 
crater which belched them forth. Some of these rocks 
shot up were as large as hills or mountains, others the 
size of houses, others smaller — they were of all sizes, 
all hot nearly at the melting point. 

Now all is cold. The fires which shaped the planet 
now are gone, we see but their remains on every side. 
Silence deep broods over the wild scene of vale, and 
mount and crag and plain. The loneliness of the dead 
world is appalling to us used to life, and movement, 
and change and variety of earth. 

The naked eye sees the moon's surface mottled with 
shadows, shades and light, having dark regions extend- 
ing over its surface, with here and there round patches 
of light. These never change except while making her 
circuit round the earth in 29 days, 12 hours, 44 minutes, 
2 seconds, the sunlight illumines them from different 
sides. As the moon rises above the horizon and sets in 
the west, we can look down on her upper and lower 
sides, as it were see over on to the places we cannot 
see when she is over our head. Galileo first explained 
the phenomena when he turned on our satellite his 
newly invented telescope, and what he saw upset wild 
fancies of former observers. 

He first saw the mountains, vales and plains, and 
announced her surface is not flat as Aristotle's fol- 
lowers taught. His glass revealed our nearest heavenly 
orb, like our earth, is covered with hills, depressions, 
mounts, vales and plains. Nearly 30 years ago the 
writer first saw the moon through the great telescope 
of the Dudley Observatory, and it was a sight which 
never will be blotted from his memory. The great 
round globe stands out, not flat, as seen with the naked 
eye, but round like a giant globe moving in majesty 
along without support. The lights on the mountains 
were very brilliant, as the crater edges flashed back the 
sunlight. 



192 DID METEORITES CAUSE THE FORMATIONS ? 

The surface of the moon viewed through a telescope 
of one of our observatories is seen all covered with 
spots. Her surface is scared with depressions like those 
left by the smallpox in a person's face. They are 
nearly all over the surface — some are nearly 100 miles 
across, others so small we can hardly see them. In 
some cases they are round valleys below the surface, in 
others the ridges are high over the plain, but many de- 
pressions are below the lunar landscape. Many are 
round prominences above the plain, while others, es- 
pecially the medium sized, have one or more round cones 
in their centers. 

What caused these peculiar formations? Some say 
they are all of volcanic formation. Mr. Tozer holds that 
they are caused by meteorites falling on the surface 
when it was fluid ; in a melted state. These bodies fall- 
ing down with terrific velocity, caused by the moon's 
attraction, splashed the molten soft rocky surface 
of our satellite like the pebbles you throw into water. 
These meteoric bodies, coming from the sky with the 
swiftness of planets, from 20 miles diameter to a few 
feet, they fell down while the planet was in a melted 
state and caused the peculiar round craters seen all over 
her surface. 

Professor Brashear took plastic clay, wet and easily 
molded, and with it covered a large surface. Then he 
threw balls of the same material with great force down 
on the surface of this soft clay. The balls sank down 
into the soft surface, which was soon all covered with 
depressions, round ridges, with central cones, the marks 
on all sides strikingly like the moon's landscape. This 
seems to prove that these mountains and the mottled 
surface of our planet were caused by the materials like 
meteors falling from the sky while she was cooling. 
But there are other phases of formation which only 
volcanic action could cause. 

Through the great equatorial of one of our observa- 
tories the moon is the greatest sight. _ The clockwork 



MOON SEEN THROUGH A GREAT TELESCOPE. 193 

keeps the whole glimmering globe in the field of vision. 
It looks not flat as seen it with naked eye, but as a 
round globe hanging high in heaven. The plains, moun- 
tains, hills and depressions appear with striking vivid- 
ness. The places where the light strikes are very bright, 
but the shades are of inky blackness. You can see the 
projections throwing their dark shadows. The plains 
are gray and the white mountains stand out as rugged 
patches and ranges of light. The flat rocky pock- 
marked plains are spotted with round deep depressions, 
most of them having a cone in the center — they look as 
though some mighty hand threw mountains from some 
awful height down into the plastic, melted, rocky sur- 
face, as you would throw pebbles into thick mud and 
then the whole surface had solidified into rock, leaving 
round cones in the center of each depression some of 
them being miles across. 

When the moon's mass was fluid, melted with heat, 
the rapid turning of the moon around the earth caused 
great tides in its mass, so that it became elongated on 
the side turned towards us, and on the side away from 
the earth. The heavy materials fell down through the 
center towards the earth because of the attraction of our 
greater mass. The center of the gravity of the moon is 
not in the center of the mass, but about 33 miles nearer 
to us. For this reason the moon never turns over, but 
presents the same face to us all the time. ~No man ever 
saw the other side of the moon. It tilts a little, swing- 
ing back and forth so we see somewhat over the rim, 
but that is all. What there is on the other side we do 
not know, nor will we ever find by direct sight. 

As you look up at that round ball of shining solid 
rock seeming to rest motionless in your field of vision, 
you ask yourself why it does not fall to earth. Because 
it has two movements, centrifugal and centripetal, which 
exactly balance each other. The earth's attraction for 
it, and it for the earth, and its movements round the 
earth, both keep it where the Creator placed it. Newton, 



194 THE MOON PROVES GOD. 

searching into the mysteries of nature, saw in every part 
of the universe the Eternal's footprints. He was so 
struck with the wonders of creation, that whenever he 
heard the name of God he took off his hat and howed 
his head in adoration of Him, whose wonders he had 
spent his life investigating. Only little or ignorant 
minds cannot see God in His wonderful works. 

Newton, in his great work the Principia, analyzed the 
two forces to which the moon is subject — movement 
round earth, and tendency to fall down on our world ; hut 
we will give only a few of his conclusions. As the moon 
falls it goes along and each moment it is the same dis- 
tance from the earth. 

It is subject to two movements — centripetal and cen- 
trifugal — one tends to bring it nearer earth, the other 
tends to make it fly away — one balances the other. As 
its attraction for earth and earth for her forever pulls 
the two orbs together, the circuit motion of the moon 
tends to make it fly away. But these two forces exactly 
balance, and it stays up there, 240,000 miles high, resting 
on nothing. 

Suppose it were twice that distance, attraction would 
be so much less it would go slower and slower, farther 
and farther away, get beyond the pull of the earth till 
it went wandering through space. Suppose it were half 
that distance, it would whirl round the earth faster and 
faster, come nearer and nearer, till at last it would strike 
our world and overwhelm everything. Then the two 
globes would smash and fuse into one great fiery globe. 

Now to make these two forces, movement and weight, 
exactly balance, it was necessary to put the earth and 
moon just so far apart so one force equals the other. To 
know just where to put the moon so it would stay there, 
it was necessary to weigh every grain of matter in both 
orbs, and to give the moon just that movement round the 
earth. 

Not only earth and moon are founded on these sim- 
ple laws, but the hundreds of orbs of the solar system. 



PAELIC NAMES OF PLACES ON MOON. 195 

But that is not all. We have explained that the photos 
show about 500,000,000 of suns in the heavens, the 
spectroscope tells us most of them are double, triple, 
or formed of four or more orbs gyrating round each 
other. We have therefore not less than 1,000 million 
planets and suns circling round each other. To put 
these in their places, just so near and far, to give them 
their different movements so they would go on forever, 
it was absolutely necessary to weigh every particle of 
matter in each, and in all, otherwise the mechanics of the 
stars would be in time destroyed. Who could do that 
but a Person infinite in power and wisdom ? Any other 
idea is simply unthinkable. Yet we find men so ignorant 
they cannot write an article without showing bad gram- 
mar, spelling and faulty composition, who say there is 
no God. Are these men insane ? 

Fancy of astrologers had given names to places and 
objects of the moon long before a telescope had been in- 
vented. The large plains they called seas, the small 
ones marshes, and they imposed titles of lakes, or land- 
scapes, mountains, valleys, gulfs, peninsulas, rivers, etc. 
These names have been retained. Whence we have 
Sea of Plenty, Lake of Dreams, Sea of Serenity, Marsh 
of Frogs, Ocean of Tempest, Death Lake, Sea of Hu- 
mors, Putrefaction Marshes, Peninsula of Reveries. 
Sea of Tranquillity, etc., etc. They called the moun- 
tains, the Alps, Apennines, Carpathians. Famous men 
had imaginary abodes on the moon. On Mt. Aristotle 
was a city supposed to be peopled with peripatetic phi- 
losophers, who dwelled there after death, forever discuss- 
ing syllogisms, propositions, and deepest problems of 
philosophy. In Plato's Circle lived his disciples, who 
spent eternity in study of prototype ideas. Thus they 
made the moon a heaven for deathless souls of our race. 

^Nothing is seen on the moon like the changes taking 
place on earth, whereon a thousand elements contend 
with each other. ISTo tumultuous tempest, no hurricanes, 
no blizzards sweep over the plains, no wind blows, no 



196 THE SKY SEEN FROM THE MOON. 

clouds rise, no storms sweep along, no trains of vapor 
or clouds are seen, no rain or snow fall, for there is 
absolutely no air. The sun rises and sets, lighting up 
the scenery with effulgent glory, brighter than ever sun- 
light reflected from earth's snows of frozen north. The 
shadows are extensively black so in them you can see 
nothing, for no air reflects and diffuses the sunlight. You 
are struck with what is called snow-blindness, but the 
light piercing and blinding you comes not from snow 
but from the brilliant white rocks. Even if you wore 
colored glasses soon you would be blinded with the 
glare. 

Having no air there is no water, no fluid of any kind, 
for liquids can exist only under atmospheric pressure. 
If you put a vessel of water under a vacuum pump, and 
take out all the air, the water boils, soon evaporates and 
dissolves into vapor which fills the place occupied by the 
air. If once the moon had water it long ago disappeared 
to the last drop. Seas, lakes and rivers are only imag- 
inary, the names were given in the times when men did 
not understand science. 

The sky over our heads is blue because of the minute 
particles of matter floating in our atmosphere. But 
from the moon you would see no blue sky. All the sky 
is black seen from the moon. The eyes traverses a depth- 
less immensity like a vault overhead without resting on 
any object. But at all times, day as well as night, you 
would see stars, planets, comets, nebula and the mighty 
Milky Way over your head. The sun marches among 
them with undiminished splendor, without blotting them 
out as he does on earth in day-time. 

All is dark on high, all is silence below; no sound is 
ever heard, no sigh of wind, no rustle of foliage, no 
song of bird, no noise disturbs the everlasting silence. 
Intense repose broods over the solitude. All is death, the 
deep of the grave rests on the moon. There is a world 
which long ago passed from fierce fiery forces through 



THE MOOD'S DESERT DESOLATION. 197 

the vast periods of its activity till all its fires went out 
and now it is a dead world. 

The vast plains of rock broken by fissures stretch out 
before you. The writer has seen the dead dry sandy 
plains of Arizona, the vast silent wastes of Arabia, the 
African Sahara, the dried up vallevs of western America 
from Oregon to near the city of Mexico, but these are not 
as dry and dead as the plains of the moon. The photo- 
graphs taken by the great instruments show the rocks 
stretching out, the mountains rising, and the details are 
brought out as though you were looking down at them 
from a few miles. 

Tall, perpendicular mountains divide its surface, while 
here and there are craters of dead volcanoes with often 
deep saucer depressions many miles across encircling the 
volcanic cones. White rocks leap up like remains or 
ruins of long past volcanic revolutions; deep crevices 
cross and recross the stony plains looking like deep mud 
dried by solar heat after all the water has been evap- 
orated. But these trenches are more than a mile wide 
and miles deep. They resemble in a way the great can- 
yon of the Colorado with its pictured rocks — the might- 
iest trench in our earth in desert lands, 6,000 feet deep. 

One is struck with the immense number of circular 
or craterlike formations all over her surface, found even 
in these places, falsely called " seas." We see them best 
along the borders of the sunlight, where they cast, long, 
deep shadows over the landscape. They are of differ- 
ent size, some being many miles in diameter, while oth- 
ers test the highest powers of the great glass. Kepler 
thought they were built by reasonable beings. But better 
research forced astronomers to abandon this theory. 

The smooth plains being darker, led men to suppose 
they were seas, lakes, bays and fens. They are often 
surrounded by high ranges of mountains, rising almost 
straight up like the wall of a house from the plains. The 
mountains of our earth have been acted on by rains, 
waters and the atmosphere, so the sides fell down. But 



198 HOW LUNAR MOUNTAINS WERE FORMED. 

there being no air or water on the moon, these vast cliffs 
and mountains rise almost perpendicular, so nothing but a 
bird could reach their tops, if they were on earth. 

Bright lines of matter, which better reflect the light, 
branch out from some great volcanoes, extending hun- 
dreds of miles. The surface of the moon cracked while it 
was cooling and this bright material was forced up to 
fill these great chasms. What it is we do not know, for 
as the moon does not shine with its own light, the spec- 
troscope gives us a knowledge only of the materials 
in the sun, whose light the moon throws back to us. 

A planet losing heat passes through different periods. 
The outside cools first and forms a crust. As the inside 
loses its heat it contracts, and the solid crust like a skin 
contracts and throws up ridges which make the moun- 
tains. When the melted matter in the interior becomes 
solid, just under this solid crust of rock it expands, as 
water in freezing, and throws out mountains through 
great cracks in the surface. In this way the mountains 
of the earth and moon were heaved up over the plains. 
But as the moon is much smaller than our earth it has 
not as many mountain ranges. 

The greatest range of lunar mountains is the Apen- 
nines, having 3,000 peaks and stretching along 450 miles. 
Mt. Huyghens is 18,000 ft. high. Another range, the 
Caucasus, has peaks from 14,000 to 11,000 ft. The Alps 
has 700 lofty summits in two lines with a great straight 
valley 80 miles long, between. Isolated peaks are found 
scattered over many regions, the best known, Pico, being 
7,000 ft. high, and 40 miles away is another 4,000 ft. 
The mountains are very steep, most of them could never 
be scaled by a living thing except a bird. Often they 
are like cones rising from the plains, and stand out 
harsh and rugged. They were made of the soft melted 
materials driven up through vents from the interior, and 
cooling built up the mountains as we see volcanoes thus 
formed on earth. 

You ask how we can measure their height? By the 



THE MOUNTAINS OF THE MOON. 199 

shadows they cast across the plains, for this is but a sim- 
ple sum in figures. 

The craters are round, some are high over the sur- 
face of the plains, some are below, all are like walled 
amphitheatres with steps inside and outside where the 
matter fell down while hot. Most of them, especially the 
larger ones, have one or more cones in or near their cen- 
ters. 

When greater powers of the glass are turned on the 
plains, they are seen to be rough and furrowed areas, 
gently undulating here and there, and broken into ridges, 
with now and then cracks or rents miles deep, and 
running for many miles like river beds. Craters of 
extinct volcanoes are scattered all over the plains, flash- 
ing out with varied tint and brightness, for the rocks 
are not all of the same color. One large sea has a green- 
ish tint, others are pale red, and others nearly gray. 

The mountains under the highest powers show a great 
variety. Some are in long ranges, and they have been 
called after famous mountain ranges of earth, some 
stand out as isolated peaks like cathedral spires, throw- 
ing long shadows in the setting sun, but all are without 
order. A fine telescope will reveal 3,000 mountains in 
one of the chains. We look down on them or sideways, 
as you would see a town from a balloon. But as they 
rival the Alps, the Andes, and the Himalayas in height, 
the scenes would be expressively grand if we could stand 
beside them and look up at their towering heights like 
walls of some gigantic and fantastic church towers. 

On the lower side, that is near the southern pole, with 
naked eye you see a bright round spot with white stream- 
ers winding from it. That is Doerfel mountain, 26,691 
feet high over the plain, and the bright bands stretching 
from it are ranges of mountains. Oasatus is 22.800 feet 
Curtius is 21,954 feet and Newton 23,853 feet high. 
But there are many other peaks of almost equal height. 
We must remember these great mountains differ from 
those of earth, for they are all hollow, that is, they are 



200 THE SATJCER-LIKE MOUNTAINS. 

volcanoes, each with a mighty crater in the top often miles 
across and going down deep below the level plain. As 
you travel along the Northern Pacific Railroad you come 
to a great crater 10 miles across, like those of the moon. 
In this crater you find Butte, the city of mines. 
But no mountain or depression of earth shows the exact 
form and depth of those of the moon except on a small 
scale. Some of these depressions which once belched 
forth fire and melted rock are over 300 miles across, 
Ptolemy is 310 and Clavius is 403 miles in diameter. 

Let us take one as a sample of the others. In the 
Sea of Rains, not far from the Caucasus, is Aristillus 
mountain, of which Lecouturier first gave a minute 
description. The crater is 24 miles in diameter. Prom 
the center rise two cones, the higher being 2,962 feet. 
The rim of the surrounding great crater is 10,324 feet 
high. When the sun shines down into the bottom of 
the deep crater, the telescope shows the bottom composed 
of hardened lava and blocks of great rocks like mountains 
heaped together. 

Ranges of basaltic peaks ramify from this mountain 
as a center in five or six lines to the east and south, 
looking like multitudes of steeples and towers of a 
gothic cathedral. Along the railroad from Salt Lake 
City to Colorado on the north you will find a range of 
colored rocks, which on a small scale remind you of these 
ranges of mountains of the moon. Little changes are 
ever seen in the moon, for everything there seems dead, 
silent and motionless-. But a French astronomer, car- 
ried away by what he saw, remarked to a marchioness : 

" Everything is in continual motion, even including 
a certain young lady, who was seen in the moon with a 
telescope about forty years ago. She has considerably 
changed. She had a pretty good face, but her cheeks are 
now sunken, her nose is lengthened, her forehead and 
chin are now prominent to such an extent that all her 
charms have vanished, and I fear for her days." 
" What are you telling me now ? " interrupted the mar- 



THE CAUSE OF THE WHITE STRIPES. 201 

chioness." " This is no jest. Astronomers saw in the 
moon a particular form, which had the aspect of a wo- 
man's head, which came out from hetween the rocks. 
Then came some changes in this region. Some pieces of 
the mountain fell and disclosed three points, which could 
only serve to compose a forehead, a nose and an old wo- 
man's chin." Often we see rocks forming human figures, 
a face and head, and such a figure was seen in the moun- 
tains of the moon which changed because some of the 
rocks fell. This is about the only fall of materials re- 
corded, and such things take place very rarely. During 
a hundred years, every day of which the face of the moon 
has been observed by some one, not another change has 
been seen. 

The bright streaks radiating from some of the vol- 
canoes, especially from Tycho, do not rise above the sur- 
face of the landscape, and as they pass through mountain 
ranges, they were caused by whiter matters thrown up 
through deep cracks or fissures. They look as though 
some giant brush had plashed the surface with a whitish 
pigment, or calcimined in straight lines for more than a 
hundred miles. This white material is found within, 
on, and for a certain distance round craters and moun- 
tains, giving white brilliant effects to these regions, while 
the plains are of grayish darker rock. This is the cause 
of the bright and dark regions of the moon. A small 
crater called Linne, a little more than a mile across, is 
very white; some thought it an active volcano. But 
more careful study showed the true cause of its white- 
ness. 

It is evident that after the crust of the planet cooled, 
the expansion of the materials within as they lost their 
heat burst the crust, and this white matter exuded 
through the cracks. Astronomers took many glass globes 
filed with water, and ceiling them up, placed them in hot 
water. As the water within expanded with the heat, the 
globes burst into long slivers of glass resembling in a 
remarkable way the white streaks on the moon. 



202 A MOON MOUNTAIN DESCRIBED. 

Draper first made a photograph of the moon, and since 
that time the more exact photo has taken the place of the 
old map. Craters to the number of 229 have been 
named, mostly after famous astronomers. We will de- 
scribe some of the most prominent. 

Below the middle and to your right shines out a bright 
spot even seen by the naked eye, having below and to the 
west a long range of mountains called the Apennines. 
This is Copernicus, 46 miles in diameter, the grandest 
and most striking object of the lunar surface. It is a vast 
extinct volcano, with ramparts rising 12,000 feet above 
the level of the surrounding plain, having nearly in the 
center of the depression some great cones, three of which 
rise to the height of 2,400 feet. 

The round ramparts are divided by concentric ridges, 
terraced, showing how the hot melted rock fell in and 
out, crushed by the overloaded masses of the high sum- 
mits. Ranges of mountains radiate away from this 
giant volcano, especially north and south. Impressive 
and sublime is the grandeur of this scene, which tran- 
scends every mountain scenery of earth. Only by looking 
at it through a telescope can the mind gain any idea of 
the awful forces which once sported here. We can give 
but a faint description to one who has not seen it. But 
it is only one of hundreds of such objects, showing how 
vast and wonderful in might were the forces which made 
the worlds. 

Copernicus was caused by a tremendous discharge of 
melted rock, lava, scoria and fire ages ago, when our satel- 
lite was cooling. For more than 100 miles on all sides 
are smaller craters, their round edges rising over the 
plain with deep cracks, a mile or more wide, extending 
down into the rocks perhaps for miles ; but we cannot see 
the bottom of the crags in the inky black shadows. 
Bright streaks radiate on every side, showing that the 
bright, white melted matter of the interior oozed out and 
filled the chasms. They radiate and cross, and seem to 
have been formed by contraction in cooling, as ice cracks 



THE WHITE SPOT SEEX WITH NAKED EYE. 203 

with intense cold after it has formed on water of our 
lakes. All around and mingling with the smaller craters 
are cones as high, round steep hills, showing where the 
melted matter was thrown up and became solid moun- 
tains, the sides steep almost as the side of a building, 
ending sometimes in a round hole in the top. 

The bright spot you see with the naked eye with 
streaks radiating out from it as a center, and which looks 
like a very white round spot — the most striking thing on 
the moon, is Tycho, called after the famous astronomer. 
The surface of the moon cracked from this spot, and the 
white matter within came out filling the mighty canyons, 
which extend from it almost half across the surface of 
the planet. Some are 1,000 miles long. 

Tycho is 54 miles across, and more than 16,000 feet 
deep. From the center of the crater rises a cone 5,000 
feet high. The round ridges of concentric formations, 
both on the inside and outside, like gigantic steps or ter- 
races, show how the rocks, half -melted, fell down causing 
landslides of which we have nothing on earth to compare 
to them. 

On every side for many miles round Tycho are smaller 
craters with round edges, some half the size of the giant 
cup-like depressions in their midst. Wild is the desola- 
tion of tremendous crater mountains and ridges showing 
this region served as the great safety valve when the 
planet was disrupted. The fiery forces and upheavals, 
which took place here were on a most tremendous scale. 
As the sunlight illumines the tops of the round mountain 
ranges inclosing the crators, and steals down into the 
round mighty inclosures, lighting up the scenes, it is a 
most impressive sight. Peak after peak, ridge after 
ridge, cones after cones come out of the black darkness, 
and shine with dazzling brilliancy. You see the white 
glistening rocks on one side of the round mountain sides, 
while the other side is dark as midnight. Your eye 
tires, your mind is stupefied, your imagination is lost at 
the diversity, as you try to look at once at so many things. 



204 COULD A MAN LIVE ON THE MOON. 

But above all you are moved with the utter scene of 
desolation. Nothing is found but bare rocks round 
ranges of mountains inclosing deep areas below the sur- 
face of the plains, which hardly appear, the surfaces are 
all covered with remains of former volcanic activities. 

Herschel in his observatory at Cape of Good Hope 
often saw the moon sink below the sandstone surface 
of Table Mountain, both illumined at the same time 
with sunlight, and he says the moon at such times was 
" scarcely distinguishable from the rock in apparent con- 
tact with it." We see nothing on the moon but rock; 
there is no sand, or soil, for it has no air, and no rains 
or floods ever washed its surface. 

Seen through a telescope it has a yellowish-white color 
among the mountains, but this color is dimmer on the 
plains. The plains, called Mare Humorum, Mare Ser- 
enetatis and Mare Crisium show a somewhat greenish 
tint, but this does not come from vegetation, but from 
the color of the rocks. We have seen lava which recently 
flowed from a volcano of bright green and red, glistening 
like glass before the tints were dimmed by the atmos- 
phere. This is the case with the matter ejected by the 
volcanoes of the moon. We are too far away to see the 
varied tints of these colors as we can with volcanic rocks 
on earth. 

Could a man live on the moon if by any way he could 
go there ? It has absolutely no air, water, vegetation, — ■ 
no life of any kind. Its surface is a vast desert of rock, 
plain and mountain. We will not go into the long and 
careful examinations learned men went through before 
coming to this conclusion. If it had any water at any 
time, the long 700 hours of each month of brilliant 
sunshine would long ago have dried it all up. The old 
astronomers imagined they saw seas on its surface, but 
larger telescopes show them to be nothing but great plains 
of rock. While the sun shines on one side, the heat is 
300 degrees above zero and on the other dark side it is 



THE ZtfOOX THE GUIDE OF SEAMED 205 

200 degrees below zero F. Nothing could live during 
such monthly changes of weather. 

From earliest days the moon has been used as a guide 
by those who go down to sea in ships. England depend- 
ing on its shipping offered a $100,000 prize to the one 
who would make a machine which would keep nearly 
perfect time at sea. John Harrison made the chrono- 
meter and gained the prize. Like our watches, it has a 
heavy balance wheel swinging back and forth free, to 
move like a planet in its orbit, but like all man's works it 
is imperfect, and many chronometers are carried on war 
vessels. "With an instrument they take the position of 
the moon, and in the Nautical Almanac tables they find 
her movements, and a little figuring gives the longitude 
of the ship and its distance from port. Jupiter's satel- 
lites are often used, and observations of other planets and 
stars may be depended on, but the moon is the great guide 
of seamen. 

We look over histories and find eclipses of the moon 
mentioned. We figure back the movements of our satel- 
lite and thus fix the exact dates of these events to the 
very hour and minute. We would know little of the sur- 
face of the sun if the moon did not come between us and 
the king of day. At a total eclipse of the sun, we can 
see the vast fires which rage on the solar surfaces. But 
many superstitions regarding the influence of the moon 
on the weather rose in time long past. But we find 
that its influence on our atmosphere is almost nothing. 

We look on the moon mostly as the " lesser light " to 
shine at night. But it is the greatest health-giving and 
sanitary agent. Rest and stagnation breed disease in 
waters of the earth. But the attraction of the moon for 
these waters causes movements, flows and tides. But 
the moon's attraction for the air has also its part to 
play in winds and atmospheric changes. 

Rivers pour into the oceans millions of tons of de- 
cayed matters, which if left near their mouths would 
fester and fill the air with deadly disease germs. But 



206 THE MOON WORKING ON THE EARTH. 

twice a day the tides sweep these decomposing organic 
matters away out into deep ocean depths, where the salt 
waters kill the germs. If it were not for the tides raised 
by the moon our rivers and harbors, into which the sewers 
of our cities empty, would soon fill with festering prod- 
ucts, rendering navigation impossible, and breeding such 
pestilences that we could not live near the mouth of any 
river. But the tides come in and raise up the waters. 
At Liverpool the tides rise about 30 ft. When the tide 
goes out all this harmful matter is driven out to sea, and 
the next tide brings in the clean ocean waters. Thus 
Providence has foreseen how with the moon's attraction 
to guard our health. 

When vessels want to move from one place to another 
they take advantage of the flow of the tides, and this 
vast mechanical work is done by the moon. This amount 
of work done by the tides in London harbor is estimated 
to amount each year to more than $5,000,000. It is 
nearly as great in New York harbor, with the hundreds 
of miles of its deep-water shores. Let the reader imag- 
ine the amount of work the tides perform in all the 
waterways of the world, the ocean tides, the Gulf Stream, 
etc., and he will see how useful is the moon to man. 

But we have hardly touched the vast storehouse of 
power our satellite exerts on earth. Long ago, before 
man was made, a vast and varied vegetation lived on 
earth. It changed sunlight and heat into growth of 
plants. Then came floods sweeping over the surface of 
our planet. There was a Gulf Stream of tremendous 
size which flowed from South America over the plains 
of the Mississippi Valley where it turned towards the 
east. From these tropical, hot regions, covered with 
a great flora of trees and vegetables, it brought in the 
bosom of its vast flood miles deep of vegetation, and 
landed them along the plains of our country. As the 
waters swept over the Apalachian range, they tumbled 
them into the valleys, then covered them up where now 
they are found as coal. 



HOW TIDES MIGHT BE USED. 207 

But the time will come when the coal will be all used, 
and what will we do then for light, heat, fire and move- 
ment of machinery? Light, heat, and motion are 
but different kinds of movement. We can then use the 
tides along our coasts, and transmit the power to our 
homes and cities. The lift of the water during the tides 
is small, has hardly been used, but the power going to 
waste is stupendous. This can be sent out as electricity 
or compressed air. Thus God has foreseen and provided 
for us a satellite, with its stored up power to be used 
when other means fail on earth. 



SECTION III.— THE WONDERS OF THE EARTH. 



CHAPTER X.— ARE THE STARS INHABITED ? 

From Fontenelle to Proctor many writers held that 
the millions of suns must have planets revolving round 
them, similar to the planets of our solar system. Every 
little while sensational articles are published in news- 
papers and magazines stating discoveries show that 
people live on Mars, or some other heavenly body. 
In the last century men were supposed to live on the 
moon, but the moon was abandoned as unfit for life, 
when better studies of our satellite show she has no air 
or water, is a desert waste of rocky plain and moun- 
tains on which nothing could live. 

But the question is often asked: Have the other 
suns planets? If they have, do plants, animals or 
men like us live there? Do not some other kinds 
of people of a lower or higher order of intelligence 
inhabit these millions of orbs? 

In ' ' Worlds of Space ' ' Mr. Gore considers the 
mass, temperature, rotation, atmosphere and water 
required on an orb that it may support life. He esti- 
mates there are ten millions of yellow suns like ours. 
If one in ten has the right conditions of light, heat, 
etc., to sustain life, there will be a million suns which 
could support life, if they have planets. But all this 
is pure speculation. There are absolutely no proofs, 
not even hints, that any sun except ours has planets. 
The bodies revolving round these suns, are suns them- 
selves hotter, as hot, or cooler than the primary round 
which they gyrate. 

To solve the question regarding living beings on 
208 






NO LIFE ON ORBS OF THE MILKY WAY 209 

stars and planets, we must weigh well four questions 
— their heat, mass, density and atmosphere. The heat 
of our sun makes its light yellow, while the heat of 
the other suns varies so they shine with purple, 
white, blue, green, red or dim lights. These colored 
lights would not support life. On the contrary, living 
beings can live only in the light of a yellow sun. We 
know how the X-rays will burn the flesh, and the 
light of the colored suns would be more harmful. 

The life of our sun has been just long enough to 
sustain life on earth. The duration of the light and 
heat of the sun depends on its mass and the heights 
from which its materials have fallen to it to cause its 
heat. Suns smaller than ours have lost much of their 
light and heat, without which life is impossible on 
any of their planets. For life depends on light, heat, 
water, atmosphere, and on a thousand nicely balanced 
conditions. 

The Milky Way, with its millions of suns thickly 
studded over its whole area, is in a condition of enor- 
mous energy — heat, light and electricity with vast 
forces play within its boundaries, and on its suns. 
New stars there appear, all the time showing that 
collisions of suns take place giving out such changing 
heat and light that they appear and disappear. We 
see them as their light sweeps across the tremendous 
distances which separate them from us — even if that 
light takes 1,800 years to come to us. Iso living 
organism could exist in any region where such forces 
play. For the Milky Way is the theater of extreme 
activity and motion. It is crowded with matter under 
continual change, and is unstable for any length of 
time. If life were created on any planet revolving 
round one of the suns there, it could not exist. 

The only place in the heavens where life could exist 
is within the center or hub of the Milky Way, far 
removed from the indescribable changes, from the 
tremendous upheavals of light, and heat, and collis- 
ions in that great belt of hundreds of millions of 



210 NO LIFE ON OTHER SUNS 

suns. Within this Milky Way, about in its center, is 
a cluster of stars formed of a few thousand suns of 
which oar sun is one. Here matter is more or less 
fixed and stable. The orbs within this space have 
passed through their vast cycles of changes; they 
revolve round their primaries without collisions, and 
they do not come near enough to each other to cause 
ruptures of their masses. Professor Newcomb with 
others concludes that the stars of this inner solar 
cluster have much smaller masses than our sun in pro- 
portion to the light they give, and that the brighter 
stars are much less dense than the sun. Therefore 
they cannot continue to give out light and heat for as 
long a period as our sun. For these reasons suns 
similar to ours are very limited in number. 

Even regarding suns just like ours, only for a part 
of their duration could they give the right amount of 
light and heat to support living organisms on their 
planets. For, while they were forming by matters 
falling on to their surface, they would give out a light 
and heat which would kill all living beings. They 
change their light from time to time — most of them 
are variable stars and we see through the telescope 
these catastrophic outbursts when larger masses than 
usual are drawn to them. All these stars of change- 
able light must be left out as life-sustaining suns. The 
suns then which may have revolving planets on which 
life could exist are very limited. For only after a 
sun has received nearly all the matter which will fall 
into it — that is, has attained its maximum and begins 
to cool — can it give the gentle, unchanged, sustained 
and continued light and heat required for life. 

But when we examine more closely these few yellow 
stars which resemble our sun, we find nearly all are 
double. The most powerful telescope shows them as 
single shining bodies. But the spectroscope tells us 
that they are double, triple, and sometimes there are 
four or many stars — all revolving round each other. 
It is evident that these have no planets, for they would 



THIS WORLD ALONE HAS LIFE 211 

smash against the other bodies. Even if they had, the 
light and heat would be too great for life, or the planet 
would have to be so far away as to receive too little 
light and heat for living things. There are so many 
of the double stars, and new ones are being found every 
year, that Professor Campbell of the Lick Observatory 
states, that as our instruments are improved, these dis- 
coveries will go on " till the star that is not a spectro- 
scopic binary, will prove to be the rare exception." 
This is the opinion also of other eminent astronomers. 
It is certain that life could not exist on any of the 
suns which give out intense light and heat, for they are 
a thousand times hotter than melted iron. The tides 
on a planet near them would be enormous, and of great 
irregularity because of the attraction of two or more 
suns around which it revolved. A vast number of stars 
therefore must be put aside as the residence of living 
beings. As science advanced, one star after another 
was found unfit to sustain life, even if we were sure 
any of them had planets. This leaves our sun and two 
or three other suns like him fit to sustain life on their 
planets. 

But even regarding these few suns, we do not know 
that they have any planets. Even if they have, we 
cannot say that these orbs may be just right, just near 
enough, too near, too far away, or that they have land, 
and water, and atmosphere, and the thousand condi- 
tions required for life. All is guesswork and wild 
theory. When the matter is all sifted, it will be found 
that of all the hundreds of millions of suns, ours alone 
was made with the conditions of mass, age, materials, 
light, heat and electricity, balanced just right to sus- 
tain the living organisms of earth. When we examine 
the sun's planets, of which our earth is one, we find 
that this world alone has all the wonderfully created 
and developed conditions for the support of life. 

In making stars, suns and planets, therefore, Wis- 
dom looked far ahead, created the right amount of 
matter, in the right place, and gave it laws to direct 



212 WHY LIFE IS CONFINED TO EARTH 

it while condensing into this world, into these planets, 
and into the sun. In the spaces within the solar system 
He made the gases — oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, car- 
bon, the light aluminum, the heavy iron, the chlorides 
and many other minerals. These condensed, made this 
little world among the many million orbs with all its 
/aried materials. He watched it forming of dust, gases 
and vapors, guarded it while these condensed from 
vapors into liquids, and at last became solids. He 
upheld its laws. A thousand changes might have 
happened which would upset the plans. But at last 
the time came when all was ready, then its seas swarmed 
with life, its surface was covered with plants, its hills 
and plains supported animals. When all was ready, 
he said : ' < Let us make man to our own image and 
likeness," and man appeared on earth alone of all the 
heavenly orbs. A man weighing 140 pounds on the 
earth would weigh 23 on the moon, 53 on Mars, 371 
on Jupiter, 123 on Neptune and on the sun nearly 
4,000 pounds. 

The way earth's poles are inclined in relation to 
our planet's path round the sun, which causes the 
variations of the seasons, is the most favorable for liv- 
ing beings, and any other inclination of her axis would 
soon kill them. The seasons, as well as day and night, 
are required for the life and development of plants, 
which thrive in summer and sleep in winter. Trees 
and plants which shed their leaves in the fall and bud 
in spring, will not live when transplanted to regions 
under the equator, nor can we get plants taken from 
hot climates to grow in oar temperate zones. Few 
animals will live if taken from the regions where they 
belong. The domestic animals, made for man's 
benefit, flourish in different climates better than wild 
animals, for they were made to be man's dumb servants, 
therefore they can better stand a change of climate. 
The dog, tamest animal which lives, follows man from 
the equator even to the far north, almost to the poles. 
We do not think the dog was ever wild, like wolf or 



LIFE REQUIRES DAT AND NIGHT 213 

fox, to which species he is related, that man tamed him. 
He was from the beginning man's most faithful friend 
— tame as he is now, made for that reason to stand all 
climates, for taming him would not change his nature. 

For short terms men have endured 97 deg. F. below 
zero and 154 above. Dogs can stand this cold, but it 
is doubtful if they could endure this heat, because they 
have no sweat pores, for they perspire only through 
the mucous membrane covering mouth and air passages. 
A man's system can stand what would kill any animal, 
for he is the most perfect animal. 

The whirling world makes day and night so neces- 
sary for the nobler animals which demand rest and 
sleep. Their very natures require sleep each 24 hours. 
Rhythmic movements of varied kind, degree and length, 
almost like music's harmony, take their turn, all agree- 
ing with day and night the rotating earth produces. 
We work with mind or muscle; activity and rest, 
growth, decay, nutrition and waste, go always on. 
We cannot stay at the same thing always, a diversity 
of work pleases best. We cannot work all the time 
like angels ; we tire, we weary towards night, darkness 
comes, when relieved of light's stimulations we sink to 
sleep in that period of repose our Creator gave when 
he made the world go round once a day to agree with 
our demands for rest, and not like revolutions of other 
planets. 

A million things we will not stop to tell, sing songs 
silent yet eloquent in harmonies built on mathematics 
— they are ever chanting, all nature proclaims the 
glories of the Almighty who built the universe as a 
weak image of Him unseen. We are so ignorant of 
science, so stupid, so buried in material things, so busy 
with life's labors, so occupied getting a living, so 
hungry for money, we do not read the lessons the 
Eternal gives us day by day in His great book of 
nature. 

How blest is balmy sleep ! We do not sleep enough, 
nothing can take its place, without it would come 



214 WANT OF SLEEP KILLED TWO WOMEN 

awful sufferings — insanity about the 8th day, and death 
the 10th. If we do not sleep regularly each 24 hours 
the world turns on its axis we cannot do good work. 
No one ever sleeps too much. For he is in sleep ruled 
by nature's laws alone, then he does not think and 
nature makes no mistakes. It is a mistake to waken 
one from sleep without a cause. No one in good health 
will ever oversleep. Some get along with more, some 
with less, but the average for literary people seems to 
be from 9 to 10 hours, yet many go through life with 
8 hours sleep. 

You cannot skip a period of 24 hours every second 
day or interrupt the order of man's nature the Creator 
planned. 

Few understand the necessity of sleep or what weak- 
ness and troubles and anxieties are caused by want of 
rest. A woman of the writer's congregation, left a 
widow, slept only every second night. She worked 
continually for 36 hours against the writer's vehement 
protests, saying she was very strong and had to support 
her children. She died within six months. Her 
sister took her place, laboring the same way, and lived 
five months. 

In daytime, light, as a stimulant, rouses us to labor, 
and darkness soothes us to rest in nature's " sweet re- 
storer, balmy sleep. ' ' When we sit or lie our muscles 
rest. But while awake we always think, drawing from 
the nervous system images or forms from which the 
mind gets its ideas. But when we sleep the nervous 
system is at rest. We can labor or think only for a 
certain period, and good health and work of mind or 
muscle require rest every 24 hours, at least ; for other- 
wise we cannot do good work. The earth revolves on 
its axis every 24 hours, causing day in which to work 
and night in which to sleep. Who caused the world 
to revolve in this time which agrees with the periods 
of work and rest? Did this happen by chance? 

Plants and animals also demand these periods of 
work and rest in places where they are regular, as under 



THE CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR LIFE 215 

and near the equator. These plants or animals will 
not grow or flourish except under these conditions of 
day and night. In the cold arctic regions, where days 
and nights are sometimes six months long, these plants 
and animals of warmer climes cannot live. But the 
plants which live there grow with great activity during 
the long six months. 

Five conditions are required for organisms — plants, 
animals, and men, and these are found on no star or 
planet except our earth. 1. A regular continued heat- 
supply, within a limited range of temperature. 2. A 
sufficient supply of heat and light of a sun. 3. Water 
in great abundance, and distributed everywhere. 4. A 
dense atmosphere formed of gases present in suitable 
proportions. 5. Alternating day and night. If any 
of these conditions are absent all organisms would die. 

Creatures can live only in a temperature between 
freezing water, 32° F. and 104° F. For nitrogen and 
its compounds between these temperatures only, have 
pecularities essential to life — extreme sensitive mobility, 
facility of chemical change exerted in tearing down 
and building up the living organisms. Water, which 
enters so largely into all living organisms, at the freez- 
ing point becomes solid ice and then the functions of 
life are interrupted. When a member is frozen it dies, 
has to be amputated, or its dead materials would be 
taken up into the circulation by the blood and poison 
the organism. 

When the weather is very warm, man, animal, and 
plant suffer, and if the heat rises too high they die. 
But God has provided against injury. The skin opens 
its pores and bathes the members with water mixed 
with worn-out portions of the system. This water as 
perspiration evaporates rapidly in the heat. As water 
turns to vapor it requires heat and absorbs the heat 
of the body, thus cooling the system down below the 
danger point. It is wonderful how the organism 
knows how to cool itself this way, that it would make 
use of this cooling process of evaporation ages before. 



216 THE TERRIBLE EFFECT OF DRINK 

man discovered it in the study of heat. We might 
cite the wonderful ways animals sweat, but we will cite 
only the case of the dog. He has no sweat pores, 
and by instinct he sticks out his tongue and pants, for 
he perspires through his epithelium, covering mouth, 
tongue and air passages. 

A very small increase or decrease of temperature 
would destroy all life on earth. For albumen found 
almost in a pure state in the white of eggs, one of the 
proteids composes the greater part of the animal and 
plant organism. It becomes hard and white by heat at 
about 160° F. You see that in the cooked egg, a heat 
of this degree would cook solid all the albumen of 
every living organism on earth and kill every plant, 
animal, and man. Alcohol also cooks this albumen. 
When a man drinks liquor the alcohol coagulates his 
nerves, so he cannot reason rightly. He becomes first 
roused to renewed activity, feels warm, but the feeling 
is a deception. Men who go to the far north where 
they endure extreme cold never drink, for that would 
weaken the system, numb the nerves so they would 
not be able to withstand the cold, and they could not 
carry on their work. When men drink deeply and for 
a long time, their nerves are so profoundly disturbed 
they are subject to delusions, blame others for all kinds 
of imaginary injuries, and at last they think they see 
< < snakes, ' ' etc. Liquors are slow but deadly poisons — 
the scourge of modern days and carry off more victims 
than all wars, famines and pestilences. 

These extreme sensibilities of life to changes of heat 
and cold are caused by the instability of protoplasm, 
the foundation of all organisms, and of the proteids 
entering into their formation. For generation, growth 
and nutrition depend on the continued motion of fluids, 
combinations and decompositions going on regularly, 
which heat or cold of extreme degrees stop. Nearly 
all plants and animals must have a certain and con- 
tinued heat to live. Man, alone made for the wide 
world, is the only exception, for he can live in tern- 






ANIMALS COULD NOT LIVE WITHOUT PLANTS 217 

peratures which would kill most plants and animals. 
To him alone was said, " Fill the earth, and subdue it, 
and rule over the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of 
the air, and the beasts and the whole earth. ? ' Gen. i. 26. 
Man alone of all animals can live in the hottest as well 
as coldest climates all his life. 

Extreme heat and cold do not always last. Seasons 
come and go, the climate changes from day to day, and 
month to month. No land animal passes his whole 
life where the temperature remains above freezing. 
'No part of our earth is always in midnight darkness 
for then ordinary plants would not grow because 
they cannot without light. Without plants animals 
would have nothing to eat, because no animal can 
make protoplasm out of the minerals, they must get it 
from the plants. The plant alone can take the carbon 
from the air, seize with it other elementary materials, 
and with it build up the wonderful compounds required 
in its system, and which it furnishes the animal in 
the shape of food. All this the plant does with the 
aid of sunlight, and with special rays of this light. 
Only the light of a yellow sun furnishes these rays 
used in growth. If our sun had any other color, all 
life would soon disappear from our planet. We doubt 
if any of the millions of suns as the spectroscope shows 
their light colored would sustain life on earth if one 
were transported to take the place of our sun. Is 
there not a wonderful provision here. Who made our 
sun as we find it, and then made life on our earth to 
live in its light, and not in the light of any other of 
the millions of suns? 

Suppose our sun was larger, that it had the size of 
the thousands of suns much larger — if it was as large 
as Arcturus our earth would be burned, exposed to a 
fiery surface. All the materials of the world would 
be in a state of metallic vapor because of the tremen- 
dous heat. Let us imagine that our sun was twice as 
large as it is, every rock and mountain, even the solid 
crust of earth would almost melt with the heat. 



218 HOW THE BODY FIGHTS DISEASE 

Nothing living could exist on our planet. If the sun 
was half its size, eternal frost would reign on earth. 
Again, we will suppose the sun not as hot or hotter 
than it is, then nothing could live. Our sun gives out 
just that light and heat required for things to live in, 
just the proportion wanted for life functions. If we 
apply the rules of probabilities to these questions, we 
are lost in figures showing design in nature, and math- 
ematics prove that a Cause having reason arranged all 
these things, that life might exist on earth. 

A man will survive sickness or wounds which would 
kill any animal, because he has the most highly devel- 
oped organism. A healthy man with sufficient food 
keeps his temperature within one or two degrees, even 
when the heat is 170 deg. above or 75 deg. below zero. 
Heat which kills every organism will not destroy 
human life. Nature knows this. When microscopic 
plants or animals enter the human body they grow 
rapidly, the heat increases to kill them, and we say he 
has a fever. When the bacillus coma, the cause of 
consumption, or phthisis pulminaris gets into the lungs 
or any part of the body, the temperature rises to kill 
them. That is the reason people afflicted with this 
dread disease are so hot. But if the temperature rises 
to 104° F. there is danger, while if it rises to 106° and 
continues at that figure for a long time the heat causes 
such changes in the body that death follows. Who 
made the organism with instinct to know that heat 
kills these invading and rapidly propagating micro- 
scopic organisms? 

But that is not all. In the blood float millions of 
little white round bodies called the white corpuscles of 
the blood. These attack, surround and destroy any 
disease germ they find in the blood. They are called 
leucocytes, " white devourers. " But they will not eat 
up these invading hosts which cause fevers and death 
unless they have plenty of a sauce, a fluid of the blood, 
called opsonin, ' 4 f east-preparer. ' ' Without going 
deeper into the matter, we will say these are the rea- 



WHERE THE WRITER SUFFERED FROM HEAT 219 

sons strong healthy people survive diseases and fevers 
which kill weak persons. 

Consider the even temperature of our earth, and 
then think of the awful heat of the fixed stars, as well 
as the frozen moon, and great changes of light and 
heat of the planets. Seeds will germinate in dry heat 
only at a certain point, but will not grow at a tempera- 
ture above 150° F. or at 4° or 5° above zero. Within 
these degrees all life flourishes on our planet and above 
or below them nothing could live. Who fixed the 
temperature of our earth between these two extremes, 
but that infinite Mind who shaped things from the 
beginning? 

The normal heat of the human body is about 9S° F., 
and this is maintained within one or two degrees 
though the heat of the atmosphere may be more than 
50° F. below the freezing point, or 130° F. above. 
Under the tropics, the mercury seldom rises to more 
than 96° F. in the shade, but it rises to 110° to 115°, in 
the Sahara, and 120° F. in Australia and parts of 
India. The writer suffered most from the heat in the 
Sacramento Yalley in California, along the vast 
deserts of the awful Sahara in Africa, and in the 
deserts of Arabia. The heat of the deep valley of the 
Dead Sea, 1,300 feet below sea level is awful during 
summer months. The writer passed a night in Jericho 
in April, the heat was so great, the whole bed be- 
came as it were saturated with perspiration, which 
soaked down through the two mattresses and dripped 
on the floor. While for the most part animals can live 
only in certain parts of the world because of extremes 
of heat and cold as well as for want of food, man, 
made to fill the whole earth, can stand extremes which 
would kill most animals. Who will say Wisdom in- 
finitely wise and powerful did not tilt over the earth 
so it hangs at 23.5°, as it swings round the sun causing 
winter, summer, and the seasons each year? 

Who will hold that no Cause modified heat and cold 
so men might live on nearly all parts of its surface ? 



220 WONDERFUL BALANCES PROVE GOD 

The materials of the planets were formed in about 
the same places in the universe, but the greater mass 
of the earth held all the air when the worlds were 
made. Dr. Johnstone Story figured out that the 
moon cannot hold even carbon disulphide or carbonic 
gas, both being heavier than air. As its mass is only- 
one eightieth that of the earth, no oxygen, nitrogen, 
hydrogen or water could remain on the moon. "Was 
it an accident then that our earth has the right size 
and mass, just enough to hold in its attraction these 
gases which uniting make air and water ? 

Gases in larger or smaller quantities float between 
the stars, we see some of these bodies as comets. 
They may pass near the moon to condense into liquids 
on its surface, but the heat of the sun is so fierce there 
on the moon's illuminated surface they would soon 
become gases and escape. What would happen if a 
great body of these gases met the earth in its flight 
through space? If great quantities of hydrogen and 
oxygen fell on earth they would unite in an awful 
explosion as water in our higher atmosphere, and fall 
as mighty floods drowning our world. The ancient 
Babylonians have a tradition that in this way the 
deluge came in days of ISToe. 

A planet a quarter the mass of earth would retain 
water in a state of water vapor, steam, which falls as 
rain to sustain life. But such a little world could not 
hold by its attraction the other gases required for liv- 
ing beings. For these reasons no life can exist on the 
small moons of the great planets, nor on the asteroids. 
A planet must be about the size of our earth to have 
inhabitants. Hydrogen is produced in small quanti- 
ties by volcanoes and decaying vegetation, but is hardly 
ever found free in our air. It is so light it is often 
used in balloons, but the general idea is that it escapes 
from earth's high regions into interstellar spaces. 
With oxygen it forms all the water on earth; the 
amount is vast, yet if a tenth more hydrogen were 
created, nearly all the land surface would be covered 



HOW NATURE WAS ADJUSTED 221 

with water. What an adjustment was made at crea- 
tion so there is just enough water to fill the oceans so 
full, and leave enough land for the development of life. 
Do you think this was caused by chance or an 
accident? 

These adjustments and balances strike us on every 
side. Here we live on a planet one of the latest 
formed in the tremendous eons of ages of the heavenly 
bodies, a world unique in the solar system. It has 
enormously deep oceans filled with salt water. These 
ocean depressions are placed with regard to the 
equator just right for ocean circulation to distribute 
heat. Just enough oxygen, hydrogen and nitrogen 
were made to fill these oceans, and make the air a 
hundred miles high. A thousand combinations of 
materials and gases, and fluids are ruled by laws which 
began to regulate things millions and billions of years 
before life appeared, and these work on, all are so 
wonderfully poised, that if the slightest change took 
place all life would cease. Who says these things 
were brought about by accidents? 

The mass of the earth is just right to bring about 
these conditions favorable for life. If our earth were 
a little larger, or denser, no life would be possible. If 
in place of being about 8,000 it were 9,500 miles in 
diameter, a difference not much when compared to 
larger planets, it would be two thirds greater in bulk, 
have a greater size and density, all things would be 
twice as heavy, and it would have retained about twice 
as much air and water. No hydrogen would be re- 
tained, but the surface of the earth would be one half 
greater, and the whole earth would be covered with 
water miles deep. Did an accident regulate its mass 
and size? 

If we look at the other planets, we see the relations 
of size and mass to conditions of life. The smaller 
planets, as Mercury and Mars, have not enough mass 
and gravity to retain enough water in a state of vapor, 
without which life cannot exist on them. For water 



222 SCIENCE SAYS ONLY THIS WORLD INHABITED 

vapor to cause rain must be diffused through the air as 
on earth. The larger planets have such small densities 
compared to their mass, there is no solid rock or soil 
on them. Saturn, Jupiter, Neptune and Uranus are 
so hot that all materials of which they are composed 
are in a melted or vapor state. You might as well 
look for living organisms in a furnace of melted iron 
as on them. 

Light and heat, as well as water, are conditions re- 
quired for life development, and these must be found 
in most regular and nice conditions. Slight changes 
one way or another the world could not be inhabited. 

The conclusion forced on any one who examines 
these questions is, that of all the millions of suns and 
planets this world alone has the conditions beautifully 
balanced by a Creator infinitely wise to support life. 
This world alone is inhabited. There is only one 
human race. All these stories of life and inhabitants 
on other heavenly bodies are simply the products of 
the imagination, and rest on no solid scientific princi- 
ples or discoveries. 

Except a few dwarf plants and peculiar beasts made 
to survive cold in polar regions, life in the universe is 
confined to a belt round the earth rising from her sur- 
face at the arctic circle, getting higher and higher, till 
over New York it is 12,000 feet, high over the equator 
about 20,000 feet, continuing south it gets lower and 
lower till it strikes the earth's surface at the antarctic 
circle. Our little world, carrying its precious freight 
of living organisms, sweeps its yearly path measuring 
560,000,000 miles, at the rate of 19 miles a second, 
round the sun, 332,000 times greater, at the same 
time whirling at the equator from west to east 1,440 
feet a second ; these two rapid movements the Creator 
gave it, we never feel, for we float in ether filling 
star spaces. 



CHAPTER XI.— THE BEGINNINGS OF THE SCIENCE OF 
THE STARS. 

Science began in Babylonia, where the 72 families 
born of Noe's grandsons lived before they separated 
to found the nations of antiquity. Ham's grandson 
Mmrod: " Let us rebell," or " the Bebel," a 
powerful chief, founder of the Babylonian empire, 
taught this world is God appearing to us, the natural 
forces are gods, the sky a crystal sphere revolves each 
day carrying the stars round the earth, their fathers, 
the patriarchs, after death went to heaven and became 
the planets and thus founded pantheism, " all is God," 
which developed into paganism with its numerous gods. 
In tradition, song and story, Nimrod came down as 
Hercules, Jupiter, Thor — chief of the gods. 

To escape another flood, at Borsippa he induced 
them to build a tower to reach the solid crystal sphere up 
in the sky, where God lives, whom they named II, the 
" Mighty One," and Hebrews named El. They called 
the tower B— Bab-Il "Gate of the Mighty One." 
Twelve miles away, on the banks of the Euphrates, 
they founded their capital — Babylon " City of the Gate 
of the Mighty One. ' ' Later Hebrews called the tower 
Babel, " Confusion," for there the original language of 
mankind was changed. 

Supposing the horizon upheld the solid crystal sky, 
later they named the rock of Gibraltar and the Atlas 
mountains the "Pillars of Hercules," and the fabled 
Atlas upholding the world. In Egypt they supposed 
four mountains sustained the sky, when they were 
shaken rain fell, and many peculiar scientific errors 
came down among the nations. _ - 

Science and religion went hand in haud, the Baby- 
lonian priests being the first scientists. In every 

223 



224: WHY THEY BTTILT PYRAMIDS 

Babylonian city rose a vast pyramid with seven great 
steps, each smaller than the lower, the sides colored 
to represent the seven planets. A step, typical of the 
sun, was covered with gold plates, another, emblematic 
of the moon, was of silver, a red one represented Mars, 
etc. The temple shrine crowned the top, where the 
priest- astronomers observed and worshiped the stars. 

Down from creation came legends that the original 
man came from God, and the king was the heir of a 
part of Adam's authority. When the tribes spread 
from Babylonia to colonize the nations, they brought 
with them the idea that the king descended from the 
Almighty. 

Only a king could build a pyramid, in which he and 
members of his family were buried. For this reason 
pyramids are found along the Mle Valley, in parts of 
America and in other countries. These vast buildings 
are found in great numbers in Egypt. The best known 
are the three across the Mle opposite Cairo. Few know 
the reason they were built. There were the three cem- 
eteries of kings and nobles of Memphis, about 12 miles 
to the south. We wandered through the ruins of this 
city mostly built of sun-dried bricks, the little houses 
with roofs fallen in, w T alls still stand, since the time 
the Persians ruined the city 3,000 years before Christ. 

The kings of the 4th dynasty built these pyramids 
in the three adjoining cemeteries. The members of the 
royal family were buried, not in the low stone monu- 
ments as were the nobles, but in a monument like those 
pyramids of Babylonia which served as observatories. 
The largest, that of Cheops, standing out from the brow 
of the hills, is the greatest monument man ever built to 
the soul's immortality. The Moslems took away 20 
feet of the stones on each side to build Cairo, but still 
it stands 480 ft. high, a vast pile with stone steps. 
We went u|y about 150 ft. then down the passage and 
up into the Kings' Chamber. We climbed to the top 
and surveyed the scene of death — the Sahara desert 
stretching far out to the west with the Nile below to 



ASTK0N0MY AMONG THE ANCIENTS 225 

the east. The observatory, at the top, long ago disap- 
peared. They placed the mighty structure, with sides 
at the exact points of the compass. 

Professor Smyth, the Scottish royal astronomer, 
wrote a book on the pyramid of Cheops, to prove the 
Egyptians had a remarkable knowledge of astronomy. 
He holds it was built as an observatory, that it contains 
all the elements of earth and star measurements, that 
it was built when the fixed star A. Dragon in its upper 
course was visible both day and night from the bottom 
of the long passage, inclined at 45 degrees, going down 
as a blind to the rock chamber under the foundations 
of the pyramid to mislead any one seeking the body of 
the dead Pharaoh embalmed and laid to rest in the 
stone coffin in the massive " King's Chamber " high up, 
approached by a magnificent marble carved passage, also 
at 45 degrees in the middle of the massive structure. 

This would show this pyramid was built in the year 
2,170 before Christ, when the Pleiades began at the 
point of right ascension in the great round of the circle 
of the equinoxes which takes 25,868 years. Smyth's 
book makes very interesting reading. But it seems 
improbable the ancients had such an exact knowl- 
edge of the sun's distance, the earth's size and many 
other discoveries of our day found only after most 
careful and deep figuring in the higher mathematics, 
which were only discovered in our time. 

The Chinese emperor Chwen-hio adopted as an epoch 
from which to reckon dates the conjunction of Mercury, 
Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, which took place 2,449 
B. C. But it is shown that the instruments now used 
in China were introduced by the missionaries. In very 
early times they could foretell an eclipse, for we read 
that the emperor Chow-kang in 2,169 executed his 
astronomers Ho and Hi for not foretelling an eclipse. 

The study of the stars fascinated all races in their in- 
fancy. Many Egyptian temples built between 2,200 
and 1,500 B. C, have their long axes so placed the 
longest day of the year the light of the sun shone at 



226 THE PLAN OF AN EGYPTIAN TEMPLE 

his rising or setting through the long line of narrow 
doorways, to light the dim holy of holies, at the far- 
thest end of the sacred fane. Temples were built so 
the sun, moon or a particular star shone into the sanc- 
tuary each time the heavenly body passed across the 
meridian of the temple. Egypt is a gift of the Nile, 
which flows through a deep valley of the Sahara sands. 
Without the river water nothing would grow. The 
revolutions of the sun they thought regulated the rise 
and fall of Nile waters, therefore it was of national im- 
portance to fix the calendar points of the compass, 
rising and setting of sun, moon and stars, the longest 
and shortest days, for the light and heat of the sun 
made things grow. A tradition came down that God 
made man, they supposed the sun was the Creator, and 
the Pharaoh, " son of the sun," bore part of Adam's 
authority to rule the nation. 

Every Egyptian king being high priest of the nation, 
built, restored or repaired one or more temples, and the 
Ptolemies and Caesars followed the same custom. These 
temples were all built on the same ground plan. A 
sanctuary, or holy of holies, inclosed on three sides by 
smaller rooms, communicated with a corridor on the 
fourth side facing the axis of the building. Then came 
an inner court, the hypostyle, ' < with roof supported 
by many columns." This inner court was sometimes 
separated from the sanctuary by a pylon door, or screen 
with gate towers, one each side the entrance. An 
outer court with a pylon entrance completed the main 
edifice. The whole building formed a parallelogram 
with side walls which had no windows, and was entered 
only through the gate, which was the main door be- 
tween two great gate towers, rows of obelisks on either 
side led up to this. Except the holy of holies and its 
approaches, the whole temple was open to the sky, for 
it hardly ever rains in Egypt, and the climate is mild 
the whole year. 

The Egyptians were good astronomers and knew the 
years were 365 days. The records^ Moses left in his 



TEMPLES BUILT AS GIGANTIC TELESCOPES 227 

history of the Hebrews leaving Egj^pt, and later dis- 
coveries prove these facts. A ray of light from the 
sun or a star entered and passed along the axis of the 
temple, and marked the instant of the solstices, equal 
days and nights, twice a year to the very second for 
1,000 years. The axis of the temple was like a giant 
telescope, and the beam of light fell on the rear wall 
of the holy of holies, where stood the altar with its 
statue of god or goddess. Egypt's cloudless sky, the 
gloom of the sanctuary, wmich had no windows, and 
only a narrow door, enabled them to use these temples 
as telescopes without lenses. AYe have only to go back 
through the variations of the ecliptic, that is the swing 
of the pole round the polar star in 26,000 years, to find 
the exact time when this ray of light fell in the very 
middle of the temple sanctuary to find w T hen the build- 
ing was built, many temples have been thus dated, and 
the records of Egypt simplified. Some of them were 
built more than 5,000 }^ears ago, others rose at dif- 
ferent times till, in the 5th century A.D., Theodosius 
suppressed them as places of worship when they were 
abandoned, or given to the Christians to serve as 
churches, after which they fell into ruins. 

The writer was struck with the resemblance of the 
Mexican ruins to these of Egypt. The Peruvians built 
their temple on the plan of the Mle dwellers, and wor- 
shiped the sun from whom they supposed their royal 
family descended. At Cusco, the royal temple was 
constructed so the rays of the rising sun passing through 
the great entrance, fell on the farther wall of the sanc- 
tuary, where was a great human-faced gold disk, image 
of their forefather, the sun, to whom gold was the 
sacred metal. Each morning the members of the royal 
family gathered and worshiped the sun's gold image 
as the light of the rising sun illumined the figure. 

Greeks, most learned and scientific men of old, 
called the study of the stars Astronomy, " A Law of the 
Stars," oldest of the sciences. Ptolemy's Almagest 
contains records made at Babylon, giving with remark- 



228 ASTRONOMY AMONG THE GREEKS 

able exactness the positions of the stars, some of the 
observations having been made about 2250 B.C. which 
Callisthenes transmitted to Aristotle. They figured out 
the length of the year to within half a minute, knew 
the precession of the equinoxes, estimated the comets 
as traveling in extended orbits, and foretold their 
appearance. The East Indians, having come from 
Iran, ancient Persia, long before historic times had an 
astronomical system of a more northern latitude than 
India, or Benares, the seat of their chief observatory. 

In 600 before Christ, Thales of Meletus founded the 
Ionian school of astronomy where movements of sun, 
moon and stars were observed, causes of change of 
climate explained, and sailors taught how to use the 
Greater and Lesser Bear constellations in their voyages. 
Pj^thagoras, who belonged to this school, taught the 
sun is the center of the planetary system, and he is 
looked on as one of the founders of our system. His 
pupil, Philolaus, taught " the earth and planets move 
in oblique circles about fire as the sun and moon." 
Cicero states, " Theophrastus narrates the sun, moon 
and stars are at rest, and the earth alone moves, turn- 
ing on its axis, from which the same phenomena are 
produced as if the contrary were the case." Cnidus 
refused to believe these new theories, and upheld the 
old Babylonian teaching, that numerous celestial 
crystal spheres upheld the heavenly orbs. 

Hipparchusof Nicaena 160 B.C. made the first cat- 
alogue of the stars, figured out movements of sun and 
moon, marked out motions of the planets on the theory 
of epicycles, ' ' little circles, ' ' each heavenly body having 
one of these cycles which carried it along, and dis- 
covered plain and spherical trigonometry, Ptolemy 
combined all these together in his system in the Alex- 
andrian school, found the changes in the moon's 
motions called the evection, the seeming changes of 
place of the heavenly bodies caused by the refraction 
of light coming through the atmosphere, and gave a 
catalogue of 1,081 stars. His system, which prevailed 






REMAINS OF DRUID ASTRONOMERS 229 

down to the days of Copernicus, was taught especially 
in the Alexandrian school, till, in the 7th century, the 
Arabians conquered Egypt and burned the famous 
libraiy. The Moslem Arabs, behind the astronomers 
of their day, especially in practical work, handed down 
to their successors the discoveries of those who went 
before. 

In the eleventh century the science of the stars re- 
vived in Europe, but for two centuries no important 
discovery was made till Purbach and Kegiomontanis 
prepared the way for Copernicus ; Waltherus and others 
handed their discoveries doAvn to the three great men, 
Copernicus, Kepler and Newton. 

Latin writers tell stories of strange Hyperboreans, 
' 'the most northerners," "beyond the sources of the 
north winds," ruled by priests called Druids, who 
worshiped sun, moon and stars, believe in immor- 
tality, and imagined earth, sea and air filled with souls 
of the dead they called ' ' fairies ' ' and ' < good people. ' ' 
The north of Europe shows remains of these ancient 
observatories priests built in primitive forms. The 
British Isles have ruins of stone blocks in circles, 
lines and peculiar formation, oft of gigantic size, 
sometimes capped with cyclopean blocks, built as altars 
for sacrifices of Druid culture. We will say a few 
words on the most famous. 

At Stonehenge, England, is a circle of such stones 
100 feet across, at Dartmoor is a row 1,000 feet in 
length, in Ireland are round towers, the south coast of 
Sardinia shows many towers within sight of each other, 
and in France we find remains of these mysterious 
structures. For twenty years, Lockyer studied the 
monuments of Egypt and the west of Europe, where 
priest-astronomers offered prayers and sacrifices to the 
the ' ' hosts of heaven. ' ' He finds them all built to face 
the rising and setting sun and stars, when astronomy and 
religion were strangely mixed with superstition. 

The Druids placed the blocks at Stonehenge to look 
towards the horizon — to face towards the point where 



230 STARS SERVING AS DRUID CLOCKS 

the sun rose, June 20, 1680 B. C. The Druid priests 
followed religious rites rife in Egypt more than 1000 
years before, which had spread along the coasts of 
Africa, Spain and France till they came to the British 
Isles. This old Egyptian year fixed the positions of 
half the ancient temples of Europe, taking the place 
of the old year which began May 6. This old calendar 
still marks May Day. The Irish and Scotch common 
law fixes the quarterly rent on May 1, and that is the 
day for moving. Some Druid places of worship and 
remains are fixed so the sun shone in the temple May 
6th. They used the oak, their sacred tree, and the ash 
they loved for its sightliness to mark the movements 
of the stars, while temples marked the sun, the king of 
heaven. 

Eleven lines of stone, in Cornwall, are set to use 
Arcturus as a clock-star. The earliest is at Tregaseal, 
built in 2330 B. C, five were built between this date 
and 2000, and others in 1990, 1860, 1720, 1560 and 
1420 before Christ. The star Capella was used as 
early as 1320, the Pleiades served as a clock in 1270 
and 1030 B. C. These stars were used to mark time, 
because they rose an hour or two before the sun. 
Near Penzance is a well-preserved circle of stone called 
the < 4 Merry JV[aidens, ' ? sighting objects as points some- 
times a quarter of a mile away where Arcturus rose Aug. 
1650 B. C, and Capella Feb. 2160 B. C. Two more 
lines of stone show where the Pleiades set May 1960, 
and Antares May 1310. Thus, by astronomy, it is 
easy to fix the exact date when these Druid observa- 
tories were built, and how long the temple observato- 
ries remained in use. 

At Hurlers, in Cornwall, are three circles of different 
ages, the southern being the oldest, with stones on the 
distant horizon marking sunrise and sunset in November 
and May, while another to the north is on the horizon 
where Arcturus rose in 2170 B. C. After a hundred 
years, this star did not rise in the old place, because of 
the precession of the equinoxes, and the Druids built 



ASTRONOMY REVOLUTIONIZED 231 

a new circle and ran a new line three degrees to the 
east to hit its rising in 2000 B. C. The star changed 
and they built a third circle in 1900 B. C, putting up 
a stone 1,200 feet away. In 1730 B. C. they located 
the place where Betelgeuse rose by a line nearly east, 
later south of west, the setting point of Antares, and still 
later another line marked the rising of Antares, and 
still later another line marked the rising of Sirius. It 
seems this Druid observatory was used for about five 
centuries. But the precession of the equinoxes changed 
the apparent places of the stars, this the priests could 
not understand, and it played havoc with their astron- 
omy. For a thousand years they seem to have given 
up building observatories as we find none later than 
these dates. The conversion of Ireland by St. Patrick 
and of England by St. Augustine, taught them the 
stars were not gods to be worshiped. 

In 444 B.C., seeing the stars fixed in place, and the 
planets wandering, Empedocles separated the latter 
from the former, and Pythagoras and his disciples de- 
scribed the planets' order from Mercury to Saturn. A 
century passed and Eudoxus, in the days of Plato and 
Aristotle, trying to explain the movements of the 
heavenly bodies round the earth as their center, pro- 
posed the theory of many crystal spheres circling round 
and carrying the stars with them. The moon had 
three spheres, each planet had four, and this theory 
explained by Ptolemy served till Copernicus' time. 
But new movements were later seen, each requiring a 
sphere, till at last sixty spheres, one within another, 
all revolving round the earth as their center, were 
imagined to explain the different motions. But the 
labors of Copernicus, Kepler, Galileo, Tycho Brahe, 
Newton and others gave us discoveries which show on 
what simple laws God founded His material creation. 

The discoveries of these men upset the whole order 
of creation imagined by men wedded to old forms. 
These new teachings were held as impious, for they 
thought they degraded man by removing the earth 3 his 



232 COPERNICUS THE PRIEST ASTRONOMER 

dwelling place, from the center of the universe. They 
thought sun, planets and stars were only for man dwell- 
ing on our earth, round which all heavenly bodies 
circled. Then rose wild theories holding other worlds 
than ours as dwelling-places of men like us. 

Copernicus is the father of the new astronomy, 
which, since the discovery of the telescope, the spec- 
troscope and Kepler's and Newton's laws, brought 
order out of the chaos of the ancients. In Thorn, a 
town of Prussian Poland, in 1473, lived a merchant 
Pole, named Niklas Kopernigk, who married Barbara 
daughter of Lucas Watzelrode of an ancient noble 
family. Elected alderman of his town he had a 
daughter, Barbara, who died abbess or superior of a 
convent of Cistercian nuns. A son was born to him 
Feb. 19, 1473, called after himself, known in history 
as Nicolaus Copernicus — Latin terms of his name. < 

His father having died in 1483, Copernicus was 
placed in the care of his mother's brother, who became 
bishop of Ermeland in 1489, with whom he lived till 
he was 19, when he was sent to the university of 
Krakau noted for its famous professors. There he be- 
came celebrated for mathematics, and knowledge of 
astronomy. He was graduated as Master of Arts in 
1492, the year Columbus discovered America. 

At home Copernicus studied painting and the laws 
of prospective. In 1496 he went to Italy and the 
next }^ear we find him one of the professors of the 
university of Bologna, where Ptolemy's system of 
astronomy teaching crystal spheres, was severely 
criticized. As a friend and helper Maria da Novara 
received him and employed him in his observations of 
the stars while he was testing the truth of the old 
system. The instruments were of simple wooden 
construction, the work lasted for fort}^ years, the ob- 
servations were crude and filled with errors. Here 
Copernicus studied Greek, followed the usual course of 
divinity and was ordained a priest. 

In 1497 he was appointed a canon of the cathedral 



STUDIES OF THE FATHER OF OUR ASTRONOMEY 233 

of Frauenburg, a life position with a salary of $2,250. 
He received a three years' leave of absence from the 
diocese to continue his studies in Italy. Later he 
received an additional salary from the church of 
Breslau. In 1499 his brother Andreas became a 
canon of Frauenburg — both brothers having substitutes 
during their absence, and with their uncle the bishop 
of Erm eland, supplied them with extra money. His 
leave of absence having expired in 1500 he went 
home, and received an extension of his leave of absence 
that he might study medicine to serve as physician to 
the chapter of canons of which he was a member. 
He took up his residence at Ferrara, Italy, went to 
Kome where he was received by the Pope with great 
honors. In 1500, in Rome, he delivered a course of 
lectures on the new astronomy before an audience of 
more than 2,000, persons. He pursued his medical 
studies at Padua, where famous teachers expounded 
Plato's and Aristotle's philosophies from the original 
Greek texts. Copernicus passed through all branches 
of human knowledge then known. He was friend 
and pupil of the greatest teachers of Italy for ten 
years, and became a man of the highest culture. 

When thirty-six years old he returned to his uncle, 
prince bishop of Ermeland, then engaged in political 
broils with invading Tartars on one side, Teutonics on 
the other, as well as difficult church diplomacy and 
cases of canon law. The settling of these the bishop 
confided to Copernicus his nephew. To arrange mat- 
ters he had to make many and long journeys. In 
1512 his uncle died, and Copernicus returned to his 
post as canon of the cathedral, where he lived during 
the rest of his life devoted to study. 

The chapter of canons owned some estates at Allen- 
stein and sent him on two occasions to look after them, 
where he lived, each time about a year, showing what 
confidence they placed in him when he was in his 
thirty -ninth year. He was a progressive man, most 
learned in the sciences, perhaps the greatest genius of 



234 COPERNICUS UPSET THE OLD ASTRONOMY 

his age. He examined all the writings of past ages 
relating to astronomy. The idea that the world was 
the center, that it never moved, that the sun, planets 
and stars revolved round the world in twenty-four 
hours, all held up by a multitude of crystal spheres, 
seemed repugnant to the simplicity of God's works in 
other departments of nature. After years of thought, 
he came to the conclusion that the world turned round 
on its axis each, day, revolves round the sun each year, 
and that the planets follow the same laws. This 
would place the heavenly orbs on simple movements 
given each, explain their rotations, and take away the 
multitude of crystal spheres required in the ancient 
Ptolemaic theory. 

He explained his theory to his brother canons, the 
idea spread to the universities, soon the two theories 
were taught by the same professors and disputes rose 
on all sides. Copernicus was a candidate for the 
vacant see of his uncle, the new bishop persecuted him ; 
like all brilliant men he roused enemies, the advocates 
of the old astronomy were hostile, texts of Holy Writ 
were cited, they thought the old scholastic forms 
were shaken, exaggerations were rife, for man's place 
in nature as center and head were supposed to be taken 
away in the new astronomy. Peter the Lombard thus 
sums up the ancient sciences coming down from 
Greeks, Romans and teachers of antiquity. " Just as 
man is made for the sake of God, that is that he may 
serve him, so the universe is made for the sake of man, 
that it may serve him, therefore man is placed at the 
middle point of the universe, that he may both serve 
and be served." But the new astronomy made man 
an outcast, on the borders of a universe with the sun 
in the center. Man's place in the center tickled his 
pride, satisfied their interpretation of Scripture, and 
old traditions coming down from the origin of our 
race. They did not then know what the discoveries 
have since shown, that the earth, sun and planets 
are in almost the very center of the heavenly orbs 



A GREAT MAN 5 S SORROWS 235 

within the Milky TVay. It took all these years of 
study and observation down to our day to show that 
in this respect both the old and the new astronomy 
are true. Man is in the center of the universe which 
was made for him alone. 

The learned were roused by the new theory, Kepler 
took it up, teachers in all the schools got thinking, 
astronomers went over old observations, books were 
published advocating the new theoiy, and the learned 
divided into two hostile camps with Copernicus as the 
focus. Luther called him an k ' old fool, ' ' trying to up- 
set the Bible, Melancthon declared the whole Bible 
was against him, Calvin quoted psalms against him, 
but the hierarchy of the Church waited to see the end, 
for Eome is very slow to define a religious question. 
In 1512-1517 the Lateran council appointed a com- 
mittee to reform the calendar; in 151-1, they asked 
Copernicus* aid, he replied that the movements of the 
heavenly bodies were not yet fully understood, and the 
chairman of the council committee replied asking him 
to continue his studies. 

His appointment as administrator of the canons' 
property interrupted his studies, he had to plunge into 
Polish and Prussian politics, he fixed up political matters 
as best he could, returned in 1519, the next ye&r was 
made chairman of the chapter of canons of the cathedral, 
after which the Prussian estates asked him to report on 
the debasement of the coinage and its remedies. In 
1523, bishop Fabian died and Copernicus was made 
administrator of the vacant diocese. Wnen Luther's 
doctrines were spreading on all sides, Copernicus said 
that the new doctrines should be combated not by 
force but by public discussions. 

A new bishop, Mauritius Ferber, was elected in 
1523, and he had his nephew G-lese, who had been a 
member of the chapter, appointed his coadjutor. Coper- 
nicus had spent many years of his life taking obser- 
vations of the stars and writing a book to prove his 
theory. The title was " On the Revolutions of the 



236 FRIENDS AND ENEMIES OP COPERNICUS 

Heavenly Orbs," and he confided the manuscript to 
his friend the new coadjutor bishop. This book which 
revolutionized the old astronomy and laid the foundation 
of the new, he dedicated to Pope Paul III. with these 
words : 

i e I dedicate my book to your Holiness, in order that 
learned men and the ignorant may see that I do not 
shrink from judgment and examination. If there be 
by chance, vain babblers, who know nothing of mathe- 
matics, yet assume the right of judging on account of 
some place of Scripture perversely twisted to their 
purpose, and who blame and attack my undertaking, I 
heed them not and look on their judgments as rash 
and contemptible, ' ' etc. 

In 1537, Danatiscus became bishop of Ermeland, 
Copernicus had voted for his friend Glese in the chapter 
called to propose the names for the vacant see, and the 
latter was made bishop of Culm. The Danatiscus 
showed a coldness for the astronomer, ordered him to 
send away his housekeeper, and always remained his 
enemy, although Copernicus made advances of settle- 
ment. He found a warm friend in George Joachim, 
known to us under the name of Eheticus, who went to 
live with him, then in his 66th year, the young man 
being 23. His visit lasted more than two years, and 
he wrote regarding Copernicus, u My preceptor was 
very far from rejecting the opinions of the ancient 
philosophers from a love of novelties, and except from 
weighty reasons and irresistible facts. His years, his 
gravity of character, his excellent learning, his mag- 
nanimity and nobleness of spirit are very far from any 
such a temper." 

Eheticus in this letter writes of the immense labor 
Copernicus went through before he announced his 
theory that he had examined every observation of the 
stars ever made, tested their truthfulness, accepted 
nothing which was not proved and collected an im- 
mense library. He testifies to his purity of life as a 
learned priest. He left his house towards the end of 



DEATH OF A GREAT MAN ; BIRTH OF ANOTHER 237 

1541 carrying with him the manuscript of one of Coper- 
nicus' books on Trigonometry, which he published 
the next year. 

Copernicus sent the manuscript of his great work 
" On the Ee volutions of the Heavenly Orbs " to his 
friend Glese, the bishop of Culm, who sent it to Rhe- 
ticus to be put in order for the press, and it was given 
into the hands of Osiander, a Lutheran minister, inter- 
ested in astronomy. The book in Latin, the language 
of the learned of that time, was printed in the begin- 
ning of 1543, and a copy placed in Copernicus' hands, 
May 24th, the day of his death. It had an introduc- 
tory note by Osiander, which he did not sign, advocat- 
ing the new theory and defending Copernicus. 

The great priest-thinker ranks with the men who 
have thrown a luster on our race. His system of 
astronomy has been accepted by all men the world 
over. It prepared the way for Kepler, Galileo, 
Newton, the Herschels, the Kants, and that long line 
of learned men who have been the glory of their age. 

Copernicus had been dead 21 years when, in 1564, 
the famous Galileo Galilei was born in Pisa, of a noble 
Florentine family. His father, a man of learning and 
author of many treatises on music, at home gave his son 
an education in common branches, the classics, music, 
drawing and painting, after which he attended the 
university of Pisa, where he studied medicine. Draw- 
ing led him into geometry and mathematics. In his 
native Pisa, just at the outskirts of the city, stand 
three famous monuments, the Baptistery, the Leaning 
Tower, and the Cathedral between them, all three 
being of white marble. Not far away is the Campo 
Santo, the cemetery, with many sculptured monuments 
of the dead, but it is not as fine as that of Genoa. 

The Tower, the belfry of the Cathedral, leans out 
so you think it will fall every moment, but as the 
centre of gravity is within the base, there is no danger. 
From the top of this tower, Galileo made his experi- 
ments regarding the laws of falling bodies. A great 



238 Galileo's troubles begin 

bronze lamp hangs before the altar of the Cathedral. 
It had just been lighted when we entered, and was 
swinging back and forth as such lamps do when dis- 
turbed. One day, in 1583, while praying before the 
altar, Galileo noticed the lamp, perhaps this very one 
for it looks very old, swinging back and forth. . The 
regular time of its movements had before induced 
physicians to use a swinging body in counting the 
pulse of patients. Later, Galileo invented the clock 
pendulum based on his observations of the cathedral 
sanctuary lamp. 

He read Archimedes' works, and invented his hydro- 
static balance. The pump on the principle of the 
screw invented by this Greek the writer saw used in 
Egypt, showing how little these people of the Orient 
have changed for thousands of years. Galileo's dis- 
coveries on the center of gravity, which he gave forth 
in a paper he read before the university of Pisa, ob- 
tained for him the professor's chair of mathematics 
when he was aged but twenty-five, but the salary was 
only sixty crowns a year, so he had to take private 
pupils to eke out a support. 

Up to that time, the inductive philosophy of Aris- 
totle prevailed all over the Christian world. Centuries 
had crystallized his great generalizations into every 
school, college and university as the Master who had 
surveyed eve^ landmark of human reason. But with 
him, all was theory ; experiment ; discovery, science 
and nature were hardly mentioned in his philosophy. 
Galileo had gone away from the old theory and revo- 
lutionized the ancients in his experiments. 

If Galileo had confined himself to science, his own. 
proper field, he would have had no trouble. But he 
unwisely entered into the domain of religion, a temp- 
tation which involved many a scientist since his day. 
He tried to support his scientific views by quotations 
from Scripture and the Fathers. His letters were laid 
before the Roman authorities in 1615, but they replied 
that if he confined himself to his system and to science, 



GALILEO MIXED SCIENCE AND RELIGION 239 

and let Holy Writ and the Fathers alone, he would not 
be molested. 

Galileo's case is famous; it has been a handle on 
which some men hang all kinds of attacks. They 
flaunt before us how religion is opposed to science, 
how these old-fashioned clergymen persecuted Galileo 
for claiming that the earth goes round the sun, they 
bring in an imaginary dramatic scene at his condemna- 
tion, and love to tell how the persecuted man ex- 
claimed, " And still she moves." 

What are the real facts? The Bible is a revelation 
to mankind which God gave through inspired seers of 
Israel relating to a Personage, foretold in almost every 
Old Testament page, who was to come restore man- 
kind to innocence lost in Eden, and build an empire of 
religion over all the earth. He is called in the Hebrew 
the Messiah, "the Anointed," a name translated into 
Greek, " Christos." 

The Bible relates to faith and morals, belief and 
practice, right thinking and right living, telling how 
men save their souls. It is mixed with history and 
prophecy, written in an age hard to understand, and 
no translation can give the wonderful beauties of the 
original. It is written in the language of the people 
of that day so they might understand it, and is filled 
with terms and expressions current in these times. It 
is not a book of science but of religion. Galileo tried 
to prove his theories from the Bible. He entered the 
field of religion and made himself liable to be brought 
before the court of religion. They passed on his 
theories inasmuch as they related to religion, told 
him to let religion alone, to keep to science and he 
would not be disturbed. 

Suppose a man attacks the Constitution of the United 
States, induces people to rebel, commits any crime or 
preaches anarchy. He is brought before the court. 
The court hears the case, does not pass on these peculiar 
doctrines, but enjoins the man not to preach such things 
again. He goes out and soon begins again to spread his 



240 THE TWO WORLDS IN HUMAN MINDS 

doctrines. He is brought up before the court, not for 
his doctrines but for contempt of court, which had for- 
bidden him to preach anarchy. The truth or falsity 
of his doctrines have not been passed on, but his dis- 
obedience or contempt of court is before the judges 
ind he is condemned for this alone. He goes out and 
the papers are filled with exaggerated accounts of the 
case, writers mix things up and the tyranny of the 
United States is heralded all over the world. The Gov- 
ernment is against progress, hostile to science, books 
are filled with all kinds of attacks on the members of 
the court and the American people. Europe takes up 
the question, parties here are roused, and all over the 
world are published statements that there is no liberty 
of conscience in this country. This would be a case 
like that of Galileo. 

In human minds two worlds exist, the spiritual and 
the material, thought and the visible, mind and matter ; 
one the object of the intellect, the other the object of 
the five senses. The first is the domain of religion, 
the other the field of science. These two are separate 
fountains of study, both have God as their origin, both 
tell His wonders. These branches of learning are 
ruled by separate laws, they do not conflict ; one can- 
not deny the other, in both the object is truth revealed 
by God forming these two great departments of human 
knowledge. There is no conflict between science and 
religion except in minds of men who do not fully 
understand both. 

It was revealed man is the end of all the material 
creation. Every man feels by deepest instinct he is 
superior to beast, he is the head of creation here be- 
low. The world, made for him in the center of the 
universe, had come down from remotest times. 
Ptolemy and the ancients fixed the world in the cen- 
tre, round which revolved the stars on numberless 
crystal spheres. But as newer observations multiplied, 
spheres forming the machinery of the heavens became 
unwieldy in this system, and the movements of the 



SCIENCE MUST NOT ATTACK RELIGION 241 

orbs could not be explained according to the laws of 
mechanics and figures. 

Toward the end of that year, he went to Eome, 
where he again tried to prove his system from the 
Bible, and for that reason his works were placed on 
the Index, till Benedict XIV removed the prohibition. 
He was encouraged to continue his experiments in 
science, and again told to let religion alone. ISTo Pope 
himself ever condemned him, but only the court ap- 
pointed for the examination of bad books, passed 
sentence. The decree of this court, till it was approved 
by the Pope, was only a human sentence, and did not 
involve the Papacy. Not understanding this, or not 
going down deep into the facts, writers blame the 
Church when she was not involved. The case itself 
set limits to Church authority, the proper domain of 
its authority being faith and morals, belief and practice, 
right thinking and correct living, and not science, when 
the latter does not attack religion. 

He had an audience with the Pope in 1617, who 
assured him he would give him every protection in his 
studies of nature, if he kept out of religious questions, 
after which he returned to Florence. But small men 
still attacked him. When his friend who became 
Urban VIII was elected to Peter's Chair, he went to 
Home to congratulate him, where he was received with 
the highest honor, esteem and liberality, and the Pope 
granted him a pension of 100 crowns a year and 60 to 
his son. 

About 1597 Galileo became a convert to Copernicus' 
system, that earth and planets revolve round the sun, 
and wrote a letter to Kepler on the subject. He 
lectured with such wisdom at the university, that 
crowds came to hear him so that sometimes he de- 
livered his discourses in the open air. In 1609, a re- 
port reached him that a Dutchman had made a glass 
which would magnify objects, and at Padua he made 
a glass which would magnify three times, which he 
presented to the senate of Yenice. He then made an- 



242 

other which magnified eight times and still a third with 
a power of 30 diameters. This he now turned on the 
heavens, and for the first time he saw the wonders of 
the celestial orbs. He examined the moon, mapped out 
its face and discovered Jupiter's satellities. His dis- 
coveries were received in some quarters with ridicule. 
He then made a compound microscope which he 
presented to the king of Poland. The world would 
not believe the wonders he revealed, and from that 
time he published his discoveries in riddles. He went 
to Eome in 1611, and raised his telescope in the Quiri- 
nal Gardens, then belonging to Cardinal Bandini. 

He wrote a book setting forth his system, which he 
filled with quotations from the Bible upholding his 
theories, even after he had been forbidden to cite 
Scripture. In this book he protests that the former 
decree of the court had not been rendered through ig- 
norance or passion, stating that the members of the 
court listened to his words and explanations with great 
attention, that the sentence had been rendered on 
purely religious grounds and that it did not touch 
science pure and simple. He had been forbidden to 
mingle religion with science and had promised to obey, 
but the publication of this work broke his promise. 
Brought before the court again he was condemned not 
for his science but for disobedience — contempt of court. 
Going to Sciena he passed a considerable time with the 
archbishop as his guest, after which he returned to 
Florence and retired to his own house at Arcetri near 
that city, where he passed the rest of his life. He 
published many books relating to scientific subjects, and 
was not again disturbed because he did not enter into 
religious questions. He died in 1642. 

Kepler, a famous astronomer, was born of a noble 
family but reduced in fortune, at Magstatt, Germany, 
December 27, 1571. He served for a time as a 
servant of the duke of Alva, went to a monastic school 
where he prepared for the university of Tubingen, 
where he took his degree of M. A. and began the 



kepler's famous discovery 243 

study of astronomy under Mostlim, one of Copernicus' 
disciples. Later, at Tycho Brahe's invitation, he went 
to Prague, where he helped the latter, then the most 
famous astronomer of the world. 

He devoted himself to opties, described the eye, 
found the laws of light passing through transparent 
substances, turned the telescope Galilee had invented 
to the stars, found that Mars moves not in an exact 
circle but in an ellipse, with the sun in one of the 
focuses, and published his three famous laws in 1609 
as follows : 1. Every planet describes an ellipse about 
the sun, this orb being in one focus of such an ellipse. 
2. If a line be supposed continually drawn from the 
sun to any given planet, this line will sweep over equal 
areas in equal times. 3. The squares of the periodic 
times of the planets are proportional to the cubes of their 
mean distances. Since his day every astronomer found 
these laws rule the motions of the heavenly orbs. They 
are the foundations of order and of movement the Ar- 
chitect of worlds gave to rule their revolutions. 

In Professor Playf air's words, "The discoveries of 
Kepler were secrets extorted from nature by the most 
profound and laborious research. ' ' Logarithms had not 
been discovered till the Scotsman Kapier figured out 
the tables which enable men to shorten their figuring, 
calculus was not known, and Kepler's figures on the 
seven oppositions of Mars fill TOO pages. We will not 
give his complete history. He lived in extreme 
poverty, his wife and his eldest child died with small- 
pox. Looking for a wife he subjected eleven can- 
didates to the same analysis as he would the move- 
ments of Mars. He died in 1630 of a fever brought 
on by fatigue and anxiety and was buried in St. Peter's 
Church, Eatisbon. 

Tycho Brahe, born in 1546, in Scania, of an ancient 
princely family, the second of ten children, studied 
first under tutors, went to Copenhagen to learn philos- 
ophy, and later to Leipsic where he took a course of 
law. His people wanted him to be a lawyer and 



244 KEPLER DIES; NEWTON BORN 

statesman, but the foretelling of an eclipse of the sun 
in 1560 attracted his attention to astronomy, to which 
he devoted his life. A large fortune left him enabled 
him to devote his whole time to the science at his 
uncle's seat near Knudstorp, Denmark. 

Later the king gave him the island of Hven in the 
Sound, there built for him a laboratory and observ- 
atory, where most distinguished persons from all 
parts of the world visited him. He was made a canon 
of the church at Roeskilde and allowed a pension of 
2,000 crowns a year, besides 1,000 crowns from the 
church. Political troubles forced him to flee to 
Denmark, the emperor Rudolph of Germany received 
him with great honors in 1599, settled on him a 
pension of 3,000 gold florins, and gave him a resi- 
dence in his own castle, Benach, near Prague. He 
died in 1601 and was buried in one of the chief 
churches in Prague. He did not fully adopt Coper- 
nicus' system, but his discoveries paved the way for 
the astronomers who came after him. 

Sir Isaac Newton, the famous English philosopher, 
was born Dec. 25th, 1642, and died March 20, 1727. 
From his youth he worked at little mechanical inven- 
tions, at nineteen he entered Trinity College, Cambridge 
University, where, as a student, he worked out his 
binomial theorem and wrote a treatise on optics. ' Gal- 
ileo had invented, and later Huygens improved the 
telescope, but it was imperfect, as the glasses were not 
made as well as in our day and he constructed the first 
reflecting telescope, using a mirror called the speculum. 

Being at Woolsthorpe he saw an apple fall, and this 
set him thinking, " Why do bodies fall? " He con- 
nected the weight of all bodies with gravity which holds 
the orbs and all the planets in their course. All bodies 
are heavy ; that is, they are drawn towards the center 
of the earth. This weight grows less according to the 
distance of the body from the center of the earth. He 
showed that the moon is drawn to the earth in the 
same degree that the square of the distance exceeds 



THE MIGHTY MIND OF GOD IN NATURE 245 

the distance of points on the earth's surface from the 
earth's center. He proved that when the force of the 
attraction diminished according to the law of the in- 
verse square the attracted body will obey all Kepler's 
laws in its motion round the attracting orb. 

Then he inquired into the mutual perturbations of 
the heavenly bodies so moving, and showed that the 
several motions of the moon which could not be ex- 
plained before were caused by the sun's disturbing 
action in different parts of her orbit as she turned round 
the earth sometimes nearer sometimes farther from the 
sun. Then he showed that the procession of the equi- 
noxes could be caused by gravitation, and many phe- 
nomena of the heavenly bodies, which up to that time 
could not be explained. His chief work, the Principia, 
< < Principles ' ' contain his great discoveries. 

For the next half century, learned men set them- 
selves to explain the motions of the heavenly bodies 
according to Newton's discoveries of the weights of the 
orbs. Lagrange and Laplace figured out the mechanism 
on which the orbs were founded and showed that they 
will go on forever. 

Newton's discoveries took the world by storm, and 
men set to work to criticise or find the truth of these 
great * < Principles ' ' on which the Mathematician of 
nature founded the universe. Everywhere the mighty 
Mind of God was seen in the mathematics and figures 
laid down for the orbs to follow in their courses. A 
clock regulated for Paris lost 2 minutes and 28 seconds 
at Cayenne within five degrees of the equator, other 
experiments showed variations of clocks and Newton 
found the earth to be 26 miles shorter in diameter 
through the poles than through the equator. 

Kepler had spoken of the attraction of the sun and 
moon for the waters of the oceans, Newton took up 
the matter and explained the tides and the disturbances 
in the flight of planets round the sun. Then he went 
down deep into the laws of centrifugal and centripetal 
forces — that is, the tendency of orbs sweeping round 



246 



DISCOVERIES 



their premary to fly away and then to fall into the sun 
or moons of the bodies circulating round their primaries. 

His most famous work, written in Latin, of which 
the following is the translated title, " The Mathemati- 
cal Principles of Natural Philosophy," contained the 
germs of nearly all his discoveries. It is divided into 
three books — the first treats of motion in free space, 
the second of resisted movement, and the third the 
system of the universe concluded from his other two 
books. His deep reasonings along the higher mathe- 
matics in the Latin language in which he wrote pre- 
vented his wonderful discoveries being known except 
among the learned. Even scientific men, steeped in 
the old Ptolemaic astronomy, did not believe his 
theories. Frenchmen still followed the Cartesian 
system, and Yoltaire said that at his death Newton 
did not have twenty followers outside of England. 
But soon after the publication of his " Principles " the 
universities of the British Isles introduced his phil- 
osophy and a long time afterward the learned bodies 
of the Continent adopted them. He devoted the rest 
of his life to developing different points of his phil- 
osophy, entered parliament and corresponded with the 
most learned men of the world. 

He was without doubt the greatest mathematician 
of his age, and this enabled him to find out the secrets 
of the mighty Mind who built nature on the plans and 
figures of His Wisdom. Both he and Leibnitz claimed 
the discovery of infinitesimal analysis, and a contro- 
versy sprang up between them. Many disputed his 
claims and controversy imbittered his later years. He 
was so religious he took his hat off when he heard the 
name of God, and was called < ' the excellent divine ' ' 
because of the worship and respect with which he 
honored the Creator whose works he had penetrated 
in nature. He left many works of a religious nature 
written in Latin, but they were never published. He 
wrote four celebrated letters addressed to Bentley 
against atheism, to show that matter could never have 



AXD BTJEIAL 247 

arrayed itself in its present forms of orbs, movements 
and forces without a divine Power. He was never 
married, and his niece had charge of his home. This 
most famous and good man died in 1727 at Kensing- 
ton, a suburb of London, and was buried in West- 
minster Abbey, where a monument was erected over his 
tomb in 1831, almost in the middle of the carved 
screen shutting off the nave from the ancient chancel 
or choir. 



CHAPTER XII.— WHAT IS MATTER MADE OF? TWO 
OLD THEORIES. 

Less than 100 metals and their unions compose the 
visible universe. Some are solids which become fluids 
or gases by heat, such as iron, gold, copper, tin, etc. ; 
others are gases at ordinary temperature but can be- 
come fluids or solids by cold and pressure, such as the 
gases like oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen, etc. These 
are all called primary elements because we cannot 
divide them into other more simple substances. 
Whether solids or gases we call them metals. 

We would like to know what these elements or metals 
are composed of. There are two theories. The oldest 
comes down from prehistoric days stating all metals or 
primary elements are composed of matter and form, 
or extension and force — that matter is a focus having 
length, breadth and thickness and activity attracting 
and repelling, etc. , the forces we find in material sub- 
stances. 

This primeval matter with extension alone and which 
we now name Ether, was created by God from nothing 
and filled all the universe we call space, as the founda- 
tion of matter. In certain places God added to this 
ether, or primeval matter, different forces, activities 
or energies, making the different metals act in their own 
peculiar ways so they became gold, hydrogen, carbon, 
silver, copper, etc. 

Beyond historic days Greeks sang of this primeval 
matter they called ether, from aither ' ' upper air, ' ' or 
' ' to burn. ' ' They held all material things — earth, 
sea, sky, and heavenly bodies were made of this cosmic 
element they deified as luminous ether. Orphic hymns 

248 



THE PHYSICAL AND LIVING FORCES 249 

sing of Ether, < l Soul of the "World, ' ' from which comes 
life. Anaxagoras said it was the principle of life. 
Plato describes it impure matter diffused through space, 
lighter than air, and held its forms or forces could 
exist separated from it. Aristotle wrote, ether is the 
primeval element of the universe, and that different 
forces or energies were added to it at creation. 

Early Church Fathers, adopted the theory of ether 
from the Greeks. St. Augustine many times mentions 
it. The Schoolmen of the middle ages, following 
Aristotle's teachings write of it. St. Thomas Aquinas 
codified all human learning along the lines of matter 
and form. The most learned men of our day find they 
cannot explain light, electricity, heat and the move- 
ments of matter in orbs, chemistry or physics except 
along this theory. 

The gist of these teachings is that luminous ether 
pervades all space, enters into and is the foundation of 
all material substances. Whatever we see by the 
senses has ether clothed with different activities which 
act in their own peculiar ways on our five senses. 
Here we are on the borders of human knowledge. 
But it seems reasonable to suppose that this ether was 
first made through space. Then in places God added 
to its activities forces we call appearances, each differ- 
ing for each metal, and thus the metals composing the 
universe were made. These materials acting according 
to weight fell together in places Providence marked 
out and composed the millions of orbs. They still act 
along mathematical lines in chemistry, etc. 

These are the physical forces of nature. But there 
are other forces God made — the lowest living force is 
in plant, higher is the living force in animal, a still 
higher is the reasoning soul of man partly buried in 
matter, then come angels free from matter, and at the 
head is God Eternal. This great summary comes 
down almost from the origin of our race and has been 
beautifully explained and developed by most learned 
men of mankind. 



250 THE THEORY OF ATOMS AND MOLECULES 

Democritus, born at Abdera, Greece, 460 B.C., 
denied this theory, taught matter is composed of little 
round indestructible bodies he calls atoms, " cannot be 
cut." But before his death his theory was abandoned 
as being absurd and unprovable, and the theory of 
ether occupied the field till modern times, when 
infidels of France, denying God, roused the people so 
that in blood, murder and carnage, the revolution 
swept away the old landmarks of human learning. 

Lavoisier, a celebrated chemist, born in Paris in 
1743, revived the theory of atoms and molecules. He 
perished on the scaffold in 1794, but the theory sur- 
vived him.. Newton took it up and his influence 
spread it among his followers, but when they began 
to study light they were forced to abandon atoms and 
molecules. Huygens, Descartes and scientists of their 
day rejected the theory for that of ether, which the 
latter calls "a subtil medium." To-day our most 
learned men are advocating the theory of ether in 
place of that of atoms and molecules. 

As the atomic theory is still taught in nearly every 
school, college, university, is found in text-books, and 
runs through scientific works written by men who 
never heard of the theory of ether — matter and form, 
we will stop to look into this most reasonable explana- 
tion of the constitution of material things. 

An atom is the smallest particle which can exist. 
A number of atoms unite to make a molecule, and a 
lot of these gathered according to natural laws form 
all we see through the five senses. Atoms and mole- 
cules are supposed to attract and repel other materials, 
each force acting according to mathematical laws. 
But no one ever saw an atom or molecule, for the 
former are supposed to be so small that if you could 
magnify a drop of water as big as the earth, the atoms 
would appear only as large as oranges. 

Matter motionless was created from ether in forms 
of cosmic dust, metallic vapors, gases in different parts 
of the spaces of the universe. Then the Spirit of God 



WEIGHT UPHOLDS THE UNIVERSE 251 

moved over the waters, gave attraction or weight to 
these materials by which they attracted each other. 
They fell down together, formed larger and larger 
masses which gathered in the smaller particles within 
the influences of the larger attracting masses. As 
these particles fell down through spaces of vast extent, 
where are now the stars, they came together with 
tremendous swiftness, struck with awful force and, 
suddenly stopped in their flights, developed the heat 
and light the suns have been giving out since. Thus 
we trace heat, light, electricity — all natural forces, back 
to the Primeval Force, God, who at creation made all 
things as object lessons of His own Almighty power. 
So neither matter nor force can ever be destroyed by 
man ; only God who brought them forth can destroy 
them. 

But these natural forces act not in any irregular way. 
They are all ruled by the strictest mathematical laws. 
Figures rule the whole physical universe to the utmost 
limits of the universe. Mathematics require a mind. 
Law calls for a lawgiver. "Who is the Mind from 
whom these mathematics came? "Who is the Lawgiver 
who gave nature these laws? There must have been 
a Wisdom infinite who presided over creation, and who 
still rules nature. 

What holds all things to earth ? What keeps sun, 
moon and stars from flying away from their orbits ? 
Their weight, which Xewton called universal gravita- 
tion. He announced that law in the following words : 
' ' Every particle of matter in the universe attracts 
every other particle, with a force whose direction is 
that of the straight line joining the two, and whose 
pull is in proportion directly as the product of their 
masses, and inversely as the square of their distance. ' ' 

That law rules every particle of matter in the uni- 
verse — even the materials of our bodies are subject to 
it, for we are heavy. What are the unseen cords ever 
pulling us towards the center of the earth, and holding 
heavenly orbs in their unseen grasp? Atoms and mole- 



252 DISCOVERY OE LIGHT AND HEAT-GIVING METALS 

cules cannot explain that m} r stery. We can only say 
it is one of the forces God gave matter at creation. 

Each metal has its own proper weight. Some are 
very light, especially the gases, as air, hydrogen, oxygen 
helium, etc. Other metals are heavy, as gold, plati- 
num, iron, etc., while some are light, as aluminum, the 
base of clay. The energy or force given ether at cre- 
ation makes them act this way. Each metal and gas 
has its own way of acting according to the mathe- 
matical activities given at creation. 

But they do not act in wild and irregular ways, for 
nature was not built on chaos, but on law. These laws 
which rule nature were founded on mathematics. 
Figures rule the whole universe from the smallest 
particle to the greatest sun. 

The ancient theory that material things are composed 
of matter and form, or ether and energy, or extension 
and force, has recently been confirmed in a remarkable 
way by the discovery of many radio-active metals and 
the system of atoms and molecules which so long mis- 
led men has been proved false. We will enter into 
this matter in detail, because it has such a bearing on 
our subject, and because, men of science are so wedded 
to atoms. 

In 1876, Kutherford accidentally left a piece of pitch- 
blende in a dark room, on a sensitive plate used by pho- 
tographers, and found it printed an image on the plate. 
This material produces light rays we cannot see. The 
Curies, man and wife, by chemical analysis, in 1898, 
boiled down tons of pitchblende, gathered the metal 
which produced these rays, and called it Kadium, 
"light-giving." Long before, the spectroscope had 
found a mysterious gas in the sun, called helium, and 
it was found that radium produces this gas. 

The writer saw with his own eyes radium, the most 
powerful of the light and heat-giving metals. In a 
glass-case lay a number of little round glass tubes 
about five inches long and thick as a lead-pencil. 
"These are bromides of radium of different purity," 



FLASHES OF LIGHT FROM RADIUM 253 

said the attendant. " They keep hot all the time, and 
give light in the dark. Here, take one in your hand." 

The bromide of radium occupied only about one -fifth 
of the tube, but the end holding the whitish -gray metal 
was warm, while the empty end of the tube was cold. 
It was a gentle heat — not enough to burn the fingers. 
Other tubes were placed in the writer's hands, the 
purer or larger the quantity of radium they held, the 
warmer the tubes were. It looked beyond belief. 
Here was heat created before your eyes. All experi- 
ences told you heat must have an origin as fire, or 
motion ; but here was heat, coming from a metal which 
would continue to give out energy without loss of sub- 
stance for years. 

< ' Come and I will show you something, ' ' said the 
man in his beautiful French. He led the writer into a 
dark room and closed the door. < < Here is some pure 
radium under this magnifying glass." The writer 
looked down through the little lens of the metal case, 
and saw a small roundish mass of radium about as large 
as the head of a small pin. Once, twice or four times 
a second out from the radium shot streams of light like 
little lightning flashes. Sometimes one, then two, or 
many brilliantly flashing white outbursts shot out like 
electric discharges to about five to six times the diam- 
eter of the radium. They looked like little explosive 
bursts or most brilliant streams of white fire, darting 
hither and thither, to be lost before reaching the sides 
of the case, the latter being warm in the hands of the 
writer. Mine eyes have seen a miracle of nature, a 
metal which without loss of matter of any kind pro- 
duces energy, light and heat. Here the force, form, 
or energy of the metal was active. Here was a prac- 
tical denial of the theory of atoms and molecules. 

Some radium radiations cannot be seen with naked 
eye, no more than you can see the X-rays. But they 
become visible when passed through a screen of will- 
emite — zinc cilicate. Some years ago Edison told the 
writer to put his hand on a screen of barium platino — 



254 THREEGASES RADIUM MAKES 

cyanide, while the great inventor behind turned on the 
X-rays. Every bone in the writer's hand stood out; 
the flesh was seen as shadows ; you could see the out- 
lines of the hand, but the bones looked exactly like a 
skeleton hand. This is the way bones and interior 
parts of the body are now photographed in surgical 
cases. 

Radium sends out three kinds of rays, called after 
the Greek letters a, b, and g. The b rays are deflected 
by a magnet, which bends them out of their course; if 
the other pole of the magnet is brought near, they are 
deflected in the opposite way. They seem to be iden- 
tical with the rays sent off from the cathode of a strong 
electric discharge in a vacuum. Thomson found they 
have a velocity of 50,000 miles a second. Kaufmann 
says that some of the g rays of radium have a velocity 
of 170,000 miles a second, almost that of light. They 
pass through several inches of solid lead, through a foot 
of iron, penetrate many metals, are not deflected by a 
magnet, or electric current, and appear when the ether 
waves strike certain objects. 

The a rays of radium have very little penetrating 
power. After passing through a quarter of an inch of 
air, they are stopped by a piece of paper. The rays of 
radium light are 40,000 times swifter than a rifle bullet, 
act like ra}^s of electric light through a vacuum tube, 
and divide into three rays — the a ray acts like ' < canal ' ' 
rays Goldstein discovered, the b like the cathode rays 
of the electric light, and the g ray are similar to the 
Roentgen ray. 

Radium gives out a gas which condenses at — 150°C. 
Thorium produces a gas which condenses at — 120°C, 
these falling on inclosing mental tubes make them shine 
in the dark. That of radium reflected from willemite 
is green, from kunzite, dark red ; zinc sulphite is white, 
barium platino — cyanide, at first is green but changes. 

Radium light kills microscopic plants and animals 
which cause disease. The gas is found in numerous 
mineral springs — waters famous for their healing 



THE ATOMIC THEORY PROVED FALSE 255 

powers. The discovery of this mysterious metal 
spurred on scientists and soon numerous metals were 
found which give out energy. Becquerel found ura- 
nium produced light, heat, and a gas. Debhirerne 
found arctinum did the same. In 1898 the two Curies 
discovered another metal with radio-activity and called 
it Polonium, after the lady's native land. These dis- 
coveries showing metals have activities utterly upset 
the theory of atoms, and uphold that of ether and 
energy. 



CHAPTER XIII. -THE PHYSICAL FORCES— WEIGHT, 
HEAT, LIGHT, ELECTRICITY, ETC. 

Will you say no men wrote the books in a library, 
that no one made the figures covering the papers on 
his desk if you enter his office while absent? We find 
all movements of material things are ruled by mathe- 
matics. In the sky, on earth, in chemical changes, in 
physics, we find figures. Regular proportions accord- 
ing to arithmetic, algebra, geometry, trigonometry, 
conic sections, infinitesimal calculus, logarithms — all 
the mathematics and some sciences we have not yet 
discovered are in nature. Did stones and rocks and 
metalfl think out these figures? Did they go to school 
as we did to learn these figures regulating them? 

Mathematics are the expressions of mind — only a 
reasoning person can learn or know them. The 
mathematics of nature were there before we found 
them. They are the purest and most absolutely true 
truths we know. They are eternal in the past, and 
will be true in eternity ; for they are universal truths. 
Where were they before nature was made and set go- 
ing according to them? They were in the eternal 
Mind. They are the expressions of His Wisdom, the 
Thought coming forth in the eternal Now of God, for 
with Him there is no past or future. 

Newton discovered that weight attracts all matter in 
the universe according to the inverse ratio of their 
distances, and keeps the universe together. But all 
materials have not the same weight. Helium, hydrogen 
and all gases are light. Aluminum, a solid, is light ; 
gold, lead, iron, platinum, etc., are heavy. Each thing 
has its own weight, acting according to its nature. 

256 



FIGURES RULE MATTER INSTINCTS DIRECT ANIMALS 257 

Who gave these materials these attractions acting 
according to mathematics? 

By its powers of growth and nutrition the soul took 
in earthly materials, and built them into our bodies, 
making these earthly habitations one with us. But the 
matter of our bodies did not lose their physical powers 
of weight ; therefore we weigh each according to his 
size. By weight we are in union with every particle 
of matter in the universe. This weight keeps us on 
this earth, without it we would rise in the air and go 
wandering through space, where we would die with 
the awful cold. What is this weight? Why do things 
fall to the ground? What material bonds pull the orbs 
together, keeping them in their paths? We do not 
know — it is the greatest mystery; no one has ever 
given an explanation. 

Mathematics rule matter but cease in living organ- 
isms. For living beings are ruled by instinct. These 
are so wonderful, show such astonishing wisdom in 
beings which do not reason, as plants, animals, and the 
plant and animal functions of man beyond our control, 
that we must conclude instinct is the Mind of God 
directing creatures. There is no other conclusion a 
sane man will draw unless he be an ignoramus. 

Let us learn a lesson of the wisdom of the mighty 
Mathematician from the minute divisions and unions 
of matter. For He who planned the mathematics of 
the millions of suns and planets, never forgets or 
neglects the finest tiny particle of matter on earth or 
star. 

Let us see what chemistry says. The word comes 
from Chemia, Egypt's ancient name, or from the Arabic 
kamia, " hidden," " secret," — whence alchemy, a 
fabled science which flourished once and which took 
its rise in the fourth century, teaching how baser 
metals might be changed into gold. 

Alchemists found materials in their unions and divis- 
ions follow laws of weight. For example, a given 
weight of alkali unites with a certain weight of acid to 



258 SIGNS OF THE MATHEMATICIAN OF NATURE 

form a salt. For all unions and dissolutions take place 
according to laws of mathematical proportions. But 
where two materials unite in equal proportions, they 
may also come together in other proportions. Suppose 
two materials come together as A and B in equal weight 
or volume and make a new substance, they may also 
unite in other proportions and form entirely different 
substances, as A+B 2 , A + B 3 , A-fB 4 , A+B 5 , A+B 6 , 
etc. Again, if they unite with each other in these 
proportions, they may unite with a third, the propor- 
tions of the first two are preserved, while the third in 
uniting with them follows its own mathematical laws. 
All the power of mankind cannot change one of these 
proportions or figures. Materials will unite according 
to their own figures and in no other way. These 
figures show the exact proportions or weight of the 
materials uniting or dissolving. Books on chemistry 
are filled with these figures and formulas. The first 
letter of the substance stands for it, and the figure fol- 
lowing shows the proportion it will unite with another 
substance. When a compound substance is dissolved, 
the materials forming it will also follow their figures, 
regulating either the amount or weight of the substances. 
Where the letters are alone without any figure it means 
in the proportion of 1. 

Every breath you draw into your lungs is composed 
by weight of 23.2$ of oxygen, 76.7$ of nitrogen, with 
about 0. 1 carbon. The oxygen is in two forms — one 
being the ordinary gas, the other being in an active 
condition called ozone ; the latter being more condensed 
End one half heavier; 100 cubic inches of ordinary 
©xjygen weighs 32 grains, while ozone of the same bulk 
weighs 1 48 grains. While ordinary oxygen is made of 
d<mble^qhantities of the gas, ozone, from the Greek 
f^tfoi smell ", is composed of three quantities. This 
ozone given out by plants is found in larger quantities 
where 1 vegetation flourishes and for animals is the life- 
^ivin^'pro^0r#v of the air. You breathe it in all the 
<time;>>aM fe ! red corpuscles of the blood bring it to all 



FIGURES PROVING A REASONING BEING 259 

parts of the body, where uniting with carbonic gas in 
your system the union causes a gentle heat which keeps 
your body warm. 

When you drink water you take H 2 0, that is two 
volumes of hydrogen and one of oxygen. The latter 
gas enters into both air and water — how different these 
two materials. Oxygen, nitrogen and hydrogen com- 
pose all water and air. 

Sodium, discovered by Davy, unites with oxygen 
according to Na 9 and the combination is soda, but 
uniting as Na 2 2 it is a dioxide. "With water it unites 
into NaHO, a hydrate — caustic soda Nal is an iodide; 
NaBr is a bromide ; NaF is a fluoride while 6(NaF) A1 2 F 6 
is the mineral cryolite. Pass sulphurous anhydride 
over moistened sodic carbonate, and you get the salt 
JSTa a S0 3 IOH 2 used to bleach the wood pulp of which 
the paper of this book is made. 

Thousands of unions founded on mathematics might 
be given but they would fill many books. You will 
find them in any work on chemistry. All chemical 
changes take place according to these mathematics 
which never change. We know just what we are go- 
ing to get when we start to make a mixture. A man 
of reason and understanding will ask : Where did these 
figures come from? Do these little particles of matter 
reason and say to their neighbors : "I will unite with 
you according to these figures and no others ' ' ? Can 
crude matter reason ? Did man put these figures there ? 
There is only one explanation of these mysterious 
figures of matter regulating unions and dissolutions, 
filling books on chemistry. A Mathematician infinite 
in wisdom, He who created matter, knew how to figure, 
He laid down these mathematical laws ruling nature. 
There is no other solution of the wonder. 

But that is not all. Every particle of matter is heavy, 
for it has weight. The elements of matter unite and 
separate according to their weight. Let us take the 
gases. The weight of Irydrogen is 1, that of oxygen 
i* 16, sulphur vapor is 32, chlorine 35.5, iodine vapor 



260 HOW MATERIALS UNITE 

127. When these unite they come together in these 
weights. That is Watts' law. Who gave these gases 
this law? A law supposes a Lawgiver with power to 
make and enforce the law. 

The volume of all gases is the same in combining or 
uniting, except phosphorus and arsenic, which are only 
half those of the other elements, and mercury and 
cadmium, which are double those of the other elements. 
Gay-Lussac showed that the unions of elements take 
place in definite and multiple proportions, and you 
know what multiples are in arithmetic. The volume 
of a compound gas always bears a simple ratio to the 
volumes of its elements thus : 

1 vol. hydrogen and 1 chlorine form 2 vols. = hydro- 

chloric acid. 

2 vols, hydrogen and 1 oxygen form 2 vols. = water, 

vapor, steam. 

3 vols, hydrogen and 1 nitrogen form 2 vols. = am- 

monia, etc. 

Thus it runs all through nature. Figures rule matter 
throughout the universe. Again we ask, Who did 
this? 

The elements unite in different proportions accord- 
ing to their heat. A certain heat will produce a cer- 
tain kind of union, and this is inversely proportional to 
their specific heat. The same amount of heat is re- 
quired to produce a given change of temperature in 7 
grains of lithium, 56 of iron, 207 of lead, 108 of silver, 
196.7 of gold, etc. Did no Mathematician preside 
over these things from the beginning? 

Faraday showed an equivalent of an element con- 
sumed in an electric battery produces an exact chemical 
decomposition. For example, 32 grains of zinc will 
produce a current of electricity which will decompose 
1 grain of hydrogen, 108 of silver, or 39 of potassium. 
These results of most careful experiment show that 
matter rests on figures in its most minute forms and 
most subtile actions. It proves that some One who 



HOW GOD DIRECTS MINUTE P ARTICLES 261 

knows figures rules matter in all its acts. We cannot 
go over all the elements, the thousands of unions, 
divisions and chemical changes materials pass through. 
But we have given these few examples that the reader 
may judge how figures and mathematics rule nature, 
Will you, gentle reader, say stones, clays, minerals, 
fluids and gases can reason, and by themselves alone 
follow arithmetic and the higher mathematics, which 
only men know who pass through a university? 

Dalton investigating minute forms of matter, dis- 
covered many of its laws. All matters in most minute 
quantities act according to law. All particles of the 
same size and same materials have the same weight, 
and different elements have diverse weights. These 
relative weights unite with other materials according 
to mathematical numbers. These minute quantities 
have mutual attractions and repulsions. When they 
unite to form new materials, these little materials do 
not interpenetrate each other, but place themselves in 
positions, one beside the other, according to strict laws, 
founded on mathematics — a constant ratio being main- 
tained represented by the figures given in chemistry. 
These discoveries prove that a mathematical Intel- 
ligence laid down the laws and movements of these 
tiny particles according to figures, and presides over 
the chemical unions, structures and compositions of 
matter. 

We seldom find the primary metals of which the uni- 
verse is composed in a pure state, for they are nearly 
always united with one or more of the other elements. 
A union of two primary elements is called a binary. 
Thus a certain part of carbon unites with a certain 
amount of oxygen in a wood or coal fire, and the pro- 
duct is carbon monoxide, or with two parts of oxygen 
which becomes carbon dioxide — these two unions pro- 
ducing smoke, or the vapor rising from a fire or the 
chimney of a lighted lamp. As the oxygen we take 
into our lungs and which is required to sustain animal 
life has combined with the carbon, the product of a 



262 METALS PROVE AN INFINITE MATHEMATICIAN 

lire is disagreeable to us, for we could live but a few 
moments without oxygen. 

Oxygen unites with many metals causing rusts, 
called the oxides of these metals. These oxides united 
with acids produce various kinds of salt. In all these 
unions figures are followed, proportions are guarded, 
ratios are observed, mathematics rule. It is utterly 
impossible to unite these materials except according to 
these figures. When metallic gases, as hydrogen, 
carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, etc., unite with metals they 
become solids. We can make these gases solid by 
excessive heat and pressure, but how they become 
solids uniting to metals we do not know. When 
materials unite they lose their old activities, and new 
activities rise different from the composing elements. 
The new substance becomes a whole, a unit, an inde- 
pendent material. 

The primary metals or elements range themselves in 
six groups — the following Greek words express the 
way they combine, as monads, ' ' sole, " " one ' ' ; 
dyads, ' l doubles ' ' ; triads, ' ' threes ' ' ; tetrads, 
" fours " ; pentads, " fives" ; and hexads, " sixes." 
Some add a seventh. These unions make all the 
materials of the universe. The monads, of which 
hydrogen, chlorine and potassium are examples, com- 
bine only w r ith single particles of other materials. All 
other primary materials unite with 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, single 
elements or their equivalents, for their powers act 
along the lines of their attractions according to these 
mathematical numbers. Hydrogen, represented in 
chemistry by the letter H, is a monad ; oxygen, O, is 
a dyad; Boron, B, is a triad; carbon, C, is a tetrad; 
nitrogen, N, is a pentad, while sulphur, S, is a hexad. 
You see how nature is regulated in its most minute 
changes by a Mathematician of infinite wisdom and 
power. 

Water is composed of oxygen and hydrogen — one 
part of the former with two parts of the latter, and 
chemists represent it by H a O Carbon dioxide in smoke 



FORMATION OP CRYSTALS PROVE GOD 263 

is C0 2 but marsh gas is CH 4 . It would tire the reader 
to go over the whole domain of chemistry — the science 
treating of the unions of materials ; but we have given 
these specimens to show the mathematics of the min- 
erals in their unions and disunions. Figures rule them 
in the most minute particles. Where did these 
minerals get these figures? 

These tiny particles of matter not only act according 
to these figures, but they also seem to have passed 
through the higher mathematics to be graduates of 
universities. They form crystals, a word coming from 
the Greek krystallos, "ice." The whole crust of 
earth in its solid parts is crystalline in formation. 
Granite, lava slowly cooled, marble, iron -ore, all 
materials perfect themselves by crystallizing. Look 
at a piece of polished granite or other stone, and you 
will see the crystal forms. Carbon crystallized is the 
diamond, the sapphire and ruby is crystallized alumina, 
quartz is crystallized silica. These last united with 
one or more of the alkalies become the tourmaline, 
garnet, feldspar, etc. All precious stones are simply 
polished crystals of different materials. 

One with a wonderful knowledge of trigonometry 
presides over nature in the unions of materials. We 
see His works in the crystals. 

A crystal is bounded by plain surfaces arranged in a 
regular way about lines called axes, having the very 
same structure in every part no matter how minute, 
and it splits or breaks according to these lines. There 
are six kinds of crystals — isometric, having the same 
elements but in different proportions; tretagonal, 
having four sides with two kinds of axes ; orthombic, 
having three systems; trimetric, with three sides, 
angles or points ; monoclinic, in which one of the axes 
is obliquely inclined ; triclinic, in which three of the 
axes are inclined, and hexagonal, having six sides and 
six angles. Let the reader remember his geometry 
treating of surfaces and angles, take up his trigono- 
metry, recall his studies in the higher mathematics, let 



264 THE WONDEKS CRYSTALS SHOW 

him apply these studies to crystals, and he will find 
that the crystals have followed these branches of 
higher learning, being learned far beyond the ken of 
man. Pick up a little sand, put one grain after an- 
other under the microscope, and you will see that each 
is a crystal, or a union of them, the materials of which 
when becoming solid followed these higher mathemat- 
ics. Who made matter take these mathematical laws, 
from the tiny grains spread over earth, forming soil, 
to the granite and rocks of the mighty mountains 
rearing their heads high in the air? 

Most crystals are square or six-sided. The four- 
sided are either right prisms or inclined, the former 
has three axes crossing in the center, and the latter 
has four axes — one vertical and three lateral. Salt, 
sugar, borax, etc., are examples of the four-sided 
crystals. Water in cloud- drops, being free to act, in 
freezing forms the most wonderful crystals. It would 
take many pages to describe the wonders of a snow- 
flake, each little crystal shoots out at an angle of 60°. 

The details of all the crystals would fill a book. 
Sides, angles, axes differ for each material which crys- 
tallized. Light passing through them is changed ac- 
cording to the angle it strikes causing the gleam and 
luster of the precious gem which changes color as the 
wearer moves. The diamond dissolves light into its 
primary colors and flashes it back with a radiance no 
other material possesses. Yet this diamond, so prec- 
ious, so hard, so beautiful, is only crystallized carbon, 
differing not from the coal in your stove uniting with 
oxygen to cause heat. 

Materials take time to crystallize. Dissolve sugar 
into a thick syrup and cool it quickly and you have a 
soft stringy mass of candy. But let it cool slowly and 
you have rock candy, for the sugar has crystallized. 
So the great melted mass of glowing rock forming the 
crust of our earth cooled slowly, and crystallized into 
the granite foundations upholding soil surface and 
mountain. In California, Mexico, on the sides of 



THE STUDIES OF FAMOUS MEN ON LIGHT 265 

Vesuvius, and other volcanoes, the writer examined 
the lava thrown out by volcanoes. Where it slowly 
cooled it crystallized into granite. Where the flow 
was so thin it quickly lost its heat, it shows no sign of 
a crystal, for the materials did not have time to range 
themselves according to mathematical forms before 
they cooled. 

Who gave these mathematical laws but the Almighty 
Mathematician ? You call them nature's laws, leav- 
ing out nature's God, taking away the glory belonging 
to the Eternal. For nature cannot think or reason. 
We are naturally inclined to paganism of old which 
deified and worshipped Nature in place of God they 
did not know. Let us now see these natural forces 
more in detail. 

What is light ? Newton and his disciples, following 
the theory of atoms, molecules, etc. , held it was caused 
by millions of minute particles shot out from light- 
giving bodies. But this theory found so many diffi- 
culties it was abandoned. 

Fresnel proposed the wave theory in 1821. Cauchy 
in 1829 held that the ether filling star spaces is ex- 
tremely elastic. In 1835 Neumann, whose work was 
reconstructed in 1835 by Kirchoff, and by MaeCullagh 
in 1837, added ether of a fixed density with changing 
elasticity, put in vibration by luminous bodies. Ray- 
leigh, Maxwell, Green, and a host of able men 
worked on light theories. From 1888 to 1890 Lord 
Kelvin published his mathematical examinations of 
light. He went over all the different theories and 
subjected them to strict analysis. A number of famous 
men investigated the question : How can light come 
from the stars to us unless there be some kind of 
material between the stars. 

The conclusion of all men of science is that light is a 
trembling of this ether put in vibration by hot bodies 
— as waves or pulsation of air cause sounds, so pulsa- 
tions of ether cause light. The length of these waves 
or pulsations have been measured — they are from 



£66 THE MATHEMATICS OF LIGHT 

1/37,000 for red light, to 1/59,000 of an inch for 
violet light. After long and careful experiments at 
the Bureau Internationale, Paris, they found the 
standard platinum-iridium meter kept at Sevres, near 
Paris, on which all measurements are founded, to be 
1/553,163.5 of the red waves of the metal cadmium, 
1/966,249.7 of its green ray, 2/083,372.1 of its blue 
light within an absolute degree of accuracy of 1 in 
2,000,000. Thus the absolute length of the French 
meter has been determined by light waves, so if it be 
ever lost or destroyed we can restore it. The length 
of the English and American inch, foot, yard, etc. , 
have not been thus determined, but it can be done. 

By careful laboratory experiments light's velocity 
was found to be 186,500 miles a second. Eclipses of 
Jupiter's satellites and of the moon, the transits of 
Venus and other celestial phenomena were examined, 
and in every case the velocity and laws of light both 
in the heavens and on earth were found to be identical. 
Light, like gravity, diminishes according to the inverse 
ratio of the square of the distance. The different 
velocities of its beats, or waves, in a second, cause 
colors. Passing through transparent bodies, as glass, 
water, etc. , at an angle, the ray is turned aside. The 
light- waves passing through dense materials become 
slower, and that is why the colors appear. Falling on 
objects the colored rays are reflected to your eye, and 
this is why you see colored objects. These light-rays 
follow fixed laws, obey mathematics. These figures 
never change. ¥e know just how light will act pass- 
ing through, or reflected from any object. Who is 
this Mathematician who gave light its laws, keeps it in 
its flight through space, and through these materials? 

Will you say light was always here, and these laws 
and mathematics are eternal in duration? But when 
you turn on your electric light, light your lamp, or a 
fire, the light they give was not always ; yet this light 
Uso follows the same laws and the same figures as the 



THE ASTOUNDING WONDERS OF LIGHT 267 

light of the sun and stars. Light, like heat, is a mode 
of motion. 

Light, heat, electricity, are waves of ether, and 
through this waving ether they come from sun and 
stars to earth. Heat is a vibration of ether in the 
heated object; increase its heat and it gives light. 
Movement, light and heat can be changed into each 
other and into electricity. One kind of an ether wave 
beating from 100 to 400 trillions a second is heat. 
When the beats, or waves, are 440 trillions a second 
the hot object gives out a red light. When the waves 
tremble 500 trillions the light is orange; 532 trillions, 
the light is green; 590, it is blue; 691, it is indigo; 
789, it is violet. Beyond 789 trillions of beats in a 
second we cannot see the light, for these waves are too 
rapid for our eyes. But these rays print on the photo- 
graph, and we are in the region of X and other invisi- 
ble rays. 

These waves or beats of ether pulsate not back and 
forth like sound beats, but across the line of light, up 
and down like ocean waves. Stop and think of that 
swiftness from 400 to 789 trillions a second. Here we 
are in ether, a mysterious something on the borders of 
nothingness, from which the Creator made matter, 
when he added to it force, energy, when from the 
union of ether and force the metals and all matter 
sprang at creation. Greater is the wonder, For every 
eye of animal and of man has a retina on which these 
beats of light pulsate so they see. Highest of the 
senses, the eye looks out on nature and receives the 
pulsations of light coming with this swiftness which 
seems unbelievable. But this science proves. 

Wonders pile up. From millions of stars and suns, 
from gas, and candle, and electric light, stream out 
these light-rays. From farthest confines of the 
universe light thus ever streams out of myriads of suns 
in everlasting silence. The choirs of the Eternal are 
ever singing silent songs of His Almighty Power. 
What is music but regular beats of musical instruments 



WHY OBJECTS ARE COLORED 

and of vocal chords in human throats? Every beat 
must be regular, according to mathematics, or you 
will have discord. But every light-ray is regulated 
by the strictest arithmetics, decreasing in intensity 
according to the inverse ratio of the distance of the 
light-giving object. No one can change the beats of 
ether or take out a beat or pulsation here and there, 
for light is founded on the figures of the eternal 
Mathematician. 

White light is composed of the seven primary colors 
mingled together — red, orange, yellow, green, blue, 
indigo and violet. Light falling on an object breaks 
into two parts. Some rays penetrate the object and 
are lost, the other rays are reflected — that is, thrown 
off — and entering the eye cause sight. But objects 
differ in their activities. Some reflect all the rays of 
light and are white, others absorb all the rays and are 
black, more absorb some rays and reflect the others 
and are colored. When a thing absorbs all the rays 
and reflect only the red ray, it is red. The leaves of 
plants absorb all the rays which they use in growth 
and life functions and reflect only the green rays, hence 
they are green. A blue thing absorbs all the rays but 
the blue. So it is with all colored objects. Therefore 
color is not exactly in the objects, but in the rays of 
light they absorb or reflect to the eye. 

At the back of the eye of man and higher animals 
is the retina composed of 9 layers of living materials 
we will describe later. This delicate organ receives 
these different rays of light coming in beats trillions of 
times a second. These rays form images of the thing 
seen, so we see the object in its image. The eye is 
most wonderfully made to receive these light rays. 
How could blind unreasoning nature or any living 
being on earth make an eye so well adapted to receive 
these rays and form with them an image on the retina? 
Some Power, most learned in optics, chemistry and all 
the sciences must have arranged the laws of light and 
the materials of the eye so we can see. 



THE FOUNDATIONS OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS 269 

Certain materials as glass, water, etc., have the 
ether so disposed in them that they allow light to pass 
through them without disturbing the rays, and we call 
them transparent objects. We can see through them. 
But the light-waves passing through are turned in 
their flight when the surfaces are not parallel, as in 
lenses and magnifying glasses in which the light is 
bent. For example, when you put the end of a stick 
down into water, it seems bent at the surface of the 
water because light does not pass through water as 
easily as through air. We take advantage of this law 
in making magnifying glasses, telescopes and optical 
instruments. The science treating of the laws of light 
is called optics. 

You may ask why light can pass through some hard 
dense materials as glass and the gases. The structure 
of these materials is such that it agrees with the wave 
lengths. Objects through which light cannot pass, 
called opaque, have an irregular structure, which 
breaks up the regularity of the light- waves and there- 
fore we cannot see through them. 

When light passes through glass or other transparent 
substances its rapid flight is hindered, and the thicker 
the material the more it is retarded, till if it be very 
thick the light is all or partly stopped and it looks 
black or colored. But if the material be in the shape 
of a wedge, the light is bent out of its straight line, 
and you see the colors of the rainbow. Some light- 
rays flow faster than the others, and are not so bent. 
Through this wedge-shaped prism you see the colored 
rays — red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and 
violet. The dewdrop, diamond, a broken piece of 
glass, etc. , show you these colors. Newton first made 
a study of the subject. Fine microscopic lines drawn 
parallel also give the colors. Later scientists took up 
the subject and produced the spectroscope. But the 
foundations of this instrument were revealed from the 
Flood. 

What more beautiful sight than the rainbow in the 



270 THE RAINBOW THE FIRST SPECTROSCOPE 

cloud? From far-off days of the first rains it appeared 
in the sky. But after the Flood, God called the atten- 
tion of Noe, second father of our race, to the beautiful 
sight. Before science advanced men did not know how 
to read the lesson the Creator gave. In the rainbow 
the seven primary colors of white light falling on fine 
rain-drops, are reflected back as in a wonderful spec- 
troscope. There God gave the key which unlocks the 
mysteries of the whole material universe. This instru- 
ment reveals the wonders of the sun and stars, opens 
out vast fields to science and shows the materials of 
which the heavenly orbs are made. No instrument 
ever made is equal to the spectroscope, and that is the 
reason the Creator called men's attention to its powers. 

u I will set my bow in the clouds, and it shall be the 
sign of a covenant between me and the earth. And 
when I shall cover the sky with clouds, my bow shall 
appear in the clouds ; and I will remember my covenant 
with you, and with every living soul that beareth flesh, 
and there shall be no more waters of a flood to destroy 
all flesh. And God said to Noe, This shall be the sign 
of the covenant, which I have established between me 
and all flesh upon the earth." — Gen. ix. 14-17. 

The Hebrew word here translated God is Memra ; 
Greek Logos, Latin Yerbum English Word, Wisdom — 
God's Son. Let us see if there be any wisdom, 
science, secrets, or learning hidden in the rainbow, 
first hint of the spectroscope. 

We take metals and gases of our earth, heat them 
from the lowest temperature at which they get red-hot, 
and subject them to different degrees of heat up to the 
highest we can get in the electric furnace. As we 
increase the heat we examine the light with the spec- 
troscope, and note the lines scattered amid the dif- 
ferent colors of the rainbow. We do this for any 
metal or gas, then study, record and map the changes. 
Then we treat other metals the same way. In this 
manner we minutely examine every metal and gas of 
our earth as well as the different combinations of 



HOW THE SPECTROSCOPE WAS DEVELOPED 271 

metals and gases. In this way we find the colors and 
lines shown by every material of our earth when sub- 
ject to different degrees of heat. 

Each metal shows its own peculiar lines in the 
spectroscope, each gas its proper bands, and the hotter 
they are the more they will extend out at the violet 
end. The lines and bands are up and down at right 
angles to the colored band of light. The smallest 
particle of a metal invisible through the finest micro- 
scope or the most minute quantity of gas or chemical 
analysis will show its lines or bands. Here is the 
most wonderful instrument man ever made. It is 
called the spectroscope, ' ' to see images, ' ' : the colored 
band is named the spectrum, ' ' an image ' ' ; the plural 
is spectra, < ' images. ' ' 

Now we turn it to the sun. Curious black lines 
cross the horizontal band up and down ; in some cases 
they are wide apart, in other places they are crowded 
together. For a long time the meanings of these lines 
were not understood. They were accidentally dis- 
covered by Fraunhofer in 1823, using a little glass 
prism. But when he fixed the prism before a tele- 
scope with a 4-inch objective lens, he saw many more 
lines. Learned men took up the discovery, heated 
different materials, found each metal gave out different 
lines, not alwa} T s black like those found in the sun, 
but bright, and they were in the very same places as 
the dark lines of sunlight. These dark lines are caused 
by the intensely heated metal vapors in the sun which 
absorbed the light, passing through them. 

A metal heated so it becomes vapor absorbs or 
destroys the very same rays of light it gives out 
when a beam of light from any other source is passed 
through it. With the spectroscope we examine dif- 
ferent glowing metals in a vapor state and map out 
their lines. Then we turn the instrument to the sun 
and stars, and find the metals and materials composing 
the heavenly bodies. If we c ould reach out our hand 
to the stars, and take a part, of their substances and 



272 HOW WE FIND THE MATERIALS COMPOSING STARS 

by ordinary chemistry analyze these materials, we 
would not have as complete and perfect a knowledge 
of the composition of the minerals on them as this 
wonderful instrument gives us. No chemistry can 
equal this. 

A mass of incandescent hydrogen glowing with its 
own light, through this instrument gives only four 
lines, red, bluish-green, blue and violet, instead of a 
continued band. Sodium gives only the well-known 
D line in the yellow, while iron has 160 lines ranging 
from the red to blue. Thus every metal has its own 
peculiar lines and bands. Take any material and heat 
it till it becomes a gas, and you will find its lines, but 
with them also appear the lines of sodium, one of the 
elements of common salt, which is so diffused through 
nature as to be found everywhere. 

Get an iron pipe, say 5 feet long, place absolutely 
clean sodium in it, close both ends with glass, and 
expose the pipe to the heat of a furnace. Place an 
electric light at one end and the spectroscope at the 
other, so the light will pass through the sodium vapor, 
and you will see two black sodium lines imposed on 
the carbon lines of the electric light given out by the 
carbons. Measure these two black lines, fix their 
places in the band, jlhen turn your instrument to the 
sun, and you will see the very same two black lines. 
This shows that sodium in a state of vapor exists in 
the glowing atmosphere of the sun. We do the same 
with all the materials of earth, and find the same 
identical metals in the sun and stars. 

Thus we find glowing with fierce heat on the sur- 
face of our sun, magnesium, iron, calcium, nickel, 
aluminum, sodium, hydrogen, helium and the various 
other metals and gases of earth. We see also that 
these materials are not all in the same place on the sur- 
face of our king of day ; for the heavier are down deep, 
and the lighter metals float high over his surface. The 
sun's surface is composed of glowing metals in a state 
of intense heat, which vaporizes every one of them ; a 



THE WONDERFUL DISCOVERIES OF THE SPECTROSCOPE 273 

vast atmosphere of hydrogen surrounds him, higher up 
is helium, lighter than hydrogen, and then comes the 
corona, the composition of which we do not know. 

After Fraunhofer came Kirchoff, who improved the 
wonderful instrument, he was followed by Huggins, 
Rutherford and others to whom all honors are due. 
Then in the Pope's observatory at the Yatican, Father 
Secchi turned the spectroscope to the whole starry 
heavens. He found all the planets gave out the very 
same lines as the sun, because they shine by his re- 
flected light. But the fixed stars told a different 
story. For each gives out its own peculiar bands and 
lines, showing that each star is composed of different 
materials, in diverse quantities and combinations. 

The spectroscope turned to the stars opened up a 
field of discovery vast as the universe. It proved 
materials of which suns, and stars, and all the heavenly 
bodies are composed are identical with the metals we 
find on earth. It shows the very same laws rule the 
heavenly bodies as our world. Matter is the very 
same throughout the universe. On earth we find less 
than a hundred elements or different primary minerals, 
already half of these are found in the sun, and nearly 
as many in the stars. The time will come when every 
mineral of earth will be discovered in the stars. 

This conquest of mind over matter in so short a 
time is wonderful. "We can find one of these primeval 
elements of which worlds are composed only when it 
is on the surface of a sun or star, or when it floats as 
an incandescent mineral vapor near their surface. 
Many of the heavier metals as gold, platinum, lead, 
etc. , are so heavy they never come near these fiery 
star surfaces, for their weight keeps them down be- 
neath in the interior. 

Oxygen, without which no man or animal can live, 
was never found on the sun. But because it is so 
necessary for animal life, on earth it is the most 
abundant of all elementary substances. 

Ancient Greeks rubbed amber, found it attracted 



274: HOW ELECTRICITY WAS DEVELOPED 

pieces of paper, and thus discovered electricity, so 
called from the Greek, electron, 4 ' amber. ' ' Gradually 
a knowledge of this new mysterious force developed. 
Benjamin Franklin, that genius of the American revolu- 
tion, suspected the lightning flash was electric, and 
when he brought the lightning from the sky with his 
kite he tapped one of the great forces of nature. 

Europeans developed the science. Faraday searched 
out the laws of electricity flowing through wires. The 
Americans with their genius for invention and 
machinery applied these discoveries. Henry paved 
the path for Morse, who invented the telegraph ; Bell, 
the telephone ; and Marconi the wireless system which 
will in time unite the whole world in streams of 
trembling ether through air, sea and sky. The vast 
electric force passing from sun to earth and from star 
to star as well as light and heat has not yet been 
studied. We have hardly touched the vast force of 
electricity in the universe. What wonderful forces 
the Creator made for the use of mankind ! 

How electricity causes these actions we do not know. 
But along these lines it may be found that the weight 
of all things of earth and the attractions of the stars 
are caused by the ether. 

Heat, electricity, and light, are wave motions in 
the ether, traveling 186,500 miles a second through 
the ether filling all matter and the spaces between the 
stars. But it does not pass through metals with 
the same velocity and some metals prevent entirely or 
retard its passage. Some metals let heat through 
them, others pass but a part of the heat-rays. Elec- 
tricity passes through a silver wire with almost the 
velocity of light, but the metal is too costly, and copper 
wires, which allow it to pass through freely, are used 
almost entirely in dynamos, electric instruments and 
sometimes for telegraph and telephone service. Light 
passes freely through glass, crystals and many other 
substances, while electricity cannot pass through glass, 
silk and other materials. Why this is we do not 



HOW NOON IS FLASHED THROUGH THE UNITED STATES 275 

know except that the ether in these substances takes 
on peculiar forms. 

Electricity is taking the place of steam, running our 
railroads, moving our machinery, lighting and warm- 
ing our homes. We have only began to tap that vast 
storehouse of force coming from the sun's energy. 
And that sun is a vast storehouse of light, heat and 
electricity, the result of that movement the Spirit of 
God gave matter when He moved over the primeval 
matter the Eternal made diffused in space. Thus every 
movement of nature — of star, sun, planet, wind, water, 
life, can be traced back through nature's laws till we find 
it came from the primordial Mover, God. How little 
we think that every movement we make, every change 
in nature, the moves of every living thing came from 
God, who moved over matter and gave it these forces. 
Thus, under these wise laws, nature is like avast clock 
wound up, and going on, ticking out through creatures 
the force the Almighty impressed on the universe. If 
there were no Mover from the beginning, no motion 
would be now, no revolution of star, no season, no life 
— nothing but death. 

Two clocks with pendulums beating seconds stand 
beside the wall keeping sun time in the National Ob- 
servatory, Georgetown, D. C. Each tick they con- 
nect with a series of instruments, which at noon 
each day send out the time through the wires of the 
Western Union, Postal Telegraph, Bell Telephone, 
an opposition Telephone and the Washington Fire 
Department. "We sent the time once to the Lick 
Observatory, Mt. Hamilton, California. We carefully 
prepared, knew the exact time of both Institutions and 
found it took less than the 500ths parts of a second for 
the electricity to pass through the wires nearly 3,000 
miles," said Professor Hayden. 

Three and a quarter minutes before noon each day, 
the clock is connected with all the wires of the country, 
all business is suspended for the time being, and the 
warnings are sent out automatically by the clock with 



276 NOON TIME SENT THROUGH THE COUNTRY. 

a toothed wheel behind the second wheel. Tick, tick, 
go the instruments in every office throughout the whole 
country. In the final hundredths of a second of the 
noon hour at Washington, the tooth of the minute 
wheel touches a spring which closes the circuit, the 
announcement is flashed to every office in every city. 
The flow of the current releases the time-balls which 
have been hoisted to the top of the poles in the great 
cities. It takes only one-fifth of a second to travel 
from Washington to San Francisco where ^t is 9 A.M., 
the delay being caused by the relays. 

The country is divided into belts running north and 
south, called Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Western 
time, each being an hour slower than the adjoining 
eastern belt. At present more than 75,000 clocks are 
connected with the timepieces at Washington, and 
these regulate our timepieces. The railroads are run 
according to this time, for a difference even of a few 
seconds between the engineers' watches might result 
in collisions and death to passengers. At 11.59 of 
Dec. 31, at the last moment of the dying year, the 
time is sent around the whole world, traveling over 
land and under seas through lines over 1,180,000 miles, 
making the journey in ten seconds. 



CHAPTER XIV— HOW THE PHYSICAL FORCES PRE- 
PARED OUR WORLD FOR LIVING ORGANISMS. 

All physical forces, light, heat, electricity, etc. , are 
modes of movement caused by weight, their origin and 
foundation. The orbs and their forces were built of 
mists, metallic clouds, dust-like fine matters and gases 
the Creator made from nothing and spread throughout 
the spaces between the stars, which condensed by 
weight into the orbs, causing heat. 

If these materials had only attraction, or weight, 
they would have fallen together in straight lines into 
the densest parts. By the law of inertia matter re- 
mains where put till another force gives it impulse — 
movement. After giving an account of the creation 
of matter, the Hebrew text states, not as in our trans- 
lation, but : " And the Spirit of God was moving over 
the waters." (Gen. i. 2). He was there moving while 
creation was going on ; without that Power the metallic 
mists and gases called < < waters ' ' would have rested 
motionless in space. We find each orb has three forces 
— one round its axis, the other round its primary, and 
attraction. These three forces do not belong to the 
nature of matter, they must have come from a Mover 
who set the orbs whirling, after giving them weight. 
How hard it is to move a heavy mass ! What Almighty 
Person set these millions of orbs going? One who 
says the finger of God is not shown here is not a 
scientist, is unreasonable, is a fool. 

The universe is like a mighty clock, orbs parts of 
tremendous wheels, spokes are attractions, central orbs 
round which satellites and suns revolve like pinions ; 
no solid parts unite orbs, no springs or weights keep 
going this tremendous machinery, all are poised on 
finest mathematical calculations ; the mighty clock of 

277 



278 THE STUPENDOUS CLOCK GOD MADE. 

the universe without tick or stroke marks time, the 
duration of material things, while God, angel and 
human souls separated by death live in the eternal 
NOW, for no past or future are in heaven with God, 
but the ever present as before the world was. 

When man makes and sets going a timepiece, he 
interferes not with it till it wants his care to wind or 
fix, thus the Eternal lets nature go on following the 
time movements, laws and end he marked out from 
creation — these matters, force and life we call secondary 
causes are kept going by the Cause of causes. Who 
says God cannot stop our world revolving, preserve 
nature while it stops as in days of Joshua, that he 
cannot interfere with laws of nature, perform a wonder 
we call a miracle? When we learn the power of the 
Almighty, that is unthinkable. 

What man makes he can unmake ; will God be de- 
prived of the same perfection? will nature He made, 
the universe He set going, dictate terms to Him? Will 
a clock tell its maker he cannot stop its ticking? After 
making and bringing the universe to its perfection, 
God left nature to work out the end He proposed — 
man's use and benefit. 

This universe was created and finished during six 
great epochs of time. Afterwards God did not create 
new materials or species ; whence the account continues : 
' < And on the seventh day God ended his work, which 
he had made, and he rested on the seventh day from 
all his work which he had done." Gen. ii. 2. Here 
the Hebrew word for work is melakah. But his holy 
Providence still overlooks, upholds, enforces laws and 
keeps going the mighty machine. John v. 17. 

Other forces more astounding, mysterious, surpass- 
ing than weight, light, heat, or physical forces were 
wanted to perfect the universe — these were living prin- 
ciples, material organisms, ruled not by mathematics 
but by instinct in plant and animal, and by reason in 
man. Alone of all the orbs this little world was to be 
honored with life, image of life eternal in God. There-, 



HOW CONTINENTS AND MOUNTAINS WERE MADE. 279 

fore a long and special preparation was required to 
prepare our earth that living beings might flourish on 
her surface. Let us see how the natural forces prepared 
the surface of our planet that plants, animals, and 
mankind might continue their species till mankind ends 
in that secret remote date known only to the Eternal. 

Our world not exactly round, has the shape a fluid 
globe would have turning on its axis once a day — its 
equator bulges out, the shape it took when it was 
melted. If suddenly stopped it would break up and 
become a perfectly round sphere. It is 7,926 miles in 
diameter at the equator, 7,899 through the poles — the 
difference being about 28 miles. Weight makes waters 
flow down along its surface and they estimate the 
Mississippi runs up hill, the mouth is four feet higher than 
the source, being that much farther than its head- 
waters from the center of the earth. 

When shining like a secondary sun, earth lost heat 
and light, a crust of hot rocks covered its surface, eons 
of ages passed and this crust got thicker. Interior 
lost heat and contracted ; crusts became miles deep, 
these broke, bulged up, forming continents, long ridges 
of mountain ranges. Mighty volcanoes belched forth 
lava fire and flames from melted interior. Attraction 
of sun and moon caused mighty tides, cooling crusts 
rose and fell, some in the beginning miles high, later 
only a few feet, and cool rocky masses floated on fiery 
oceans as ice swims on water. Thus continents, oceans, 
plains, mountain ranges, hills, valleys and great plateaus 
were formed on granite foundations crystallized of 
melted world. 

Experiments with pendulum and other instruments 
in various parts of the world show the outside crust of 
earth is not as dense as the interior, and some scientists 
think the interior of our world is not in a liquid form 
because of the enormous pressure. 

Only after the surface of our world, during untold 
ages, had cooled, after the surface passed through 
mighty cataclysms of upheavals and destructive forces 



280 SOW THE OCEANS WERE MADE. 

permanent continents, lands, mountains, plains, and 
dales were made lasting. During these later times 
only plants and animals lived; they were killed in 
countless numbers, for we find their remains all over 
the world. The world was then building its surface 
for one kind of creature, man, who was created last to 
be the head of all, for he alone has reason. Will any 
one say Providence showed no wisdom when he post- 
poned man's coming till his palace was ready to receive 
him — the world's king? 

If man had been made before these ages of upheavals, 
millions would have been killed, mourning would fill 
the world. Earthquakes, volcanoes, floods, storms, 
lightnings we suffer from once in a while, give us a 
faint idea of the awful forces of nature which shaped 
our planet before man. Nature was not yet balanced. 
The atmosphere was filled with carbonic acid gas, the 
weather was so warm the waters now in oceans then 
floated in vast clouds, for the earth was giving out heat, 
and the atmosphere was filled with steam. When the 
earth cooled these waters fell down, washed salt from 
lands and ran into ocean deeps. 

While seven salt water seas branch into bays, straits 
and smaller bodies, three great oceans cover 112,000,- 
000 miles of earth's surface. The Pacific has 70,000,- 
000 square miles, the Atlantic 25,000,000 and the Indian 
Ocean 17,000,000. These three are mostly under the 
equator, whence by ocean currents and winds they 
spread the heat to lands far north and south. Was 
there no design in thus shaping the surface of earth 
with these deep depressions holding these waters which 
modify the elimate ? 

Numerous and careful observations of earthquakes 
which raged before man was created show they are 
now only local, and take their rise about 30 to 35 miles 
below the surface, consequently between the solid rocky 
crust and the melted interior. The disturbance gives 
rise to two series of vibrations — one in the solid crust, 
the other through the melted interior. The former is 



THE CAtJSE OF EARTHQUAKES. 281 

more or less local, while the latter spread far and wide, 
even to the other side of the world. The tremors 
spread through the crust like waves on water when you 
throw in a stone, a velocity of about 3.7 miles a second, 
while through the melted interior they pass with the 
velocity of 6.2 miles a second, reaching the opposite 
side of the earth in 22 minutes. 

The foundations of the house where these lines are 
being written rest on the rock underlying New York. 
While blasting for the tunnels under East Kiver near- 
by, the house shook precisely like the houses in San 
Francisco during tremors, being precisely the same but 
not as long or severe. The conclusion forced on the 
writer is, that an earthquake is an explosion of gases 
down deep in the earth. These gases or melted 
materials burst with a force a thousand times greater 
than any explosion on the surface, as they flow from 
one place to another between the solid and melted 
rocks. 

The high velocity proves that the tremors are propa- 
gated under conditions not found in any solids, and 
that the interior of the earth must be several times 
more rigid than steel. The pressure of the rocks in- 
crease as we descend, and at a depth of 42-1/2 miles 
they press with the weight of 20,000 atmospheres. 
Therefore the interior of the earth, although melted, 
has a greater density than any rocks on its surface. 
"When the lava is shot up through volcanoes, the pres- 
sure is removed and it becomes a liquid till it cools. 

Astronomy shows the mean density of the earth is 
5-1/2 that of water, denser than any rock, hence the 
density of earth's interior must be greater, because of 
the weight it sustains of continents, seas and surface 
crust. The conclusions of Airy, Koche, Du Ligondes 
and others show, that a rotating mass of liquid like 
the earth becomes an oblate spheroid, flattened at its 
poles like the earth, its flatness depending on its 
materials, their densities, the velocity of rotation, and 
the force of gravity at its surface. The earth must 



282 THE LAND AND OCEAN SURFACES COMPARED. 

have been fluid to produce the shape it has. Du 
Ligondes shows that the heat developed in condensing 
is 108,000 calories for each kilogramme of its mass, 
and that now it is losing one calorie per kilogramme 
in 2,000,000 years. But in the beginning the loss of 
heat was very great, as the melted surface was exposed 
to the cold of the spaces between the stars, before the 
atmosphere and water fell to cover its surface and the 
rocks became solid. The earth has a vast reservoir of 
heat. Will the day come when we will use this tre- 
mendous power of heat stored up in our planet. 

The oceans cover nearly three-quarters of the 
earth's surface — 72 per cent of the earth is covered 
with water, and only 28 per cent is land. The average 
height of the land oversea level is 2,250 feet, the mean 
depth of the seas and oceans being 13,860 feet, thus 
the water surfaces are two and a half times that of the 
land. The average depth of ocean waters is more than 
six times the average height of the land, because the 
land for the most part stretches out as plains, valleys 
and plateaus, the high mountains covering but a com- 
paratively small portion of the earth's surface. Al- 
though greatest depths of oceans about equal the height 
of the highest mountains, the oceans are wide, deep 
depressions, like enormous plains, covered with water 
deep enough to flood the highest mountains of America 
and Europe if placed on ocean floor, except the summits 
of one or two of them. The whole bulk of the oceans, 
even leaving out the shallow seas, is more than 13 
times that of all the land above sea level. 

If earth's surface were leveled so it would be a true 
sphere, the whole earth would be covered with water 
two miles deep. This shows that oceans and conti- 
nents have not changed places during times after life 
was created, that plants and animals did not spread 
from one continent to another. No great continent 
could be raised up without a corresponding depression 
in some ocean, or there would be a vast hollow under 
the rising land into which the water would flow. 



WHY THE OCEANS ARE SO LARGE. 283 

Few think of the influence of water on the climate. 
If we had plenty of water on land for all animals and 
plants, and no great oceans, it is certain vast and varied 
forms of living beings would not continue. Oceans 
produce two effects on the rainfall. Water slowly 
stores up latent heat more than almost any other 
material, which it gives out with equal slowness. 
The surface of oceans become heated during direct 
sunlight, becoming warm down several feet. The 
air has less power of storing up heat, so a pound 
of water will heat four pounds of air to the same de- 
gree. But as air is 770 times lighter than water, a 
cubic foot of water will heat more than 3,000 feet of 
air to the same temperature. Therefore the enormous 
surface of the oceans, especially in the tropics, warms 
the lower and denser portions of the atmosphere rest- 
ing on it day and night. This hot air rises, other air 
sweeps in and causes winds ; thus the warmth is carried 
to all parts of the world giving out this heat to plants, 
animals and man. Does this not show a design? for 
if it were not so, few living beings could exist. 

It seems at first the much larger surface of earth 
covered with water compared to the land regions is a 
detriment. But if the case were reversed, if the con- 
tinents were larger than the seas, most of the world 
would be desert. For little water would be evapo- 
rated from the land, hardly any from these deserts, and 
then rain would not fall. It is very probable that if 
the waters in the seas were carried away by a planet 
passing near us, or if these waters were annihilated, all 
that lives would die for want of water. There would 
be no rains, rivers, lakes, because these would dry up 
within a short time. The vast surfaces on which the sun 
shines, send into the air in the form of invisible vapor 
great quantities of water, which the winds carry over 
the lands where it falls in the form of rain, giving life. 

Without water there can be no life, for it forms a 
very large part of everything which lives on earth. 
A man's body is three-fourths water, and this element 



2 84 HOW VALUABLE WATER IS. 

is found in certain proportions in every organism. 
"Without it neither plant nor animal can exist, for they 
must drink at stated times. Water is far more neces- 
sary than food, and comes next to air. The sufferings 
caused by want of water in deserts are indescribable. 
The dry air absorbs the moisture of the body, causing 
first an intense thirst, and later the most awful tor- 
tures. Traveling through the Sahara desert of Africa, 
the writer, because of weakness caused by thirst could 
not keep up with the others. At a distance he saw a 
Bedouin tent and rode to it. A woman, clothed in 
the garb of Abraham's day, would hardly notice the 
" Christian dog." But when he showed her little son 
a coin he brought a vessel of warm brackish water. 
Never will he forget how well that almost filthy water 
tasted. 

During the enormous geological times, when this 
world was being formed for man's residence, vast 
floods washed the surface of the world, mighty forces 
played over our earth, guided by the Force infinite in 
power, preparing for the last creature, man. They 
tore the rocks, they ground the gravel, they crushed 
the sand, they formed the soil, that plant and animal 
might live for mankind's use and benefit. See the 
sand and gravel banks, the soil now covering the 
earth's rocky foundations — look at the great plains 
stretching out, and learn the lesson of the influence of 
water on the world, which was to enter into every- 
thing and be the most important element of living 
organisms. Who says no Designer was here, presid- 
ing over the building of a world, making it ready for 
life? 

Water must be present in such quantities, and so 
diffused in every part of the world so as to be taken in 
by living organisms. In deserts, where no water is 
found, no organism lives. Nothing is so bare, so 
dead, so repulsive, as these vast dry plains and hills 
and mountains, hot, bleak, dry, deserted appalling. 

The atmosphere or air which living beings breathe 



INFLUENCE OF THE AIK ON LIFE. 285 

must also have several qualities. First, it must have 
a certain density, as a storer of heat coming from the 
sun, with oxygen, carbonic acid, and water in a state 
of vapor, in enough quantities to sustain life. We 
have seen how too great heat or cold destroys life. 
To regulate the sun's rays, the atmosphere must be 
dense; if not, the sun's heat would burn in the sun- 
light, and it would freeze in the shadows as we see on 
the moon. Therefore when this world was made, the 
gases forming the air were made by a far-seeing 
Creator, who destined the world later to be covered 
with life. 

Air has a peculiar property of allowing the sunlight 
to pass through it down to earth it warms ; the air 
acts like a blanket preventing the too rapid escape of 
the heat. If this were not so, the heat would be lost 
every night, and plant and animal would freeze before 
the dawn of another day. This is seen in high moun- 
tain altitudes, where the cold becomes greater the 
higher you ascend. Even in the tropics, snow lies on 
the ground on high mountain-tops all the year round, 
because the air is too thin to retain the heat. There 
the nights are very cold. At about 18,000 feet, the air 
has only half its density at sea level, and planet life 
ceases, for there reigns eternal frost. Whence, if our 
atmosphere had only half its density all waters would 
be frozen, ice and snow would cover the world ; seas, 
lakes and rivers would be forever frozen solid and 
nothing could live. Does not this show design, the 
footprints of the primeval Cause who gave us all the 
air we have — not too much, not half as much ; we have 
just what we want that we might live? 

If the air were half as dense, water would rise twice 
as fast from the surfaces of the oceans. As the vapor 
rose it would soon freeze and fall on sea and land, 
causing everlasting winter. The cold would be so 
great and so long continued that life would cease. 
Even if by some accident a wandering planet passed 
near the earth and attracted a quarter of the air sur- 



286 THE LAW OF EVAPORATING WATER. 

rounding the world, a large part of the surface of our 
planet would within a few months be a snow-and-ice- 
clad waste, and all the higher beings, including man, 
could not live. But the machinery of the universe 
was planned and hung on universal weight, so planets 
and suns revolve round each other forever, and no 
great body has ever struck the world since life was 
created. As we look over the universe, we find no 
sign of such a calamity ever threatening our world. 
All these things were foreseen and provided by Him 
who built the universe. 

By a law of nature, the pure sweet water alone rises 
without the salt. Suppose salt were ruled by a law 
which would cause it to be evaporated with the water, 
salt rain would fall on the land and kill the vegetation. 
Vegetation will not flourish on alkali soils. Therefore 
a wise Providence gave laws to nature. Who but the 
Creator determined earth and the planets near our 
globe, as Mars and Venus, would have water, that 
their masses would be great enough to retain the 
oxygen, nitrogen and hydrogen of which air and water 
are composed, while the moon and other bodies have no 
water? These gases must have been created in the 
spaces near which the earth travels round the sun, fell 
on the earth, and attracted by earth they combined 
with mighty explosions to form the great abundance 
of the waters we find on earth. 

If the earth's surface were a regular plain, not in 
places raised up into continents and mountains, plateaus, 
and islands, the waters would cover the whole globe 
nearly two miles deep. Now who formed these con- 
tinents and highlands, as we find them now raised so 
high over the level of the seas, so living beings may 
exist on them? If continents were not thrown up, 
only the highest mountains would appear as small 
islands in an enormous ocean covering the whole 
world. 

No explanation of the formation of the great con- 
tinents is reasonable except that at a very late period 



CONTINENTS SHOW A PROVIDENCE. 287 

of the earth's formation, the moon, our satellite, far 
larger in proportion to its primary, our earth, than any 
other satellite in the solar system, was torn from the 
earth. 

Starting down in the waters of the Atlantic under 
the equator, the Gulf Stream sweeps mid the West 
Indian Isles, comes up along the coast of Florida with 
the velocity of five miles an hour, flows a mighty ocean 
river a few miles to the east of our coast, and crosses 
the Atlantic, bringing the heat of the tropics to the 
northern shores of Europe. Without this flow of 
waters England would have the climate of Labrador, 
and Norway, etc. , that of Greenland. A thousand 
currents we do not know flow in oceans, cooling heated 
lands, and warming otherwise cold regions, making 
life flourish in vast regions which without them would 
be deserts. These currents are caused by the positions 
of the continents, which if in any portion or part of 
the world's surface would make life impossible over 
the greater part of our planet. Will you say no Power 
presided over the formation of these continents, or that 
an accident placed them in these positions? 

Suppose these continents were along the equator, 
and the great oceans round the poles. The waters of 
the northern and southern oceans would be always 
frozen, lands under a burning sun intensely heated, no 
ocean currents could flow north and south to modify 
the extremes of heat and cold. The polar waters 
would be frozen, lands under tropics burned up, little 
rain would fall, most lands would be vast deserts, and 
no fish could live in seas bound in everlasting fetters of 
frost and snow. How could living organisms exist 
in these extremes? Did no Providence shape the 
continents? 

American continents stretch from almost the north 
pole to Cape Horn, the old continent from Siberia to 
the end of Africa. Our two greatest oceans, Atlantic 
and Pacific, stretch almost from pole to pole. The 
warm waters under the equator flow north and south 



288 HILLS AND MOUNTAINS CHANGE CLIMATE. 

along the shores of the continents bringing their gentle 
heat to far north and to extreme south, tempering the 
cold of these regions, and cold streams flow far below 
the ocean surface to cool lands under tropics. The 
Japan current comes up from the Indian ocean, sweeps 
along the eastern shores of Asia, having equatorial 
motion from west to east, bathes the lands along 
Alaska, turns down south, giving Washington and 
Oregon a climate like that of the north of Europe and 
the British Isles, making California the richest fruit 
country in the world. 

As the land rises and falls along sides of hills, moun- 
tains and vales, the higher we rise or lower we go 
heat changes, so we find the climate varies within 
short distances. If the surface of the earth was flat, 
we would have to travel many miles to find the same 
change of temperature we feel going up or down these 
slopes. If we draw a line along these side-hills, we 
find an equal climate winding along, and we can con- 
tinue these lines for many miles. They are called 
isothermal, " equal heat," lines. We begin in a 
valley where the heat is great, ascend to the top of a 
high mountain covered with snow, and the changes of 
temperature will be the same as though we went from 
near the tropics to the frozen north. Thus within 
short distances most varied degrees of heat prevail, 
productions ranging from down near the tropics to the 
arctic zone. Thus the continents were thrown up high 
into the air, to give the varied productions of the 
different warm and cold regions within a few miles. 
Was there no Providence in this? 

The oldest rocks on the face of the earth are found 
in the Adirondacks: "Bark Eaters," thus called from 
a tribe of Indians the Six Nations drove into these 
harsh rugged mountains where they had to live on 
bark of trees. The granites were crystallized into 
large forms, when the hot earth cooled slowly. Other 
and younger mountains are formed of softer rocks, 
their sides, torn by weather, slope. But the Adiron- 



OCEANS AND CONTINENTS FIXED FEATURES. 289 

dacks are high and steep, offering the most picturesque 
scenery of the world. The mountains are sometimes 
as steep as the side of a house, rising thousands of feet 
in the air. Till 1854 these mountains were covered 
with great white pine forests, having enough timber 
to build all the cities of New England ; but this year 
hunters set them on fire ; it raged all summer, extend- 
ing from the St. Lawrence to near Saratoga. Well 
the writer remembers the awful conflagrations which 
raged that year. For years the blackened stumps 
stood. Poplar, beech, birch, etc. , took the place of the 
pines. 

Looking at a globe or map of the world, imagine 
the ocean bottom rising up to join South America with 
Africa, or the latter with Australia, as some scientists 
think took place when plants and animals were dis- 
tributed. While this upheaval happened, some other 
continent would have been depressed to fill the hollow 
in the deeps of the globe caused by the upheaval. A 
continent of the same size would be depressed below 
sea level, or the bottom of the ocean would fall to such 
an extent that the waters would flow into it and lower 
the sea level all over the world. 

If the continents were thrown up from the bottom 
of the ocean, as many scientific men say who find that 
once they were under water, such changes would take 
place as would destroy all life in the world. For 
plants made to breathe air cannot live in water, or 
water-plants in air. The oceans then were deep de- 
pressions from the beginning, and with the exception 
of narrow belts around the continents, as far out as 
6,000 feet of depth, no great changes have taken place 
in their bottoms since life began on earth, with the 
exception of a few volcanoes thrown up. The great 
continents then have been from the beginning" of life 
fixed and stable. 

The greatest change regarding life was made by the 
ice-caps coming down from the poles, before which 
these regions had warm, balmv climates at stated 



290 WHY THE WINTERS ARE GETTING WARMER. 

epochs. "We find three times these ice changes took 
place. First, in the remote Eocene period came down 
an ice-cap which afterwards receded ; a warm climate 
came and melted them and years in millions passed. 
Then came the Permian ice-cap, for the second time 
covering the world round the poles, extending into the 
temperate zones. This melted, balmy weather pre- 
vailed for ages, then came the third ice-cap. We find 
its remains in sands, boulders, scratches on rocks, etc. , 
from central New York, where the deep dip begins 
inclosing Ontario waters, west south of the great Lakes 
across the continent through Asia and the north of 
Europe. We find its remains or of the other ice-caps 
stretch across the south of South America, covering 
continents with ice and snow miles deep as to-day in 
Greenland. 

We are now receding from the rigors of the last 
glacial grasp, how long after did man appear we can- 
not say. We are going away from this epoch of 
excessive cold. Winters are getting milder, summers 
cooler. Glaciers on Alps, Andes, Alaska, Grinnell 
Land, on mountains round the south pole, in all parts 
of the world, are getting smaller, slowly receding as 
we approach the heated regions round mighty Arcturus. 
As some say, we are now entering the mighty spring- 
time of the 105,000 years of our revolution with our 
sun and his planets round this tremendous sun center 
of the universe. 

Continents show sea deposits of geological ages 
covering their whole surfaces. All continents were 
once entirely covered with ocean waters and again 
raised up, and deep clays cover all the ocean bottoms. 
They offer complete series of rocks of all the geological 
epochs and remains of fresh water deposits. Great 
oceans have islands forced up by volcanic action or 
built up by corals, but not one of these islands shows 
any ancient stratified rocks, such as we find in con- 
tinents, nor any land animals or plants belonging to 
the continents except those brought there within 



FORMATION OF OCEAN DEPRESSIONS. 291 

historic times. Each continent has its own special 
plants and animals, many of them not being found on 
the other great divisions of the land, but most of these 
plants and animals can live on the other continents. 
Corn, tobacco, potatoes, etc., found in America, are 
now grown in many parts of the old world. The 
eucalyptus tree, native of Australia, flourishes in Cali- 
fornia and other warm regions. It would take too 
long to tell how man or nature transported plants and 
animals from one part of the world to another where 
now they flourish. 

Oceans' bottoms have been explored, the materials 
brought up show that they were never raised up like 
continents. All continents have high mountains, some 
of their sides, formed of rocks, being very steep. But 
the ocean bottoms are vast plains, which would appear 
almost level if all the water were drained away. 
These ocean basins are so vast and wide, that no de- 
posits from rivers or shores ever reach them, or could 
have filled their valleys. No waves disturb their sur- 
faces below a few hundred feet. The bottoms are 
covered with ooze composed of diatomes and micro- 
scopic shells of animals living in the waters above. 
Below this covering the ocean floors are composed of 
clays peculiar only to ocean depths. These show that 
the oceans were never raised up to form continents. 

It is hard for us to say how these deep depressions on 
the surface of our planet were made, except that God 
made the laws of nature so they formed the earth as 
we find it now. Air and water then in form of steam, 
partaking in the heat of the cooling earth, surrounded 
it as steam and dense clouds high up in the sky. This 
water fell and filled the deep ocean depressions. 

All agree that before lowest living forms appeared, 
slowly rocks were worn away, by vast floods which 
washed earth's surface, rains fell in heavy floods, great 
oceans swept over the whole world, tearing down 
mountains, grinding stones into sand and gravel. In 



292 THE AGES BEFORE MAN APPEARED. 

seas, lakes and valleys debris were deposited to be 
again upheaved by internal forces. Then valleys and 
plains were carved from mountains and hills. Winds, 
waves, floods and rivers washed the earth, forming 
soils, sands, and gravels. Sand-banks, gravel beds, 
round stones, and little pebbles are seen all over earth's 
surface. The whole land is composed of these soils 
and beds. Without them vegetables could not grow, 
for plants cannot grow on rocks. They cannot send 
their roots down into solid stones, nor can solid rocks 
retain water. Wherever we dig, if we go deep 
enough we find the solid rock underlying the soil. 
Who but a wise Providence presided over the forma- 
tion of the soils and thus prepared for living organisms 
which long after appeared on every part of the earth's 
surface ? 

Many mountains show marks of floods and loftiest 
summits have stratified rocks formed by water. These 
often contain shells, bones of animals and forms of 
plants which lived in water or in air of these remote 
periods. The animals of this remote time belonged to 
species which long ago became extinct. Yet animal 
and plant lived, while mighty forces then sported 
over earth surfaces. Beyond this epoch we find no 
signs of living beings. This rapid glance at our world 
before man, shows that not all at once, but gradually. 
God made plants and animals of higher and higher 
kinds and species till at last he ended with the noblest 
kinds of vegetables and animals, which man required 
for his use and benefit. What was the use of creating 
these before there was a human race to use them ! As 
the universe was made for man, after he came to take 
possession of his residence no other forms of life were 
made. No plant or animal of new kinds and species 
are now appearing. We can only change and modify 
species within certain limits. The six great epochs of 
creation ended. We are now in the seventh when no 
new creation is taking place. 



THE SIX VAST EPOCHS OF GENESIS. 293 

The word for " day " in the original Hebrew, from 
Gen. i. 5, down through Genesis, is yom, meaning a 
day of twenty-four hours, a short period of time or an 
epoch of vast undetermined length. Learned men al- 
ways looked on the days of Genesis, during which God 
made the world, as vast periods of time, and only 
1 little minds have understood this word to mean a day 
of twenty-four hours. In the words of the greatest 
mind of any age — St. Augustine: " What kind of 
days these were, it is very difficult, or even impossible, 
for us to say how long they were. ' ' De Civitate Dei, 
L. xi, Chap. VI. Every learned man looked on these 
six days of creation as vast epochs, during which the 
world of matter, the plants, the animals and man were 
made. 

If these "days" of the Bible were of twenty-four 
hours each, the text would be " morning and evening 
were the same day." But each of the six days ends 
with these words : ' ' And evening and morning ' ' were 
after each day. But evening never comes before 
morning the same day. What does this mean? 

Sts. Augustine, Thomas, and great writers say 
" evening " means the darkness of angelic minds, and 
morning ' * learning, ' ' as we say " he is a very en- 
• lightened man." The angels did not see the wonders 
I of God's might, till he showed it to them in the crea- 
tion and development of the universe. As the pano- 
rama of creation was unfolded before them during 
these six vast epochs, there was brought forth in each 
epoch a new creation, millions of suns, plants, animals 
and, lastly, man, they were taught the marvelous un- 
known power of the Creator. A part, led by their 
leader, Lucifer, "the Light-bearer," had fallen away, 
because he got what we call "a swelled head," re- 
belled and wanted to be adored in that time of angelic 
ignorance. From ignorance — ' ' darkness, ' ' they passed 
in that heavenly university to knowledge, < ' morning. ' ' 
Their text-book was nature, each creature was a letter, 
each species a lesson, each physical power a chapter, 



294 LIGHT BEFORE THE SUN WAS MADE. 

each department of mineral, vegetable, animal and 
mankind a book, through which they passed before they 
graduated with a better knowledge of the Almighty. 

How could there be light before the sun ? But 
other stars gave forth that light, and the objection 
some writers advance has no foundation. For take 
away sun and moon, and starlight still pours down on 
earth. The great ring-cluster, the Milky Way, we 
described with its condensed mass of millions of suns, 
during these long geological periods, when these 
suns were much warmer than now, poured down their 
light and heat on the earth. Again, the Bible text 
says plants were created before the sun and moon, 
Gen. v. 11-12. The climate of these geological 
epochs differed from that during the time after man 
appeared. This warm balmy climate covered the 
earth, even almost to the poles. Arcturus, and the suns 
of this central star-cluster poured their light and heat 
down on all parts of the world when they were 
brighter and hotter than now. For they have now 
lost most of the light and heat which sustained the 
rank vegetation of these epochs. These stars revolve 
in all directions round our earth, up to 90°, and warm 
the world on every side even to the poles, where 
plants flourished in far-off days before man. 

What kept up the light and heat energies of these 
stars during these long periods, and what built up our 
sun with the enormous forces he poured out on the 
worlds ? All around the star cluster, to which we 
belong, is a vacant space on all sides — a hollow void 
without matter. The matter which was once there 
fell into the suns and kept up their light and heat dur- 
ing these periods, when they beamed down on the 
earth before the sun was made. The remains of these 
materials still fall on earth in form of meteorites and 
shooting stars. 

All geological evidence shows that conditions favor- 
able to life prevailed during these vast epochs before 
man appeared, and there was no break in these long 



>THE BEGINNING OF GEOLOGY. 295 

ages but a greater raising or lowering temperature even 
round the poles. An abundant vegetation then ex- 
tended far towards both poles, and animal life was 
equally abundant. Type after type of animal came 
forth according to the conditions required for his race, 
developed, then died out, and other higher types took 
their places. Great beasts then sported in waters mild 
and balmy under an almost tropical climate extending 
to the Arctic Circle. Some of these beasts were 12 to 
40 feet long and weighed as many tons. 

From earliest times man found fascination in the 
study of the earth's surface. Traditions come down 
among ancient races that the world was made during 
vast periods of time. Egyptians and East Indians saw 
Nile and Ganges pouring forth vast deposits into seas, 
building deltas. Men taking stones out of quarries 
and excavating in the soil found forms of former life. 
The laws of Manu ruling monasteries and convents 
almost since the Flood, in the first chapter states that 
alternating times of destruction and renovation existed 
in eternal succession through periods of thousands of 
years, during which creatures were brought forth. 
Ovid gives Pythagoras' doctrines of changes slowly 
going on modifying earth's surface. Aristotle sees 
interchanges between sea and land, and volcanoes and 
earthquakes, and speaks of what long epochs there 
must have been during the eternity of time which went 
before man. Strabo writes of lands rising up and being 
submerged. 

But we will not go into the history of geology, " a 
discourse on the earth's surface." How this new 
:science has progressed within the last few centuries ! 
When we study the crust of our world we find the 
lowest rocks all of crystallized granite, which proves that 
once the whole world was a fluid mass of melted rock 
which slowly cooled. That granite is the foundation of 
our world, the primeval formation God built on which 
to rest his superstructures of hill, and mount, and plain, 
and vale. What wisdom is shown here ! For what is 



296 THE SCIENCE OP THE FIRST BIBLE CHAPTER. 

harder and more lasting than granite? If other rocks 
formed the foundations of our world, they might break 
under the weight of continents and even the buildings 
of our cities might be insecure or plunge us into the 
fiery interior of the earth. 

We never find a trace of life in granite. For what 
could live in fiery heat of melted rocks? Then 
vast ages passed and the world cooled during these ages 
or epochs of time. First, the azoic, " without life," was 
followed by the eozoic, " the beginning of life," then 
came the paleozoic, " ancient life," the mesozoic, " mid- 
dle life," and later the cenozoic, " recent life." How 
long these epochs lasted we do not know. Some esti- 
mate each at millions of years. The forms of life we 
find in primeval rocks are all of the lowest plants which 
could live in these ages when the world was cooling 
and giving out its balmy, gentle heat. The light of the 
vast ball of the sun shone out on earth before it had 
contracted to become a comparatively small body. The 
planets were then all hot, — the larger ones shining with 
their own light. Thus vegetation flourished before the 
sun and moon were made to shine by day and night as 
now. 

Then followed periods of time, each millions of 
years' duration. Plants of higher orders were created. 
First came the Fossiliferous, in which water animals, 
as reptiles, fishes, and shell-fish of lowest forms appear. 
Then came the Mesozoic in which we find the first re- 
mains of land animals. Then the world passed into the 
Cenozoic, or Tertiary, in which the higher animals came 
forth. At last came man, creation's crown. Read the 
first chapter of Genesis and you will find that this exact 
order of creation is described. When Geology became a 
science, men took the day mentioned in Genesis to mean 
one of our ordinary days, and some rejected this ac- 
count of creation. But as science advanced they found 
that Moses was taught by a Scientist wonderfully wise. 
In all literature there is not a page so deep, so scientific, 
so condensed, so wonderful as the first Bible chapter. 



WHY GOD REVEALED THE CREATION. 297 

The more man advances in knowledge, the brighter 
and more marvelous seems that account. In the days 
of the childhood of our race the Creator revealed how he 
made the universe, and every discovery since has only 
confirmed that story. We have given but a few hints here 
and there, for to explain this chapter of the Bible would 
require a whole book going into every science known 
to mankind. Minds only who have a knowledge of one 
or two departments of science, doubt that account, so 
short, so deep, so majestic, written in days of deepest 
paganism. When all men worshipped gods, God re- 
vealed it to show that the universe was not eternal, but 
brought forth from nothing at His word. 

Geologists do not agree as to the length of these six 
tremendous epochs while God was creating. Many think 
that from the time of the fossil-bearing rocks to our day, 
200 millions of years passed. Professor Ramsay says 
of the low animal life of the Cambrian period, " In this 
earliest known varied life, we find no evidence of its 
having lived near the beginning of the zoological series 
. . . and the climates of seas and lands were of the 
very same kind as those the world enjoys at the present 
day." Professor Huxley held the same opinion re- 
garding the vast times of these eons of ages. " It is 
almost appalling to reflect how far back in the Paleozoic 
times we must go before we arrive at that common stock 
from which the crocodiles, lizards, Ornithoscelida and 
Plesiosauria, which had attained so great a development 
in the Triassic epoch must have been derived." These 
men, holding the evolution theory of the development 
of life, were forced to go back to vast times to uphold 
their favorite theory. 

The most learned physicists, declare our sun could 
not have existed as a light-giving body for so long a time. 
Lord Kelvin, greatest scientist of our day, says. " Now 
we have the irrefragable dynamics proving, that the 
whole life of our sun as a luminary is a very moderate 
number of million years, probably less than 50 million ; 



298 SCIENCE CONTRADICTS EVOLUTION. 

possibly between 50 and 100." All bold tbe sun is cool- 
ing, and tbat its life in the future will be much less 
than in tbe past. Lord Kelvin in another place de- 
clares tbat it bas been giving light for not more tban 
20 millions of years, tbat it will continue to sbine with 
same light not longer than about 5 or 6 million of years. 

We see geology and physics contradict the theory of 
evolution which required such vast periods for the devel- 
opment of life. This forces us back again to the first 
traditions, to the original revelation, that God acting in 
nature brought these living creatures into being by His 
own direct power, and not through natural selection as 
held by some. In human history, as far back as we can 
go into prehistoric times, while man lived on earth, 
although a great many animals became extinct, there is 
no proof that any new animals came by evolution. 
Evolution took the world by storm, as any novelty will. 
But we cannot point to any new animal which has been 
developed, and his nature changed since history began. 
The beasts remain the same in size, shape, instinct, spe- 
cies and family like those which lived on earth since man 
was made. 

Times are coming when many animals will become as 
extinct as those which lived during these vast periods 
before man appeared. Perhaps a few will be preserved 
in parks, cages, and preserves. The world was made 
for mankind, and he is overrunning the earth. Tame 
animals were made to be his servants, these he will pre- 
serve, for they are useful. How helpless each and every 
beast is in any contest with man ! How easy it would 
be to kill the most powerful animal or to destroy every 
brute which lives! The whale and elephant are com- 
pletely in our power. How would one of them survive 
a shot of one of our 12-inch cannons ? How true these 
words said to all mankind in our first father and mother : 

" And God blessed them, and God said to them, In 
crease and multiply and fill the earth, and subdue it, 
and rule over the fishes of the sea and the fowls of the 



THE DIFFERENT GEOLOGICAL EPOCHS. 299 

air, and all living creatures that move upon the earth. 
And God said, Behold I have given yon every herb 
bearing seed upon the earth, and all trees that have in 
themselves seed of their own kind to be your meat. And 
to all beasts of the earth, and to every fowl of the air and 
to all that move on the earth, and wherein there is life, 
that you may have to feed on. And it was so done." 
Gen. i. 30. 

Man is master of earth because God gave him this 
mastery. He did this because he made the world for 
him, and gave him reason, the image of his own eternal 
Reason. But for perhaps millions of years before he 
made him the Eternal was preparing this world for 
his habitation. Before the king comes to live in his 
capital, they build and prepare for him a palace in which 
he will reside. So during these long epochs God was 
preparing this world as man's residence. 

While man lived on earth little important changes 
have taken place on its surface, for the palace is all 
built and made ready before the king comes. It was 
soon after the glacial period that man was made. Be- 
yond that we find the Tertiary period, the great geolo- 
gist Lyall calls the Pliocene, when all over the world 
appeared higher forms of animal and vegetable life, fore- 
runners of those of our day. We go back into the next, 
called the Miocene age, when lower forms of life left 
their remains. Then America, Europe and Asia had a 
warmer climate, and mammals like those now living in 
the tropics, but of distinct species and families, lived far 
to the north and south near the poles. Still farther back 
we go into the Secondary, or Mesozoic age, where we find 
vast changes took place on earth when still lower forms 
of life existed. Then we go beyond it to the Primary or 
Paleozoic age, where the fossil remains show but sim- 
plest forms of life. 

If we examine the surfaces of continents and islands 
over the whole world, we will hardly find a large plain 
exactly flat. From highest mountains to seashores, the 
land is diversified by hills, slopes, and plains. There 



300 THE WORLD* S THREE GREATEST PLAINS. 

are few inclosed depressions from which the water can- 
not run and these form lakes and ponds. The surface 
of the earth could not have been better shaped than we 
find it for vegetation to flourish and furnish food for 
man and beast. 

If large flat plains spread out like the surface of the 
oceans, they would be covered with water, which would 
kill most plants. They could be but partly drained. 
Sour grasses would grow, which would not furnish food 
for domestic animals, for these cannot live on marsh 
grasses. But over all the world its surface is so raised 
up and shaped and undulated that rain waters drain, 
and flow into rivers to be lost in the seas. The sides of 
hills and mountains grow plants which will not live on 
the plains. This arrangement produces far more di- 
versified crops than if the whole surface of the land 
were all mountains or all plains. A thousand things 
show a wonderfully wise Mind presided over the forma- 
tion of the world from the beginning of creation, He 
gave it laws which ruled our planet, and the materials 
of its mass so that they shaped it little by little during 
these long ages till it became a fitting residence for man. 

The natural forces shaping our planet formed three 
great plains, Mesopotamia, " between the two rivers," 
Euphrates and Tigris, meaning, " Bursting sweet 
waters," and " the Arrow," because of its rapid current. 
These two rivers water the plains where mankind first 
lived after the Flood. The valley of the Amazon has the 
largest river in the world, its head-waters rising on 
eastern slopes of the Andes, draining nearly 2,500,000 
square miles, with a mouth 150 miles wide. The cen- 
tral plains of North America, extending from the mouth 
of the Mississippi to Hudson's Bay, contains the great 
Lakes and are bounded on the east by the Appalachian 
ranges, or the Alleghanies, " rapid flowing waters," on 
the west by the Rocky Mountains — the larger and most 
fertile part being within the United States. 

As the writer visited various countries of the world. 



THE PECULIARITIES OF DESERTS. 301 

was in every State and city and almost every hamlet 
of the United States, during his twelve years of almost 
continual travel, a short description of the physical geog- 
raphy of this country may interest the reader. But we 
cannot enter into details — they would make many books. 
Did not Providence shape this great plain, richest in 
the world, within the temperate zone, having different 
climates, then give it into possession of the most en- 
lightened, progressive combination of races born of 
Japhet, " Enlarging " ? Did not an instinct of the 
Spirit induce them to proclaim religious freedom, the 
rights of man, bring forth the inventions and discoveries 
they gave mankind, proclaim the Monroe Doctrine — 
that they are also the sons of the noble Aryan race, equals 
of Europeans, that no nations can conquer any part of 
America? God works through the mighty movements 
of mankind as well as in nature. 

The eastern part of our country has periodical rain 
and snow; the western part has periodic rains in win- 
ter, and six months of dry weather. Plants which can 
endure great dry heat, live in desert regions ; transplant 
them from one region to another and they die. Who 
made these to live in such different climates unless 
God who shaped their natures? 

Half across Texas, Colorado and Idaho begin the 
deserts — gradually merging into waterless plains, hills 
and mountains. After winter rains these plains are cov- 
ered with desert plants, flowers bloom till air is oppres- 
sive with perfume; rivers are swollen with waters, in 
summer they are dry. The writer found the same condi- 
tions in Arabia and the Orient. But the Sahara of 
Africa, except a few oases, is dead, lifeless, appalling in 
desolation. 

Passing through deserts you feel a silence brooding 
over nature. Plains stretch out before you, unclouded 
sun beams down on you, heat stifles you, sands yield 
under you, springs are few and far between ; the desert 
air is so dry you do not suffer because of the evaporation 



302 HOW THE CITY OF MEXICO WAS FOUNDED. 

of fluids from your body. You must carry water or you 
die. 

Through deserts, are ranges of hills, mountains of 
colored rocks, seeming near in the pure air, but miles 
away. You pass from one valley into another once filled 
with water, where lakes would be if rainfall were heav- 
ier. 

Most desert lakes once held water ; some fresh, others 
impregnated with salt washed out of alkali soil; others 
held borax, chlorides, etc., now useful ; great beasts lived 
in geological times in these waters, their remains are 
found in soil and rock. Nearly all these lakes are now 
dry, but some still have a part of the ancient waters. 

Fleeing from the north, perhaps children of the cliff- 
dwellers, a tribe of Indians, about 500 A. D., came to 
the shores of a lake in an inclosed valley 8,000 feet over 
the sea. Their oracle told them to found their city 
where they could see an omen. Then when they saw 
an eagle with a snake in its talons, on a rock in the lake, 
there in the waters they began to found their capital, 
they called Mexico after their chief god. As they had 
to wade in the waters building their houses, the neigh- 
boring tribes called them the Aztecs, " the Cranes." 
Thus the coat of arms of Mexico, inhabited by Christian 
descendants of the native Indians, is an eagle with a 
snake. Deserts stretch from the borders of Oregon al- 
most to the City of Mexico; you will find remains of 
irrigation works, dykes, etc., built by these tribes long 
before Columbus landed in Cuba. 

Lakes of desert regions are drying up. The Fayoum 
of the Sahara, the oases depressions, the valleys of 
Arabia, the Gobi desert in Asia, show former fertility. 
North of Reno, Nev., is a lake getting smaller. Salt 
Lake shows the ancient shores high on surrounding hills, 
on islands in the lake, its shores are now a mile away 
from where they washed when Mormons founded Salt 
Lake City. 

Four great rivers drain the southern plains of North 
America — the St. Lawrence, Mississippi, Colorado, and 



THE WATERS OF EAST NORTH AMERICA 303 

Columbia; the smaller streams are too numerous to 
describe. 

From far north once covered by the great ice-caps 
which deposited sands and gravels, down deep through 
underground rivers seep waters of melted snows into 
great Lakes, holding more than half the fresh water on 
the surface of the earth. These " Inland Seas " offer 
most dangerous shipping of earth, for vessels cannot 
fly far before storms without running ashore. From 
highlands inclosing upper lakes the waters fall down 
the Niagara, " the sounding waters," into Ontario, " the 
great waters," then out to ocean through the St. Law- 
rence, the greatest river of pure spring waters on the 
surface of our globe. Sailing on these lakes you are 
out of sight of land for days; you can hardly believe 
you are not at sea till you taste the pure spring waters. 

The Mississippi, " Father of waters," discovered by 
Father Hennepin, taking into account the Missouri, 
" the colored waters," is the longest river in the world. 
From St. Paul to St. Louis it has the most beautiful 
scenery of any river in the world, diversified with hill 
and plains, bluff and bank, grove and prairie, farm and 
forest, in bewildering beauty lining either bank. Below 
the latter city plains begin till south of Memphis, 
dykes line its western banks, built to keep the mighty 
flood from ruining farm and city. On the east the 
dykes begin a little below Baton Rouge, " the Red 
Stick," capital of Louisiana, a State rich as the Delta 
of the Nile, where cultivated, but not so historic. 

Rising in the Green and Colorado rivers, the Colorado, 
" the colored," in ages past tore a trench through the 
sandstone colored mountains, south, let out the waters of 
a great inland sea, forming the Grand canyon of the 
Colorado, in places over 6,000 feet deep. Wild is the 
desolation of these rocks, — red, brown, yellow, black 
and of different colored strata, as you look down more 
than a mile. The hills and mountains are colored like 
Nebo, where Moses died, and the cliffs round the Dead 
Sea. The Colorado, not quite as large as the Nile, flows 



304 THE PECULARITIES OF THE PACIFIC COAST 

entirely through deserts, piled mountains of sand in 
Arizona, and its waters and banks remind you of the 
famous river of Egypt. 

The Columbia, 21 miles wide at its mouth, drains the 
northwestern part of our country. Great salmon, weigh- 
ing from 30 to 40 lbs., ascend to its highest waters and 
run up the rivers of Alaska to spawn, going over 500 
miles up, eating nothing, some never return. They are 
guided by instinct, the Creator's wisdom, so other fish 
may not eat their spawn. Noble trees line its banks. 
Portland is on one of its great branches, the Willamette, 
so deep is the river the largest ships can rest beside its 
docks. They built the city here because the floods in 
the great Columbia, two miles away, would interfere 
with the shipping. 

As you pass through the tunnel on the Southern Pa- 
cific Railroad, going north from California, you look 
down 4,000 feet on Ashland, the first town in Oregon. 
There, perhaps, is the most magnificent prospect in the 
country. Here begins a valley covered with giant firs, 
and this tree belt extends up far into Alaska, where, 
near the Arctic zone, they grow but a few inches high. 
Dr. Hayes, the famous arctic explorer, told the writer 
the regions round the arctic circle have pines, birches, 
willows, etc., but a few inches high, with perfect trunks, 
limbs, leaves and seeds. These little trees of the same 
species as grow large in the temperate zones, are small 
round the polar regions because they have little light and 
heat. He said the wolves used to kill their dogs, steal 
their food and attack man but they took a terrible re- 
venge. They smeared sharp knives with blood, stuck 
them up in the snow round their ice cabins, when the 
wolves and foxes licked the blood the cold benumbed 
their tongues, which were cut to ribbons, and every 
morning they were found dead in great numbers. 

Starting from the Mississippi mouth to its source, you 
find belts of different cultivated plants overlapping each 
other. First comes the sugar belt — great plantations 
of sugar-cane, whereon planters become wealthy, for the 



THE MOST VALUABLE METAL OF EARTH. 305 

soil is exceedingly fertile. Then you come to the cot- 
ton belt, where two-thirds of the cotton of the world is 
raised. Then comes the corn belt where billions of 
bushels are produced. Then you find, farther north, 
the wheat belt, and lastly the oats belt, rye and hardy 
plants. Interspersed within these regions are the other 
plants and vegetables. Who will say Providence did not 
shape our world and make these rivers and plains and 
plants and beasts to serve mankind ? 

Deserts unwashed by rains contain the ancient fertil- 
ity of soil, cultivation does not exhaust the soil if treated 
with rotation of crops. Palestine is still a " Land of 
milk and honey," the Jordan valley would be of sur- 
passing richness if irrigated by waters melting from 
snows covering Lebanon, Egypt is as fertile as in days 
of the Pharaohs, the human race will never want for 
food as long as men live. Was there no God who shaped 
nature to thus serve us and supply us food? 

You ask what is the most valuable metal in the world ? 

Aluminum is the most valuable — pure clay is com- 
posed of about 90 per cent, of this metal, mixed with 
other materials, forming soil ; without aluminum in soil 
plants would hardly grow. It is as light as a dry cedar 
stick, almost floats. When the vast floods tore rocks 
into sands they mixed aluminum and sands, and with 
this mixture formed soils. In deserts you see the low 
valleys covered with clay composed of aluminum washed 
down from mount, hill and vale; thus sands, gravels, 
formed soils mixed and mingled with clays. Suppose 
this aluminum, which when pure, looks like silver, were 
as heavy as the latter, or weighed as much as gold, little 
would ever be found on earth's surface ; plants could 
not grow in pure sands or gravels, and plant-life would 
starve for want of food. Every metal has what we call 
its atomic weight, ruling its movements, all regulated 
by a Wisdom surpassing. Yet little minds, ignoramuses, 
will hold there is no God. If we would take each metal 
and gas in the world, follow its laws and forces we 
would find infinite Power gave each force which shaped 
this world for mankind. But this would take a whole 
book. 



306 CLIMATE ROUND POLES ONCE MILD. 

Eemains of plants and animals similar to forms seen 
also in our coal mines, are found in Spitzbergen, East- 
ern Siberia, Alaska and cold regions round north and 
south poles where now only mosses, lichens, and little 
trees a few inches high now flourish during the short 
summers of light and heat. These prove that once a 
mild, gentle, balmy climate prevailed there. The air 
was laden with moisture and frost never prevailed. Cur- 
rents of warm waters were wafted from down near the 
equator bathing these shores now frozen eight and nine 
months of the year. These countries once had a climate 
half tropical with abundance of moisture and all con- 
ditions required for plant life, for the continents were 
then different. 

Tree trunks of species now extinct, such as the giant 
ferns, cycads, horse-tails and plants of tropical climes 
often stand erect with roots imbedded in the soil in 
which they grew. Leaves of poplars, maples, oaks, etc., 
are preserved in these northern coal measures as though 
gathered by a botanist. In these forests roamed masto- 
dons, with coats of long yellow hair and great tusks. 
These tusks are so numerous the gathering of them em- 
ploys many of the inhabitants, and their ivory is used 
extensively. Sometimes the body of a mastodon is found 
frozen in the ice, preserved intact since long before 
Adam lived. Marks of gentle wavelets washing the 
shores, breezes on the sands, rain-drops on the mud now 
turned to rocks of all periods, tell us the climate of these 
distinct days did not much differ from that of our day. 

During the four seasons, many more varied and dif- 
ferent species of plants and animals live than could, if 
there were only one or two seasons during the year. 
Have these seasons changed during the great ages before 
man was made? Has the earth's climate changed? 
During these epochs before man appeared, the area of 
life was much larger than now, and during the paleozoic 
and tertiary times extended far to the north within the 
Arctic Circle. We find the same conditions favorable 
to life prevailed far to the south within the Antarctic 
Circle. 



THE PLANTS OF GEOLOGICAL EPOCHS. 307 

The coal found in these regions indicate that vast 
forests of deciduous, evergreen trees, and numerous 
plants lived, amid which thrived great flocks of masto- 
dons, cousins of the elephants. We find beds of coal and 
other indications proving that in remote ages the cli- 
mate of the earth was more uniform than now. This 
can be explained by a slightly different distribution of 
water, seas, and oceans. 

If we accept the account of the Flood, that most of 
the water in the oceans fell from the heavens and flowed 
into the deep ocean beds, we will have an easy solution 
of the great abundance of plant life which then flourished 
near the poles. The warm waters from the equator pene- 
trated into various parts of the lands to the north and 
south near the poles as bays, straits, etc., bringing moist- 
ure and heat. 

On the west coast of Greenland, 70° U. Lat., beauti- 
fully preserved fossil plants of the Cretaceous period 
have been found, such as oaks, beeches, poplars, plane- 
trees, vines, walnuts, plums, chestnuts, sequoias, etc., — - 
137 species in all, showing it had a climate similar to 
the northern parts of the United States at present. Still 
farther north, in Spitzbergen, in IN". Lat. 78° and 79°, 
similar plants are found but not so varied. On the east 
coasts of Greenland during the cretaceous period flour- 
ished ferns cycads, conifers, poplars, sassafras, androm- 
edas, magnolias, myrtles, and plants now growing in 
the United States and in Central Europe. They prove 
that a mild temperate climate prevailed in these regions 
ages before the first man. The vast deposits of coal 
found in both north and south temperate regions indi- 
cate a most wonderful and flourishing flora of plant life. 
This coal is now vast storehouses of sunlight and heat 
stored up for man. But this coal is not found in the 
warm countries, where it is not wanted, but in the cold 
regions where our homes could not be warmed and our 
machinery run without it. 

Going farther back to the Jurassic period, we find 
proofs of a mild climate in Eastern Siberia and in north- 
ern Norway. Remains of plants and great reptiles are 



308 GIANT TREES OF GEOLOGICAL EPOCHS NOW LIVE. 

preserved in rocks of all parts of the world. Still far- 
ther back, in the Triassic period, we meet remains of 
plants, some like those growing now, but most of them 
became extinct after the ice-cap came down and buried 
them. But in the Carboniferous period flourished these 
vast forests of gigantic ferns, horse-tails, and primitive 
evergreen trees bearing seed cones. They are preserved 
in a most remarkable way in coal and rocks, and we can 
study them as though some one had left us a dried spec- 
imen of each plant which flourished in these long epochs 
before man appeared. Their structures show us that 
during these vast periods of time, the atmosphere was 
filled with carbonic acid gas, which the growing plants 
sifted out and condensed into the solid carbon which 
now we use as coal. We can condense this carbonic gas 
by great cold and enormous pressure. But as soon as 
these are taken away, the carbonic gas returns to its 
gaseous form. How do plants condense this carbonio 
gas at ordinary temperature? They have a power, a 
force above that of any mineral force, a living principle 
which has this power, for it is above the forces of the 
mineral. 

The coal we dig from the ground shows us that the 
northern regions of America, Europe and Asia were 
once covered with vast forests of sequoia, the " giant 
trees " of California, with the Sequoia sempervirens, its 
cousin, and many other great trees and plants now ex- 
tinct. The writer saw specimens of the first species 
which was growing, perhaps, in the days of Moses. The 
leaves are small, cover the little limbs like those of the 
Canadian cedar and end in a point. The second tree 
has leaves arranged like those of the locust, but closer 
and not so large, They are not as gigantic as the first 
mentioned tree. 

When the ice-cap came down over the northern world 
it killed all these trees except in California, where it 
could not pass over the great mountain range of the 
Sierra Nevada. 



SECTION IV.— THE WONDERS OF LIFE. 



CHAPTER XV.— NATURE'S BEAUTIFUL BALANCES. 

The earth's equator is not in the plane of the path it 
follows round the sun but inclines 23% degrees, that is, 
the world is tilted over that much so that for six months 
the sun shines on the northern part of the earth and 
then on the other southern part causing summer and 
winter, unequal days and nights through the two frigid 
and temperate zones. Writers have not looked into the 
importance of this tilted position of the earth for the 
development of life. It was put this way by a far- 
seeing Cause. 

All the planets are inclined, some more, others less, 
than the earth. Let us suppose the earth's axis running 
through the poles, like that of Uranus, were inclined 
46% degrees to the plane of its orbit round the sun, 
there would be no such winter, summer or seasons as we 
have now. Uranus is at one time many millions of miles 
nearer the sun, during its circuit. Winter would be 
six months of arctic night, and tremendous cold would 
prevail over half the globe. The cold of the interstellar 
space, 449 degrees F. below zero, would prevail half the 
year over half the earth. Every drop of water would 
turn to ice, seas and oceans would freeze to the very 
bottom, and nothing could live on earth. On the other 
half of the earth round the other pole pointing towards 
the sun, there would be a continuous day of six months, 
with the sun overhead pouring down his tremendous 
light and heat, would boil all the water, and turn it into 

309 



310 INCLINATION OF EARTH'S AXIS MAKES SEASONS. 

steam. This vapor, floating to the north and south would 
fall as snow covering the surface miles high. At the 
two equinoxes, " times of equal nights," the whole globe 
would enjoy equal day and night for about a month, 
before the long six-month day or night would begin 
again and end the freezing or boiling of six-months 
periods described above. Nothing could live on the 
earth, if she had been placed with her poles pointing, 
one directly to and the other away from the sun. Now 
who will say that by an accident the earth was placed 
the way she is ? 

Suppose earth's poles were exactly at right angles to 
the plane of her orbit round the sun. The whole earth's 
surface would then enjoy equal day and night, and re- 
ceive the same amount of light and heat every day. 
There would be no seasons. The light and heat would 
diminish from the equator to the poles, which latter 
would be always dark, while the countries near the 
equator would be afflicted with torrid heat. Near the 
equator the intensely heated air would rise and float 
over the high regions to the north and south, where ex- 
posed to the awful cold of the spaces between the stars, 
it would get heavier, force the air near the surface to 
sweep towards the equator, causing in both the north 
and south hemispheres continual cold winds, snow, 
storms and blizzards, which would cover the earth al- 
most to the equator with snow making life impossible. 
For the sun at each pole would be always on or close to 
the horizon, giving so little heat the seas would be al- 
ways frozen down to deepest depths. The whole atmos- 
phere would be so cold, that all the waters, even under 
the equator, would be frozen except perhaps a belt of 
a few hundred miles round the earth extending north 
and south of the equator. In this case it is very probable 
that nothing could live on our planet. 

Suppose the earth turned on its axis, not in 24 hours, 
as now, but once a year — that is, showed only one side to 
the sun all the time as the moon to us. The side turned 



ATMOSPHERE RIGHT DENSITY FOR LIFE. 311 

towards the sun would be scorched with a heat like the 
blast of a furnace, for it would have everlasting day. 
The other side would be in perpetual darkness, and the 
cold of the spaces between the stars, about 449 degrees 
below zero, would prevail there all the time. The air 
on the heated side would become very light, rise and 
flow over into the dark regions. The cold air on the 
dark side would sweep over to the heated regions in 
tremendous blizzards freezing up the whole surface of 
the earth. Did these movements of the earth measur- 
ing days, nights, seasons and years come by accident, 
or did a Providence preside over the world when it re- 
ceived movement? 

Let us suppose the days and nights were 50 or 100 
hours long as some of the planets. A large part of the 
heat of the day is lost now at night in the cold between 
the stars to be restored the next day by the sun. The 
heat would become so overpowering during one of these 
long days that nothing could live, and during the long 
night the cold would freeze every living thing and turn 
to ice all the waters of the earth. 

A great air ocean about 100 feet high called the at- 
mosphere, from the Greek, athmos, " vapor," and 
sphaira, ' < sphere, ' ' surrounds earth and we live down at 
the bottom. No one ever went or' ever will go to its 
top, for there the air is too rare to sustain life. Plant, 
animal, fish, and man live on air; without it, life 
functions would cease. Air must extend so high, to 
press so much on earth surface, to have the right den- 
sity, that living forms may flourish, not only at sea 
surface, but up sides of high mountains, and elevated 
plateaus. Earth had to have just the mass of matter 
to attract the air, retain the atmosphere so it would 
not fly awa) 7 " into space. Oxygen and nitrogen, com- 
posing air, have low molecular rates of motion, so they 
are held to earth even when separated they rise to high 
altitudes. If they had not these laws guiding them, 
they would fly away into space, long ago our world 
would have been stripped of its atmosphere, and all 



312 GASES JUST EIGHT FOE LIFE. 

that live on earth would have died. Was there no 
Providence in this? 

Mr. Stoney worked out this problem and proves that 
neither oxygen nor nitrogen composing air is ever lost 
into spaces between the stars from high surface of our 
air-ocean. He proves hydrogen, helium and lighter 
gases, when in pure states, rise to top of atmosphere 
and are lost in star spaces, because they have not 
weight enough to hold them within earth's attraction. 
Did not a wise Providence beautifully balance nature's 
laws so air would remain on earth? 

Suppose earth were larger, had more mass, its at- 
traction would be greater, it would hold free hydrogen as 
this gas envelopes the great suns oft combined with he- 
lium and lighter gases. When freed from earth, these 
gases would rise in our atmosphere and gather in great 
belts round earth. As plants gave out oxygen which 
would gather near-by, a flash of lightning would unite 
them with a tremendous explosion, tear to pieces the 
surface of our globe, pulverize mountains and kill all 
that live. To light a match would cause these gases 
to unite as though a ton of dynamite exploded, smash- 
ing houses to fragments. Did not Power eternal give 
these gases laws which rule nature, or will you say this 
came by accident? 

As hydrogen becomes a liquid at 412° F. below zero, 
and the cold between the stars is about 449° F. below, 
perhaps it becomes a fluid at the top of the air, does 
not escape but falls to become again a gas. Still we 
are not sure. The cold of liquid air is 338° F. below 
zero, the interstellar spaces are warmer round the great 
suns, that of Neptune's orbit is estimated as 364° F. 
below. 

Light, a mode of motion in ether, after passing 
through space, absolutely dry and bitterly cold inter- 
stellar regions, presses on earth's surface 75,000 ton?. 
The sun varies its light and heat during cycles of 4, 11 
and 35 years, so light and heat pressures vary. Our 
earth swings round the sun resting on nothing, heat 



HEAT, LIGHT AND ELECTRICITY PROVE GOD. 313 

and light pushes it away all the time out farther from 
the sun. Left alone to this force earth would get out 
farther and farther from the sun, go round him slower 
and slower, and at last fly away into space. Our finest 
instruments, with millions of clocks, show the earth in 
her yearly swing round the sun has not varied a frac- 
tion of a second in a century. The sun heat must be 
much larger in pushing power than light force, both 
press always on the earth, pushing it out away from 
the sun. This shows that at least 150,000 tons of pres- 
sure is exerted on our earth all the time, and you know 
how easy it is to move a pendulum. Who is this living, 
thinking, powerful Person, who reaches out His mighty 
hand every moment, and keeps our earth from flying 
away into space under the forces of light and heat? 
There is a mystery here which can be explained only 
by admitting the existence of God. 

Electricity from the sun acts always on the earth 
causing continual electric storms, upsetting our tele- 
graphs, telephone and wireless systems. They tend to 
push and pull farther away and nearer to the sun our 
world floating in space, nothing stops it from swing- 
ing back and forth like a pendulum. But our finest 
instruments show it turns in just 24 hours and revolves 
round the sun in exactly a year. What prevents these 
electric storms, united to light and heat impulses, from 
driving our world away into space where light and 
nature's forces would be upset? A Power eternal in 
might keeps our earth in its path at the same distance 
from the sun. 

Gentle reader, did you ever see a desert? If you 
did, you can imagine what the world would be without 
life. What causes vast regions of plain, sand, rock, 
and mountain to be so dry and desolate? These west 
winds sweeping over oceans, take up all the water they 
can carry. The hotter the air is, the more water it 
holds as unseen vapor. When cooled, the water falls 
in the form of rain, snow or dew. The winds, blow- 
ing over the Pacific, about 7,000 miles across, become 



314 WHAT MAKES CALlFOBNiA SO PRODUCTIVE. 

loaded with water as invisible vapor. These winds 
strike the American continent from Oregon to Chili, 
except the regions under and near the equator. The 
land is warmer than ocean, and the radiating heat from 
the soil heats the air so its waters do not fall as rain. 
If these regions were all level plains, the western half 
of the American continent would be dry deserts, similar 
to the great Sahara desert stretching across North 
Africa. But a Providence stepped in long ago, for a 
wonderfully progressive people, a great branch of the 
Arayn, "the noble," race were tooccupy this land. 

Along the Pacific shores, some miles in, when the 
earth was forming, a mighty ridge was forced up, 
volcanic mountains piled up miles high, summits from 
10,000 to 15,000 feet or more. In the north it is called 
the Sierra Nevada, ' ' the snowy Saw " ; in the south 
they are called the Andes — the latter being 4,500 miles 
long. The west winds rise over these mountain ranges 
into the high cold regions, which cools them and they 
drop the waters they carry in forms of snow and rain. 
Many a time the writer saw the white summits of the 
sierras of California from the hot plains of San Sacra- 
mento, " The Blessed Sacrament," and of the San 
Joachim plains, so named after Christ's grandfather. 
These summits are white with snows all the year round 
— the drifts being often 30 feet deep. This water of 
the melting snow flows down in irrigation ditches, and 
makes California, by nature, a desert, bloom and blos- 
som above any country of the world. No climate on 
the face of the earth equals that of our southern Pacific 
coast. The first white men came long ago from Mexico, 
entered this State through a deep valley, lifeless and 
hot, branching from the lower Colorado Kiver to the 
west. At the place called Salton, a part now irrigated 
by the Colorado, " the colored," 264 feet below the 
sea, the writer found the temperature, February 20, 94 
degrees in the shade; in summer it rises to 157° F. 
So they called this place California, l < the hot furnace, ' ' 
and the name was applied by the Spanish to what is 



315 

now the whole State. But only a few parts, of this 
deep plain; is irrigated that being now called the 
Imperial Valley. Death Valley, the Mohava Desert, 
etc. , are hot. At San Diego, the temperature varies 
only 10 degrees a year. It rains nearly all over the 
whole State from fall to spring, but no rain ever falls 
during summer. These regions have only two seasons 
— the wet and dry. 

The desert regions of Asia and Africa were settled 
before the dawn of history and little improvements were 
ever made. The Oriental races are stagnant, and live 
as they did in the days of Abraham. The Americans 
came to California and found desert wastes like Arabia. 
They brought water from the mountains, spread it over 
the deserts, and made them bloom and blossom far be- 
yond any other part of the country. For these dry 
lands, not washed by frequent rains retained their prime- 
val fertility. Was there no Providence to elevate these 
ranges of mountains — the Coast Range and the Sierra 
Nevada, the Andes — whence the west of the American 
continent is not burned up like the Sahara, that these 
Americans may later show the Orientals how to reclaim 
their deserts ? 

A few degrees within the tropics under the equator, 
the air, intensely heated by the direct rays of the sun, 
rises, and inrushes of colder air, produce rotary move- 
ments causing hurricanes and typhons. Sometimes they 
are very destructive, overturning the largest trees, level- 
ing the strongest built houses, wrecking ships. Suppose 
the air were denser than it is, the winds would destroy 
all habitations over the world, and man could not live 
on our earth. Suppose the earth were nearer to the sun 
than it is, the heat would be so great these storms would 
rage whenever the wind blew. If our sun were larger 
than it is, the same would happen. These whirlpools in 
the atmosphere have their object. For they raise the 
dust from the earth into the high atmosphere, that 



316 HOW DESERTS ARE CROSSED. 

around each dust particle water may condense to fall ad 
rain, giving life to the world. 

The warmer the air the more water vapor it will carry. 
Often, passing through deserts, the writer saw dark 
clouds floating overhead dropping heavy rains. As the 
heavy rain came down through the heated air every drop 
evaporated before reaching the earth, because of the heat 
radiated from the burning sands. Rains fall on high 
mountain tops because there it is colder than in valleys. 
What a provision of God this is, because if rains fall on 
deserts they would be covered with verdure, and no 
dust would rise round which rain drops gather to cause 
rains ! 

Deserts can be crossed because the camels can go for 
days without drinking. They have a special stomach, 
which holds enough water to last them for many days. 
Down in the waterless deserts of Arabia the writer met 
a caravan of over 100 great dromedaries, great camels 
twice as large as those seen in shows. As they came 
along chewing the cud, and put their feet down on the 
soft sand, their toes spread out forming a large cushion 
so they would not sink, whereas a horse would sink to 
his fetlocks and soon tire. Camels and dromedaries have 
a hump on the back, some species have two, and they 
are nourished by the food thus stored up. Who will 
say these beasts were not made by Providence so men 
with them may cross deserts, for without these animals, 
men could not in early ages live in deserts where we 
And oases and fertile valleys. 

The heat of the sun might be either too great or not 
enough. In deserts of Africa, Australia, Western Amer- 
ica, and in places in India, the soil sometimes becomes 
so hot it will cook an egg — coagulate the albumen, the 
foundation of animal organism. On the other hand, in 
Lat. 40°, on mountains 12,000 feet high it freezes every 
night and even during daytime in the shade. Both tem- 
peratures are hostile to life, and if continued over 
large surfaces nothing could live there. Heat increases 
and diminishes according to the square of the distance 



HEAT OF SUN IS JUST EIGHT FOB LIFE. 317 

from the heat-producing body. If the earth were only 
half its distance from the sun, the heat would be four 
times greater, if twice the distance away, only a fourth 
of the heat would fall on the world. Even at two- 
thirds the distance we would experience twice the heat 
now falling on our earth. In these cases the albumen 
and protoplasm, the foundations of living organisms, so 
sensitive to heat and cold, would be cooked or frozen. 

If for a moment a man could live on the fiery sur- 
face of the sun, or find solid ground to rest on, he 
would weigh tons, his clothing about 200 lbs. ; on Sirius 
or Aldebaran, if he could resist their terrific heat, he 
would be so heavy he would have to be moved with a 
giant crane ; on any of the great suns his muscles would 
strip from his bones, and he would fall to pieces with 
his own weight. These suns, so great in mass, would 
hold a man with the grasp of a giant. 

You say perhaps these suns have planets gyrating 
round them. ~No one ever saw them. If we could build 
a telescope, with a glass the diameter of the earth, and 
a tube as long as from here to the moon we would hardly 
see these planets with it. 

The density of the atmosphere depends on the mass 
of a planet, and on the amount and weight of the gases 
composing this air. If our earth was only half as heavy, 
it would not hold the air, for attracted by the sun and 
other planets, the atmosphere would be stripped off, and 
our earth would be a dead planet like the moon, the 
asteroids and the satellites or moons of the greater 
planets. 

The earth is at the proper distance from the sun for 
his heat to raise up the waters from land and ocean to 
form clouds and fall as rain. It has about the same 
climate in all places at the same distance from the 
equator. This regularity of climate is not found on any 
other planet. 

These conditions favorable to life continued on earth 
during these long periods before man appeared. These 



318 WHAT IS 45 MILES UNDER US ? 

striking conditions which, favored life are not found 
on any planet. 

Some planets are too hot, others too cold. Some have 
no water, others too much, some no air, others too high 
and dense atmospheres. A thousand reasons founded 
on science prove that our earth alone has life. The 
writers who write regarding life on other heavenly bod- 
ies do not go deep into the nicely balanced natural forces 
required to sustain living organisms. 

We are in the temperate zone of the solar system, 
neither too near nor too far from the sun — just in the 
right place for life to flourish. If the earth were created 
nearer or farther from the sun, life could not exist on 
earth. Who says the earth was not placed in its orbit 
just at the right place by that Power who foresaw life 
was to cover its surface, or that chance presided when 
it was sent gyrating at this distance from the sun % 

The interior of our world is still intensely heated, the 
remains of these tremendous collisions of matters falling 
from the sky. A few yards below the surface a con- 
stant temperature is found, differing little from the 
mean temperature of the place. But as far as our 
borings and deep mines have gone, they show an in- 
crease of heat according to the depth. The heat in all 
places increases 1 degree for each 54 to 64 feet in depth, 
and this is the condition all over the world. When the 
rocks are the same the heat is constant. Following this, 
if we could go 43% miles down, we would find a temper- 
ature of 3,632 degrees F. The researches of the United 
States Geological .Survey prove that lava melts at 1,616 
degrees F., and granite, felspar, quartz and such mate- 
rials at between 2,624 and 3,227 degrees F. The con- 
clusion is that all rocks are in a melted state down 
45 miles under us. But the enormous pressure on these 
rocks keeps them in a state bordering in the plastic, 
partly solid condition. 

Air is composed of oxygen and nitrogen gases with 
peculiar properties, and is mixed with carbonic gas — - 
coal in a state of gas. Oxygen gives life to animals and 



HOW EARTH GASES WERE REGULATED. 319 

carbon to plants. These only have properties which 
sustain life. If the world were clothed by any other 
gases nothing would live. We find some stars sur- 
rounded by dense atmospheres of carbon, which is in 
every comet, other stars have vast envelopes of hydrogen, 
helium and other gases, or metals in a state of vapor. 
Suppose these composed our atmosphere, earth would 
not have life. Oxygen and nitrogen united chemically 
make air we breathe. Hydrogen and oxygen united 
make water. These unions take place according to laws 
ruled by figures. Suppose there were no Cause infin- 
itely wise in figures, who presides over the union of 
these gases, we might have any kind of mixtures differ- 
ing from air and water, or they might remain unmixed, 
and we would have nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, and 
carbonic gas with a number of other gases forming an 
atmosphere surrounding our earth in which nothing 
could live, no more than life could exist in a great gas 
tank. A Being wise and powerful presided over the 
creation of these gases, and gave them laws founded on 
mathematics they followed in their unions. 

The atmosphere is loaded with moisture. Water in 
the form of invisible steam is always in the air. The 
hotter the air the more water it can carry. If you 
quickly cool the air in a room. the water will fall like 
fine rain or frost on windows, walls and floors. This 
water is always rising from ocean, lake and river, earth, 
plant and animal. As the air rises with heat, it carries 
this water into the sky where the cold condenses it in 
the form of clouds, which rain it down to earth to sus- 
tain life. If the air had no water, or if it remained too 
hot, no rain would ever fall and all would die. If this 
water in the form of vapor was not always in the air, 
the water in the plants would dry up, and they would 
die when exposed to the direct rays of the sun. 

Because of the great heat radiated from deserts, the 
lower part of the atmosphere over them is very hot, no 
rains fall there, and earth is bare and burning. But 
we have often seen dark clouds drop water over the 



320 HOW PLANTS AND ANIMAXS PURIFY AIR. 

desert, which never reach the surface. You will see a 
great thunder-cloud over deserts showering down heavy 
rains which are dried up before they reach the earth, 
because of the great heat along the surface. If these 
deserts were covered with vegetation, the plants would 
turn the heat into growth and cool the air, and the 
rains would fall. For this reason only by irrigation 
ditches bringing water from rivers can the deserts be 
made to blossom. Desert soil is richer, and when wat- 
ered, produces greater crops, than lands on which it 
rains. For these deserts have retained the ancient fertil- 
ity of the soil. The rains washed out these rich mate- 
rials during long ages and poured the food plants re- 
quire through rivers into the ocean. 

Carbonic gas, which is coal in vapor form, of which 
there are four parts in ten thousand parts of air, is the 
great reservoir, from which plants build up the greater 
part of their structures. It enters into the protoplasms 
and proteids, out of which living beings build their 
structures. This carbon, or coal in a state of gas, is ab- 
solutely required for plants, which breathe it in through 
the leaves, bark and roots. But breathed by an animal 
it is death, as oxygen the animal requires for life is 
death to the plant. You breathe air all the time. You 
take out of it the oxygen and breathe out carbon. Soon 
you sift out all the oxygen, and you fill your room with 
carbonic gas, and that is why you must ventilate your 
house. But if you have some plants in your room, they 
will purify the air for you, for they will sift out the 
carbon, and give in its place the oxygen you want for 
life. 

One per cent, of carbonic acid can be breathed for a 
time, but more than this in the air soon produces suffo- 
cation, and if the air be not changed death follows. 
For these reasons the carbon and other gases in illumi- 
nating gas cause death. If the proportion of carbonic gas 
were diffused through the air in larger proportions than 
we find it, all animal life would be destroyed. But a 
wise Cause mixed it in just the right proportions for 



WHY THE LIGHTNING IN THE SKY. 321 

life. Yet we find that the larger part of comets are 
made up of this carbonic gas, we find it in vast quanti- 
ties in the sun and in many of the stars. If our earth 
had it in the same quantities as these heavenly bodies, 
our race would have died out soon after Adam was made. 
How beautifully the Creator disposed all things for man 
on earth. 

The air is formed of oxygen and nitrogen mixed so 
nicely, so beautifully balanced, that if these were dis- 
turbed nothing could live. At first it would appear 
that the oxygen of the air is the sole element animal 
life wants, and that the other gases are of minor im- 
portance. But a little study shows that nitrogen dilutes 
the oxygen the animal breathes, whence oxygen may be 
called the very life of all animals. But no animal can 
live breathing pure oxygen, for it would stimulate them 
so they would soon die. In lung diseases and difficulties 
of breathing, pure oxygen is a help, but it serves only 
for a short time. The air is composed of oxygen and 
nitrogen mixed in the proportion proper for human and 
animal life. Who mixed it this way, but He who made 
all men and animals to live in this atmosphere ? 

Animal life depends for food on plants, and these must 
get the nitrogen from the ammonia carried down into 
the soil by rains, after it is formed in the air by electric- 
ity — by the lightning. There is but one part of am- 
monia to a million parts of air, yet on this small portion 
all plants and animals must live, for they cannot take 
into their systems the free nitrogen of the air. For 
ages man did not understand the meaning or the work 
of the lightning, which frees this nitrogen from the air 
by its flashes through the sky. Only in our age did man 
begin to understand electricity working in the world 
from dawn of creation, furnishing ammonia as food for 
plants. 

The height of the air, its density, its composition of 
oxygen and nitrogen, the amount of water, composed of 
hydrogen and oxygen, the earth surface covered with 
such a large amount of water, are so arranged that if 



322 SUPPOSE WE HAD TWICE AS MUCH AIR. 

these were disturbed in the slightest degree, life would 
cease. A Power made these materials, marked out their 
laws, and still presides over their movements and their 
changes, that life may continue. 

The air is dense enough to take up fine dust which 
attracts water vapor round it to become rain-drops 
to fall on land to water it for plants. The air has just 
the right amount of oxygen for animals and man to 
breathe and burn up the carbonic acid in the blood. The 
air has the right density to blow over surfaces of seas 
and lakes and raise up the " white-caps," waves, to 
mingle the air with the water, that the fish may breathe 
this air, from it to get the oxygen to purify their blood. 
If there were more air it would enter the blood of living 
beings and kill them. 

The eastern ends of the 6 tunnels under the East 
River, New York, 4 for the Pennsylvania Railroad, 2 for 
the Subway, came out near where these words are being 
written, and the writer made a careful study of the 
works. They had to keep a pressure of 35 lbs. to keep 
out the water. The writer went into the air-lock when 
the pressure was slowly turned on. The ear-drums 
pained as the pressure became greater. Holding the 
nose and swallowing till the air in the inner ear pressed 
the same by opening the Eustachian tube leading down 
into the throat relieved the pain. The noise in the ears 
then became greater, the voices of the men seemed 
louder, and far away, a change was felt over the whole 
body, things seemed strange, uncanny as though you 
were in a dream. 

Men worked three hours at a time, rested outside three 
hours and then went into the air and worked the same 
time — making 6 hours a day. Only most robust men 
were allowed to work in the tubes, each was carefully 
examined by three physicians before being engaged. 
Under the 35 lbs. pressure the air was forced into the 
tissues of the body, the oxygen was absorbed leaving bub- 
bles of nitrogen in arteries and veins and organs. Be- 
fore going in or coming out the men had to, stay for a 



REMARKABLE PEOPEETIES OF AIE. 323 

time in the " air-lock " like a great boiler, the pressure 
being gradually increased when they were going in di- 
minished when coming out. They had another " lock " 
beside the physicians' office wherein the men waited 
when feeling unwell under air pressure till the nitrogen 
was absorbed by life functions. They call the troubles 
" the bends/' and 28 men died of the trouble. 

Suppose our earth were larger, our atmosphere higher, 
or had a different weight, we would be in the condition 
of these men. How would we live under these diffi- 
culties ? Yet ignorant men say there is no God, that 
the world came by evolution or chance and accident pre- 
sided over its creation. 

The air is just high enough and weighs so it presses 
about 14 lbs. on each square inch, at sea level being 
15 tons on the body of a man. The fluids within the 
body press out the same so they balance. Exhaust the 
air from any part of the body, great pain is felt, blood 
and fluids ooze out. The air pressure is exerted not on 
human but on every living organism made by a wise 
Creator with life functions to balance. 

Air, the poorest conductor of heat, retains heat, but 
slowly giving it out to neighboring materials. The 
metals are good conductors of heat — that is, the heat 
spreads rapidly through their masses. Put your hand 
on a piece of metal ; it feels cold although it is the very 
same temperature as the surrounding air, because the 
heat of your hand spreads through the whole metal cool- 
ing your flesh. 

We clothe ourselves to keep warm. Not the clothes 
keep the heat of our bodies but the air they contain in 
the spaces of the woven textures. If our clothes are 
wet the water rapidly absorbs the heat, this water being 
in the spaces where air should be, wet garments are very 
cold and disagreeable because of the abstraction of the 
heat. 

Why are woollen garments so much warmer than those 
of cotton, silk, linen, etc. ? Put these materials under 
the microscope and you will see the difference. The 



324 WHERE LIFE CAN EXIST IN THE UNIVERSE. 

cotton fibers are smooth, the silk shining the flaxen long 
fibers split one from another. Wool, the hair of sheep, 
was made to keep the beast warm. Hair is composed 
of epithelium, a rind and marrow, the epithelium is in 
small plates overlapping each other giving the surface a 
scaly appearance. In these scales and different struc- 
tures of hairs the air remains, keeping its heat. Ani- 
mals living in cold climates have hair wonderfully 
adapted to keep the air in their furs, and they were made 
this way to stand the climate where the Creator made 
and put them. 

Life cannot exist in high, cold, rare air. Therefore 
the tops of high mountains are bare. The higher we 
rise the colder it becomes. At about 20,000 feet, even 
in the tropics, even under the equator, the mountains 
are covered with everlasting snow and ice. A globe of 
cold air surrounds the world at this height under the 
equator, diminishing in height going north and south, 
till it reaches the earth's surface at the Arctic Circle in 
the north, and the Antarctic Circle round the south pole. 
Beyond these circles towards the poles nothing grows 
except a few mosses and lichens round the edges. If 
you go higher than this, the cold increases till on the 
high borders on limits of the air the cold of the space 
between the stars over 400 degrees below zero prevails. 

Under and within this air globe only can life exist. 
Living organisms are confined to this very limited region 
on this earth alone. The air is dense and acts as a 
blanket, keeping the heat during the darkness of night 
which was poured down during sunshine. If the air 
were denser the heat would be too great and living beings 
would scorch. If the air were not so high, thinner, or 
made of gases having other properties, the cold would 
be too severe for life. Will you say these things were 
not regulated by a Power who foresaw these conditions 
and made the amount of air required, that life might 
flourish on our earth? 

Winds are great tides in the atmosphere" 1 caused by 
heat but._alsoJby.-the sun's. and moon's^attraction^ We 



Why winds nearly always from west. 325 

cannot go to tops of the atmosphere and see these air 
tides rise hundreds of miles high twice a day, as we see 
the ocean tides rise so many feet along our ocean-shores. 
For this reason few have remarked this sun and moon 
attraction as a cause of the winds. 

The sun's heat is the next chief cause. Around the 
equator is a vast belt more than a thousand miles wide, 
where the sun beats down almost from high zenith and 
heats the air. Being lighter than the cold air above, the 
hot air rises and floats over this cold heavier air, then 
sweeps towards either pole. Under the equator this 
heated air was moving with earth's rotation from west to 
east at the rate of more than 1,000 miles an hour. As it 
sweeps towards the poles it still preserves this movement. 
But the surface of the earth has not this velocity as you 
go north or south, and at the poles the movement of 
earth's rotation is nothing. The hot air losing its heat in 
the spaces between the stars gets heavier and falls down 
to the earth's surface, still having this movement towards 
the east. For this reason in the temperate zones north 
and south the winds are nearly always from the west. 
This is the reason that in this country, Europe, etc., the 
clouds rise mostly in the west and sweep towards the 
east bringing rain, to thirsty soil, and plant and animal 
and man. What would be the world without these 
rains ? It would be nearly all a desert. 

Particles of dust, so fine we cannot see them, float for- 
ever in the sky, giving it that beautiful blue color. 
Darken a room, let a ray of sunlight shine through and 
you will see the dust particles. Winds and air-currents 
raise this dust from land surfaces. This dust is swept 
up from roads, city streets, but especially from deserts. 
These desert regions, seeming blemishes on nature's face, 
as though the Almighty had forgotten to finish His work, 
have their place in the plans of the Almighty. For if 
there were no deserts there would be no rains and noth- 
ing could live without water. 

Water, as unseen vapor, spread through the air, must 
have something round which to condense, or rain-drops 



320 MANY MIGHTY FLOODS MADE SOrL. 

cannot gather in the sky, form clouds from which the 
rains, fall. Water vapor, unseen in the higher regions 
of the atmosphere, collect round these tiny dust particles 
and form rain-drops which fall to the thirsty land. 

What are winds for ? To bring clouds over lands that 
rains may fall, to mix oxygen given out by plants with 
carbonic acid as breathed out by animals and man. 
Plants have leaves as lungs, but no muscles to draw in 
air like animals. The microscope will show their breath- 
ing holes. If there were no winds, the oxygen would 
surround the leaves and smother them in a short time. 
Will you say all this came to pass by chance, that no 
Supreme Mind regulated these balances ? 

Dust causes rains to fall on all the land, giving life 
to the world. The rainfall is heavier and more fre- 
quent on mountains, hills and slopes, because there it is 
colder, sinks into the soil and flows along under the 
ground. There are more underground rivers than flow 
along the surface. This water, absorbed through the 
roots of plants, is carried up even to the leaves. How 
wonderful nature was made, how nicely things are bal- 
anced by a Power infinitely wise. Plants can grow only 
in soil. How was it made ? 

For ages mighty forces playing on our planet-surface 
tore rocks to pieces, ground sand, gravel and formed the 
soil. A thousand floods swept over surface of earth, 
leaving banks of sand and gravel, covering valleys, filling 
depressions, forming earth and soil. If this did not 
take place, the surface of the earth would have been one 
mass of rock like the moon, no plant could grow in rock, 
and no man could live on earth. Men sometimes say 
there was no flood, but all soils, sands and plains, show 
that not only one, but many mighty floods once swept 
over the whole surface of the earth to prepare it for life. 
Desert regions show best the sand banks, gravels and 
soils ground from rocks by the action of water ! 

Directly down on the regions round the equator the 
sun pours his heat, warming the air which rises spread- 
ing to north and south. Plowing over the top of the 



SOW WINDS BRING OCEAN WATERS. 327 

atmosphere where exposed to the cold of the spaces be- 
tween the stars, it loses its heat. As it flows over Si- 
beria, Alaska and these cold regions it forces down the 
intensely cold air. This bitterly cold air sweeps down 
along the surface of the earth. Having part of the 
eastern sweep of the earth at the equator, the winds with 
the cold between the stars come down from the north 
causing " blizzards/' snowstorms sweeping from the west 
over the eastern and southern parts of our country some- 
times extending to Europe. 

The heat of ocean waters remain about the same, the 
winds coming from the west in our latitude on eastern 
parts of oceans vary but little. But heat changes on 
the continents and cause variations in the winds. 
Whence few storms rage along western coasts of con- 
tinents but prevail on eastern shores. The writer seldom 
saw " white cap " waves on the Pacific, " the Peaceful/' 
on western shores of Europe, Africa, etc., where the 
winds are more regular and storms seldom rage. 

By a wonderful provision of God more rains fall on 
land than on seas. For the cold winds from north and 
south polar regions sweep along ocean surfaces because 
they are cooler than the lands. Moving along ocean sur- 
faces these cool winds push the hot air loaded with water 
so it rises up bringing their moisture, and float over 
the lands where their waters fall as rain. 

The air currents have to rise into the cold regions to 
pass over mountain ranges. They drop more water on 
the western than on eastern slopes. If there were no 
mountains little rain would fall, and the world would be 
for the most part covered with deserts. More rain falls on 
mountains than on plains. For there it is wanted that 
trees, shrubs and vegetation may flourish, that the waters 
may flow down to percolate in hidden streams through 
the soil, and that plants may absorb it when the weather 
is dry. If this were not so all plants in the plain would 
die during dry weather. How wonderfully all these 
things have been foreseen for the farmers who raise all 



328 INFLUENCE OF FOKESTS ON CLIMATE. 

we eat, who follow the original and most important in- 
dustry of earth. 

You find springs all over lands where rain falls. If 
you dig deep into the ground, you will find water pure 
and sweet. All this water came from the seas, was 
raised into the air by the sun's heat, and carried up 
into the high regions by these currents of air. You can- 
not see the water rising from the oceans for it is invis- 
ible steam. As it ascends it strikes the high cold regions, 
appears as clouds, which floating over the land, drop 
their waters, giving life to all that live. Why does it 
rain more on land than on the seas ? Many experiments 
were carried out by the learned to find the causes of 
rains. 

Forests exert a powerful influence on the climate. 
Countries and places covered with vast forests are al- 
ways a number of degrees cooler than regions stripped 
of trees. The writer traveled through the great forests 
of northern Maine, Missouri, Michigan, Oregon, Canada, 
etc. Before he came to the great woods, although it was 
summer, he felt the cold. Growing plants use the light 
and heat of the sun which they change into growth. 
Thus they absorb the heat, changing its energy into life 
movement, this heat is lost in woods and the atmosphere 
is cooled. This is the reason it is always cooler in the 
shade of a living tree than in the shadow of a dead ob- 
ject. 

As the forest cools the air, more copious rains fall on 
forest lands than where the vegetation has been destroyed. 
This is one of the reasons the American continent is 
warmer now in summer than when it was covered with 
forests. We have not been careful of our forests, and 
the time will come when lumber will be scarce and dear. 
The United States Government is taking measures to 
preserve the forests, especially those covering the head 
waters of our important rivers. 

When the forests are destroyed floods sweep down. 
The dead leaves under a forest form a mold, or mulch , 
sometimes a number of feet deep, which retains the 



WHY WE FIND FEW SPRINGS. 32/9 

water, and keeps the roots moist. It retains the rain- 
water which slowly percolates till it reaches the brooks 
and rivers. Streams flowing through forests flow all 
summer about the same amount of water after the melt- 
ing of the snows in spring. We see how the Creator 
has balanced nature, and how dangerous it is to inter- 
fere with His arrangements. 

Ride a railroad along a river from source to mouth, 
and you will be surprised how few springs flow into it. 
Yet it gets larger and larger as down you go. The 
rains spread over the soil, sink down till they meet 
the bed-rock underlying all soils. The waters flow 
along the lowest levels, without coming to the surface, 
except where they meet an obstruction or come out into 
a lower level when they appear as springs. At last they 
flow out into the bottom of the rivers where you do not 
see them. Thus the river receives water from every 
side, it grows larger, till at last it pours its flood into 
the ocean whence it came, raised up by the sun's heat. 
There is a continual circulation of water from sea sur- 
face to the lands bringing life. The slightest change of 
law of rising and flowing water would make the world 
a barren waste. 

What a little thing a particle of dust is, floating in the 
air, yet without this dust rain would not condense in 
drops and fall on earth giving life to the world. We 
will suppose there were no deserts or volcanoes or city 
streets whence dust rises. The air loaded with moisture 
would deposit abundant dews every night. Except 
where the land was irrigated by canals bringing water 
from mountains, the world would be bare and desert, 
because the soil would be so heated during the day that 
plants would die. The sun's heat is spent in evaporating 
the rain-waters that keep the soil and atmosphere cool 
so plants can grow. Without the dust, waters rising 
from the surface of the seas would be carried every 
night up the mountain slopes into the colder regions, 
where they would fall on soil and rocks in great abun- 
dance, causing torrents every night. The air thus un- 



330 INFLUENCE OP BUST ON RAINFALL. 

loaded would be lighter, and rise higher, bringing an- 
other inrush of air from lower ocean surfaces. This 
continued would cause vast torrents to rush down the 
mountains and hills, tearing the soil, carrying it down 
into the valleys, and cutting deep ravines, as we see 
them in desert regions where the hills and mountains 
are high. 

The slightest changes of dust and rains from what it 
is now would make the world unfit for life. If there 
were no dust no rain would fall, the air would be so 
loaded with moisture we could not breathe it and live, for 
its water would fill our lungs so we would smother. 

If the air were half as dense, the winds would have 
only half their carrying power, and clouds, now high 
in the air, would lay along the fog covered ground, mak- 
ing it wet and cold all the time so plants could not 
grow. The sky, now beautiful blue, caused by the mil- 
ions of dust particles, too small even to be seen in the 
microscope — this sky would be then inky black, we could 
see stars even in brightest daylight. This dust produced 
by active volcanoes and deserts, spaces once looked as 
being blots on nature's surface in the face of that Provi- 
dence who regulates all things, is raised into the atmos- 
phere for man's use and benefit. 

If no winds blew and distributed this dust, soon all 
dust particles would fall to earth and we would have no 
rains. Tyndal found the air of a cellar under the Royal 
Institute closed for many months so free from dust that 
the path of an electric light passing through it could not 
be seen. Winds blow over earth in storms, gusts, gentle 
zephyrs, upwards, downwards in every direction, in 
countless whirls and eddies, scattering dust in all direc- 
tions, raising it to the greatest heights of the atmosphere, 
when water condenses round each particle to fall as rain. 
If by chance a comet or heavenly body came near to 
earth, and by its attraction stripped our world of half 
its air, these winds would have only half their power to 
carry these waters from the seas, and life would cease 
over nearly all the world. But this never happened, nor 



WHAT CAUSES A THUNDER STORM. 831 

never will, for God marked out the paths of comets and 
heavenly bodies in their flight through space, 

Summer sun beaming down on lands heats air and soil, 
dries up the waters into steam — water vapor we cannot 
see. The air becomes heated more and more as hours 
and days pass. The torrid heat, the burning light would 
soon kill all living beings. But One fixed his laws and 
placed his limits. 

A current of air loaded with dust rises into high cold 
regions, round dust particles the cooled waters gather 
forming drops, a little cloud, no larger than a man's hand 
appears, grows larger as it comes over the horizon. The 
heat changes into electricity, the air which has lost its 
heat cannot hold its water, clouds rapidly forming 
cover the sky blotting out the sun, the darkening clouds, 
surcharged with rain-drops, cover a large section miles in 
extent, the heat becomes electric currents flowing to 
the dark clouds which rapidly cover the whole sky. 

Now as the electricity flows to these thunder clouds 
from heated land and air, the clouds cannot hold it, the 
air losing its heat cannot hold its waters spread as 
water vapor, and the clouds become darker and more 
threatening. This force, a moment before heat, now 
electric, flashes from cloud to cloud, down to earth, and 
from earth to cloud, while rains fall in torrents to 
thirsty soil which would burn if this did not take place. 
Who says a wise Providence did not regulate the forces 
of nature that we might live and flourish ? 

While this lightning was in the cloud, it united ele- 
ments of the air and produced ammonia, which the rains 
bring down and spread along the soil as food for plants. 
Many and varied also are the materials produced in the 
air this way, that plants and animals may live. But 
each rain-drop brought down a particle of dust, and that 
is why the air seems so pure after a rain. If this did 
not take place, soon the whole atmosphere would be 
filled with dust, which penetrating breathing pores in 
leaves of plants would clog them, and entering lungs of 
animals and of men would soon smother them. What a 



332 THE WONDERFUL WORK THE SUN DOES. 

wonderful piece of machinery, then, our atmosphere is ! 
But we have only glanced at its wonders. To give all its 
details would fill many books. Who will say a divine 
Mind did not regulate its laws that man might live ? If 
any change were made in even one of these laws, soon life 
would cease on earth. Because we do not know these 
wonders of our world, we do not think of Him who from 
creation, from far beyond the time man appeared on 
earth, made the earth's materials in space, made oxygen, 
hydrogen and nitrogen, and gave them laws under which 
uniting they formed all the air and water on the earth. 

It is estimated 1,500,000,000 human beings now live 
on earth, and one person in five works. If four bushels 
of wheat in one lump would represent the amount of 
matter in the sun, one grain would typefy the bulk of 
earth ; but the polar star is 20 times larger than our sun. 
If all the coal and oil of the world were burned at once 
it would not produce one billionth of the heat the sun 
sends out each moment. The average yearly rainfall 
all over the world is 40 inches, a fall of one inch on a 
mile square surface weighs 72,000 tons, so you can esti- 
mate the power of the sun falling on earth to raise up 
this water to fall as rain from clouds, say, 3,000 feet, 
most clouds being higher. Assisted by the moon the sun 
raises ocean tides 3 feet every 12 hours. It would take 
a steam engine of 200,000,000,000 horse-power to do 
this work. 



CHAPTER XVI— WHAT IS LIFE— THE WONDERS OF 
LIVING ORGANISMS. 

Living organisms are more wonderful, complicated 
and mysterious than physical forces. We cannot see 
the living principles in themselves, for they are on the 
borders of spirit realms unseen by the senses. 

From ancient days learned men tried to explain the 
nature of life, and here we give the sum and substances 
of their studies. We study the acts and operations of 
living beings, for these show the powers animating them. 
When we understand their operations, we will under- 
stand the living energy which gives rise to their acts. 

A being acts according to its nature. Minerals act 
on other minerals outside themselves by attraction, re- 
pulsion, etc. But living organisms act on organs form- 
ing their structures. Mineral movement, therefore, is 
from without ; life is movement from within. Life, 
therefore, is movement from within the organism; 
physical movement is on things without itself. When 
an organism cannot move itself we say it is dead — 
movement in this case means any kind of vital action. 

Three great orders of living being^sin this world 
move themselves — plants, animals, men. Plant move- 
ment is slow, hardly seen ; animals move quicker, for 
they are higher developed than plants ; mind, and will 
in man move with great quickness — too rapidly to begin 
with their study, therefore, we will first take up animal 
movement to study the nature of life. 

A stone or a star cannot move itself. The law of 
inertia keeps matter moveless where placed ; no sun or 
planet would move unless a Power outside itself set it 
in movement. Who gave the million suns and planets 
motion, but the Almighty Power? But a living or- 

333 



334: THE ORIGIN OF LIFE ON EARTH. 

ganism moves its muscles, makes blood circulate, 
breathes, digests, grows, nourishes itself. This no 
mineral does. A living organism has, therefore, a 
power within itself different from mineral forces. An 
animal's body is composed of various materials, mixed, 
united in mysterious and complicated ways, differing 
from mineral mixtures — combined by a force within 
itself, which makes it one complete individual. 

Metals left alone to their forces form round globes, 
as dew, rain-drop, or mighty orb of sky. But mate- 
rials in an animal's body are built into cells, like little 
eggs inclosing protoplasm. Each cell under the micro- 
scope looks like a hollow ball inclosed by a membrane. 
Millions of these tiny cells, some hard, forming bones, 
others soft, composing yielding organs, form the animal's 
body. 

Living tissues show these cells ever moving, chang- 
ing, taking in and throwing out nourishing and worn- 
out materials. Lately we made lenses of crystal quartz 
which gather light rays beyond the violet rays, with 
which we photograph life functions glass lenses cannot 
show. "With this instrument, we see life's functions; 
these prove the living force is a power not found in 
crude mineral matter. Long experiments of Pasteur, 
Tyndall, and famous scientists prove dead matter can- 
not produce life. Life comes only from life. Where 
did animals first come from? Science gives no reply. 
Let us go, then, to the Bible for that wonderful work 
gives the only answer to the riddle of life. First, plants 
were created, lived for untold ages as geology shows, 
then came animals, these words tell their origin : 

" God said: Let the earth bring forth the living 
creature in its kind, cattle and creeping things, and 
beasts of the earth according to their kinds, and it was 
so done. And God made the beasts of the earth accord- 
ing to their kinds, and cattle, and every thing that 
creepeth on the earth after its kind. And God saw that 
it was good. And he said: Let us make man to "our 
own image and likeness : and let him have dominion 



HOW LIFE DIFFERS FEOM MINERAL FORCES. 335 

over the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the air, and 
the beasts, and the whole earth, and every creeping 
creature that moveth upon the earth." Gen. i. 24, 
25, 26. 

There is the only reasonable account of the beginning 
of beast and man which will satisfy any person learned 
in science. Theories of life coming up from dead 
matter, floating to earth from other heavenly bodies, 
are published by people half educated w^ho drew on 
their imagination, w r ho try to attract popularity, but in 
these they show their ignorance of the nature of life. 

Take your microscope and examine living tissues of 
animal or human flesh, bone or organ. Millions of 
little cells, round microscopic chambers, all filled with 
protoplasm, compose the organism in which circulate 
air, oxygen, hydrogen, masses of solids, gases and 
vapors of minerals — during life, forever uniting, dis- 
solving, building up, tearing down, burning up, and 
throwing out. A red river of life, the blood, circulates 
through all parts, its nourishing materials enter every 
cell, bringing to them serum, blocks of chalk, slabs of 
lime, masses of tartar, phosphates of lime, solutions of 
iron, materials of bone, particles of ash, strings of 
albumen — all to be built up into the structure. A 
force unseen reaches out, grasps the materials wanted 
in each place, and builds them here into flesh — there 
into bones ; in one place nerves, in another a brain, in 
another an eye. All is harmony directed by an In- 
telligence infinitely wise in chemistry, hydraulics, 
mechanics, mathematics and all the sciences. 

Life, therefore, is a force, a principle with the power 
of movement, created to animate an organism, to give 
its own life to the dead materials of which it builds its 
body. The living principle comes not from crude 
minerals of earth or star, but must have been created. 
Life was placed here by God, and living beings have 
propagated their race down to our day. 

Plants differ from minerals in chemical structure, 
development, time of living, ways of preserving its life 



336 HOW A PLANT DIFFERS FROM A MINERAL. 

and reproducing its species. 2l mineral may be broken 
in pieces ; sand, gravel, stones may be formed into con- 
crete by chemical actions; gold, iron or metals can be 
hammered into varied forms and they remain the same 
materials as before. Minerals become solid, liquid or 
gases according to their heat, and they are the very same. 

You cannot do this with any living thing. Tear to 
pieces a living organism and you destroy its life. Liv- 
ing things must have the right heat, or they die; ex- 
tremes of heat and cold kill anything which lives. They 
must have the right amount of light, heat, water, soil 
and air its species wants or they will die. 

A living organism differs from a mineral in structure. 
In every part of a mineral you find the same structure 
throughout. Iron, silver, gold, etc., are the same no mat- 
ter how finely they are divided. But in every living 
thing you find diverse structures, organs of various com- 
positions made of different material. Bark is not the 
same as woody fiber, leaves differ from seeds, buds are 
not like limbs, skin differs from bones, brain from heart, 
veins from arteries, eye from ear. Yet the structure is 
one whole, all tend to one end, the perfection of the in- 
dividual in growth, nutrition, and the bringing forth 
of another of the same species as itself. 

Look at a tree. See the bark covering it like a skin, 
the woody fiber giving it strength, the pithy heart within, 
with its branching limbs. The spreading leaves are its 
lungs to breath out oxygen and take in carbonic gas, 
the roots are to suck up water, and all these work for the 
individual tree. It is one complete whole, not many 
trees. If you cut off one of its members the latter will 
die. If you strip off all the leaves, or all the roots, or 
all the bark, it will not live. Every member and organ 
is for the whole tree, not for itself, for the one life 
force animates, and spreads, and pervades the whole tree. 

A mineral is whole and complete in itself. Thus 
copper, silver, iron and the hundred minerals of which 
the universe is composed are complete in themselves. 
These hundred minerals uniting form this world and 



COMPOSITION OF LIVING ORGANISMS. 337 

all the stars. But no living organism is ever composed 
of only one mineral. Every plant must have at least 
three substances — carbon, or coal, oxygen and hydrogen 
in the proportion of C 6 , H 10 , and 5 which form cel- 
lulose. To these the animal adds nitrogen, but the pro- 
portions of animal organisms are by weight, C 50.4 
O 24.67, H 6.64 with nitrogen 18.34. This is the 
composition of albumen, the foundations of animal or- 
ganisms, combined with small parts of iron, sulphur, etc. 

Materials of the mineral kingdom may be united by 
chemical action; they may be mixed together without 
chemical union to form a mass ; but this cannot be done 
with living beings. For if you force strange materials 
into the body of a living being it will die. Mineral 
fibers may lay beside each other as in wire and wrought 
metals, in flakes as mica, in strata as in rocks. These 
may be separated and broken, and the minerals will re- 
main the same materials. But nothing can be added to 
the body of a living thing except what it will take in a 
natural way, digest and assimilate into its own tissues. 
The mineral is passive, subject to external forces, while 
the living thing has within itself a force, acting accord- 
ing to its own nature, regulating its acts, not from with- 
out, but from within. 

This living force is more powerful than the attractions 
of the minerals. Solidifying matter unites making the 
same structure through the mass, each mineral acting 
according to its laws. Two and more minerals may be 
united according to the mathematics of chemistry, and 
these different elements will be found in every part, as 
iron and carbon make steel, as different materials crys- 
tallize, as diverse metallic gases combine to form air, 
water, etc., ruled by the physical forces which control 
them. 

But living organisms build their structures in spite 
of and contrary to these physical forces. For in place 
of putting the materials together intermixed, and side by 
side, the living force raises matter up in spite of weight 
and the physical forces, and puts there materials in the 



338 'WONDERFUL WATS ORGANISMS WORK. 

form of little egg-shells we call cells, under the miscor- 
scope looking like wonderful jewels as they flash forth 
the reflected light, colored in rainbow tints. 

Cells of plants, fishes and cold-blooded organisms are 
white. Cells of warm-blooded animals and of man are 
red. Cells are placed side by side in strings like beads, 
ends touching, and building every muscle, bone, organ, 
fiber and part of living organism. In plants they make 
long woody tissues built into little pipes, ends touching 
and opening into one another, through which sap, the 
plant's blood, circulates. Structures of plants for the 
most part are lighter than water, whence wood floats, 
while animal cells are heavier and sink in water. By 
instinct every animal can swim, while man has to learn, 
for he must learn all he knows. 

Minerals do nothing to develop their being, remaining 
the same till acted on by causes outside themselves. 
They never take other materials into their structure, 
digest and incorporate them into their own materials, 
or change their nature into their own bodies as the liv- 
ing organisms do in growth and nutrition. Minerals 
unite with other minerals. Iron uniting with oxygen 
rusts, but these two remain as before — the oxygen does 
not become iron. The plant takes in water, air, mater- 
ials it wants as food, and changes these into its own 
organism. Under influence of light and heat the plant 
grows, sends out leaves, roots, buds, flowers, fruits and 
seeds. Having propagated its race it dies. The min- 
eral does not die, for it is always dead and remains the 
same forever till another outside force changes it. 

Minerals rest in the same place till changed by forces 
outside themselves. But a plant will push its roots down 
deep into the ground to get water ; will shove the stones 
out of its way, will turn aside if the stone be too large, 
will take up water, lime, potash, silica, which tend to 
crystallize ; will kill this crystallizing power ; will build 
these materials up into its own tissues; will make use 
of and controls capillary attraction ; will pump up water 
against the attraction of the earth; will control and turn 



ORIGIN OF THE PLANTS ON EAKTH. 339 

to its own end the chemical forces; will upset laws of 
flowing fluids in its pores; will give out oxygen; will 
breathe in carbon from the air ; will with it build leaves 
and wood; will turn its leaves towards the sun for light 
and heat ; will control every natural force and will shape 
to its own, growth, nutrition and the propagation of its 
species. 

How could matter, dead, inert, crude, produce life? 
For a thing cannot give what it has not. Matter does 
not live, and how could it give life? Earth is dead. 
Rocks, sands, soils on its surface have no life. When 
from the fiery womb of nature our earth came forth it 
had no life. Then God said : " Let the earth bring 
forth the green herb, and such as may have seed, and 
the fruit tree, yielding fruit after its kind, which may 
have seed in itself upon the earth. And it was so done." 
Gen. i. 11. 

Vegetables are the food of man and beast; therefore 
God first made them before he made animals and man. 
All we said regarding the vegetable life may be said, but 
in a higher degree, regarding animal and man. For 
man is a mineral in the materials of his body ; a plant 
in his three functions of growth, nutrition and the re- 
production of his race; an animal in all the animal 
functions of his body, and he is an angel in his mind 
and free will. The human body is the most wonderful 
chemical laboratory, the highest and most complete or- 
ganism that lives. 

We glory in our generation that we condensed with 
cold and pressure air and gases into liquids and solids. 
To do that we use tremendous pressures, with cold hun- 
dreds of degrees below zero. The moment they are re- 
moved the gases return to their original state. But 
plant, animal and man condense gases into liquids and 
solids and hold them in these states in their organisms. 
They do this without using either cold or pressure. 
Plants and animals of past ages sifted carbon coal in a 
state of gas from the air, condensed it in the form of 
coal in their structures. You put this coal or wood 



340 THE WONDERFUL FORCES OF PLANTS. 

in your fire where the heat turns it into gas which unites 
with the oxygen of the air and throws out heat to warm 
you and cook your dinner. Only living organisms can 
thus condense gases, and this alone shows life cannot 
come from dead matter but from a living germ. 

Bathe plant organisms in nitric, sulphuric and other 
acids till they are on the point of dissolving into the 
gases composing them and you have gun cotton or nitro- 
glycerene, mixed with other materials made in other 
ways you have dynamite. The gases plants solidified in 
growth suddenly released tear asunder hardest rocks. 
Unite charcoal sulphur and nitre according to the form- 
ula 2KN0 3 S3C, in proportions, nitre 74.84, sulphur 
11.84, charcoal 13.32, you have gunpowder. Put this 
or smokeless powder into the 16-inch cannon at Sandy 
Hook guarding New York, behind the great shell and 
fire the gun. The gases condensed and stored by the 
plants send the shell 16 miles to destroy a hostile ship, 
the moment it strikes, powder inside the shell, weighing 
a ton, explodes tearing the vessel to pieces. Who says 
plants have not a force living within them which con- 
trols physical forces ? 

Living principles have millions of powers unseen, 
which animate millions of cells composing each organ- 
ism. There is a separate power for each cell, for every 
cell lives, when it dies it is a foreign body and must 
be thrown out. 

Chemical combinations, separations and unions make 
many products of living organisms, as urea, indigo, 
quinine, etc., but they are as dead as the elements from 
which they were made. Life comes only from life, no 
minerals alone will produce life, for life is a superior 
force which came from God. 

Minerals mixed under chemical laws, take wonderful 
forms in crystallizing, follow lines, obey mineral laws, 
trigonometry, geometry and the mathematics the eternal 
Mind imposed on matter. But every crystal is the same 
through its structure ; the smallest crystal of sugar, salt , 
bromide of potash, etc., is the same through its whole 



THE FOUNDATIONS OF ORGANISMS. 341 

mass. But with few exceptions, in living structures the 
crystallizing powers of the minerals are controlled, and 
materials form in cells built in growth. 

Organisms have three chief powers, growth, nutrition 
and reproduction. Growth, powerful in youth, stops 
when the individual gets its full form and strength, nu- 
trition goes on till death. Before it died it brought 
forth others of its species to continue the race. The 
young resemble the parents in shape, organs and details 
of color, hair, feathers, teeth, claws, scales, spines, crests. 
The human race follows this law, for the sons of Sem, 
Ham, Japhet modified by climate, may be recognized in 
their children. 

Protoplasm, " first formed," basis of life composed of 
nitrogen, hydrogen, oxygen and carbon spread through 
the universe enveloping millions of suns, compose all 
animal tissues, skin, bones, hair, horn, teeth, nails, saps, 
seeds, trunks and trees, woods and weeds, stalks and 
stems, flowers and ferns, fish and fowl. Human bodies 
are all composed of these four gases, mixed with iron, 
sulphur, silica and a few other metals. Gases are made 
solid, the minerals are dissolved in protoplasm, or by 
solvents separated from it, and by blood of beast and 
sap of plant carried to where wanted to be built into 
the living structure one and identical with the living 
force which directs movements. A wonderfully wise 
Intelligence presides over the building of a living organ- 
ism. 

As we start from the groundwork of growth, proto- 
plasm, we find living organisms bring in other sub- 
stances, as sulphur, iron, etc., and make proteids, most 
abundant in animal structures. These give nourishing 
properties to meat, cheese, eggs and animal foods, which 
alone can nourish some animals — meat-eating beasts. 
Guided by instinct these will eat only these animal prod- 
ucts. A dog or cat will take meat before any other 
food, for they cannot or with difficulty assimilate vege- 
tables. They eat nothing till they smell it, to see if it 
has these proteids. Smell tells them what is good, what 



342 the Work Of a wonderful Architect. 

is useless or harmful, and they know that better than 
we. All through nature we find animal instincts, show- 
ing a wisdom wonderful to see, guiding them in all 
their acts for the preservation of the individual and the 
propagation of their race. 

Oxygen is the food of protoplasm, without which it 
cannot exist. The wonderful peculiar but invisible 
structure of the protoplasm enables plants to suck up 
water through the roots, to absorb carbonic acid from 
the air, to separate the oxygen from it, and to throw 
it out for the animals. ¥e cannot find out how it is 
done, for protoplasm defies exact chemical analysis, 
therefore we cannot find out its exact structure. 
Oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen, range side by side 
in the organisms more beautifully than the carved stones 
in a great Gothic cathedral. This is but the starting- 
point of these wondrous plants and animal and human 
bodies built up, each according to its kind and race. 

The extreme mobility and liability of protoplasm to 
change enables the structure to be modified in consti- 
tution, form and figure, by the addition of other simpler 
metals to serve the purpose of the living principles, 
and with them build up these organisms, which grow 
into all the varied kinds of plants and animals and the 
human body. Who presides over this work? Who 
directs these buildings? Who is the Great Architect 
of these structures? Who stands by to see that each 
particle is placed in the right place? Man can build a 
great bridge, a structure beauteous of form, raise an 
edifice to hundreds of feet, with many stories; but 
with all our arts and learning we cannot make a blade 
of grass ; all mankind together could not make a cell 
of the living organism. 

Protoplasm has a power of absorbing and molding 
other elements in different parts of the living organisms 
for special use. While making this protoplasm, the 
foundation of the physical structure, the living principle 
grasps and brings in silica, deposits it in the stems of 
the grass family of plants, arranges lime in bones of 



THE ARCHITECTURE OF ORGANISMS. 343 

animals, dissolves iron in the blood, absorbs sulphur in 
the bird and phosphates in other organisms. In addi- 
tion to the four elements — oxygen, hydrogen, coal and 
nitrogen — of protoplasm, many animals and plants 
have iron, sulphur, chlorine, calcium, sodium, potassium, 
calcium, magnesium etc, while in fewer cases we find 
fluorine, iodine, bromine, lithium, copper, manganese 
and aluminum, in special organs. These are carried 
by the protoplasmic fluids, built as wanted, and in the 
proper proportions, into the structures. 

They are not tumbled in without order as you would 
dump a load of bricks and stones where you are going 
to build a house. They are built up, arranged, put 
together like stone and brick, end to end, as the builder 
puts deep foundations, iron pillars, wood and glass, 
windows and doors, walls and rooms, each in its own 
proper place, when he builds a house. Every organism 
had an Architect and a Builder infinitely wise, who 
planned and built the first living beings, and gave 
them power to give birth to others of the same kind. 

What different kinds of odors, flavors, colors, tex- 
tures, fibres, varied wood-roots and tubers, gums and 
oils, resins and saps, skins and hides, sugars and sweets, 
trees and shrubs, grains and grasses — in a word, all 
these numberless products of the vegetable and animal 
kingdoms, which render the world so varied, so diver- 
sified and which enter into arts, commerce, industry, 
and chemistry. The world of plant life is the founda- 
tion of all these. For without plants, animals or man 
could not live. All these things are wonders. We 
see them so often that we do not think of them. We 
do not put a value on them, for the most valued things 
have no value in our eyes, they are so common. Air, 
without which a man could live but for a few moments, 
has no value in his eyes. 

So all these things — all vegetable and animal beings 
— are built of one building material, protoplasm, which 
as Huxley says, is not only a substance but a structure, 
a piece of machinery, a mechanism kept at work by 



344 THE VARIED FB0DUCTS OE LIVING THINGS. 

sunlight and heat, capable of producing when acted on 
by principles of living organisms of plant, animal, and 
man. 

Living organisms are a thousand times more varied 
and more marvelous results than all the human ma- 
chinery was, or ever will be, invented by mankind. 
Now who invented these living machines we call plants, 
animals, and men? We did not make them, they were 
here before we came, and a Mind infinitely wise must 
have made them, for they could not make themselves. 

What a marvel it is that from them come such an 
endless variety of organic productions, from prussic 
acid, a most deadly poison, to the thousand fruits, the 
many kinds of sugars, gums, and starches, the number- 
less kinds of oils, waxes, gums, the essential oils, as 
turpentines, resins, rubbers, gutta-percha, the nicotine 
of tobacco, morphine, strychnine, curarine, and other 
poisons, tea, coffee, cocoa, liquors, wines, — all these, 
and thousands of others, come from these four elements 
combined in wonderful ways by the life principles 
living in the organisms of the vegetable and animal 
kingdoms. 

Men can hardly believe that all plants, animals, 
and human bodies are formed of these four simple 
elements combined, in that wonderful variety, or would 
show such diversity, such harmony and beauty united 
with small particles of the other elements mentioned, 
if strict science did not abundantly prove it. 

But there is another marvelous thing — the basis of 
protoplasm is nitrogen, with its extreme immobility. 
It is inert in itself, and plants or animals cannot take 
it into their systems directly from the air of which it is 
one of the component parts. 

Sulphur required for birds is in the egg, which has 
all the materials required to build the body of the 
young. When you eat an egg, this sulphur colors 
your silver spoon. Man, animals of cow, horse, fami- 
lies, etc. , want salt. Wild beasts go miles and miles 
to get it. Cattle deprived of salt, eat it with fierce 



BY INSTINCT ANIMALS KNOW THEIR FOOD. 345 

avidity, for their systems crave it. But you cannot 
make a bird eat it, for this creature needs sulphur and 
lime. A man must have iron, and you would find 
enough of this metal in the body of a man to make a 
knife blade. But some animals will not take iron into 
their systems, for it would kill them. As we pass along, 
examining the materials of which living things are 
formed, we are astonished at the variety of their in- 
stincts. Every one of these animals knows what it 
wants and what to avoid. You cannot make a horse, 
cow, or vegetable-eating animal eat meat, and you 
cannot force a wolf, tiger, or lion to eat grass, for 
they know the foods which nourish them. They even 
know what will cure them when sick. The wounded 
dog will lick his wounds, for he knows the antiseptic 
properties of his saliva, and most wonderful, he knew 
this long before antiseptics were applied to wounds 
after Pasteur's discoveries of bacteria floating in the 
air, which cause suppuration. 

While animals live mostly on vegetable or animal 
food, each according to its kind, man was made to eat 
both vegetable and animal foods, and he, alone, of all 
organisms can live for a long time on either vegetable 
or animal foods, especially on vegetables with the pro- 
teids, as nuts, seeds, peas, beans, which have nitrogen, 
some of which contain phosphorus, sulphur, etc. For 
these reasons, bread of wheaten flour, triticum vulgare, 
is the most nourishing food known, and a man could 
live indefinitely on bread mixed with sugar. Well is 
it called the < ' Staff of Life. ' ' Many proteids are found 
in vegetables, such as roots and grains, whose fats are 
mainly composed of starch and sugar. The proteids 
added to protoplasm enable the living principle to build 
up all vegetable and animal structures and are thus de- 
scribed by Professor Haliburton. 

" Proteids are produced only in the living laboratry 
of animals and plants, proteid matter is the all-import- 
ant material present in protoplasm. This molecule is 
the most complex that is known, it always contains 



346 THE WONDERFUL BEAUTY OF LIVING BEINGS. 

five, and often six and seven elements. The task of 
understanding its composition is very vast, and advance 
slow. But little by little the puzzle is being solved, 
and this final conquest of organic chemistry, when it 
does arrive, will furnish physiologists with new light 
on many dark places of the science of life. ' ' 

Plants are in everlasting sleep, animal and man grow 
during sleep, man knows not how he grows, how these 
materials are placed in his body, knows not how each 
of the millions of cells composing his body flash forth 
light through the microscope more beautifully than 
the most precious gem, why the living being follows the 
plans of its species no matter what the food and care, 
that each living creature is made according to the plans 
and specifications the Great Architect of the universe 
drew up for each species. 

We admire the genius of the architect, who plans a 
beautiful building. But look at the beauty of plants 
in form, figure, flour and fruit : see the curved line of 
beauty in cells, muscles, movements and outline of 
plant and beast ; study the marvelous beauties of the 
human form divine. Will you say an Artist of sur- 
passing wisdom and taste for beauty did not plan the 
creation of these living principles which built these 
bodies ? 

The living principles are whole and complete in the 
organisms and whole and completely in each and every 
part, for they are spiritual. Part or extension belongs 
to minerals and not to spirits, which are where they 
exert their acts. The human soul is in every part of 
the body, the physician will look in vain for it in 
brain, or heart, or other organ, for it is a spirit beyond 
the ken of any sense. 

Scientists make fatal mistakes. They treat living 
organisms as minerals. Medical men look for the soul 
as though they could see a spirit, the false theory of 
atoms and molecules misleads them. Soul or mind are 
not even hinted at in medical studies, and medicine has 
not made an important advance for a century, except the 



HOW PLANTS GET NITROGEN THEIR FOOD. 347 

discovery of diseases caused by bacteria under the hands 
of Pasteur and Liebig, who examined lower forms of 
life. Surgery, taking life into account has made won- 
derful discoveries. When Harvey looked on the human 
body as a living organism he discovered the blood 
circulation. 

Oxygen and nitrogen compose air high above the 
farm, extending miles are tons and tons of nitrogen, 
the food of plants, and which enters into the structure 
of every animal organism. Yet the plant cannot sift 
this gas out of the air. Animals cannot use the crude 
gases or minerals, for they have no powers to get their 
food from the minerals round them. All animal or- 
ganisms must live on plants, this is the law of nature, 
and for this reason the plants were created before the 
animals. In this the animal differs from the vegetable. 

But the vegetable cannot separate nitrogen from the 
air — yet this nitrogen makes the farm so rich when 
spread among the soil. Without this gas the soil 
would be unproductive. How do the plants get the 
nitrogen ? The Creator has provided. On the roots 
of clover, beans, peas and other plants are millions and 
millions of microscopic bacteria, which secrete the 
nitrogen from air and water, and furnish it as food to 
the growing crop. Discovered only in our day the 
farmer did not know this. But when he wanted to 
enrich a field < ' run out " he planted clover or other 
leguminous crop, and found the next season his field 
was enriched — the reason he did not know. 

But plants cannot wait a whole season, they want 
the nitrogen at once or they die. The Creator fixed 
his laws so the plants can grow. The lightning in the 
air forms ammonia, composed of one volume of nitrogen 
and three volumes of hydrogen, which condenses into 
two volumes. It is a colorless, pungent gas, strongly 
alkaline, which under cold or pressure becomes a liquid. 
Ammonia and other oxides of nitrogen in the same way 
offer nitrogen to plants, and through them to animals 
and men. Although plants live and grow in contact 



348 HOW BEAUTIFULLY THINGS ARE BALANCED. 

with the nitrogen of the air, they cannot absorb it 
directly into their organisms, and therefore they get 
it in this way. 

The leaves, the lungs of plants, absorb the oxygen 
and carbon-dioxide in the air, and use these materials 
to build up their woody tissues. Through their roots 
they take in water having ammonia, with the oxides of 
nitrogen, and with these they build protoplasm of the 
whole vegetable and animal world. The lightning 
and electric discharges, in the thunder-cloud furnished 
these materials, which are carried down into the soil 
by rains. These combinations and changes in earth, 
sea and sky go on all the time. The lightning required 
for summer growths takes place in summer and rarely 
in winter, when the vegetable world sleeps. 

A gentle heat is absolutely required for growth, 
for nothing can live in either extreme heat or cold. 
If the general temperature of the world changed, rose 
or fell 72° F., life would cease to exist on our planet. 
If the earth was a satellite of one of the great suns, 
if we were nearer or farther from our sun. life would 
be impossible. Our world would be burned up or frozen 
with eternal arctic frost. Now who regulated these 
things that life might exist? Who foresaw and made 
our sun with yellow light, and gave it not the red light? 
Why was it not placed as a satellite of one of the purple 
suns with their awful heat, or near the other suns with 
their small heat? Who placed our earth here, and not 
as a planet of the mighty Areturus, which would in a 
short time melt and drive into mineral vapors every 
particle of which the world was made? 

Who placed our world just where it is, and not way 
out where now Jupiter, Saturn or Neptune or Uranus 
now revolve in everlasting winter? Why did not the 
earth come forth from the revolving globe of heated 
matter where now Yenus is burned up with light and 
heat? We ask these questions to draw the reader's 
attention to the fact, that our world is just in the place 
where living organisms flourish. An intelligence was 



HOW PLANTS AND ANIMALS PURIFY THE AIR. 349 

here when our world was made. He guided nature at 
the birth of worlds, and stood by when this earth was 
forming as a place for the future residence of man. 

A certain, continued and small amount of carbonic 
acid gas — that is, carbon — one of the metallic vapors, is 
always in the atmosphere, and from this the plants and 
animals get their carbon which we see in coal or wood. 
The leaves of plants absorb this coal in its metallic state 
from the air, and the chlorophyll, which gives them 
the green color, under the influence of sunlight decom- 
poses this gas, uses the carbon to build up plant 
structure and gives out oxygen, without which animal 
life cannot exist. The animal breathes air, dissolves 
its oxygen, which it sends through the blood to every 
part of the body, and brings back the worn-out parts 
in the form of carbonic acid gas, which it breathes out 
through the lungs. 

Let us suppose another change took place, for 
example, that both plant and animal breathed out only 
carbonic acid gas, which is coal, what would be the 
result in a few centuries? The atmosphere would be- 
come so filled with gas, that all animals would die. 
If, on the other hand, plants as well as animals exhaled 
oxygen, in a few centuries all the plants would die, 
animals would have nothing to live on, and life would 
cease from our world. 

But the Providence who built the orbs and covered 
ours with air and life, made these two great orders, 
plant and animal, so one might live on the other. The 
plant purifies the air for the animal, and the latter for 
the former. Destroy one and the other would cease 
to live. Did this come by chance? Did fate or acci- 
dent preside over the creation of these orders of living 
beings, so one would sustain the life of the other? 
Apply the rules of probability, and you will be lost in 
the figures. The ratio of one to that of the figures 
which would represent the other would cover the sur- 
face of our globe. An Intelligence presided over the 



350 HOW PLANTS LIVE AND GKOW. 

foundation of plant and animal life. There is no other 
conclusion. 

Carbon, or coal, which formed such a large part 
once of living plants, which now lies in countless tril- 
lions of tons in the earth, and which we dig as coal, 
can be combined with oxygen by heat, as some metals 
burn or oxidize by uniting with oxygen. In a fire 
this oxygen of the air combines with the carbon in coal 
or wood, and the chemical union produces the heat and 
light of the fire. 

Chlorophyll, " green leaf," with its green color has 
a highly complex structure, not well known at present, 
into which iron from the soil enters. It stands as it 
were between the air and the structure of the plant, 
sifting out the coal in the air, as carbonic acid gas. The 
green chlorophyl sends through the sap this coal to 
build up the plant structure. It is found mostly in the 
leaves. 

These leaves, the marvelously constructed lungs of 
the plants, do what no other agency in nature can do, 
produce the materials of growth in breathing* If you 
strip a plant of its leaves, you deprive it of its lungs 
and it dies. 

They decompose carbonic acid at ordinary tempera- 
ture, what no man or other thing in nature can do, 
using special sunlight rays, ranging from the most rapid 
waves beyond the blue rays, down through the spectrum 
below the red rays, and down to the invisible rays as 
the X-rays, N-rays and other ether- waves we have not 
yet discovered. This growth of plants displays a 
harmony, a dependence, interwoven one with another 
which surprises us. If one of these rays were wanting, 
the plant would not grow. Who arranged this har- 
mony? Nature is blind and could not. Suppose our 
sun were of the red kind, having little heat, or suppose 
it were a blue sun in place of being a yellow orb, 
plants could not live, they would either die with cold 
or burn up with heat. Beside this, yellow light alone 
sustains life in all its varied functions, and red or blue 



THE LIFE WORK OF PLANTS. 351 

rays would not cause the chemical changes and func- 
tions of plant life. Was it an accident that our sun 
shines with yellow light which alone can sustain plant 
life? Again we are forced to say a Mind presided over 
the formations of the sun and the creation of plants to 
live through the operation of his yellow light and 
gentle heat. 

The wondrous work going on in plants is thus de- 
scribed. < ' We have seen how gre en leaves are supplied 
with gases, water, and dissolved salts, and how they 
can trap special ether- waves. The active energy of 
these waves is used to transmit the simple inorganic 
compounds into complex organic ones, which, in the 
process of respiration, are reduced to simpler substances 
again, and the potential energy transformed into 
kinetic. These metabolic changes take place in living 
cells full of intense activities. Currents course through 
the protoplasm and cell-sap in every direction, and 
between the cells which are also united by strands of 
protoplasm. The gases used are given off in respiration 
and assimilation, are floated in and out, and each pro- 
toplasm, burned or un burned, is the center of an area of 
disturbance. Pure protoplasm is influenced equally 
by all rays, that associated with chlorophyll is affected 
by certain red and violet rays in particular. These, 
especially the red ones, bring about the dissociation 
of the elements of the carbonic gas, the assimilation of 
the carbon and the excretion of the oxygen. ' ' Cham. 
Encyclop., Art. Veg. Physiology. 



CHAPTER XVII— THE INSTINCTS OP PLANTS.] 

Nature has few sudden gulfs or gaps. Like morn- 
ing's aurora before the sun, kinds of creatures gradually 
seem to blend or overlap species above or below; lowest 
plants and animals look alike ; highest beasts in mode of 
life and organs, resemble human beings; monkeys and 
apes look like men but have no reason. Two kingdoms 
the seen and unseen, dead matter and living beings, spirit 
realms seem to overlap, bend down, making matter live 
as reasoning men, mineral, plant, and animal ; form 
three steps, which rise to man, binding visible worlds 
with unseen living spirits, at whose head is God. 

We saw how matter has no sense or reason to direct 
its moves, that the Almighty's mathematics and physical 
laws rule matter, sun and orb, keeping the universe 
from running to chaos and anarchy. But unbending 
physical forces, mathematics, great heat or cold, an elec- 
tric shock, etc., directed by figures, would kill life, which 
begins in plant, rises up to animal, ends with man, with 
his Godlike reason, liberty, free will, master of his acts. 

Plants live lowest lives, beasts have more perfect 
lives, man, most perfect plant and beast have some of his 
soul powers buried in his body, angel lives free from 
matter, God lives His own eternal life. Man begins the 
order of thinking, reasoning beings, above him is the 
angel with his better reason, at the head is God, eternal 
Eeason, with His Mind and Will, from which come His 
Son and Spirit. 

Everything in nature has a purpose, an end towards 
which all its acts tend. The universe was made for 
man's use and benefit, man was made first here below, 
God to know, Him to love, to be with Him happy after 
this short life, not a tick in time since creation compared 
to eternity. 

352 



353 

Plants, beasts, even men are directed by instincts, 
meaning " moved within " — the wisdom of God direct- 
ing creatures to their ends. The end of God is his 
own eternal Being, the end of reasonable being is to be 
happy with Him, the end of plant and beast is to serve 
mankind. To this tend their instincts, written in the 
very nature of the vital powers. Having no reason them- 
selves, guided by God's reason, they show astonishing 
wisdom, in nature they follow instinct, outside that they 
are most stupid, you must force them to act against 
their instincts. When they gain their objects, food, 
growth, the propagation of their species, they are satis- 
fied ; man is never fully happy here, no matter what he 
has; his reason rests only in union with his God. 

Scientific people, learned only in special departments 
of knowledge, never rising to the philosophy of life, 
working along narrow lines, fill books, try to show plants 
and beasts adapting means to an end, reason; publish 
wild, foolish, crazy theories attracting for a time at- 
tention, because of their novelties. We cannot go over 
the whole field of instincts of plants, as books would not 
hold them. 

Materials shaped in pipes are stronger than in any 
other arrangement; engineers use hollow columns to 
upbuild heavy buildings. This principle of mechanics 
is found all through nature. Cut a tree or stalk, look 
down through a microscope, at the end you will see the 
structure of little pipes, hollow columns side by side, 
their walls uniting. Through these hollow columns the 
sap circulates. Grasses, weeds, the stalks of forms of 
plant life are hollow, the hard parts of birds' quills and 
bones are also on the outside making columns, structures 
built according to this principle of mechanics. What 
Builder built these forms this way long before man dis- 
covered this is the strongest method to arrange materials ? 

Plant and animal take food, digest it, put it through 
a wonderful process of chemistry, and unite these ma- 
terials in wondrous ways into their structures. Who is 



354 PLANTS LIVE LONGER THAN ANIMALS. 

this Chemist of surpassing wisdom? Where did He 
learn chemistry, this is a modern science? 

Passing through multitudes of chemical changes the 
plants grow — some from the outside, others from within, 
under light, heat and change, till materials are formed 
and placed just where wanted in growth. 

Plant life is slow, grows slower than animal and lives 
longer. On his own place the writer cut the sugar- 
maple trees of which the house is built where these 
lines are being written, he carefully counted the yearly 
rings, one tree had over 400 rings, other trees larger 
still stand, were left because too heavy to handle. Four 
times he counted these rings each the growth of a year, 
then sat down on the stump and thought — this tree 
lived when Columbus landed. 

In California he saw trees more than 30 feet in 
diameter, members of the giant Sequoia, which perhaps 
were living while Solomon was building his famous 
temple roofed with the wrongly called " cedars," for they 
belong to the larch family, only a few trees of the orig- 
inal forest now remain covering a hill in the Lebanon 
mountains. In California are forests of another giant 
tree, the sequoia sempervirens, nearly as large. These 
specimens are the only remains of vast forests once 
covering the northern parts of the world before the ice- 
cap came down and buried them, we find their remains 
in coal. The ice could not pass the great Sierra Nevada 
Mountains, so the species survived only on the Pacific 
Coast. We could fill books with the wonders of plants, 
space permits but a few words on the way plants are 
propagated. 

Lowest organisms propagate by budding, dividing — 
one individual separates into two or more individuals. 
As we rise we see new individuals germinate from two 
.sexes in the same individual. Higher still we find 
individuals of two sexes must mate to bring forth an- 
other. This in highest perfection is in man and woman, 
" the womb man," with mating instincts most wonder- 



THE WONDROUS BOOKS OF NATURE. 355 

fully directed by instinct. We might treat this subject 
in full, show the Creator's wisdom in the mating of 
creatures, but the subject is delicate, for man is injured 
in his origin, bears the instinct of shame in matters re- 
lating to the generation of his race as a mark of his fall 
from a higher state. 

What is more beautiful than a flower, there takes 
place the generation of plants of the same species. Put 
a little pollen from a flower under the microscope, and 
you see minute grains, each according to the species, 
shaped, colored, mosaic-like wondrous forms, beautiful 
above the work of any artist. This falls on the stigma 
of the flower and impregnates in a surprising way. 
Chemistry, mechanics surpassing in wisdom, follow till 
a seed is made. Take the spermatozoon of higher ani- 
mals ; each species has its own proper germ, which will 
not unite with the female element of any other species. 
While the pollen of the plant rests motionless, that of the 
animal is filled with life, for it belongs to a higher 
order of creation. In a later chapter we will describe 
that of man. We cannot go over the whole domain of 
nature to describe the germination of all plants and ani- 
mals for there are millions of species. We will look 
only, at a few that the reader may glance at some of the 
marvels of nature, and from these rise to the wondrous 
wisdom of the Creator. Let us look a little at the 
plants and then see the animals. 

Grass and weed, flower and fruit, shrub and tree — 
each plant and living organism is a book filled with 
wonders, teaching truths, proclaiming science, singing 
silent songs of praise to Him who made each creature 
in his image. We are ignorant, our minds are darkened, 
our attention is taken up with thoughts of other things, 
and we do not stop to think of the wonders of life round 
us. We like to read books by skilled authors, but we 
know not how to read the books of God, the revelations 
of his glories written in the million books round us. 

Go out in the forest, look at trees and bushes along 



356 AN UNSEEN SPlEIT DIRECTS PLANTS. 

the roadside, see the weeds beside the fence, the green 
of field, hillside — the wisest man who ever lived was 
ignorant compared to these so humble and so silent. 

At the first glance they seem irregular, without form 
or order. But get up on high where you can look down 
on these green forms of lowly life, and you will find 
every limb, stalk and leaf just where the sunlight will 
fall on them to best advantage. Crawl down under 
weeds or bushes by the way and examine them. See, 
the leaves grow out just in the right place and turn 
to get the proper light. See how plants which like light 
and heat grow high above, while weeds that grow in 
shadows are down under in the shade. Take your time, 
you will find a wondrous wisdom presides over the 
growth of every plant. 

Limbs look as though they came out in most irregular 
ways. They are here and there, and turn everywhere. 
But look down on the growing plants from where the 
light strikes them, and you will see every branch has 
turned in the right direction so it will grow where the 
leaves will get best light and heat its growth wants. 
It seems as though some unseen Spirit had pulled them 
in the right direction. In early spring bend down one 
of these trees, shrub or weed and tie it there, and 
leave it thus. Soon limbs and leaves will bend to light. 
We seldom see a forest from high, in the air — mostly 
from the ground, and we do not know these things. 
Who is the silent Unseen who shapes these unreasoning 
living forces for the better growth of plants ? 

Some plants grow on warm hillside, others on the 
plain, some in marshy places, others on the mountain 
top, some in waters of lake and pond, others in salty 
seas, yet each has its own habitation and will die if you 
transplant it to other clime or place. Man cultivated 
some plants from the beginning, others are still wild. 
Some are useful, others medicinal, and our drug-stores 
are lined with their Latin names. Many weeds we exe- 
crate and would wipe off the face of earth because we 



THE MOST VALUABLE PLANT IN THE W0ELD. 357 

do not now know their use, yet they persist in forcing 
themselves on ns till we learn their natures. 

We sorrow the limits of our book will not allow us 
to go over the whole domain of Botany, " a plant," the 
knowledge of the vegetable kingdom. There among the 
plants the science of an infinite Power shines forth. 
We can only give a rapid glance at a few wonders of 
plant life. 

Asked what plant is most valuable to mankind you 
would puzzle to reply. It is the little grass under your 
feet on which domestic animals live. It seems worth- 
less because it is so common. It is so necessary for 
man the Creator endowed it with a surprising vital 
force. When animals eat off all the leaves of most 
plants they die, but the grass grows again. When for- 
ests, bushes or weeds are cleared away grass springs 
up because it is required for food for domestic animals 
which without it would starve. 

Some plants shed their leaves in the fall but when 
spring heat rouses them from winter sleep, the sap comes 
up from the roots buried in moist soil, passing through 
soft tissues between the wood and bark, till it enters 
the leaves where, acted on by the air, it receives carbon 
of the atmosphere in a state of gas, at the same time 
giving out its oxygen. The sap passes down again be- 
tween the bark and wood of the tree, and forces out the 
bark all round making the tree larger. Little by little 
as summer advances, the new layer becomes harder, till 
in the fall a new woody layer has been added all around 
the tree. Thus a new layer is added to the tree each 
summer and you see these layers in wood boards each 
year making a layer and the old dead bark lies in layers. 

The tree not only grows larger in diameter but taller, 
for growth takes place through the whole organism. In 
the corn and palm tree, etc., the growth takes place from 
within all parts of the plant. But in our plants which 
shed their leaves in fall growth takes place between bark 
and wood. 



358 WHY BTJftS STICK TO OUR CLOTHES. 

Beautifully blends nature's works guided by Reason 
infinite in wisdom. Plants furnish food for animals, 
and these distribute seeds. After a walk through weeds 
in fall who has not found burs in his clothes ? By this 
means animals distribute seeds of plants they do not 
eat, for there is a mutual service and a brotherhood of 
all creatures under the Fatherhood of God. Animals 
have instincts of cleanliness. After running perhaps 
miles, they lie down and with their teeth pull off these 
burs, and next season upwards spring new plants. Fine 
seeds stick to their hairs, they bathe their coats with the 
tongue or shake off the seeds. The burdock incloses 
sometimes 16 seeds, which are shaken out as the animal 
runs. The cockle burs must be pulled out, one at a 
time, they have a way of clinging to each other like 
children holding hands so bunches of them cling to 
the animal's fur, the animal using his teeth tears the 
burs apart scattering the seeds. 

The hedgehog-grass or sand-bur has one or two seeds 
inclosed in small hard burs, bristling with spines, point- 
ing in every direction, which cling to anything touch- 
ing them. When ripe they attach themselves to man 
or animal, and are carried away till the burs break off, 
when the seeds fall. The beggar-lice and ticktrefoil 
growing in woods or brush, have burs with four seeds 
in each like the four quarters of a cut apple, their 
backs being covered with hooks, each breaks off sepa- 
rately in the case of the first, while the latter has strings 
of long pods all covered with microscopic hooks, which 
grasp the hair of animal or your clothes and the seeds 
fall out as they are carried along. 

Grasses use different means of spreading their seeds. 
The cultivated grasses seldom have any methods of scat- 
tering their seeds, for they were created to be sowed by 
man. But the wild neglected grass, similar to wild rye, 
has awns in shape of a trident with the seed in the 
center, the stiff short spikes stick to any animal, and 
thus the seed is carried. When you walk through the 



HOW BEASTS SPREAD SEEDS. 359 

fields and weeds in fall, you find your clothes covered 
with its seeds. Examine them under the microscope 
and you will be astonished at the means taken to spread 
the species. The soft down of milkweeds, cat-tails, 
anemones, cottonwoods, willows, etc., will surprise you 
when examined. Each shows seed in nature design, a 
Mind which foresaw and used means to gain this end. 

Nuts are sweet and nutritious that animals may 
eat or hide them, often the hiding-place is forgotten and 
the seeds grow to trees. Squirrels, crows and other ani- 
mals plant seeds, seldom more than one in a hole, and 
these grow. The chipmunk seizes the chokecherry, runs 
off to a stone or log where he sits up and eats the rich 
pulp. If a hawk or enemy appears the squirrel drops 
the pineseed, cherry, walnut or other seeds filling his 
mouth and scampers to his hole, and the seeds grow to 
trees and bushes along the fences. 

Plants are spread over distant regions because their 
seeds fly, while seeds of cultivated plants do not fly be- 
cause they were made to be planted by man, who, using 
his reason, chooses places where he wishes them to grow. 
Fields left fallow raise weedy crops differing from 
season to season, till the grasses cattle want smother 
them. We ask where did these seeds come from ? God 
provided plants with these instincts. 

Walking the field after a rain we find different kinds 
of fungus — the toothsome mushroom, the agarus cam- 
pestris, the whitish yellow growth on decaying trees — 
a thousand kinds of fungus, each in species differing. 
Squeeze " puff-ball " when dry and out comes a puff 
like smoke ; put some under the microscope and you will 
find the puff is made of fine little seeds, which falling 
in the right place grow in almost a night into the fungus. 
Here is a low order of life not yet well understood. 
People suffer with eczema. Examine with the glass the 
pus and you will find it is caused by a minute fungus 
having stalk and head like a mushroom with seeds on 
top. The plant secretes an exceeding sour sap which 



360 SEEDS FLYING MACHINES. 

causes the itching, and only the most powerful poisons, 
like bichloride of mercury, will kill it. It livs in the 
outer skin, often penetrating into the inner skin, caus- 
ing sores and intolerable itching. 

Seeds of fungus families are so small they float in 
air. But larger seeds have one or more wings. The 
dandelion develops the round white head which on damp 
days folds into a round ball, while in dry weather the 
head expands. Examine carefully, and you will see the 
end covered with black seeds, each ending in a filmy 
little stalk. The wind breaks these seeds from the stalk 
and scatters them over the ground far from the parent 
plant. The same way thistle seeds are scattered far 
and wide on dry days, but the head closes up during 
rains, for then the seeds would not scatter so far. As 
each seed flies away in the wind, it may be stopped by 
stone or fence, and this is why they are found growing 
in so many places. 

Closely guards the golden-rod its seeds during fall, 
for its pappus, or wings, are small and light compared 
to the seed. But when snow covers the ground and 
fierce winds come, the furry heads open, and the seeds 
are sent long distances. The pappus of the milkweed 
is so fine and silky, so large compared to the seed, a 
puff of air will send it high, it does not need a windy 
day to scatter its seeds, whence as soon as ripe it opens 
out and scatters its seeds. 

The cat-tail has a small seed attached, not to its inner 
end, like these given above, but to its outer, and it is so 
united to the pappus, that it is hard to separate till 
it falls on water. The center of gravity makes the 
filaments spread out, as it floats the winds blow the 
seeds along the surface till they find a place to grow on 
distant shores. 

The sycamore has large round balls in which the 
seeds remain all winter, for they die if they fall before. 
In spring winds the seed is thrown out, the pappus hung 
to it turns over, spreads out like a parachute, and it 



SEEDS USE MECHANICAL PRINCIPLES. 361 

sails along looking like a little umbrella. The Virginia 
anemone, being a low plant, has not the advantage of 
the height of the sycamore to spread its seeds, therefore 
fine filaments are attached to all parts of the seed, form- 
ing a fluffy cottony ball borne away in the wind, or it 
becomes attached to the fur of animals. The clematis 
seed has long hairy strings which catch on brush or to 
any passing animal. 

It is a principle of mechanics that a whirling motion 
is a great aid in supporting objects flying through the 
air, and this principle is applied to rifle and cannon to 
rotate the balls. Thousands of seeds having one or more 
wings use this whirling motion. Sometimes the seeds 
hang in a cluster from one stem, and as the wing be- 
comes dry, the end turns up so that when the seed falls 
it whirls, the twisted end strikes the air at a higher 
plane, thus bearing up the seed so it is carried to great 
distances. Maples, box elders, ashes, etc., have seeds 
hanging in clusters, each with a wing like that of a 
bird, but bent so when the seed falls it whirls, the mo- 
tion keeping it from falling till it is carried far away 
from the parent tree. The stem is so strong that only a 
high wind breaks it. The wing of each seed is so bal- 
anced and shaped, its front edge as it turns strikes the 
air higher than the rest, producing an upward pull. 
Maples shed their seeds in the fall, but ash, elders, etc., 
keep their seeds till the storms of high wintery winds 
carry them over the snows. 

Evergreens, as pines, spruces, etc., have seed cones, 
which close in damp weather, but open with snapping 
sounds in dry, cold winter, when the seeds are shot out, 
each with a filmy wing, which carries them long dis- 
tances over the snow. The round seed of the hop is 
tucked in between the fruit scales covered with very 
bitter, minute capsules, which give beer its bitter taste, 
and the seeds are shed only when the weather is right. 
The bear-grass has more than 450 seeds packed in each 
of its pods, and as they are shed each goes whirling in 



362 WHO ADAPTS THESE MEANS TO THEIR ENDS? 

the wind. The compass plant has a like arrangement 
to carry its seeds. The ragweed has little brackets on 
top, which turn in dry weather to catch the air as they 
go far and wide. Some seeds have wings which carry 
them high in the air over the tops of mountains. With 
all his knowledge man could not improve on these 
methods of distributing seeds. Who is this wise Per- 
son who planned the planting of these seeds ? 

Some plants tumble over the ground shedding seeds, 
while others float on water. Some are taken up by 
strong winds and spread far and wide in fall and win- 
ter. If you shake a stalk of beard-tongue, milk vetches, 
bellflower, Indian mallow, catmint or other plants on 
a dry, cold winter day, you will see their seeds fall on 
the snow, which drifting drags them along. Thus the 
lock, golden-rod, wild grasses and other plants spread 
seeds during winter. The means by which they are 
spread, each according to its species, are astonishing. 

The Tartar thistle of Russia, brought by emigrants 
about 1885, overran some of the Western States. Its 
many branches form a round ball with two capsules on 
the end of each stalk. In the fall the root breaks off 
in the wind, and the plant goes tumbling over and over 
many miles scattering its seeds. You will see these balls 
sometimes two feet in diameter lodged along the wire 
fences of prairie farms, sometimes they even fill railroad 
cuts. The panicum and rattlebox grasses distribute their 
seeds the same way. ' 

Ground cherries have an inflated calyx surrounding 
the fruit, which forms a balloon to carry it away in the 
air, and when they fall on the ground they roll in the 
wind. Some cherries are covered with a sticky material 
by which they adhere to animals and are carried away. 
Seeds of thousands of species of plants have different 
sticky substances which adhere to animals so they will 
be planted far from the mother plant. 

Many seeds are carried away by water, waves of lakes, 
and running streams; the water will not kill the germs, 



HOW SEEDS ARE CARRIED BY WATER. £63 

while other seeds not intended to be born away by water 
die when soaked. And these seeds fall just when rivers 
and lakes rise in fall rains, and they germinate miles 
away from where they grew. The lands are always slid- 
ing down into the valleys during rains, thus these seeds 
are covered as though some mighty Farmer planted them 
all over the surface of our globe. 

ISToah first made a boat, and he was laughed at, for no 
one believed a vessel would float on water. But if man- 
kind, then in its infancy, had examined the seeds of 
water plants, they would have found many made like 
little boats — all these will float, while seeds of plants 
growing far from water sink and die. Great bulrush 
seed is flat on one side, edges turned up, upper side con- 
cave, looking like a broad-keeled boat. Rising from 
one end are four to six little bristles sticking up form- 
ing a sail, and the little boat bearing the living germ 
of a new plant goes sailing off to another shore, where 
it rests among the weeds till it becomes waterlodged and 
sinks to grow into another bulrush. The water plan- 
tain has a delicate brown seed in 1 the center of a corky 
cushion. It sails along looking like a flat-bottomed 
boat — the thick side catching the wind bears it along 
for days to other shores before it sinks to grow. 
Other seeds of water-plants are covered with sticky sub- 
stances by which they adhere to floating objects and are 
carried away. These seeds are built in such a way 
that the center of gravity is down near the bottom of the 
tiny boats so they will not upset. Many water-plants 
have fine seeds which will not sink for days, they are 
blown to distant shores and left high and dry when 
the water goes down in the balmy spring, so they can 
germinate. Men often ask how islands, thousands of 
miles from land, became covered with vegetation, but if 
they will examine seeds they will find that a Power in- 
finitely wise provided the means. 

How oft we plucked water-lilies in Adirondack lakes, 
and have seen the deer come down to eat their beautiful 



364: SEED-PODS MADE LIKE BOATS. 

flowers ! How did these plants get from one pond to an- 
other ? Its seed pod is a large round boat, which car- 
ries 15 to 20 passengers — each with his separate berth. 
Carefully, while green, this boat holds its seeds with a 
firm rim round the shoulders of each. When ripe the 
stem breaks off, and away the boat floats in the wind, 
off down stream into lakes and ponds. The rim around 
each seed dries and expands, till one after the other the 
seeds drop out, and find lodgment in mucky soil of pond 
bottom. Other seeds fall only in coldest weather on the 
ice, to have the wind skid them along to farther shores 
miles away. 

Canadian violet, jewel-weed, vervane, bear-tongue, 
catnip, Indian mallow, are found in dense colonies, yet 
not too dense for vigorous growth, and when touched 
or in the wind they throw their seeds a little way from 
the parent plants. C. S. Thomas counted over 40,000 
seeds on a catnip, 15,000 on a bellflower. Professor 
Kerner of Vienna found 10,000 on a henbane, 730,000 
on a Sophia mustard. He estimates that if all the seeds 
of a henbane germinated for five years, they would 
cover all lands, and that under the same conditions a 
mustard would cover 2,000 times as much land as earth 
surface. But seeds are eaten by man and beast, those 
eaten bear the largest crop, the number of animals to 
eat them is such that the balance of nature is adjusted 
so they do not grow and smother other plants useful to 
us. Who keeps nature in this balance ? 

Some plants have seeds in peculiar pods and cap- 
sules, ripe they burst and shoot out the seeds. Put a 
ripe phlox in a dish in a room and soon you will find 
seeds and capsules scattered all over the floor, each sent 
out like a little bullet with an explosion. If you touch 
the pods of the jewel-weed it will shoot its seeds quite 
a distance. Some violets shoot their seeds as a boy snaps 
cherry stones from between his fingers. The wonder 
is the stalks rise up to their fullest height before they 
shoot out their seeds, to project them as far as they can 
one after the other. 



SOME PLANTS SHOOT OUT THEIR SEEDS. 365 

The crane's-bill has five seeds at the base of a cone, 
each inclosed in a capsule, and when the seeds ripen the 
skin of the capsules dries on the outside first, contracts 
and finally shoots out the seeds four or five feet. Who 
told the sunflower to turn its head towards the light ? It- 
holds up its head to keep its seeds in cells resembling 
honeycomb, each inclosed on three sides with a chaffy 
scale twice its length. All point upward till the strong 
winds of fall come to bend down the stalk when the 
seeds are shot out like rifle bullets, when gusts and 
drifting snows carry them long distances. The catmint 
has dense flowers in clustered spikes, each calyx has 
four tiny seeds set at right angles, and the lower side is 
curved to give the seeds an upward turn when thrown 
out to be carried in the wind, and the wonder is that 
most pods close in damp weather, to hold the seeds, 
and open in dry weather to shed them. The walls of 
capsules and the seeds are smoothed and polished so 
the seeds can fall while the skin on the outside is 
rough. What order, design and regularity are seen in it 
all, what method and mechanics are used to accomplish 
the growth of other plants ! 

Some flowers bend down while most point upward 
as though unwilling to shed their seeds. Long or 
short beards bend over but keep the seeds till the right 
time, when these hair-like processes open, some in wind, 
others in rain or sunshine, just in the proper time for 
the seeds to sprout. The bellflower has a capsule with 
three divisions, each filled with seeds; each has a tiny 
hole just large enough to let a seed out one at a time — 
there may be 75 in each division — one of these plants 
had 19,000 seeds. One seed comes out from each hole 
as the stalk is shaken in the wind. Thus the plant 
waits till winds come in strong gusts from every side, 
when it plants its seeds in all directions. Who shall say 
there is not a mind directing nature or that these things 
take place by chance? 

Pumpkin, squash, melon, have seeds covered with a 



366 HOW BIRDS SCATTER SEEDS AFAR. 

sticky paste which sticks to animals so the seeds are car- 
ried away; while most animals kill seeds when eating 
them, birds do not. Birds eat berries and carry their 
seeds long distances. The writer owns a watering-place 
with two large mountain ash before the house, where the 
birds come in the fall to eat the red berries. He began 
to think there was design in this, and found over 300 
ash trees scattered over his place, mostly in the primeval 
woods along his half-mile of lake shore, some of these 
mountain ash being quite large. Robins, bluejays, 
thrushes, bluebirds, yellow birds — in fact nearly all our 
birds eat cherries, raspberries, blackberries, grapes, blue- 
berries, strawberries, all small fruit, and spread the seeds 
all over the country. Without them the woods and waste 
places would not be covered with wild fruits for man's 
use. 

Ducks, geese and water-birds eat seeds of water-plants 
and in their migrations scatter them from South Amer- 
ica to regions round north pole, where they grow but do 
not produce seeds, because of the short season. Without 
these birds and their instinct of emigrating each season, 
these cold regions would be barren. Why do ducks, 
geese, etc., dabble in water? Their bills are like a 
strainer and they sift out the seeds and larva for food. 
The seeds live and may be planted 1,000 miles away. 

Dip a paper into a shallow pool and put it under the 
microscope, you will find the food of these birds almost 
darkening the paper. Without knowing, these birds 
spread the plants and animals on which they feed far 
and wide, not only by their droppings, but they carry 
on their feathers, which they always preen when they 
light in waters. Who gave plants and animals these 
remarkable instincts so that these species are spread 
far and wide ? We must admit that it would have been 
impossible for man to spread the wild vegetation through 
woods, fields, waters, plains — almost from pole to pole, 
if the Creator had not given these astounding instincts. 



CHAPTER XVIII.— THE INSTINCTS OF ANIMALS. 

We glory in the progress of our age, within the last 
century improvements uplifting humanity have made 
giant strides. Trade is wiping out the boundaries of 
nations, the world is being wound by electric wires, 
science is advancing, natural forces are being harnessed, 
so time will come when man, with his reason, will direct 
natural forces and beast doing all laboring work. All 
this takes place because of the blessing the Creator gave 
humanity. " Fill the earth and subdue it " Gen. i. 28. 

But what are our machines compared to the matchless 
machineries of instinct-built animal organisms. Under 
the microscope you will see shells, muscles, bones, ropes, 
pulleys, pipes, flowing fluids, living, moving using heat 
in movement a thousand times more complicated, perfect 
and wonderful than our remarkable inventions. No 
principle to-day used in human machinery that is not 
found in nature. An Inventor, a Workman, an Engi- 
neer, a Chemist, a Pipe-Fitter, an Hydraulic. Engineer, a 
Scientist, with Wisdom infinite, was working in nature 
before man learned these things. Who is He? In 
our pagan darkness we call Him Nature, as though it 
could reason. Why don't we give God the glory belongs 
ing to Him, except there is a dark wound in our reason 1 

Beasts know not how or why they were made, their 
end was marked out for them by the Creator. They 
reason not, have no minds, but in the most astounding 
way they adapt means to gain their ends, the perfection 
of the individual, the bringing forth of others like them- 
selves. They are guided by instinct — their Creator's 
wisdom. All we say regarding instinct of plant and 
animal supplies to man, highest plant and animal. For 
before reason dawns and instincts guide the child. 

367 



368 THE MECHANICS OF THE HUMAN BODY. 

Face of man or beast is made of little muscles, at- 
tached to little holes in the skull, or hitched to the bones 
from which they spring, overlapping each other, other- 
wise the face would be out of shape, the wisest engineers 
could not make a like structure. The lady, glories in 
her beautiful face, form and figure, seldom stops to 
think growth instinct of her soul made her from matter 
once dead, and that it will return again to earth. 

The block and pulley was a great invention used on 
ships from prehistoric time, but man and nobler animals 
carry four in each eye, and many others in their bodies. 
The photograph was looked on as a wonderful thing, 
but the eye of man and animal is an instrument which 
photographs in colors, images forming and reforming 
with the rapidity of lightning, as we look at different 
objects. The telescope and microscope were remarkable 
when first invented, but every eye is both instruments 
combined. With what wonder we first looked at a fly's 
eye with over 500 lenses in each, ranged like cells of 
honeycomb — each species of insect has eyes formed 
along these lines adapted to their modes of life. 

The steam engine and locomotive were remarkable in- 
ventions, but each living organism is both combined, for 
they change heat into muscular movement. We heat 
our houses with hot water or steam, but millions of 
pipes bring warm red blood rivers loaded with oxygen 
from the lungs to all parts of the body, where uniting 
with carbon, a slow fire burns in us all the time, keeping 
us warm. 

On the steam engine a safety valve lets off steam when 
the pressure becomes dangerous, but each man has over 
2,500,000 of these valves in his skin called sweat glands; 
when we get too hot they open, pour out perspiration, 
which, drying, cools us so the heat d6es not rise to the 
dangerous point, without them we would not live a day. 
Each beast has them arranged according to his mode of 
life. When they do not work people are killed with heat. 

The cup and ball joint was a great invention, but 



THE MOST PERFECT PUMP EVER MADE. 369 

there are many joints in jour body much more perfect. 
You have a ball and socket joint uniting your limbs to 
your body, with them you move your arms and legs in 
any direction — air-tight sockets kept in place by air 
pressure. If not made that way, you would soon tire 
keeping them in place, and all joints in bodies of man 
and animal are held that way. We must oil our ma- 
chinery at stated times, but these joints are kept oiled all 
the time, so they do not rub and get injured, and if 
the oil is let out it forms again in a few hours. 

The heart is the most perfect pump in the world, being 
1,000 times better than any man ever made. But it is 
more, for it is a double pump, oiled all the time within 
and without where it moves over the surface of the 
other organs. Each day it exercises a force which 
would lift 120 tons a foot high, raising a weight equal 
to itself 20,000 feet an hour while a strong man can 
raise himself only 1,000 feet, getting very tired at the 
same time. Each beat the heart could force the blood 
through a rigid pipe 200 feet. 

Belonging to the plant powers of man, the heart, 
independent of our control, beats faster in disease and 
injuries, and is kept in action by nerves from the brain, 
for if we forgot it we would die in a few moments. Did 
not the Creator sweetly arrange these things? Most 
perfect force-pump, it shoots the blood formed of nour- 
ishing materials through arteries carrying life-giving 
oxygen from the lungs, passing thousands of valves, 
arteries divide into smaller and smaller pipes, getting 
finer than hair, bathing at last millions of cells to which 
it gives life. Then it comes back through the minute 
veins, these getting larger and larger, till at last the blood 
passes through the lungs again, yields its carbonic acid, 
receives oxygen and again sent over the same route. 
This takes place in every organism, each species having 
a different kind of heart from lowest beast to man. 

Organs must rest, periods being longer or shorter, the 
heart taking the shortest, to the brain and nervous system, 



370 TWO REMARKABLE MACHINES IN THE THROAT. 

which rest during sleep. . Heart beats a little more 
than 60 times a minute in normal health, faster in in- 
fants, sick and old people, each beat being half work and 
half rest. The muscles rest when we sit or recline ; the 
brain works all the time when we are awake. 

When we get excited, or work too hard, the heart 
pumps blood rapidly to the brain and if it could not be 
stopped by some mechanical device it would burst the 
blood-vessels and thousands would die of brain fevers 
and apoplexy. Physicians thought for ages that Adam's 
apple was a useless freak of nature, but it serves 
as a check or storage cistern which controls the blood 
when flowing too fast, and when it does not come up in 
sufficient quantities, the apple supplies the right amount. 
The flow of gas, water, steam and fluids in pipes is con- 
trolled by valves. But the valves in human body, ani- 
mals and plants are far more perfect than man ever made 
Millions of different valves are found in living beings, 
each perfected for the work it has to do. 

In swallowing, food or liquid must pass over the 
passage leading down into the lungs, for the windpipe 
is on the outside so it will never while eating or drink- 
ing close, and the passage leading to the stomach is 
within because it is not so important as to be kept always 
open. For we can go without food for quite a while, but 
not without air. The air-pipe leading to the lungs is 
instinctively closed by a most wonderful valve called 
the epiglottis, " over the tongue." It is in the back of the 
mouth just where the air and food passages cross. 
When you swallow the epiglotis valve automatically 
closes stopping the food or fluid from going down into 
the lungs, for if things filled the air-passage they would 
prevent the air entering and we would die in a few mo- 
ments. We open and close this valve without thinking, 
we could not do either if we tried, so well is the machine 
made that it works by instinct without notice from the 
mind. 

A level is a very important instrument for builders, 



OUR INSTRUMENTS ARE FOUND IN NATURE. 371 

But there are six levels in the head, forming part of 
each ear. They are filled with fluids which flow back 
and forth, instinctively informing us of the position 
of the body. When we lean over or lie down these 
levels tell us. After reclining a long time, getting up 
we feel dizzy till the fluids readjust themselves. 

The spine of man and animal is the most wonderfully 
constructed piece of machinery ever built. Eor though 
made of hard bones it bends in different directions with- 
out breaking, and protects the spinal marrow from in- 
jury. Materials could not be placed in any other way 
to so well accomplish the object. 

When Brunei started to build a tunnel under the 
Thames, London, he studied the plans of the teredo, a 
worm which bores into wood under water. The animal, 
as he eats his way through the wood, lines his tunnel with 
a limy secretion which becomes hard. Following the ex- 
ample of this humble shellfish they built a steel shield 
they force ahead, the engineers then line the tubes with 
steel rings as they go along, then strengthen them with 
concrete. Insects use saws, lances, chisels, pincers — all 
our tools are but duplicates of those we find in nature. 

The wasp, guided by instinct, makes paper for its nest 
of wood fibers, gizzards of certain insects and birds, and 
our teeth recall the mill for grinding grain ; the physalia 
swims on the sea with a bladder filled with air, the velilla 
hoists a sail and is borne away in the wind, wasps, 
hornets and spiders of California build nests with a 
skill which puts us to shame; the cockle, grasshopper, 
flea and other insects jump marvelous distances for their 
size ; the solen with its feet burrows into the sand in a 
remarkable manner ; the mussel spins thin horny threads 
by which it anchors to the rocks, and the cuttlefish and 
others of its class has hundreds of suckers with which 
it seizes its prey. 

So all living creatures led by instinct use the most 
wonderful art and mechanics and engineering devices 
compared to our machinery and inventions. The great 



372 BIRDS HAVE WONDERFUL INSTINCTS. 

marvel is those machines live. The more we study 
them the more we are astonished. These machines are 
perfect. Under the microscope the point of a needle 
looks like a crowbar, while we cannot see where the sting 
of the bee or wasp ends it is so sharp. The finest works 
of a watch show great scratches, while the structure of 
an insect is so smooth and polished we find no irregular- 
ity, as in the works of man. 

Little birds on the nest have no instinct of fear, for 
if they jumped out they would be devoured or die ; when 
the time comes they know how to fly, and see how their 
feathers form to catch the air, while for ages we have 
been trying to find the secret of their flight. All animals 
know by instinct how to swim, but we must learn, they 
know good and bad food; you cannot make them eat 
what would injure them, when hungry or thirsty they 
eat or drink ; you cannot force horse or cow to eat meat, 
or dog and cat hay, when sick they know the remedies 
nature has provided; they know beforehand storms are 
coming; in fall they retire for winter sleep; they labor 
not ; neither do they spin ; yet they are clothed according 
to the climate. 

When Adam named the animals, he called the goose 
kazah, " stupid." What a fool that bird is, what foolish 
things a goose will do, for when tamed he is not in a 
natural state. Take the bird in his wild state — the anser 
canadensis, what wisdom he shows in his flight from 
frozen north to southern shores. Who has not seen a 
flock of geese in the form of a Y with the leader at the 
point flying high overhead winging their way north or 
south. Most birds leave us in the fall for warmer 
climes and come back in spring as wealthy people go to 
rusticate. Who told the birds to do this ? But the crows 
remain with us wintering in deep forests. Where do 
they get their food ? The writer had a tame crow which 
used to hide all kinds of food for winter use and he 
showed the most astonishing wisdom. Crows hide seeds 
for winter use, many seeds they bury grow to trees. The 



THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SEXES. 373 

writer caught a woodchuck a few days after birth, he 
became very tame. In looks, actions and instincts he 
was like a bear, to which he is closely related. He did 
the most laughable things — he and the crow were almost 
equal to a circus. After writing all day, I would go and 
play with them, for they were as tame as dogs. They 
showed the most wonderful instincts. Animals treated 
harshly always fear man and cannot be well studied. 
These little animals were never hurt or frightened, but 
treated as children. The woodchuck had an enormous 
taste for sweets, the crow would steal and hide bright 
objects. We had to feed the crow by hand till he was 
six weeks old, putting the food into its mouth, but the 
chuck learned to eat within a few days. At the same 
time we had sixteen different tamed American birds, 
with a rabbit, and called them our " menagerie." They 
were very interesting. 

In lowest organisms one individual gives rise alone to 
a new individual of the same species, in higher plants 
and animals the two sexes are on the same individual, 
generally in the flower, in nobler animals and in man- 
kind the sexes divide, each individual being either male 
or female. They are about equally divided through 
nature, but more girls are born than boys to make up the 
loss caused by motherhood. Who balanced nature this 
way but Providence presiding over nature ? Suppose all 
of one sex came into the world for some years the species 
would die out. 

With few exceptions the male is large, hardy, strong, 
the female small, weak, tender. He was made to be the 
father, she the mother. In nature the male is the most 
beautiful, the female is clothed in dimmer glories — 
this is seen especially among birds. In mankind the 
woman is more beautiful than the man, for she cannot 
well seek him, he gets her, and after marriage she fol- 
lows him during life. 

Nothing is more remarkable or more beautiful than 
the relations between man and wife. Instinct deep in 



374 RESULTS OF GOD's BLESSING ON OUR RACE. 

plant life functions of mankind, swaying even mind and 
free will, continue the species of all that live, for life 
must by its nature continue, life from lowest plants up 
through animal to man. 

That blessing, " Increase and multiply and fill the 
earth/' pronounced on our race, lasted to our day; among 
even lowest tribes, most degraded human beings feel the 
benedictions, for they marry. Man being highest plant 
and animal is the highest developed in all his powers of 
all that live on earth. 

The gentle, little, timid maiden sees a man she never 
met before, falls in love with him, and he with her, 
neither knowing the divine benediction; they separate 
from home, friends, and all they know. Interfere with 
that instinct and you may dethrone reason, love is first 
in the mind, not in passion which ceases when they are 
old, while love in mind remains, or should till they die, 
thus the Creator ordained because children want their 
parents aid through life. They marry and bring to the 
church a little image of themselves. 

He is the husband, " a farmer." Adam was the first 
farmer, she the wife, " woman," from the Sanscrit mana, 
" to think," and womb. Here are two men made with 
different instincts, the father and the mother. He never 
tires of her, as he would with another man ; she interests 
him all his life, as no man would; he is hardy to 
deal with the outside world, she is kind and gentle to 
preside over home and children ; he is her hero, she his 
glory. Why are these two men so different? What 
wonderful instincts have been working directing these 
two men ? To the clean of heart all is clean, mock not 
now at nature's wonders. 

In body man belongs to the order of animals we call 
the mammalia, which bring forth their young alive, and 
nourish them with mother's milk, what we say regard- 
ing animals relates also to man. Animals are born 
males or females. What causes such a change, when 
they live the same life before and after birth? Here 



WHAT CAUSES THE TWO SEXES. 375 

we strike down deep into the foundations of life. In- 
stinct, or impulse of the Deity regulates life's origin ; the 
sexes are born about even, and nothing man can do 
will change sex. 

Soon after life of higher animals begins you find four 
bodies in the small of the back within, the two upper 
become the kidneys to sift out urea which would poison 
the system. The two lower may remain there to become 
the ovaries, " egg-producers/' for every being with a 
backbone comes from an egg. Long before birfh the 
ovaries manufacture fluids of a peculiar nature taken 
up into the circulation, as the young grows they pass 
into the blood, spread through the structure and build 
a female body. Later they produce the eggs. 

But before birth they may come down into a special 
sack, the passage closes and they become different struc- 
tures which manufacture other and stronger products, 
passing into the circulation and under their influence a 
male grows. During life these secretions being absorbed 
into the system continue making the male larger and 
stronger, till when full vigor arrives they manufac- 
ture the male element of generation. Dr. Brown- 
Sequard of Paris used the product of a ram, found it 
most stimulating when injected into the blood, but be- 
cause of infection it was abandoned. 

Whence that instinct that man and wife are nearer 
to each other than parents, children or nearest and 
dearest friend, how will science explain it? With a 
heavenly sleep to smother pain before sin came in, God 
took from the side of sleeping man a rib, bone and flesh 
of our first father, to show man and wife are one in 
bone and flesh, a rib against which his heart beats, to 
show wife is nearest in husband's affections, not from 
his foot to mean she was to be trampled on, not from 
his head to mean she was head of man, but from a bone 
near the middle of his body to typefy she was to be 
his equal, God made the first woman to be the mother 



376 TTHE ORIGIN Of MAKKtAGS. 

of us all, a prophecy of Him whose side was opened 
when His Bride, Mother Church, was made. 

Inspired with vision of humanity streaming down all 
ages, Adam wakening said : " This is now bone of my 
bone, and flesh of my flesh, she shall be called Woman, 
because she was taken out of man. Therefore man shall 

- leave father and mother and shall cleave to his wife, and 
they shall be two in one flesh." Gen. ii. 23-24. Alas! 
sin, crime, infidelity, passion, broke the beautiful bonds. 
Divorce blackened human history, nd to-day threat- 
ens to disrupt society. 

Animals, too, received that blessing, "Increase and 
multiply " Gen. i. 22. To continue their species they are 
in a natural state, they find no shame, no more than the 
flower in which are the two plant sexes. Generation 
of living organisms here image generation eternal in 
God, for He lives and His life by its very nature brings 
forth. 

Why are we shamed and pained in that God or- 
dained? Why woman feels it deeper except we are 
fallen beings, injured in our origin and bear the wound 
in powers origin of others ? After reason dawns we 
must be clothed, because an instinct tells us we are not 

' as God made the first two members of our race. Who 
will deny there was not a deep wound made in our 
nature by sin, as the story comes down, " And the Lord 
God," Jehovah Hlohim, says the Hebrew text, literally 
meaning He Who Exists, The Mighty Ones, " made for 
Adam and his wife garments of skins of animals, and 
clothed them." Gen. iii. 21. .Some say of skins of 
beasts He showed them how to sacrifice for their sin, 
images of Him who was to come and redeem our race. 
Animals, especially birds, show images of marriage, 
because the young want their care. When the young 
can get along without the parents, after mating the lat- 
ter separate, in higher beasts the mother has milk 
the young suck, when the pressure of the air forces out 
the milk; in some species the father takes care of the 



WONDERFUL INSTINCTS OF ANIMALS. ' 377 

young. While the little ones depend on parents they 
love them, when grown up they send them away — a 
thousand suprising things are found in nature guided 
by instinct, Wisdom and Foresight foreordained that 
their species might continue. 

How beasts foretell the weather, provide food, make 
nests, dig holes, know food they want, avoid danger, 
provide for young they never see — a thousand things 
might be given showing wonders of animal instincts. 



CHAPTER XIX.— LOOKING THROUGH A WINDOW DOWN 
IN OCEAN DEEPS. 

Out o'er ocean wide and wild, like a little child, we 
like to gaze, then up to God our hearts we raise, join- 
ing nature ever singing silent praise. O'er storm-beat 
shore the billows roar, washing sand and strand. Move- 
less never, restless ever, from on high, bends the sky, 
where dimming light ends our sight. Thus we see the 
sea far and nigh, looking like an earthly sky. 

Waves restless roll, storm-tossed from pole to pole. 
Deeps human foot has never trod, hide many a wondrous 
work of God — forms of life we never saw, live accord- 
ing to his law, so strange appear from beings living 
here. Though hidden from our sight, when they are 
brought to light, they show the wonders of the Infinite. 
When from hidden nook we them catch with net and 
hook, or with the trawl into light we haul, these creatures 
of the sea, are always found to be, in beauty, form and 
kind, works of the Almighty Mind. To us they show, 
working in waters down below : 

A Mechanic, Matchless in Civil Engineering, 
An Artist, Astounding in Beauty-Forming, 
A Painter, Wondrous in Color-Blending, 
A Sculptor, Surpassing in Wisdom- Working. 

The beauty of our body, the human form divine, 
plant, bird and beast, even lowest and the least, if we 
only look we will find a book, thine and mine, written 
by a Hand divine, in each His wonders shine, teaching 
truths of Him all the time. But men of every kind, 
have a darkened mind, and weakened is our will, as 
though a poisoned rill, runs through our very being, 
blinding us from seeing, for at the fall we sinned all. 

378 



THE SANCTUARY OF THE SEA. 379 

During all our days we are worldly all our ways, in 
thought and act seeking self, and spend our lives look- 
ing after pelf. Now let us see some secrets of the sea. 

WHAT IS THE OCEAN? 

Inscrutable and doomful deeps, 
Where Solitude, calm Spirit, sleeps, 
Beyond the fartherest seeking sunborn rays. 

There Silence everlastingly abides, 

While rithmly the restless tides 

Check off th' unreckoned lightless ocean days. 

No temple of the olden time, 

Was ever like to this sublime, 

Yet from the ken of men so much unlinked. 

Here broods God's Spirit awesomely, 

In his secret Sanctuary of the sea, 

Mid living forms so much from man distinct. 

Down where deepest darkness keeps, 

Where silent water ever sweeps, 

God made millions of creatures there to live. 

Though these forms we seldom see, 
He made them there that they might be 
For our use, sea-food to us they give. 

So it ever was since life began, 

yThe were there when He made man, 

So when our earth grows old and cold 'twill be. 

Then man will rest in God his goal, 
This is the end of every human soul, 
Come see the long-locked secrets of the sea. 

The writer made and placed in his dining-room an 
aquarium, holding about a barrel, the four sides of glass, 
fed from a spring of running water, wherein he put 
different kinds of fish to study. Fish are covered with a 
thick transparent mucus so the waters never touch them. 
If this be rubbed off it grows again as it prevents 
disease germs attacking the fish. Some fish are great 
eaters and grow rapidly, they eat at irregular times, 
sometimes going for days without food — this explains 



38 THE BEAUTIES OF AN AQIUEIUM. 

why some are larger and why some days they " bite w 
well. A small mouth bass " bossed " every fish, going 
round and round with head and tail up, his whole time 
being spent in keeping all others in order and sub- 
jection; he would allow no other fish near him — this 
explains why you will never catch another fish where 
bass and trout abound. 

The State Hatchery of Caledonia, ~N. Y., sent three 
specimens each of brook, rainbow and European trout. 
Before they got used to their new quarters, they tried to 
go upstream into the pipe whence the water flowed, and 
one of the brook trout shot out of the tank and landed 
eight feet away on the writing-desk, showing that they 
can go up any moderate fall. But how fish ever got 
up Niagara or very high falls of streams is a mystery, 
we must conclude they were created in such places. 

The trout is the noblest of the fish tribe. But the 
brook trout, the salmo fontinalis, " the salmon of the 
spring," is the king of fishes, peerless, nervous, a thing 
of grace and beauty, lustiness and power, tenacious in 
battle, game and cunning, formed in lines of perfect 
symmetry, be jeweled, he flashes forth as though in- 
crusted with most precious gems. 

Fish are the most beautiful objects in nature, but 
we seldom see their surpassing splendors, because we 
look down on their backs which are generally dull in 
colors. 

At night when shone the light, we could see their 
sides and bellies with silver sheen, with glimmering 
gold, with burnished gems, forms of beauty unsurpassed, 
as round and round they swam. They did not seem to 
sleep at night, but took little naps at different times 
during day or night. 

The bass, bullhead, perch and other fish lived during 
the warm weather, but the direct sunshine killed the 
trout — the brook trout being unable to live in water 
over 44 degrees. This is why they are found only in 
cool brooks under shady trees. The trout killed every 



THE GLASS- BOTTOMED BOAT. 381 

other fish, not for food but in wanton savagery, and 
this is why you will find no other fish in a trout stream. 
Many things the writer learned from his studies of fish- 
life in this aquarium. 

While the Atlantic seems like a desert regarding 
fish, the Pacific is filled with life. Here from our 
greater ocean, man yet will get most of his sea food. 
Here the Creator supplied an inexhaustible fund of food 
for man. Let us see a little of the living creatures of 
the Pacific. But language can convey but vague ideas 
of the wonders. 

From 20 to 60 miles ofT the California coast a number 
of islands rise from the vast deeps almost like pillars, 
with no shoal waters round them. The warm, clear 
waters of the Japan current sweeping from the Indian 
Ocean strikes the continent, and tending south bathes 
the shores of these islands, making the climate of South- 
ern California most balmy and even of all places on 
earth. 

Taking the train at Los Angeles for San Pedro, the 
writer took the steamer for Santa Catalina Island, 20 
miles out, and landed at Avelon, a famous resort, where 
people come from all parts to catch a great game fish, 
the tuna, the giant of the mackerel family. A number 
of people followed the writer along the sandy beach to 
the west, till we found the man with the glass-bottomed 
boat. 

We cannot well see the bottom of bodies of water, 
because the reflected light from the surface is broken 
by the waves. But they overcome these difficulties by 
building a box-like compartment in the center of the 
boat, closing the bottom by a plate glass about 2 feet 
wide and 6 long. The boat was about 30 feet, and 
wide enough to allow us to sit at each side and look 
down through the glass. 

As we pushed out, the sandy bottom appeared not 
differing from the beach. But when we got out into 
water about 6 feet deep, the line of seaweeds began, 



382 THE FORESTS OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN. 

and the growths became more diversified and larger as 
we advanced. It was a revelation. No plants growing 
in air look like these we see below sea level. The ocean 
floor is clothed with forests of giant seaweeds, forever 
waving back and forth with every ground swell. In 
deep water vines more than 100 feet long, not more 
than an inch in diameter, rise from the bottom with 
leaves abont a foot wide and many feet long, the crim- 
pled leaves assuming graceful shapes, bend over in the 
clear turquoise waters or crystal blue, similar to what 
we saw along the shores of Greece. 

Trees have hard and stiff trunks, which hold up the 
limbs and foliage. But the stems of these plants were 
soft and yielding, easily bent as a rope. The leaves 
have capsules from about an inch in diameter, down to 
those of minute size. These capsules are filled with air 
they secrete from the water. These air-filled bladders 
hold them up. Who made these plants and covered them 
with hollow vessels filled with air so they float this way, 
as they are too close to be sustained like forests by large 
trunks as trees? Here is design. For He who made 
water plants knew that air is lighter than water. 

Plants growing in air are nearly all green, for they 
secrete the green-colored chlorophyl. But the plants 
covering this ocean bottom were mostly yellow mauve, 
and the tints ranged down through these colors to dark 
brown. There was so sudden change from one color to 
another in the plants. The combinations of colors were 
perfect. It looked as though an Artist, with a taste for 
colors infinitely perfect, had combined these shades with 
boundless knowledge of harmony. We could see them 
forming a wonderful landscape, ever changing, growing 
down there from 20 to 60 feet below us in the clear 
crystal waters of the Pacific. 

A new world was opened, expressions of surprise and 
joy were heard on every side as new wonders, surpris- 
ing strange forms appeared below. Through the glass 
the view of the still waters below the boat was perfect. 



AN OCEAN KELPIAN FOREST. 383 

lS curtain of nature seemed lifted, letting us look down 
into a strange stage of nature, hidden mysteries of ocean 
life man seldom sees. 

The great leaves, gray, green golden, of many Mend- 
ings of yellow, carried by the fitful currents, wave back 
and forth, as they rise and fall, held up by capsules of 
air, growing on all parts of the plants. Trunks are not 
large like those of trees but small, the largest being 
about an inch in diameter, the foliage being upheld by 
the air capsules. Here is a kelpian forest covering the 
whole surface of the sea bottom, a wonderful ocean 
panamora, with long, round stems of a pale green and 
yellow colors waving back and forth, like light serpents 
never still. 

We passed near the rocky cape jutting out to the west, 
on which rested a great crane preening his feathers. 
He seemed to have no fear of us, but with gentle curi- 
osity he looked at us passing so near. We are more 
interested in the ocean bottom and give the bird but a 
glance. As we look down again a school of smelts dart 
by pursued by giant bass; as the water deepens, flocks 
of surf fish, gleaming like burnished silver, appear, then 
a cormorant dashing after them ; and there is a sea lion 
browsing on the bottom. Suddenly the light grows 
dimmer, we are over the deep water, gliding over a dense 
kelpian forest, looking like " hanging gardens." 

Great leaves rise to near the surface, droop over, mak- 
ing dark retreats, parterres — shady arbors suspended 
near the surface. The leaves are about a foot wide and 
many feet long, with crimpled edges, each covered with 
lacelike network of great delicacy and beauty. Fragile 
plumes wave back and forth, below and above, while 
as far down as we can see the dense forest swings to 
and fro, the greatest movements being near the surface, 
where the waters partake in the wave motions. Look at 
that silver tracery, white and gleaming like frosted 
metal, the deposit of some animal, covered with numer- 
ous minute sertuliarins, or water worms ; see those others 



384: OCEAN WONDERS SELDOM SEEN. 

of lavender hues. Oh, what combinations of greens, 
from the darkest to the lightest, how they blend with 
the yellow in all shades from darkest olive to lightest, 
frosted gleaming metal looking like burnished gold! 
Polish all the metals, mix bushels of jewels, blend them, 
combine them with all the industry and art of man, 
and they will not equal the shades, the colors, the beau- 
ties we see. 

Fishes of all sizes dart in and out these leafy bowers, 
each clothed in the color of its species. But their colors 
are still brighter and more gleaming than those of the 
plants in the shades of which they live. Through a loop 
of kelp is seen the blue of the deep water; poised in it 
is an angel fish of vivid orange. Between the waving 
leaves are fish of all sizes from an inch long to a foot. 
Some are blue, deeper than the sky, brighter and more 
brilliant than any ribbon of silk the writer ever saw; 
many are brilliant crimson, some recall the flashing 
fire of burning wood. They are of all the colors of the 
rainbow, blending from the darker shades on the back 
to the brighter colors of the belly, as they dart in and 
out, or in play glide on their sides on the top of a leaf. 

Now a school of these fish swim out into view, turn- 
ing their gorgeous shapes upward to eye the strange faces 
looking down on them through the window in the boat 
bottom. With them are small fishes of brilliant blue, 
iridescent; others red and white, recalling the luster of 
gold and silver, or the gleam of precious gems and 
polished stones. The man of the boat tells us these are 
young angel fish, so called because of their wondrous 
beauties, the others, he says, are electric fishes, as they 
grow the blue merges into yellow, and the adult blos- 
soms out into its perfect coat of gold, silver and orange. 

On the great long leaves are red and olive crabs, 
singular in form and square in shape, while in the 
crevices of the moss-covered rocks are gigantic spider 
crabs, mimicking the rocks in shape and hue. Great 
pompons of weeds now appear of a tint born of the deep 



ANIMALS AND PLANTS UNKNOWN TO SCIENCE. 385 

sea, gracefully waving as the slight swells of the Pacific 
come in, perhaps from a storm on Afric's clime or Asia's 
shores; as the swell turns aside an arbor, it shows 
a very giant of the star-fish garbed in red, with white 
spikes hiding brilliant among the olive greens. In the 
rock crevices are smaller star fish, some vivid red, others 
darker red, with arms like snakes. 

Among the weeds with long serrated spines wave the 
antennae of the California crawfish, and there is the 
spiny lobster; its red-yellow and bronze-brown tints so 
harmonize with the color of the weeds it is hard to see 
it. Kound swim great shrimps with numerous feet-like 
paddles propelling themselves along — some being nearly 
five inches long. Creatures of strange shapes, nameless 
to the scientist, are now found — no words can describe 
them, no language can convey an idea of their beauty, 
they must be seen to realize how God has filled even 
our greatest ocean with forms of life and beauty. 

Now the sea bottom changes to finer moss, or weeds of 
deep velvet green, with here and there iridescent tints 
of yellow gold and burnished brass and polished bronze, 
in it is lying the sluglike sea cucumber of brick-red 
shades. There to the right below is a deep glen from 
which lacelike weeds rise and poise forming a safe re- 
treat and shady canopy for the long-spined echini or sea 
urchin, and sea porcupines with spines all over their 
bodies. The smaller ones have splashes of white which 
disappear as they grow older. They cover every nook 
and corner of this ocean forest, and when an enemy 
comes they dart into this safe retreat. 

Along this rocky shore, round this island rising like 
a great needle from vast depths, the whole bottom is a 
color scene and scheme of marvelous beauty. Green 
mingled with yellow is the predominant tone, but they 
are in countless shades — all blending one into another, 
from the lightest to the dark shading into reddish yel- 
lowish browns. A bright, short waving weed now moves 
aside to show other and more attractive colors : and dif- 



386 STRANGE BUT BEAUTEOUS FORMS OF LIFE. 

ferent shaded weeds in purple and brown; look at those 
rocks of lavender incrusted with flaming red sponges, dot- 
ted with pink barnacles, from which rise the delicate 
mauve traceries of their breathing organs, through which 
dart in and out the brighter colored fish in all the beauties 
of their rainbow tints. This sea-tapestry of ocean depths 
is never at rest, ever changing in shades and colors, 
lights and tints, showing some new wonder every mo- 
ment. Man paints pictures of nature's scenes, but they 
are dead, lifeless, motionless. But here are the works of 
God, eternal Artist, who colors creatures magnificently 
blazing in tints and gives them life and movement. 

Now our window drifts over strange holothaurians 
like monster slugs, lying on painted rocks, in which live 
glasslike fish, mid hordes of mimic flowers, the serpulse, 
with crowns of red, white and blue, tipped with burn- 
ished gold. A slight jar on the boat and they are gone 
from sight, for in a twinkling they folded up, to slowly 
unfold again their flowerly beauties when we kept still. 
Nearby are tubelike worms making tunnels lined with 
lime deposited round their galleries. From these humble 
worms men learned to line their tunnels under water 
with iron and concrete. There, out from beneath a rock, 
waves the tentacles of a devil-fish, the octopus with cup- 
like suckers all over his eight arms, with which he seizes 
his prey, and which would burn your skin like fire. 

Where the sunlight beams down through crystal 
waters blue, myriads of fairylike forms, under bowers 
like hanging gardens poise, drift, swim, true gems of 
ocean. They are red as ruby, blue as sapphire, green 
as emerald, purple as amethyst, clear as diamond, others, 
creatures unknown to science, emit flashes of phosphor- 
escent light with which they see deep down where the 
sunlight is dim. Little creatures cover leaves and rocks, 
others poise in waters deep, while minute crustacians, 
called sapphirinse, " ocean sapphires," in such numbers 
it seems as though the Almighty's lavish hand had 
strewn the waters with costly gleaming gems. Then 



WHAT IS FOKTY FEET BELOW THE SURFACE. 387 

sweep by small schools of jelly-fish, crystal vases, moon- 
shaped bodies, so clear, so delicate the rich colored ocean 
forms can be seen through them. While we look they 
change their colors to steely blue. Some are like 
specters, lace traceries, others rich in colors flaunt be- 
hind them long trains a thousand times more beautiful 
than ever decked a queen. 

Now the glass comes over a giant physophora, nearly 
6 feet in body, white-blue with dark chocolate lines 
radiating upwards, while from below swing the magnifi- 
cent flutings of the tail. The whole creature is made 
of jellylike substance ablaze with colors, pink, blue and 
quicksilver, as it pumps in and forces out water to drive 
itself along — a veritable floating pump, a soft yielding 
form, living in this ocean paradise. 

Now the boat is over 40 feet of water, blue and clear 
as the California sky above ; down deep the kelp leaves 
are faintly outlined, but the waters are filled with liv- 
ing forms. Here live the sheepshead peculiar to the 
region, the male with enormous red and black stripes, 
blunt forehead and white lower jaw; the female is a 
beautiful creature, flashing eyes of red, brown and 
white and striped like her mate. A little bait was 
thrown in and they came near our window in schools. 

We are now over still deeper waters, and a great 
flock of barracuda, thousands in number, pass under us, 
their long, slender bodies wave like eels, their long, pike- 
shaped heads all point in the same direction. Soon they 
vanish as though some shutter had been snapped or 
our window closed, for a great fish darts towards them 
to get his supper. Now comes another school of dif- 
ferent fish — new panamoras of marine scenery opens out 
beneath. See these perch darting in and out the glades of 
the kelp forest below to get their food, then come to the 
surface to bask in the sun. Rock bass poise on long 
leaves of kelp striped brown with blends of green stripes ; 
here and there are radiant white fish, and other forms 
as blue as the water. The scenes vary from, deep to 



388 what is m ocean's deeper depths? 

shallow waters, new wonders opening out at every turn. 

We are surfeited with sights. The brain is tired, the 
mind is weary, much more than when you pass through 
a vast Museum of art, sculpture and paintings. We 
have been looking down into ocean depths, where we saw 
the wonders, the indescribable beauties of God's Museum 
below sea surface, in waters deep into which few eyes 
have penetrated. 

As we turned back the scenes were repeated, new mar- 
vels were found, exclamations were repeated. On 
Avelon's sandy beach we talked to those who stood there, 
of what we saw. Some parties heard us and asked the 
man to go out with them. " No, I will not go out again 
to-day," he said. 

As we could see only about 60 feet down, beyond that 
the light became dim, we would like to know what is 
below in the deeps. Beyond where sunlight penetrates 
all is dark as midnight, but there untold and uncounted 
species of creatures live. Each has a lamp which lights 
for them the everlasting gloom. The wonder is these 
lamps give a pure white light without heat. For ages 
man has tried to get light without heat, because most of 
the energy is lost in heat, but to the present time we 
have failed. The great Engineer of nature solved this 
mystery when he made these creatures. Many creatures 
have electric storage batteries, as the electric eel which 
will shock a horse to death. We thought the discovery 
of electricity was a wonder, but it was in nature before 
man dreamed of its existence. Let us see what is be- 
low as far as man has penetrated the deeps. 

The deep waters of streams, lakes and ocean cover a 
wondrous world of marvels we hardly ever see. De 
Plury invented a metal armor, which enabled him to 
go down into the sea 336 feet, and describes what he 
saw. Everything seen through the water appears mag- 
nified. At nine feet the medusae begin. Little lower 
schools of small fishes are found in a state of continued 
vibration, scintillating like burnished silver, copper and 



STKANGE CREATURES DOWN BEEP IN OCEAN. 389 

brilliant jewels. At about 162 feet thick masses of 
seaweed with arms from 60 to 90 feet long, and hairlike, 
matted together, enwrapped the body weighing him down 
and hindering his movements, even endangering his life. 

Below were met numerous snakelike fishes about three 
feet long, and other creatures like dolphins, which hurled 
themselves against the diver, but his armor and the four- 
inch thick glass before his face protected him. When 
deeper the polypi or devil-fish wound their long tentacles 
round him, but withdrew when they touched the me- 
tallic coverings of his protecting dress. Deeper were 
found giant crabs, three feet across, which, with their 
formidable claws could crack any bone in his body as 
you would a parlor match. Farther down came strange 
deformed creatures made to live in the deep oceans and 
indure its great pressure. All these are carnivorous — 
living on other animal forms of life. At a depth of 
204 feet the pressure of the water is 88-J feet on each 
square inch of the human body, whereas at the surface of 
the sea the pressure of the air is only about 14 pounds. 

Plants or fishes living down fathoms deep when 
brought to the surface die, because the waters or fluids 
in their tissues, at a tension to stand the great pressures, 
burst their organisms as soon as they are brought to the 
surface. Down deep along the ocean bottoms the sun- 
* light never penetrates. But these creatures have lamps 
which give out phosphorus light, which enables them 
to see and procure food. We think our lights and lamps 
are wonders, and the electric light a marvel. But what 
are these compared to these the lights the Creator made ? 

The light changes with the depth, blending green and 
blue like the Azure Grotto, opening into the north side 
of the Island of Capri, Italy, or like the deep caverns 
seen in icebergs. At a depth of about 100 feet the light 
gets dimmer, more diffused, the sun seen up through 
deep ocean waters looks like a reddish opaque globe, 
and in the shades of rocks the stars are visible. Stand- 
ing on a plain of white sand bottom at noon, the reflec- 



S90 A SCENE OF OCEAN HORRORS. 

tion from the white carpet gives the impression you are 
standing on a plain of molton gold. At 226 the dark- 
ness is dense like twilight, at 326 the gloom is inky 
black the electric light is used, a lamp of 10,000 candle 
power throws the light only within a radius of 90 feet. 

~No scene of horrors can be compared to that of a 
wrecked ship, lying there on the sea bottom with broken 
boats, splintered decks, crushed hulls, gaping walls and 
broken masts — tombs of sailors with every bone crushed, 
the bodies lying quite flat being devoured by giant crabs 
and strange denizens of the deep. Every object at the 
bottom of the sea is covered with a kind of powder as 
there they lie in the deep gloom and everlasting silence. 
If you touch a body not eaten by the creatures, the flesh 
will fall from the bones leaving a horrid skeleton. 

Above and below at all depths are living creatures — 
some plants, other animals, each species with its own 
peculiar way of procuring food and propagating its 
race. In the dark depths where no light penetrates 
these creatures have special organs which give out light, 
a kind of phosphorescent glow like the fire-fly which 
gives them light. Down to lowest deeps they are found. 
The trawl of the vessels sent out by different nations 
bring them up from depths, deep as our highest moun- 
tains rear their heads in air. There, where man will 
never penetrate, never see their beauties of form, figure 
and color, God scattered life when he said, " Let the 
waters bring forth the creeping creature having life . . . 
and God created the great whales and every living and 
moving creature which the waters brought forth accord- 
ing to their kinds." Gen. i. 20, 21. 



SECTION V.— THE WONDERS OP HUMAN LIFE. 



CHAPTER XX.— THE THEORY OF EVOLUTION, WHAT 
ARE ITS FOUNDATIONS ? 

Evolution supposes that matter, directed and con- 
trolled alone by the laws of nature, condensed into orbs, 
suns and planets; that dead matter gave rise to lower 
forms of living beings ; that during vast periods of time 
these lower forms by natural laws evolved into nobler 
kinds of plants and animals; that beasts have reason 
differing only in degree from human reason; that by 
natural selection and contests the lower beasts and plants 
rose into the higher ; that at last they produced monkeys 
and apes; that from some kind of a monkey or ape, 
called the " missing link," man was evolved ; that, first 
a savage, man civilized himself and developed into the 
modern cultured races. 

The first evolutionists taught this was the way God 
made the various species of plants, animals and man. 
But their followers now hold that matter is eternal, 
has the germs of life; and nature alone, without God, 
formed the universe as we find it now. 

The world looks up to God as Author of nature — 
Creator and Director ; we supposed we were made to His 
image and likeness, therefore we . held every man in 
honor and esteem. But this new theory tells us our 
forefathers were gibbering monkeys, or disgusting apes, 
that we are only brutes, that material universe only is ; 
that death ends all, and that ideas of God and the future 
life are delusions, relics of the ages of ignorance. 

Scientific men, especially physicians, knowing only a 
part of human knowledge, get brooding over one or two 

391 



392 EVOLUTIONISTS FALSIFIED SCIENCE. 

ideas, think on these things till they overpower them. 
A sign of mental weakness is found in a person when 
he cannot get rid of an idea. Onr insane asylums are 
filled with people sane on all things but on one or two 
points, especially religious questions — but the moment 
you bring up one of these off they go. Many people get 
insane on evolution, religion or a scientific theory. 
Then they write books to prove their theories, make 
money and obtain notoriety. 

The greatest living evolutionist is Haeckel, of Jena 
University, who wrote many books to prove that life 
is nothing but the physical forces acting in plant, beast 
and man. A short time ago he was accused of forging 
pictures and documents and giving false discoveries of 
scientists to prove his theory. He came out in a paper 
he read before a learned society in Germany, admitted 
he had forged these documents to mislead his readers 
but excused himself saying all writers on evolution did 
the same. The account ends with the words ' < Haeckel 
is done for. ' ' 

Here you have the key to the writings of these men. 
They forged and falsified deliberately to mislead 
millions. But how few will hear of the forgeries! 
Infidels have been doing the same for the last half- 
century, while the world covers them with glory. 

Not one of these men is learned outside his special 
studies, yet each wants to solve the deepest problems 
ever proposed to human mind, thinking they " know 
it all. ' ' Darwin, whose statue adorns the great stair- 
way at the Kensington Museum, made his scientific 
studies at Christ College, Cambridge, where he did not 
take the full course, but confined himself to science, 
learned about all he knew during a voyage at sea. He 
fills his books with false and unauthentic information 
trying to prove man came by evolution. Huxley spent 
only two years and a half at Ealing school, similar to 
one of our high schools, after which he studied medi- 
cine. Spencer, son of a school-teacher, never went to 
any school. Tyndall, educated by his father at home, 



WHAT HIGH PRIESTS OF EVOLUTION SAY. 393 

became a surveyor in Ireland, of which he was a native, 
and never attended any regular college course. So we 
might go through the whole list of infidels and find 
every one was an ignoramus outside his special depart- 
ment, yet they want to teach the whole world the 
whole course of human learning, falsify discoveries and 
documents and cite false cases to prove their outlandish 
theories. These men fall into a kind of insanity, even 
Spencer admitted before he died he was a little 
" cracked in the head," and continually suffered from 
nervous prostration. 

But there is a method in their madness. They go 
to a dictionary, or professor of the classic languages, and 
manufacture bastard Greek and Latin terms to fit their 
theories. They use peculiar words to befog the mind 
lest their unreasonable theories may at first offend the 
reader. This is a trick old as literature, for St. 
Augustine complains of the infidels of his day stooping 
to the same methods of deception. 

Huxley says : ' ' Nerve forces are currents of elec- 
tricity, ' ' when science shows they are absolutely dif- 
ferent. Darwin in his " Descent of Man," writes, 
1 ' Man is descended from a hairy quadruped furnished 
with a tail and pointed ears, and was probably arboreal 
in its habits. ' ' Herbert Spencer, philosopher of the 
theory, summing up his system in sixteen propositions — 
in involved sentences, faulty composition and words no 
human being can understand, concludes : < ' That which 
persists unchanging in quantity, but ever changing in 
form under these sensible appearances, which the uni- 
verse presents to us, transcends human knowledge and 
conception, is an unknown and unknowable Power, 
which we are obliged to recognize as without limit in 
space, and without beginning or end in time. ' ' 

According to evolution, God is the Unknown, Un- 
knowable, cannot reveal himself to mankind, is one in 
Personality w r ith the universe, is made of matter, is the 
Life living in all organisms. Human, animal and 
plant life are modifications of physical forces. Man 



394 HOW SCIENTIFIC THEOElES CHANGE. 

came up from beasts and there is no life beyond the 
grave. 

Traveling in 1903 through the Orient, the writer 
made an extensive trip through Europe, and in France, 
to his questions received the following replies : " There 
is no God ; " " The soul dies with the body ; " " The 
universe was always ; " " Evolution developed all things 
to their present perfection ; " " Religion is a supersti- 
tion, a relic of the ages of ignorance; " ""We must 
destroy the idea of God in the hearts of all men and in 
society ; " " Men and animals are machines run by 
physical forces ; " " Science proves there is no God, no 
hell or heaven, ' ' etc. 

What are the consequences of these teachings ? 
Crimes multiply ; murder, suicide, infanticide, dis- 
honesty, embezzlement, immorality, divorces, crimes 
against person and property fill daily papers. The 
< ' Mighty Dollar ' ' and pleasure are worshiped in place 
of God. The human race is drifting on rocks of in- 
fidelity, losing even natural religion, while every wild 
theory and < ' ism ' ' have their followers. 

While religion rests on foundations eternal in the 
mind of God, formed on truths He was pleased to 
tell us of His glories, scientific theories are so change- 
able and shifting, no one ever tried to found a religion 
on them to take the place of what they would destroy. 

A kaleidoscope of changes takes place in the sciences 
— one theory follows another, till we are bewildered. 
Newton held light was caused by minute particles of 
bodies — a theory soon abandoned. The nebular hy- 
pothesis, given in a former chapter as a scientific expla- 
nation of the way the orbs were formed without an act 
of God, was accepted, when lo ! mathematics and geol- 
ogy came in to show it false. A generation of natur- 
alists once held coral islands were formed through ages 
by polyps, and now they say they are the tops of ocean 
mountains. Atoms and molecules ruled chemistry till 
wiser men and deeper studies show ether or extension 
and force are the foundations of matter. For a century 



THE MATERIALISM OF OtJR AGE. 3§5 

it was held the total amount of matter in the universe is 
unchangeable, this is now doubted. Sixty years ago 
Adam Smith was thought to have said the last word on 
economics, but now every one of his laws has been 
denied. Theories of inheritance, disease, bleeding, 
which killed Washington, chemical affinity, hygiene, 
medicine, and a bewildering maze of new theories come 
and go. The surprising part of it is that the scientist 
takes up or abandons these theories as he does a test 
tube, each wild hypothesis holds for a time till it is 
abandoned. For half a century, evolution ruled scien- 
tific minds, but now it is going the way of many an 
unprovable theory. 

Materialistic views of scientists may be shown by the 
following. A professor lecturing to a class of medical 
students stated : " Here, in this jar, I have a little pig 
ground up. We can, by chemistry, put into this jar 
all these materials found in the pig. But we cannot 
make them live. Perhaps one day science will be able 
to give life to these materials, but we have not yet 
arrived at that knowledge." 

Why did evolution spread so rapidly? Few are deep 
thinkers, versed in all branches of human learning, and 
people taken up with labors, gaining their livelihood, 
— do not go to the bottom of things. Any new theory 
always spreads like a fashion. But a plausible teach- 
ing which wipes out God, and our responsibility to Him, 
takes away the future state of rewards and punish- 
ments, the restraints of religion, opens wide the gates 
to all crime, touches each individual and will spread 
like wild-fire. 

Evolution supposes mankind developed from the 
savage state to the civilized, but history tells us man- 
kind first was highly civilized and by lapse of ages de- 
graded into the savage. How many nations flourished 
and then fell into decay? Mankind in all ages hold 
there was a former state of happiness from which their 
fathers fell. This idea of a sure-thing progress up- 
wards, that nature by evolution will lead to a higher 



396 WILD THEORIES OF THE ANCIENTS. 

state, relieves Tom, Dick and Harry from present and 
future care and work, leads to optimistic fatalism. 
Fate ruled minds in days of paganism, is the founda- 
tion of Mohammedanism. Evolution is a new fatalism, 
induces men to laziness, destroys honesty, breeds 
atheism, would ruin every government and produce 
anarchy. For rulers rule with God's authority; de- 
stroy the belief in the Almighty, and we have anarchy, 
"no head." 

Greeks and Romans, having dim, floating ideas of 
God and nature, held queer ideas regarding the begin- 
nings of things and show how foolish people become 
when guided by reason alone. They thought all beings 
sprang from earth, air and water ; Anaximander held 
animals were born of earth through heat and moisture, 
that mankind came from beings of a different form ; 
Empedocles, that arms, eyes, feet and members of our 
bodies first lived separately, but united to make men 
and animals; Anaxagoras, that plants and animals 
sprung from earth, their germs floating in the atmos- 
phere. All ancients supposed dead matter could produce 
life ; the theory of spontaneous generation, that life 
can come from dead matter, the studies of Pasteur, 
Tyndall and great scientists have proved utterly false. 

Aristotle explored human reasoning. He shows the 
mind grasps first universal thoughts, then particular 
thoughts, compares one thought with another and draws 
a conclusion. Deducing or drawing one thought from 
another, this is called the deductive method. Plato 
supposed these thoughts can exist separated from the 
mind. This deductive method ruled during the middle 



Francis Bacon taught us to study nature, observe 
things one after another, and from the observation of 
many facts of the external world find the laws govern- 
ing them. This inductive method gave rise to the 
wonderful discoveries of science. But scientific men 
know little or nothing of the deductive method, soul, 
mind, or reason, and fall into many mistakes. Both 



THE CHIEF INFIDEL EVOLUTIONISTS. 397 

methods must be used to arrive at a full knowledge of 
nature. 

After the revival of learning in the sixteenth century 
the investigations of Greeks, Romans, and Schoolmen 
were ridiculed and abandoned ; the thread of human 
learning coming down from almost the origin of man- 
kind was broken, and scientists, like men without a com- 
pass, got lost in unexplored oceans of error regarding 
man's beginnings, life, the soul, reason, religion. 

Spinosa, the Hebrew, revived the pantheism of pa- 
ganism and of India, teaching the universe is God. 
Descartes laid the principles of doubt. Buffon, con- 
tradicting himself three times, is vague and conflicting 
in his treatment of animal life. Then came men like 
Kant, Herder, Maupertius, Diderot, Bonnet, Robinet, 
Oken, who were followed by a school of materialists 
who see nothing but the natural forces in living organ- 
isms. German and French infidels paved the way for 
Huxley, Tindall, Spencer and the two Darwins, father 
and son. In our day Haeckel sums up the teachings 
of these infidels in his work : < < The Riddle of the Uni- 
verse," read extensively in Europe. A whole book 
would be required to reply to his false and unfounded 
statements. Let the words of Judge Grosscup of the 
TJ. S. Circuit Court of Appeals suffice. "I can state, 
I think, accurately and fully, the thread of his reason- 
ing, and place against it the considerations that it 
makes to my mind are wholly inconclusive as a demon- 
stration of the theory that man is wholly material — 
that mind and spirit are nothing but functions of 
matter." 

Charles Darwin is the great apostle of evolution. 
In his ' ' Descent of Man ' ' he claims we came from a 
monkey because man and monkey resemble each other, 
that monkeys have a low kind of reason which differs 
only in degrees from human reason found among low 
tribes and savages. Therefore, mankind came from 
some species of monkeys. Since Darwin published his 
works, they have been looking for the " missing link," 



398 ABSOLUTELY NO PROOFS OF EVOLUTION. 

examining skulls and bones of apes and prehistoric 
savages, but not a sign has been found of that imagi- 
ary "link." Evolutionists think a large monkey's 
brain proves a man, whereas the difference is in soul fac- 
ulties — the power of reasoning. Eminent men often 
have small skulls and fools largely developed brains. 
A man's brain is much smaller than that of whale or 
elephant, but the latter do not reason. 

The theory rests on the idea that in former times 
man developed from the beast. But during historic 
days no signs of evolution have been found. No 
matter what food and care wild or tame beasts or cattle 
receive, or what struggles they pass through, they re- 
main within their species. Within the species there 
are many families which developed from the original 
parent stock. There are hundreds of families of the 
palm species, and as many families of potatoes derived 
from the little tuber Columbus first saw on the coasts 
of Cuba, but these remain strictly palms and potatoes. 
From the little corn a few feet high of the Indians, by 
selecting the largest cobs for seed, many varieties of 
corn, some 16 feet high, have been developed, but they 
are always corn. There are about 100 families of dogs, 
the largest weighing 100 times more than the smaller, 
but they are always dogs and offer not the slightest 
signs of changing into other species. Neither history 
nor observation, therefore, offers the slightest proof of 
evolution. There is a " missing link" between each 
species. 

Evolutionists claim that in the vast epochs before 
man was created the species of higher plants and 
animals developed. But in these vast periods of time 
no man lived who could give a record of the changes. 
Therefore there is not a single witness of evolution. 
It is simply a speculation, a wild theory resting on the 
air, existing only in men's imagination. 

Becords of geological times prove it false. Bones 
of animals, remains of plants of epochs before man we 
find in rock, sand and strata, are quoted often by 



PROOFS THAT EVOLUTION IS FALSE. 399 

scientists. Plants and animals then differed from those 
now living. But each extinct species stands out com- 
pletely different from other species. Between each 
species and the species above or below it there is a 
" missing link." We never found traces of the indi- 
viduals uniting them with other species which we would 
if one species gradually developed into a higher. Each 
plant and animal of the geological species stands out, 
with leaves, trunk, functions, bones, shapes, organs 
differing from the remains of the individuals of species 
below and above. For example, a little horse with 
five toes lived at one time while now our horse has only 
one toe, called his hoof. But no remains are found 
showing the horse gradually left off, first one, then 
two, and three toes as the horse developed into our 
present animal. Every species of these far-distant 
periods stand out full and complete. The individuals 
died out because of different causes and new species 
were created. This is the only reasonable, common- 
sense explanation of the origin of species. 

Examine the cell of living tissues — each cell under 
the microscope is seen, living, palpitating, endowed 
with life, contracting, expanding, bringing in and 
throwing out materials ; each cell lives the life of the 
living principle animating the organism. If higher 
beings developed from lower they would make new 
organs formed of millions of cells. Each cell requires 
a new power to vivify and give it life. The lower 
being did not have these million powers to animate each 
cell and organ. Dead materials brought in by di- 
gestion do not have these newly formed powers, which 
could only come from the Creator of life. Evolution 
therefore demands that God is continually interfering 
in nature, creating millions of new powers, one for 
each cell, throughout the whole domain of living organ- 
ism. This would require millions and millions of 
miracles being continually worked in nature. Can any- 
thing more monstrous and ridiculous than this be 
conceived? 



400 

How could low forms of beings living in water be- 
come fish, fish become birds, whales first live on land, 
then take to water and develop thick blubber to keep 
them warm? How could some primitive animal de- 
velop on one hand into the dog, and on the other into 
the seal, which has a dog-faced head, a rat become a 
beaver, largest of the rodent species, woodchuck grow 
into a bear, to which species he is related? etc. A 
thousand objections rise in the mind, but space allows 
us to mention only a few. 

Scientific men having done wonders in modern 
times, while they remain within their own sphere of 
science all honor is due them. But as soon as they go 
outside their domain and touch on religion, reason, the 
human soul, God, and the future life they make fools 
of themselves. They are then in deeps they never 
explore. We must look at human knowledge in all 
its forms and departments to arrive at truth, not to 
science only, for that is only a small part of our 
learning. 

God made angels, unseen, living, reasoning beings, 
free from matter, then created the material universe. 
He covered this little globe with plants and animals. 
Thus came forth the spirit kingdom, the mineral king- 
dom, the vegetable kingdom, the animal kingdom — 
the four great departments of created beings. Then 
he united the perfection of all these in one being — 
man. 

Man is a mineral in the matter composing his body, 
a vegetable in growth, nutrition and birth of his kind ; 
an animal in his bones, muscles, nervous system, five 
senses, internal sense and imagination, and an angel in 
his mind and free will forming his reason. In man all 
creation unites. This the Greeks dimly saw, for they 
call man a microcosm, " the little world." Last of 
the creatures God made, in him God united the four 
great orders of creation that here mankind below 
might image the Eternal. ' ' Let us make man to our 
own image and likeness." Gen. i. 26. 



MAN BUILT, AS IT WERE, IN FOUR STORIES. 401 

By his material body, which is heavy, partaking in 
universal gravitation, man enters into relations with 
earth, sun and farthest star ; by his plant powers he 
lives the most perfect vegetable life of earth ; by his 
animal functions he is related to every beast ; by his five 
animal senses he sees surrounding objects ; by his reason 
he begins the order of reasoning beings, above him 
being deathless angel and the eternal reasoning God ; 
by his mind he pierces down to material substances 
underlying forms and appearances clothing material 
objects ; by his will he is free to choose the good, 
bad or indifferent; by his liberty he masters himself, 
his beastly passions — good in themselves but bad in 
their abuse. What fools they be who say man gained 
these from ape, beast or plant ! 

Therefore we find in man plant powers, many organs, 
and soul functions belonging to lower forms of life. 
Men who know little or nothing of man's highly complex 
nature, in their ignorance hold we must have come up 
by evolution from these lower forms of life, because 
we resemble plants, beasts, and monkeys. 

Man is built, we might say, with four stories. The 
foundations are the minerals composing his body, 
formed into cells, composing organs placed and built 
into his body by the power of growth which stops 
when he attains maturity. 

Man's next story is his vegetable powers, for the 
greater part beyond his control, which medical men 
call his involuntary muscles or the ganglionic system. 
These functions go on also during sleep, when they 
stop we die. Heart, lungs, digestive tract, etc., are 
examples of man's plant life. 

Man's third story is his animal functions, muscles 
he can move, nervous system, brain, skeleton, five 
senses, interior sense, fancy or imagination, etc. In 
these he is an animal. He is the most perfect mineral, 
plant and animal in existence. These vivified mineral, 
plant, and animal powers run all through his system, 



402 THE FOUR UNBRIDGIBLE CHASMS. 

they are vivified by the functions or powers of his one 
soul. 

His highest story is reason, uniting him with and 
raising him up to spirits of the unseen world, drawing 
him near to reasoning angels and to God. The five 
senses see particular truths of the surrounding world, 
but they can never rise above the one singular, partic- 
ular object. Material objects are clothed in appear- 
ances which act on the five senses here and now. 
Eeason, composed of mind and free will, the seat of 
liberty, grasps the universal, the general truth from 
these single individual truths seen through the senses. 
Above the single one truth the animal cannot rise. 

Four chasms which nature alone can never bridge 
separate the ranks of living beings from each other : 
1. Dead matter which can never produce a living 
organism ; 2. Animals which have one or more senses 
and are animated by a nervous system no plant has, 
although we cannot tell where plant life ends or animal 
life begins in lower living forms of life ; 3. Man has 
reason, that is, he seizes universal truths, while the 
animal grasps only particular truths. The particular 
is one, here and now, the universal is infinite in extent ; 
for it may be applied to an infinite number of indi- 
viduals as mathematics. No beast can see the universal ; 
4. Man is raised by grace up to a supernatural state. 
Grace is a free gift of God. This no animal can ever 
know or receive. 

Scientists fall into the habit of treating living beings 
from a lower plane. They try to explain the lower 
forms of life according to the laws of dead matter, the 
animal as a higher kind of plant, and man as an animal. 
This runs all through their writings. They know little 
or nothing of living principles animating organisms, for 
they cannot see them, and they try to explain life ac- 
cording to the physical forces. During his course of 
medicine the writer never came across even a hint of 
the human soul, the mind, the faculties of the living 
spirit animating the body — whence medical men tend 



WHAT MISLEADS EVOLUTIONISTS. 403 

to become materialists. They are called physicians, 
< < naturalists, ' ' and give medicine they call physical, 
" to heal by nature." The spiritual part of man is 
never even thought of, for they know nothing about 
the soul. They try to find the place or spot where it 
lives or lived in the body, whereas it is an invisible 
spirit, whole and complete in each and every part of 
the body. 

Living organisms, from lowest to highest forms, were 
built according to general plans. The foundations are 
cells filled with protoplasm. As they rise in the scale 
of species new faculties, powers, organs and structures 
are found in higher orders combined with powers of 
lower beings. But this does not show that the lower 
developed into the higher any more than that a ' < sky- 
scraper ' ' developed from a one-story house without a 
builder or that one architect built both. 

The most perfect way of building living organisms 
is along the lines we find living organisms are con- 
structed. In no other way could materials be dis- 
posed so well to fulfil their functions. Matter could 
not be placed in other forms along any other lines and 
give the wonderful and varied life-functions. There- 
fore many organs and life movements of the lower 
orders are found in higher organisms. This has misled 
people who favor evolution to think that lower organ- 
isms developed into the higher. 

Evolutionists hold oldest organisms lived in water 
and later changed to land plants, as the polliwog 
changes into the frog. But we see no change of this 
kind, and are we to suppose that at some remote time 
all marine animals suddenly took the notion that they 
would like to live on land and then got air-breathing 
organs? 

Animals branch into two great divisions. Some 
have cold blood — their muscles are white, others are 
warm-blooded, their flesh is red. No warm-blooded 
animal can live without a gentle heat in its body. 
How could these beasts with red, warm blood change 



404 FUNDAMENTAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ANIMALS. 

from white flesh and cold blood to warm, red-blood 
and flesh? This difference is found in the very nature 
of the animals. The life functions are so different that 
at one stroke the supposed change destroys the theory 
of evolution. 

Every plant and animal is most beautiful. A fly 
seen under the microscope is perhaps the most beauti- 
ful living animal. Its 500 eyes range like honeycomb 
cells, its body covered with hairs like a beautiful plush 
garment, it breathes through fine holes, its muscles are 
composed of little cells, some white, others red ; each 
cell , like a precious gem, pulsates with life, its wings 
are gauzy films fitted for flight, which its muscles move 
nearly 2,000 beats a second. A book might be written 
describing a fly. 

There are almost countless species of insects, each 
built on a different plan of beauty and perfection. 
How could dead matter of itself evolve such forms of 
beauty? Who is the Artist infinite in His knowledge 
of colors, proportions, with perfect taste, who planned 
and built these millions and millions of insects ! Who 
gave them their instincts for the preservation of each 
individual and the propagation of their race? To say 
they came by evolution is unreasonable. 

Animals divide again into two great series — one kind 
has hard bony structures covered with muscles, the other 
kind has flesh and muscles within a hard shell. Man 
and the nobler animals belong to the former, and insects 
to the latter. These two forms of structure are funda- 
mental to these two great branches. If evolution be 
true, how did beasts develop along these lines so funda- 
mentally opposed? The insect is a specimen of the 
shell form of beast, and the largest now living belong- 
ing to this series is the lobster. Examine the latter 
animal and you will get a good idea of the structure 
of an insect seen under the microscope. 

At the present writing over 300,000 different species 
of insects have been found, but there are perhaps as 
many more species not classified ; we do not know 



THOUSANDS OF SPECIES OF INSECTS. 405 

their natures. How did these species develop accord- 
ing to evolution? If they came from one original 
species it would take countless millions of years to 
produce them according to the theory. How did these 
insects get from one continent to others after they 
had developed from other and lower species? They 
could not fly or crawl across the oceans and most of 
them live in water a few days. What good do these 
insects do? They are the scavengers of nature, many 
are most useful. They come from a ' 6 grub ' ' chrysalis 
which first lives in an entirely different form from the 
parents, then pass through surprising changes till they 
come out full developed insects, which never grow as 
do higher beasts after they are born. How could 
evolution make this fundamental change in the birth of 
insects compared to the birth of other animals? 

Over 7,000 different species of the fly, the diptera, 
live in the United States, and nearly as many more 
species in other countries. Nearly all are harmless, 
most kinds are extremely useful. " Any wholesale 
destruction among these species, if such were possible 
in the present state of our knowledge, would cause 
more diseases than it would cure," says J. Eitchie, 
Com. of the Boston Board of Health. A branch of 
the United States Agricultural Department devoted to 
the study of insects they dub * ' Bugology , ' ' and the 
reports are scattered in books and scientific reports in 
many languages. They are discovering new species 
all the time. The collection of beetles, Coleoptera, 
shows over 2,000 species; it is estimated over 3,000 
species are in the Eastern States, over 2,000 species of 
moths, 2,500 species of flies, the same number of 
hymenoptera — wasps, bees and ants, 600 species of 
hemiptera — true bugs, cicadas, aphids, 125 species of 
cockroaches — --crickets, locusts, grasshoppers and katy- 
dids, and 200 more species not studied. Together 
11,000 species of insects are found in the six eastern 
States. But in South America, Africa and the tropics 
insects so abound that day and night they fill the air 



406 DitfFEKENT BlSEASE-CAitEYiNG INSECTS. 

with ceaseless sounds. It will take generations of men 
of study to know their species and habits. How could 
evolution develop all these different species? 

About 50,000 species of insects have been described 
as living within the boundaries of the United States, 
few being harmful, most being useful to man. The 
mosquito stegomyia of the warm countries has the 
germs of yellow fever, putting the germs into the blood 
when it bites ; the anopheles mosquito carries the germs 
of malaria and gives it to man ; the tse-tse fly has a 
disease which kills cattle in parts of Africa, and an- 
other African fly inoculates people with the "sleeping 
sickness ' ' which carries off millions of people. While 
12,000 different beetles fly round north of Mexico^un- 
counted species live on other continents and in different 
localities, each with its peculiar ways of living and 
propagating its species, how can evolution give an ac- 
count of the origin of these diverse species? It is 
simply impossible. The theory is absurd, unreason- 
able. We can only say ' ' what fools these mortal 
be " to accept such a wild unscientific theory. 

A drop of stagnant water under the microscope, 
shows thousand of living organisms, most of them un- 
classed, unknown to science, each having sets of nerves 
and muscles by which they move. They are as per- 
fectly formed for their sphere of life as the higher 
animals. Their remains cover land and ocean bottoms. 
The diatom shells alone form the ooze lying on ocean 
beds, and compose hills and mountains. We find no 
signs of one species changing into another or becoming 
higher creatures. As the telescope tells the wonders 
of the sky, so the microscope reveals no less the 
marvels of a new world beyond unaided sight. Each 
structure is most perfect, of astounding beauty, showing 
an Artist made them. 

How did plants and animals get these remarkable 
instincts guiding them to preserve the individuals and 
species, displaying wisdom beyond the ken of man? 
They show a science above the knowledge of the 



ANIMAL INSTINCTS CONTRADICT EVOLUTION. 407 

wisest. Evolution says these are the acquired knowl- 
edge of the individuals of the species during former 
ages. This would suppose these had reason and trans- 
mitted the knowledge to their young. Darwin cites 
numerous proofs to show animals reason. He did not 
know himself what reason is — the grasp of universal 
truth. What he cites is simply instinct, the reason of 
the Creator directing life functions. 

When we train animals their young know nothing 
of this teaching. You must teach each pup separately 
* ' new tricks, ' ' as you must educate the child of the 
most learned parents. When or how did birds get the 
idea of flying south in the fall, while others, like the 
sparrow, which can endure winter's cold, remains with 
us ? Who told bear, woodchuck, etc. , to put on fat in 
the fall and retire to winter holes ; beaver and musk- 
rat to build huts in which to pass the cold weather ; 
one kind of wasp to make its nest of crude paper and 
live in community like honey-bees, while another builds 
a single nest of mud ; one kind of a swallow to make 
a nest of mud under the eaves, another kind in a 
chimney, while another species lives in holes it digs in 
sand-banks ? Why do squirrels, crows, and beasts 
which live with us through the winter hide food in the 
fall, while birds which migrate to the south never lay 
up food ? A thousand cases might be cited regarding 
plant and animal instinct proving evolution false, but 
they would fill a large book. 

In the struggle for existence Darwin supposes the 
plants and animals would develop better individuals 
and species. On the contrary, in such a struggle the 
organisms would develop lower forms of life. Every 
farmer knows that poor food and want of care develop 
poor crops and lean, worthless animals. Plenty of 
food, careful planting and good care produce fine crops 
and fine cattle. The experience of every farmer proves 
evolution false. 

In the plains of Texas, on the deserts of Arizona, in 
the waterless and bare valleys of Arabia, the writer 



408 how Absurd is evolution. 

saw worthless dying cattle, famishing for food and 
water. If one will make a study, stop to think or 
visit these places he will see how false is the theory. 
Once the writer saw a caravan down in the arid 
plains of Arabia. He counted over 100 dromedaries, 
loaded with wheat on their way to Jerusalem. They 
were all great beasts — twice as large as the camels we 
see in shows. How did these beasts develop such pro- 
portions in the deserts? How did they get that extra 
stomach they fill with water that they may go for days 
without drinking? The only explanation is God made 
them for man's use, as " ships of the desert." With- 
out them man could not cross these waterless plains. 
Why did not the American deserts, from Oregon to 
the city of Mexico, and down along the South Ameri- 
can coast, west of the Andes Mountains, develop camels 
if evolution brought them forth in the Orient? 

Evolutionists hold animal instincts were acquired 
ages ago by ancestors of men and beasts, and handed 
down to our day, as though dogs tell all their tricks to 
their pups, as though a learned man transmitted his 
learning to his children, as though if your grandfather 
was a great inventor you would be a genius in that 
line. 

If organs developed according to the theory, men 
who ran much would begin to develop four legs, so 
when one pair got tired, they could run on the others ; 
men would now be about twenty feet high ; people who 
used their eyes much would develop one or more eyes ; 
pigs and beasts with great appetites would get many 
stomachs like cows and camels ; people who ate soft 
food would have no teeth ; race-horses would begin to 
be built like deer, which are fleeter. The whole order 
of nature would begin to change in historic times ; and 
where the struggle for existence became too great, man 
would revert again to the monkey from which they 
claim he developed. 

But did mankind develop? Go to the Metropolitan 
Museum in New York and see the works of art dis- 



H"tTMAN REMAINS PROVE EVOLUTION FALSE. 409 

covered in Cyprus, Egypt and the Orient. You will 
find men 5,000 years ago were the same as to-day. In 
the Museum of Cairo are the bodies of the Pharaohs 
of the Oppression — also that of the king who opposed 
Moses, known in history as Menephtah, whose mummy 
was discovered in the tomb of Amenhotep II, Profes- 
sor Smith unwrapped his embalmed body. He was 
an old man and resembling in every particular the Copts 
of our day, children of the ancient Egyptians. His 
features are dark colored, hair reddish-brown, cheek- 
bones high, teeth a little irregular, brain large, head 
has no resemblance to an ape. There are many mum- 
mified bodies in this museum, and they show absolute- 
ly no signs of evolution. 

The Sew York, British, and Cairo museums have 
paintings of people who lived nearly 5,000 years ago, 
done with art which would do honor to artists of our 
time. The forms and features are the same as those of 
people of our age. We went into the tombs along the 
Nile Yalley, we saw scenes pictured on the walls, we 
found some with colors as bright as when sculptured — 
we walked over the sands which preserved them. "We 
met people who look and live exactly like the men of 
Abraham's day, we found no signs of evolution, we 
testify no change took place in mankind for 5,000 
years. 

The general opinion of evolutionists is man was 
first a savage, because we find remains of the ' ' stone 
age ' ' over all the world. After this came ' ' the copper 
age ' ' then the ; < iron age. ' ' How can we account for 
this? Scientists are not historians. First from the 
plains of Babylonia the sons of Ham spread nearly over 
all the world. They used stone in every conceivable 
manner. Their weapons in war, chase and industry 
were stone-tipped arrows, spears, axes, knives, mills 
for grinding grain, etc. This is the reason we find re- 
mains of these weapons and utensils in great numbers in 
the countries these savage peoples colonized. They emi- 
grated into every continent in prehistoric times, and 



410 WHITE RACES THE CIviuZERS OF THE WORLD. 

never advanced or made a single improvement till 
they mingled with the white men, the civilizers of the 
world. 

The Caucasian sons of Japhet, the Aryans, "the 
nobles," went to the south shores of the Caspian Sea 
called the Caucasus. There they lived for ages before 
they emigrated to settle Europe and later India, whence 
a branch wandered to Japan. These white nations 
were always highly civilized. They are the progres- 
sive race, for to their father Japhet, Noe said : " May 
God enlarge Japhet, and may he dwell in the tents of 
Sem. ' ' Since that blessing, the white men have been 
overrunning the world, < < dwelling in the tents of Sem. ' ' 
Every invention, every progress, every advancement 
of our race took their rise among the noble Aryan 
races. To-day we find savage races in the very same 
conditions as were the Hamite peoples who left re- 
mains of the < ' stone age. ' ' Devoted only to science 
many men never study history and fall into these 
mistakes. 

The sons of Ham lived in the ' < stone age ' ' down to 
our day. American Indians tipped arrow and spear with 
flint, used stone implements : the Esquimaux, Siberian 
and African tribes live in the stone age. The writer 
saw low degraded tribes in California, met the children 
of the Aztecs, " Cranes," in Mexico, saw the vast 
temples and tombs of Egypt, visited the great platform 
of Persia's ancient kings at Persepolis Alexander de- 
stroyed, he wandered over many lands, he saw the great 
collections of weapons and utensils in the Smithsonian 
Institute, examined the savage exhibits of the British 
Museum and of the Natural History Museum, New 
York, he visited collections of museums in many na- 
tions scientists offer as examples of primitive man and 
these are the works of the Hamites before the high 
civilization of the Japhetic white men came to < * dwell 
in the tents of Sem" and Ham. They offer not a 
single proof of evolution. 

If evolution is right, human nature is wrong. For 



ARE WE EATING OUE UNCLES, AUNTS AND COUSINS ? 411 

all men hold sacred human life. The care of the sick, 
the cemetery where we lay to rest our dead, the mil- 
lions of plants and beasts we kill for human food, the 
sacredness of human flesh, the instincts of humanity 
guarding human life, all nations putting the murderer 
to death, the safeguards we throw round life and prop- 
erty, great calamities rouse the whole world, famines 
call out shiploads of food, sufferings of large bodies of 
people excite the sympathies of nations, while not 
a thought is given to the millions of animals we kill for 
food, for God said : " Behold I have given every herb 
bearing seed upon the earth ... to be your meat . . . 
all the beasts of the earth and every fowl of the air, 
and all that move on the earth wherein there is life, 
that you may have to feed on." Gen. i. 29, 30. 

Why that instinctive repugnance to eating human 
flesh but because it was not given us as food? Why 
men abhor the very idea of eating dog or cat but be- 
cause they are like a part of the family ? If evolution 
be true we are eating our brothers and sisters, for we 
and they came from the same original stock. 

The world judges correctly, or human reason is 
wrong and mankind deluded till evolutionists began to 
tell us truth. If animals reason, as Darwin tells us, 
when a beast kills a man why not haul him up for 
trial, when a beast does damage why not make him 
pay, why not shut up the rest of mankind in asylums 
and let these men so wonderfully wise in their own 
conceit run loose ? 

Our space allows us not to enter farther into these 
questions showing how nonsensical, unreasonable, un- 
provable unscientific evolution is. Three theories have 
blinded mankind, each has not a single reason to rest on 
— the transmigration of souls from man to beast and back 
to man because of sins, atoms and molecules which mis- 
lead the scientific world since the French revolution, 
and evolution. The first poisoned the religions of 
India, the second destroyed, upset, or retarded the prog- 



412 EVOLUTION" IN A NUTSHELL. 

ress of mankind's conquest of matter, the third pre- 
vents scientists knowing the nature of life. The 
absurd, laughable mingling of evcfution and trans- 
migration of souls may be seen in the following poem, 
over which the writer worked for quite a time. 



EVOLUTION. 



You were a tadpole, I a turtle, in that Palaeozoic 
time, when side by side, in the ebbing tide, we sprawled 
through ooze and slime: then we could skip, with 
caudal nip, through sea and Cambrian fen; in spite of 
strife, our hearts were rife, with joys of life, for we 
loved each other then. 

In mud we lived, and soulless we loved, and then at 
last we .died, and deep in the rift, of the Carbon drift, 
we slumbered side by side: the world wheeled on in 
the lathe of time, while hot heaved sea and main; but 
we caught our breath, from the womb of death, and as 
they saith, we crept into life again. 

Then happy we lived, and still we loved, and then 
we died once more, our forms are rolled, in the cling- 
ing mould, of an old Menevian shore: eons fled, and 
ages sped, and sleep still wrapped us fast; but as they 
say, they were riven away, to a brighter day, and the 
sleep of death we passed. 

With gills and lungs, and scaled and tailed, we 
crawled on strand, as black as a dead man's hand: 
croaking and blind, without a mind, we coiled at ease, 
neath dripping trees, and swam in seas of the past; 
then in the dark, we began to bark, till without reason's 
spark, we formed a language at last. 

Then monkey-made, in light and shade, we swung 
in airy flights, or breathed the balms, of high-grown 
palms, in the hush of moonlight nights: and many 
the raid that we then made, as gibbering each to each; 



WEKE ALL MEN ONCE SAVAGE? 413 

all nature stilled, our life was filled, and how we 
thrilled, at the first faint dawn of speech. 

With life through strife, to love above, we rose 
through cycles strange, from death through death, we 
got our breath: then followed the chain of change, till 
there came a time, in the mud and slime of the beach ; 
till with a stroke, our species broke, and we awoke, 
with a thought of God to reach. 

Like a Buffalo bull, we were tusked in full, and you 
my sweet, you were then so neat, all garbed in your 
glorious hair: we lived in the gloom, of a deep cave 
room, when night chased light from the main; while 
the moon o'erhead, lighted river bed, in the midst of 
our dead, we gnawed the bones of our slain. 

Then I flaked a flint, to a cutting glint, and shaped 
it with brutish craft, and broke a shank, in the wood- 
land dank, and fitted it head and haft: that spear I 
bore, to a reedy shore, when a Mammoth came in the 
rain; and all alone, with brawn and bone, I drove the 
stone, till I slew him with might and main. 

Loud I bawled, as his flash I hauled, loud shouted 
our kith and kin, as from west to east, to the bloody 
feast they all came clamoring in: with cheek by jowl 
with every howl and many a growl, on that old Eozoic 
shore; it was a sight, to see that fight, as the flesh we 
tore and grabbed for more, then talked the marvel o'er. 

Then all alone, with a big bear's bone, with a hard 
and horny hand, I carved his fall on a deep cave wall, 
that men might understand: how we used to fight, 
when might was right, and how we used to roar; that 
the age of sin did not come in, or crime begin, while 
we brutal instincts bore. 

Years ago, when no men know, did change take 
place so strange? did all men find, both body and 
mind, in slime through toil and train: did our eyes, 
from a fountain rise ? is our hair a horse's mane ? 
were all mankind, one time pig-rined, and had no mind 
■ — is evolution sane? 



414 RAVING FOOLS WITHOUT FAITH. 

Is our trail found still, in Tertiary hill, in th scarps 
of Parmian flaggs ? Have we left our bones mid Gla- 
cial stones, in the deeps of Coral craggs ? with all beasts 
slain, and from the main, just like the rain, will we rise 
born beasts again. 

Did God sow our spawn, in the world's dim dawn, 
did He give us wings to fly ? did he make our souls of 
rock-rimed rolls ? for we feel our souls don't die ; be- 
lieve that nonsense if you can; how they rave o'er 
a new-found cave, or when some fools, with baboon 
souls, find some tools of prehistoric man ! 



CHAPTER XXI. -HOW A HUMAN BODY IS MADE, A 
WONDROUS WORK. 

Man's soul has twelve powers or faculties, ten are 
buried in matter they raise up to live their life; two, 
mind and free will forming reason, exercise their acts 
without any material organ. We will first see the work 
of the ten functions of the soul and leave reason, mind 
and will for a future chapter. 

Growth, (1) brings a man's body to full size and 
perfection, then stops; (2) nutrition sustains his body 
through life; (3) generative power being developed at 
dawn of manhood brings forth another like himself and 
ceases in old age. 

Through his five senses (4, 5, 6, 7, 8) man sees sur- 
rounding material objects, these impressions he mixes 
and compares in his (9) inner sense, his fancy or (10) 
imagination reproduces these impressions and offers 
them to the purely spiritual (11) mind, which with 
them enlightens (12) the will. This receives them as 
good, bad or indifferent, and acts accordingly. 

While ten soul powers buried in matter, furnish life 
to each organ and to millions of cells forming the body, 
mind and free will, pure spiritual powers of soul during 
this life get their impressions, or forms of material 
things through the five senses they offer the mind 
through the imagination, in the other life mind and 
free will live and get their forms for thoughts from God 
alone. There is another order of beings — angels liv- 
ing free from matter united with God, eternal Reason 
who created these beings, images of Himself. 

God first made millions of angels to know love and 
serve Him. Some sinned, fell away from right reason 
and were lost; for liberty, act of the free will, may be 
abused ; the order of creation was disturbed by the abuse 
of liberty, thus evil, the absence of good, came into the 

415 



416 TRUTHS COME FROM DAYS OF OLD. 

world. A number of the spirits fell away, sank them- 
selves into evil in which they freely remain as it were in 
a state of spiritual insanity, hating their Creator. But 
God will not be frustrated in his design of filling heaven 
with reasoning beings. 

He prepared for another being with reasoning mind 
and will — man — more complicated, more wonderful than 
the angel. He first made matter we described in orbs 
wheeling round the universe ; He clothed our little world 
with plants and animals, then united angelic power, 
mineral, plant and animal in one creature we call man, 
" reasoning being." " And the Lord God," Jehovah 
Elohim, " formed man of the slime of the earth, and 
breathed into his face the breath of life and man be- 
came a living soul." Gen. i. 26. 

What a wonder it is to think that reason, mind and 
free will belonging to pure spirits, exercise their acts 
in a body built of once dead matter. But in nature no 
sudden chasm exists, man bridges the gulf separating 
visible matter from the unseen kingdom of spirits. 

Men of old, though never told what these truths un- 
fold, as still most people hold — glimmerings of the 
wonders of the human body uniting perfections of all 
creation came down from ancient days. Greeks called 
man a microcosm, " a little world " ; Bomans had 
the word humanum, " human," from humo, " the soil," 
and mana the Sanscrit, " mind," to reason, also mens : 
" mind," " to measure," for mind measures all natural 
things, whence English man and mind; Hebrews have 
Adam, " reasoning being," and adam, " red clay " ; 
Egyptians had Pharaoh, " born of the sun," they wor- 
shipped as God from whom they supposed their royal 
family descended; Chinese claim their emperors came 
from heaven, theirs the " heavenly kingdom," their early 
king is worshipped in temples as Jos; Japs say their 
emperor is " son of heaven " ; Peruvians supposed their 
royal family born of the sun to whom they dedicated 
great gold temple disks, worshiped each morning il- 



THE WONDEKS OF CHILD LIFE. 417 

lumed by sun rays. Thus all ancient nations preserved 
a dim tradition that God made man. 

Countless individuals, plants and animals, each ac- 
cording to their species, are born, grow and die, descend- 
ing from first organism of their species God made of 
earth as he made the first man. In each you find laws 
of chemistry, sciences of mechanics, of hydrostatics 
and hydraulics, of flowing fluids filling pipes, of stand- 
ing waters seeping through membranes, of laws of light 
and heat, of motion and of movement, of construction 
and of building, of artistic groupings in beauteous forms, 
of blending shades and mixing colors, of just propor- 
tions and finest adjustments, thousands of things we yet 
not understand, are found in living beings, from lowest 
living forms to man most complicated. Mysteries of 
organisms show a reasoning Mind, infinite in science, 
built the originals, and now stands by directing con- 
structions of all those that live to-day. 

Silent in the dark, in deepest sleep of vegetative life, 
within the mother's vessel, in the greatest bony cavity of 
her body, heated with her gentle warmth, nourished 
with her blood and life fluids, day and night nine months 
go on life mysteries. The child knows nothing of his 
life functions, mother herself is ignorant of the wonders 
working within her, growth goes on till soul's growth 
builds his body of what were first crude, dead, earthy 
materials. A Spirit seems to stand by, a Scientist sur- 
passing, an Architect-Builder pointing out to soul pow- 
ers where to put the things according to the plans 
and specifications of a man, not of dog, beast or plant, 
because two men laid the foundations of human life. 

Organisms with backbone come from egg fertilized 
by male element, and the moment life begins, cells pile 
on cells, string out from each other, millions in number 
range themselves side by side, end to end in magnifi- 
cent groupings, in matchless mosaics, in beauteous forms 
no artist can imitate. All is beauty, harmony, regular- 
ity, till another man comes into this world and gets full 
growth made exactly like our original father Adam. 



418 HOW CELLS OF ORGANISMS ACT. 

Each cell is animated by a power of the soul, has 
its own action, changes shape and position, moves 
muscles, thrusts out what it does not want and takes 
in materials in growth. Cell-center, called the nucleus, 
4 'nut," surrounded by protoplasm, like the yellow 
yolk of an egg y has its membrane clothing it, divides 
into other cells, and this way growth takes place. 

The < ' daughter cells, ' ' first small, grow, divide, and 
produce other cells like the original. Waving minute 
hair-like processes surround the countless cells, bring- 
ing in nutrition, separating worn-out parts, acting like 
microscopic animaldulaB we see in lower forms of life. 
Cells of the human body, each with life, can be seen 
only with the highest powers of the crystal-lensed 
microscope. Millions and billions of cells, of all sizes, 
kinds and varieties, form the human body. Each is 
different from another, each has its own place, end and 
object — each living the life of the soul. What, there- 
fore, must be the nature of this spirit of man with its 
living powers, giving its life to each of these billions of 
living cells? 

Under the microscope, each living cell flashes forth 
a most beautiful jewel, shining, sparkling — changing 
shades and colors as the light strikes it from different 
depths and sides. 

Kemember, reader, though during nine months a 
man is made now with all his wonderful and compli- 
cated machinery in his body, yet God made the first 
man and beast and plant as most astounding, surpass- 
ingly beautiful pieces of machinery, using every sci- 
ence now known, and many not yet discovered, that 
when the first organism and man's body were built, 
He breathed into these dead bodies living spirits with 
generative powers by which they brought forth others 
like themselves. So mankind and species of beasts and 
plants came down, till over 1,500,000,000 human be- 
ings and countless other organisms to-day live each 
constructed like the originals. 

Keep before your mind, these men were built by the 



THE GREATEST CHRISTIAN MYSTERY. 419 

ten powers of the human soul buried in matter, they 
raise up to live their own life ; that all these materials 
are united into one body by the one spirit, which makes 
them one with it ; that you represent your one spirit 
by the letter I, which stands for your one personality 
— for you are one human being composed of both body 
and soul. 

The pure of heart should find no offense in the de- 
scription of the way life first begins, for to make it 
plain we must begin at the origin of life. We can give 
but a few words on the growth of man before birth, 
and for a more complete description we refer to ap- 
proved medical works. 

Different growths, in the child, beginning with 
vegetative, go on all the time, we cannot describe 
them all at once, must take one after the other ; these 
processes never stop till man attains his full stature, at 
about twenty-one years of age, when growth stops, 
while nourishing powers of soul continue till death. 

The whole child is a development of the original egg 
membranes and materials furnished by the mother. 
With the exception of a few cells furnished by the 
father the child comes entirely from the mother ; till 
it takes other food, the child is built from materials 
the mother furnishes developed from the original egg 
membranes. 

Here we dip into mysteries of the greatest of the 
miracles believed by Christians. In Christ the egg 
was given life without any other element as required 
in human conception. Will you say God, who built 
the universe, founded nature we described, could not 
or did not do this? The miraculous birth of the God- 
man is not against reason, for the Holy Spirit, above 
the laws of nature, gave life to the ovum. 

A§ the Virgin furnished the egg which developed 
along the lines we will describe, furnished all materials 
of growth and after birth milk on which Christ was 
nourished, his whole body, till weaned, came from her, 
can you suppose for a moment she had sin, even origi- 



420 THE EGG OF THE MILK-NOURISHED BEINGS. 

nal guilt? Tor if she had sinned Christ would have a 
body sinful in its origin. Medical science, therefore, 
proves the truth of the Immaculate, ' ' Spotless, ' ' Con- 
ception. 

Flowers have both male and female elements, pollen 
and stigma, most beautiful under microscope, the union 
produces a seed ; lower animals germinate by budding, 
higher species have the sexes on different individuals, 
in place of the pollen and stigma of plant, beasts have 
living elements for generation ; animals which do not 
bring forth their young alive have large eggs contain- 
ing all the nourishment the young need, those which 
bring forth alive have very small eggs, and found, when 
seen under a microscope, formed as perfect as a bird's 
egg, the yellow yelk being inclosed in a membrane 
surrounded by the yolk, a covering of white albumen 
bounded by another membrane. 

The human egg, about 1/120 inch in diameter, is 
surrounded by a transparent membrane 1/2.500 inch 
thick, inclosing clear albumen, like a hen's egg, under 
the microscope appears like a clear globe, bounded 
within and without by dark outlines — the two mem- 
branes, one holding the white yolk, the inner the 
yellow yelk — exactly like a bird's egg. 

Within the yelk is the nucleus of larger cells, inside 
that the nucleolus composed of large granules and cells 
of different sizes. In animals which eat flesh the cells 
are more numerous near the membranes, and inter- 
mingle with fat globules. 

At stated times according to the species, in higher 
beasts, in mankind, about once a month eggs, grown 
in the ovaries, come down through the tubes into the 
womb, the mucous membrane lining the latter comes 
off, the egg, after receiving life, lays on the blood 
vessels whence it gets its first nourishment by indos- 
mose and exosmose. Animals serving for food have 
many eggs ; eggs of fish are fertilized outside the mother 
in the water, in the mammalia and beings which bring 
forth alive and nourish their young with milk, the egg 



THE WAY LIFE IS GIVEN TO THE EGG 421 

is fertilized within the mother, and wonderful is the 
Creator-given instinct directing animals each accord- 
ing to its kind. 

In mankind, highest mammalia, one side of the egg 
has a transparent hole from 1/3.600 to 1/5.000 inch in 
diameter, filled with clear fluid through which the life- 
giving germ passes, when the opening closes to prevent 
another entering. It penetrates down though the 
membrane inclosing the yellow yelk, through the in- 
terior nucleus to the nucleolus with which it mingles 
its cells and life begins. 

The spermatozoon on the inner wall of the membrane 
inclosing the yellow yelk of the triton cristatus, a land 
and water living animal, has the largest germ. The 
human is about 1/125 inch long, flattened from side to 
side, looking like an acorn in its bur, with point like 
that of a rifle bullet for piercing egg membrane, while 
from its base springs a long delicate filament, like a 
tail, which waves and lashes back and forth like a 
swimming fish, so rapidly it cannot first be seen in the 
microscope, by which it propels itself seeking the egg. 

The head is 1/6.000 of an inch long, 1/10.000 inch 
wide through flattened side. Eggs can be fertilized 
only by element of same species, instinct tells this to 
beasts, which mate only with members of their own 
race, showing evolution is a dream. All is harmony, 
beauty and astounding wisdom in nature, man only is 
injured in his origin. All is Wisdom's work. Hun- 
dreds of spermatozoa swim — instinct with Creator's 
wisdom, one finds germinal spot, pierces down through 
the membranes into center, attaches to inner membrane, 
mingles with cells, tail rests motionless, for nature's 
end is gained. 

Now let us see what takes place in the mammalia or 
animals when the germ enters the egg. The egg is 
formed of membrane inclosing cells ranged beside cells, 
all filled with protoplasm but inert, resting motionless. 
The instant the life-giving element enters the egg, 
activity rouses every part and cell. New cells form 



422 SOW LIFE IN EGG BECOMES A SOUL. 

from materials drawn in by indosmose from mother 1 s 
blood ; part is added to part, cells divide up into other 
cells, egg grows to womb walls, from which it receives 
its first nourishment. Surprising means are made use 
of to draw in these materials required for growth. 
Who directs these surprising operations going on there 
in the dark organ where life begins? It is not the 
mother, for her organ belongs to the vegetative part of 
her system over which she has no control. A mighty 
Wisdom stands by and directs these wonderful works 
of growth. 

A gentle and continued heat must be there all the 
time. In this red-flesh — warm-blooded being — the 
womb of the animal is deep in the middle of the lower 
part of the body. If it were on the outside or in any 
other part of the body which could not expand with 
the growth of the young, the latter would die and the 
species become extinct. With what wisdom then the 
Creator made the organ where the young grow and are 
nourished before birth ! How wonderfully food and air 
are brought there through the mother's blood ! Who 
jS so insane as to say this came from blind Nature? 

Human soul and living principles of beasts have 
powers or faculties animating their bodies, these cannot 
exercise without organs, the moment what we described 
happens, a human soul develops from the life in the 
egg, but cannot use its bodily powers till organs 
are made. The real birth of a man, therefore, is not 
his separation from his mother, but his conception. 
< ' Thou shalt not kill" has no exception, to kill the 
fetus is murder pure and simple. Animals know this, 
for if you disturb a bird on her nest she mourns, for 
she knows life is in her eggs. 

In the Smithsonian Institute, Washington, the be- 
ginnings of life in bird's eggs is shown in large wax 
models, from them we study human life. The germ 
on the inner side of the membrane inclosing the yelk 
divides by a membrane, the upper larger than the lower 
one is the beginning of plant, the other the foundations 



MAN DEVELOPS FROM EGG MEMBRANES. 423 

of animal life of man. Again these divide into four, 
and again into eight bundles of cells, cells pile on cells, 
within a few moments they enlarge looking like a little 
yellowish-red raspberry. Fluids collect between them, 
bundles of cells separate them, in one place they become 
more numerous and granular, where they are attached 
to the inner membrane, these divisions, one plant, the 
other animal life, continue spreading through the 
system, for man is the highest developed plant and 
animal. 

The whole human body is a development of the egg 
membranes. Every egg has two coverings, an outer 
inclosing the white albumen, an inner enveloping the 
yellow materials. They are called membranes from 
the Ethiopic bereana, < ' parchment, ' ' from the root 
barah, " to shine," " to be clear," " transparent. " 
A membrane is a thin white flexible structure of fine 
network covering an organ like a skin. 

The moment life begins these membranes begin a 
development by which they spread all over within and 
without the body, the whole body being made of these 
membranes. The outer membrane enveloping the 
white is now called the epiblast, " the outer germ, " 
the inner membrane covering the yellow is the hypo- 
blast, ' ' the inner germ, ' ' between them grows another 
membrane named the mesoblast, < ' the middle germ, ' ' 
and another membrane called the holo blast or intero- 
blast, < < the membrane between. ' ' As the whole body 
is constructed of these membranes and male element 
the child will resemble both father, mother, and the 
race to which they belong. If parents are of different 
races, the child will resemble both races. Here is the 
work of a created soul, a living force, building, not 
orbs, crystals, or crude matter, but a human organism. 

Fluids bring building materials and place them just 
where wanted. Here white yielding gristle lay founda- 
tions for future bones, there stretch beginnings of 
muscles to later move the organs, here are origins of 



424: THE BEGINNING OP A MAN. 

nerves, there the beginning of eyes, while near-by are 
the budding ears. 

All through the body begin foundations of bones, 
little, flat, long, short, hard, soft, hollow ; ends meet- 
ing ends of other bones; between them are uniting 
bands, ribbons strong as steel, each oiled between 
touching ends better than our finest machinery. A 
thousand canals, finely formed filaments, bundles of 
nerves made of millions of cells like little eggs, areseen^ 
each having its own life function. All organs are put 
just where they are wanted, not one is useless ; each 
has life built of crude metals till their unions make the 
organism. 

It looks as though invisible hands reached out, took 
materials furnished by mother's blood, and reared a 
structure surpassing in beauty, reared in wisdom, and 
science far beyond the ken of all mankind. Who is 
this Creator of souls, this astounding Wisdom ? Not 
the little child, for it always sleeps before birth ; not 
the mother, for she knows not what is taking place 
within her. You may say it is nature, but what is 
that but another name for God? The young grow 
according to the general plans of species of beast or 
human parents ; but who made the first beast or the 
first man from the earth ? Who was the Author of 
plant, animal and human structures, living powers. 
Keason replies, the Creator. There is no other 
answer. 

So fine and tender are the child's growing organs, 
they could not touch the mother ; for their skin could 
not grow or blood circulate in parts pressed. A mem- 
brane, the vessel called the amnion, " a vessel," found 
in man and nobler animals, birds and reptiles, but not 
in fishes or serpents, begins to grow, small at first, 
rapidly increases, pushes out its edges from both sides 
at its union with the fetus, till they surround and in- 
close the child. It fills with a clear crystal water, 
liquor amnii, having about 1 per cent albumen, 
traces of urea from the child, and other salts. Thus 



THE ORGAN COMMON TO MOTHER AND CHILD. 425 

the child resting on nothing, floats in this liquid, is 
surrounded on all sides by this fluid, so its organism 
can develop. First, the child lightly touches the walls 
of the amnion, but about the fourth or fifth week this 
fluid increases, then diminishes a little. If you draw 
off this water, the child will die. This water is drawn 
off when the sack bursts at birth. 

The mother's blood circulates not directly through 
the body of the child, for they are two separate, dis- 
tinct beings, each having a perfect soul. The child 
gets its nourishment from its mother. There is an 
organ, as it were common to both, through which the 
materials of growth pass from one to the other. This 
is called the placenta < < to unite together, ' ' which com- 
mon people call the < ' after birth. ' ' It serves for the 
circulation of the child's blood and breathing. In the 
higher animals it has the shape of a disk, one side ad- 
heres to the walls of the womb, the other being cov- 
ered by the amnion. Projections like leaves, and in 
which the blood-vessels of the young end, fill the whole 
interior of this organ. They end in minute vessels called 
the villi, looking somewhat like the blood-vessels of 
the lungs. The blood-vessels of the mother, belong- 
ing to the walls of the uterus, bring her blood to all 
parts, and these villi dip into them, but the exchange 
of blood does not take place directly for fine thin mem- 
branes stretch between them. 

How does the child get nourishment, as the blood- 
vessels between it and its mother are closed by these 
membranes through which blood cannot pass? When 
two fluids of different densities are separated by an or- 
ganic membrane, the materials of the denser fluid will 
pass through the membrane, till both fluids are of the 
same density. This action the Greeks called endos- 
mosis, " impulsion within," and exosmosis, impulsion 
without. ' ' 

This is seen in the flow of sap in trees and nourishes 
all living organisms. In man and higher animals blood 
corpuscles are too large to pass through walls of blood- 



426 THE BUILDING OE A MAN GOES ON. 

vessels, but the nourishing materials of the blood flow 
through hair-like ends of the arteries, and run to all 
parts of the body, giving materials, as wanted or car- 
rying away the worn-out portions. When cells and 
muscles throw out worn-out parts, they become poorer, 
thinner in materials, and by endosmosis new digested 
materials formed into her blood, pass into them, thus 
nourishing the child. The force of endosmosis and 
exosmosis even in a dead membrane is very powerful. 
But in the living subject it is controlled by life-forces, 
which places the materials just where wanted and in 
the right quantity. 

Thus life-force builds muscle, bone, nerve, brain, 
and organs in all parts of the body, just where wanted, 
in the right shape, size and form. It builds up these 
members according to the race. It does not construct 
bone in eye, in brain, in heart or in lungs. Who ever 
saw a building build itself without a builder? Who 
puts the materials just where they are wanted? A 
power with infinite wisdom directs the process of con- 
struction. 

In the meantime, egg-sacks have grown large, and 
look like two unequal sized hour-glasses hanging from 
the bottom of an overturned canoe. The enlarged egg 
yelk nourishes the child through the navel cord, the 
smaller canal develops into the intestines and the ab- 
dominal parts except the generative organs supply 
nourishment till the placenta is formed. 

The child gets nourishment from these vessels formed 
of the egg, till about the sixth week, when they are 
absorbed. Animals which lay eggs produce very large 
yelks, having all the nourishment their young want, 
this is why they are large and very nourishing. In a 
most minute and interesting manner Agassiz and other 
Scientists with colored cuts, describe the development of 
turtle from eggs. Later, learned men studied birds 
growing from these membranes. Medical Institutes 
have wax models showing latest discoveries of the de- 



now man's organs begin. 427 

velopment of animal life, and we find the child follows 
the same general laws. 

Over the child remarkable organs are now growing, 
filled with blood-vessels. Eyes and ears show rudimen- 
tary forms, limbs shoot out as buds, and phosphates of 
lime begin to deposit as cells, looking like little eggs, 
where bones will be. The eighth week arms and legs 

i appear in process of formation. Fingers and toes seem 
like little buds with deposits of lime. Where eyes will 
be are little capsules forming into lenses ; ears are little 
holes and nerves and vessels are forming. 

The egg membrane has grown into a sack studded 
with organs filled with nourishment, having arteries 
and veins running all through them uniting together 
till they end in the inclosed child, through the navel 
cord. This sack is the allantois, so called from the 
Greek alias, ' ' a sausage. " It is the agent of the first 
circulation of the blood, it brings to the chorion, "to 
hold," which surrounds it, wherein the child's blood 
is exposed to the mother's, from which it receives the 
nourishment and oxygen taken in when she breathes. 
After this the blood is sent through the chorion 
through a vein. 

In some animals the allantois is a hollow projection 
simple in structure, but in man the allantois takes on a 
great development. A part below folds into the 
child's bladder, another part becomes the cord entering 
the navel joining child and mother. The chorion has 
numerous villi, in which the mother's blood circulates, 
intermingled with the child's vessels, branching like 
leaves of a tree ; the chorion surrounds the child, the 
sack being filled with a water-like fluid. This is the 
condition about the third month, when the male and 
female genders can be distinguished. 

From the child now floating in this clear fluid, at the 
navel a cord with two arteries and two veins rises like a 
stalk to the upper part of the womb, where it unites 
with the inclosing sack. Deep in the walls of this 
sack, leaf-like structures are seen into which the child's 
minute blood vessels branch. 



428 BEGINNINGS OF BRAIN AND BLOOD VESSELS. 

About the third week, backbone bends over to make 
the head, down through the middle of the spine and 
head a fine membrane begins to form to divide the 
brain into its two hemispheres, later it continues down 
separating the spine into two canals. Thus the cere- 
brum " brain," proper, the cerebellum, " the hind 
brain," and the spine are doubled. But in the neck 
most nerves cross from one side of the brain to the 
other. 

About the fourth week limbs begin to branch as buds, 
from long folds of the epiblast into which the mesoblast 
of the egg penetrates, the formations being extensions 
of the backbones. Soon the ends bud farther out into 
fingers and toes, first but faintly seen as notches, show- 
ing where the joints will be. The seventh or eighth 
week the mesoblast begins to grow into the muscles 
of the back, neck, jaws, and those inclosing the breast 
and abdomen, all develop from the same source. The 
last mentioned come out and unite about the fourth 
month to form the chest and abdomen. 

The veins and arteries pass through three stages be- 
fore they come to perfection. First they get nourish- 
ment from the yolk and white albumen of the egg, then 
from the mother's blood through the placenta the 
" after birth" through which the mother's blood 
circulates, after birth from the digestion of the mother's 
milk and the food passing through the alimentary canal 
during life. 

The egg materials are at last absorbed into the body 
through the little navel which grows into the cord 
uniting the young to the mother. The heart at first 
is quite small, from it two arteries run out dividing 
into very small arteries, spreading the blood through 
the whole body, nourishing all the members, and re- 
turns through two little veins to the heart again. This 
blood is a rich fluid, having few or but partly formed 
blood corpuscles. 

The mother's blood and that of the child flow side 
by side in the placenta, " to stick," or " mingle to- 



BLOOD CIRCULATION IN THE CHILD. 429 

gether." They are separated by a thin membrane, 
through which the nourishment and oxygen of the 
parent's blood pass into that of the child. From this 
placenta, two arteries come out, bend down, pass 
through the navel where the cord enters the child after 
passing through the heart artery, each passes down 
within on either side of the bladder, unite with the two 
branches of the great artery, a continuation of the 
aorta artery which bends over and continues down the 
backbone, inside, branching into two arteries to 
nourish the lower parts of the body and the two lower 
limbs — the heart-beats forcing the blood through these 
arteries and veins back again into the placenta. 

Large veins come out of the placenta, — larger than 
these arteries, and between the placenta and the navel 
they wind many times round this vein before entering 
the navel. The three blood-vessels resemble a rope 
with two cords wound round it. With their cover- 
ings, they form the cord uniting mother and child. 
Passing into the abdomen through the navel, this vein 
leaves the arteries and runs up to the upper part of the 
liver to which it gives out branches to build and nour- 
ish that organ, which is quite large before birth, as 
after birth, during life, it is the largest organ in the 
body. 

Down along and near the backbone, beside the 
great artery, is a large vein. The blood coming 
through this vein from the placenta, empties into this, 
uniting with the flow of blood coming from the lower 
part of the body. Rising as a living flood, the blood 
enters the right auricle of the heart. 

When our little man has lived about a month, the 
middle egg membrane, the epiblast, takes on a peculiar 
development, spreads out, folds as you would a leaf, 
the edges grow and come together inclosing a canal, 
which will become the backbone and spinal marrow. 
About the fifth week the divisions of the bones of the 
back separate by thin membranes, dividing them. The 
nerves presiding over animal life, now branch be- 



430 THE FOUNDATIONS OF NERVOUS SYSTEM. 

tween them from the spinal cord. Bones begin to 
form as cartilage or gristle, at first they are very soft 
and thin in structure, till lime and mineral matters are 
deposited in them later. 

The long canal down the back, first only a streak, 
is clothed with a thin skin formed of simple cells, ex- 
tends from the end where the head and brain will 
develop down to the end of the body. In time this 
will be the spine and muscles of the back. Soon it 
divides into square blocks, separated by thin mem- 
branes, between which branch out the nerves of 
animal life, and those of vegetative functions. The 
blocks grow out on either side, their edges come to- 
gether inclosing the great nerve of the spine itself, 
being inclosed by the membranes derived from the 
epiblast of the yolk and hypoblast covering the yelk 
of the original egg. This structure continues to grow 
till it makes the finished spinal cord, backbone, brain, 
head and the five senses. Thus is laid the foundation 
of the whole nervous system of animal life, from 
which reason will later draw its images. 

Near where the epiblast membrane of the egg united 
the edges of its folds, as described, from the after part 
of the spinal cord nerve cells shoot out like buds, each 
the beginning of a nerve. In some lower animals they 
unite by fibers not seen in man. They are first of 
simple cells, but these later show diverse structures ac- 
cording to the different nerves they are to develop into, 
and the organs where they will end. 

Epiblast, mesoblast, and hypoblast, thus grow into 
brain and spine which after six weeks growth look 
like an elongated lozenge with four points in the top ; 
the two behind, twice as long as those at the sides, are 
covered with thin skin, outside of which grow gray 
matter forming cartilages, which become bones with 
organs forming round them. 

The third month fissures in brain rise into fold- 
ings where nerves begin, and run down to the body. 
Two begin where optic nerves will run to eyes, and 



HOW THE NERVES ARE MADE. 431 

two others to the ears. They appear in the cerebellum, 
6 ' hind brain, ' ' about the sixth month ; all these fissures 
except one, disappear the seventh or eight month, to form 
again and remain as brain convolutions, from which 
branch nerves controlled by willpower during life. 

Nerves from one hemisphere of brain cross over to the 
other side of the body through the medulla oblongata 
' ' the long marrow " , an extension of the brain running 
down through the neck. This is the most deadly part 
of the body ; to pierce it causes instant death. Animals 
which catch their prey know this ; seize them by the 
neck and pierce the medulla with their long canine 
teeth as a cat catches a rat. 

When the membrane closes the canal down the back 
— the spinal marrow fills the whole interior, the thick- 
ening walls of the epiblast inclosing it forms the bones 
and smaller nerves. First they appear only as swell- 
ings between what will grow into the bones of the spine. 
They branch along the back where the edges of the epi- 
blast united to inclose the canal. They are first simple 
bundles of cells growing out like little roots ; in some 
animals they are united by nerve fibres, but these are 
not seen in man. As these nerves grow their roots 
change places, shifting to the front. Then another set 
of nerves come out from the forward canal of the spinal 
marrow, and these nerves grow out like the others from 
the canal behind. These two sets of nerves grow out like 
limbs of a plant; in time they divide into smaller 
nerves, and still smaller, till they ramify to every 
organ, member and most minute part of the body, 
presiding over all life functions. One set belongs to 
the vegetable functions, the other system presides over 
voluntas powers of man. 

While this is going on, other nerves push out from 
the brain to vivify its structures, bones and coverings. 
But special nerves bud out from the brain and become 
the nerves of the five senses — touch, taste, smell, hear- 
ing, and sight. As these five senses require a long de- 
scription, we will leave the details for a special chapter. 



432 HOW THE HEAD IS MADE. 

The upper end of the spine has expanded into a bulb, 
and branched into three buds, or hollow dilations filled 
with protoplasm. The forward one grows into the 
front part of the brain, the middle into nerves of eye 
and ear — their ends become the organs of sight and 
hearing, the lower and rear buds united with the spine, 
develop into the after brain. The microscope shows 
developments of the egg membranes, and these are 
built of different cells. These three formations sur- 
round a cavity opening into the spinal canal down the 
back bone, the beginnings of the nervous system. 

The epiblast and mesoblast egg membranes cover 
and spread through the growing brain — from these 
membranes the whole nervous system is constructed. 
While these growths go on, the upper part of the spine 
grows larger, bends over towards the front and be- 
comes the forward part of the head. The outside egg 
membrane — the epiblast, becomes the outer skin, and 
external organs of the head, while the mesoblast mem- 
brane develops into the inner brain covering connective 
tissues, blood-vessels, bones, and structures. 

The head is, therefore, an expansion or development 
of the framework of the body — the spine. About 
twenty-eight days after conception, the upper end of 
the spine, or backbone, crooked over at right angles to 
the spine, looks like the short handle of a cane, sur- 
rounding a hole which becomes the mouth ; the bent-over 
end grows into the forehead, and from these formations 
the face develops. Mouth, nose, ears, eyes, cheeks, chin 
and organs gradually grow. The end first extends up 
high, but in time comes down and forms the top of the 
head. 

The mesoblast membrane of the egg spreads with the 
other membranes, forms soft cartilage, which gradually 
absorb lime, surrounding cells like little eggs, and 
makes the bones of the head. Little by little, brain 
coverings, head and organs, grow from the three egg 
membranes, we described — the epiblast, hypoblast and 
mesoblast. 



HOW EYES AND EARS BEGIN. 433 

Each side of the forming head now buds out a growth 
looking like a hollow stalk with a vesicle or bulb. As 
it conies out forward, it branches into two growths 
with a bulb on each of its ends. These become the 
optic nerves, and the bulbs will be the eyes. As they 
come forward, they meet the epiblast egg membrane, 
which has been developing in all parts of the body. 
At the point of contact this membrane becomes thick, 
makes a depression like a little cup, the bottom bend- 
ing in, and in this cup the epiblast develops the eye 
with all its wondrous structures. 

Twenty-eight days after life begins, below, almost 
on the neck, on each side appears a spot or opening to 
the brain — these will grow into the nerves of hearing, 
branching from three origins — from the cerebellum, 
from the inner, and from the outer hearing nuclei from 
which it comes out, and divides to the vestibule and 
cochlea of the inner ear. These organs are not fully 
formed till after birth. Special nerves come out from 
the brain to the nose and tongue as these organs grow, 
these are the nerves of smell and taste — the latter 
being very acute after birth, especially for rich foods 
such as sweets, because the child requires much food 
while growing. 

Six weeks after its creation the soul's power of 
growth has thus laid the foundations of animal life in 
the spine and brain, which after the fourth month 
grows rapidly so that at birth the head is quite large. 

The great nerves, first formed of simple cells, later 
take on diverse structures as the organs are built. The 
spinal cord is a continuation of the brain, and has the 
same structure. From the brain branch two sets of 
nerves. One set, presiding over plant life, is called in 
medicine the sympathetic system, giving life to heart, 
lungs, digestive and reproductive organs. These nerves 
come down from the brain each side the neck, outside 
the spinal column. The other set of nerves comes 
down from the brain within the spine, and are called 
the spinal marrow. Each nerve comes from a certain 



434 FOUNDATIONS OF PLANT, ANIMAL AND REASON. 

part of the brain, goes down beside but does not mingle 
with other nerves, and ends in an organ or muscle. 
The spinal cord or narrow is made of a great number 
of these nerves. It is like a bundle of wires each 
separate and insulated, going out from a central tele- 
graph or telephone office to different offices throughout 
the country. But the force sent back and forth 
through these nerves is not electricity as Huxley says, 
but soul's nerve force without action on any electric 
instrument. 

Especially between the backbones these nerves 
branch out to the organs, the forward ones supply 
movement to the muscles, the after nerves preside over 
sensation as heat, cold, pain, etc. Thus, when a man's 
backbone is broken he will have no feeling below the 
break, and he may live because his nerves controlling 
breathing, digestion, etc, have not been injured. 

The outer membrane or epiblast inclosing the white of 
the egg becomes skin, bones, muscles and flesh. The 
under membrane or hypoblast grows, into the nervous 
system, spinal cord and brain, the mesoblast membrane, 
between these two, gives rise to the heart, lungs, liver, 
arteries, veins and digesting organs. Thus at the very 
beginning of man's life, he lays the foundations for his 
three fundamental activities — plant, animal, brain and 
nervous system his mind and will powers will use when 
reason dawns after the body is more or less advanced, 
between the age of five and seven years. 

Growth goes on rapidly the first days of human life, 
much nourishment is wanted to push on the building, 
and blood-vessels first branch out bringing building 
fluid materials to all parts, to the organs developing 
from the egg membranes. Heart begins to pump 
blood, the foundations of the spine are first laid and the 
beginnings of the skeleton, its upper end becoming the 
brain. As life advances member after member form, 
all red colored, not green like plant tinted with chlo- 
rophyl. 



HOW THE SKIN IS MADE. 435 

The spine, like the keel of a ship, is first laid as the 
framework of the whole body, the bony structure, the 
spine, which upholds all organs of the body it begins 
to appear towards the end of the second week, when 
the egg divides into two parts. The upper end of the 
inner layer of cells bends over to inclose the brain. 
The cells multiply and pile up, forming a long groove 
down the back, which becomes longer and deeper as 
the cells multiply. The edges grow out, curve, come 
together and unite, surrounding the canal of the great 
spinal nerve. The growth begins in the middle of the 
back, pushes up to form the brain, and down to com- 
pose the lower parts of the back. Within the canal 
the nerves of the spinal marrow are developed, the 
brain and the spine being formed of the lining of this 
tube, while the covering develops into the skin of the 
back and head. 

The upper end of the cavity which forms the spinal 
cord grows faster and larger than the rest, divides into 
three chambers which grow into the brain. The sixth 
week the canal of the spinal column divides into sec- 
tions, the beginnings of the bones of the back, or 
vertebrae. Just outside them the central layer of cells 
of the mesoblast splits into two layers, the first to form 
the skeleton, muscles, skin and external parts of the 
body, while from the second the intestines, lungs, heart 
etc. , are built, the space inclosing them becoming the 
abdomen and chest. The child has been growing 
larger and longer and the foundations of its organs in 
their varied foundations are laid. The sides bend to- 
wards each other so the fetus may be compared to a 
turned-over canoe. 

About the fifth week the skin begins to form ; the 
outer skin being very thin, the child is all red like the 
inner parts of the mouth, because the true skin, that is 
the inner of the two membranes of which the skin is 
made, begins to develop first. About the fourth month 
fat first forms under the skin. The sixth month little 
projections or follicles appear in the skin, the beginnings 



436 SCENES IN A MEDICAL COLLEGE. 

of the skin vessels which manufacture a cheesy, oily, 
lubricating substance which prevents injury to the skin 
when the mother moves if it touches any part of the 
inner lining of the water-filled sack. This oily sub- 
stance becomes thicker as time goes on and at birth 
covers, lubricating the whole child, making birth easier. 
A similar thick mucous covers fishes and water animals 
so the water will not injure their delicate tissues ; this 
is the reason they are so slippery. 

About the third month finger and toe nails begin to 
grow ; the sixth month they are seen coming out through 
the skin of these members, which are first quite small 
and short. Deep, minute holes are now found on the 
head, through which, about the fifth month, hairs 
come out which often drop off after birth to give way 
to permanent hairs. Sweat and fat glands now appear, 
the first cool the body during great heat, and the latter 
manufacture an oil which keeps the skin soft — these 
two vessels begin to grow from the mesoblast about 
the fifth month. 

On the breast the mesoblast thickens on either side 
into blood vessels and tissues deriving its cellular 
structures from the epiblast. About the third month, 
in the middle of each a small projection comes through 
the mesoblast from which radiate tracts of tissues 
formed of long cells which become follicles, glands and 
ducts. The round projection grows out and becomes 
the nipple. In the boy the development of the breast 
stops here, while in the girl the growth continues into 
organs formed to secrete the nourishing milk for her 
child. The nipple in the case of the female grows 
larger than in the male, has numerous little holes 
through which the nourishment passes into the mouth 
of her child. It is composed of numerous muscles in 
round circles near the base. 

We cannot give all the wondrous processes, growths 
and formations through which a man's body passes while 
he lives his sleepy plant life before birth. The details 
will be found in as far as they have been discovered in 



SCENES IN A MEDICAL COLLEGE. 



437 



medical works. Many scientific secrets have not yet 
been found, though medicine comes down from ancient 
Greeks, often new discoveries and organs as the science 
advances, are called after their discoverers. 

Greatest, most wonderful of earth -living organisms, 
the human body is awful in death, a fearful horror 
pierces us at sight of the dead, for instinct tells we 
were not made to die. Well we remember scenes in 
the Medical College. J^ude bodies lay on operating 
post-mortem tables, fearful was the stench, spite, of 
"picklings," each took a part, leg, heart, brain or 
other organ, as with many a joke and jest they cut to 
pieces, never thinking there lay remains of a mother's 
darling, that was once a strong, healthy man ; drink 
killed him. That once upright lively young woman, 
fell from honor with a gay deceiver, enticed from 
country village he deserted her, then the river and the 
morgue. Unclaimed bodies were sent to be dissected 
in science's interest. We left the study of the healing 
art, to take up the art of arts, the healing of the soul, 
— a nobler temple, made not to die, but to live forever 
in the sky. 



CHAPTER XXII.— THE MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION OF 
THE HUMAN BOBY. 

The human body, formed of earthly materials, is 
united to a deathless soul which by its plant and animal 
powers raises up these substances to live its very life, is 
like a wonderful machine living the soul's life; while 
machines man makes are dead, this machine unites in 
one personality forming one individual man. With its 
plant powers soul in growth and nutrition makes cells 
of newly digested materials, throws out dead worn-out 
materials, builds and incorporates new cells in their 
place. Millions of cells forming the body, differ each 
from each, every one being informed by a power of the 
soul. There must be as many living forces or powers 
in the soul's plant powers as there are cells in the body — 
mounting up to uncounted million^. Some cells like 
beads string out one from another or lay in bundles 
making muscles, others compose membranes covering 
these, others group round holes making pipes, through 
which flow, blood, lymph and juices, etc., still others 
form white gristle at the beginning of life, in these phos- 
phates of lime will deposit like egg-shells forming hard 
bones, through which blood flows in little pipes — the 
body a thousand organs made of cells each having its 
own use, built by an Architect who constructed living 
wondrous machinery of plant, animal and man. 

Chemistry tells us man is built of 13 elementary min- 
erals, 8 solids and 5 gases. The solids are carbon, 
calcium, phosphorus, sulphur, potassium, sodium, mag- 
nesium and iron; the gases are hydrogen, nitrogen, oxy- 
gen, chlorine and fluorine. It is astounding to think 
every man who ever lived was made of these few simple 
elements, and these compose the wonderful products of 
the animal kingdom. 

438 



WHAT OUR BODIES ARE MADE OF. 439 

These metals are in varied weights and proportions 
in the human body. A man weighing 157 lbs. has in 
pounds 88 oxygen, 14 hydrogen, 3.5 nitrogen, 1.6 
chlorine, 0.2 fluorine, 44 carbon, 1.6 phosphorus, 0.2 
sulphur, 0.16 potassium, 0.14 sodium, 3.5 calcium, 0.10 
magnesium and 0.09 iron. These materials found in 
the bodies of men and of nobler beasts range, mix, and 
fuse in mechanical and chemical arrangements never 
found in nature. How any learned scientist for a mo- 
ment imagines natural forces or lower forms of life 
could rise with unaided powers through evolution to 
build such an organism is beyond conception, except 
with the insane wish of banishing God from His crea- 
tion, or how for a moment any one but a fool would 
accept evolution is surprising, except people like to 
follow a leader they think is wise. 

The gases given above are very condensed in all liv- 
ing organisms, and are never found in these conditions 
in the mineral kingdom. If this 88 lbs. of oxygen in 
the human body were in its natural state, having the 
same heat, 98 of the human body, it would have a 
volume of more than 1,000 cubic feet while the 14 
lbs. of hydrogen would fill 2,600 cubic feet. What 
mysterious power the soul of man and life of animal 
have to compress and keep these gases all the time in 
this state, when it takes cold more than 300 deg. ~F. 
below zero, using enormous pressure, to condense these 
gases which when released they return to their normal 
condition. We can only touch on the chemical and 
mechanical wonders of the human body. The great 
standard work, Gray's Anatomy, and hundreds of works 
on physiology, will lead the reader into interesting fields. 

The heart is the great center of the muscular system, 
the muscles fit and work finer than bands running on 
our machinery; the bones, end to end, composing the 
skeleton of 208 different bones is the foundation of 
man's system; nerves branch out from brain and gan- 
glionic system, some under control of the will, the latter 



440 THE LEVEES IN ME MUM AN BODY. 

belonging to the plant system, the whole being a most 
wonderful chemical laboratory. 

We have in us ropes, pulleys, pipes, belts, levers, me- 
chanical devices of astounding construction; we are 
living machines our Creator constructed when He made 
the first man. With every movement we move a million 
cells. Each cell contracts, bulges out in the middle, 
dragging the cells to which it is attached, all uniting 
in the pull to move bone or organ. 

Archimedes invented the lever men still use to move 
heavy objects, said if he had a fulcrum to rest on he 
could move the world, yet every movement of bone, 
muscle, vessel and organ of eash creature is done ac- 
cording to the principle of the lever. What no man 
ever does, levers and muscles move soft parts on this 
principle. Examine a beef tongue, and you find it, 
especially at tip, composed of little levers in shape of 
muscles — thousands of these are in the body of all sizes, 
shapes and lengths. We put the point of a lever under 
a heavy object, rest it on some resisting object we call 
a fulcrum, pull down and pry up the heavy thing. But 
with few exceptions the lever is attached between the 
joint and end of bone or organ moved, so the limb moves 
faster than if the lever were like the one man uses. In 
no other way can the limb be moved so far and rapidly. 

Put under the microscope specimens of unseen living 
forms swimming in stagnant water, from lowest bacteria 
to high developed rotefer with hairs on two spots on 
head looking like wheels, examine numerous species of 
diatoms and see their shells and muscles, see insect con- 
struction in countless species, look down at red muscles 
of fly, bee, wasp, etc., turn on highest powers and se& 
these beasts filled with red and white muscles as levers 
running from shell, organ, member; see with what wis- 
dom each organ is made for its mode of life. Then 
take up mechanics, the sciences and engineerings showing 
different machines, go through the human body, the 
nobler beasts^ and see on what wonderful principles 



HOW OUR MUSCLES ARE MADE, 441 

these organisms have been built. When we see a remark- 
able machine which does wonderful work we ask, Who 
made it ? Was not he a wonderful inventor ? But who 
had such a knowledge of the lever so that He used it in 
the most astounding ways in these machines He made 
which live? Who will utter that blasphemy, there is 
no God? These organisms are made so correctly, fly, 
bee, dragon-fly, humming-bird, etc., not only fly so fast 
you hardly see them, but poise motionless in the air. 
What, therefore, must be the perfection of their con- 
struction. 

The muscles, from musculus, " a little mouse," be- 
cause so soft and tender, cover the bones and shape the 
body. They are divided into two kinds, one class we 
can move as we wish, the others are beyond our control. 
One kind is the voluntary, the other the involuntary or 
organic. One set of muscles is striped, the other un- 
striped. The former belongs to the animal part of man, 
the other presides over plant life. In man and warm- 
blooded animals muscles are red like blood, in cold- 
blooded animals, as insects, fish, etc., they are white like 
their blood and the sap of plants, which is vegetable 
blood. 

Each muscle is a bundle of fibers clothed with a fine 
delicate sheath, seen in uncooked meat. Each bundle is 
a long roundish prism, composed of smaller bundles 
separated from each other by membranes. Viewed under 
the microscope the bundles are found made of round 
cells like beads on a string, the sides of each bead 
touching a cell above and below. The cells are like 
little eggs inclosed by membranes filled with protoplasm. 
They shine like little jewels gleaming in the light, each 
cell being like a pale reddish ruby. 

Each cell has its nerve which moves it to contract, or 
expand, and as they are united together the contraction 
makes the little string shorter. The bundles are from 
1/200 to 1/500 of an inch long, hitched end to end, 
bundles lie beside each other, each inclosed in a sheath — 



442 THE MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION OF BONES. 

a great number make a muscle. At the ends they unite 
by strong bands to bones, forming framework of the 
organism, or to outside shells in case of insects; the 
lobster is the largest being with shell inclosing its white 
muscles. Each cell contracts to move the muscles, how 
we don't know ; the united pull of all the cells move the 
organ. "No system of ropes, belts or pulleys compare 
with muscles of living organisms. 

Look at a stone-arched bridge, a high steel building 
with steel trusses to uphold weight, a great suspension 
or cantilever bridge ; see how the engineers erect our 
big buildings, uphold the great roofs over a depot or 
construct a gothic cathedral and admire the wisdom of 
the men who planned these. But cut and put thick 
slices of bones, shells of insects under microscope, where 
these have to sustain heavy weights the principle of the 
arch is used, some cells are minute with solid walls, 
every building principle is there found, a thousand me- 
chanical devices we have not yet discovered have been 
made use of. The principle of the suspension bridge 
w r as in nature long before man knew it. Where bones 
do not sustain much weight the cells are large, their 
shells thick, bones are hollow filled with marrow and 
blood-vessels run all through them making them pink- 
red in color. Will you hold no Mechanic built these 
structures ? 

Circulation of blood in man begins as follows. First 
appear two enlargements of the mesoblast, one the origin 
of the arteries, the other of the veins. They look like 
two little, long blood-vessels lying beside each other, soon 
unite into one when two arteries lead out from it, and 
two veins lead into it. In man and higher animals 
the heart is first hollow enlargements of the folded 
mesoblast, cells multiply till the membrane folds over 
to form an inclosed tube. This simple heart is seen 
in most fishes, animals living in water and in lower 
species of animals. 

The cells of the heart and blood-vessels become large, 



BEGINNINGS OF BLOOD CIRCULATION. 443 

multiply, break down into blood corpuscles, other cells 
taking their places, materials of growth being proto- 
plasm composed of fluids and gases in a fluid state. 
Blood corpuscles, very pale at first, look like white cor- 
puscles, in the blood of lower animals and in man seem 
like white floating bodies. They get redder and flatter 
more and more like the corpuscles of the adult as life 
advances, but as soon as liver and spleen grow the regu- 
lar white blood corpuscles appear. The egg circulation 
begins about the fifteenth day, and ends at birth when 
the child breathes. 

The child's heart, formed of union of the two men- 
tioned tubes, the moment of union, begins to bend over 
on itself in a H shape, the middle pushes forward to- 
wards the right side, twists on itself, so the end from 
which the arteries branch is in front and to the right, 
that part into which the veins enter is to the left and be- 
hind, while the bent part divides by walls into three 
little chambers. The divisions go on till about the fifth 
week they grow into right and left ventricle, right and 
left auricle of the heart, the great aorta artery through 
which the blood is pumped out to the whole body, and 
the artery going to the lungs where it will be purified 
by the air, when the child breathes after birth. 

This aorta, Greek of " great artery/' coming out of 
the heart, rises up, bends over, and runs down along 
the backbone within. From the top of its arch two 
arteries shoot up to supply the brain. Branches grow 
from it extending to every limb and organ in the body. 
They send out pipes like the limbs of a tree. They 
divide into smaller and smaller pipes till they ramify 
into every part of the system bringing oxygen and nour- 
ishment. Passing through the minute network of vessels 
we see with the microscope, called capillaries, " hair- 
like ", the blood bathes, washes and nourishes every 
part, organ, member and cell of the body. The blood 
brings to every cell nourishment, oxygen and what is* 
wanted for life. 



444 A WONDERFUL FLOW OF FLUIDS. 

While blood corpuscles flow through the capillaries, 
they cannot pass through the walls of the blood-vessels. 
But the fluids of the blood flow out into the tissues 
through the walls by exosmose, the worn-out parts enter 
the capillaries by endosmose, and these two forces go 
on all over the body during life. If you obstruct the 
circulation the organ not fed by the blood will die, and 
must be cut off, or its decaying materials will pass into 
the blood and endanger your life. 

The writer tied the leg of a live bullfrog so the web 
of his foot was stretched, and placed the web under 
the microscope. The blood could be seen flowing in 
its blood-vessels. With rapid beats it could be seen 
in the arteries, slowly in the veins, in the capillaries it 
was a gentle flow. The blood corpuscles could be seen 
winding along as they bent and folded passing the 
mouths of smaller vessels. Thus the life stream like a 
little rivulet wound round among the tissues. 

Thus flowing along mid the tissues of organs of the 
body, the capillaries, from the Latin capillus, " a hair," 
like little pipes, many smaller than a hair, running 
through the whole system, even through bones, bring 
blood to all parts of the system. 

The blood sent through arteries branch into smaller 
and smaller tubes till it nourishes every organ and cell. 
Then it comes back through another system of capillaries 
the beginnings of the veins. These get larger and larger 
rivers of blood like rivers become bigger as they receive 
more water. The veins end in a large vein which 
empties into the right auricle of the heart, passes down 
through a valve into the right ventricle, which gives 
a squeeze, sending it to the lungs, where it gives out 
carbonic acid, the blood corpuscles receive oxygen from 
the air, come back to the left heart auricle, pass 
through the valve into the left ventricle, is pumped 
through the system again, bringing the oxygen which 
unites with materials keeping up a slow fire which makes 
ius warm. This circulation of blood goes on all the time ; 



WITH ASTONISHING SCIENCE BLOOD FLOWS. 445 

so within a few seconds the blood passes through the 
whole body ever nourishing, warming, purifying. 

The blood circulation through veins begins as fol- 
lows. At the beginning of life two veins bud either 
side the growing heart, each sends a branch above and 
below, with short little veins on either side, fuse with 
others, then unite with primitive veins, while from below 
and above grow the central veins which with growth 
become the great veins. Science of water at rest — hy- 
drostatics, " standing water," and hydraulics, " flowing 
water," is followed in all kinds of water-works men 
make. Before birth the lungs are solid, hard to pene- 
trate, till filled with air after birth at the first breath. 
From the left heart auricle the blood passes down into 
the left heart ventricle, which squeezes with every heart- 
beat, and forces the blood up into the great artery called 
the aorta, which bends over and runs down the back 
along the spinal column. A large quantity of blood 
goes to the head through two arteries you feel pulsating 
in your neck, and this causes the large development of 
the head before birth. Before birth the pure blood of 
the arteries mixes with the blood of the veins, for the 
circulation is not perfect till the vessels are finished. 

To every organ, limb and member, the blood comes 
from the placenta filled with oxygen and nourishment 
given up by the mother's blood. The arteries spread 
out, become smaller than the finest hairs, pass through 
little pipes, canals and passages you can see only with 
a microscope, bringing materials to build up the whole 
body of the newly created man. The blood-vessels give 
out life-sustaining oxygen, building materials to each 
part putting each kind wanted, in the place it is needed. 
Mechanics, science, chemistry, laws of physics — every 
science known to man, every law we have discovered, 
a thousand processes we do not know, laws of nature 
beyond our ken, a thousand wonders never to be re- 
vealed, go on there in silent darkness, in gentle heat till 



446 WORKS OF A WONDERFUL SCIENTIST. 

a human body is built as the greatest structure in the 
universe. 

Why does the living soul make there a brain, there 
bones, there a heart, two lungs, and the great liver, in 
another place? Why and how are these wondrous 
structures formed of the materials furnished by the 
mother's food ? O, the marvelous structures as we see 
them in the microscope ! Cells pile on cells, each filled 
with protoplasm, some larger, some finer, some of one 
material, others of different, each cell shines like a 
colored jewel, blending lights, polarizing light, changing 
in their glow as light strikes them from different sides, 
each having its own reason for shape, color, size and 
structure ! Who is the Builder of this body ? The hu- 
man soul with its twelve powers, ten of which unite 
with crude matter, dead earth, condensed gases, it takes 
in and builds our body — one with it to which it gives 
life. And these marvels are seen not only in every 
human body, but also in every beast in a lower degree, 
and still lower in every plant. A Chemist wonderfully 
wise, a Scientist awful in wisdom, a Mechanic infinite 
in power, presides over the creation of every living being 
of our planet. 

Rapidly beats this little human heart, almost 100 
times a minute before birth, for growth is quick and 
demands much material for the building of a man. We 
have pumps to lift liquids, to force them through pipes, 
they must have valves to prevent the liquids from flow- 
ing back. But our pumps are mostly of solid metals 
while here is a pump of muscles, a living force-pump 
a thousand times more perfect than we make. 

Cities are underlined with pipes bringing pure water, 
gas, electric wires and with sewers carrying away 
wastes, and we can force it up into our high buildings. 
Left alone fluids rise till they find the height of the 
original source. The ancients did not know this law, 
and built great aqueducts to bring water into their 
cities. If they had learned the wonders of the circu- 



THOUSANDS OF VALVES IN THE BODY. 447 

lation of the blood in the pipes we call arteries and veins, 
thej could have spared the great expense of those long 
arched structures now ruined near Rome and other 
ancient cities. Veins and arteries, lymphatic, and ves- 
sels of the body have been built by a reasoning Power 
who knew the laws of flowing fluids long before man 
discovered them. 

If blood in veins or arteries flowed back death would 
result in a few moments. But they have valves which 
prevent that calamity. The great vein ends in the right 
heart auricle and brings the blood which flows down into 
the right ventricle, a valve closes when the ventricle 
squeezes to send it to the lungs. It comes back through 
a pipe into the left auricle and passes through a valve 
down into the left ventricle. When this left ventricle 
gives a powerful squeeze to send the blood through the 
arteries, the valve between the auricle and ventricle 
closes. The left ventricle contracts with a more power- 
ful force to pump the blood through the body, than the 
right ventricle, which sends it to the lungs. The left 
ventricle of the heart thus beats more powerfully to send 
the blood through the whole body, as this beat is better 
felt, most people think the heart is on the left side, 
whereas it is in the middle of the chest with the lower 
point turned to the left. 

Valves to control fluids flowing in pipes, are crude, 
imperfect when compared to the vessels in bodies of 
animal or man. The inner linings of the pipes or little 
vessels enlarge into half round disks of endothelium. 
The long sides are united to the walls of the vessels, 
two disks being opposite to each other. When fluids 
flow the right way, they rise up letting it pass, when it 
tries to flow back this double valve closes, the walls of 
the pipe enlarge, the valves distend, their overlapping 
edges stopping the return flow. Arteries, veins, lym- 
phatics and all the pipes of the body have these valves, 
each of a formation fit for the work it is to do. Who 
had such a knowledge of flowing fluids as to make these 



448 HOW BLOOD IS FORCED THROUGH ARTERIES. 

pipes and valves, so different, so surprising and so per- 
fect? 

Arteries are composed of three coats, the outside being 
a protection to the other two, from which it is easily 
separated. The inner lining, formed of many-sided oval 
layers of delicate connecting tissues and elastic layers 
is built into a fine network in which the microscope 
shows numerous openings. In the large arteries it is 
very thick but quite thin in the smaller vessels. The 
middle coat of the arteries is of elastic and muscular 
tissues. When the heart-beats force the blood into the 
arteries they swell out and the valves close so the blood 
cannot return. The elastic walls, a thousand times finer 
than our best rubber pipes, close and force the blood 
along opening the valves to let it pass. The valves close 
and the contraction of the artery walls sends the blood 
on its way. Thus the blood passes along through the 
arteries, through smaller and smaller arteries with their 
contracting walls and wonderful valves, each adapted to 
the work till as a crimson flood it comes into the capil- 
laries and bathes every part and organ of the body. 

The veins have not as contractive a structure as the 
arteries, but are provided with a more numerous set 
of valves, and a wonderful formation to bring the blood 
back to the heart. Each pipe and member is wonder- 
fully adapted to the work it is to do. We use rubber 
pipes yielding with pressure and contracting, but what 
are they compared to these pipes in our body, the living 
force built up in us, in animals and plants ! And the 
wonders piled on wonders ! All these pipes, as all mem- 
bers of the body, were made of the minerals of earth. 

Who built this wondrous system of blood circulation 
where red rivers of life flow? The wonder still more 
wondrous is, that Power who created nature, who built 
millions of suns, countless species of plants and animals 
does not directly make this body but does a greater won- 
der. He made each living soul with its powers of 
growth and nutrition which build these organisms. He 



THE REMARKABLE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM. 449 

who planned the mechanism of the stars on eternal 
mathematics, keeps these soul powers within their laws 
so the soul makes the body of a man and not that of 
a plant, dog or other animal. Let the student studying 
anatomy and physiology stop to think on the wonders 
of mechanics of chemistry and of the other sciences 
shown in the human body. Alas, our blindness! In 
the whole course of medicine the soul is never men- 
tioned. God is completely left out of His mosl won- 
drous creation, the human body is treated as a dead 
mass of matter subject to physical forces, they never 
think of the absent soul. 

Not less wonderful than arteries and veins is the 
lympatic system, from lympa, " water," having ex- 
ceedingly fine thin walled pipes formed of three coats, 
also provided with thousands of valves of finer, more 
delicate, and different formation than those of veins or 
arteries, which stop the flow of returning fluids. No 
nerves have yet been found in lymphatic pipes proper 
but they are there, for all vital action depends on nerve 
force. But nerves are found at the valves, the latter 
showing a knotted appearance. The lymphatics are 
like an appendix to the blood circulation, for while blood 
brings food and oxygen to the body the lymphatics ab- 
sorb and carry away the waste parts which would poison 
the person. Beginning in finest little pipes in most 
minute tissues, they unite into large and bigger branches, 
following the veins, absorbing by endosmose the 
gathered up waste materials and fluids, flow through 
them uniting into large tubes, which by two main ducts 
empty into the veins with the chyle of the digested food 
enriching the blood. 

The fluid flowing in lymphatics, called lymph, is com- 
posed of water, albumen, fibrine, spirit extract, water 
extract, fats, salts, small round white globules similar to 
but smaller than the white corpuscles of the blood, and 
red corpuscles near where they enter the veins. A man 
weighing 140 lbs. will pour into his veins about 6J lbs. 



450 LIVING PIPES FILLED WITH FLUIDS. 

of lymph a day, part coming from food absorbed by 
the villi, the rest from materials absorbed through his 
system. The lymphatics system therefore not only 
gathers up worn-out materials but pours them into the 
blood where they are used over and over again. 

Pipes bring water, gas, steam, etc., spread them under 
our cities, entering houses, going to different rooms, 
valves control the flow and sewer pipes carry away 
waste unhealthy materials. Aqueducts or large pipes 
come from reservoirs or gas tanks, get smaller as they 
branch out under streets and into houses, made of hard 
materials buried under the streets and plumbers, gas and 
steam-fitters put them in. Rigid dead steam and water 
systems heat our buildings, fire is in furnace below, heat 
comes up through the pipes. But few think of the 
wonderful systems of pipes in a man's body, without 
joints, bending with each movement, through which 
fluids flow all the time; we never look for a pipe-fitter 
to fix them, the fire is not in one place but in every 
part of the body, to which the blood in arteries comes 
bringing coal and air ever burning, keeping us warm. 
Who is this wonderful Pipe Fitter who built these sys- 
tems, not only in man, but in every plant and beast ? 

What would happen if the sewer system of a city 
ceased to work ? We have a sewer system most wonder- 
ful — so has every animal. Waste materials gathered 
up by the blood are sent along through veins leading 
through our kidneys, where they are sifted out in form 
of urea, for if they accumulated they would poison the 
whole body; and if these sewer pipes or organs refuse 
to work or work improperly we . live but a few days, 
and you know how deadly are " Bright's disease " or 
diabetes, " a passing through," when the fluids change 
to sugar and soon kill. 

Teeth tear or grind food so it will be partly di- 
gested by the saliva before entering the stomach. The 
child has at first 20 teeth, which become loose and 
should be taken out^, otherwise the teeth which grow in 



HOW TEETH ARE MADE OF MATTER. 451 

their place are turned aside and will be irregular. The 
second set, called the permanent teeth, 32 in number, 
16 in each jaw, are incisors, canine, bicuspid and 
molars, showing man was made to eat all kinds of food, 
both vegetable and animal. 

A tooth is composed of three different tissues, dentine, 
crusta petrosa and enamel. Dentine forming the greater 
part of the tooth, of 72% calcareous and 28% organic 
matters, consists of a firm substratum of minute six- 
sided rods lying beside, interwoven together, each rod 
being about 1/5,500 of an inch in diameter, between 
them being cylindrical canals about 1/12,000 of an inch 
in diameter, which with the dentine cylinders radiate 
from the nerve pulp up to the top and sides of the tooth 
covered with the enamel ; as they rise the canals branch, 
divide and become smaller, increasing in number. 

The central cavity of the tooth contains the nerve 
supplied with blood-vessels ; this is the seat of pain when 
the nerve is exposed, or disease attacks it, the dentine 
also being sensitive to touch or pressure. The crusta 
petrosa, " bony covering," is a thin covering of bony 
tissue clothing the outside of the dentine in the roots 
which it unites by its periosteum to the socket. The 
enamel covering the crown, composed of 95% calcareous 
matter, is formed of superimposed layers of hardened 
epithelium almost crystalline, the hardest material of 
the living organism, resists the hardest steel and can be 
cut only with diamond or emery. It would be impossible 
to make any instrument to serve the purpose of the 
tooth in any other form which would serve the purpose 
as well. 

The food passes into a pipe behind the windpipe lead- 
ing to your lungs, the mouth of the air passage closes, 
or otherwise the food would go into your lungs, stopping 
air passages and smother you. Its mouth is lined with 
nerves exceedingly sensitive, and when anything touches 
them you cough. This arrangement of the two tubes 



452 THE FOOD CANAL IN MAN. 

is seen not only in all nobler animals but also in birds. 
Why is this ! 

The windpipe is made of more or less hard materials 
which keep it open all the time, otherwise it would close 
and the creature smother. If the passage leading to 
your stomach were on the outside of this windpipe, 
when you swallowed a large mouthful of food, it would 
press on your windpipe, closing it so you could not 
breathe till it was removed or passed down into your 
stomach. This is but a sample of the thousands of 
Wisdom's marks shown in nature. 

From mouth to lower end within the abdomen is 
the elementary canal from alo, " to feed," about 30 feet 
long in man, beginning at the back part of the mouth 
in swallowing organs which force food down into the 
sesophagus leading to the stomach, a tube leading out 
of the other end of the stomach being closed by a valve 
called the polyrus, " a door-keeper," which opens to let 
the digested food pass, stops the undigested and prevents 
food from the intestines returning. The tube below the 
stomach first small becomes larger. The tube from 
mouth to end of body differs in construction according 
to the animal. 

A man's stomach, when moderately full is about a 
foot long, largest on the left side, is the pouch in which 
food is digested. Herb eating animals have many 
stomachs, the sheep having three, the cow a number, 
the camel an extra one to hold water while traveling 
through deserts. But man and animals which eat meat 
and very rich foods have only one stomach. Each 
species has an organ adapted by a Wisdom with a won- 
derful knowledge of chemistry. The stomach does not 
digest its walls because they live, and life force is higher 
than chemical action. 

Four coats form the organ — a thick skin-like cover- 
ing, an expansion of the peritoneum, " wrapped round," 
which covers all the digestive organs, a thick muscular 
covering of three fibers, some long, others circular with 



Remarkable organs in walls of stomach. 455 

oblique fibers running through them, and within a coat 
of loose filament tissues of mucous and muscular layers. 
These squeeze and move to mix the food with the juices 
thrown out from the interior walls of the organ. The 
stomach digests the food in the gentle heat and chemical 

, actions of the organ. The whole interior is covered with 
mucous membrane you see in the mouth which lines 
its walls and all its organs. 

Through the microscope this mucous membrane is 
found filled with minute shallow holes, each having six 
sides, arranged like a honeycomb, each cell being from 
1/100 to 1/200 of an inch in diameter, separated by 
slightly raised edges. The bottom of each opens into 
little tubes, through which comes the gastric juice, so 
called from the Greek gaster, " the stomach." They 
are of two kinds — pyloric, " a gate," and peptic, " to 
digest,", each system pouring out a different fluid. The 
pyloric are most numerous near the pylorus, through 
which the digested food enters the intestines, hence their 
name; while the peptic line the whole organ. Tripe, 
made of a cow's stomach, shows these organs. But in 
the human stomach they are much smaller. 

Each peptic gland, " nut," like a cell in a honeycomb, 
turns on itself at the bottom and comes up like a little 

. tongue filling the gland to within 1/6 of the top of the 
hole. The whole lining of the little sack is dotted with 
large round cells opening out, looking like little beads. 
They manufacture from the blood the peptic fluid and 
pour it out on the food. The pyloric gland is about 
twice as deep, the bottom also turns up like the bottom 
of a bottle, but the tongue comes up only half as high 
as those of peptic glands towards its mouth. The 
walls are of square cells, the openings of many tubes. 
The walls manufacture another fluid, which the pyloric 
glands pour into the stomach. These two fluids mixed 
compose peptic fluids which digest the food. AYhen a 
person's digestive organs do not work properly, he takes 
pepsin, " to digest," made from an animal's stomach, 



454 HOW THE FOOD IS DIGESTED. 

generally of the pig, rich in digestive fluids because of 
his enormously developed appetite. 

After eating, the stomach first absorbs all the fluids, 
then these millions of little vessels pour over the food 
their secretions. The muscles of the stomach contract 
and expand, mix an outer layer of the food with gastric 
juices. Then they move this outer layer, now looking 
like cream, down towards the pylorus, which opens into 
the intestine to let this digested food pass, but closes 
against any food not properly prepared. A great chem- 
ical and mechanical change takes place in the food 
helped by the heat of the body. Every law of chemistry 
is followed, every principle of mechanics is guarded, 
each animal has his own way of digesting his food. 
Who made the different stomachs of man and of these 
animals ? Who knew these laws and built these organs 
according to the principles of the higher sciences ? 

Down into the small intestines now comes the food, 
but it is not yet ready to become blood to nourish the 
organism. This intestine in man is from 24 to 30 feet 
long, longer or shorter in different species of animals 
according to the nature of their food. At birth it is 
about 9 feet long because the milk is already prepared 
in the mother's glands but grows longer during child- 
hood. In the sheep it is 28 times the length of the 
animal's body, while in lion, dog and flesh-eating 
animals, it is shorter in proportion to the body than 
in man, because of the richer food or flesh they eat. 
Each animal has a stomach and intestines according to 
its food and mode of life. Who arranged these things 
for the nourishment of every living being from the 
microscopic diatom to the king of the universe, man? 

Having been digested in the stomach the food passes 
through the pylorus down into the small intestine, where 
it is mixed with the bile from the liver, with the juice 
of the pancreas, " all flesh," and secretions from the dif- 
ferent glands imbedded in the various membranes. The 
small intestine still farther digests the food, and there 



SOW THE SMALLER INTESTINE IS MADE. 455 

the nutrition of the food is sucked up to he poured into 
the circulating Wood. 

This small intestine, ahout 20 feet long, gets smaller 
till it ends in the larger intestine, is divided into the 
duodenum, " breadth of twelve fingers," the jejunum, 
" empty," generally after death, and the ilium, " to 
twist," and because it supports the ilia, " flank," of 
the intestine. The ilium is formed of coils, or con- 
vulsions like a great worm, which moving slip over and 
press the food through it till it is emptied into the larger 
intestine. 

The small intestine is formed of four coats: the 
serous, muscular, aerolar and mucous membranes. The 
first is a modification of the peritoneum almost entirely 
enveloping the organ. The second is of two layers of 
muscular fibers, the first thinly scattered over the organ 
along its length, the other winding round the intestine 
forming a thick, uniform layer. The areolar coat con- 
nects mucous and muscular tissues. 

About an inch below the pylorus, or opening from the 
stomach into the intestine, the foldings of the intestine 
begin. They are from about two inches long, and 1/3 
of an inch deep down to much smaller size into which 
the food enters preventing its too rapid passage, and 
giving a larger surface for absorbing the food. In the 
lower parts, where the pancreatic, ducts enter, these fold- 
ings are quite large and close together, but from this 
part to the middle of the jejunum they diminish in size 
and numbers. 

When the mucous lining of the intestine is examined 
with a glass, its whole inner surface is found covered 
with little hairlike projections, standing out on a velvet 
surface. They are called villi, " hairs," " fibrils," three- 
cornered, flat or round cylinders, with ends larger than 
their bodies. They are largest and more numerous on 
the inner linings of the duodenum and jejunum, fewer 
and smaller on the ileum and about 4,000,000 lining 
the intestine. 



456 HOW THE FOOD CHANGES INTO BLOOD, 

Each villi is formed of a central canal filled with 
milk-like fluid, surrounded with epithelium structure, 
blood-vessels, a basement membrane from which it rises, 
muscular tissues — all held together with lymphoid tis- 
sues. The central canal of each ends at the top in a 
lacteal : " milk gland " covered by a thin membrane. Its 
walls are formed of unstripped involuntary muscular tis- 
sues, surrounded with minute blood vessels and wonder- 
ful structures. These lacteal ducts are sometimes double 
in man, but in some animals there are many different 
kinds of villi, one kind differing from those of another 
species of animal, according to their food. The walls 
of the human intestine are also lined with other minute 
follicles, " little bags," small depressions in the linings 
of its surface, which when examined with a glass ap- 
pear as minute dots on the surface scattered among the 
villi, the opening of each being closed by a membrane. 

These millions of wonderfully constructed organs 
wave back and forth during life through the food, ab- 
sorbing the nourishment through the membranes clos- 
ing their mouths. By endosmose the nourishment passes 
through the membranes and fills their canals with what 
looks like milk, they pour into the pipes into which they 
unite. These canals, called lacteals, " milk-carrying," 
unite into larger canals called chyliferous vessels, from 
the chyle with which they are filled, and all come to- 
gether and unite into a large vessel like a vein filled with 
the nourishment from the food, which empties into the 
great vein leading to the heart, where it is mixed with 
the blood. Passing into the lungs it is acted on by the 
air and becomes blood corpuscles and nourishing ma- 
terials sent as blood to all parts of the body. When 
most of the food has been digested these vessels become 
less rich in nourishment, and hunger warns us we must 
eat again. 

In 24 hours an ordinary man absorbs 143 gallons of 
oxygen, and throws out 124 gallons of carbonic gas, or 
coal in a state of gas. During his day's work a laborer 
requires 118 grams of albumen, 56 of fat, 500 carbon- 



WONDERFUL CHEMICAL CHANGES IN THE BODY. 45? 

hydrates, 2,500 to 3,000 of water, the latter on a warm 
day; 18 eggs would furnish the albumen, 4 or 5 lbs. of 
meat or bread the carbonhydrates if not furnished by 
other foods. During this time his liver manufactures 
nearly a pint of bile which digests the fats; 5 \ ounces 
of pancreatic fluid, which resolves the bile digested fats 
into glycerine, changes the starch into sugar and the 
albumen into peptones which the villi of the small in- 
testine suck up to be poured into the blood which nour- 
ishes the whole system. It reaches the millions of little 
cell-laboratories of which the organism is composed. 
Here with the help of oxygen the food is built into the 
different organs and the waste parts are thrown out, 
torn apart and appear as urea perspiration and gases 
in the breath. You might call them the sewers of the 
system. 

These chemical actions cause the heat which keeps 
the body warm. The mechanical actions of the heart 
and of the other muscles add to the heat, that is why a 
person becomes heated by exertion. The amount of heat 
which raises a kilogram of water 1 degree C. is called 
a calory, and an ordinary man in a day produces 2,500 
calories. This heat is changed into the movements of 
the muscles. 

Your body is renewed in from 20 to 30 days — all the 
materials change during this time, although most people 
think it takes seven years. Food supplies the materials. 
A healthy person loses about a 12th in summer and a 
14th of his body in winter during a day, working people 
losing most, which explains their large appetites. The 
loss is greatest between the ages of 30 and 40 and is 
less in women, children, the weak and sick. A vigorous 
laboring man will lose from 11 to 13 lbs. a day and 
must have food, nature tells him through hunger that 
he has used up the nourishment he extracts by his di- 
gestive tube and pours into his veins to be carried by 
the blood to all parts of his body. But there is a food 
we hardly think of without which we would die in few 
minutes, that is air. 



CHAPTER XXI1L— THE FIVE SENSES— TOUCH, TASTE, 
SMELL, HEARING, SEEING. 

Man and beast have five senses, like windows through 
which they look out on the world, through which they 
get information of material things. Some beasts have 
one or more sense higher developed than man, while 
another sense is defective, a dog has a powerful smell 
but poor touch, eagle an acute sight but bad smell, man 
alone has all the senses developed in a regular degree. 
The senses of each species of animal are developed ac- 
cording to their modes of living. 

Through seeing, hearing, smelling, tasting and touch- 
ing we perceive material shapes, sizes, hardness, soft- 
ness, colors, movements, etc., we call appearances, as 
it were covering or clothing material things, these ap- 
pearances alone act on the senses. But the substances 
so shaped, sized, hard, soft, colored, moving, etc., them- 
selves we never see or perceive by any sense. Mind 
alone judges that under these appearances are iron, 
wood, gold, a tree, a mountain, etc., because the senses 
perceive the appearances natural to these objects. 

Therefore we cannot grasp with any sense the sub- 
stances of the 100 different primary metals or their com- 
binations and unions which compose the universe, for 
we have no sense to see substance. What material sub- 
stances are really in themselves no man knows. Wisest 
men say it may be ether pervading all space, underly- 
ing all metals, a dynamic source of activity causing 
these appearances to act on the senses, receiving exten- 
tion from ether. There is therefore no objection against 
the Real Presence from the nature of substance. 

Besides material substances there are living prin- 
ciples of plant and beast spirit substances, as human 

458 



THE SUBSTANCES AND FORMS OF MATTER. 459 

souls, angels and God. Living substances, being en- 
tirely spiritual, have no material forms or appearances 
which act on the senses, and therefore we can never per- 
ceive a spirit by any sense. 

We dwell in realms of spirits beyond our senses; all 
we know of spirits we get from reason and revelation. 
What is behind, beyond this material veil of matter we 
will know only after death. We live amid material 
things. Like animals, depend so much on sense so we 
find it hard to rise from gross matter up to a knowledge 
of the spiritual; for the human soul is sunk in a body 
of clay ever dragging us down so we incline to be beastly 
all the time. 

Material things, therefore, are of two kinds — sub- 
stances standing alone without the aid of any other, 
as air, water, silver, iron, wood, earth, etc., which exist 
in themselves, and appearances which cannot exist alone 
but adhere to other substances as color, form, weight, 
movement, shape, etc., which cannot be separated from 
things colored, heavy, moved or shaped. The latter are 
called forms, appearances, or modes of matter. The 
five senses grasp the latter while mind penetrates 
behind them and judges the nature of the substances 
behind them. 

Nature is composed of material substances and forms 
and appearances, as it were, covering matter — that is, 
they hide the different substances under them. Man 
has five senses to perceive these appearances, and a mind 
which penetrates behind and judges the nature of mate- 
rial things clothed with form, color, shapes, weight, 
appearances, which act on the Hve senses. We can 
never perceive by any sense the material substances 
themselves. The mind alone tells us that such a thing 
is iron, such wood, stone or other things, because their 
appearances act in different ways on our senses. 

Beyond the senses, therefore, are two kinds of sub- 
stances, one the material, the appearances of which act 
on the senses, the other spiritual living substances which 



460 THE NATURE OF THE FIVE SENSES. 

have nothing to act on the senses. We never perceive 
life force in plant, animal, human soul, angel or God, 
for the five senses, being soul powers buried in matter 
cannot rise above their partly material nature to see 
the spiritual. We know a spiritual substance only by 
its works. We know God because we see His works in 
nature; we know a soul and living principles of plant 
and beast, because we see their work in their organisms. 
We see now objects with light, but in the other life we 
will see God with the light of His glory, another and 
higher light which human souls in this life have no 
power to grasp. 

Science dwells in and occupies itself with material 
objects, their phenomena and laws, the senses tell us 
very little regarding the real nature of material sub- 
stances underlying the appearances of material things. 
Touch shows us hardness, resistance, shapes, outlines, 
softness, etc. ; taste is the sensation of the materials dis- 
solved in saliva; smell tells us the odors of material 
solved in saliva; smell tells us the odors of materials, 
ether tremblings pass through the eye and form images 
of the objects illumed by light, but beyond this we 
cannot go while we live here. How limited then is our 
knowledge of nature, yet many men glory in science as 
though it was the sum total of human knowledge. The 
mind extends our learning far beyond the domains of 
sense. 

The five senses man has in common with beasts are 
in certain organs animated by soul functions, soul 
raises them up to live its life senses function, only in 
these organs subject to disease and accident which may 
injure or destroy them. The senses give us knowledge 
of surrounding material objects, through them truths 
and realities of the material world pass as through five 
windows into a common soul power called the common 
sense, where impressions are compared one with an- 
other; these impressions pass to the imagination which 
reproduces, combines or re-forms them so we can im- 



THE NATURE OF THE SENSE OF TOUCH. 461 

agine many kinds of material forms. Thus far animal 
powers go, but in man the imagination offers these im- 
ages or impressions coming from the senses to the intel- 
ligence, from the Latin intus legere, " to read within," 
which reproduces them as general, universal ideas. 
Thus we think, reason; the mind offers these universal 
ideas to the will as good, bad or indifferent, and the will 
being the seat of liberty, man's freedom, acts according 
to the light of the mind. If a child were born without 
any of the five senses, the soul would be, as it were, shut 
up in a prison, and his education be almost impossible. 
When sickness, injury or any cause injure any part of 
this chain beginning with the nervous system through 
the senses, the mind cannot receive right impressions, 
thinks not correctly or man becomes insensible. In 
sleep the nervous system rests and mind is a blank or 
the person dreams. 

Touch, "to thrust, or strike," the lowest sense is in 
the skin. By it we get ideas of weight, temperature, 
size, shape, smoothness, outlines, etc., of objects. Touch 
in the afferent nerves of the skin, the general covering 
of the body, ending in the brain, is more developed in 
upper parts of the body, its acuteness depending on the 
development of the arteries, veins and lacteals surround' 
ing the nerves of touch. 

Touch is most highly developed on end of tongue, 
that we may know when food is ground fine before 
swallowing it; at tips of fingers that we may feel; on 
lips and parts of mucous membrane covering forward 
parts of mouth, on nipples where sensory papillae and 
tactile corpuscles are numerous because of the nursing 
child. 

In other parts of the body touch differs according to 
the development of the vascular system. Outer or upper 
skin, hairs, teeth and nails, having no nerves, have no 
sense of touch. Tickling is most easily excited in parts 
having feeble touch. Varying in different parts of body, 
greatest just where wanted most, touch is least between 



462 THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TONGUE. 

the shoulders. It is very much developed in flying 
membranes of bat, in whiskers of flesh-eating animals 
which with them feel for their prey, and in members of 
the rodent families from a mouse up to the highest 
rodent, the beaver. Hands and tails of monkeys, lips 
and tongue of herb-eating beasts, end of elephant 
trunk and nose of pig, tapir and bat have an acute sense 
of touch. A person who loses his sight develops the 
sense of touch to a wonderful degree, because of the 
attention he gives to his sensations. 

The tongue, chief organ of taste, on the floor of the 
mouth between the teeth of the lower jaw, is composed 
of muscles interlacing with each other in all directions. 
On the point the nerves of touch and taste are more 
developed than in any other part of the body. The 
mucous membrane covers the whole interior of the 
mouth and lips. On the under parts of the tongue it is 
thin and smooth, but on the borders it begins to change 
into a papillary formation. 

The tongue papillae are projections of the dense net- 
work of fibers and tissues composing the organ project- 
ing out of and covering the upper parts for two-thirds 
of its surface from the top backward. The back of the 
tongue where they end has from 8 to 10 large papillae 
ranging like a V. The figure has the point to the back, 
each from 1/12 to 1/20 of an inch across. The 
papilla is like a cone, the smaller end down, the top 
shaped like a saucer, the one at the point in the middle 
being the largest. Scattered over the upper surface of 
the tongue but more numerous at end and sides, are 
many smaller papillae — round, red, narrow where 
they are attached to the tongue — each growing up like 
a little mushroom. The whole forward part of the 
tongue is covered with smaller papillae — cone-like pro- 
jections rising as little cones, forming a brush-like 
surface. 

In flesh-eating beasts, they take on a high development 
as seen on a cat's tongue. If a lion would lick your 



HOW THE SENSE OF TASTE IS CAUSED. 463 

hand he would take off the skin. In larger papillae, and 
in most of the smaller, the nerves of taste end. They 
are formed of two kinds of cells, the outside being 
spindle shape, flattened, inclose a central bundle of 
round cells with a round nucleus in the middle^— this 
structure being the taste goblet. These bodies are the 
seat of the sense of taste. 

Taste, " to touch," " to try," is the sense by which 
we perceive properties of bodies, which undergo a chem- 
ical change in the mouth. The tongue is the chief organ 
of taste, although it resides also in the palate, its arches 
and other parts of the mouth. The fifth pair of nerves 
comes out from the brain, branches forward to two-thirds 
of the tongue, and to places where this sense resides 
giving sense of taste, while the glosso-phyrangeal nerve 
is the seat of disagreeable sensations, when extremely 
excited produces vomiting. 

While taste is more acute in the point, base and sides 
of the tongue, it also resides on its whole upper surface 
being less marked on its middle. Nerves of taste and 
touch intermingle in the tongue and tell us things are 
sour, sweet, salt, bitter, or have compound savors, as 
cooked meats, vegetables, fruits, etc. Some substances, 
as alcohol, pepper, mustard, etc., are pungent and ir- 
ritating. When hungry food tastes sweetest, for then 
we want it most, after a meal taste of food is less agree- 
able. 

Taste was given to select good wholesome foods, 
which must dissolve in the mouth, otherwise we cannot 
taste them. For the food after being mixed with the 
saliva, must be absorbed by the mucous membrane. 
Within the tissues it acts on the nerves of taste. When 
the mouth is dry taste is imperfect. While eating the 
saliva mixes with the food, becomes saturated with it, 
and easily penetrates the mucous membrane lining the 
mouth, being aided in that by mastication. The full 
effect of taste is not perceived till the act of swallowing, 
when all dissolved the food comes into contact with the 



464 THE SEAT OF THE SENSE OF SMELL. 

nerves of taste ramifying to the papillae on tongue and 
mucous membrane. Touch, the lowest sense, requires 
only a contact with a body to perceive it, but taste, 
being a higher sense, perceives materials only after they 
have dissolved and penetrated to the nerves. 

About the fourth week after the beginning of life 
the epiblast membrane of the egg, which bent over to 
form the head begins to thicken in two places where will 
be the middle of the face ; the borders grow larger, the 
holes deepen and become two channels, which form the 
two nostrils, which can be seen at the end of the second 
mouth. The nose continues to grow till the organ be- 
comes prominent at birth. 

The nose is the organ of smell which gives notice 
of dangerous gases, which should not be breathed and 
aids taste in choosing food. The external organ has 
two openings extending up into large flattened cavities 
behind and above, deep in the bones of the face extend- 
ing almost as high as the eyes. As dust would injure 
the delicate membrane covering the surface, many hairs 
grow just within the opening, serving as a sieve through 
which the air passes in breathing. The air passing 
up forms little whirlwinds within the large cavities of 
the upper part of the nostril, where it is warmed before 
entering the lungs. Many animals breathe only through 
the nose, never through the mouth. 

The nasal flat cavities in the middle of the face ex- 
tend from each nostril up and backward above the roof 
of the mouth to the base of the skull, then open down 
into the throat. They are narrower above than below, 
each opening into four cavities. From the inner eye 
orbit a little canal comes down into each nostril through 
which tears and water bathing the eye flow. A large 
canal leads into the back of the mouth and down into 
the lungs. 

Holes go through the bones into the brain, through 
which the nerves of smell come out. Within and above 
they branch into many fine filaments, spread over a 



HOW WE SMELL THINGS. 465 

third of the partition dividing the two nostrils and 
cover the walls of the organs. 

The whole interior of the organs is lined with a 
mucous, " moist," red, membrane, being thickest over 
the bones and walls of the dividing wall separating the 
two nostrils. The protecting skin called the epithelium, 
i: a bed covering," is composed of columns seen in the 
microscope, very fine below where most of the nerves 
end. There fine hair-like filaments, wave all the time, 
brushing the secretions down towards the openings, so 
they will not accumulate, sometimes they fill the nostrils 
and prevent smell. When a person has " a cold " the 
secretions are abundant, for then all the mucous mem- 
brane of the body " weeps " throwing out hurtful pro- 
ductions of the bacteria causing the trouble. 

How do we smell? Bodies always give out minute 
particles, which float in the air. The amount of matter 
we smell is surprisingly small. A little musk, or attar 
of rose, will fill a room or house with scent for months, 
or years, without suffering a loss we can estimate by 
weight. Foods give out pleasant odors when hungry, 
some bodies give pleasant, others disagreeable smells. 

The walls of the nostrils are always bathed in fluids 
secreted by the coverings. The minute particles are 
dissolved in these fluids, which are fresh in the upper 
parts of the nose. The first pair, or olfactory nerves, 
are endowed with the sense of smell, but cannot feel 
any actual contact of bodies. But the lower part of 
the nostrils is supplied by the fifth pair of cranial 
nerves, which cannot perceive odors, being general nerves 
of sensibility. 

All vapors are not odoriferous. Some, like ammonia, 
chlorine, acetic acid, etc., are irritating, while foods, 
flowers, etc., are pleasant. Agreeable things have nice 
odors, and dangerous things unpleasant smells to warn 
us of their presence. Some kinds of animals, like dogs, 
never eat till they first smell their food, while others, as 
birds, depend on their acute sight. Man, depending on 



466 SMELL AND HEAKING IN ANIMALS. 

his experience and mind in judging things, has not as 
highly developed smell as some beasts. 

The dog, a hunter by nature, has a most highly devel- 
oped smell, and animals he chases, have organs which 
give out odors, so a hound can follow the steps of a 
deer. A dog knows different persons by their smell, 
or odor of their clothes, and will find his master's steps 
hours after he passed, and bloodhound will find a 
criminal after he has smelled his clothes. Most wild 
animals have a most sensitive smell, and hunters must 
get so the wind blows from them to him. 

Smell is on the end of the antenae of insects, flies 
which lay their eggs in putrid meat will not do so if 
these organs are removed. If their antennae are re- 
moved, bees, wasps and ants will taste honey mixed 
with strychnine and then stop eating. Smell varies in 
different insects ; they tell members of their colonies by 
smell. The bees of each hive have their own particular 
smell, those born of a particular queen having their 
own proper odor, and they will kill bees of another 
swarm entering the hive. Workers, drones, honey, wax 
and food of each hive have their own peculiar smell, 
but that of the queen is the strongest. 

The nobler animals, as dogs, horses, cats and timid 
beasts have ear lobes. They can erect, and turn them 
to catch sounds. Their ears are in the front of the 
head, while man's are on the side. Their ears are 
shaped to catch sound, and reflect it down into the 
opening. Bats have the largest ears compared to their 
size, and moles the smallest, yet the latter have acute 
hearing. Fishes and reptiles' ears are covered with 
skin, which prevents water entering and injuring the 
delicate structure. Fish are very sensitive to vibrations 
of water, but can hardly hear noises in the air. The 
ears of different animals show that a wonderfully wise 
Mechanic and a Musician of surpassing knowledge of 
sound and harmony made each organ of hearing best 
for the life habits of the animal. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE OUTER EAR. 467 

Let us look a little at the human ear and see how it 
was made to enable us to hear. Sound and music were 
studied from before the dawn of history. Helmholtz, 
Tyndall and famous scientists unravelled the mystery 
of music, harmony and tone. Irregular beats or vibra- 
tions cause noise, and in the ear are three canals filled 
with fluid which receive all kinds of noises. Regular 
beats cause music, and the cochlea with its microscopic 
strings receive these regular beats. Nerves come out 
from the brain and end in these organs. 

The ears each side of the head are the organs of 
hearing, each having an external, middle and inner ear. 
The external ear is composed of cartilage easily bent 
so a person can sleep on his side without inconvenience. 
It has a number of depressions and folds to deceive in- 
sects, and to lead sounds in through the hole which is 
about 1^ inch deep, going forward and downwards 
into the bone. The ear holes are slightly curved, larg- 
est at the outer end, where a bitter wax is secreted to 
prevent insects entering the fine delicate organs of hear- 
ing, deep in the bones of the ear where they will not 
be injured. 

The inner end of this canal is stopped by the ear- 
drum, stretched tight like the head of a drum, to re- 
ceive the vibrations of sound. The drum, nearly oval, 
broader above than below, stretches inward, downward, 
formed of two very thin partly transparent membranes, 
connected with the labyrinth closing the inner ear by 
three little bones, the smallest in the body called the 
hammer, anvil, and stirrup, because they resemble these 
instruments. The hammer handle comes down between 
the two membranes of the drum, keeping it stretched to 
receive the air waves, which make the drum vibrate. 
These vibrations set the little bones trembling, and the 
stirrup, being attached to the drum of the labyrinth, 
closing the inner ear filled with a crystal fluid, sets this 
fluid in vibration, and these tremblings of the fluid act 
on the fine nerve filaments of the sense of hearing. 



£68 THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE INNER EAR. 

The epiblastic membrane of the egg thickens on each 
side of the growing head outside the third vesicle of the 
brain where the epiblast becomes deeper and thicker — 
sinking toward the base of the brain till it forms a 
flask-like cavity by its mouth narrowing. The mouth 
of the flask at last closes and thus within the soft bones 
the foundations of the ears are laid, building the mid- 
dle ear and the tube from it to the throat. First pear- 
shaped, sunk in the mesoblastic membrane developed 
from the egg, as time goes on it develops the inner 
ear with its labyrinth, vestibule, canals, cochlea, drums, 
and other parts. 

The neck of the flask or recess of the labyrinth be- 
comes the aqueduct of the vestibule giving out buds 
from which the various parts are formed. The organ 
from the outer end gets longer, bending on itself within 
from left to right forms the cochlea, three other coats 
become the three canals, and the canal leading into the 
ear from the outside, closed within by the ear drum. 
The nerve of hearing, developing from the brain, divides 
into two — one for the vestibule, the other for the cochlea. 
The middle ear and the Eustachian tube are now formed 
and lined with the developed hypoblast and mesoblast 
membranes of the egg. The Eustachian tube leads down 
to the throat so the inner ear may be always filled with 
air. When it is stopped by a cold, or other obstruction, 
you cannot hear so well because the drum must have 
air on both sides to vibrate. 

The three little bones in this air-chamber bring the 
vibrations from one drum to the other. The handle of 
the hammer hitches to the outer drum, being imbedded 
between its two membranes, and the stirrup is united 
to the inner drum. These bones dovetail into each other 
where they are united and magnify the vibrations. 

The inner drum covers a little oval opening 1/5 of an 
inch in diameter, called the fenestra ovalis, " the oval 
window," which leads into the inner, or real ear, formed 
of the vestibule, three cannals and cocklea, all filled 



A REMARKABLE ORGAN IN THE EAR. 469 

with a clear fluid. The vibrations brought by the little 
bones from the outer to the inner drum sets this fluid in 
vibration. 

Just behind the drum of the oval fenestra membrane 
is the vestibule, a central cavity common to the different 
organs of the inner ear. Above and behind it rise three 
canals of unequal length, flattened from side to side 
1/20 of an inch in diameter, each forming nearly 
half a circle. They open into the vestibule by five 
mouths called by the ancients ampolae, " bottles," the 
mouths being larger than the bodies of the canals. 

Below, and to the front of these three canals, the 
vestibule enlarges, winds from below up like a snail- 
shell, hence its name, cochlea, " twisted," " like a 
screw." It is a continuation of the vestibule twisted 
from below up. About a quarter of an inch in size, it 
is like a winding passage, one stage rising over the 
other, making two turns and a half, the circles getting 
smaller, reising like the coils of a snail shell. The 
organ is like a round cone with a large base and small 
top, resembling a rounded pyramid. A thin winding 
plate within called the spiral division divides it horizon- 
tally into about equal portions from the bottom to the 
top, following its windings. 

This spiral plate or central division is broad at the 
bottom agreeing with the large base of the organ, but it 
diminishes gradually to the top where it ends. It re- 
minds you of a winding stair with a large diameter at 
the bottom, but getting smaller towards the top, as 
though a little staircase was in the middle of a snail 
shell. But the upper part called the cupola, " top," 
enlarges like a little cup. This central division running 
from the base to the top, like a winding staircase with- 
out steps, is perforated by thousands of little holes 
through which enter fine filaments from the nerve of 
hearing branching from the brain. 

Running up through the center of the organ is a 
round cone-like center, large below, small at the top. 



4?0 THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENT IN THE EAR. 

Round this central cone in the middle of the cochlea, 
the snail-shell organ winds twice and half forming a 
winding passage divided into two canals by the central 
division. It looks very like a snail shell divided by a 
winding partition running from the bottom to the top, 
extending from the inside towards the outer walls to 
about the middle where it ends. It is found to have a 
remarkable arrangement of structures like the keyboard 
of an organ or piano, called C'orti's rods, from their 
discoverer. 

From these cells at minute distances from each other 
from 3,000 to 5,000 double strings stretch. They are 
continuations of the nerve of hearing which branch in 
two sets of lines making nearly 10,000 strings. Each 
double string making a V, each with a damper, the 
points unite with the nerve of hearing, the ends ending 
in the outer wall of the organ. They look very much 
like minute piano wires — that is, they form a double 
piano, the inner strings being more numerous than the 
outer. 

The inner surface of the labyrinth is lined with a 
thin fibrous membrane similar to that covering all the 
bones of the body. A delicate process on its surface is 
attached to the bone, while its free surface is covered 
with a smooth pale layer of epithelium which secretes 
the thin, limpid clear fluid. See strings of piano, harp 
or violin, some small, short, others long and large. But 
the ear has these strings winding round within the 
cochlea to the number of over 5,000. What instrument 
has that numbers of strings! These microscopic strings 
are double, each has its own damper to regukte its 
length and time of vibration so as to catch every sound 
and tone. And these strings are double, making more 
than 10,000 in all. 

Our musical instruments are dead, crude, unyielding. 
But this ear lives, moves, pulsates with life, grows 
without our knowledge, is nourished with blood and 
lasts us all our life. We have not to tune or repair it. 



DETAILS OF THE INNER EAR. 471 

The living soul with its power of hearing made it with- 
out our knowledge according to the plans and specifica- 
tions of this infinite Musician, who created man and 
animal. Let the reader take his microscope, turn its 
higher powers on the ear of man or animal, examine its 
structure, and if he knows the laws of sound and the 
mathematics of music, of harmony, he will exclaim: 
There is a God, for in no other way can we explain the 
wonders of the ear. 

Edison invented the phonograph, " sound writing," in 
which air waves make little depressions on the soft cylin- 
der which are reproduced when the hardened cylinder 
is turned. The stilus hitched to a drum rubs over these 
depressions, reproducing the sounds. In a more perfect 
way the little bones bring the air waves to the inner 
drum and set the fluid vibrating in the inner ear. Let 
us follow the sounds and see how we hear. 

The handle of the hammer is united to the drum by 
its handle, both are free to vibrate, its head being 
connected with the anvil. The latter looks like a min- 
ute tooth with two roots spread out, the shortest tooth 
unites to edge of the bony mastoid cells by fibers, while 
the other root of the anvil, much longer, extends down 
behind in the same direction as the hammer handle and 
by ligaments at its top attaches to the stirrup. The 
foot of the stirrup is hitched to the inner drum closing 
the fenestral opening, against which the fluid filling 
the inner ear presses. Through these little bones the 
vibrations of the air making the outer drum vibrate are 
carried in and strike on the inner drum which trembles 
and this sets up vibrations in the fluid filling the inner 
ear, consisting of labyrinth canals, vestibule and cochlea 
with its microscopic strings. 

The strings of a musical instrument will set the 
strings of another in vibrations when both instruments 
are of the same size, length, and tension. The cochlea 
has 10,000 strings, so that no matter what the rapidity, 
pitch, tone, timber or quality of music may be, one 



472 MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS IN THE EAR. 

or more of these strings will tremble in unison. The 
fluid vibrates and the little piano-harp or music-like 
instrument in the ear will thus hear them. Each of 
these strings has a little damper like that of a piano 
which comes down on it and deadens and regulates its 
vibrations. The strings end in or are continuations of 
the nerves of hearing, and bring the sensations of sound 
in to the brain, there they are received as sound. 

The drum was perhaps the first musical instrument 
savages invented. Did the Creator know how to make 
a drum ? We have two drums in each ear. A drum- 
head will not give out beats unless it be stretched, but 
the membranes of these little ear drums are stretched 
all the time. If they are broken we cannot hear. 

The flute was the next musical instrument made, but 
the ear has three flutes — the three canals. In the flute 
a column of air vibrates, causing it to sound. But the 
fluid filling these three canals vibrates and these pulses 
act on the nerves of hearing, not only in the three canals, 
but in the strings stretching all along through the wind- 
ing cochlea up to its top. 

Many flutes of different size were gathered into the 
organ. But no organ can be made which the ear will 
not hear its diapason, hautboy, vox humana, etc., and 
every pipe in great choir swell and pedal organ. The 
ear can pick out sounds of wood or metal pipes from 
three-fourths of an inch long to 32 feet. Who made this 
ear founded on the mathematics of sound ? Only within 
the last generation did scientific men reveal the nature 
of sound. But from creation a Musician who knew all 
sciences made ears of man and animal of wondrous 
structure to hear noises and musical tones. 

Stringed instruments were made before the dawn of 
history, and harp, violin and numerous instruments with 
vibrating strings followed. But when we examine the 
ear with the microscope, we find it the most perfect 
stringed instrument ever invented. Eo human being 
could make an ear. It is a most perfect harp, piano, 
organ, etc., a combination of all musical instruments. 



THE WAY THE EYES ARE MADE. 473 

Nerves and non-vascular parts of the eye are formed 
of the epiblast membrane, while the vascular parts, that 
is the arteries, veins, lymphatics, etc. develop from 
the mesoblast. The most essential parts of the eye, the 
retina, lens and surrounding structures develop out of 
the epiblast. 

From the forming brain each side the head first we 
see a cavity opening into the brain like a hollow stalk, 
which becomes solid forming the optic nerve of the 
mesoblast membrane. As it comes forward it meets 
the expanding layer of the epiblast, which thickens at 
point of contact forming a depression. The epiderm 
covers this cuplike depression, which recedes before it 
bending back like the bottom of a cup ; between these 
two a little round formation grows, which becomes the 
crystalline lens. While the lens remains in the same 
place the cup becomes larger and deeper, and as growth 
advances the eye is formed in all its perfections. 

The bottom of the cup formed of layers of the epiblast 
and mesoblast, as growth advances, gets larger and 
deeper, the bottom receding grows into the retina with 
its nine wonderfully built up layers of rods, cones, and 
structures looking under the microscope like mosaic 
pavements. The space between the lens and the retina, 
lined with the mesoblast membrane of the egg, now con- 
tains numerous veins and arteries. The iris, clear parts 
of the eye and surrounding structures make the eye 
into a round ball with a space or opening in front hav- 
ing a lens within clear as glass, through which the 
light can penetrate to the retina behind. Between the 
lens in front and behind clear water gathers filling the 
whole eye. Thus before the end of the third month an 
organ of the most wonderful construction is formed. 
Then small folds of the outer skin come together, cover 
the delicate organ to prevent injury, and before birth 
these separate and become the eyelids. 

Let us see this highest organ of sense more in detail. 
The eye in its orbit is surrounded on three sides by 



474 THE VISIBLE ORGANS OE THE EYE. ' 

bones to protect it from injury. In man it is in front 
so he can look out on the world around him ; being the 
world's master, he fears nothing. Birds and animals 
which cannot protect themselves have their eyes on the 
side to see danger on all sides. Man has the most per- 
fectly developed eye, and sees clearly near and far. 
Although some animals see farther they cannot see so 
well little things near-by, or if they see little things they 
do not see so well at a distance. 

The eyeball has seven muscles which direct it towards 
any point, is supplied by blood-vessels and nerves, and 
is sheathed with the two eyelids to protect its delicate 
construction as we would place a costly jewel or the fine 
works of our watch in its case. 

The eyeball inbedded in fat is surrounded by a thin 
membrane clothing the ball which shows as the white 
surrounding hard coat protecting the organs within. In 
front is a round opening — the cornea, clear as crystal, 
through which you see the colored iris with a dark 
round hole in the middle. The light enters through the 
hole in the iris, passes through the crystalline lens, 
through where it falls on the retina, covering the whole 
interior of the eye where vision takes place. 

The eyeball consists of two spheres of different sizes, 
the eyeball proper, and a section of a smaller sphere, 
which is about a sixth of the eyeball. The latter, being 
the clear part of the eye, rises, bulging out. You will 
see it better looking sideways at a person's eye. This 
is the cornea, " like a corn," for it stands out from the 
eye proper. It is formed of four dense, thick layers of 
elastic tissues supplied with minute nerves and is ex- 
ceedingly painful when touched, as you find when any- 
thing gets into your eye. This, called the pupil of the 
eye, is as clear and transparent as the finest crystal, so 
the light can pass through it. According to the laws of 
light, when passing at an angle from a rarer to a denser 
medium, the beam of light is turned out of its straight 
path. The cornea being a part of a little globe, when 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE IRIS. 475 

the light strikes it, except in the center, it is bent so as 
to pass through the round hole in the iris, and bent again 
when it passes into the clear crystal water filling the) 
chamber between the cornea and the crystalline lens 
behind it, and still again by the lens. 

When we take a photograph a diaphragm with a hole 
in it cuts off all the irregular beams of light except those 
which pass through the middle of the lens. The eye 
has a most wonderfully constructed diaphragm called the 
iris, " a rainbow," colored in different tints. 

Animals have eyes and irises according to their way 
of living. Apes and monkeys have an iris round like 
man, and a highly complex system of veins, arteries, lens 
and retina. The hyena's iris is round like that of the 
dog, the bear's is oval like the woodchuck and raccoon, 
related to him. The opening through the horse's eye is 
a wide slit. Animals exposed to enemies, as the rabbit, 
hare, squirrel, etc., can see all around. The eye of the 
horse, camel, antelope, etc., have a black pigment curtain 
within which protects their eyes from the sun, and a 
membrane outside the eye which draws over the ball and 
rubs off any dust. 

The iris of the human eye is a thin, round, colored 
curtain, hanging before the lens within, between it and 
the cornea suspended in the watery humor, having a 
round opening a little towards the nose, the inner bor- 
ders of this opening lying on the lens, its outer edges 
being connected with the cornea. When we take photo- 
graphs wishing to admit more or less light we use dia- 
phragms, different with different sized holes. But the 
iris expands or contracts, with movements beyond our 
will, letting in just the amount of light wanted for 
clearly seeing. Circular muscles, forming a band 1/30 
of an inch wide, close the pupil to the light and radiat- 
ing muscles expand it. 

The color of the eye is behind the iris composed of 
round or many-sided cells filled with coloring matter. 
In albino animals this coloring is absent, in blue eyea 



476 HOW THE LENS IN THE EYE IS MADE. 

the coloring is dark, but being behind the curtain it 
shows blue through the iris, while in brown and black 
eyes the color is in front of the iris. Before birth the 
pupil is closed by a delicate membrane, which divides 
the space in which the iris is into two distinct cham- 
bers, but about the eighth month this begins to disappear 
and only fragments of it remain at birth. 

Right behind the iris is the crystalline lens, its trans- 
parent elastic capsule being surrounded by ciliary pro- 
cesses on its margin, into which it is imbedded like the 
lens of a telescope held by a metal ring round its 
borders. The capsule inclosing the lens is much thicker 
in front than behind. Before birth a branch from the 
central artery of the retina runs forward in the crystal 
water filling the eye from the retina to the lens, through 
which blood is supplied to the growing lens, but this 
disappears before birth when the eye is fully formed. 
The lens with its capsule is formed of clear, transparent, 
many-sided cells, the whole organ being as bright as the 
clearest crystal, when taken out shines like a diamond. 

The lens, a double convex body like the lens of a tele- 
scope or magnifying glass, 1/3 inch in diameter, 1/4 
inch through, is composed of concentric layers or plates ; 
the outer layers being soft and the inner ones harder, 
forming a clear, tough, dense diamond-like mass. The 
layers are of small fibers lying beside each other, look- 
ing like six-sided prisms, or thin sparkling jewels when 
separated, reminding you of the prisms used in a light- 
house to catch the rays of light and send them over the 
surface of the sea. Their edges have processes like teeth 
fitting and dove-tailing into each other uniting one layer 
with its neighbor. They are about 1/5,000 of an inch 
wide, run from the outside ring of the lens towards 
the center, and curving round its edge they end where 
another prism begins, none of them extending to the 
center of the lens. Laying thus united together they 
form three coverings over the whole lens inclosing the 
hard center within. 



A GREAT OPTICIAN MAKING LENSES. 477 

At birth the lens is nearly round, as age advances it 
becomes flatter — on the surface behind more than the 
forward surface, in old age it is still more flattened, and 
slightly opaque which is the cause of partial blindness. 
The lens gathers the rays of light on the retina within, 
as age advances it changes its shape and people become 
long sighted and have to use glasses to correct this de- 
fect. When the eyes are much used to see things near-by, 
or overstrained, a rush of blood makes them larger, 
developing each part of the structure, as the hands of a 
workman grow large. The lens becomes rounder, con- 
centrates the light too much, and the person becomes 
near-sighted and uses glasses to correct the defect. 

Thus in each eye of man, and animal of the higher 
species, a living lens grows according to every law of 
light. Do we stop to think what learning and art are 
required to make a lens. Alvan Clark of Cambridge, 
Massachusetts, spent four years grinding the great glass 
of a telescope. He rejected 30 glasses because of flaws 
and waves in the materials. Go to a factory where opti- 
cal instruments are made, see how they work accord- 
ing to mathematics and the laws of light and you 
will be astonished. Yet day by day come into the 
world men and animals, each with two eyes with lenses 
alive, formed of blood, made according to every law of 
mechanics and of optics. Yet no one thinks of that 
Mechanic, that Optician, that Chemist, that Artist, that 
Workman, that Mind infinite, who makes the human soul 
and living principles which build these eyes as lenses, 
microscopes, telescopes and astounding optical instru- 
ments, because they are so common. 

Look inside the tube of telescope, microscope or opti- 
cal instrument, and you will see the whole interior cov- 
ered with black to absorb the rays of light, which would 
be reflected and confuse the image. Look inside the eye 
and you will see its interior covered with an intensely 
black pigment placed there for the same reason. Only 
the light passing in straight rays through the lens, there- 



478 THE WONDEKS OF THE LENSES OF THE EYES. 

fore, falls on the retina and there paints images. Did 
not the One who makes eyes know this must be done to 
see clear, bright images? 

The eye is the only instrument which can be used as 
a telescope to see at a distance, and as a microscope to 
see small objects near-by. The lenses of onr instru- 
ments are of hard glass, while the lens of the eye is 
formed of living tissues more or less soft. That its 
shape may be changed it is provided with muscles which 
instinctively change its form when we see far or near, 
while other muscles accommodate it to the rays of light 
coming into the eye from a near-by object, or at different 
angles. 

By accident it was discovered that light passing 
through a glass ground as a lens is bent out of its 
straight course, and telescopes, microscopes and all kinds 
of optical instruments were invented. But if men had 
understood the eye better, they could have made these 
instruments ages ago. To make the lens of an instru- 
ment the maker must know the laws of light. But here 
is an optical instrument a thousand times more perfect 
than any man makes. Different animals have eyes of 
varied construction. 

Who made these eyes according to the laws of light ? 
When we study the eye and compare it with optical 
instruments man makes, we are forced to the conclu- 
sion that a Mind infinitely wise in the laws of light 
built most wonderful instruments. To think that from 
red blood flowing into the eye before birth all these 
members are constructed, some as transparent as a 
diamond of the clearest water, and far superior to any 
telescope, is surprising. If we take the human eye alone, 
leaving out the thousands of different eyes of animals, 
each species having an eye built best for its purpose 
during life, we would be forced to say an optician of 
infinite wisdom made this eye. Ages before we under- 
stood what light is, its nature or its laws, men had eyes 
built according to these laws. The eye lens alone would 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE RETINA. 479 

prove the existence of an infinite Creator if we had no 
other proof. 

Behind the lens of the eye, the whole interior is filled 
with a clear crystal water, through which the light 
passes now bent out of its course to fall on the retina 
behind. The retina, " a net," covers the interior of the 
eye behind. It is a delicate nervous membrane, a con- 
tinuation of the optic nerve branching from the brain 
to each eye. On its surface the images of objects are 
formed. With a round concave looking-glass with a 
hole in the middle, we light up the interior of the eye 
and through the hole see the retina. It is of a pinkish 
yellow, with a bright yellow spot almost in the center. 
Near one side comes out an artery which branches out 
like the limbs of a leafless tree, and supplies blood to 
the retina. 

The retina lays on the choroid lining, covering 5/6 
of the back part of the eye, having in front the crystal 
water filling the organ within. The retina is soft, more 
or less clear and transparent, having in the center, ex- 
actly opposite the pupil, a round elevated yellow spot 
in which vision is the most perfect, but found only in 
man, fourfooted beasts and some reptiles. About 1/10 
inch from this spot, towards the nose, the optic nerve 
comes through and spreads over the retina, this is the 
only spot in the retina not having the power of seeing. 

With the retina we see ; all the other parts of the eye 
are to bring in the rays of light, and spread them out 
over its surface. It is a most wonderful construction. 
Examined in sections, cut carefully down perpendicu- 
larly to its surface, it is found formed of 10 layers from 
within out as follows: 1, a covering or lining mem- 
brane separating and uniting it with the interior cover- 
ing of the eye ; 2, a fibrous layer of nerve cells ; 3, hol- 
low vessels composed of layers of nerve cells; 4, layers 
like minute grains ; 5, layers having kernels ; 6, granu- 
lar layers ; 7, another layer of grains with kernels ; 
8, a membrane inclosing them; 9, a layer formed of 



480 THE MOST ASTONISHING STRUCTURE IN NATURE. 

rods and cones rising like a thickly sown field of grain, 
each pointing outwards ; 10, a layer of tissues, which we 
see as the yellowish colored retina when we look into 
the eye. 

The inner lining, No. 1, is derived from the support- 
ing framework of the retina. The fibrous layer, No. 
2, is made of the fibers of the optic nerve grouped in 
bundles, which passes through the layers of the retina, 
radiating to all parts of the structure. The vessels of 
No. 3 are hollow-flask-shaped, their rounded inside 
mouths resting on the preceding layer, and sending out, 
each a single process, as a continuation of the nerve, 
into the fibrous layer outside of No. 4, where they 
divide into two pairs — thousands of them cross and re- 
cross like the cords of a net, then pass into and unite 
with layers No. 5 and 6. 

The layer No. 4, called also the inner molecular layer, 
looking like a field of microscopic grains, is a dense net 
of little fibers intermingled with the fine vessels of layer 
No. 3 with which it is believed they communicate, be- 
tween the meshes of the net-like structure are minute 
clear granules like microscopic grains, the nature of 
which is unknown up to the present writing. 

The layers of No. 5 formed of minute kernels, are 
composed of three different formations : a large oval 
body in which two nerve fibers pass outwards and con- 
tinue through the granular layer in which they branch, 
and then unite with the same branches from the two 
branches on either fiber. In the microscope they look 
like minute beads hung in bunches on strings, three in 
a bunch, one a little higher than the other — they hang 
in protoplasm filling the layer. These nerve fibers con- 
tinue out through the different layers of the retina till 
they end in the rods and cones. 

The minute nerves of sight now pass through a thin 
layer of dense fibers, branch from one to another, form- 
ing a fine network, the spaces between them being filled 
with microscopic ganglionic-cells. They^ unite still 



NOBLEST ORGAN IN MAN OR ANIMAL. 481 

farther out again, into nerve-fibers, and expand into the 
rods and cones, which extend through the outer layers 
like hairs on the coat of an animal. The rods are more 
numerous than the cones and are at different levels. 
They are cross-striped, each ending in a single rod. 
The enlarged ends give out minute fibrils. The cones, 
less in number, not striped, are longer than the rods, 
come out farther towards the middle of the eye, and 
end in long round enlargements. From their ends 
branch many small fibrils which enter the colored layer 
covering the retina and which we see when looking into 
the living eye. All these parts of the retina can be seen 
only with the best microscope only after death. We 
cannot see the workings of these different layers of the 
retina in the act of seeing, because we must cut these 
layers apart to examine each one and that destroys the 
sight. 

Here is an organ with which we see appearances of 
material things, through which the surrounding world 
enters into relation with us, through which material 
images or forms of surrounding objects act on the un- 
seen soul. Eye, highest of the senses, is a window 
through which the spirit in man sees the material ob- 
jects through the images they imprint on the retina. 
The material cannot act on the spiritual except through 
the five senses. 

Let us see some details of the eye, that wondrous 
sense of sight. Retinas of animals are of diverse tints. 
In the dark they are one color, which changes in light, 
and each eye and retina are made according to their 
mode of life. In the dark a cat's retina flashes a beauti- 
ful pinkish yellow which vanishes in the light, the hu- 
man retina is a bright yellow, many times we examined 
it with the instrument, but we cannot see the images 
painted on its surface. 

The eye is a dark chamber like a photographic camera, 
the latter is dead, while eye lives ; camera takes a picture 
in a fraction of a second but eye is more rapid, it takes 



482 THE WONDERFUL POWERS OF THE EYE. 

a photo in dark colors, while eye takes in colors of the 
object, focus must be right or the image will be dim, 
but the eye adjusts the focus for near or far objects, 
the picture remains while that in the eye stays only 
while we look, and vanishes in an instant. We use 
diaphragms with different sized holes, but the eye has a 
curtain, the iris, which accommodates itself to the 
amount of light wanted. The eye uses without our 
knowledge every law of optical instrument, devices we 
do not know, and is a thousand times more perfect than 
the camera. 

Light falling on objects divides — some rays are ab- 
sorbed, other rays of different colors are reflected to the 
eye, the object is colored according to the colored rays 
thrown back. These light rays pass through the clear 
cornea or pupil of the eye, which bends them together, 
through the lens which bends them more, both when 
entering and leaving, fall on the retina behind where 
they gather in a bundle and paint pictures of objects 
in their natural colors. We cannot see what takes place 
in the 10 layers forming the human retina, to take them 
out and put them under the microscope would destroy 
sight, but we have partly succeeded with animal eyes. 

Vibrations of air cause sound, vocal organs enable 
us to talk, we feel beats of great organ pipes, music's 
varied tones and harmonic beauties, but vibrations of 
ether trembling 450 millions of millions of beats a 
second cause red light, beating faster up to 750 millions 
of millions a second cause orange, yellow, green, blue, 
purple and violet tints, which united make white light, 
spectroscope separates into these colors. 

What must be soul power of seeing, which builds an 
organ to perceive waves of luminous ether waving with 
this enormous rapidity, that sees stars with light which 
left them 1,800 years ago, that with these waves paints 
images of objects on the retina, that forms a landscape 
in its natural colors, that blots it out in an instant and 
forms another the next moment, that not once but all 






THE WONDERFUL WAY WE SEE THINGS. 483 

our lives these paintings come and go with the rapidity 
of lightning. 

What time and care artists spend carving images, 
painting pictures only in their outlines, so crude when 
closely seen. Who is this Artist-Painter, this Photo- 
grapher in colors, who made this astounding instrument 
in man and beast, who made not one but countless mil- 
lions of eyes, who made not directly eyes, but the living 
powers which build them? With a blindness astonish- 
ing we say Nature, a pagan name for God with wisdom 
infinite. 

We have given the eye as a mechanical instrument, 
but it is more, for within it astounding chemical changes 
go on. For its 10 wonderful layers of the retina, its 
networks and rods and cones and microscopic construc- 
tions the light sets moving, trembling and waving from 
450 to over 750 millions of millions of beats a second. 
Protoplasm, foundations of living organisms in life 
processes form ferments, chemical changes in the retina, 
unions and disunions are built and torn asunder without 
themselves being affected as described by Waller and 
Allichin in their studies of animal eyes. 

Their experiments show the 10 layers of the retina, 
under the influence of light, give out colored ferments, 
corresponding to the colors of the obiect, proteids, pep- 
tones, chemical changes, unions and divisions, which 
special rods and cones take up, comprise these colors, 
the ferments change by light action and act on the dif- 
ferent layers of the retina. Thus microscopic, rods, 
cones, nets and organs wave with swiftness of lightning 
and form images colored exactly like the object, and the 
nerves ending in the retina convey the impressions of 
sight to the brain. 

What therefore must be the spirit of man which 
builds such an organ as the eye? How wonderful are 
the living principles of beasts of untold and uncounted 
species, which make their eyes! But what will we say 
of God who created the life principles which construct 



484: THE WONDERS OF THE EYE. 

such instruments according to laws of light, mechanics, 
chemistry, optics and every science? The human eye 
alone, carefully studied as an optical instrument, would 
prove God. But what will we say of insect eyes with 
hundreds of lenses, of fish eyes made to see in water, 
or of the countless species of beasts, each with eyes ac- 
commodated to their lives ! 

We marvel at great telescope weighing tons, costing 
half a million, we look with wonder at our microscopes 
revealing a world beyond our sight, we hold in honor 
men who invented and improved the spectroscope, we 
hand down in history those who searched out the mys- 
teries of matter changing in chemistry, we are interested 
in optical instruments, we glory in the progress of 
science in our age, but we seldom think that in our head 
are two living instruments, which grew without our 
knowledge, which unite all the principles of these in- 
struments and live the life of the spirit within us ! 

Eye of man and beast is at the same time a telescope, 
microscope, spectroscope, chemical laboratory, photo- 
graphic camera, sculptor of images, painter of pictures 
in natural colors, an artist painting pictures which live 
for a moment and then vanish, a civil engineer which 
measures distances without instruments, an engraver in 
lines— all arts of mankind combined could not bring 
forth such perfect forms as the images in your eye 
through which you see. Where is the man who will 
or can say no Supreme-Scientific-Artist made man and 
beast with such surprising organs as eyes? 



CHAPTER XXIV.— WHAT IS THE HUMAN SOUL? WHAT 
IS REASON? 

Three centuries and a half ago, in the name of relig- 
ion began unbelief, in the name of liberty free thought, 
in the name of history slander, in the name of science 
a false knowledge of nature, and since these principles 
have been poisoning the mind of mankind. 

To-day small-brained, half-educated professors sit in 
schools, colleges, universities, teaching free thought 
with boundless licence to thousands of untrained, 
easily impressed students, who drink as Gospel truths 
half-baked, ill- digested, dangerous, destructive, infidel 
opinions they take into the world as guiding principles 
of their lives. Little is the show of common sense, or 
depth, or learning, or logic these pin-headed teachers 
and students, leading society, show us in their surface 
scratchings. 

The sweep of the spirits of darkness is now over the 
world misleading the innocent, the upright, the woman, 
the child, the people. In France infidel floods stopped 
not till the land was red with blood of her noblest 
sons and fairest daughters, and it looks as though the 
nations were plunging into anarchy, the human race 
into utter ruin. 

After graduation, boy philosophers, rotten before 
ripe, youths leaving school with a smattering of learn- 
ing, who skimmed the surface, newspaper educated, 
strut in mannish pride flinging flippant free -thought, 
infidel principles, while the mob mocks the creeds that 
held the world in balance for 2,000 years and civilized 
the nations. Protestant preachers see their con- 

485 



486 HOW FEW ARE WELL EDUCATED. 

gregations each year getting smaller while the earth 
reeks with infidelity. 

A thousand fools prate about science who never 
tasted the deep springs of knowledge, who could not 
point out Sirius from Arcturus ; who could not say how 
many bones and muscles are in their bodies, who could 
not tell us why it rains ; who could not give even the 
names of the grasses under their feet. They flit from 
one subject to another, seem educated to the crowd, 
while denying the existence of soul, the future life, 
and even God Himself. Pride in the mind, weakness 
in the will, darkness in the intellect make them try to 
imitate the Nevvtons, Thompsons, Aquinases, Aristotles 
and the Platos, who penetrated deep in nature, who 
enlightened the world with their learning, whose 
studies led them into the beautiful light, where reason 
and revelation, upheld by natural religion, clasp hands 
over the beautiful figure of faith in God and in the 
life beyond. 

This spirit of doubt rising from the abyss with a 
shallow probe inspires to only scratch the surface and 
is blind to the wonders of the universe. Darkened by 
sin, possessed of this spirit, ' ' small men ' ' , ignorant 
and prejudiced, draw near eternal truths of God and 
nature with hate and defiance, looking for a law to 
salve their sins and free their lusts. Brutalized by 
passion, physical liberty becomes the mob to burn and 
kill, free thought spreads till wild isms rise to strike 
down our noble presidents, assassinate rulers, rob the 
rich, endanger society, and would if they could drive 
the nations into anarchy. 

For 2,000 years the heathens raged against the Eock 
of Ages, saying she was weakening and would die ; 
but she will live to see the death of every error. 
Herod killed her innocents, Pilate crucified her Foun- 
der, Rome martyred her millions, Yoltaire and Paine 
drenched her with infidel ink, they pointed scorn and 
sarcasm at her but every attack fell harmless from the 
armory of eternal truth with which the God-Man has 



BLASTING AT THE ROCK OF AGES. 487 

clothed her. Infidel hosts shouting science assail her, 
yet from each attack she conies forth beaming with 
the brilliancy of the animating Spirit in her. 

Though modern schoolboy scholars smite her granite 
sides, though spades of ignoramuses have dug at her 
foundations, though falsehood shafts have tried to 
pierce her adamantine walls, though thousand cymbals 
of unbelievers beat the air, though, million mocking 
sophistries assail her teachings, still she stands, Bride 
of Him her Founder, blessing and uplifting the nations. 
From the day the Son of God, Jehovah Elohim, who 
became man, called to our father : " Adam, where art 
thou ? ' ' she triumphed ever over error and will till 
the end of days. 

Plato and Aristotle, the great of Greece and Eome, 
Augustine and the Fathers, Aquinas and the School- 
men, the most learned of our race mapped out in most 
minute details the nature and acts of mind and free 
will, filled libraries with their works, written in lan- 
guages little minds of our day cannot read. Hence the 
latter know almost nothing of the human soul, its twelve 
powers. Starting from matter seen by the senses, 
following false principles, under the name of learning 
and science they flood the world with misleading 
works. 

Let us give a rapid glance at man's mind and free 
will, regretting much to our sorroAV space will not 
allow us to treat fully these angelic powers of the 
human soul. We will not give wild theories found in 
so many modern works under the name of philosophy 
" knowledge of the soul ", but what everyday exper- 
ience tells us, and in the simplest English words. 

Every one having the use of reason during waking 
hours thinks, talks to himself, brings forth thoughts, 
ideas. It seems as though another person were within 
us, with whom we in silence speak. We compare 
thoughts, reason out our ideas and actions before we 
bring: them forth into words and deeds. "What is this 
power within us ? the human mind or intellect. 



488 HOW A CHILD BEGINS TO LEARN. 

Every person feels he is free to do, or not to do, to 
choose the good or bad, to do an honest or dishonest 
action, to sin or not, to resist temptation or to yield to 
it, to give way to his passions, or to smother and con- 
trol them, to rise to the highest virtues or to sink to 
lowest sensuality. What is this power of the human 
soul which rules the whole man ? The free will, the 
seat of liberty for which millions died in battle to 
uphold. 

These two soul powers, reason and free will, working 
together form mind, the noblest power of mankind. 
All other powers of the soul, the human body, the 
whole man, are like the foundations on which mind 
rests. When we do not know why a person does a 
thing or acts in a way mysterious to us, we ask 
' < What are your reasons? ' ' Every human being has a 
reason for his acts ; if he cannot reason he acts like a 
beast, follows his passions and instincts like people in 
asylums wherein the totally insane are guarded. The 
greatest calamity which could fall on a human being is 
to lose his reason. 

The ancients called man a " reasoning animal," 
science shows they were right. ]STo animal can reason, 
grasp truth universal. We think before we speak, 
words express our thoughts. What are these thoughts ? 
how does a man learn to use his mind and think rightly ? 
At school the teacher shows the child the letters of the 
alphabet, saying that is pronounced A, that B, etc. 
Soon the child learns that figure is called A, that B, 
etc., wherever found. He finds letters grouped 
together asDOG represent his dog, in a few weeks 
he understands groups of letters making words mean 
names and things. He passes into the first primer, 
later he reads simple stories, advances into higher 
readers, begins arithmetic, goes through the common 
branches up into the high school, goes through col- 
lege, then graduates at a university, and thus becomes 
a learned man. 

Take your dog, horse, or an ape, show him these 



THE MIND AND HOW IT WORKS. 489 

letters, teach him to read, tell him these letters and 
words are images of thoughts, signs of things. You 
inay spend your whole life but you will never give a 
beast the slightest hint of what these signs mean. 
Animals have not therefore the power of the child, 
they have no mind or any power above the imagina- 
tion, which sees only the material images. When 
animals can be taught to read, we will believe evolution 
true. 

No beast can be taught to read, speak or think like 
the child. They learn their names, a few tricks, are 
trained to work, etc. , that is all, while the child may 
become as learned as Newton or Augustine. Without 
an exception every member of our race can, if in his 
right mind, become educated, but no animal can. 

It is certain, therefore, man has a power or faculty 
no beast has. We call that the mind, from the Sanscrit 
' ' to measure, ' ' for mind measures or grasps the uni- 
verse, intellect from the Latin intus legere, "to read 
within, ' ' mind is the understanding, the eye of the soul, 
light of man, etc. , etc. Every language ever spoken 
has a name for mind, for all men know they have this 
power, which distinguishes them from beasts, and they 
know by instinct and experience no animal has a mind. 

How does the mind work ? As you run your eyes 
along these pages, thoughts or ideas rise in your mind 
exactly like the ideas in the writer's mind. Instantly 
thoughts flash forth in your mind so you can read 
perhaps a book of hundreds of pages, skim rapidly over 
the newspaper to see the world's history of a day, get 
absorbed in a fascinating story, or listen to the spoken 
words of those you love, or of friends you meet. To 
think, to bring forth thoughts, is man's highest power, 
purest joy, for it is the function of his angelic faculty. 
To be deprived of it, to shut a person in solitary con- 
finement with nothing to read or do would drive him 
to insanity. 

When you read, or listen to a conversation, you pay 
no attention to the words, you think only of thoughts 



490 HOW THE MIND SEIZES UNIVERSAL TRUTH. 

or ideas. But if letters or words be misplaced, then 
only you see them, while if the words and sentences 
are all right you will not notice them. Why is this ? 
The object of the mind is truth, but there are two 
kinds of truths — particular, or single truth, and universal 
or general truths. What is truth ? That which is. 
Whatever exists is true, what is not is false. Each 
object, each material thing in the universe is one single 
truth, for it exists. Your senses, being partly material 
and partly spiritual, because senses are organs animated 
by soul powers — the five senses see only one singular 
object. Ears hear spoken and eye sees written or 
printed words through particular images. They send 
these images of objects in to the interior common sense, 
a receptacle of the soul, where they are compared, they 
are then handed to the imagination, which brings forth 
images of material things perceived by the senses. The 
mind grasps them and makes them universal or general 
thoughts or ideas. 

This process is as rapid as lightning. Senses, 
common interior sense, and imagination use the brain 
and nervous system during this process, these nerves 
and brain, partly material and partly spiritual, being 
vivified by soul powers, they tire after long use. Eor 
this reason you cannot talk, read, or think all the time, 
you must have a change. When tired or sick, when 
nerves are injured, when brain is hurt or diseased, 
images are with difficulty offered the mind. When 
nervous system rests in sleep you do not think. When 
imagination works you dream. When nerves are 
greatly injured you are insensible, in a state of coma; — 
senseless. 

The mind does not use any material organ in thinking 
except as given above, for it is purely spiritual. How 
false then it is to say such a man is < ' brainy, ' ' as 
though the brain, a simple emulsion of fats, etc., 
thinks, as though purely spiritual thoughts could be 
produced from matter. Eor the universal cannot come 
from the single material objects in nature. 



WHAT IS THE DIRECT OBJECT OF THE MIND. 491 

What are these general or universal truths, the 
direct object of the mind ? Letters in books, news- 
papers, etc. , are signs which give rise to the same ideas 
in the mind of every one who sees them when he knows 
how to read. Spoken words of any language, have 
meanings, are signs of thoughts. When you hear or 
read these words, the thoughts or ideas these words 
represent rise instantly in your mind. Each sentence 
composed of words and letters represent a universal 
thought or idea. Look at this white paper and think 
of all white things which now or ever existed, and you 
have the universal thought of all whiteness that ever 
was or will be in the world. Every figure of arith- 
metic, of mathematics, is a universal truth, for you 
can apply figures to an infinite number of things. 

Universal truths are therefore boundless, infinite in 
extent, relate in past, present and future to all 
properties of matter. Thus from the one individual 
tiling, mind grasps the universal thought. What a 
difference there is between the one object of the senses 
and mathematical truths, changeless and eternal. Yet. 
to this height, human soul extends above the animal, 
there is no half way. The moment the child makes 
an act of reason, it sees being in general, the uni- 
versal, boundless in extent. How could such a power 
as mind gradually develop from an animal with 
only senses and imagination acting in and amid 
particular single objects and images ? Mind grasps 
first universal truths during this life, images of 
that real eternal Universal we call God, whom it will 
grasp, seize, as infinite Truth after death. 

Material things in nature are objects seen by the five 
senses which are like windows through which the soul 
receives knowledge of natural material truths. The 
object of the mind therefore is spiritual truth, which 
is of two kinds — particular truths and universal truths. 
The first or direct thing mind seizes is universal truth, 
the secondary object of the mind is particular truth. 
Hearing a person talking, or while reading, you grasp 



492 WHAT IS THE SECOND OBJECT OE THE MIND? 

the meanings of the speaker or what the writer says, 
because words spoken or written cause his thoughts to 
rise in your mind. If you don't understand him you 
say " What ? " if letters or words are broken or mis- 
placed, you stop and examine the letters. First mind 
grasps the universal ideas or thoughts in the words, 
that is, universal ideas, but must stop to see particular 
ideas. Thus you grasp universal truths first, and later 
particular truths. 

The particular truth is any single, individual thing in 
nature perceived by the senses, an image in the imagina- 
tion, or one truth in the mind. Touching, tasting, 
smelling, hearing and seeing gives us a knowledge of 
material things here, now before us. The senses are 
organs of the body formed of matter, being animated 
with the soul's powers giving them its life, they cannot 
therefore rise above the material of which they are 
made. The senses see only material things of the 
universe, beyond, into the spirit realms they cannot 
perceive ; thus far and no farther, the five senses of man 
and animal penetrate. Through these five senses man 
gets a knowledge of the single, individual objects in 
nature, which act on our senses, which must be present, 
here and now to make impressions. 

How does the mind arrive at truth? You see a 
tree, and instantly think of every tree, of trees in 
general ; you see a man and think of every man, of 
mankind in general. The next instant you think of 
this tree, of this particular man. So it is with all 
things seen by the senses : first in the mind rises 
universal truth, then particular truth. If the acts of 
the mind were reversed, so you saw single, particular 
truth, first, you could not learn to speak or read, and 
be little higher than an animal. But because you 
grasp universal thoughts first, you read rapidly with- 
out thinking of the letters and words representing the 
writer's thoughts. 

Aristotle first explored the movements of the mind 
he calls the syllogism " to think with." The most 



HOW THE MIND ACTS IN SEASONING. 493 

simple syllogism is formed of three propositions or 
sentences, the two first being named the premises, and 
the last the conclusion. The first proposition the mind 
lays down is a universal thought, the second is a par- 
ticular thought. We compare one proposition with 
the other and draw from them a conclusion. For 
example : Man is a reasoning being. John is a man. 
Therefore John is a reasoning being. To take what 
does not belong to me is stealing. This watch belongs 
to another man. Therefore to take this watch is steal- 
ing. To kill a person is murder. That moving object 
is a person not a bear, therefore to shoot him is mur- 
der. But you may say to yourself, that is surely a 
bear. You shoot and kill a man ; that is not murder 
but an error of judgment. 

In thinking we bring forth, nearly all the time, 
universal thoughts, compare other universal or par- 
ticular or single thoughts with them and draw con- 
clusions. We pass from the known to unknown, or 
less known, in this way we learn. The laws of God 
written in our reason, the laws of the country where 
we live, the revealed laws of God are to us universal 
thoughts : our acts are single particular truths, which 
we compare with the universal laws, which if we break 
is sin. You say I cannot do that because it is against 
the law. The mind in this way guiding man is called 
conscience, to act against this private monitor ever 
within and directing us, is sinful. To subdue our 
passions — the beast within us, and get in the habit of 
controlling them is virtue. To always give way to 
them is to acquire vices. 

We said the first and direct object of the mind is 
universal truth. The mind has the power of grasping 
all truths brought before it, but we never learn all we 
would like to know. The love of truth is never satis- 
fied in this world. There must be another life where 
this desire is satisfied, there must be some Universal 
Truth which will fill the human mind, or nature has 
given us a wish, a longing, never to find its object, 



494: HOW TRUTHS ARE BORN IN THE MIND. 

never to be satisfied. The very nature of man's mind, 
then, demands another life, the real Universal, of which 
universals in us are images. Who is that but God whose 
existence naturally follows from the conduct of the 
mind? 

We will not go over the description Aristotle gives, 
which all ages since his day admit, regarding the dif- 
ferent ways the mind acts, and the laws of syllogisms. 
We express our thoughts by words. Names stand for 
persons, places, things ; verbs show their actions ; 
adjectives show qualities, adverbs show the qualities of 
verbs, pronouns stand for nouns and little words make 
up the minor parts of speech — under, behind all being 
the verb to be, expressing the very existence of all 
beings, or truths which are or can be. 

Kound names cluster other thoughts relating to what 
they represent. When you hear or read these names, 
other thoughts, children of your mind, rise. One 
thought gives rise to one or more thoughts connected 
with the chief thought roused by the name of the per- 
son, place, or thing. You hear Jerusalem, " Jehovah 
will give peace," and you think of Jesus, " Jehovah 
saves," the One foretold to give peace to mankind. 
You think of the great Temple like a vast slaughter- 
house where for 1,100 years every ceremony pointed 
to that place outside the walls where He died, with 
the mocking multitude sitting on the slopes of the hills 
like a great amphitheatre with Calvary as its stage. 
The word Washington brings up in your mind that 
great and good man, who gained for us our liberties, 
and was the chief personage in founding the greatest 
nation to be, from which the world learns liberty, 
progress, invention and prosperity. Lincoln recalls the 
horrors of the war between the States, the freeing of the 
slaves. New York, built on the greatest harbor, was 
pushed ahead by the canal running through a rift in 
the Alleghanies through which the commerce of the 
West reaches tidewater, and you say here is the founda- 
tion of the greatest city mankind ever built. So from 



THE SODL MUST BE A SPIRITUAL BEING. 495 

one thought rise others, this we call the association of 
ideas. 

We find pleasure in the exercise of our organs, in 
the activity of our members, these are soon satiated, 
but the mind never. Mind itself, bringing forth uni- 
versal and particular truths, never tires, never wearies 
seizing truth, for it will rest at last in the eternal 
Truth of God the Son, Truth of the Deity whose truth 
we see but dimly now in nature. 

Man acting as a reasonable being, acts from a motive, 
there is a reason he does things, he acts according to 
the light he has. When we do not understand his 
motive we say " I cannot see why he acted so." The 
pleasures of thinking, of reading, of talking with others 
are the purest, highest joys of life. Thus between 
man and man are chats, conversation, business, con- 
tracts. 

If ignoramuses, half educated scientists, little-minded 
infidels, had studied the conduct of the mind, had 
risen above what the senses see, had even thought a 
little on their own mind, how the child learns to read, 
spell, cipher, and gets an education, they would not 
have fallen into evolution, spent years of fruitless 
search after the ' ' missing link ' ' between man and 
monkey, or filled libraries with half-baked scientific 
publications. 

Take any truth, or thought, you cannot divide it, 
cannot change it ; it has no parts — no length, breadth, 
thickness, weight or material quality. The mind seizes 
truth universal relating to and extending to all things, 
like mathematics. This mind, has no shape, form, 
size or material quality, must live as long as these 
truths it seizes will last. Things cease to be by decay, 
change — part separating from part. But the mind, 
having no parts to dissolve, cannot be destroyed. The 
soul is as deathless as the truths it brings forth. There 
is no way of getting away from this reasoning. 

While beasts live in the present, knowing nothing of 
the future, with memories embracing a few incidents 



496 WHY THE SOUL CAN NEVER DIE. 

of their lives, the human soul sees past, present, future, 
grasps the infinite, eternal truths of law, literature, 
thoughts of millions of writers who have passed away, 
it too must live as long as the truths it brings forth, 
for you cannot put a barrel of water in a quart measure. 
Soul could not see the universal, unchanging, immortal, 
truths of mathematics, virtues, etc., unless it also were 
immortal. 

Man with mind grasps all truths presented to him, 
weighs and maps out millions of suns, figures out their 
movements, foretells eclipses of sun and moons to the 
second, advances with giant strides to conquer nature, 
— will you say he will not last longer than orbs of sky, 
longer than nature he has subdued, longer than giant 
tree living thousands of years, longer than mount and 
plain he pierced and planted ? Such a thought is absurd. 

Some truths are so clear they want no proof. Axioms 
of mathematics and self-evident truths appeal to us so 
clearly no proofs can make them plainer, — the whole 
is larger than any of its parts, the mutiplication table 
are to us true, require no arguments to show their truth. 
So in human lives are truths as certain. One of these 
is the thought we will live after death, that beyond the 
grave is another life. All men of every place, nation, 
tribe and tongue, of every age, believed this. Hence 
human bodies are not thrown aside as those of beasts, 
but laid away to rest with funeral ceremonies. All 
men are by nature religious, no people, no matter how 
low and degraded, ever lived without religion. Man's 
deepest instincts move him to worship something in 
hope of rewards after death. If there be no future 
life, man's nature has deceived him, his whole life and 
all his thoughts regarding life after death are delusion. 
If God has deceived us in this, the most important 
sentiment of human life, if death ends all, human 
reason, human life, all we hold most dear are dreams. 

Men are good or bad according to their lives. Some 
are innocent, others wicked ; men are honest and men 
are cheats, and some are murderers ; all laws of human 



AN ENDLESS PENITENTIAET. 497 

society cannot punish all the wicked, make some men 
upright and honest. Prisons are filled with criminals 
while many murderers escape capture or conviction. If 
there be no future life, if death is the end of man, the 
good cannot be rewarded, the bad punished, the world 
would be filled with injustice, for rewards and punish- 
ments cannot be meted out according to justice, and 
justice would cease. Those who escape the punish- 
ments of this life, and those who live honestly would 
receive the same rewards. Another life is required 
therefore to right wrongs, and reward virtues. Can 
we suppose God would leave things this way ? Has 
He not the justice at least of men ? Has He not every 
perfection, all perfections in creatures are in Him, and 
He must be infinitely just. A thousand reasons might 
be given to prove life beyond the grave but we have 
not space. 

Every one knows he is free to act, to walk, to talk, 
to come, to go, to control his passions, to practise 
virtue, to do as he pleases. Some men have been so 
unwise as to deny man's freedom, but no one listens to 
them. There is in us a power which controls our acts, 
not all of them, but the reasonable faculties of man. 
Plant functions, foundations of life, are beyond our 
control. Our animal functions are more or less under 
our control. This power within us is called the free 
will. No power on earth can manage it, even God 
himself respects it, for it belongs to the human soul. It 
is the seat of human freedom. A man's physical 
freedom may be taken away, he may be imprisoned, 
but his will may remain stubborn, for no human power 
can control his interior acts of reason. 

In some of his acts man is like an animal, but when 
he acts as a reasoning man his acts are called human — 
the acts of a reasoning being. Por such acts he is 
responsible, for then he acts because of a motive, a 
reason he has in his mind. He can do good or bad, 
act in a good or in a bad way. Acts are good, bad or 
indifferent. He is capable of highest virtue or of lowest 



498 UNIVERSAL HAPPINESS OBJECT OF THE WILL 

degradation, can practise the highest virtues or commit 
the greatest crimes. 

What is the will ? As Augustine says, " every act 
of the will is to seek happiness." The will is blind 
as all powers of the body are blind. A man is 
enlightened by his sight, so the will is enlightened 
by the mind. Man acts and moves directed by his 
sight, so he acts for an end as the mind points it out 
to him. Eeason and will in acting form mind; these 
two powers are man's rational faculties. Everything a 
man does is for his pleasure — his happiness. ISTo one 
seeks pain, misery, wretchedness for themselves; his 
final object or goal is pleasure. If he willingly suffers 
pain, it is that he may arrive at last at ease and pleas- 
ure. The object of the eye is what appears to the 
sight, the object of reason is truth, the object of the 
will is the good, the possession of the good is happiness. 
To be deceived by the eye is a misfortune, to be de- 
ceived in the reason is error, to be deceived in the will 
or do wrong, is wickedness. * 

Nothing in this world will satisfy the will. All the 
pleasures of life, all the wealth man can accumulate, 
all the world, if he could gain it, will not fill or satisfy 
man's everlasting wish for pleasure, for something 
higher, better. This is the deepest instinct of our 
nature. What is this overpowering desire in us for 
joy, pleasure and happiness never satiated in this life? 
Has nature deceived us in giving us a longing for what 
we never find here ? This joy which will fill and 
complete our natural desire of pleasure is the last, full, 
measureless good, which will fill the created will, not 
in this life, but in the other. Who can this be but 
God? 

The object of the mind is truth. What is education 
but the grasp of truth ? Who ever exhausted learning? 
Who lived who could not learn something more even 
in his last hour ? As mind can never be filled with all 
learning in this life, there must be some truth beyond 
and after this life, which will fill up the never-satisfied 



NATURE OF MIND DEMANDS ANOTHER LIFE. 490 

longing for more knowledge. Who is that but God, 
for where is all learning to be found but in Him ? 
From the very nature of reason, from the acts of human 
reason and free will, now proofs of God's existence, or 
man's very reason is a delusion, a mockery, a living 
deception, and a series of lies. 

Truth eternal, infinite, everlasting, ever filling mind 
of creature is the Wisdom, the Learning, the Knowl- 
edge, the Logos, the Word of God in whom angel in- 
telligence and mind of men after death find all educa- 
tion, all truth, all knowledge their minds desire or long 
for in this life, where truths they see while living here 
are but images of the divine Son, mind will see after 
death. 

Good, eternal, infinite, everlasting, ever filling will 
of created mind is the Goodness, the Happiness, the 
Joy, the pleasure unthinkable of God, in whom angel 
will and will of man after death find all pleasure, hap- 
piness, joy they desired and longed for and looked for 
in this life; all pleasures they find in this world are 
but images weak and feeble of the Holy Spirit in whom 
human will rests after death. 

To seek truth, to find pleasure, is the very nature of 
our reason : to be deceived, to suffer is against our nature. 
We cannot love a lie, a deception for itself, we cannot 
enjoy sufferings, pains for themselves. Therefore we 
are not free regarding infinite Truth and happiness. 
The last end of human souls is truth and happiness, 
not error and misery. But this world is filled with 
both. There must be another life where these two 
boundless longings, welling up from the very nature 
of our reason, will be filled and satisfied; there must 
be something to fill up these two boundless aspirations 
of our reason. That something must be boundless, 
measureless, to satisfy, fill up, these two — mind and 
will, the aspirations and desires of the countless men who 
lived and died. What can that be but God himself? 
There is no getting away from this reasoning. Reason 
will rest in God the Son, the Wisdom of the Father; 



500 HOW MAN SENDS HIMSELF TO HELL. 

Will will be filled with the Holy Spirit, the Good and 
the Love of Father and of Son. 

We are not free therefore regarding truth, not free 
regarding happiness. But we have freedom regarding 
different means of getting them. Some seek truth in 
one way, others in another way. Some find their 
happiness and joy in one thing, others in different 
ways. Each is free to select the means. Thus, men 
differ, life has all kinds of trades, occupations, Prov- 
idence gives different vocations. Many are rich, but 
more are poor. Active must be the one who is happy. 
How Avretched is the one who has nothing to do, no 
object in life? The happiest is the one who has work, 
not too hard, from which he gets enough to live. 
Often the most unhappy are the rich with nothing to 
do. 

Man was made a temple in whom God dwelled, no 
temple ever made by man equals in beauty and per- 
fection the human body and soul — a living, beauteous 
structure, animated by a deathless soul, built for the 
Almighty in which to dwell in closest union. Man 
sinned and drove out the Eternal by a wicked act of 
his will, for God cannot reside with sin — a disorder in 
nature. Freely and with deliberation was that sin 
committed. Man can generate only according to his 
race and every child is born of fallen race of his first 
parents, is a member of a fallen nature. Every child 
must be restored to the form of the original man God 
made, become again a temple of the Deity like Adam 
in his innocence. Then God in the soul gives faith, a 
light of the soul is given him which no human being 
can get no matter what he does. All the learning, all 
the virtues he may practise, all the good he may do 
are natural, and will not give him that eye of the soul, 
by which without an effort he looks beyond the veil of 
nature into the wonders of the realms of spirits. The 
child, the ignorant, the lowest may have faith, while 
the most learned, the greatest of earth, may be without 
it — without God in the mind and will. 



IN EVERY POWER WE BEAR MARKS OF A FALL. 50l 

In our story of the universe, we saw the awful, un- 
thinkable might, wisdom and power of the Eternal ; we 
but faintly know what it is to break His laws, to freely 
and deliberately sin against Him. Each of us bears the 
marks of an ancient upheaval, a wound in our very 
nature. There is a continual conflict between our 
animal passions and our reason, beginning as soon as 
the child gets the light of reason, and lasting till 
death It is easier to do bad than good. What is 
that but the remains of a fall? All nature works in 
harmony, according to the designs of the Creator. 

Man alone is an exception, he alone in this world 
has freedom to do right or wrong. How did this come? 
Bevelation, the traditions of all nations tell us man- 
kind fell from a state of innocence. Our first father 
and mother, acting for us, representing us, as our 
President represents us signing a law, sinned, rose up 
against God, drove God out of their nature, and since 
every human being is born in that fallen state, for man 
must generate his race as it is and it is fallen. Before 
this, angels, with full knowledge and free deliberation, 
sinned and fell, there is no way to redeem them, they 
would rather suffer than serve, they hate their Creator 
and live forever fixed in stubbornness — totally de- 
praved. 

But man was deceived, more sinned against than 
sinning ; he is not totally depraved, but his nature is 
injured — that is, he is born deprived of the indwelling 
of God as in a temple filling and completing all within, 
making all powers and passions subject to reason and free 
will. Man is born without God within him, and 
every power and faculty bears signs of that great 
wound. 

Man is injured in his mind. For how otherwise ex- 
plain the mind so darkened. We spend our lives think- 
ing of worldly things, hardly ever raising our thoughts 
to God, who alone is worthy of our study. What is the 
universe compared to Him who made it? What an 
effort it is to rise to his wonders! As the first object 



502 HOW A MAN CAN GET TO HEAVEN. 

of our minds is universal truths, so the first thought 
should be of Him, the real, eternal Universal, of whom 
the universal in our mind is a weak image. 

We are injured in our will. For the whole wish of 
man is wealth, money-getting, pleasures of the senses, 
whereas if we were upright, as God made our race in the 
beginning, we would be always seeking God the Good, 
the Holy Spirit who alone can satisfy our longings for 
the good, the possession of which gives real happiness. 
All our days we are worldly in all our ways. Even on 
our deathbed, our thoughts are of things of this life. 
Is not this a mark of a fall from a higher state? 

A good person who received God as we described, 
who lives a good life, in him God dwells as in a temple 
not built by hands. He avoids sin or gets sins re- 
moved and then again he is in union with his 
Creator. All his life, he loves God, God loves 
him, for God is love and love is union. During 
his life his soul is united with the Eternal. He is 
about to die, his soul passes away beyond the veil. In 
life he was united with God, when his soul passes away 
that union continues, for he did nothing to break the 
nuptials of his soul with God. His mind rests in union 
with God the Son, the Universal Eternal, the Word 
and Wisdom of the Father. He spends eternity in 
learning new truths from the eternal Learning of God. 
He passes from one truth to another according to what 
he merited while living. His will while living was 
united with the Good of God, the Holy Spirit, the 
possession of the good causes happiness, and according 
to his merits he will be filled with the happiness of the 
Holy Spirit. That soul is in heaven, which is not a 
place but a state of union with God. 

When a person dies, his body and all its organs die, 
the world vanishes, he sees no more material things. 
His mind and will alone live, for they are the deathless 
powers of the soul. Heaven is the union of these two 
powers with God in this life, reason and will, forever 
geek Him even with their natural instincts. In heaven 



HOW A MAN SENDS HIMSELF TO HELL. 503 

therefore there is nothing material, neither past nor 
future, but the ever-present of God. Man then is in 
the state we call eternity, without beginning or end. 
There the soul begins its true life, of which this life is 
not even like to the tick of a clock compared to it in 
length. 

Suppose the person sins, he drives out God from his 
soul. He lives amid the joys and pleasures of this life, 
where the order and regularity of nature reign. He 
dies. He had not God united to his soul, and when he 
passes away he has not God whom the very nature of 
his reason in its very foundation demands. He has 
not truth or happiness to satisfy the longings of his 
very reason. He seeks truth and finds error, harmony 
and finds discord, beauty and sees deformity. "The 
truths of science, of nature for him have passed forever. 
His mind has nothing on which to dwell, he cannot 
reason rightly, his state is indescribable. He looks for 
love and finds hate, his will seeks the light of the mind 
and finds spiritual darkness, rest and there is no rest, 
happiness and all is misery, all his will wants by its 
very nature is wanting. You cannot imagine the state 
of that soul away from the God it was made to rest in. 
You cannot describe the sorrow of a soul made for God, 
its last end, and deprived forever of His sight and of 
His love. 

Mental sorrow is more acute, more piercing than any 
bodily pain, because the spiritual is more perfect than 
the material. Think of the sorrow caused by the loss 
of wife, husband, children or friends, magnify that 
millions and billions and you will not realize what the 
sorrow of the soul is for having lost God in eternity, 
for which the soul was created. Then you may have 
a faint idea of the awful indescribable sorrows caused by 
the knowledge the soul has, knowing it lost God 
forever and forever, for which the human soul was 
made. This is the pain of hell. The sufferings then 
of hell no human being can conceive their intensity, 
how great they are. They will last forever, for hate 



504 SUFFERINGS OF HELL UNEQUAL BUT ENDLESS. 

reigns every moment, the soul hates God whom it 
blames for such sufferings, which are in proportion to 
the sins the person committed — that is, one who stole 
$10,000 will be punished ten times as much as the one 
who took $1,000. 

Sin is a rebellion, an uprising against God, an in- 
finite Being, and justice requires an infinite punishment. 
But the soul, being a finite being, cannot bear infinite 
pains — that is, sufferings infinite in intensity. Eternal 
justice requires that the sufferings be infinite in some 
way, and therefore the pains are infinite in length — that 
is, have no end. Out of hell there is no redemption. 
There is no merit or reward there. It is God's ever- 
lasting penitentiary, where souls are condemned for 
great crimes while the wicked exist, as men are sen- 
tenced to prison for life. 

But you ask is it not awful for God to condemn souls 
to everlasting punishment ? God never sent a soul or 
demon to hell. They knowingly and willingly send 
themselves there when they commit the sins. 

Will death end all for man ? Will his aspirations 
for endless, infinite life, truth and love be never satis- 
fied ? Our very reason wants, demands, a life lasting 
ever and forever. 

Reason whispers to the soul 

Of a life that is to be, 
As travelers hear the billows roll 

Before they see the sea. 

In this world our life begins, 

That will last forever. 
Here our merits heaven wins, 

Will that end ? No, never. "" , 

(The Question.) 

Will my tiny spark of being 

Wholly vanish in star deeps and heights ? 

Must my days be dark by reason, 

O heavens, of your boundless nights ? 

O rush of suns and roll of systems 
And your fiery clash of meteorites. 



HOW CAN GOD BE THREE) IN ONE ? 505 

(The Reply.) 

Human spirit, nearing death's dark portal, 

At the limit of thy human state. 
Fear not thou the hidden purpose 

Of God, alone who is great, 
Nor the myriads of orbs his shadows, 

Nor He, the Opener of the gate. 

Tennyson.n 

Gentle reader, o'er creation we have been, and a 
little we have seen, of the radiant orbs of sky, rolling 
round those regions high. Now at last, through all 
we've passed, through this little world of ours, through 
the plants and flowers, we saw something of the beast, 
from the greatest to the least, then how you were 
formed, with what beauties }^ou're adorned, then we 
came to mind and will, finding greater wonders still. 

Now let us see, to some the greatest Mystery, how 
One can be Three, how can God in that way be, Three 
in One, Father, Spirit and Son. What a wonder ! it 
seems to tear asunder, reason's every law, a thing like 
that we never saw. We cannot completely sound its 
deep, but only take a little peep, for our mind finite 
cannot grasp the infinite. All things He made are 
but a shadow and a shade, rising up from grade to 
grade, created image of His winders boundless, for He 
could not make any creature, that would not have some 
feature, that would not typify His endless glories in 
the sky. 

Having measureless, infinite perfections in Himself, 
God could not give a creature any quality or perfection 
He has not boundless in Himself, otherwise that crea- 
ture would in this way be more perfect than the Eternal. 
Therefore as we see God during this life, not directly 
as he is, face to face, but only indirectly through the- 
wonders of the universe, we must take creatures, see 
their perfections, and from them rise to the eternal 
uncreated perfections of their Creator. 

Let us look at the original human family, image of 
God. Jehovah Elohim, says the original Hebrew, the 
Word who was God says John, made a man of earth 3 



506 HOW EACH FAMILY REPRESENTS THE TRINITY. 

breathed into him a living soul. This Divine Being, 
known now as Christ, made this first man, called him 
Adam, ' < Mankind. ' ' He himself was to take this very 
human nature, uniting in Him all Elohim had made 
before, to which the Spirit gave movement, for He, 
the Eternal Son, was to raise all the universe in that 
little universe, man, up to the throne of the Eternal. 

Look now at this new wonder, man in all his in- 
nocence, a living temple in which God dwelled in most 
close companionship, worshipping his Creator in knowl- 
edge and love. But man or angel in thinking, bringing 
forth thoughts, could r ot fully image the Divine Family 
of the Trinity, for human thought is not a person, but 
an image in the mind. To bring forth another person, 
another man must take part. For God the Father alone 
cannot bring forth the Holy Spirit, his Son must be 
likewise a principle from which that Spirit is breathed. 

From Adam's side, in sleep to smother pain, comes 
forth another man, his helpmate in generating, bone 
of his bone and flesh of his flesh, of his own human 
substance. So stands beside him a woman, u The 
womb-man." There are two men, both equally mem- 
bers of the human race ; he a male, she a female man. 
The moment ho saw her he loved her, when she gazed 
on him she loved him. Their mutual love was image 
of the love of Father and of Son for each other. This 
first marriage was the type, the image as it were not 
only of the eternal ineffable union of the two Persons 
of God, but of every wedding since, or that will be. 

Let us take the first family, the original type and 
image of every family. Father, mother, child, form 
an earthly trinity. Adam was made, not born, he 
imaged the Father in heaven coming from no one. 
Eve made out of Adam typified the Almighty Son 
the Eternal Father generates. The first child born 
of Adam and Eve represented the Holy Spirit pro- 
ceeding from both Father and Son. 

Adam, Eve, and their first child were three separate 
persons, the two last descended from Adam. They 



THREE PERSONS OP AN ETERNAL RACE. 507 

were three in one, that is three persons in one human 
nature. They belonged to and were individuals of 
the one human race. In place of Adam put the Father 
in heaven, in place of Eve imagine the Son who is born 
of the Father, in place of the child born of Adam and 
Eve think of the Holy Spirit, and in place of mankind 
put the eternal Holy Spirit, and in place of mankind 
put the eternal Race or the divine nature of God. In 
Adam's family were three separate individuals — father, 
mother, child, belonging to the one human race. This 
human race was not anything separate from these three 
human persons. In God there are three individuals — 
Eather, Son and Holy Ghost, they belong to that Eace 
we call God. This infinite Race is not anything sepa- 
rate from these three divine Persons. How could 
Adam, his wife and child be three in one ? because they 
belonged to the one humanity. How can Eather, Son 
and Spirit be Three in One ? because they are three In- 
dividuals or Persons belonging to that One Godhead 
or Race or infinite species. As mankind was then 
formed of three persons, having one common human 
nature, so God is of three Persons having a common 
divine Nature. But the three Persons in God have the 
selfsame Nature, one, undivided and indivisible; and 
so the three Persons are but one God. On the other 
hand the three persons of the human race have only the 
same kind of nature ; each has his own nature separate 
from the others ; and so three persons of the human race 
are three men. 

To make it clearer let us see what is a person, and 
what a race. The Century Dictionary says " A person 
is a self-conscious being," Boethius and Aquinas say, 
" A person is an individual substance of a reasoning 
nature," substance here meaning an individual or any- 
thing which exists alone of itself, as a mineral, a tree, 
a man or an angel, not color movement, etc., which 
exist in something colored or moved. 

An individual is a thing existing alone, as a stone, 



508 what is a Person ? what a race ? 

orb, plant or animal. But an individual of a reason- 
able nature, race or species is called a person. A 
person must be an individual of a reasoning nature 
separate from all others, have mind and free will, be 
master of his acts and responsible for them. Thus 
each man, woman, child or angel is a person, the three 
first being individuals of the human race while each 
angel is a race or species in himself, for angels do not 
marry and do not give birth to other persons like them- 
selves. 

A race or species in creatures is the nature or plan 
according to which the individuals are made and each 
individual follows its species. Thus, plants, animals, 
and man bring forth individuals similar to the parents, 
never a mixture of other species ; man and woman, 
being two men, bring forth a man, never an animal. 
God, who gives creatures the power of generating 
others like themselves, must also bring forth, or he 
would not have the power of generating, and in that 
He would be less perfect than plants, animals and man 
— would not be infinitely perfect, would not be God. 
Each member of the human race is a person, with 
generative powers, God must be also a Person with 
generative power, or man would have what God has 
not, the perfection of generating, bringing forth others 
like Himself. In the powerful reasoning of Aquinas : 

1 ' A being that is the first mover in the universe, 
the first efficient cause in the series of causes, the one 
necessary self- existence required to explain the transit 
of other beings from the state of possibility to that of 
action, the one infinitely perfect being, according to 
which we measure truth, goodness and beauty of all 
created things, finally a being that is the governor and 
preserver of the universe, its lawmaker and guide, 
directing all secondary causes to their end, must be a 
self-conscious being, an individual substance having 
mind and free will, master of his own acts, responsible 
for them and consequently a Person." 



WHY THERE CAN BE BUT ONE GOD. 509 

To hold the universe is God, that He is the force in 
matter, that the world and the Deity are one and 
identical, is the same as to say rocks, planets, suns, 
light, heat and electricity are gods to whom we pray. 
But this is the pantheism of Haeckel, Spencer, Spinoza, 
of materialists, and of some scientists of our day ; none 
but a fool would hold such a doctrine. 

God is One Infinity, in that all agree, for there 
could not be two Infinites, for both together would be 
greater than one Infinite alone ; that which is Infinite 
cannot be greater. God is not a simple unity, without 
contents, or internal relations, for then He would be a 
mere abstraction of our mind, an emptiness. He is 
not an idea, or thought in human minds, but a real 
living Being, who was before He made any angel or 
man to reason and know Him. He is One, not with 
the idea that there are others like Him, but he is One 
Godhead alone, and there are no other gods but He. 
He is the Universal, all-embracing, all-sufiicing 
Unity, in " Whom all things live, and move, and have 
their being, ' ' and not in any pantheistic sense, which 
is only an abstraction of the mind. He is a real, com- 
plete, independent, self-sufficing, infinite, living Being, 
including in Himself the principles of unity and mul- 
tiplicity, of identity and diversity. For these are seen 
in nature, image of God, and how could they be here 
unless they were in Him, the great original Archetype 
of creation? If God were simply One, a Unity with- 
out internal relations, He would be without life. He 
is not a dead but an ever-living God. 

How beautiful is the world ! What is beauty but 
the result of order, and how can order be without 
many things? Where order reigns it rules two or more 
things, for beauty is in the relations of these to one 
another. Beauty in creation must have had infinite 
Beauty it images. But that original Beauty is not in 
nature, for it was before anything was made ; the 
beauty of the universe is but a faint, shadowy copy of 
God's infinite loveliness. The origin of beauty must 



510 

be sought in the interior life of the Eternal — that is, 
in the relations which exist in His own Being. 

What is the true ? The truths of mathematics 
appeal to minds, figures rule the heavens and the earth, 
all nature is founded on and regulated by figures. 
Who gave nature these laws ? we find them here, and 
there, and everywhere. They came from a mind, for 
ouly minds can see and learn figures, they must have 
existence before creation in the Mind of an infinitely 
wise Being. 

What is the good ? 

All things are good, though we don't always see 
their use, for everything made was good. We have 
an idea of goodness, we talk of good and bad people, 
we rise to the universal idea or thought of goodness. 
Where was this goodness but in God before the world 
was? 

What are Beauty, Truth and Goodness in God but 
three different qualities. They are not simple ab- 
stract ideas in Him, for then they would be imper- 
fect, and nothing imperfect can he in the Deity. They 
must have infinite perfection in every way, and per- 
sonality. Beauty must be a Person, that is the Father, 
Truth must be a Person, that is the Son, Goodness 
must be a Person, that is the Holy Spirit. 

Organisms on earth live, life is better than death ; a 
living being is higher than a dead one and man is more 
perfect than stick or stone. God must live, or He 
would be deprived of the perfection of life. Life is 
movement from within, therefore God moves within 
Himself. What lives is active, and God's life consists 
in His activity moving within Himself. To say God 
lives is to say He acts, for when a thing cannot act 
it is dead. Life is movement, and movement must 
have a term, end, or goal to which the living being 
aspires. We move to produce something. Every 
living being moves itself. 

The first man and wife received the blessing of wed- 
lock, " increase and multiply," and since that men 



HOW THE FATHER GENERATES THE SON. 511 

and women marry, live in mutual love and friendship, 
find the purest joys of life in their own companionship, 
pleasure, peace and rest with each other, and bring 
forth another person like themselves. But man and 
wife are not ever bringing forth children, carnal gener- 
ation is in this way imperfect. Man has a mind 
always active, while awake he is always thinking, 
bringing forth thoughts, ideas — children of his mind ; 
every moment he conceives and brings forth his men- 
tal children — thoughts from his intellect, and this is 
the greatest joy of life. To conceive and give birth to 
good thoughts, to read, converse, teach, write is a 
pure spiritual pleasure, for this is an act of man's pure 
spiritual mind, highest power of human soul. 

God, ever living, ever thinking, now and forever, 
brings forth his Thought, his Son. Forever He 
embraces his Son with Love overpowering, infinite, 
unmeasured by created minds. By and with this one 
act of the divine nature, the Father gives birth to his 
eternal Thought in thinking. Ever and forever he 
loves His Thought, Child eternal of His mind, His 
mental Word, Image of all that is in Him. He loves 
His Son with a Love all-embracing, finding a pleasure 
unsoundable, unmeasurable and infinite in generating 
his Son, as you find pleasure pure and spiritual in 
bringing forth your thoughts. This Love mutual, of 
Father for His Son, and of Son for His Father, is equal 
to them in all ways, and therefore must be a Person 
divine, like unto the two other Persons of the Deity. 
Here is the interior, eternal life of God. 

Fertility is the law of life — every living being has the 
power of fertility, of fecundity, by which it brings 
forth another being like itself. Plants, animals and 
men generate other members of their species, the 
young of their race. God lives, Lie must have fertility 
and fecundity, or He is less perfect than creatures to 
which he gave fertility and fecundity. A man be- 
comes a father, a woman becomes a mother. Do you 
think Fatherhood is not in God? He would not have 



512 INFINITE FATHERHOOD AND MOTHERHOOD. 

Fatherhood if tie were only one Person, and would 
have given creatures what He did not have. Because 
the Almighty lives, is a divine Person, he must have 
the power of generating other divine Persons. Father- 
hood and motherhood bring forth children of the same 
race or species as the parents, therefore from the ful- 
ness of His fecundity and Fatherhood God must gen- 
erate divine Persons like unto and equal to himself or 
be imperfect beside creatures with fatherhood and 
motherhood. 

Man, made of body and soul, has a double power of 
generation, or a double fatherhood, by one he gener- 
ates a child, by the other he conceives and brings forth 
thoughts, ideas, children of his mind. Moved by 
instinct, love and heavenly blessings, man and wife 
bring forth children. So in that high, pure, eternal 
Trinity, that Family of heaven, of which every human 
family is an image, the Father, thinking, brings forth 
the Son, and in the eternal pure, spiritual, everlasting 
embrace of Father and Son, of which generation in 
creatures is but a weak image, from Father and Son is 
now and forever proceeding their mutual Love, the Holy 
Spirit. Fatherhood, motherhood, conception of 
thoughts, the birth of creatures, typify and shadow 
forth the high, pure, spiritual, eternal relations of these 
Three Persons of the Trinity. 

How could the Almighty give His creatures any power 
or perfection he has not? Plants, animals, man, bring 
forth others like themselves because they live. To 
give rise to seeds and plants, to give birth to little 
animals, to bring forth their children, to bring forth 
thoughts, are the highest acts of life, and this too 
must be in God; that is the perfection of fecundity. 
But living organisms brinjg forth according to their 
species, their races; the young grow to be like their 
parents. God must bring forth other Individuals like 
Himself, infinite,- eternal Persons similar to Him, 



THE INFINITE ACTS OF GOD WITHIN HIMSELF. 513 

These Individuals, Son and Holy Spirit, He brings 
forth must be like unto Him, Persons of his own 
eternal Race or Godhead, like unto the Father equally 
God. 

We cannot think of God except as living, to live is 
to act ; we cannot think of Him without acting, for not 
to act is to be a potential, slumbering Deity; this- 
would be only a dream of materialists, who believe 
in nothing but matter, who suppose the Eternal 
only a force in nature like weight, light, electricity, 
etc. 

God's life is not made up of a series of acts one after 
the other, like movements of created living beings, but 
his whole life is but one infinite and eternal act, which 
is to live in eternity, in the ever-present NOW, for 
with God there is no past or future. Time is the 
measure of the duration of material things, mind lives 
in the present. Before the creation there was no time, 
only the ever-present of God. Let us now approach 
this infinite, unfathomable life of God within Himself. 
We will not be able to fully understand it, for no 
created mind can entirely grasp the Eternal. 

Man's soul made to the image and likeness of God 
offers us the highest symbol of His life and acts. 
Man's reason is made up of two pure spiritual powers 
— reason and free will. God not only lives and acts, but 
also thinks, wills, and knows. He is infinitely self-con- 
scious. Mind when active must express itself, at least 
within itself, and when the mind is of an infinite race, 
or species, it must have an infinite expression. The 
divine will must seek the Good, and that Good must 
be also infinite, for the good in creatures never satisfies 
human desire, and surely could not satisfy God's desire 
of eternal goodness. God who thinks brings forth a 
Thought, that Thought is the Son, and the Good coming 
forth from His will is the Holy Spirit. 

In man or angel, intellect and will are powers of a 



514 HOW GOD MUST BEING FORTH A PERSON. 

creature and they are limited, in God intellect and will 
are infinite and boundless. 

God lives infinite intelligent life, His intellect ever 
acts, He never ceases to think, in Him intellect and will 
are boundless, infinite. In the logical order, intellect of 
angel and of man acts before the will, for it is the light 
«bf the will. We look and see the truth and love it 
because of its beauty and perfection. But this is not 
so in God, with whom all is the present — there is not 
a priority of time with Him, for time is the measure of 
the duration of matter, and in God there is nothing 
material — still the logical order is followed in God's 
mode of thinking. 

With His own infinite mind God sees Himself, thinks 
of Himself ; to think is to bring forth a thought or idea. 
Thinking man and angel bring forth one thought after 
another, for they are created thinking beings, their 
thoughts are not persons. But in thinking God brings 
forth, not many thoughts one after another, but one 
Thought, an Image of Himself; that must be a perfect 
Image equal to Him in all degrees. When we think 
of a man, the image in our mind is not a man v does 
not live like a man, is not a human person. 

In God can be no weak imperfect Image, it must have 
every perfection of the thinking Father, or a weak 
imperfect Thought would be in the Deity. The 
Father's Thought must be just like the Father, living 
within Him, and be a divine Person like him. That 
Thought is the eternal Son, Child of his mind conceived 
of his mind, brought forth from his mind. The Father, 
seeing His eternal Image of Him, in eternity born of 
Him, a perfect Person like unto him, with all the in- 
finite perfections of the Godhead, the Father loves his 
Son, as we love our thoughts the children of our mind. 
The Son, also a Person, sees the Father with all the 
perfections of the Deity, and loves Him as the human 
child loves his father. Thus from both Father's and 



WHY GOD THINKS WITH ONLY ONE THOUGHT. 515 

Son's will comes forth Love eternal. This love must 
be in all ways and degrees like and equal to both Father 
and Son, and therefore is a divine Person. • This Love 
is the Holy Spirit, eternal Love of God proceeding, 
breathed forth, from God the Father and God the Son 
now, always and forever. 

Generation, therefore, in living organism is an image 
of the generation eternal in God. Will He be de- 
prived of generating powers he gave His creatures ? 
" Shall not I that make others to bring forth children, 
myself bring forth, saith the Lord, shall I, that give 
generation to others, be barren? said the Lord thy 
God." Isaias lxvi. 9. 

Perhaps it is not yet clear, for here we are in the 
fathomless deeps of the Deity in his interior life. Let 
us go over it again. God being a living, intelligent 
Being, His first act is to think, yet His thought is not 
multiplex; He has not many thoughts coming one 
after the other like ours, born to die, and dying to be 
born again. With limited weak minds we must bring 
forth one thought after another, they perish, because 
other thoughts press in after them, and we cannot 
give attention to them all at once; the second dethrones 
the first, a third thought takes the place of the second, 
thus we pass from one to other thoughts, mingling and 
comparing them. 

But, God's intellect whose act is eternal, whose 
capacity is boundless, begets, conceives, brings forth 
all at once, a Thought equal to itself, vast as itself, 
imaging itself, full, complete, eternal, infinite as itself, 
and there is no need of a second thought, for the first 
has exhausted all that can be known in the abyss 
of the Infinite. That one absolute Thought first- 
born, and last born, and only born, forever remains 
in his presence, in his mind, a full, exact, complete 
Image of the Godhead, " Being the Splendor of his 
glory, and the Figure of his substance," Heb. i. 3. 



516 how god's thought was bevealed. 

When we think, we bring forth mental words, 
thoughts, thus we talk to ourselves. We express 
them by words of different languages, but the thoughts 
remain within our mind. In God the Thought forever 
remains with His mind. Child of His mind, conceived, 
born, brought forth in his mind, the Thought, Idea 
must be God's equal in all ways and degrees, and must 
be a Person like to the Father. This is what John 
means when he says : u In the beginning was the Word, 
and the Word was with God, and the Word was God." 
John, i. 1. 

This is the mental word of God, as our thought is 
the mental word of our mind. But this Word of God 
differs from ours in this, that with this one Word, one 
Thought, God says all that can be said in one utter- 
ance, spoken eternally, from everlasting, without ever 
repeating. We speak in many words, we think many 
thoughts, while God speaks all with one Word — that 
is His Son. In the original Hebrew of the Old 
Testament, the Word of God, the eternal Son, is first 
called Jehovah : " He who is," in other places he is 
named Memra, " Wisdom," the Greeks called the Son 
Logos, " Learning," Sophia, " Wisdom." The Word 
Divine of the Eternal Mind is the Learning, Knowl- 
edge of God. The wisdom, learning, laws, mathe- 
matics of the universe are expressions of the Son, 
this wondrous Wisdom creating, forming, law-giving 
and governing nature. " All things were made by him, 
and without him was nothing made that was made." 
John i. 3. 

In man his thought differs from his mind, ever exists 
within his mind, can never be separated from his mind, 
so God's Thought, the Son, remains within His eternal 
mind which gives It birth. Thought in human mind 
is spiritual like unto the spirit mind which conceives 
and brings it forth, so the Word of God the Son must 



TfiE COMPANIONSHIP OF INFINITE PERSONS. 517 

be of the same nature as the Father's mind which 
generates Him. Though the Son is a Person different 
from the Father, He must be of the same divine nature 
as the Father, as child is of the same human nature 
with the parents. Therefore the Creed of Nice defined 
the Son as being ' ' consubstantial with the Father, ' ' 
that is, of the same divine nature, of the same eternal 
Race with the Father, for beings must bring forth others 
of their nature, or race. Our thought, or idea, is dif- 
ferent from our mind, is the image of what we think, 
but it is not a person. But this imperfection is not in 
God, for in His mind, the Thought is a Person, infinite, 
like the thinking Father, who brings Him forth as an 
Individual or Member belonging to the nature or 
eternal Race we call the Deity. 

Here is a Person called the Father, who thinking 
brings forth another Person, the Son, a Subsistence, a 
Person never separating from the divine essence, never 
leaving the circle of the Divine Life, never quitting the 
bosom of the Father, remaining within the Deity's 
mind, finding there all infinite that can be, wanting 
nothing to finish, perfect, the Godlike way of living. 

Unity and plurality never finish themselves in us ; 
we cannot live in ourselves alone and for ourselves 
alone ; we must seek happiness, find board and clothes, 
go out, seek friends, look for aids to others, learn from 
them, enjoy the pleasures of conversation, find new 
ideas. But it is not so in God, for unity and plurality, 
like all in Him, are perfect. He passes eternity within 
himself, in intimate life conversation of divine Person 
with divine Person. The unborn Father lives with 
only-begotten Son, both enjoying the Fellowship of 
the Holy Spirit coming from both Father and Son, the 
other divine Person with them. God thinks, and in 
that Thought he sees Himself as in another, who is so 
near and so dear to Him as to be only one divine nature 
or species with Him, as the earthly father sees his son 
like unto him, of the same species or human nature 
with him. Seeing his own Thought, his own Image 



t>18 LOVE IN GOD AND IN CREATURES. 

generated from his Fatherhood, He bears the relation- 
ship with him of Sonship ; here is the original Father- 
hood, and the original Sonship of all creatures which 
bring forth. To Him he says in the ecstasy of first 
delight of Fatherhood : ' c Thou art my Son, to-day I 
have begotten thee," Psalm ii. 7. To-day is that 
endless eternity, without beginning or end, belonging 
only to the Eternal. 

But the generation of the Son is not the only act of 
the Deity, nor does it fill up the whole of that one 
great infinite act of God's internal and eternal life. 
Bringing forth the Son does not end, or finish His per- 
fection of fecundity, or the happiness of God no more 
than in man. We not only think, but we love, and so 
it is in God. Thought in us is a look of the soul, an 
act of the mind bringing forth truth, an image in the 
mind. But we not only think, we also love. That 
love is an act of the will, which draws us out of our- 
selves with a movement towards whom we love, tending 
to unite us to our love, to what we love, and it to us. 
As mind must have an image, love must have an object 
or a person to love. We cannot always love ourself, 
that is selfishness. 

Whatever lives loves its own kind. Animals gather 
together, for every beast loves its kind. Man loves the 
members of his race. What an awful thing it is for a 
human being to have no one to love him, or no one 
whom he can love, to be absolutely alone in the world. 
We cannot enjoy a thing unless those we love enjoy it 
with us. It is man's nature to love a woman, and 
woman's to love a man. This deep instinct of nature 
ends in marriage, than which nothing in nature is more 
beautiful, which is completed, finished in the children 
they bring forth. The wife and husband with their 
children overflow with love for each other. 

What is love ? Poets, novelists fill books with 
stories of love, love moves the universe, is an instinct 
directing creatures toward their end. Beauty, truth, 
harmony, perfection, inspire love; the deformed, the 



519 

false, the defective repel love. Will creatures love and 
God not love ? God is love infinite, for He is Beauty, 
Truth, Perfection boundless and infinite. Let us see 
how God loves. 

The Eternal Father thinking brings forth His 
Thought — His Son, the perfect Image of His own 
boundless Beauty, Truth, Perfection, and loves Him 
with a boundless all-absorbing love. The Son, a Person 
equal to his Father, looks on his Father and loves Him 
with an equal boundless infinite perfect love. Take 
the love of husband for his wife, of wife for husband, 
imagine, if you can, two persons of an infinite race, 
that they are almighty — like to the Persons of God, 
magnify that love to be infinite, boundless, eternal 
in all ways, and you may have a faint idea of the 
eternal love of Father for Son, and of Son for Father. 
Down come now to earth, see the family; result and 
product of the love of man and wife is the child born 
of both. 

Now rise again to the Eternal Persons, the Family of 
the Trinity. The Father, seeing Beauty, eternal and 
exhaustless in the perfections of his Son, loves him with 
a love unthinkable to mankind, and with an equal af- 
fection the Son must love his Father. Here is a mystery 
)of unity in plurality. From each of these two Persons 
comes one and the same love, proceeding, not from 
their one mind common to them both, but from their 
common will, another act of the divine intelligence, for 
while the thought, truth, is in created mind, love or af- 
fection is in the will of all intelligent beings God made. 
Thus God thinks with his own being and not by mind 
or will powers. 

This love of Father for His Son, of Son for His 
Father, cannot be a simple sentiment, an act of the will 
imperfect as in creatures, but must be infinite in every 
degree, equal to these two Persons from whom it pro- 
ceeds, must be a Person like them or the imperfect 
would be in the very nature of the Eternal. Love 



520 GOD THINKS AND WISHES WITH HIS NATUBE. 

then is the Holy Spirit, breathed from both the other 
Persons. The Holy Ghost, Love of Father and of Son, 
mutual to both, having the same divine nature as both, 
coming from the will of both from the thinking which is 
an act of the Divine mind, and from the Thought or Son, 
without which mind could not think, the object that will 
loves, remains one with both Thought and Mind in the 
self -same life-circle of the ever-living Godhead. 

We said the eternal Thought, or Idea called the Son, 
rises in the thinking mind of the Almighty, that the 
Holy Spirit is breathed from the will of God, but this 
is not exactly so. In men and angels, mind and will 
are powers, or faculties of the soul, and animals and 
plants act through their organs animated by faculties 
of their living principles. 

But God has no mind or will different from His own 
divine nature, or essence of the Godhead. For if He 
had mind and will, faculties differing from His essence, 
powers through which He acts, mind and will would be 
two other Persons, and there would be five Persons in 
God, for everything in Him must be infinitely perfect 
and have personality. Mind and will in God are God 
Himself thinking and willing. Mind and will making 
intellectual nature in man and angel, created intelli- 
gence, image, in a feeble way, the uncreated intelligence 
of God. The Almighty acts with infinite perfection, 
thinking and loving by His very nature itself, not by 
any power of mind and will. His intelligence, learning, 
logic, knowledge, wisdom, eternal principles, mathe- 
matics, pure truths — all the Eternal grasps are in His 
Son, Archetype, original Source of all that is true. His 
love, affection, dearest thought, fondness, aspirations, 
delectations are ever in his Holy Spirit, ever and for- 
ever proceeding from Him and from His Son. 

Thus in the ever NOW, not in past or future, from 
that look of love between both, from that co-eternal 
regard of both, interchanged between Father and Son, 
is born a third Term of relationship, a third Person, 



WHY GOD MUST BE THEEE IN ONE. 521 

like both, coming forth from both, different and distinct 
from both, having His origin in both, product of the 
Deity of both, originating in the Godhead of both, 
equal to them both, infinite as both, belonging to the 
same Eternal Eace or species as both. 

Thus as the Son comes from the Father thinking, 
the Holy Spirit comes from both Father and Son 
in loving each other. In God, mind, intellect, is filled, 
satisfied by the generation of His infinite Thought the 
Son, so his boundless love, affection, fondness for His 
Son, and of His Son for His Father, in His will are 
filled, finished, satiated in His Love the Holy Ghost, 
measureless, pauseless movement of divine Love. Thus 
ever and forever God's hidden life fills, finishes, com- 
pletes the eternal cycle of His life's activity. His 
Fatherhood, His Sonship, His Spiration filling the 
fecundity of His eternal, ceaseless, unbeginning and 
unending life. There is original infinite life, with 
generation eternal, the heavenly Family, .the Arche- 
type, the Eternal to which every creature is made as a 
weak, imperfect image. 

Only three Individuals or Persons belong to that 
infinite eternal Eace, God. He is three Persons in one 
infinite species or Eace. To be only one Person, he 
would have to be deprived of thinking and of loving. 
To think He must bring forth His Son, to love He 
must bring forth his Spirit. God therefore could not be 
other than Three in One. or he would cease to be. 



THE END. 



INDEX. 



Adam, origin of word, 416 ; traditions 
of, 416 ; imaged the Eternal Father, 
507. 

Adam's apple, 370. 

Adirondacks, origin of name, 288; 
oldest rocks, 288 ; lakes of, 363. 

Air, origin of, 291 ; composition of, 
258, 318, 321 ; peculiar properties of, 
285, 322 ; height of, 311 ; under pres- 
sure, 322. 

Alchemists, first chemists, 257. 

Alcohol, evil effects of, 216. 

Aldebaran, weight of a man on, 317. 

Algol, shape of, 68 ; why it changes 
its light, 77-78 ; diameter of, 80 ; 
diameter of its companion, 80. 

Alimentary canal, 452. 

Allantois, meaning of name, 427 ; the 
human, 427. 

Alps, mountains of moon, 198. 

Aluminum, most valuable metal, 305. 

Ammonia, 321 ; how formed, 347. 

Andes. Mts., 314 ; anvil of, for, 467. 

Angels, 415 ; fall of, 29a 

Animals, how differ from minerals 
and plants, 332-351 ; wisdom of, 377 ; 
great divisions of, 403, 404 ; cannot 
reason, 488, 489. 

Aorta, artery, 429, 443. 

Aquarium, wonders in, 879. 

Architect of Universe, the Great, 246. 

Arctic Circle, trees of, 304. 

Arcturus, origin of name, 136 ; center 
of the universe, 35, 134; heat it 
sends to earth, 50 ; round which we 
are going, 54, 290 : parallax of, 134 ; 
traditions of, 135 ; position of, 136 ; 
size of, 137; the spectrum of, 138; 
materials of, 138 ; will look as big 
as moon, 141. 

Aristillus, mountain on moon, 200. 

Aristotle, an astronomer, 228 ; ex- 
plored the mind, 492. 

Arteries, beginning of, 428; circula- 
tion of blood in, 445 ; how made, 448. 

Aryan, or Caucasian race, 410. 

Asteroids, number of, 119 ; origin of, 
125 ; place of, 178. 

Astronomy, beginning of, 223 ; mean- 
ing of word, 227 ; among the Greeks, 
228 ; revived in eleventh century, 
229 ; among the Druids, 229. 

Atlantic Ocean, how formed, 186 ; size 
of, 280. 

Atlas Mountains, origin of name, 223. 



Atmosphere, meaning of word, 311. 
Atoms, the theory of, 249-251 ; theory 

of, rejected, 394 ; explanation of, 250. 
Attraction, laws of, 152 ; origin of, 

125. 
Aztecs, origin of name, 410. 



B. 



Babylon, origin of name, 223. 
Backbone, beginning of, 428-435; de- 
velopment of, 429, 430, 435. 
Bacon, Francis, his philosophy, 396. 
Balance of nature, 309-332, 348, 349. 
Bark, structure of, 336. 
Bear, the Great, 135, 136 ; the Little, 

135. 
Beauty, eternal, 509. 
Beehive, 32. 

M Bends, The ", cause of, 323. 
Berenice's Hair, constellation of, 185. 
Binary stars, 67 ; in chemistry, 261. 
Birds, little, why not afraid, 872 ; why 

migrate, 372, 407. 
Blackness of eternal night, 28, 29, 33, 

38, 62. 
"Blizzards", cause of, 327. 
Block and pulley in man, 368. 
Blood, circulation of, 335-369, 442, 444. 
Blue, why sky is, 325. 
Boat, the first, 363; the glass-bottomed, 

381-388. 
Body, a man's, how made, 417, etc. ; 

human, like a machine, 438, etc. ; 

chemical elements in, 438, 439 ; 

machinery of, 440 ; how often 

renewed, 457; three-fourths water, 

283 ; gases in, 439. 
Bones, beginning of, 431 ; how built, 

442. 
Books in nature, 355, 878. 
Bootes, constellation, 89, 136. 
Borsippa, where was Tower of Babel, 

223. 
Botany, meaning of word, 357. 
Boy philosophers, 485. 
Brain, how formed, 430 ; size of, 398 ; 

growth of, 432. 
Brightness and density of stars, 69, 

231. 
Butte, city in crater, 200 



California, origin of name, 814 ; cli- 
mate of, 314, 315. 
Camels, the big, of Arabia, 316. 



523 



524 



INDEX. 



Canopus, 188. 

Capella, 27, 86, 280. 

Carbon in stars, 86, 87 ; in the sun, 
150, 151. 

Carbonic gas, 320-350. 

Casatus, mountain on moon, 199. 

Cassiopia, 27. 

Castor, its mass diameter, revolution 
and companion suns, 81. 

Catalogue of stars, the first, 228. 

Caucasus Mountains on moon, 198. 

Cells, living, 335, 338, 399, 418 ; prove 
evolution false, 399 ; foundations 
of organism, 403 ; how propagated, 
418, 423 ; form whole body, 438. 

Changing suns, 75-79. 

Chasms, the four of nature, 402. 

Chemistry, origin of word, 257 ; ruled 
by figures, 258. 

Cheops, Pyramid of, 224, 225. 

Child, how he learns. 488. 

Chlorine, weight of, 259, 260. 

Chlorophyll, 349, 350. 

Chromosphere of sun, 156. 

Clavius. mountain on moon, 200. 

Climate, former, of Arctic zones, 
306, 307, 

Clock, the universe like a, 277. 

Clocks at national observatory, 18, 
275. 

Clothes, origin of, 376. 

Clouds, how formed, 331. 

Cluster of stars, the central, 35-73. 

" Coal Black Hole," 27. 

Cochlea, wonders of, 469-473 ; struc- 
ture of, 469 ; an astounding musical 
instrument, 470. 

Colorado River, 303 ; canyon, 803. 

Colors, origin of, 269. 

Columbia River, 304. 

Comets, how they appear, 97 ; com- 
position of, 98 ; if one struck the 
earth, 99. 

Cones on moon, 203. 

Conscience, how it works, 493. 

Continents, 186, 187, 279, 287, 289, 290. 

Copernicus, born, 232 ; his studies, 

233 ; father of modern astronomy, 

234 ; his difficulties, 234-237 ; canon 
of the cathedral, 235 ; his book 
revolutionary, 236 ; his character, 
236 ; death, 237. 

Copernicus, a mountain on the moon, 

202. 
Cornea of eye, 474. 
Cornwall, monuments of, 230. 
Corona of sun, 157. 
Corpuscles of the blood, white, 218 ; 

red, 444. 
Crank in the Observatory, 15-20. 
Craters of mountains of moon, 199. 
Creation, proofs of, 46, 47, 48, 107 ; 

the beginning of, 41, 112, 277 ; tablets 

relating to, 114 ; the theory of, 121, 

etc. 
Crimes caused by evolution, 394. 
Crow, a tame, 372. 
Crystals, origin of word, 263 ; laws 

of, 263, 264, 340 ; six kinds of, 263 ; 

in sky, theory of, 223, 231. 



Cup and ball joint, 368. 
Curtius, mountain on moon, 199. 
Cusco, temple at, 227. 

D. 

Dalton's studies in chemistry, 261. 

Darkness at Creation, 112. 

Darwin, Chas., half-educated, 392 ; his 
Origin of Man 393 ; theory, 397, 407. 

Day and night, cause of, 213. 

Days of Creation, 278, 292-295; re- 
mains of, 296. 

Democritus, his theory of atoms, 249. 

Deserts, why they are, 301, 302 ; in- 
fluence of, 313 ; why it don't rain on, 
320. 

Diamond, crystallized carbon, 263, 264; 
why it gleams, 264. 

Diaphragm of eye, 475. 

Diatom shells, 407. 

Digestion, how it takes place, 454. 

Distance of 61 of Swan, 57. 

Doerfel, mountain on moon, 199. 

Dog, the Great, constellation of, 136. 

Druids, their religion, 229, 230. 

Drums of ear, 467, 468; inner ear, 
468 ; first musical instrument, 472. 

Ducks and geese spread seeds, 866. 

" Dumb-bell " form of suns, 67, 69. 

Dust, reasons for, 315, 829 ; where It 
comes from 325, 330. 



E. 



Ear, the beginning of, 468 ; wonderful 
structure of, 466-472 ; of animals, 
466; the external, 467; a piano of 
1000 strings, 470. 

Earth, in middle of universe, 31, 35, 37 ; 
heat of, 50, 281 ; origin of, 116, 125, 
129 ; density of, 185, 281 ; shape and 
diameter of, 279, 281 ; alone has liv- 
ing organisms, 211 ; if of different 
sizes, 221 ; if a flat plain, 286 ; tilted 
over makes seasons, 809 ; heat of in- 
terior of, 318. 

Earthquakes, cause of, 280, 281 ; velo- 
city of disturbance, 281. 

Eclipse, how figured out, 146. 

Eczema, cause of, 359. 

Edison, 253. 

Egg, all with backbone from, 417; 
membranes of the, 419, 427 ; the hu- 
man, 420-423 ; germinal spot in, 420 ; 
sacks of, 426. 

Eggs, why some are large, 426. 

Egypt, temple of, 225; why built that 
way, 225. 

Electric fishes, 388 ; origin of, 273. 

Electricity, nature of, 274 ; laws of, 
152 ; streams of, between stars, 153, 
313 ; velocity of, 274, 275. 

Ellipse, earth follows, 148. 

Ellipses, orbs follow, 138 ; of solar 
system, 139 ; foretold in China, 225. 

Endosmos, 426. 

Epiblast, of human egg, 423, 429, 430. 

Epiglottis, valve, 870. 

Epochs before man, 296, 297, 299. 



ttir.'k 



INDEX. 



525 



Equinoxes, 810. 

Eta of Lion, materials of, 187. 

Ether, theory, of, 245, 251 ; trembling 
of, causes light, 265 ; length of 
wares, 266 ; rapidity of waves, 267. 

Euphrates, meaning of name, 300. 

44 Evening and morning " meaning of, 
293 

Evil/origin of, 415. 

Evolution, false, 298, 398, 408, 412, 414 ; 
beginnings of, 897 ; the theory of, 
391, 395, 398, how it degrades man, 
391 ; its advocates falsify science, 
392; promoters not learned, 392; 
leads to infidelity, 394; why it 
spread ; 395 ; no proof of, 398-412 ; 
a poem on, 412. 

Eye, wonders of the, 267, 368 ; of a fly, 
368 ; beginning of, 427, 473 ; muscles 
of, 474 ; organs of, 474 ; cause of 
color of, 475 : why lined in black, 
478 ; both telescope and microscope, 
478; details of structure, 473-484; 
mechanical and chemical labora- 
tory, 482-484. 



F. 



Face, how wonderfully made, 368. 

Faith, what is, 500. 

Fall of man, 376, 500 ; signs of the, 501, 

502. 
Falling stars, 91-100. 
Family, each an image of Trinity, 506- 

521 ; of Heaven, 512. 
Fatherhood in God, 511, 512, 518. 
Fecundity in God, 511, 513. 
Fertility in God, 511. 
Figures rule Nature, 256. 
Fish, beauties of. 380-388 ; angel, 384. 
Flood, Babylonian tradition of, 223. 
Floods, many, 187, 291, 326. 
Flower, generative organs of plants, 

355. 
Fluids, flow of in body, 446, 447. 
Flutes, 472. 

Fly, eye of, 868 ; species of, 405. 
Food required each day, 456. 
Force, origin of, 119, etc., 123, 250, 

277 ; cannot be destroyed, 122 ; of 

life, 249. 
Forces, natural origin of, 249. 
Forests, influence of on climate, 828 ; 

why cool in, 328 ; of ocean bottom, 

383. 
Free, man not seeking truth and joy, 

499, 500. 
Free-will, the, 488, 497 ; what is the, 

498. 
Fungus, 359. 
Future life, why we believe in, 496, 

497, 499, 504. 



Galaxy. See Milky Way. 

Galileo, 52, 57 ; born, 237 ; his work, 
52, 57 ; inventions, 238, 239 ; difficul- 
ties with the Church 238-242 ; real 



facts of, 248, etc.; discoveries, 241, 
242, etc. 

Gaps, no sudden in Nature, 352. 

Gases, how they act, 256, 260. 

Generation of plants and animals, 355, 
373, 376, 512 ; man, 415, 421. 

Geology, beginnings of, 295. 

Gemination of canals on Mars, 172. 

Glacial periods, cause of, 140. 

Glands in stomach, 453. 

Globe of stars, 32, 33 ; shape of, 84 ; 
the triple concentric, 34. 

Glory, light of, 460. 

God, purest act, 513 ; must be Three 
Persons, 521 ; why we believe in, 20, 
21, 22, 36, 37, 41, 42, 43, 45, 46, 67, 69, 
71, 94, 95, 96, 110, 115, 117, 118, 119, 
120, 125, 132, 143, 146, 154, 158, 163, 185, 
186, 187, 188, 193, 194, 195, 211, 213, 219, 
251, 256, 257, 259, 261, 262, 265, 277, 284, 
285, 286, 305, 310, 311, 313, 319. 333, 342, 
343, 348, 349, 367, 386, 417, 422, 448, 466, 
470, 477, 478, 493, 498, 499 ; is Eternal 
Beauty, Truth and Goodness, 510 ; 
how He is Three in One, 505-521 ; 
Three Persons in, 505, 521 ; only one, 
509 ; how He lives, 510-521 ; brings 
forth an Eternal idea, 511 ; genera- 
tion in, 512-521 ; His internal acts, 
513-521. 

Good, what is the eternal, 510, 514. 

Goose, how Adam named the, 872. 

Granite, crystallized rocks, 263; no 
remains of life in, 296. 

Grass, most valuable plant, 357. 

Gravitation, origin of, 127, 151, 277; 
discovery of, 244 : laws of, 251 ; we 
are subject to, 251 ; a mystery, 251. 

Great Bear, 27. 

Greek idea of matter, 248. 

Growth of suns, 73, 74, 75 ; man, 415, 
417-437. 

Gulf Stream, influence of, 287. 

Gunpowder, of what made, 340. 



Haeckel, falsified documents, 892 ; a 
summary of his theory, 397. 

Hammer of ear, 467. 

Hayes, Arctic explorer, 304 ; how he 
killed wolves, 804. 

Head, growth of, 432. 

Hearing, nerves of, 433. 

Heart, wonders of, 369 ; beats of, 
870 ; circulation in, 442 ; cells of, 
442 ; beginning of, 443 ; beats rap- 
idly in childhood, 446. 

Heat, origin of, 115, 251 ; normal of 
body, 219 ; of body, cause of, 259 ; 
in chemistry, 260 ; how carried over 
world, 283 ; laws of, 316. 

Heaven, what is, 502. 

Heliometer to measure star move- 
ments, 55. 

Hell, what is, 503 ; God sends no one 
to, 504. 

Hercules, the constellation, 54. 

Herschels, the two, 24, 136 ; Sir John's 



526 



INDEX. 



description of the Milky Way, 28-30. 
Hipparchus' position of stars, 55. 
Holoblast of human egg, 423. 
Holy of holies of temples, 226, 
Holy Spirit, how breathed, 519-521. 
Hurlers, monuments at, 230. 
Hurricanes, causes of, 315. 
Husband, meaning of name, 374. 
Huxley, his incomplete education, 

392, 393. 
Hydrogen in stars, 85 ; in sun, 151, 

159 ; weight of, 259 ; a monad, 

262 ; escapes earth's attraction, 312. 
Hypoblast of human egg. 423. 

I. 

Ice caps, cause of, 140, 142 ; remains 

of, 172, 289 ; three great, 290. 
Ideas, association of, 494, 495. 
Imagination, the, 415, 461. 
Indian Ocean, size of, 280. 
Indosmose, 422. 

Infidels, specimen of, 19, 392, 393, 495. 
Infinite, Universe not, 33, 39, 40. 
Inhabitants ? have the stars, 208-222 ; 

has the moon ? 182-207 ; has Mars ; 

164-174; ditto, Venus? 175; ditto 

Mercury ? 178 ; ditto, Saturn ? 179 ; 

none in Milky Way, 209. 
Insects, species of, 404, 406. 
Instincts, meaning of word, 355; of 

plants, 355-366. 
Instincts of plants, 852-366 ; evolution 

on, 408; of animals, 345, 367-377; 

Creator's wisdom, 877. 
Intestine, structure of, 454 ; the 

smaller, 455. 
Iris of eye, 475 ; animal eyes, 475, 

human eye, 475. 
Iron in man, 345. 
Islands, how they got plants, 363. 
Isothermal lines, 288. 



Japan current, influence of, 288. 
Jerusalem, meaning of word, 494. 
Jesus, meaning of name, 494. 
Joachim, the meaning of word, 314. 
Jupiter, red hot, 112, 179 ; origin of, 
116, 125, 129 ; climate of, 178. 

K. 

Kelp forest, of the Pacific, 380-888. 
Kepler, born, 242; his laws, 243. 



Labyrinth of ear, 467, 468, 470. 
Lakes of desert, drying up, 302. 
Lamps, fish with, 388, 389, 390. 
Land, why small compared to oceans, 

182. 
Lavoisier renews theory of atoms, 250. 
Lenses of quartz, 334 ; eye, 476, 477 ; 

difficulties of making, 474. 
Levels, six in human head, 371. 
Levers in human body, 440. 
Life, origin of, 234 ; what is, 333-351 



355 ; animal, 334, etc. ; nature of, 
335 ; what ancients thought, 896 ; 
after death, 38 ; origin of, 212, 334; 
conditions required for, 215, etc. ; 
none on little moons and asteroids, 
220 ; temperature hostile to, 316 ; 
earth in right place for, 318 ; won- 
ders of, 333, 351. 

Light, the velocity of, 26, 32, 49, 266 ; 
origin of, 114 ; time of, from Milky 
Way, 26 ; theory of, 265 ; across the 
universe, 27, 31, 49 : a ride on a 
beam of, 61-65 ; colors all things, 
88, 266 ; length of waves of, 266 ; 
why it passes through glass, etc., 
269 ; before the sun, 294 ; of glory 
with the, we will see God, 460 ; pass- 
ing into eye. 474. 

Limbs of child, beginning of, 427, 

Link, " the missing", 398, 399. 

Love, mutual Love of Father and of 
Son must be a Person— the Holy 
Spirit, 519 ; of husband and wife, 
519 ; what is love ? 518. 

Lymph, nature of, 44a 

Lymphatic system, 449. 

M. 

Magellanic clouds, 101, 104, 105. 

Magnitude of stars, 32 ; number of 
stars in each, 70. 

Malaria, cause of, 406. 

Males, why large, 373. 

Man, why he was made ; meaning of 
the word, 416 ; why the Son made 
man, 506 ; a reasoning animal, 488 ; 
most perfect animal, 216-218 ; 
master of this world, 298, 299 ; what 
he would weigh on suns, 317 ; 
belongs to the mammalia, 374 ; his 
four stories, 400, 401 ; twelve pow- 
ers of soul, 415 ; why God made 
man, 416 ; wonders of, 417. 

Mankind, not developed by evolution, 
395 ; members of to-day, 418. 

Manu, Oriental name of Noe, 295. 

Marriage, 373 ; blessings on, 374 ; 
image of among animals, 376. 

Mars, origin of, 116, 125, 129 ; life on. 
164-176 ; its water and air, 164, 166 ; 
age of, 165 ; difficulties of observing, 
167 ; seasons of, 165 ; polar snows, 
of, 165, 173 ; canals of, 166, 168, 
170, 171 ; temperature of, 166 ; why 
it is red, 167 ; the surface of, 168, 
169, 170 : names of region son, 170 ; 
spots on, 172 ; a man on, 174. 

Matter, what is it made of, 248-251 ; 
and form, 248, 249, etc. ; same 
throughout universe, 273 ; cannot 
produce life, 233-239, 

May day, origin of, 230. 

Measurements, how obtained, 145. 

Medical studies, defect of, 449. 

Membranes, of human egg, 423, 427. 

Memphis, ruins of, 224. 

Men, how many in world, 332 

Mercury origin of. 116, 125, 130 ; 
and climate of, 178. 



INDEX. 



527 



Mesoblast, of human egg, 433. 

'Mesopotamia, meaning of, 300. 

Metals, what composed of, 248-251 ; 
how they unite, 262, 336. 

Meteorites, 79-100 ; origin of, 126 ; col- 
lections of, 95, materials, 95. 

Mexico City, founded, 302. 

Milky Way, description of, 24-48 ; how 
composed, 108 ; seen through tele- 
scope, 37, 38, 39 ; shape of, 28 ; Sir J. 
Herschel on, 28-30 ; foundation of 
universe, 30 ; proportions of suns in, 
30 ; distance to, 52 ; light of, from 
400 to 1800 years, 55. 

Million, the meaning of, 51, 52. 

Mind, origin of name, 416 ; the human, 
415 ; how it works, 489 ; uses no or- 
gan, 490 ; how it gets truth, 492, 495 ; 
grasps the infinite, 496 ; brings forth 
spiritual children, 571. 

Minerals do not live, 333-351 ; how 
they unite, 256-264. 

Mira, "the Wonderful" sun, 81. 

Mississippi, why runs up hill, 379 ; 
meaning of name, 303. 

Moon, origin of, 119, 120, 131, 132, 182, 
187, 189 ; rotation of, 191 ; once wor- 
shiped, 182 ; excitement, when seen 
by telescope, 183 ; diameter, weight, 
surface, 183, 184; density of, 185; 
center of gravity of, 185, 193 ; volca- 
noes on, 189 ; fiery formations ef 
surface, 190; cones on moon, 190; 
seen through a great telescope, 191, 
192,204 ; the depressions caused, 192 ; 
names of regions of, 195, 204 ; awful 
stillness of, 196 ; mountains of, 197 ; 
plains of, 197 ; why it cracked, 201 ; 
not inhabited, 204 ; serves sailors, 
205 ; influence on health, 205 ; the 
work it does for us, 206 ; has no gases 
or fluids, 220. 

Mosquitoes cause disease, 406. 

Mountain, ranges of earth, origin of, 
189, 198 ; of moon, 193, 198, 199 ; how 
formed, 292, 295 ; whv formed, 300. 

Movement, origin of, 119, 120, 125. 

Multiple suns, 210. 

Muscles, 440, 441. 

Museum, on ocean bottom, 880-388. 

Music, what is, 467. 

Musical instrument, in ear, 470, 471, 

N. 

Nebulae, 34, 36, 38, 40 ; number of 100, 
107, 108. 109 ; classes of, 100 ; forming 
suns, 101 ; composition of, 101, 105, 
108 ; one most astonishing, 116. 

Nebular theory, 97. 

Neptune, origin of, 116 ; heat of, 124 ; 
origin of heat of, 124, 125, 129. 

Nerves, two sets of. 431, 433. 434. 

Newton, Sir Isaac, born, 244 ; his dis- 
coveries, 245-247. 

Newton, mountain on moon, 199. 

Nile waters, rise of, 226. 

Nitrogen, proportion in air, 258 ; 
food of plants, 247. 

North Star, distance of, 58. 



Northern crown, constellation of, 135. 
Nose, organ of, small, 464 ; structure 

of, 465. 
Nostrils, 465. 
Nucleus, 418, 420. 



Ocean bottoms, 187 ; air, a great, 
100 miles high, 311 ; beauties of 
life in, 381-388 ; vegetation of, 382- 
388. 

Oceans, why so large, 182 ; average 
depth of, 182 ; influence on climate, 
183 ; bottoms, of what formed, 291, 



Organisms, wonders of, 333-351 ; three 

powers of, 341. 
Orion, 27, 105, 136 ; brightest star, 70 ; 

V. Puppis' density and velocity, 81 ; 

diameter, etc., 81. 
Ovaries, functions of, 875. 
Oxygen, proportion in air, 258 ; 

weight of, 259 ; uniting with metals, 

292 ; a dyad, 262. 
Ozone, composition of, 258. 



P. 



Pacific, moon torn out of, 186-188 ; 
extent of, 280 ; filled with fish, 381- 
388. 

Pantheism, origin of, 223 ; revolution, 
393 ; modern advocates of, 397. 

Paper first made of insects, 371. 

Papillae on tongue, 462. 

Parabolic curves, suns follow, 84, 42, 
43, 138, 140. 

Parallax of stars, 54. 

Pendulum of clock, origin of, 238. 

Peptic glands in stomach, 453. 

Person, what is a, 507, 514 ; why God 
is a, 508 

Persons in God, the Three, 511, 521. 

Pharaoh, meaning of name, 416. 

Phonograph, 471. 

Photosphere of sun, 156. 

Physicians, mistakes of, 403. 

Pico, mountain on moon, 198. 

Pillars of Hercules, origin of name, 
223. 

Pipes in nature, 353, 368. 

Pisa, Galileo, at, 237. 

Placenta, 428. 

Plains, three great, 300. 

Planets, how made, 69, 125, 127, 344 ; 
numbers of, 119, 150, 364 ; proportion 
of their distances, 130 ; no other 
sun has planets, 210, 211. 

Plants differ from minerals, 240, 835- 
340 ; of what made, 337 ; of geolo- 
gical epochs, 307, 308, products of, 
343, 344 ; works in, 351 ; instincts of, 
352-356 ; generation of, 855. 

Plants of different continents, 291. 

Pleiades, 27, 108. 225 ; composed of, 
2000 stars, 82, 85 ; served as a clock, 
230. 

Poles of earth, why inclined, 309, 310. 



*iii». 



528 



INDEX. 



Pollen of plants, 355. 

Polonium discovered, 255. 

Polyrus of stomach, 452. 

Pope not involved in Galileo's case, 

241, 242. 
Priests first scientists, 223. 
Professors, half educated, 485, 487. 
Prospect, finest in America, 304. 
Proteids, 341-345. 
Protoplasm, nature of, 834, 341, 345 ; 

wonders of, 342 ; basis of, 344. 
Ptolemy, 231 ; mountain on moon, 200. 
Pump, most perfect, 369 : a perfect 

living, 387. 
Pyramids, why built that way, 284; 

of Cheops, 224, 225. 

Q- 

Quartz, crystallized silica, 263. 

R. 

Race or species, what is, 508. 
Radium, discovery of, 252; how it 

acts, 253 ; its three rays, 254. 
Rainbow, its hidden story, 270. 
Rains caused by dust, 315, 316, 325 ; 

fall more on land, 327 ; fall more on 

west sides of mountains, 327. 
Rays, Roentgen, Hertzian, Ultra, 51. 
Reason, end of, 853 ; how we, 487, 493, 

497 ; how quickly it acts, 490. 
Regel, its size, 60, 70; its light and 

heat, brightness of, 158 ; its position, 

136. 
Rest, reason for, 369. 
Retina of eye, 267 ; structure of, 

479-488 ; its ten layers, 479-483 ; its 

powers, 482. 
Ring, the mighty, of creation, 24-48. 
Rivers, the four great, of North 

America, 303; underground, 326; 

why they get larger, 329. 
41 Roche limit ", the, 96, 103, 127. 
Roentgen rays, 51. 
Rotifer, 440. 



S. 



Sacramento, origin of word, 814. 

Salt, required for some animals, 344. 

Sap of plants, 357. 

Sapphire, crystallized alumina, 263. 

Satellites, number of, 119 ; origin of, 
127, 128. 

Saturn, origin of name, 179 ; distance 
from sun, 179 ; mass of, 179 ; red- 
hot, 112, 114, 179 ; origin of, 116, 125, 
126; rings of, 180; its ten moons, 
181. 

Science, the beginnings of, 223 ; and 
religion, 240 ; mistakes of, 346, 353, 
395, 400, 402. 

Season, a summer of 25,000 years, 139 ; 
winter of great cold, 140. 

Seasons, the causes of, 212, 219, 310. 

Seeds, how distributed, 358-866 ; some 
fly, 359, 361 ; some swim, 360, 362. 

Sense, man's inner, 415. 



Senses, the five, 415, 458-484 ; grasps 
appearances of matter, 458 ; the in- 
formation they give, 460. 

Sequoias of geological epochs, 307, 

Sewer system in man, 450. 

Ship, a, wrecked on ocean bottom, 390. 

Shrimps of the Pacific, 385. 

Sierra Nevada mountains, 314. 

Sirius, 27, 136, 231 ; of what composed, 
85 ; distance of, 58 ; origin of name, 
106 ; diameter of, 59 ; weight of 
a man on, 317 ; brightness of, 
70. 

Skin pores, 215 ; growth of, 435, 436. 

Sky, why blue, 196, 830. 

Sleep, necessity of, 213, 214. 

Sleeping sickness, cause of, 406. 

Smell, sense of, 464 ; how we, 465, 466 ; 
of animals, 466. 

" Snakes," why men see, 216. 

Soda. 259. 

Sodium discovered, 259. 

Soils, how formed, 292. 

Solar system, position of, 33, 35 ; how 
it travels, 54 ; sweeps round Arc- 
turus, 138 ; how it was made, 111- 
132 ; formation of sun and planets, 
125-132 ; its movement in space, 133- 
143 : velocity of movement, 134, 139, 
140 ; where we are going, 134, 138 ; 
the path it follows. 138. 

Southern Cross, 27, 102. 

Soul of man, twelve powers, of, 415 ; 
what it does, 446; where in body, 
346. 

Spectroscope, origin of, 267-273 ; 
theory of, 270; its wonders, 271-273. 

Spencer on Nebulae, 40; his little 
learning, 392, 893. 

Spermatozoon of animals, 355 ; man, 
421. 

Spine, wonders of, 371. 

Spirals of nebulae and stars, 108, 110 ; 
origin of, 103. 

Spirit, the Holy, moved matter, 113, 
128, 356. 

Spots on Mars, 172 ; on sun, 152, 157- 
163. 

Spring of 18,000 years, 141. 

Springs, cause of. 228. 

Stars, how counted, 33 ; from 500 to 
1000 millions, 34, 47, 49; a double 
drift of stars, 43, 44 ; why so many, 
49-51 ; heat they send to earth, 50 ; 
how they measure distances of, 54, 

57 ; double and triple and multiple, 
66-69 ; how their passage is re- 
corded, 16, 17; distance of nearest, 

58 ; why so far away, 59 ; rapidity 
of movement of, 55 ; shapes of, 6o, 
69 ; heat of, 86 ; different ages of, 
88 ; different colors of, 89 ; have no 
planets, 208. 

Stirrup of ear, 467. 
Stomach, construction of, 452-454. 
Stone age, origin of, 409, 410. 
Stonehenge, monuments of, 229. 
Storm, a thunder forming, 337. 
Struggle for existence, 407. 



INDEX. 



529 



Substance and appearance, 459, 460. 

Sulphur vapor, weight of, 259 ; in 
birds, 344. 

Summer, longest, hottest, 141. 

Sun, origin of the, 130 ; name, 144 ; 
his distance from center of uni- 
verse, 36 ; age of, 297, 298 ; first 
measured distance of, 53 ; how his 
heat and light are sustained, 94, 
154, 155 ; materials of, 95, 155 : 
worshipped, 144 ; distance of, how 
measured, 147, 148 ; diameter of, 
148, 150 ; light and heat of, 149, 150 ; 
spots on the, 157, 159, 100 ; his sur- 
face photographed, 159 ; influence 
on weather, 159, 161, 162 ; periods of 
slid spots, 161 ; if of other size, mass 
or heat, 218. 

Suns, the number of, 26, 34, 47, 49 ; 
how made, 37 ; mathematical move- 
ments of, 42 ; of different shapes, 

75 ; changing suns of five classes, 

76 : of different colors, 77. 



Tablet relating to Creation, 114. 

Taste, sense of, 462-464. 

Teeth, object of, 450 ; of what com- 
posed, 451. 

Telescope, how made, 15 ; invented by 
Galileo, 241. 

Temple, man a, 500, 502. 

Temples, why built that way, 226, 
227 ; were telescopes, 227 ; in Mexico 
and Peru, 227. 

Temporary stars, 79. 

Theories of science change, 394 ; 
which blind meu, 411. 

Thought in God, 514 ; man, 487-521. 

Time, how seat over the country, 18, 
275 ; U, S. is divided according to, 
277 ; what is. 278. 

Tissues, living, 335. 

Tongue, how made, 462 ; where taste 
is on, 463 ; object of, 463. 

Touch, the sense of, 461. 

Transit, instrument, how worked, 16. 

Tree, how it grows, 257. 

Trinity, Adam's family, a. 507. 

Trout, brook, king of fish, 3S0 ; savag- 
ery of, 381. 

Truth, what is, eternal, 510 ; of God, 
what is, 495. 

Truths, two kinds of, 491, 492. 

Tunnels, how built under water, 322, 
371. 

Twinkling of stars, cause of, 31. 

Tyndal John, his little learning, 
393. 

Typhoons, cause of, 215. 

Tycho Brahe, born, 243. 

Tycho, mountain on the moon, 201. 



U. 



Unions, chemical ruled by figures, 258, 

259. 
United States, description of, 301, 
Unknown, of Spencer the, 393. 



Universe, the, 24-48 ; unity of mate- 
rials of, 40, 41, 147 ; limits of, 41 ; will 
it last forever, 44, 45 ; was it from 
eternity, 46 ; man a little, 416. 

Up or down, none in the sky, 79. 

Uranus, origin of, 116, 125 ; heat of 
124. 



V. 



Valve, in throat, 370. 

Valve, safety, in organisms, 368, 370 ; 

the in human body, 447. 
Variable stars, 79. 
Veins, how made, 448 ; development 

of, 428 ; circulation of blood in, 445. 
Venus, origin of, 116, 125, 130 ; mass 

of, 177 ; difficulties of observing, 175, 

176; transit of, 116; rotation of, 

176 ; changes of climate of, 177, 471. 
Vestibule of ear, 469. 
Vesuvius, 153. 
Vibrations, how brought to inner ear, 

467, 468. 
Viga, 27, 136, heat it sends to earth, 

50 ; size of, 137. 
Villi of intestine, structure of, 455, 

456. 
Virgin, constellation of, 135. 
Volcanic forces, the greatest, 154. 
Volumes of gases, how they unite, 

260. 

W. 

Warm, why the body is, 457. 

Water, origin of, 124, 291 ; composi- 
tion of, 259, 262 ; influence on cli- 
mate, 283 ; required for life, 264 ; 
properties of, 213, 286 ; how carried 
by air, 319. 

Watts' law of chemistry, 260. 

Weeds, their use, 356. 

Weight, why we have, 257; acts ac- 
cording to figures, 259. 

Wheel around the sky, 25. 

Whitecap waves, reasons for, 322. 

Whirlwinds of fire, 152. 

Will, the human, 415. 

Window of the Pacific, 380-388. 

Windpipe, how built, 452. 

Winds, why from the West, 325 ; how 
they carry water, 214. 

Winter, the, of great cold, 139-141 ; 
why getting milder, 290. 

Woman, origin of word, 377, 506; how 
the first was made, 375, 876 ; why 
made out of man, 506. 

Womb, why within, 422. 

Wonder-worker, in ocean deeps, 378. 

Woodchuck, a tame, 373. 

Word, in the mind, 513-521 ; God's, 
514-521. 

Words, what they stand for, 494. 

World, how prepared for life, 277-308. 

Worlds now being made, 104. 

X-rays, 254, 350. 

Yellow fever, cause of, 406. 
Zodiacal light, 157. 



JAN 231910 



One copy del. to Cat. Div. 



MN 25 mO 



